Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor
used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written/
developed by: Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product
names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All
persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy
themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any
applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any
risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would create a risk for
harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall
be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment, and those so
responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or
mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely
ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the
manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB
be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the
application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on
the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use
within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is
the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN
60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN
60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the
international standards of the IEC 60255 series and ANSI C37.90.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1
Introduction..........................................................................43
This manual............................................................................................ 43
Intended audience.................................................................................. 43
Product documentation...........................................................................44
Product documentation set................................................................44
Document revision history................................................................. 45
Related documents............................................................................46
Document symbols and conventions...................................................... 46
Symbols.............................................................................................46
Document conventions...................................................................... 47
IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping..................................................48
Section 2
Available functions.............................................................. 57
Main protection functions........................................................................57
Back-up protection functions.................................................................. 58
Control and monitoring functions............................................................ 59
Communication.......................................................................................63
Basic IED functions.................................................................................65
Section 3
Analog inputs.......................................................................67
Introduction............................................................................................. 67
Function block.........................................................................................67
Signals.................................................................................................... 68
Settings...................................................................................................70
Monitored data........................................................................................78
Operation principle..................................................................................79
Technical data........................................................................................ 80
Section 4
Section 5
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Section 6
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 7
Impedance protection........................................................197
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS (21).. 197
Identification.................................................................................... 197
Functionality.................................................................................... 197
Function block................................................................................. 198
Signals.............................................................................................198
Settings............................................................................................199
Operation principle.......................................................................... 201
Full scheme measurement......................................................... 201
Impedance characteristic............................................................201
Basic operation characteristics...................................................202
Theory of operation.................................................................... 205
Simplified logic diagrams............................................................215
Technical data................................................................................. 219
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR
(21D).....................................................................................................219
Identification.................................................................................... 219
Functionality.................................................................................... 220
Function block................................................................................. 220
Signals.............................................................................................220
Settings............................................................................................221
Monitored data.................................................................................222
Operation principle.......................................................................... 223
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
ZDMRDIR (21D)......................................................................... 223
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate
settings ZMRPDIS (21), ZMRAPDIS (21) and ZDRDIR (21D)............. 225
Identification.................................................................................... 226
Functionality.................................................................................... 226
Function block................................................................................. 227
Signals.............................................................................................227
Settings............................................................................................229
Operation principle.......................................................................... 232
Full scheme measurement......................................................... 232
Impedance characteristic............................................................232
Minimum operating current.........................................................236
Measuring principles...................................................................236
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics 239
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Table of contents
Signals.............................................................................................312
Settings............................................................................................314
Monitored data.................................................................................322
Operation principle.......................................................................... 323
Filtering.......................................................................................323
Distance measuring zones......................................................... 323
Phase-selection element............................................................ 324
Directional element.....................................................................325
Fuse failure.................................................................................326
Power swings............................................................................. 327
Measurement principles............................................................. 327
Load encroachment....................................................................340
Simplified logic schemes............................................................ 341
Measurement..............................................................................346
Technical data................................................................................. 352
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)......................................................352
Identification.................................................................................... 352
Functionality.................................................................................... 352
Function block................................................................................. 354
Signals.............................................................................................354
Settings............................................................................................355
Monitored data.................................................................................356
Operation principle.......................................................................... 356
Technical data................................................................................. 360
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM (78)................................................ 361
Identification.................................................................................... 361
Functionality.................................................................................... 361
Function block................................................................................. 362
Signals.............................................................................................362
Settings............................................................................................363
Monitored data.................................................................................364
Operation principle.......................................................................... 364
Lens characteristic......................................................................367
Detecting an out-of-step condition..............................................369
Maximum slip frequency.............................................................370
Taking care of the circuit breaker .............................................. 371
Design........................................................................................ 373
Technical data................................................................................. 374
Loss of excitation LEXPDIS(40)........................................................... 374
Identification.................................................................................... 375
6
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Functionality.................................................................................... 375
Function block................................................................................. 375
Signals.............................................................................................376
Settings............................................................................................376
Monitored data.................................................................................377
Operation principle.......................................................................... 378
Technical data................................................................................. 382
Sensitive rotor earth fault protection, injection based ROTIPHIZ (64R)383
Identification.................................................................................... 383
Functionality.................................................................................... 383
Description of input signals..............................................................383
Description of output signals........................................................... 384
Function block................................................................................. 386
Signals.............................................................................................386
Settings............................................................................................387
Monitored data.................................................................................388
Operation principle.......................................................................... 389
The injection unit REX060.......................................................... 390
Rotor Earth Fault Protection function......................................... 391
General measurement of ground fault impedance..................... 392
Simplified logic diagram..............................................................394
Technical data................................................................................. 396
100% stator earth fault protection, injection based STTIPHIZ (64S).... 397
Identification.................................................................................... 397
Functionality.................................................................................... 397
Description of input signals..............................................................398
Description of output signals........................................................... 398
Function block................................................................................. 400
Signals.............................................................................................401
Settings............................................................................................401
Monitored data.................................................................................403
Operation principle.......................................................................... 403
Configuration principle................................................................403
Generator system grounding methods....................................... 406
100% Stator earth fault protection function................................ 411
General measurement of ground fault impedance..................... 415
Measuring reference impedance................................................ 417
Simplified logic diagram..............................................................421
Technical data................................................................................. 422
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Section 8
Current protection..............................................................439
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC (50).................. 439
Identification.................................................................................... 439
Functionality.................................................................................... 439
Function block................................................................................. 439
Signals.............................................................................................439
Settings............................................................................................440
Monitored data.................................................................................441
Operation principle.......................................................................... 441
Technical data................................................................................. 442
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC(51/67).................. 442
Identification.................................................................................... 442
Functionality.................................................................................... 442
Function block................................................................................. 443
Signals.............................................................................................444
Settings............................................................................................446
Monitored data.................................................................................452
Operation principle.......................................................................... 452
Technical data................................................................................. 460
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N)............. 461
Identification.................................................................................... 461
Functionality.................................................................................... 461
Function block................................................................................. 461
Signals.............................................................................................462
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Settings............................................................................................462
Monitored data.................................................................................462
Operation principle.......................................................................... 463
Technical data................................................................................. 463
Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero sequence or
negative sequence directionality) EF4PTOC (51N/67N)...................... 464
Identification.................................................................................... 464
Functionality.................................................................................... 464
Function block................................................................................. 465
Signals.............................................................................................465
Settings............................................................................................466
Monitored data.................................................................................474
Operation principle.......................................................................... 474
Operating quantity within the function........................................ 475
Internal polarizing....................................................................... 476
External polarizing for ground-fault function............................... 478
Directional detection for ground fault function............................ 478
Base quantities within the protection.......................................... 478
Internal ground-fault protection structure....................................479
Four residual overcurrent steps..................................................479
Directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison function................................................................... 480
Second harmonic blocking element............................................483
Switch on to fault feature............................................................ 485
Technical data................................................................................. 487
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection NS4PTOC (46I2)..................................................................488
Identification.................................................................................... 488
Functionality.................................................................................... 489
Function block................................................................................. 489
Signals.............................................................................................490
Settings............................................................................................491
Monitored data.................................................................................496
Operation principle.......................................................................... 496
Operating quantity within the function........................................ 496
Internal polarizing facility of the function.....................................497
External polarizing for negative sequence function.................... 498
Internal negative sequence protection structure.........................498
Four negative sequence overcurrent stages.............................. 498
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
11
Table of contents
Identification.................................................................................... 562
Functionality .............................................................................. 562
Function block............................................................................ 563
Signals........................................................................................563
Settings.......................................................................................563
Monitored data............................................................................564
Operation principle..................................................................... 564
Technical data............................................................................ 565
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC (51V)...........566
Identification.................................................................................... 566
Functionality.................................................................................... 566
Function block................................................................................. 567
Signals.............................................................................................567
Settings............................................................................................568
Monitored data.................................................................................569
Operation principle.......................................................................... 569
Measured quantities................................................................... 569
Base quantities........................................................................... 569
Overcurrent protection................................................................569
Logic diagram............................................................................. 571
Undervoltage protection............................................................. 572
Technical data................................................................................. 572
Generator stator overload protection, GSPTTR (49S)..........................573
Identification.................................................................................... 573
Functionality.................................................................................... 574
Function block................................................................................. 574
Signals.............................................................................................574
Settings............................................................................................575
Monitored data.................................................................................576
Operation principle.......................................................................... 576
Technical data................................................................................. 583
Generator rotor overload protection, GRPTTR (49R)...........................583
Identification.................................................................................... 583
Functionality.................................................................................... 583
Function block................................................................................. 584
Signals.............................................................................................584
Settings............................................................................................585
Monitored data.................................................................................586
Operation principle.......................................................................... 586
Technical data................................................................................. 596
12
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Section 9
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
13
Table of contents
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
15
Table of contents
Signals.............................................................................................682
Settings............................................................................................683
Monitored data.................................................................................683
Operation principle.......................................................................... 683
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Settings............................................................................................730
Operation principle.......................................................................... 731
Technical data................................................................................. 732
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC...................................................... 732
Identification.................................................................................... 733
Functionality.................................................................................... 733
Function block................................................................................. 733
Signals.............................................................................................734
Settings............................................................................................735
Monitored data.................................................................................736
Operation principle.......................................................................... 736
Zero and negative sequence detection...................................... 736
Delta current and delta voltage detection................................... 738
Dead line detection.....................................................................741
Main logic................................................................................... 742
Technical data................................................................................. 745
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC (60).................................................745
Identification.................................................................................... 745
Functionality.................................................................................... 745
Function block................................................................................. 746
Signals.............................................................................................746
Settings............................................................................................747
Monitored data.................................................................................748
Operation principle.......................................................................... 748
Technical data................................................................................. 749
Section 14 Control...............................................................................751
Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN (25)..................................................................................... 751
Identification.................................................................................... 751
Functionality.................................................................................... 751
Function block................................................................................. 752
Signals.............................................................................................752
Settings............................................................................................755
Monitored data.................................................................................757
Operation principle.......................................................................... 758
Basic functionality.......................................................................758
Logic diagrams........................................................................... 758
Technical data................................................................................. 770
Interlocking (3)...................................................................................... 771
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
17
Table of contents
Functionality.................................................................................... 771
Operation principle.......................................................................... 771
Logical node for interlocking SCILO (3)...........................................774
Identification............................................................................... 774
Functionality............................................................................... 774
Function block............................................................................ 775
Signals........................................................................................775
Logic diagram............................................................................. 775
Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3)....................... 776
Identification............................................................................... 776
Functionality............................................................................... 776
Function block............................................................................ 777
Logic diagram............................................................................. 777
Signals........................................................................................777
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)...........................778
Identification............................................................................... 778
Functionality............................................................................... 778
Function block............................................................................ 779
Logic diagram............................................................................. 780
Signals........................................................................................781
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3).................. 783
Identification............................................................................... 783
Functionality............................................................................... 783
Function block............................................................................ 784
Logic diagram............................................................................. 784
Signals........................................................................................785
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3).................................. 786
Identification............................................................................... 786
Functionality............................................................................... 786
Function block............................................................................ 787
Logic diagram............................................................................. 788
Signals........................................................................................790
Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)........................ 793
Identification............................................................................... 793
Functionality............................................................................... 793
Function blocks...........................................................................795
Logic diagrams........................................................................... 797
Signals........................................................................................802
Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3)............................................. 806
Identification............................................................................... 807
18
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Functionality............................................................................... 807
Logic diagrams........................................................................... 808
Function block............................................................................ 812
Signals........................................................................................813
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)............................................ 816
Identification............................................................................... 817
Functionality............................................................................... 817
Function block............................................................................ 818
Logic diagram............................................................................. 819
Signals........................................................................................824
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)..............................827
Identification............................................................................... 827
Functionality............................................................................... 827
Function block............................................................................ 828
Logic diagram............................................................................. 829
Signals........................................................................................831
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.......................................................833
Identification............................................................................... 833
Functionality............................................................................... 833
Function block............................................................................ 833
Logic diagram............................................................................. 833
Signals........................................................................................834
Apparatus control APC......................................................................... 834
Functionality.................................................................................... 834
Operation principle.......................................................................... 835
Error handling.................................................................................. 836
Bay control QCBAY......................................................................... 839
Functionality............................................................................... 839
Function block............................................................................ 839
Signals........................................................................................839
Settings.......................................................................................840
Operation principle..................................................................... 840
Local/Remote switch LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL............................ 842
Function block............................................................................ 842
Signals........................................................................................843
Settings.......................................................................................844
Operation principle..................................................................... 844
Switch controller SCSWI..................................................................846
Functionality .............................................................................. 846
Function block............................................................................ 846
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
19
Table of contents
Signals........................................................................................846
Settings.......................................................................................848
Operation principle..................................................................... 848
Circuit breaker SXCBR....................................................................855
Functionality .............................................................................. 855
Function block............................................................................ 856
Signals........................................................................................856
Settings.......................................................................................857
Operation principle..................................................................... 857
Circuit switch SXSWI....................................................................... 862
Functionality .............................................................................. 862
Function block............................................................................ 863
Signals........................................................................................863
Settings.......................................................................................864
Operation principle..................................................................... 864
Bay reserve QCRSV........................................................................869
Functionality............................................................................... 869
Function block............................................................................ 869
Signals........................................................................................870
Settings.......................................................................................871
Operation principle..................................................................... 871
Reservation input RESIN.................................................................873
Functionality............................................................................... 873
Function block............................................................................ 874
Signals........................................................................................874
Settings.......................................................................................875
Operation principle..................................................................... 875
Voltage control......................................................................................877
Identification.................................................................................... 877
Functionality.................................................................................... 877
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC
(84) and TCLYLTC (84)...................................................................878
Operation principle..................................................................... 878
Function block................................................................................. 882
Signals.............................................................................................883
Settings............................................................................................887
Monitored data.................................................................................888
Operation principle.......................................................................... 889
Technical data................................................................................. 889
20
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
21
Table of contents
Functionality.................................................................................... 920
Function block................................................................................. 921
Signals.............................................................................................921
Settings............................................................................................922
Operation principle.......................................................................... 922
Section 15 Logic..................................................................................923
Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94).............................................................. 923
Identification.................................................................................... 923
Functionality.................................................................................... 923
Function block................................................................................. 924
Signals.............................................................................................924
Settings............................................................................................925
Operation principle.......................................................................... 925
Logic diagram............................................................................. 927
Technical data................................................................................. 931
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC..................................................................932
Identification.................................................................................... 932
Functionality.................................................................................... 932
Function block................................................................................. 933
Signals.............................................................................................933
Settings............................................................................................935
Operation principle.......................................................................... 935
Technical data................................................................................. 936
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH..........................................................937
Identification.................................................................................... 937
Functionality.................................................................................... 937
Function block................................................................................. 937
Signals.............................................................................................937
Settings............................................................................................938
Operation principle.......................................................................... 938
Technical data................................................................................. 939
Logic for group warning WRNCALH..................................................... 939
Identification.................................................................................... 939
Functionality.................................................................................... 939
Function block................................................................................. 940
Signals.............................................................................................940
Settings............................................................................................941
Operation principle.......................................................................... 941
Technical data................................................................................. 941
22
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
23
Table of contents
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
25
Table of contents
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Signals.............................................................................................993
Settings............................................................................................993
Operation principle.......................................................................... 993
Operation accuracy.................................................................... 995
Memory storage..........................................................................995
Technical data................................................................................. 995
Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP............................................. 996
Identification.................................................................................... 996
Functionality.................................................................................... 996
Function block................................................................................. 996
Signals.............................................................................................996
Settings............................................................................................997
Operation principle.......................................................................... 997
Technical data................................................................................. 998
Comparator for real inputs - REALCOMP.............................................998
Identification.................................................................................... 998
Functionality.................................................................................... 998
Function block................................................................................. 999
Signals.............................................................................................999
Settings............................................................................................999
Operation principle........................................................................ 1000
Technical data............................................................................... 1001
Section 16 Monitoring........................................................................1003
Measurements.................................................................................... 1003
Identification.................................................................................. 1003
Functionality.................................................................................. 1004
Function block............................................................................... 1005
Signals...........................................................................................1007
Settings..........................................................................................1010
Monitored data...............................................................................1023
Operation principle........................................................................ 1025
Measurement supervision........................................................ 1025
Measurements CVMMXN.........................................................1030
Phase current measurement CMMXU......................................1035
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU.................................................................. 1036
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI1036
Technical data............................................................................... 1036
Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63)................................................ 1038
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
27
Table of contents
Identification.................................................................................. 1038
Functionality.................................................................................. 1039
Function block............................................................................... 1039
Signals...........................................................................................1039
Settings..........................................................................................1040
Operation principle........................................................................ 1040
Technical data............................................................................... 1041
Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71).............................................. 1042
Identification.................................................................................. 1042
Functionality.................................................................................. 1042
Function block............................................................................... 1042
Signals...........................................................................................1042
Settings..........................................................................................1043
Operation principle........................................................................ 1043
Technical data............................................................................... 1044
Breaker monitoring SSCBR................................................................ 1045
Identification.................................................................................. 1045
Functionality.................................................................................. 1045
Function block............................................................................... 1046
Signals...........................................................................................1046
Settings..........................................................................................1047
Monitored data...............................................................................1049
Operation principle........................................................................ 1049
Circuit breaker contact travel time............................................ 1051
Circuit breaker status................................................................1053
Remaining life of circuit breaker............................................... 1053
Accumulated energy.................................................................1054
Circuit breaker operation cycles............................................... 1056
Circuit breaker operation monitoring........................................ 1057
Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring..................................1058
Circuit breaker gas pressure indication.................................... 1058
Technical data............................................................................... 1059
Event function EVENT........................................................................ 1060
Identification.................................................................................. 1060
Functionality.................................................................................. 1060
Function block............................................................................... 1060
Signals...........................................................................................1061
Settings..........................................................................................1062
Operation principle........................................................................ 1064
Disturbance report DRPRDRE........................................................... 1065
28
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Identification.................................................................................. 1065
Functionality.................................................................................. 1066
Function block............................................................................... 1066
Signals...........................................................................................1068
Settings..........................................................................................1070
Monitored data...............................................................................1079
Operation principle........................................................................ 1083
Technical data............................................................................... 1091
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP......................................... 1091
Identification.................................................................................. 1091
Functionality.................................................................................. 1091
Function block............................................................................... 1092
Signals...........................................................................................1092
Settings..........................................................................................1093
Operation principle........................................................................ 1093
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP.................................... 1094
Identification.................................................................................. 1094
Functionality.................................................................................. 1094
Function block............................................................................... 1095
Signals...........................................................................................1095
Operation principle........................................................................ 1095
Limit counter L4UFCNT...................................................................... 1096
Identification.................................................................................. 1096
Identification............................................................................. 1096
Functionality.................................................................................. 1096
Operation principle........................................................................ 1096
Design...................................................................................... 1096
Reporting.................................................................................. 1098
Function block............................................................................... 1098
Signals...........................................................................................1098
Settings..........................................................................................1099
Monitored data...............................................................................1099
Technical data............................................................................... 1100
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC ........................................................ 1100
Identification.................................................................................. 1100
Functionality.................................................................................. 1100
Function block............................................................................... 1101
Signals...........................................................................................1101
Settings..........................................................................................1102
Operation principle........................................................................ 1102
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
29
Table of contents
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
31
Table of contents
Settings.....................................................................................1164
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR..........1165
Functionality............................................................................. 1165
Identification............................................................................. 1165
Function block.......................................................................... 1165
Signals......................................................................................1166
Settings.....................................................................................1166
Function status ground-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF............1166
Functionality............................................................................. 1166
Identification............................................................................. 1166
Function block.......................................................................... 1166
Signals......................................................................................1167
Settings.....................................................................................1167
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT............................................................................... 1167
Functionality............................................................................. 1167
Identification............................................................................. 1167
Function block.......................................................................... 1168
Signals......................................................................................1168
Settings.....................................................................................1169
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED...................................... 1169
Functionality............................................................................. 1169
Identification............................................................................. 1170
Function block.......................................................................... 1170
Signals......................................................................................1170
Settings.....................................................................................1170
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV..................1171
Functionality............................................................................. 1171
Identification............................................................................. 1171
Function block.......................................................................... 1171
Signals......................................................................................1171
Settings.....................................................................................1172
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRDEF1172
Functionality............................................................................. 1172
Identification............................................................................. 1172
Function block.......................................................................... 1172
Signals......................................................................................1173
Settings.....................................................................................1173
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD.................... 1175
Functionality............................................................................. 1175
32
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Identification............................................................................. 1175
Function block.......................................................................... 1175
Signals......................................................................................1175
Settings.....................................................................................1175
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD...................... 1176
Functionality............................................................................. 1176
Identification............................................................................. 1176
Function block.......................................................................... 1176
Signals......................................................................................1176
Settings.....................................................................................1177
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD................................................................................1177
Functionality............................................................................. 1177
Identification............................................................................. 1177
Function block.......................................................................... 1177
Signals......................................................................................1177
Settings.....................................................................................1178
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD 1178
Functionality............................................................................. 1178
Identification............................................................................. 1179
Function block.......................................................................... 1179
Signals......................................................................................1179
Settings.....................................................................................1180
IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD................................................................................1180
Functionality............................................................................. 1180
Identification............................................................................. 1180
Function block.......................................................................... 1181
Signals......................................................................................1181
Settings.....................................................................................1181
Operation principle ....................................................................... 1181
General.....................................................................................1181
Communication ports................................................................1193
Technical data............................................................................... 1193
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV.............................................................................1193
Functionality.................................................................................. 1193
Function block............................................................................... 1194
Signals...........................................................................................1195
Settings..........................................................................................1196
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
33
Table of contents
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
35
Table of contents
Settings..........................................................................................1231
Operation principle ....................................................................... 1232
Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG.......................... 1232
Functionality.................................................................................. 1232
Function block............................................................................... 1232
Signals...........................................................................................1233
Settings..........................................................................................1233
Operation principle........................................................................ 1233
Internal signals......................................................................... 1235
Supervision of analog inputs.................................................... 1237
Technical data............................................................................... 1237
Time synchronization..........................................................................1238
Functionality.................................................................................. 1238
Settings..........................................................................................1238
Operation principle ....................................................................... 1243
General concepts..................................................................... 1243
Real-time clock (RTC) operation.............................................. 1245
Synchronization alternatives.....................................................1246
Technical data............................................................................... 1250
Parameter setting groups................................................................... 1250
Functionality.................................................................................. 1250
Function block............................................................................... 1250
Signals...........................................................................................1251
Settings..........................................................................................1251
Operation principle........................................................................ 1251
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK....................................................... 1253
Functionality.................................................................................. 1253
Function block............................................................................... 1254
Signals...........................................................................................1254
Operation principle ....................................................................... 1254
Test mode functionality TEST.............................................................1255
Functionality.................................................................................. 1255
Function block............................................................................... 1255
Signals...........................................................................................1256
Settings..........................................................................................1256
Operation principle ....................................................................... 1256
IED identifiers..................................................................................... 1257
Functionality.................................................................................. 1257
Settings .........................................................................................1258
Product information.............................................................................1258
36
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Functionality.................................................................................. 1258
Settings .........................................................................................1259
Factory defined settings................................................................ 1259
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI...................................................1260
Functionality.................................................................................. 1260
Function block............................................................................... 1260
Signals...........................................................................................1260
Operation principle........................................................................ 1261
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ..............................................1261
Functionality.................................................................................. 1261
Function block............................................................................... 1262
Signals...........................................................................................1262
Operation principle........................................................................ 1262
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI...................................................... 1262
Functionality.................................................................................. 1263
Function block............................................................................... 1263
Signals...........................................................................................1263
Operation principle........................................................................ 1264
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI..................................................1264
Functionality.................................................................................. 1264
Function block............................................................................... 1264
Signals...........................................................................................1265
Settings..........................................................................................1266
Operation principle ....................................................................... 1268
Frequency values..................................................................... 1269
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM.................................................. 1270
Functionality.................................................................................. 1270
Function block............................................................................... 1270
Signals...........................................................................................1271
Settings..........................................................................................1271
Operation principle ....................................................................... 1272
Global base values GBASVAL........................................................... 1272
Identification.................................................................................. 1272
Functionality.................................................................................. 1272
Settings..........................................................................................1273
Primary system values PRIMVAL.......................................................1273
Identification.................................................................................. 1273
Functionality.................................................................................. 1273
Settings..........................................................................................1273
Denial of service DOS........................................................................ 1274
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
37
Table of contents
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Signals......................................................................................1300
Settings.....................................................................................1301
Monitored data..........................................................................1301
Technical data.......................................................................... 1305
Static binary output module (SOM)............................................... 1306
Introduction...............................................................................1306
Design...................................................................................... 1306
Signals......................................................................................1307
Settings.....................................................................................1308
Monitored data..........................................................................1308
Technical data.......................................................................... 1310
Binary input/output module (IOM)..................................................1311
Introduction...............................................................................1311
Design...................................................................................... 1312
Signals......................................................................................1314
Settings.....................................................................................1315
Monitored data..........................................................................1315
Technical data.......................................................................... 1317
mA input module (MIM)................................................................. 1320
Introduction...............................................................................1320
Design...................................................................................... 1320
Signals......................................................................................1322
Settings.....................................................................................1322
Monitored data..........................................................................1324
Technical data.......................................................................... 1324
Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ............................ 1324
Introduction...............................................................................1324
Design...................................................................................... 1325
Technical data.......................................................................... 1326
Galvanic RS485 communication module.......................................1326
Introduction...............................................................................1326
Design...................................................................................... 1326
Technical data.......................................................................... 1328
Optical ethernet module (OEM).....................................................1328
Introduction...............................................................................1328
Functionality............................................................................. 1328
Design...................................................................................... 1328
Technical data.......................................................................... 1329
Line data communication module (LDCM).................................... 1329
Introduction...............................................................................1329
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
39
Table of contents
Design...................................................................................... 1330
Technical data.......................................................................... 1331
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM).................. 1332
Introduction...............................................................................1332
Design...................................................................................... 1332
Functionality............................................................................. 1335
Technical data.......................................................................... 1335
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)..................................... 1336
Introduction...............................................................................1336
Design...................................................................................... 1336
Monitored data..........................................................................1336
Technical data.......................................................................... 1336
GPS antenna................................................................................. 1337
Introduction...............................................................................1337
Design...................................................................................... 1337
Technical data.......................................................................... 1338
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B................................. 1338
Introduction...............................................................................1338
Design...................................................................................... 1338
Settings.....................................................................................1339
Technical data.......................................................................... 1339
Dimensions......................................................................................... 1341
Case without rear cover.................................................................1341
Case with rear cover......................................................................1343
Flush mounting dimensions...........................................................1345
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions....................................... 1346
Wall mounting dimensions.............................................................1348
External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection.... 1348
External current transformer unit................................................... 1350
Mounting alternatives..........................................................................1350
Flush mounting.............................................................................. 1350
Overview...................................................................................1350
Mounting procedure for flush mounting.................................... 1351
19 panel rack mounting................................................................ 1352
Overview...................................................................................1352
Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting.....................1353
Wall mounting................................................................................1354
Overview...................................................................................1354
Mounting procedure for wall mounting..................................... 1355
How to reach the rear side of the IED...................................... 1355
40
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Section 23 Labels..............................................................................1385
Labels on IED..................................................................................... 1385
Labels on injection equipment............................................................ 1388
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
41
Table of contents
42
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
1.1
This manual
The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks,
logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
1.2
Intended audience
This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel,
who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal
service.
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection
equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs. The
installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in handling
electronic equipment.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
43
Section 1
Introduction
Decommissioning
Deinstalling & disposal
Maintenance
Operation
Commissioning
1.3.1
Engineering
Product documentation
1.3
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual
Commissioning manual
Operation manual
Application manual
Technical manual
Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V4 EN
Figure 1:
The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the
various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions on
how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also
recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection and control functions, LHMI
functions as well as communication engineering for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, DNP3,
LON and SPA.
The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual
provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are organized
in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.
44
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The
manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance
during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external
circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as verifying
settings by secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing an IED in a
substation which is not in service. The chapters are organized in the chronological order
in which the IED should be commissioned. The relevant procedures may be followed also
during the service and maintenance activities.
The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and
setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to
view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.
The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per
function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical
protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating
settings.
The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks,
logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported
by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.
The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to the
IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding communication
protocol manual.
The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber security
when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role based access
control, and product engineering for cyber security related events are described and sorted
by function. The guideline can be used as a technical reference during the engineering
phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
1.3.2
History
December 2015
First release
A/February 2016
Minor updates
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
45
Section 1
Introduction
1.3.3
Related documents
Documents related to REG670
Document numbers
Application manual
Commissioning manual
Product guide
Technical manual
Document numbers
Operation manual
Engineering manual
Installation manual
Accessories guide
1.4
1.4.1
Symbols
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could
result in electrical shock.
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
personal injury.
46
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes and do
not view directly with optical instruments.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project
or how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that
under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in
degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important that the
user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.
1.4.2
Document conventions
Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push
button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use
and
.
HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press
.
Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
47
Section 1
Introduction
Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered
by dashed lines.
1.5
the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the signal
name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be
connected to another function block in the application configuration to achieve
a valid application configuration.
Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting
parameter signals that are only settable via the PST or LHMI.
If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -int
is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues.
Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another
diagram have the suffix -cont.
Dimensions are provided both in inches and mm. If it is not specifically mentioned
then the dimension is in mm.
AEGPVOC
AEGGAPC
AEGPVOC
AGSAL
AGSAL
SECLLN0
AGSAL
ALMCALH
ALMCALH
ALMCALH
ALTIM
ALTIM
ALTMS
ALTMS
ALTRK
ALTRK
BCZSPDIF
BCZSPDIF
BCZSPDIF
BCZTPDIF
BCZTPDIF
BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC
SWSGGIO
BBCSWI
BDCGAPC
BRCPTOC
BRCPTOC
BRCPTOC
BRPTOC
BRPTOC
BRPTOC
BTIGAPC
B16IFCVI
BTIGAPC
BUSPTRC_B1
BUSPTRC
BBSPLLN0
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B2
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B3
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
48
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
BUSPTRC_B4
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B5
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B6
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B7
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B8
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B9
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B10
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B11
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B12
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B13
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B14
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B15
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B16
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B17
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B18
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B19
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B20
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B21
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B22
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B23
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B24
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUTPTRC_B1
BUTPTRC
BBTPLLN0
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B2
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B3
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B4
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B5
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B6
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B7
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B8
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BZISGGIO
BZISGGIO
BZISGAPC
BZITGGIO
BZITGGIO
BZITGAPC
BZNSPDIF_A
BZNSPDIF
BZASGAPC
BZASPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
49
Section 1
Introduction
BZNSPDIF_B
BZNSPDIF
BZBSGAPC
BZBSPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A
BZNTPDIF
BZATGAPC
BZATPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B
BZNTPDIF
BZBTGAPC
BZBTPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
CBPGAPC
CBPLLN0
CBPMMXU
CBPPTRC
HOLPTOV
HPH1PTOV
PH3PTUC
PH3PTOC
RP3PDOP
CBPMMXU
CBPPTRC
HOLPTOV
HPH1PTOV
PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC
CCRPLD
CCPDSC
CCRBRF
CCRBRF
CCRBRF
CCRWRBRF
CCRWRBRF
CCRWRBRF
CCSRBRF
CCSRBRF
CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC
CCSRDIF
CCSSPVC
CMMXU
CMMXU
CMMXU
CMSQI
CMSQI
CMSQI
COUVGAPC
COUVLLN0
COUVPTOV
COUVPTUV
COUVPTOV
COUVPTUV
CVGAPC
GF2LLN0
GF2MMXN
GF2PHAR
GF2PTOV
GF2PTUC
GF2PTUV
GF2PVOC
PH1PTRC
GF2MMXN
GF2PHAR
GF2PTOV
GF2PTUC
GF2PTUV
GF2PVOC
PH1PTRC
CVMMXN
CVMMXN
CVMMXN
D2PTOC
D2LLN0
D2PTOC
PH1PTRC
D2PTOC
PH1PTRC
DPGAPC
DPGGIO
DPGAPC
DRPRDRE
DRPRDRE
DRPRDRE
ECPSCH
ECPSCH
ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH
ECRWPSCH
ECRWPSCH
50
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
EF2PTOC
EF2LLN0
EF2PTRC
EF2RDIR
GEN2PHAR
PH1PTOC
EF2PTRC
EF2RDIR
GEN2PHAR
PH1PTOC
EF4PTOC
EF4LLN0
EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC
EFPIOC
EFPIOC
EFRWPIOC
EFRWPIOC
EFRWPIOC
ETPMMTR
ETPMMTR
ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS
FDPSPDIS
FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS
FPSRPDIS
FPSRPDIS
FTAQFVR
FTAQFVR
FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC
SDDRFUF
FUFSPVC
SDDSPVC
GENPDIF
GENPDIF
GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOOSEBINRCV
BINGREC
GOOSEDPRCV
DPGREC
GOOSEINTLKRCV
INTGREC
GOOSEINTRCV
INTSGREC
GOOSEMVRCV
MVGREC
GOOSESPRCV
BINSGREC
GOOSEVCTRRCV
VCTRGREC
GOPPDOP
GOPPDOP
GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GRPTTR
GRPTTR
GRPTTR
GSPTTR
GSPTTR
GSPTTR
GUPPDUP
GUPPDUP
GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF
HZPDIF
HZPDIF
INDCALCH
INDCALH
INDCALH
ITBGAPC
IB16FCVB
ITBGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPDIF
L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC
51
Section 1
Introduction
L4UFCNT
L4UFCNT
L4UFCNT
L6CPDIF
L6CPDIF
L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC
LAPPLLN0
LAPPPDUP
LAPPPUPF
LAPPPDUP
LAPPPUPF
LCCRPTRC
LCCRPTRC
LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV
LCNSPTOV
LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC
LCP3PTUC
LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR
LCPTTR
LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV
LCZSPTOV
LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0
LLN0
LDLPSCH
LDLPDIF
LDLPSCH
LDRGFC
STSGGIO
LDRGFC
LEXPDIS
LEXPDIS
LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR
LFPTTR
LFPTTR
LMBRFLO
LMBRFLO
LMBRFLO
LOVPTUV
LOVPTUV
LOVPTUV
LPHD
LPHD
LPTTR
LPTTR
LPTTR
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPDIF
LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPDIF
LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC
MVGGIO
MVGAPC
NS2PTOC
NS2LLN0
NS2PTOC
NS2PTRC
NS2PTOC
NS2PTRC
NS4PTOC
EF4LLN0
EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR
PH1PTOC
52
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
O2RWPTOV
GEN2LLN0
O2RWPTOV
PH1PTRC
O2RWPTOV
PH1PTRC
OC4PTOC
OC4LLN0
GEN4PHAR
PH3PTOC
PH3PTRC
GEN4PHAR
PH3PTOC
PH3PTRC
OEXPVPH
OEXPVPH
OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM
OOSPPAM
OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
OV2PTOV
GEN2LLN0
OV2PTOV
PH1PTRC
OV2PTOV
PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC
PAPGAPC
PAPGAPC
PCFCNT
PCGGIO
PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC
GEN4PHAR
OCNDLLN0
PH1BPTOC
PH1PTRC
GEN4PHAR
PH1BPTOC
PH1PTRC
PHPIOC
PHPIOC
PHPIOC
PRPSTATUS
RCHLCCH
RCHLCCH
SCHLCCH
PSLPSCH
ZMRPSL
PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM
PSPPPAM
PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
QCBAY
QCBAY
QCRSV
QCRSV
QCRSV
REFPDIF
REFPDIF
REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV
GEN2LLN0
PH1PTRC
ROV2PTOV
PH1PTRC
ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC
SAPFRC
SAPFRC
SAPTOF
SAPTOF
SAPTOF
SAPTUF
SAPTUF
SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC
SCCVPTOC
SCCVPTOC
SCILO
SCILO
SCILO
SCSWI
SCSWI
SCSWI
SDEPSDE
SDEPSDE
SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
53
Section 1
Introduction
SINGLELCCH
SLGAPC
SLGGIO
SLGAPC
SMBRREC
SMBRREC
SMBRREC
SMPPTRC
SMPPTRC
SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC
SP16GGIO
SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC
SPC8GGIO
SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC
SPGGIO
SPGAPC
SSCBR
SSCBR
SSCBR
SSIMG
SSIMG
SSIMG
SSIML
SSIML
SSIML
STBPTOC
STBPTOC
BBPMSS
STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ
STEFPHIZ
STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ
STTIPHIZ
STTIPHIZ
SXCBR
SXCBR
SXCBR
SXSWI
SXSWI
SXSWI
T2WPDIF
T2WPDIF
T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF
T3WPDIF
T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TCLYLTC
TCLYLTC
TCLYLTC
TCSLTC
TCMYLTC
TCMYLTC
TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEILGAPC
TEILGGIO
TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC
TMAGGIO
TMAGAPC
TPPIOC
TPPIOC
TPPIOC
TR1ATCC
TR1ATCC
TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC
TR8ATCC
TR8ATCC
TRPTTR
TRPTTR
TRPTTR
U2RWPTUV
GEN2LLN0
PH1PTRC
U2RWPTUV
PH1PTRC
U2RWPTUV
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
UV2PTUV
GEN2LLN0
PH1PTRC
UV2PTUV
PH1PTRC
UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV
VDCPTOV
VDCPTOV
VDSPVC
VDRFUF
VDSPVC
VMMXU
VMMXU
VMMXU
VMSQI
VMSQI
VMSQI
VNMMXU
VNMMXU
VNMMXU
VRPVOC
VRLLN0
PH1PTRC
PH1PTUV
VRPVOC
PH1PTRC
PH1PTUV
VRPVOC
VSGAPC
VSGGIO
VSGAPC
WRNCALH
WRNCALH
WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH
ZPCPSCH
ZPCPSCH
ZC1WPSCH
ZPCWPSCH
ZPCWPSCH
ZCLCPSCH
ZCLCPLAL
ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH
ZCPSCH
ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH
ZCRWPSCH
ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF
ZCVPSOF
ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS
ZGVLLN0
PH1PTRC
ZGVPDIS
ZGVPTUV
PH1PTRC
ZGVPDIS
ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS
ZMCAPDIS
ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS
ZMCPDIS
ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS
ZMFCLLN0
PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU
PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU
ZMFPDIS
ZMFLLN0
PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU
PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU
ZMHPDIS
ZMHPDIS
ZMHPDIS
ZMMAPDIS
ZMMAPDIS
ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS
ZMMPDIS
ZMMPDIS
ZMQAPDIS
ZMQAPDIS
ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS
ZMQPDIS
ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS
ZMRAPDIS
ZMRAPDIS
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
55
Section 1
Introduction
56
ZMRPDIS
ZMRPDIS
ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB
ZMRPSB
ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC
ZSMGAPC
ZSMGAPC
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 2
Available functions
Section 2
Available functions
2.1
IEC 61850
ANSI
Example of quantities
0-3
= option quantities
3-A03
Function description
Generator
REG670 (Customized)
Differential protection
T2WPDIF
87T
0-2
T3WPDIF
87T
0-2
HZPDIF
87
0-6
GENPDIF
87G
0-2
REFPDIF
87N
0-3
Impedance protection
ZMHPDIS
21
0-4
ZDMRDIR
21D
0-2
ZMFPDIS
21
01
ZMFCPDIS
21
01
PSPPPAM
78
0-1
OOSPPAM
78
Out-of-step protection
0-1
LEXPDIS
40
Loss of excitation
0-2
ROTIPHIZ
64R
0-1
STTIPHIZ
64S
0-1
ZGVPDIS
21
01
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
57
Section 2
Available functions
2.2
IEC 61850
Function description
REG670 (Customized)
Current protection
PHPIOC
50
0-4
OC4PTOC
51_671)
0-6
EFPIOC
50N
0-2
EF4PTOC
51N
67N2)
0-6
NS4PTOC
46I2
0-2
SDEPSDE
67N
0-2
TRPTTR
49
0-3
CCRBRF
50BF
0-4
CCPDSC
52PD
0-4
GUPPDUP
37
0-4
GOPPDOP
32
0-4
NS2PTOC
46I2
0-2
AEGPVOC
50AE
0-2
VRPVOC
51V
0-3
GSPTTR
49S
0-1
GRPTTR
49R
01
UV2PTUV
27
0-2
OV2PTOV
59
0-2
ROV2PTOV
59N
0-3
OEXPVPH
24
Overexcitation protection
0-2
VDCPTOV
60
0-2
STEFPHIZ
59THD
0-1
Voltage protection
Frequency protection
SAPTUF
81
Underfrequency protection
0-6
SAPTOF
81
Overfrequency protection
0-6
SAPFRC
81
0-3
58
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 2
Available functions
IEC 61850
ANSI
FTAQFVR
81A
Function description
REG670 (Customized)
0-12
1-12
Multipurpose filter
0-6
Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC
General calculation
SMAIHPAC
1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage
2.3
IEC 61850
Function description
Generator
REG670
Control
SESRSYN
25
0-2
APC30
0-1
QCBAY
Apparatus control
1+5/APC30
LOCREM
1+5/APC30
LOCREMCTRL
1+5/APC30
TR8ATCC
90
TCMYLTC
84
0-4
TCLYLTC
84
0-4
SLGAPC
15
VSGAPC
20
DPGAPC
16
SPC8GAPC
AUTOBITS
SINGLECMD
I103CMD
I103GENCMD
50
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
59
Section 2
Available functions
IEC 61850
ANSI
Function description
Generator
REG670
I103POSCMD
50
I103POSCMDV
10
I103IEDCMD
I103USRCMD
Secondary system
supervision
CCSSPVC
87
0-5
0-3
60
0-3
94
Tripping logic
12
TMAGAPC
12
ALMCALH
WRNCALH
INDCALH
40-280
ANDQT,
INDCOMBSPQT,
INDEXTSPQT,
INVALIDQT,
INVERTERQT,
ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT
01
01
FXDSIGN
B16I
18
FUFSPVC
VDSPVC
Logic
SMPPTRC
60
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 2
Available functions
IEC 61850
ANSI
Function description
Generator
REG670
BTIGAPC
16
IB16
18
ITBGAPC
16
TIGAPC
30
TEIGAPC
12
INTCOMP
12
REALCOMP
12
CVMMXN,
VMMXU, CMSQI,
VMSQI, VNMMXU
Measurements
CMMXU
Measurements
10
AISVBAS
EVENT
Event function
20
DRPRDRE,
A1RADRA4RADR,
B1RBDRB8RBDR
Disturbance report
SPGAPC
64
SP16GAPC
16
MVGAPC
24
BINSTATREP
RANGE_XP
66
21
Monitoring
SSIMG
63
SSIML
71
SSCBR
0-12
I103MEAS
I103MEASUSR
I103AR
I103EF
I103FLTPROT
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
61
Section 2
Available functions
IEC 61850
ANSI
Function description
Generator
REG670
I103IED
I103SUPERV
I103USRDEF
20
L4UFCNT
30
TEILGAPC
Running hour-meter
PCFCNT
Pulse-counter logic
16
ETPMMTR
Metering
Table 3:
AND
280
GATE
40
INV
420
LLD
40
OR
280
PULSETIMER
40
RSMEMORY
40
SRMEMORY
40
TIMERSET
60
XOR
40
Table 4:
ANDQT
120
INDCOMBSPQT
20
INDEXTSPQT
20
INVALIDQT
22
INVERTERQT
120
ORQT
120
PULSETIMERQT
40
RSMEMORYQT
40
62
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 2
Available functions
SRMEMORYQT
40
TIMERSETQT
40
XORQT
40
Table 5:
AND
180
GATE
49
INV
180
LLD
49
OR
180
PULSETIMER
59
SLGAPC
74
SRMEMORY
110
TIMERSET
49
VSGAPC
130
XOR
49
2.4
IEC 61850
Communication
ANSI
Function description
Generator
REG670
(Customized)
Station communication
LONSPA, SPA
ADE
HORZCOMM
PROTOCOL
RS485PROT
RS485GEN
RS485
DNPGEN
DNPGENTCP
CHSERRS485
CH1TCP, CH2TCP,
CH3TCP, CH4TCP
63
Section 2
Available functions
IEC 61850
ANSI
Function description
Generator
REG670
(Customized)
CHSEROPT
MST1TCP,
MST2TCP,
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNPFREC
IEC 61850-8-1
GOOSEINTLKRCV
59
GOOSEBINRCV
16
GOOSEDPRCV
64
GOOSEINTRCV
32
GOOSEMVRCV
60
GOOSESPRCV
64
MULTICMDRCV,
MULTICMDSND
FRONT, LANABI,
LANAB, LANCDI,
LANCD
GATEWAY
OPTICAL103
RS485103
AGSAL
LD0LLN0
SYSLLN0
LPHD
PCMACCS
SECALARM
FSTACCS
FSTACCSNA
ACTIVLOG
ALTRK
Service Tracking
SINGLELCCH
PRPSTATUS
60/10
0-1
Remote communication
Table continues on next page
64
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 2
Available functions
IEC 61850
ANSI
Function description
Generator
REG670
(Customized)
6/36
6/3/3
2.5
Table 6:
Description
INTERRSIG
SELFSUPEVLST
TIMESYNCHGEN
BININPUT,
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
SYNCHSPA
Time synchronization
TIMEZONE
Time synchronization
DSTBEGIN,
DSTENABLE, DSTEND
IRIG-B
Time synchronization
SETGRPS
ACTVGRP
TESTMODE
CHNGLCK
SMBI
SMBO
SMMI
SMAI1 - SMAI12
ATHSTAT
Authority status
ATHCHCK
Authority check
AUTHMAN
Authority management
FTPACCS
SPACOMMMAP
65
Section 2
Available functions
Description
SPATD
DOSFRNT
DOSLANAB
DOSLANCD
DOSSCKT
GBASVAL
PRIMVAL
ALTMS
ALTIM
Time management
MSTSER
PRODINF
Product information
RUNTIME
CAMCONFIG
CAMSTATUS
TOOLINF
SAFEFILECOPY
Table 7:
ANSI
Description
LHMICTRL
LANGUAGE
SCREEN
FNKEYTY1FNKEYTY5
FNKEYMD1
FNKEYMD5
LEDGEN
OPENCLOSE_LED
GRP1_LED1
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1
GRP3_LED15
66
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Section 3
Analog inputs
3.1
Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all
directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be defined
in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected in the field
( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED
use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as well and it is
important to set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers properly.
A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This analog
channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle information
will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and commissioning of the
IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading.
The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input
module (TRM) type.
3.2
Function block
The hardware channels appear in the signal matrix tool (SMT) and in ACT
when a TRM is included in the configuration with the hardware
configuration tool. In the SMT or the ACT they can be mapped to the
desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the
configuration.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
67
Section 3
Analog inputs
3.3
Signals
Table 8:
Name
Type
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
CH1(I)
STRING
CH2(I)
STRING
CH3(I)
STRING
CH4(I)
STRING
CH5(I)
STRING
CH6(I)
STRING
CH7(I)
STRING
CH8(I)
STRING
CH9(I)
STRING
CH10(I)
STRING
CH11(I)
STRING
CH12(I)
STRING
Table 9:
Name
68
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
CH1(I)
STRING
CH2(I)
STRING
CH3(I)
STRING
CH4(I)
STRING
CH5(I)
STRING
CH6(I)
STRING
CH7(V)
STRING
CH8(V)
STRING
CH9(V)
STRING
CH10(V)
STRING
CH 11(V)
STRING
CH12(V)
STRING
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Table 10:
Name
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
CH1(I)
STRING
CH2(I)
STRING
CH3(I)
STRING
CH4(I)
STRING
CH5(I)
STRING
CH6(I)
STRING
Table 11:
Name
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
CH1(I)
STRING
CH2(I)
STRING
CH3(I)
STRING
CH4(I)
STRING
CH5(I)
STRING
CH6(I)
STRING
CH7(I)
STRING
CH8(V)
STRING
CH9(V)
STRING
CH10(V)
STRING
CH 11(V)
STRING
CH12(V)
STRING
Table 12:
Name
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
CH1(I)
STRING
CH2(I)
STRING
CH3(I)
STRING
CH4(I)
STRING
CH5(I)
STRING
CH6(I)
STRING
CH7(I)
STRING
69
Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
Type
STRING
CH9(I)
STRING
CH10(V)
STRING
CH 11(V)
STRING
CH12(V)
STRING
Table 13:
Name
3.4
Description
CH8(I)
Type
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
CH1(I)
STRING
CH2(I)
STRING
CH3(I)
STRING
CH4(I)
STRING
CH5(I)
STRING
CH6(I)
STRING
CH7(I)
STRING
CH8(I)
STRING
CH9(I)
STRING
CH10(I)
STRING
CH 11(V)
STRING
CH12(V)
STRING
Settings
Dependent on ordered IED type.
70
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Table 14:
Name
PhaseAngleRef
Table 15:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
TRM40-Ch1
Description
Reference channel
for phase angle
presentation
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
71
Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec7
1 - 10
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint8
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec8
1 - 10
CTprim8
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint9
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec9
1 - 10
CTprim9
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint10
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec10
1 - 10
CTprim10
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint11
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec11
1 - 10
CTprim11
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint12
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec12
1 - 10
CTprim12
1 - 99999
3000
72
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Table 16:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
VTsec7
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim7
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim8
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim9
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim10
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec11
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim11
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec12
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim12
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
73
Section 3
Analog inputs
Table 17:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
Table 18:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
1 - 10
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec7
1 - 10
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim8
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim9
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim10
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec11
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim11
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec12
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim12
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Step
Default
Table 19:
Name
Unit
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
75
Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec7
1 - 10
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint8
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec8
1 - 10
CTprim8
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint9
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec9
1 - 10
CTprim9
1 - 99999
3000
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim10
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec11
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim11
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec12
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim12
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
76
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Table 20:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec7
1 - 10
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint8
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec8
1 - 10
CTprim8
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint9
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec9
1 - 10
CTprim9
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint10
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec10
1 - 10
77
Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTprim10
1 - 99999
3000
VTsec11
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim11
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec12
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim12
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
3.5
Monitored data
Table 21:
Name
Status
Table 22:
Name
STATUS
Table 23:
Name
STATUS
Table 24:
Name
STATUS
Table 25:
Name
STATUS
78
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated
Unit
-
Description
Service value status
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description
Analog input module status
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description
Analog input module status
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description
Analog input module status
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description
Analog input module status
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Table 26:
Name
STATUS
Table 27:
Name
STATUS
3.6
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description
Analog input module status
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description
Analog input module status
Operation principle
The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically
star (WYE) connected and can be connected with the Star (WYE) point towards the object
or away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.
The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:
Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into the
object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out from
the object.
For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see figure 2)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
79
Section 3
Analog inputs
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Reverse
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"ToObject"
Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"FromObject"
en05000456-2.vsd
ANSI05000456 V2 EN
Figure 2:
3.7
Technical data
Table 28:
TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer modules
Quantity
Rated value
Current
In = 1 or 5 A
Operative range
(0-100) x In
Permissive overload
4 In cont.
100 In for 1 s *)
Burden
Ac voltage
Vn = 120 V
Operative range
(0340) V
Nominal range
(0.2-40) In
0.5288 V
80
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Quantity
Rated value
Permissive overload
420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden
Frequency
fn = 60/50 Hz
*)
Nominal range
5%
Table 29:
TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer modules
Quantity
Rated value
Current
In = 1 or 5 A
Permissive overload
1.1 In cont.
1.8 In for 30 min at In = 1 A
1.6 In for 30 min at In = 5 A
Burden
Ac voltage
Vn = 120 V
Operative range
(0340) V
Permissive overload
420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden
Frequency
fn = 60/50 Hz
Table 30:
Nominal range
(0-1.8) In at In = 1 A
(0-1.6) In at In = 5 A
0.5288 V
5%
Connector type
250 V AC, 20 A
4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
250 V AC, 20 A
4 mm2 (AWG12)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
81
82
Section 4
Binary input and output modules
Section 4
4.1
Binary input
4.1.1
4.1.2
Oscillation filter
Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields
from for example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance
from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.
An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the counter
value is greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked. The input signal
is ignored until the oscillation counter value during 1 s is below the set value OscRelease.
4.1.3
Settings
OscBlock must always be set to a value greater than OscRelease. If this is
not done, oscillation detection will not function correctly, and the
resulting behaviour will be undefined.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
83
Section 4
Binary input and output modules
4.1.3.1
Table 31:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
DebounceTime
0.001 - 0.020
0.001
0.001
OscBlock
1 - 40
Hz
40
OscRelease
1 - 30
Hz
30
4.1.3.2
Table 32:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DebounceTime
0.001 - 0.020
0.001
0.001
OscBlock
1 - 40
Hz
40
OscRelease
1 - 30
Hz
30
84
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Section 5
5.1
5.1.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
5.1.2
Table 33:
SCREEN
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Settings
SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DisplayTimeout
1 - 120
Min
10
ContrastLevel
-100 - 100
10
Default screen
DefaultScreen
EvListSrtOrder
Latest on top
Oldest on top
Latest on top
AutoIndicationDRP
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SubstIndSLD
No
Yes
No
InterlockIndSLD
No
Yes
No
BypassCommands
No
Yes
No
5.2
5.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
LHMICTRL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
85
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.2.2
Function block
LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS
HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD
IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN
Figure 3:
5.2.3
Signals
Table 34:
Name
RSTLEDS
Table 35:
Name
86
Default
0
Description
Input to reset the LCD-HMI LEDs
Description
HMI-ON
BOOLEAN
RED-S
BOOLEAN
YELLOW-S
BOOLEAN
YELLOW-F
BOOLEAN
RSTPULSE
BOOLEAN
A reset pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCDHMI are cleared
LEDSRST
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.3
5.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
LEDGEN
GRP1_LED1 GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 GRP3_LED15
5.3.2
Function block
LEDGEN
BLOCK
RESET
NEWIND
ACK
IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN
Figure 4:
GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
IEC09000322 V1 EN
Figure 5:
The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example. The 15 LEDs in each of the three groups
have a similar function block.
5.3.3
Signals
Table 36:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
87
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Table 37:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
ACK
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 39:
Name
Description
NEWIND
Table 38:
5.3.4
Type
Default
Description
HM1L01R
BOOLEAN
HM1L01Y
BOOLEAN
HM1L01G
BOOLEAN
Settings
LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
tRestart
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
t_MaxTripDelay
0.1 - 100.0
0.1
1.0
Table 40:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SequenceType
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
LabelOff
0 - 18
G1L01_OFF
LabelRed
0 - 18
G1L01_RED
LabelYellow
0 - 18
G1L01_YELLOW
LabelGreen
0 - 18
G1L01_GREEN
88
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.4
5.4.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
5.4.2
IEC 60617
identification
FNKEYMD1 FNKEYMD5
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1
^FKEYOUT1
IEC09000327 V1 EN
Figure 6:
Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for
every function key button.
5.4.3
Signals
Table 41:
Name
Type
LEDCTL1
BOOLEAN
Table 42:
Type
FKEYOUT1
Table 43:
Name
Description
LED control input for function key
Name
5.4.4
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Mode
Disabled
Toggle
Pulsed
Disabled
PulseTime
0.001 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
LabelOn
0 - 18
LCD_FN1_ON
LabelOff
0 - 18
LCD_FN1_OFF
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
89
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Table 44:
Name
Values (Range)
Type
Disabled
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Description
Disabled
MenuShortcut values are product dependent and created dynamically depending on the
product main menu.
90
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.5
Operation principle
5.5.1
Local HMI
ANSI13000239-2-en.vsd
ANSI13000239 V2 EN
Figure 7:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
91
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Keypad
Display (LCD)
LED indicators
Communication port for PCM600
5.5.1.1
Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views or
menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide
help and switch between local and remote control mode.
The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as
menu shortcut or control buttons.
92
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
24
1
23
2
18
3
19
4
5
6
20
21
22
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
ANSI15000157-1-en.vsdx
ANSI15000157 V1 EN
Figure 8:
Close
Open
Escape
Left
10
Down
11
Up
12
Right
13
Key
14
Enter
15
Remote/Local
16
Uplink LED
17
Not in use
18
Multipage
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
93
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.5.1.2
19
Menu
20
Clear
21
Help
22
Communication port
23
24
Display
The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) with a
resolution of 320 x 240 pixels. The character size can vary.
The display view is divided into four basic areas.
94
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
IEC15000270-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000270 V1 EN
Figure 9:
Display layout
1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)
The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long to be
shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated with three
dots.
The content area shows the menu content.
The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and the
object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears on
the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in
the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
95
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
IEC15000138-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000138 V1 EN
Figure 10:
Truncated path
The number after : (colon sign) at the end of the function instance, for example, 1 in
SMAI1:1, indicates the number of that function instance.
The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback
signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the required signal
with PCM600.
96
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN
Figure 11:
The indication LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the indication LEDs.
Three indication LED pages are available.
IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN
Figure 12:
The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel
is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the
ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both panels have a dynamic width that
depends on the label string length.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
97
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.5.1.3
LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Normal, Pickup and
Trip.
There are 15 programmable indication LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The texts related to each threecolor LED are divided into three panels.
There are 3 separate panels of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one
LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated
since there are three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority, with red being
the highest and green the lowest priority. For example, if on one panel there is an
indication that requires the green LED to be lit, and on another panel there is an indication
that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes priority and is lit. The LEDs can be
configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI or
PCM600.
Information panels for the indication LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button.
Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED is
indicated with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up/Down arrow
buttons. Pressing the Enter key shows details about the selected LED. Pressing the ESC
button exits from information pop-ups as well as from the LED panel as such.
The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel is lit.
If there are un-acknowledged indication LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks. To
acknowledge LEDs, press the Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to description of
this menu for details).
There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons
and
. They
can, for example, represent the status of a circuit breaker. The LEDs are controlled by the
function block OPENCLOSE_LED which must be configured to show the status of the
breaker.
5.5.2
5.5.2.1
Functionality
The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx
(x=1-15) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The
input and output signals of the function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input
signal for each LED is selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled
by the GRPn_LEDx (n=1-3) function block that controls the color and the operating
mode.
98
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types
are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting
mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system
in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.
5.5.2.2
Status LEDs
There are three status LEDs above the LCD in front of the IED: green, yellow and red.
The green LED has a fixed function that presents the healthy status of the IED. The yellow
and red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a
disturbance report is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red
LED can be used to indicate a trip command.
Here is a typical configuration of the status LEDs:
Green LED: unlit > no power; blinking > startup or abnormal situation (IED is not in
service); steady > IED is in service
Yellow LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > IED is in Testmode (IED is not
in normal service); steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the yellow
LED on has been active
Red LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > user performs a common write
from PCM600; steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the red LED on
has been active
The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function,
DRPRDRE, by connecting a pickup or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR
binary input function block using the PCM600, and configuring the setting to Off,Pickup
or Trip for that particular signal.
5.5.2.3
Indication LEDs
Operating modes
Collecting mode
LEDs that are used in the collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously
until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are
used as a simplified alarm system. When all three inputs (red, yellow and green) are
connected to different sources of events for the same function block, collecting mode
shows the highest priority LED color that was activated since the latest
acknowledgment was made. If a number of different indications were made since the
latest acknowledgment, it is not possible to get a clear view of what triggered the
latest event without looking at the sequence of events list. A condition for getting the
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
99
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
sequence of events is that the signals have been engineered in the disturbance
recorder.
Re-starting mode
In the re-starting mode of operation each new pickup resets all previous active LEDs
and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for
re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a
reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time
after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has
elapsed. In sequence 6, the restarting or reset mode means that upon occurrence of
any new event, all previous indications will be reset. This facilitates that only the LED
indications related to the latest event is shown.
Acknowledgment/reset
Automatic reset
The automatic reset can only be performed for LED indications defined for restarting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the
automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will
be indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type, the LED follows the
input signal completely. For the Latched type, each LED latches to the corresponding
input signal until it is reset.
100
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED
separately. The following 6 sequences are available:
Sequence 1: Follow-S
Sequence 2: Follow-F
Sequence 3: LatchedAck-F-S
Sequence 4: LatchedAck-S-F
Sequence 5: LatchedColl-S
Sequence 6: LatchedReset-S
For sequence 1 and 2, which are of the Follow type, the acknowledgment (Ack ) /reset
function is not applicable because the indication shown by the LED follows its input
signal. Sequence 3 and 4, which are of the Latched type with acknowledgement, are only
working in collecting (Coll) mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and
collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting
(Reset) mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and
F = Flash.
At the activation of the input signal to any LED, the indication on the corresponding LED
obtains a color that corresponds to the activated input, and operates according to the
selected sequence diagrams shown below.
In the sequence diagrams the different statuses of the LEDs are shown using the following
symbols:
= No indication
G=
Green
= Steady light
Y=
Yellow
= Flash
R=
Red
IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN
Figure 13:
Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows the corresponding input signals all the time with a steady light. It
does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs
in its operation.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
101
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Activating
signal
LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN
Figure 14:
If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to the same LED, the priority
color it shows is in accordance with the color described above. An example of the
operation when two colors are activated in parallel to the same LED is shown in Figure
15.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED
IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN
Figure 15:
Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of
showing steady light.
Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the
indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is
not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady
light.
102
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN
Figure 16:
The sequence described below is valid only if the same function block is
used for all three colour LEDs.
When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the indication
with higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of if the low
priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In Figure 17 it is shown the
sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has
been performed on a higher priority signal. The low priority signal will be shown as
acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED
Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN
Figure 17:
If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained. Acknowledgment
of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications, which
are not visible according to Figure 18.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
103
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED
Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN
Figure 18:
LED
Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN
Figure 19:
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have
been alternated.
Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of
the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence
104
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is,
immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and
storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its
operation.
Activating
signal
LED
Reset
IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN
Figure 20:
That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with lower
priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to Figure
21.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED
Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN
Figure 21:
Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs
set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still activated will
not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of that the
manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
105
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other
sequences.
Timing diagram for sequence 6
Figure 22 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN
Figure 22:
Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.
106
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Disturbance
tRestart
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN
Figure 23:
Figure 24 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has
reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
107
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN
Figure 24:
108
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN
Figure 25:
5.5.3
Function keys
5.5.3.1
Functionality
Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left of
the LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each button
has an indication LED that can be configured in the application configuration.
When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate between
default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control a binary
signal.
5.5.3.2
Operation principle
Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from
the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output status of
the actual function block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be used to control
other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O outputs etc.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
109
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and parameters
that control the behavior of the function block. These settings and parameters are normally
set using the PST.
Operating sequence
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.
Setting OFF
This mode always sets the outputs to a low value (0).
Input value
Output value
IEC09000330-2-en.vsd
IEC09000330 V2 EN
Figure 26:
Setting TOGGLE
In this mode the output toggles each time the function key has been pressed for more than
500ms. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block executes. The
function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.
Input value
500ms
500ms
500ms
Output value
IEC09000331_1_en.vsd
IEC09000331 V2 EN
Figure 27:
Setting PULSED
In this mode the output sets high (1) when the function key has been pressed for more than
500ms and remains high according to set pulse time. After this time the output will go back
to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects it being high and there is
no output pulse.
110
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the
edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is zero;
else the trigger edge is lost.
Input value
500ms
500ms
pulse time
Output value
500ms
500ms
pulse time
pulse time
IEC09000332_2_en.vsd
IEC09000332 V2 EN
Figure 28:
Input function
All function keys work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain
function button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function block
becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when high. This
functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off. It has been
implemented this way for safety reasons; the idea is that the function key LEDs should
always reflect the actual status of any primary equipment monitored by these LEDs.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
111
112
Section 6
Differential protection
Section 6
Differential protection
6.1
6.1.1
Identification
Function description
Transformer differential protection, twowinding
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87T
T2WPDIF
3Id/I
SYMBOL-BB V1 EN
87T
T3WPDIF
3Id/I
SYMBOL-BB V1 EN
6.1.2
Functionality
The Transformer differential protection is provided with internal CT ratio matching,
phase shift compensation and settable zero sequence current elimination.
The function can be provided with up to six three-phase sets of current inputs if enough
HW is available. All current inputs are provided with percentage bias restraint features,
making the IED suitable for two- or three-winding transformer in multi-breaker station
arrangements.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
113
Section 6
Differential protection
Two-winding applications
352
152
xx05000048_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000048 V1 EN
352
152
xx05000049_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000049 V1 EN
152
352
252
xx05000050_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000050 V1 EN
152
352
252
452
xx05000051_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000051 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
452
152
352
xx05000052_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000052 V1 EN
452
152
352
252
xx05000053_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000053 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
115
Section 6
Differential protection
152
252
552
352
452
xx05000057_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000057 V1 EN
Figure 29:
CT group arrangement
for differential
protection
The setting facilities cover the application of the differential protection to all types of
power transformers and auto-transformers with or without load tap changer as well as
shunt reactors and local feeders within the station. An adaptive stabilizing feature is
included for heavy through-fault currents.By introducing the load tap changer position,
the differential protection pick-up can be set to optimum sensitivity thus covering internal
faults with low fault current level.
Harmonic restraint is included for inrush and overexcitation currents respectively, crossblocking is also available. Adaptive stabilization is also included for system recovery
inrush and CT saturation during external faults. A high set unrestrained differential
current protection element is included for a very high speed tripping at high internal fault
currents.
Included is an sensitive differential protection element based on the theory of negative
sequence current component. This element offers the best possible coverage of power
transformer windings turn to turn faults.
116
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
6.1.3
Function block
T2WPDIF (87T)
I3PW1CT1*
TRIP
I3PW1CT2*
TRIPRES
I3PW2CT1*
TRIPUNRE
I3PW2CT2*
TRNSUNR
TAPOLTC1
TRNSSENS
OLTC1AL
PICKUP
BLOCK
PU_A
BLKRES
PU_B
BLKUNRES
PU_C
BLKNSUNR
BLK2H
BLKNSSEN
BLK2H_A
BLK2H_B
BLK2H_C
BLK5H
BLK5H_A
BLK5H_B
BLK5H_C
BLKWAV
BLKWAV_A
BLKWAV_B
BLKWAV_C
IDALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
ID_A
ID_B
ID_C
IDMAG_A
IDMAG_B
IDMAG_C
IBIAS
IDMAG_NS
ANSI06000249-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000249 V2 EN
Figure 30:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
117
Section 6
Differential protection
T3WPDIF (87T)
I3PW1CT1*
TRIP
I3PW1CT2*
TRIPRES
I3PW2CT1*
TRIPUNRE
I3PW2CT2*
TRNSUNR
I3PW3CT1*
TRNSSENS
I3PW3CT2*
PICKUP
TAPOLTC1
PU_A
TAPOLTC2
PU_B
OLTC1AL
PU_C
OLTC2AL
BLK2H
BLOCK
BLK2H_A
BLKRES
BLK2H_B
BLKUNRES
BLK2H_C
BLKNSUNR
BLK5H
BLKNSSEN
BLK5H_A
BLK5H_B
BLK5H_C
BLKWAV
BLKWAV_A
BLKWAV_B
BLKWAV_C
IDALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
ID_A
ID_B
ID_C
IDMAG_A
IDMAG_B
IDMAG_C
IBIAS
IDMAG_NS
ANSI06000250-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000250 V2 EN
Figure 31:
6.1.4
Signals
Table 45:
Name
Default
Description
I3PW1CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
TAPOLTC1
INTEGER
OLTC1AL
BOOLEAN
OLTC1 alarm
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKRES
BOOLEAN
118
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLKUNRES
BOOLEAN
BLKNSUNR
BOOLEAN
BLKNSSEN
BOOLEAN
Table 46:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIPRES
BOOLEAN
TRIPUNRE
BOOLEAN
TRNSUNR
BOOLEAN
TRNSSENS
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_A
BOOLEAN
PU_B
BOOLEAN
PU_C
BOOLEAN
BLK2H
BOOLEAN
BLK2H_A
BOOLEAN
BLK2H_B
BOOLEAN
BLK2H_C
BOOLEAN
BLK5H
BOOLEAN
BLK5H_A
BOOLEAN
BLK5H_B
BOOLEAN
BLK5H_C
BOOLEAN
BLKWAV
BOOLEAN
BLKWAV_A
BOOLEAN
BLKWAV_B
BOOLEAN
BLKWAV_C
BOOLEAN
IDALARM
BOOLEAN
OPENCT
BOOLEAN
OPENCTAL
BOOLEAN
ID_A
REAL
ID_B
REAL
ID_C
REAL
119
Section 6
Differential protection
Name
Description
REAL
IDMAG_B
REAL
IDMAG_C
REAL
IBIAS
REAL
IDMAG_NS
REAL
Table 47:
Name
120
Type
IDMAG_A
Default
Description
I3PW1CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW3CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW3CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
TAPOLTC1
INTEGER
TAPOLTC2
INTEGER
OLTC1AL
BOOLEAN
OLTC1 alarm
OLTC2AL
BOOLEAN
OLTC2 alarm
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKRES
BOOLEAN
BLKUNRES
BOOLEAN
BLKNSUNR
BOOLEAN
BLKNSSEN
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Table 48:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIPRES
BOOLEAN
TRIPUNRE
BOOLEAN
TRNSUNR
BOOLEAN
TRNSSENS
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_A
BOOLEAN
PU_B
BOOLEAN
PU_C
BOOLEAN
BLK2H
BOOLEAN
BLK2H_A
BOOLEAN
BLK2H_B
BOOLEAN
BLK2H_C
BOOLEAN
BLK5H
BOOLEAN
BLK5H_A
BOOLEAN
BLK5H_B
BOOLEAN
BLK5H_C
BOOLEAN
BLKWAV
BOOLEAN
BLKWAV_A
BOOLEAN
BLKWAV_B
BOOLEAN
BLKWAV_C
BOOLEAN
IDALARM
BOOLEAN
OPENCT
BOOLEAN
OPENCTAL
BOOLEAN
ID_A
REAL
ID_B
REAL
ID_C
REAL
IDMAG_A
REAL
IDMAG_B
REAL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
121
Section 6
Differential protection
Name
6.1.5
Table 49:
Name
Type
Description
IDMAG_C
REAL
IBIAS
REAL
IDMAG_NS
REAL
Settings
T2WPDIF (87T) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
SOTFMode
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
tAlarmDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
IDiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
IB
0.01
0.20
IdMin
0.05 - 0.60
IB
0.01
0.30
IdUnre
1.00 - 100.00
IB
0.01
10.00
CrossBlockEn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
NegSeqDiffEn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
IMinNegSeq
0.02 - 0.20
IB
0.01
0.04
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 120.0
Deg
0.1
60.0
Unit
Step
Default
Table 50:
Name
Description
EndSection1
0.20 - 1.50
IB
0.01
1.25
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
IB
0.01
3.00
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
I2/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
15.0
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Name
Unit
Step
Default
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
25.0
OpenCTEnable
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
3.000
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250
tOCTUnrstDelay
0.10 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
Step
Default
Table 51:
Values (Range)
Description
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
GlobalBaseSelW1
1 - 12
GlobalBaseSelW2
1 - 12
ConnectTypeW1
WYE (Y)
Delta (D)
WYE (Y)
ConnectTypeW2
WYE (Y)
Delta (D)
WYE (Y)
ClockNumberW2
0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
0 [0 deg]
ZSCurrSubtrW1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ZSCurrSubtrW2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
TconfigForW1
No
Yes
No
CT1RatingW1
1 - 99999
3000
CT2RatingW1
1 - 99999
3000
TconfigForW2
No
Yes
No
CT1RatingW2
1 - 99999
3000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
123
Section 6
Differential protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT2RatingW2
1 - 99999
3000
LocationOLTC1
Not Used
Winding 1 (W1)
Winding 2 (W2)
Not Used
LowTapPosOLTC1
0 - 10
RatedTapOLTC1
1 - 100
HighTapPsOLTC1
1 - 100
11
TapHighVoltTC1
1 - 100
StepSizeOLTC1
0.01 - 30.00
0.01
1.00
Step
Default
Table 52:
Name
Unit
tAlarmDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
IDiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
IB
0.01
0.20
SOTFMode
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
IdMin
0.05 - 0.60
IB
0.01
0.30
IdUnre
1.00 - 100.00
IB
0.01
10.00
CrossBlockEn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
NegSeqDiffEn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
IMinNegSeq
0.02 - 0.20
IB
0.01
0.04
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 120.0
Deg
0.1
60.0
124
Description
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Table 53:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
EndSection1
0.20 - 1.50
IB
0.01
1.25
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
IB
0.01
3.00
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
I2/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
15.0
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
25.0
OpenCTEnable
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
3.000
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250
tOCTUnrstDelay
0.10 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
Step
Default
Table 54:
Values (Range)
Description
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
GlobalBaseSelW1
1 - 12
GlobalBaseSelW2
1 - 12
GlobalBaseSelW3
1 - 12
ConnectTypeW1
WYE (Y)
Delta (D)
WYE (Y)
ConnectTypeW2
WYE (Y)
Delta (D)
WYE (Y)
ConnectTypeW3
WYE (Y)
Delta (D)
Delta (D)
ClockNumberW2
0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
0 [0 deg]
125
Section 6
Differential protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ClockNumberW3
0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
ZSCurrSubtrW1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ZSCurrSubtrW2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ZSCurrSubtrW3
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
TconfigForW1
No
Yes
No
CT1RatingW1
1 - 99999
3000
CT2RatingW1
1 - 99999
3000
TconfigForW2
No
Yes
No
CT1RatingW2
1 - 99999
3000
CT2RatingW2
1 - 99999
3000
TconfigForW3
No
Yes
No
CT1RatingW3
1 - 99999
3000
CT2RatingW3
1 - 99999
3000
LocationOLTC1
Not Used
Winding 1 (W1)
Winding 2 (W2)
Winding 3 (W3)
Not Used
LowTapPosOLTC1
0 - 10
RatedTapOLTC1
1 - 100
HighTapPsOLTC1
1 - 100
11
TapHighVoltTC1
1 - 100
126
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Name
Unit
Step
Default
StepSizeOLTC1
0.01 - 30.00
0.01
1.00
LocationOLTC2
Not Used
Winding 1 (W1)
Winding 2 (W2)
Winding 3 (W3)
Not Used
LowTapPosOLTC2
0 - 10
RatedTapOLTC2
1 - 100
HighTapPsOLTC2
1 - 100
11
TapHighVoltTC2
1 - 100
StepSizeOLTC2
0.01 - 30.00
0.01
1.00
6.1.6
Values (Range)
Description
Monitored data
Table 55:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OCTSIDE
INTEGER
OPENCTIN
INTEGER
OPENCTPH
INTEGER
IDMAG_A
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase A
IDMAG_B
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase B
IDMAG_C
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase C
IBIAS
REAL
IDMAG_NS
REAL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
127
Section 6
Differential protection
Table 56:
Name
6.1.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IDMAG_A
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase A
IDMAG_B
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase B
IDMAG_C
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase C
IBIAS
REAL
IDMAG_NS
REAL
Operation principle
The task of the power transformer differential protection is to determine whether a fault
is within the protected zone, or outside of the protected zone. The protected zone is limited
by the position of current transformers (see Figure 32), and in principle can include more
objects than just a transformer. If the fault is found to be internal, the faulty power
transformer must be quickly disconnected from the system.
The main CTs are normally supposed to be Wye connected. The main CTs can be
grounded in anyway (that is, either "ToObject" or "FromObject"). However internally the
differential function will always use reference directions towards the protected
transformer as shown in Figure 32. Thus the IED will always internally measure the
currents on all sides of the power transformer with the same reference direction towards
the power transformer windings as shown in Figure 32. For more information see the
Application manual.
IW1
E1S1
IW2
Z1S1
Z1S2
IW1
IW2
E1S2
IED
en05000186_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000186 V1 EN
Figure 32:
128
Section 6
Differential protection
Even in a healthy power transformer, the currents are generally not equal when they flow
through it. This is due to the ratio of the number of turns of the windings and the
connection group of the protected transformer. Therefore the differential protection must
first correlate all currents to each other before any calculation can be performed.
First, compensation for the protected transformer transformation ratio and connection
group is made, and only then are the currents compared phase-wise. This makes external
auxiliary (interposing) current transformers unnecessary. Conversion of all currents to the
common reference side of the power transformer is performed by pre-programmed
coefficient matrices, which depends on the protected power transformer transformation
ratio and connection group. Once the power transformer phase shift, rated currents and
voltages have been entered by the user, the differential protection is capable to calculate
off-line matrix coefficients required in order to perform the on-line current comparison by
means of a fixed equation.
The negative-sequence-current-based internal-external fault discriminator, is used with
advantage in order to determine whether a fault is internal or external. It not only
positively discriminates between internal and external faults, but can also independently
detect minor faults which may not be sensed by the "usual" differential protection based
on operate-restrain characteristic.
For all differential functions it is the common trip that is used to initiate a
trip of a breaker. The separate trip signals from the different parts lacks the
safety against maloperation. This will in some cases result in a 6 ms time
difference between, for example restrained trip is issued and common trip
is issued. The separate trip signals are only used for information purpose
of which part that has caused the trip.
6.1.7.1
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
129
Section 6
Differential protection
Before any differential current can be calculated, the power transformer phase shift, and
its transformation ratio, must be accounted for. Conversion of all currents to a common
reference is performed in two steps:
all current phasors are phase-shifted to (referred to) the phase-reference side,
(whenever possible the first winding with wye connection)
all currents magnitudes are always referred to the first winding of the power
transformer (typically transformer high-voltage side)
The two steps of conversion are made simultaneously on-line by the pre-programmed
coefficient matrices, as shown in equation 1 for a two-winding power transformer, and in
equation 2 for a three-winding power transformer.
These are the internal compensation within the differential function. The
protected power transformer data is always entered per its nameplate. The
Differential function will correlate nameplate data and select proper
reference windings.
IDA
I _ A _ W 1
I _ A _ W 2
IDB = A I _ B _ W 1 + Vn _ W 2 B I _ B _ W 2
Vn _ W 1
IDC
I _ C _ W 1
I _ C _ W 2
1
(Equation 1)
EQUATION1879 V1 EN
where:
130
1.
2.
3.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
IDA
I _ A _ W 1
I _ A _ W 2
IL _ A _ W 3
IDB = A I _ B _ W 1 + Vn _ W 2 B I _ B _ W 2 + Vn _ W 3 C IL _ B _ W 3
Vn _ W 1
Vn _ W 1
IDC
I _ C _ W 1
I _ C _ W 2
IL _ C _ W 3
1
(Equation 2)
EQUATION1882-ANSI V1 EN
where:
1.
2.
3.
4.
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phaseA (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_B
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase B (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_C
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phaseC (in W1 side primary amperes)
I_A_W1
I_B_W1
I_C_W1
I_A_W2
I_B_W2
I_C_W2
I_A_W3
I_B_W3
I_C_W3
Vn_W1
Vn_W2
Vn_W3
A, B and C
The Power transformer winding connection type, such as wye (Y/y) or delta (D/d)
Note! The capitalized letter Y or D is used to represent the high voltage (HV)
side of the transformer and the smaller letter y or d to represent lower
voltage(LV) level. When neutral bushing of a wye winding is brought out, the
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
131
Section 6
Differential protection
3.
The Transformer phase shift such as Yd1, Dy11, YNautod5, Yy0d5 and so on, which
introduce phase displacement between individual windings currents in multiples of
30. Since the HV and LV winding voltages are in phase for wye/wye or Delta/Delta
transformers, the same is represented in IEC as represented as Dd0, Yy0. Polarity
reversal in one of the windings would give 180 degree phase displacement which can
be represented by clock position 6. Such transformers can thus be represented as Dd6
or Yy6. It is also possible to rename the phases ABC to CAB or BCA, giving 120 or
240 degree displacements, represented by clock positions 4 & 8 . Polarity reversals in
one of the windings would provide clock positions 10 & 2. These can all be
represented for example: Yy0, Yy2, Yy4, Dd0, Dd6. ANSI wye/Delta or Delta/wye
transformers have the HV winding leading the LV winding by 30degrees. This can be
represented by Yd1 or Dy1. Again considering polarity reversals and renaming of
phases gives rise to other clock positions 4,7,5,11
The Settings for elimination of zero sequence currents for the individual windings.
When the end user enters all these parameters, transformer differential function
automatically calculates the matrix coefficients. During this calculations the following
rules are used:
For the phase reference, the first winding with set wye (Y) connection is always used. For
example, if the power transformer is a Yd1 power transformer, the HV winding (Y) is
taken as the phase reference winding. If the power transformer is a Dy1, then the LV
winding (y) is taken for the phase reference. If there is no wye connected winding, such
as in Dd0 type of power transformers, then the HV delta winding (D) is automatically
chosen as the phase reference winding.
The fundamental frequency differential currents are in general composed of currents of all
sequences, that is, the positive-, the negative-, and the zero-sequence currents. If the zerosequence currents are eliminated (see section "Optional Elimination of zero sequence
currents"), then the differential currents can consist only of the positive-, and the negativesequence currents. When the zero-sequence current is subtracted on one side of the power
transformer, then it is subtracted from each individual phase current.
As it can be seen from equation 1 and equation 2 the first entered winding (W1) is always
taken for ampere level reference (current magnitudes from all other sides are always
transferred to W1 side). In other words, within the differential protection function, all
differential currents and bias current are always expressed in HV side primary Amperes.
It can be shown that the values of the matrix A, B & C coefficients (see equation 1 and
equation 2) can be pre-calculated in advance depending on the relative phase shift between
the reference winding and other power transformer windings.
132
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Table 57 summarizes the values of the matrices for all standard phase shifts between
windings.
Table 57:
2 -1 -1
1
-1 2 -1
3
-1 -1 2
1 -1 0
1
0 1 -1
3
-1 0 1
1
1
1
3
-2
-2
-2
(Equation 6)
0 -1 1
1 0 -1
3
-1 1 0
-1 -1 2
1
2 -1 -1
3
-1 2 -1
-1 0 1
1 -1 0
3
0 1 -1
-2
1
1
3
1
(Equation 7)
EQUATION1234 V1 EN
(Equation 10)
(Equation 11)
EQUATION1235 V1 EN
EQUATION1231 V1 EN
0 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
(Equation 9)
EQUATION1233 V1 EN
(Equation 8)
EQUATION1232 V1 EN
(Equation 4)
0 -1 0
0 0 -1
-1 0 0
EQUATION1230 V1 EN
EQUATION1228 V1 EN
(Equation 5)
EQUATION1229 V1 EN
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
(Equation 3)
EQUATION1227 V1 EN
-2 1
1 -2
EQUATION1236 V1 EN
(Equation 12)
-1 0 0
0 -1 0
0 0 -1
EQUATION1237 V1 EN
(Equation 13)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
133
Section 6
Differential protection
-1 1 0
1
0 -1 1
3
1 0 -1
EQUATION1238 V1 EN
0 1 -1
-1 0 1
3
1 -1 0
1
1
-2
3
1
1
1
-2
EQUATION1242 V1 EN
(Equation 15)
EQUATION1241 V1 EN
0 1 0
0 0 1
1 0 0
EQUATION1240 V1 EN
(Equation 16)
(Equation 17)
-2
1
1
(Equation 18)
1 0 -1
1
-1 1 0
3
0 -1 1
EQUATION1244 V1 EN
(Equation 14)
-1 2 -1
1
-1 -1 2
3
2 -1 -1
EQUATION1239 V1 EN
0 0 -1
-1 0 0
0 -1 0
EQUATION1243 V1 EN
(Equation 19)
(Equation 20)
The HV wye (Y) connected winding will be used as the reference winding and zero
sequence currents shall be subtracted on that side
The LV winding is lagging for 150
With the help of table 57, the following matrix equation can be written for this power
transformer:
134
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
ID _ A
2 -1 -1 I _ A _ W 1
-1 0 1 I _ A _ W 2
ID _ B = 1 -1 2 -1 I _ B _ W 1 + Vr _ W 2 1 1 -1 0 I _ B _ W 2
3
Vr _ W 1 3
ID _ C
-1 -1 2 I _ C _ W 1
0 1 -1 I _ C _ W 2
EQUATION1810-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 21)
where:
ID_A
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase A (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_B
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase B (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_C
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase C (in W1 side primary amperes)
I_A_W1
I_B_W1
I_C_W1
I_A_W2
I_B_W2
I_C_W2
Vn_W1
Vn_W2
As marked in equation 1 and equation 2, the first term on the right hand side of the
equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from the W1
side to the fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated for eventual power
transformer phase shift. The second term on the right hand side of the equation, represents
the total contribution from the individual phase currents from the W2 side to the
fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated for eventual power transformer
phase shift and transferred to the power transformer W1 side. The third term on the right
hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase
currents from the W3 side to the fundamental frequency differential currents,
compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and transferred to the power
transformer W1 side. These current contributions are important, because they are used for
calculation of common bias current.
The fundamental frequency differential currents are the "usual" differential currents, the
magnitudes which are applied in a phase-wise manner to the operate - restrain
characteristic of the differential protection. The magnitudes of the differential currents
can be read as service values from the function and they are available as outputs
IDMAG_A, IDMAG_B, IDMAG_C from the differential protection function block. Thus
they can be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any
external or internal fault condition.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
135
Section 6
Differential protection
136
two-winding differential protection in the IED can on-line compensate for one load
tap changer within the protected power transformer
three-winding differential protection in the IED can on-line compensate for up to two
load tap changers within the protected power transformer
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Bias current
The bias current is calculated as the highest current amongst all individual winding current
contributions to the total fundamental frequency differential currents, as shown in
equation 1 and equation 2. All individual winding current contributions are already
referred to the power transformer winding one side (power transformer HV winding) and
therefore they can be compared regarding their magnitudes. There are six (or nine in the
case of a three-winding transformer) contributions to the total fundamental differential
currents, which are the candidates for the common bias current. The highest individual
current contribution is taken as a common bias (restrain) current for all three phases. This
"maximum principle" makes the differential protection more secure, with less risk to
operate for external faults and in the same time brings more meaning to the breakpoint
settings of the operate - restrain characteristic.
It shall be noted that if the zero-sequence currents are subtracted from the separate
contributions to the total differential current, then the zero-sequence component is
automatically eliminated from the bias current as well. This ensures that for secondary
injection from just one power transformer side the bias current is always equal to the
highest differential current regardless of the fault type. During normal through-load
operation of the power transformer, the bias current is equal to the maximum load current
from two (three) -power transformer windings.
The magnitudes of the common bias (restrain) current expressed in HV side amperes can
be read as service value from the function. At the same time it is available as an output
IBIAS from the differential protection function block. It can be connected to the
disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any external or internal fault
condition.
For application with so called "T" configuration, that is, two restraint CT inputs from one
side of the protected power transformer, such as in the case of breaker-and-a-half schemes
the primary CT ratings can be much higher than the rating of the protected power
transformer. In order to determine the bias current for such T configuration, the two
separate currents flowing in the T-side are scaled down to the protected power transform
level by means of additional settings. This is done in order to prevent unwanted desensitizing of the overall differential protection. In addition to that, the resultant currents
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
137
Section 6
Differential protection
(the sum of two currents) into the protected power transformer winding, which is not
directly measured is calculated, and included in the common bias calculation. The rest of
the bias calculation procedure is the same as in protection schemes without breaker-anda-half arrangements.
the protected power transformer cannot transform the zero sequence currents to the
other side.
the zero sequence currents can only flow on one side of the protected power
transformer.
In most cases, power transformers do not properly transform the zero sequence current to
the other side. A typical example is a power transformer of the wye-delta type, for example
YNd1. Transformers of this type do not transform the zero sequence quantities, but zero
sequence currents can flow in the grounded wye connected winding. In such cases, an
external ground-fault on the wye-side causes zero sequence current to flow on the wyeside of the power transformer, but not on the other side. This results in false differential
currents - consisting exclusively of the zero sequence currents. If high enough, these false
differential currents can cause an unwanted disconnection of the healthy power
transformer. They must therefore be subtracted from the fundamental frequency
differential currents if an unwanted trip is to be avoided.
For delta windings this feature shall be enabled only if a grounding transformer exists
within the differential zone on the delta side of the protected power transformer.
Removing the zero sequence current from the differential currents decreases to some
extent the sensitivity of the differential protection for internal ground-faults. In order to
counteract this effect to some degree, the zero sequence current is subtracted not only from
the three fundamental frequency differential currents, but from the bias current as well.
138
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
IdMin (Sensitivity in section 1, multiple of trans. HV side rated current set under the
parameter RatedCurrentW1)
EndSection1 (End of section 1, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current set
under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
EndSection2 (End of section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current set
under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
SlopeSection2 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current
set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
SlopeSection3 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current
set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
IdMin
EndSection1
EndSection2
SlopeSection2
SlopeSection3
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
139
Section 6
Differential protection
operate current
[ times IBase ]
Operate
unconditionally
UnrestrainedLimit
Operate
conditionally
2
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
SlopeSection3
1
IdMin
SlopeSection2
Restrain
0
0
EndSection1
EndSection2
restrain current
[ times IBase ]
en05000187-2.vsd
IEC05000187 V2 EN
Figure 33:
where:
The operate - restrain characteristic is tailor-made and can be designed freely by the user
after his needs. The default characteristic is recommended to be used. It gives good results
in a majority of applications. The operate - restrain characteristic has in principle three
sections with a section-wise proportionality of the operate value to the bias (restrain)
current. The reset ratio is in all parts of the characteristic equal to 0.95.
Section 1: This is the most sensitive part on the characteristic. In section 1, normal
currents flow through the protected circuit and its current transformers, and risk for higher
false differential currents is relatively low. An un-compensated on-load tap-changer is a
140
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
typical reason for existence of the false differential currents in this section. The slope in
section 1 is always zero percent.
Section 2: In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to cope with
false differential currents proportional to higher than normal currents through the current
transformers.
Section 3: The more pronounced slope in section 3 is designed to result in a higher
tolerance to substantial current transformer saturation at high through-fault currents,
which may be expected in this section.
The operate - restrain characteristic should be designed so that it can be expected that:
for internal faults, the operate (differential) currents are always with a good margin
above the operate - restrain characteristic
for external faults, the false (spurious) operate currents are with a good margin below
the operate - restrain characteristic
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
141
Section 6
Differential protection
IDNS _ A
2 -1 -1 INS _ W 1
-1 0 1 INS _ W 2
IDNS _ B = 1 -1 2 -1 a INS _ W 1 + Vn _ W 2 1 1 -1 0 a INS _ W 2
Vn _ W 1
3
3
IDNS _ C
-1 -1 2 a 2 INS _ W 1
0 1 -1 a 2 INS _ W 2
1
3
(Equation 23)
EQUATION1560 V1 EN
where:
1.
2.
3.
and where:
IDNS_A
IDNS_B
IDNS_C
INS_W1
INS_W2
Vn_W1
Vn_W2
a=e
j 120
=-
EQUATION1248 V1 EN
1
2
+ j
3
2
(Equation 24)
Because the negative sequence currents always form the symmetrical three phase current
system on each transformer side (that is, negative sequence currents in every phase will
always have the same magnitude and be phase displaced for 120 electrical degrees from
each other), it is only necessary to calculate the first negative sequence differential current
that is, IDNS_A.
142
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
As marked in equation 23, the first term on the right hand side of the equation, represents
the total contribution of the negative sequence current from the W1 side compensated for
eventual power transformer phase shift. The second term on the right hand side of the
equation, represents the total contribution of the negative sequence current from the W2
side compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and transferred to the power
transformer W1 side. These negative sequence current contributions are phasors, which
are further used in directional comparisons, to characterize a fault as internal or external.
See section "Internal/external fault discriminator" for more information.
The magnitudes of the negative sequence differential current expressed in the HV side A
can be read as service values from the function. In the same time it is available as outputs
IDMAG_NS from the differential protection function block. Thus, it can be connected to
the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any external or internal fault
condition.
IMinNegSeq
NegSeqROA
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
143
Section 6
Differential protection
90 deg
120 deg
If one or the
other of
currents is too
low, then no
measurement
is done, and
120 degrees
is mapped
Internal/external
fault boundary
NegSeqROA
(Relay
Operate
Angle)
180 deg
0 deg
IMinNegSeq
Internal
fault
region
External
fault
region
270 deg
en05000188-3-en.vsd
IEC05000188 V3 EN
Figure 34:
In order to perform directional comparison of the two phasors their magnitudes must be
high enough so that one can be sure that they are due to a fault. On the other hand, in order
to guarantee a good sensitivity of the internal/external fault discriminator, the value of this
minimum limit must not be too high. Therefore this limit value, called IminNegSeq, is
settable in the range of 0.02 to 0.20 times the IBase of the power transformer winding one.
The default value is 0.04. Note that, in order to enhance stability at higher fault currents,
the relatively very low threshold value IminNegSeq is dynamically increased at currents
higher than normal currents: if the bias current is higher than 110% of IBase ,then 10% of
the bias current is added to the IminNegSeq. Only if the magnitudes of both negative
sequence current contributions are above the actual limit, the relative position between
these two phasors is checked. If either of the negative sequence current contributions,
which should be compared, is too small (less than the set value for IminNegSeq), no
directional comparison is made in order to avoid the possibility to produce a wrong
decision. This magnitude check guarantees stability of the algorithm, when the power
transformer is energized. The setting NegSeqROA represents the Relay Operate Angle,
which determines the boundary between the internal and external fault regions. It can be
selected in a range from 30 degrees to 90 degrees, with a step of 0.1 degree. The default
value is 60 degrees. The default setting 60 degree favours security in comparison to
dependability.
144
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
If the negative sequence current contributions from the W1 and the W2 sides are in
phase, the fault is internal (that is, both phasors are within protected zone)
If the negative sequence currents contributions from W1 and W2 sides are 180
degrees out of phase, the fault is external (that is, W1 phasors is outside protected
zone)
For example, for any unsymmetrical external fault, ideally the respective negative
sequence current contributions from the W1 and W2 power transformer sides will be
exactly 180 degrees apart and equal in magnitude, regardless the power transformer turns
ratio and phase displacement. An example is shown in figure 35, which shows trajectories
of the two separate phasors representing the negative sequence current contributions from
the HV and LV sides of an Yd5 power transformer (after compensation of the transformer
turns ratio and phase displacement) by using equation 23) for an unsymmetrical external
fault. Observe that the relative phase angle between these two phasors is 180 electrical
degrees at any point in time. No current transformer saturation was assumed for this case.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
145
Section 6
Differential protection
"steady state"
for HV side
neg. seq. phasor
90
60
150
30
10
ms
180
0
0.1 kA
10
ms
0.2 kA
0.3 kA
0.4 kA
330
210
240
270
"steady state"
for LV side
neg. seq. phasor
en05000189.vsd
IEC05000189 V1 EN
Figure 35:
Under external fault conditions, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180 degrees.
During internal faults, the angle shall ideally be 0 degrees, but due to possible different
negative sequence source impedance angles on the W1 and W2 sides of the protected
power transformer, it may differ somewhat from the ideal zero value. However, during
heavy faults, CT saturation might cause the measured phase angle to differ from 180
degrees for an external, and from 0 degrees for an internal fault. See figure 36 for an
example of a heavy internal fault with transient CT saturation.
146
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Dire ctiona l Compa ris on Crite rion: Inte rna l fa ult a s s e e n from the HV s ide
90
e xcurs ion
from 0 de gre e s
due to CT
s a tura tion
60
120
35 ms
150
30
de finite ly
a n inte rna l
fa ult
180
e xte rna l
fa ult
re gion
0.5 kA
330
210
trip c o mmand
in 12 ms
Inte rna l fa ult
de cla re d 7 ms
a fte r inte rna l
fa ult occure d
1.0 kA
240
300
270
1.5 kA
HV s ide contribution to the tota l ne ga tive s e que nce diffe re ntia l curre nt in kA
Dire ctiona l limit (within the re gion de limite d by 60 de gre e s is inte rna l fa ult)
en05000190.vsd
IEC05000190 V1 EN
Figure 36:
It shall be noted that additional security measures are implemented in the internal/external
fault discriminator algorithm in order to guarantee proper operation with heavily saturated
current transformers. The trustworthy information on whether a fault is internal or
external is typically obtained in about 10ms after the fault inception, depending on the
setting IminNegSeq, and the magnitudes of the fault currents. During heavy faults,
approximately 5ms time to full saturation of the main CT is sufficient in order to produce
a correct discrimination between internal and external faults.
147
Section 6
Differential protection
traditional restrained differential protection - it is activated after the first start signal has
been placed.
If the same fault has been positively recognized as internal, then the unrestrained negative
sequence differential protection places its own trip request.
Any block signals by the harmonic and/or waveform criteria, which can block the
traditional differential protection are overridden, and the differential protection operates
quickly without any further delay.
This logic guarantees a fast disconnection of a faulty power transformer for any internal
fault.
If the same fault has been classified as external, then generally, but not unconditionally,
a trip command is prevented. If a fault is classified as external, the further analysis of the
fault conditions is initiated. If all the instantaneous differential currents in phases where
pickup signals have been issued are free of harmonic pollution, then a (minor) internal
fault, simultaneous with a predominant external fault can be suspected. This conclusion
can be drawn because at external faults, major false differential currents can only exist
when one or more current transformers saturate. In this case, the false instantaneous
differential currents are polluted by higher harmonic components, the 2nd, the 5th etc.
Sensitive negative sequence based turn-to-turn fault protection
The sensitive, negative sequence current based turn-to-turn fault protection detects the
low level faults, which are not detected by the traditional differential protection until they
develop into more severe faults, including power transformer iron core. The sensitive
protection is independent from the traditional differential protection and is a very good
complement to it. The essential part of this sensitive protection is the internal/external
fault discriminator. In order to be activated, the sensitive protection requires no pickup
signal from the traditional power transformer biased differential protection. If magnitudes
of HV and LV negative sequence current contributions are above the set limit for
IminNegSeq, then their relative positions are determined. If the disturbance is
characterized as an internal fault, then a separate trip request will be placed. Any decision
on the way to the final trip request must be confirmed several times in succession in order
to cope with eventual CT transients. This causes a short additional operating time delay
due to this security count. For very low level turn-to-turn faults the overall response time
of this protection is about 30ms.
148
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
calculations. The only difference is that the matrix algorithm is fed by instantaneous
values of currents, that is, samples.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
149
Section 6
Differential protection
Current [%]
400kV Currents
I_A
I_B
I_C
Time [cycles]
en05000343_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000343 V1 EN
Figure 37:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
151
Section 6
Differential protection
current on faulty phase. If the differential current is lower than 50% of IdMin, the open CT
condition cannot be detected. Therefore, the Open CT algorithm only detects an open CT
if the load on the power transformer is 10...110% of rated load and the differential current
is higher than 50% of IdMin on that phase. The search for an open CT starts 60 seconds
(50 seconds in 60 Hz systems) after the transformer is energized. The Open CT detection
feature can also be explicitly deactivated by setting: OpenCTEnable = 0 (Disabled ).
If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential
functions are blocked, except the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An alarm
signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to operational
personnel for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected. When the open CT
condition is removed (that is, the previously open CT is reconnected), the functions
remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which is also defined by a setting
(tOCTResetDelay). This is to prevent an eventual mal-operation after the reconnection of
the previously open CT secondary circuit.
The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the defective
CT secondary circuit. The algorithm clearly indicates the IED side, CT input and phase in
which an open CT condition has been detected. These indications are provided via the
following outputs from the Transformer differential protection function:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Output OPENCT provides instant information to indicate that an open CT circuit has
been detected.
Output OPENCTAL provides a time-delayed alarm that the open CT circuit has been
detected. Time delay is defined by the parameter tOCTAlarmDelay.
Integer output OPENCTIN provides information on the local HMI regarding which
open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 2).
Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding in
which phase an open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase A; 2= Phase B; 3= Phase
C).
Once the open CT condition is declared, the algorithm stops to search for further open CT
circuits. It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. Note that once the open
CT condition has been detected, it can be reset automatically within the differential
function. It is not possible to externally reset an open CT condition. To reset the open CT
circuit alarm automatically, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
If an open CT has been detected in a separate group of three CTs, the algorithm is reset
either when the missing current returns to the normal value, or when all three currents
152
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
become zero. After the reset, the open CT detection algorithm starts again to search for
open CT circuits within the protected zone.
6.1.7.2
Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for transformer differential protection are shown in the
following figures.
IED
Differential function
Phasors &
samples
Phasors &
samples
Phasor calculation of
individual phase current
Trafo
Data
Phasor calculation of
individual phase current
152
52
ADM
ID_A
ID_B
ID_C
IDMAG_NS
IDMAG_A
IDMAG_B
IDMAG_C
MAX
IBIAS
Figure 38:
Figure 38 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done in case of a twowinding transformer.
The following currents are inputs used in the power transformer differential protection
function. They must all be expressed in power system (primary) A.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
153
Section 6
Differential protection
1.
2.
3.
Instantaneous values of currents (samples) from the HV, and LV sides for twowinding power transformers, and from the HV, the first LV, and the second LV side
for three-winding power transformers.
Currents from all power transformer sides expressed as fundamental frequency
phasors with their real and imaginary parts. These currents are calculated within the
protection function by the fundamental frequency Fourier filters.
Negative sequence currents from all power transformer sides expressed as phasors.
These currents are calculated within the protection function by the symmetrical
components module.
2.
3.
154
Calculates three fundamental frequency differential currents and one common bias
current. The zero-sequence component can optionally be eliminated from each of the
three fundamental frequency differential currents and at the same time from the
common bias current.
Calculates three instantaneous differential currents. They are used for harmonic, and
waveform analysis. Instantaneous differential currents are useful for post-fault
analysis using disturbance recording
Calculates negative-sequence differential current. Contributions to it from both (all
three) power transformer sides are used by the internal/external fault discriminator to
detect and classify a fault as internal or external.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
BLKUNRES
a
IdUnre
AND
b>a
TRIPUNRE_A
IDMAG_A
IBIAS
PU_A
AND
BLOCK
BLKRES
AND
OR
IDA
NOT
2nd
Harmonic
BLK2H_A
5th
Harmonic
BLK5H_A
BLKWAV_A
Wave
block
Cross Block
from B or C phases
CrossBlockEn=Enabled
TRIPRES_A
AND
OR
AND
Cross Block
to B or C phases
ANSI05000168_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000168 V2 EN
Figure 39:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
155
Section 6
Differential protection
Internal/
External
Fault
discrimin
ator
Neg.Seq. Diff
Current
Contributions
EXTFAULT
INTFAULT
TRNSSENS
AND
TRNSUNR
AND
OpNegSeqDiff=On
IBIAS
t
0
b>a
Constant
BLKNSSEN
BLKNSUNR
BLOCK
PU_A
PU_B
OR
PU_C
en05000167_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000167 V1 EN
Figure 40:
TRIPRES_A
TRIPRES_B
TRIPRES_C
OR
TRIPRES
OR
TRIPUNRE
TRIPUNRE_A
TRIPUNRE_B
TRIPUNRE_C
TRNSSENS
OR
TRIP
TRNSUNR
en05000278_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000278 V1 EN
Figure 41:
156
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
OR
PICKUP
OR
BLK2H
OR
BLK5H
OR
BLKWAV
BLK2H_A
BLK2H_B
BLK2H_C
BLK5H_A
BLK5H_B
BLK5H_C
BLKWAV_A
BLKWAV_B
BLKWAV_C
en05000279_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000279 V1 EN
Figure 42:
2.
3.
4.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
157
Section 6
Differential protection
5.
6.
sequence differential protection TRNSSENS and common trip TRIP are issued. This
feature is called the sensitive negative sequence differential protection.
If a pickup signal is issued in a phase (see signal PU_A), even if the fault has been
classified as an external fault, then the instantaneous differential current of that phase
(see signal ID_A) is analyzed for the 2nd and the 5th harmonic contents (see the blocks
with the text inside: 2nd Harmonic; Wave block and 5th Harmonic). If there is less
harmonic pollution than allowed by the settings I2/I1Ratio, and I5/I1Ratio, (then the
outputs from the blocks 2nd harmonic and 5th harmonic is 0) then it is assumed that
a minor simultaneous internal fault must have occurred. Only under these conditions
a trip command is allowed (the signal TRIPRES_A is = 1). The cross-block logic
scheme is automatically applied under such circumstances. (This means that the cross
block signals from the other two phases B and C is not activated to obtain a trip on the
TRIPRES_A output signal in figure 39)
All pickup and blocking conditions are available as phase segregated as well as
common (that is three-phase) signals.
IDMAG_A Diff
a
a>b
b
IDiffAlarm
IDMAG_B Diff
a
a>b
&
IDiffAlarm
IDMAG_C Diff
0-tAlarmDelay
0
IDALARM
a
a>b
b
IDiffAlarm
ANSI06000546-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000546 V2 EN
Figure 43:
6.1.8
Technical data
Table 58:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operating characteristic
Adaptable
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 90%
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Minimum pickup
(5-60)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(5.0-100.0)% of fundamental
differential current
1.0% of In
Note: Fundamental
magnitude = 100% of In
(5.0-100.0)% of fundamental
differential current
5.0% of In
Note: Fundamental
magnitude = 100% of In
Wye or delta
011
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 10 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Min. = 10 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Id
6.2
6.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
HZPDIF
IEC 60617
identification
Id
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87
SYMBOL-CC V2 EN
6.2.2
Functionality
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87) functions can be used when
the involved CTs have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing characteristics. It
utilizes an external CT secondary current summation by wiring. Actually all CT
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
159
Section 6
Differential protection
secondary circuits which are involved in the differential scheme are connected in parallel.
External series resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor which are both mounted
externally to the IED, are also required.
The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED accessories in the Product Guide.
HZPDIF (87) can be used to protect generator stator windings, tee-feeders or busbars,
reactors, motors, auto-transformers, capacitor banks and so on. One such function block
is used for a high-impedance restricted earth fault protection. Three such function blocks
are used to form three-phase, phase-segregated differential protection. Several function
block instances (for example, six) can be available in a single IED.
6.2.3
Function block
HZPDIF (87)
ISI*
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
ALARM
MEASVOLT
ANSI05000363-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000363 V2 EN
Figure 44:
6.2.4
Signals
Table 59:
Name
Default
Description
ISI
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
Table 60:
Name
160
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm signal
MEASVOLT
REAL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
6.2.5
Table 61:
Name
Settings
HZPDIF (87) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
AlarmPickup
5 - 500
10
tAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TripPickup
10 - 900
100
R series
50 - 20000
Ohm
250
6.2.6
Monitored data
Table 62:
Name
MEASVOLT
6.2.7
Values (Range)
-
Unit
kV
Description
Measured RMS voltage on CT
secondary side
Operation principle
High impedance protection system is a simple technique which requires that all CTs, used
in the protection scheme, have relatively high knee point voltage, similar magnetizing
characteristic and the same ratio. These CTs are installed in all ends of the protected
object. In order to make a scheme all CT secondary circuits belonging to one phase are
connected in parallel. From the CT junction points a measuring branch is connected. The
measuring branch is a series connection of one variable setting resistor (or series resistor)
RS with high ohmic value and an over-current element. Thus, the high impedance
differential protection responds to the current flowing through the measuring branch.
However, this current is result of a differential voltage caused by this parallel CT
connection across the measuring branch. Non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil) is used in
order to protect entire scheme from high peak voltages which may appear during internal
faults. Typical high impedance differential scheme is shown in Figure 45. Note that only
one phase is shown in this figure.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
161
Section 6
Differential protection
RS
1
I> (50)
2
GUID-C7509DA3-F6AA-4BA0-9D08-EAA376663AFA V1 EN
Figure 45:
HZPDIF scheme
shows one main CT secondary winding connected in parallel with all other CTs, from
the same phase, connected to this scheme.
shows the scheme earthing point.
It is of utmost importance to insure that only one earthing point exists
in such protection scheme.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
162
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Due to the parallel CT connections the high impedance differential relay can only measure
one current and that is the relay operating quantity. That means that there is no any
stabilizing quantity (that is, bias) in high-impedance differential protection schemes.
Therefore in order to guaranty the stability of the differential relay during external faults
the operating quantity must not exceed the set pickup value. Thus, for external faults, even
with severe saturation of some of the current transformers, the voltage across the
measuring branch shall not rise above the relay set pickup value. To achieve that a suitable
value for setting resistor RS is selected in such a way that the saturated CT secondary
winding provides a much lower impedance path for the false differential current than the
measuring branch. In case of an external fault causing current transformer saturation, the
non-saturated current transformers drive most of the spill differential current through the
secondary winding of the saturated current transformer and not through the measuring
brunch of the relay. The voltage drop across the saturated current transformer secondary
winding appears also across the measuring brunch, however it will typically be relatively
small. Therefore, the pick-up value of the relay has to be set above this false operating
voltage.
See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.
6.2.7.1
Logic diagram
The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance differential
protection function HZPDIF (87), see Figure 46.
The function utilizes the raw samples from the single phase current input connected to it.
Thus the twenty samples per fundamental power system cycle are available to the
HZPDIF function. These current samples are first multiplied with the set value for the
used stabilizing resistor in order to get voltage waveform across the measuring branch.
The voltage waveform is then filtered in order to get its RMS value. Note that used
filtering is designed in such a way that it ensures complete removal of the DC current
component which may be present in the primary fault current. The voltage RMS value is
then compared with set Alarm and Trip thresholds. Note that the TRIP signal is
intentionally delayed on drop off for 30 ms within the function. The measured RMS
voltage is available as a service value from the function. The function has block and trip
block inputs available as well.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
163
Section 6
Differential protection
AlarmPickup
0-tAlarm
0
AlarmPickup
0.03s
0
en05000301_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000301 V1 EN
Figure 46:
6.2.8
Technical data
Table 63:
Function
164
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip voltage
(10-900) V
I=V/R
1.0% of In at I < In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
>95% at (30-900) V
Maximum continuous
power
V>Pickup2/SeriesResistor 200 W
Trip time at 0 to 10 x Vd
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x
Vd
Min. = 75 ms
Max. = 95 ms
2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Vd
Trip time at 0 to 2 x Vd
Min. = 25 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x
Vd
Min. = 50 ms
Max. = 70 ms
15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vd
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
6.3
6.3.1
Identification
Function description
Generator differential protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87G
GENPDIF
Id>
SYMBOL-NN V1 EN
6.3.2
Functionality
Short circuit between the phases of the stator windings causes normally very large fault
currents. The short circuit gives risk of damages on insulation, windings and stator iron
core. The large short circuit currents cause large forces, which can cause damage even to
other components in the power plant, such as turbine and generator-turbine shaft.
To limit the damage due to stator winding short circuits, the fault clearance must be as fast
as possible (instantaneous). If the generator block is connected to the power system close
to other generating blocks, the fast fault clearance is essential to maintain the transient
stability of the non-faulted generators.
Normally, the short circuit fault current is very large, that is, significantly larger than the
generator rated current. There is a risk that a short circuit can occur between phases close
to the neutral point of the generator, thus causing a relatively small fault current. The fault
current can also be limited due to low excitation of the generator. Therefore, it is desired
that the detection of generator phase-to-phase short circuits shall be relatively sensitive,
detecting small fault currents.
It is also of great importance that the generator differential protection does not trip for
external faults, with large fault currents flowing from the generator.
To combine fast fault clearance, as well as sensitivity and selectivity, the generator
differential protection is normally the best choice for phase-to-phase generator short
circuits.
Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G) is also well suited for protection of
shunt reactors or small busduct.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
165
Section 6
Differential protection
6.3.3
Function block
GENPDIF (87G)
I3PNCT1*
TRIP
I3PNCT2*
TRIPRES
I3PTCT1*
TRIPUNRE
I3PTCT2*
TRNSUNR
BLOCK
TRNSSENS
BLKRES
PICKUP
BLKUNRES
PU_A
BLKNSUNR
BFI_B
BLKNSSEN
BFI_C
DESENSIT
BLKH
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
ID_A
ID_B
ID_C
IDMAG_NS
IBIAS
ANSI11000212-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000212 V1 EN
Figure 47:
6.3.4
Signals
Table 64:
Name
166
Default
Description
I3PNCT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PNCT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PTCT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PTCT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKRES
BOOLEAN
BLKUNRES
BOOLEAN
BLKNSUNR
BOOLEAN
BLKNSSEN
BOOLEAN
DESENSIT
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Table 65:
Name
6.3.5
Table 66:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIPRES
BOOLEAN
TRIPUNRE
BOOLEAN
TRNSUNR
BOOLEAN
TRNSSENS
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_A
BOOLEAN
BFI_B
BOOLEAN
BFI_C
BOOLEAN
BLKH
BOOLEAN
OPENCT
BOOLEAN
OPENCTAL
BOOLEAN
ID_A
REAL
ID_B
REAL
ID_C
REAL
IDMAG_NS
REAL
IBIAS
REAL
Settings
GENPDIF (87G) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
IdMin
0.05 - 1.00
IB
0.01
0.25
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
IB
0.01
10.00
OpNegSeqDiff
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
IMinNegSeq
0.02 - 0.20
IB
0.01
0.04
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
167
Section 6
Differential protection
Table 67:
Name
Step
Default
EndSection1
0.20 - 1.50
IB
0.01
1.25
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
IB
0.01
3.00
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
OpCrossBlock
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 120.0
Deg
0.1
60.0
HarmDistLimit
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
10.0
TempIdMin
1.0 - 5.0
IdMin
0.1
2.0
AddTripDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
OperDCBiasing
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OpenCTEnable
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
1.000
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250
tOCTUnrstDelay
0.100 - 100.000
0.001
10.000
Table 68:
Name
Values (Range)
Description
Unit
Step
Default
Description
InvertCT2Curr
No
Yes
No
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
168
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
6.3.6
Monitored data
Table 69:
Name
6.3.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IDMAG_A
REAL
IDMAG_B
REAL
IDMAG_C
REAL
IDMAG_NS
REAL
Negative Sequence
Differential current; in primary
Amperes
IBIAS
REAL
Operation principle
The task of Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G) is to determine whether a
fault is within the protected zone, or outside the protected zone. The protected zone is
delimited by the position of current transformers, as shown in figure 48.
IEC06000430-2-en.vsd
IEC06000430 V2 EN
Figure 48:
If the fault is internal, the faulty generator must be quickly tripped, that is, disconnected
from the network, the field breaker tripped and the agent to the prime mover interrupted.
GENPDIF (87G) function always uses reference (default) directions of CTs towards the
protected generator as shown in figure 48. Thus, it always measures the currents on the
two sides of the generator with the same reference direction towards the generator
windings. With the orientation of CTs as in figure 48, the difference of currents flowing
in, and out, of a separate stator winding phase is simply obtained by summation of the two
currents fed to the differential protection function.
Numerical IEDs have brought a large number of advantages and new functionality to the
protective relaying. One of the benefits is the simplicity and accuracy of calculating
symmetrical components from individual phase quantities. Within the firmware of a
numerical IED, it is no more difficult to calculate negative-sequence components than it
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
169
Section 6
Differential protection
6.3.7.1
6.3.7.2
170
(Equation 25)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
One common fundamental frequency bias current is used. The bias current is the
magnitude of the highest measured current in the protected circuit. The bias current is not
allowed to drop instantaneously, instead, it decays exponentially with a predefined time
constant. These principles make the differential IED more secure, with less risk to operate
for external faults. The maximum principle brings as well more meaning to the
breakpoint settings of the operate-restrain characteristic.
EQUATION2049-ANSI V2 EN
IAn
IAt
Idiff
IAt
IAn
ANSI0700018_3_en.vsd
ANSI07000018 V3 EN
Figure 49:
Internal fault
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
171
Section 6
Differential protection
IAn
IAt
IAt
IAn
Idiff = 0
en07000019-2_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000019 V2 EN
Figure 50:
External fault
The non-stabilized (instantaneous) differential protection is used for very high differential
currents, where it must be beyond any doubt, that the fault is internal. This limit, (defined
by the setting UnrestrainedLimit), is a constant, not proportional dependent on the bias
(restrain) current. No harmonic or any other restrain is applied to this limit, which is,
therefore, called the unrestrained limit. The reset ratio of the unrestrained characteristic is
equal to 0.95.
The stabilized differential protection applies a differential (operate) current, and the
common bias (restrain) current, on the operate-restrain characteristic, as shown in
figure 52. Here, the actual limit, where the protection can operate, is dependent on the bias
(restrain) current. The operate value, is stabilized by the bias current. This operate
restrain characteristic is represented by a double-slope, double-breakpoint characteristic.
The restrained characteristic is determined by the following 5 settings:
172
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
EQUATION1246 V1 EN
Note that both slopes are calculated from the characteristics break points.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
173
Section 6
Differential protection
AddTripDelay: If the input DESENSIT is activated also the operation time of the
protection function can be increased by using the setting AddTripDelay.
operate current
[ times IBase ]
Operate
unconditionally
UnrestrainedLimit
Operate
conditionally
2
Section 1
TempIdMin
IdMin
Section 2
Section 3
SlopeSection3
1
SlopeSection2
Restrain
0
0
EndSection1
EndSection2
restrain current
[ times IBase ]
en06000637.vsd
IEC06000637 V2 EN
Figure 52:
Operate-restrain characteristic
174
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
6.3.7.3
Supplementary criteria
To relieve the burden of constructing an exact optimal operate-restrain characteristic, two
special features supplement the basic stabilized differential protection function, making
Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G) a very reliable one.
The supplementary criteria are:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
175
Section 6
Differential protection
after the fault. Due to the transient existence of the negative sequence system, faults can
be distinguished as internal or external, even for three-phase faults.
The internal or external fault discriminator responds to the relative phase angles of the
negative sequence fault currents at both ends of the stator winding. Observe that the source
of the negative sequence currents at unsymmetrical faults is at the fault point.
If the two negative sequence currents, as seen by the differential relay, flow in the
same direction (that is with the CTs oriented as in figure 48), the fault is internal. If
the two negative sequence currents flow in opposite directions, the fault is external.
Under external fault condition, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180. Under
internal fault condition, the angle is ideally 0, but due to possible different negativesequence impedance angles on both sides of the internal fault, it may differ somewhat
from 0.
The setting NegSeqROA, as shown in figure 53, represents the so called Relay Operate
Angle, which determines the boundary between the internal and external fault regions. It
can be selected in the range 30 to 90, with a step of 1. The default value is 60. The
default setting, 60, favors somewhat security in comparison to dependability.
Magnitudes of both negative-sequence currents which are to be compared as to their phase
positions in the complex plane must be high enough so that one can be sure that they are
due to a fault. The limit value IMinNegSeq is settable in the range [0.02 0.20] of the
protected generator rated current. Adaptability is introduced if the bias current is higher
than 150 % rated current. Adaptability is introduced 10 ms after this limit of 150 % rated
current has been crossed so that the internal/external discriminator is given the time to
detect correctly a fault before an eventual CT saturation sets in. The threshold
IMinNegSeq is dynamically increased by 4 % of the bias current, in case of internal faults,
and by 8 % of the bias current in case of external faults. Only if magnitudes of both
currents are above the limit IMinNegSeq, the angle between the two currents is calculated.
If any of the two currents is too small, no decision is taken regarding the relative position
of the fault, and this feature then remains inactive rather than to produce a wrong decision.
The relative angle is then assigned the value of 120 (2.094 radians). If this value persists,
then this is an indication that no directional comparison has been made. Neither internal,
nor external fault (disturbance) is declared in this case.
176
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
90 deg
120 deg
NegSeqROA
(Relay Operate Angle)
Internal fault
region
180 deg
0 deg
IminNegSeq
External fault
region
Internal /
external fault
boundary.
Default 60 deg
en06000433-2.vsd
IEC06000433 V2 EN
Figure 53:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
177
Section 6
Differential protection
current exceeds 1.5 times the rated current of the protected generator. Operation of this
protection is signaled on the output of the function as TRNSENS.
6.3.7.4
Harmonic restrain
Harmonic restrain is the classical restrain method traditionally used with power
transformer differential protections. The goal there was to prevent an unwanted trip
command due to magnetizing inrush currents at switching operations, due to magnetizing
currents at over-voltages, or external faults. Harmonic restrain is just as useful with
Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G). The harmonic analysis is only
executed in those phases, where pickup signals have been set.
There is no magnetizing inrush to a generator, but there may be some in case of shunt
reactors. The false initial differential currents of a shunt reactor have an appreciable
amount of higher harmonic currents.
At external faults dangerous false differential currents can arise for different reasons,
mainly due to saturation of one or more current transformers. The false differential
currents display in this case a considerable amount of higher harmonics, which can,
therefore, be used to prevent an unwanted trip of a healthy generator or shunt reactor.
If a fault is recognized as external by the internal/external fault discriminator, but
nevertheless one or more pickup signals have been set, the harmonic analysis is initiated
in the phases with pickup signal, as previously described. If all of the instantaneous
differential currents, where trip signals have been set, are free of higher harmonics (that
is the cross-block principle is imposed temporarily), a (minor) internal fault is assumed to
have happened simultaneously with a predominant external one. A trip command is then
allowed.
6.3.7.5
178
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
interruption of one CT phase current at a time. If two or even all three-phase currents of
one set of CTs are accidentally interrupted at precisely the same time, this feature cannot
operate. Transformer differential protection generates a trip signal if the false differential
current is sufficiently high. An open CT circuit is typically detected in 1214 ms, and if
the load in the protected circuit is relatively high, about the nominal load, the unwanted
trip cannot always be prevented. Still, the information about what was the cause of the
open CT secondary circuit, is vital.
The principle applied to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method, similar
to the waveform check used by the Power transformer differential protection in order to
detect the magnetizing inrush condition. The open CT detection principle is based on the
fact that for an open CT, the current in the phase with the open CT suddenly drops to zero
(that is, as seen by the protection), while the currents of the other two phases continue as
before.
The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions, that is,
with the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load (10...110% of the rated load).
If the load currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition cannot be detected. In
addition to load condition requirement, Open CT function also checks the differential
current on faulty phase. If the differential current is lower than 50% of IdMin, the open CT
condition cannot be detected. Therefore, the Open CT algorithm only detects an open CT
if the load on the power transformer is 10...110% of rated load and the differential current
is higher than 50% of IdMin on that phase. The search for an open CT starts 60 seconds
(50 seconds in 60 Hz systems) after the transformer is energized. The Open CT detection
feature can also be explicitly deactivated by setting: OpenCTEnable = 0 (Disabled ).
If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential
functions are blocked, except the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An alarm
signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to operational
personnel for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected. When the open CT
condition is removed (that is, the previously open CT is reconnected), the functions
remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which is also defined by a setting
(tOCTResetDelay). This is to prevent an eventual mal-operation after the reconnection of
the previously open CT secondary circuit.
The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the defective
CT secondary circuit. The algorithm clearly indicates the IED side, CT input and phase in
which an open CT condition has been detected. These indications are provided via the
following outputs from the Transformer differential protection function:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
179
Section 6
Differential protection
1.
2.
3.
4.
Output OPENCT provides instant information to indicate that an open CT circuit has
been detected.
Output OPENCTAL provides a time-delayed alarm that the open CT circuit has been
detected. Time delay is defined by the parameter tOCTAlarmDelay.
Integer output OPENCTIN provides information on the local HMI regarding which
open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 2).
Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding in
which phase an open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase A; 2= Phase B; 3= Phase
C).
Once the open CT condition is declared, the algorithm stops to search for further open CT
circuits. It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. Note that once the open
CT condition has been detected, it can be reset automatically within the differential
function. It is not possible to externally reset an open CT condition. To reset the open CT
circuit alarm automatically, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
If an open CT has been detected in a separate group of three CTs, the algorithm is reset
either when the missing current returns to the normal value, or when all three currents
become zero. After the reset, the open CT detection algorithm starts again to search for
open CT circuits within the protected zone.
6.3.7.6
180
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Calculation
Idiff and Ibias
Magnitude
Idiff and Ibias
Diff.prot.
characteristic
TRIP
Signals
Pickup
phase
selective
PICKUP
Signals
BLOCK
Signals
Samples IAN, IBN,ICN
Calculation
instantaneous
Idiff
Samples Idiff
Hamonic
analysis: DC,
2nd and 5th
Harm.
Block
Pickup
and trip
logic
INTFAULT
EXTFAULT
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
Calculation
negative
sequence
Idiff
Internal/
External Fault
Discriminator
and Sensitive
differential
protection
Analog
Outputs
Intern/
extern
Fault
en06000434-2_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000434 V2 EN
Figure 54:
Simplified logic diagrams of the function are shown in figures 55, 56, 57 and 58.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
181
Section 6
Differential protection
BLKUNRES
a
IdUnre
AND
b>a
TRIPUNRE_A
IDMAG_A
IBIAS
PU_A
AND
BLOCK
BLKRES
AND
OR
ID_A
TRIPRES_A
NOT
2nd and
5th
Harmonic
BLKH
Cross Block
from B or C
AND
Cross Block
To B or C
AND
OpCrossBlock=Yes
ANSI07000020-3-en.vsd
ANSI07000020 V3 EN
Figure 55:
Internal/
External
Fault
discrimin
ator
Neg.Seq. Diff
Current
Contributions
Constant
INTFAULT
TRNSSENS
AND
OpNegSeqDiff=On
IBIAS
EXTFAULT
b>a
BLKNSSEN
BLKNSUNR
BLOCK
AND
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
TRNSUNR
OR
en07000021_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000021 V2 EN
Figure 56:
182
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
OR
PICKUP
OR
BLKH
BLKH_A
BLKH_B
BLKH_C
en07000022_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000022 V1 EN
Figure 57:
TRIPRES_A
TRIPRES_B
TRIPRES_C
OR
TRIPRES
OR
TRIPUNRE
TRIPUNRE_A
TRIPUNRE_B
TRIPUNRE_C
TRIP
OR
TRNSSENS
TRNSUNR
en07000023_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000023 V1 EN
Figure 58:
6.3.8
Technical data
Table 70:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1-50)p.u. of IBase
Reset ratio
> 95%
Minimum pickup
(0.051.00)p.u. of
1.0% of In
(0.020.20)p.u. of
1.0% of In
Min. = 25 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Min. = 10 ms
Max. = 25 ms
IBase
IBase
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
183
Section 6
Differential protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 15 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x
IdUnre
10 ms typically
Min. = 25 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Min. = 30 ms
Max. = 45 ms
6.4
6.4.1
Identification
Function description
Restricted earth-fault protection, low
impedance
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87N
REFPDIF
IdN/I
SYMBOL-AA V1 EN
6.4.2
Functionality
Restricted fault protection, low-impedance function REFPDIF (87N) can be used on all
solidly or low-impedance grounded windings. The REFPDIF (87N) function provides
high sensitivity and high speed tripping as it protects each winding separately and thus
does not need inrush stabilization.
The REFPDIF function is a percentage biased function with an additional zero sequence
current directional comparison criterion. This gives excellent sensitivity and stability
during through faults.
REFPDIF can also protect autotransformers. Five currents are measured at the most
complicated configuration as shown in Figure 59.
184
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
152
252
352
452
xx05000058_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000058 V1 EN
Figure 59:
6.4.3
Function block
REFPDIF (87N)
I3P*
TRIP
I3PW1CT1*
PICKUP
I3PW1CT2*
DIR_INT
I3PW2CT1*
BLK2H
I3PW2CT2*
IRES
BLOCK
IN
IBIAS
IDIFF
ANGLE
2NDHARM
ANSI14000059-1-en.vsd
ANSI06000251 V3 EN
Figure 60:
6.4.4
Signals
Table 71:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
185
Section 6
Differential protection
Name
Type
I3PW2CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Name
Table 73:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 72:
6.4.5
Default
I3PW2CT1
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
DIR_INT
BOOLEAN
BLK2H
BOOLEAN
IRES
REAL
IN
REAL
IBIAS
REAL
IDIFF
REAL
ANGLE
REAL
2NDHARM
REAL
Settings
REFPDIF (87N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
IdMin
4.0 - 100.0
%IB
0.1
10.0
CTFactorPri1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTFactorPri2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTFactorSec1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTFactorSec2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Table 74:
Name
ROA
186
Unit
Deg
Step
1
Default
60
Description
Relay operate angle for zero sequence
directional feature
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Table 75:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
6.4.6
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 76:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IRES
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental
frequency residual current
IN
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental
frequency ground current
IBIAS
REAL
IDIFF
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current
ANGLE
REAL
deg
2NDHARM
REAL
6.4.7
Operation principle
6.4.7.1
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
187
Section 6
Differential protection
The following facts may be observed from Figure 61 and Figure 62, where the three line
CTs are shown as connected together in order to measure the residual 3Io current, for the
sake of simplicity.
ANSI05000724 V3 EN
Figure 61:
188
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
Uzs
Uzs
IN
ANSI05000725 V3 EN
Figure 62:
1.
2.
For an external ground fault (Figure 61), the residual current 3Io and the neutral
current IN have equal magnitude, but they are seen within the IED as 180 degrees outof-phase if the current transformers are connected as in Figure 61, which is the ABB
recommended connection. The differential current becomes zero as both CTs ideally
measure exactly the same component of the ground fault current.
For an internal fault, the total ground fault current is composed generally of two zero
sequence currents. One zero sequence current (3IZS1) flows towards the power
transformer neutral point and into the ground, while the other zero sequence current
(3IZS2) flows into the connected power system. These two primary currents can be
expected to have approximately opposite directions (about the same zero sequence
impedance angle is assumed on both sides of the ground fault). However, on the
secondary CT sides of the current transformers, they will be approximately in phase
if the current transformers are oriented as in Figure 59, which is the orientation
recommended by ABB. The magnitudes of the two currents may be different,
dependent on the magnitudes of zero sequence impedances of both sides. No current
can flow towards the power system, if the only point where the system is grounded,
is at the protected power transformer. Likewise, no current can flow into the power
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
189
Section 6
Differential protection
3.
4.
system, if the winding is not connected to the power system (circuit breaker open and
power transformer energized from the other side).
For both internal and external ground faults, the current in the neutral connection IN
always has the same direction, which is towards the ground (except in case of
autotransformers where the direction can vary).
The two internally processed zero sequence currents are 3Io and IN. The vectorial sum
is the REFPDIF (87N) differential current, which is equal to Idiff = IN +3Io .
The line zero sequence (residual) current is calculated from 3 line (terminal) currents. A
bias quantity must give stability against false operations due to high through fault currents.
To stabilize REFPDIF at external faults, a fixed bias characteristic is implemented.
REFPDIF (87N) should also be stable against heavy phase-to-phase internal faults, not
including ground. These faults may also give false zero sequence currents due to saturated
line CTs. Such faults, however are without neutral current, and can thus be eliminated as
a source of danger.
As an additional measure against unwanted operation, a directional check is made in
agreement with the above points 1 and 2. Operation is only allowed if the currents 3Io and
IN (as shown in Figure 61 and Figure 62) are both within the operating region. By taking
a smaller ROA, REFPDIF (87N) can be made more stable under heavy external fault
conditions, as well as under the complex conditions, when external faults are cleared by
other protections.
6.4.7.2
190
Second
slope
% IBase
100
% IBase
125
%
70
100
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
The differential protection REFPDIF (87N) calculates a differential current and a bias
current. In case of internal ground faults, the differential current is theoretically equal to
the total ground fault current. The bias current is supposed to give stability to
REFPDIF(87N). The bias current is a measure of how high the currents are and how
difficult the conditions are under which the CTs operate. With a high bias, difficult
conditions can be suspected, and it will be more likely that the calculated differential
current has a component of a false current, primarily due to CT saturation. This law is
formulated by the operate-bias characteristic. This characteristic divides the Idiff - Ibias
plane in two areas. The area above the operate-bias characteristic is the operate area, while
the one below is the block area, see Figure 63.
Figure 63:
6.4.7.3
Idiff = IN + 3 Io
EQUATION1533 V1 EN
(Equation 29)
where:
IN is current in the power transformer neutral as a fundamental frequency phasor.
3Io is residual current of the power transformer terminal currents as a phasor.
If there are two three-phase CT inputs, as in breaker-and-a-half configurations, see figure
10, then their respective residual currents are added within the REFPDIF (87N) function
so that:
I3PW1 = I3PW1CT1 + I3PW1CT2
where the signals are defined in the input and output signal tables for REFPDIF (87N).
The bias current is a measure (expressed internally as a true fundamental frequency
current in Amperes) of how difficult the conditions are under which the instrument current
transformers operate. Dependent on the magnitude of the bias current, the corresponding
zone (section) of the operate-bias characteristic is applied, when deciding whether to trip,
or not to trip. In general, the higher the bias current, the higher the differential current
required to produce a trip.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
191
Section 6
Differential protection
The bias current is the highest current of all separate input currents to REFPDIF (87N),
that is, of current in phase A, phase B, phase C, and the current in the neutral point
(designated as IN in Figure 61 and in Figure 62).
If there are two feeders included in the zone of protection of REFPDIF (87N), as in case
of an auto-transformer with two feeders included on both sides, then the respective bias
current is found as the relatively highest of the following currents:
current[1] = max (I3PW1CT1)
1
CTFactorPri1
(Equation 30)
EQUATION1526 V1 EN
1
CTFactorPri2
(Equation 31)
EQUATION1527 V1 EN
1
CTFactorSec1
(Equation 32)
EQUATION1528 V1 EN
1
CTFactorSec2
(Equation 33)
EQUATION1529 V1 EN
current[5] = IN
(Equation 34)
EQUATION1530 V1 EN
The bias current is thus generally equal to none of the input currents. If all primary ratings
of the CTs were equal to IBase, then the bias current would be equal to the highest current
in Amperes. IBase shall be set equal to the rated current of the protected winding where
REFPDIF (87N) function is applied.
6.4.7.4
192
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
The detection of external ground faults is based on the fact that for such a fault a high
neutral current appears first, while a false differential current only appears if one or more
current transformers saturate.
An external fault is thus assumed to have occurred when a high neutral current suddenly
appears, while at the same time the differential current Idiff remains low, at least for a
while. This condition must be detected before a trip request is placed within REFPDIF.
Any search for external fault is aborted if a trip request has been placed. A condition for
a successful detection is that it takes not less than 4ms for the first CT to saturate.
For an internal fault, a true differential current develops immediately, while for an external
fault it only develops if a CT saturates. If a trip request comes first, before an external fault
could be positively detected, then it must be an internal fault.
If an external fault has been detected, then the REFPDIF is temporarily desensitized.
Directional criterion
The directional criterion is applied in order to positively distinguish between internal and
external ground faults. This check is an additional criterion, which should prevent
malfunctions at heavy external ground faults, and during the disconnection of such faults
by other protections. Ground faults on lines connecting the power transformer occur much
more often than ground faults on a power transformer winding. It is important therefore
that the Restricted ground fault protection, low impedance (REFPDIF87N) must remain
stable during an external fault, and immediately after the fault has been cleared by some
other protection.
For an external ground faults with no CT saturation, the residual current in the lines (3Io)
and the neutral current (IN in Figure 61) are theoretically equal in magnitude and are 180
degrees out-of-phase. The current in the neutral (IN) serves as a directional reference
because it has the same direction for both internal and external ground faults. The
directional criterion in REFPDIF (87N) protection makes it a current-polarized
protection.
However, if one or more CTs saturate under external fault conditions, then the measured
currents 3Io and IN may no longer be equal, nor will their positions in the complex plane
be exactly 180 degrees apart. There is a risk that the resulting false differential current Idiff
enters the operate area of the operate-restrain characteristic under external fault
conditions. If this happens, a directional test may prevent a malfunction.
A directional check is only executed if:
1.
2.
a trip request signal has been issued (REFPDIF (87N) function PICKUP signal set to
1)
the residual current in lines (3Io) is at least 3% of the IBase current.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
193
Section 6
Differential protection
If a directional check is either unreliable or not possible to do, due to too small currents,
then the direction is cancelled as a condition for an eventual trip.
If a directional check is executed, the REFPDIF (87N) protection operation is only
allowed if currents 3Io and IN (as seen in Figure 61 and Figure 62) are both within the
operating region determined by the set value of ROA, in degrees.
ROA = 60 to 90 degrees; where ROA stands for Relay Operate Angle.
6.4.7.5
6.
7.
194
Check if current in the neutral Ineutral (IN) is less than 50% of the base sensitivity
Idmin. If yes, only service values are calculated, then REFPDIF (87N) algorithm is
not used.
If current in the Ineutral (IN) is more than 50% of Idmin, then determine the bias
current Ibias.
Determine the differential (operate) current Idiff as a phasor, and calculate its
magnitude.
Check if the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is above the operate-bias characteristic. If yes,
increment the trip request counter by 1. If the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to be below
the operate-bias characteristic, then the trip request counter is reset to zero.
If the trip request counter is still zero, search for an eventual heavy external ground
fault. The search is only made if the neutral current is at least 50% of the Idmin
current. If an external ground fault has been detected, a flag is set which remains set
until the external fault has been cleared. The external fault flag is reset to zero when
Ineutral falls below 50% of the base sensitivity Idmin. Any search for an external fault
is aborted if trip request counter is more than zero.
As long as the external fault persists, an additional temporary trip condition is
introduced. This means that REFPDIF (87N) is temporarily desensitized.
If point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to be above the operate-bias characteristic), so that trip
request counter is more than zero, a directional check can be made. The directional
check is made only if Iresidual (3Io) is more than 3% of the IBase current. If the result
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 6
Differential protection
8.
9.
6.4.8
of the check means external fault, then the internal trip request is reset. If the
directional check cannot be executed, then direction is no longer a condition for a trip.
When neutral current, residual current and bias current are within some windows and
some timing criteria are fulfilled, the ratio of 2nd to fundamental harmonic is
calculated. If it is found to be above 60% the trip request counter is reset and TRIP
remains zero.
Finally, a check is made if the trip request counter is equal to, or higher than 2. If yes,
and at the same instance of time tREFtrip, the actual bias current at this instance of time
tREFtrip is at least 50% of the highest bias current Ibiasmax (Ibiasmax is the highest
recording of any of the three phase currents measured during the disturbance), then
REFPDIF (87N) sets output TRIP to 1. If the counter is less than 2, the TRIP signal
remains zero.
Technical data
Table 78:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip characteristic
Adaptable
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
>95%
(4.0-100.0)% of IBase
1.0% of In
Directional characteristic
2.0 degrees
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
1.0% of In
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
195
196
Section 7
Impedance protection
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.1
7.1.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
ZMHPDIS
ANSI/IEEE
C37.2 device
number
21
S00346 V1 EN
7.1.2
Functionality
The numerical mho line distance protection is a, up to four zone full scheme protection for
detection of short circuit and earth faults. The numerical mho line distance protection is a
four zone full scheme protection for detection of short circuit and earth faults.
The full scheme technique provides back-up protection of power lines with high
sensitivity and low requirement on remote end communication.
The four zones have fully independent measuring and settings, which gives high
flexibility for all types of lines.
Built-in selectable zone timer logic is also provided in the function.
The function can be used as under impedance back-up protection for transformers and
generators.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
197
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.1.3
Function block
ZMHPDIS (21)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TR_A
CURR_INP*
TR_B
VOLT_INP*
TR_C
POL_VOLT*
TRPG
BLOCK
TRPP
BLKZ
PICKUP
BLKZMTD
PU_A
BLKHSIR
PU_B
BLKTRIP
PU_C
BLKPG
PHG_FLT
BLKPP
PHPH_FLT
EXTNST
PU_TIMER
INTRNST
DIRCND
PHSEL*
LDCND
ANSI06000423-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000423 V2 EN
Figure 64:
7.1.4
Signals
Table 79:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
CURR_INP
GROUP
SIGNAL
VOLT_INP
GROUP
SIGNAL
POL_VOLT
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
BLKZMTD
BOOLEAN
BLKHSIR
BOOLEAN
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
BLKPG
BOOLEAN
BLKPP
BOOLEAN
EXTNST
BOOLEAN
External start
INTRNST
BOOLEAN
Internal start
198
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Type
PHSEL
INTEGER
LDCND
INTEGER
Name
Table 81:
Name
Description
INTEGER
Table 80:
7.1.5
Default
DIRCND
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip General
TR_A
BOOLEAN
Trip phase A
TR_B
BOOLEAN
Trip phase B
TR_C
BOOLEAN
Trip phase C
TRPG
BOOLEAN
Trip phase-to-ground
TRPP
BOOLEAN
Trip phase-to-phase
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Pickup General
PU_A
BOOLEAN
Pickup phase A
PU_B
BOOLEAN
Pickup phase B
PU_C
BOOLEAN
Pickup phase C
PHG_FLT
BOOLEAN
Pickup phase-to-ground
PHPH_FLT
BOOLEAN
Pickup phase-to-phase
PU_TIMER
BOOLEAN
Pick up timer
Settings
ZMHPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
DirMode
Disabled
Offset
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction mode
LoadEncMode
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
ReachMode
Overreach
Underreach
Overreach
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
199
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ZnTimerSel
Timers seperated
Timers linked
Internal start
Start from PhSel
External start
Timers seperated
OpModePG
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ZPG
0.005 - 3000.000
Ohm/p
0.001
30.000
ZAngPG
10 - 90
Deg
85
KN
0.00 - 3.00
0.01
0.80
KNAng
-180 - 180
Deg
-15
ZRevPG
0.005 - 3000.000
Ohm/p
0.001
30.000
tPG
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinPUPG
10 - 30
%IB
20
OpModePP
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ZPP
0.005 - 3000.000
Ohm/p
0.001
30.000
ZAngPP
10 - 90
Deg
85
ZRevPP
0.005 - 3000.000
Ohm/p
0.001
30.000
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinPUPP
10 - 30
%IB
20
Table 82:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OffsetMhoDir
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
OpModetPG
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OpModetPP
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
200
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 83:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
Default
7.1.6
Operation principle
7.1.6.1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which
means that each fault loop for phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase faults are
executed in parallel for all zones.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a phase selector element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one independent
distance protection function with six measuring elements.
7.1.6.2
Impedance characteristic
The Mho distance function ZMHPDIS is present with four instances so that four separate
zones could be designed. Each instance can be selected to be either forward or reverse with
positive sequence polarized mho characteristic; alternatively self polarized offset mho
characteristics is also available. One example of the operating characteristic is shown in
Figure 65 A) where zone 5 is selected offset mho.
The directional mho characteristic of Figure 65 has a dynamic expansion due to the source
impedance. Instead of crossing the origin as for the mho to the left of Figure 65, which is
only valid where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the
coordinates of the negative source impedance giving an expansion of the circle of Figure
65 D) .
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
201
Section 7
Impedance protection
D
jx
Mho, zone4
Zs=0
Mho, zone3
Mho, zone2
Mho, zone1
Zs=Z1
Zs=2Z1
R
IEC11000223-2-en.vsd
IEC11000223 V2 EN
Figure 65:
Mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the mho characteristic
The polarization quantities used for the mho circle are 100% memorized positive
sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho circle
during faults than a plain cross polarized characteristic. However, if the source impedance
is high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the security of the function
too much with high loading and mild power swing conditions.
The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cuts off a section of
the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the setting parameter
LoadEnchMode to Enabled. Enabling of the load encroachment function increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering with the load impedance. The
algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the Faulty phase identification with load
encroachment for mho function FMPSPDIS (21), where also the relevant settings can be
found. Information about the load encroachment from FMPSPDIS (21) to the zone
measurement is given in binary format to the input signal LDCND.
7.1.6.3
202
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Each zone can be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter
DirModeSel.
The mho characteristics can be classified into - Offset or Directional. The directional mho
characteristics can be set to Offset, Forward or Reverse by the setting parameter
DirMode. The offset mho characteristic can be set to Forward or Reverse or NonDirectional by the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir.
The operation for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase fault can be individually switched
Enabled and Disabled by the setting parameter OpModePG and OpModePP.
For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is possible to
improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to Underreach. In this mode the
reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by 20% and the filtering is also
introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring. If the ReachMode is set to
Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and no extra filtering introduced. The
latter setting is recommended for overreaching pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3 elements and
reverse zone where overreaching on transients is not a major issue either because of less
likelihood of overreach with higher settings or the fact that these elements do not initiate
tripping unconditionally.
The offset Mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by the
setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a directional line
is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from the directional element
and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal to the input DIRCND.
When DirMode is set to offset and offsetMhoDir is set as Non-Directional, ZDMRDIR
does not have any effect on the measurement loop and operation of the function. When
DirMode is selected as Forward or Reverse, a directional line is introduced. Information
about the directional line is given from the directional element (ZDMRDIR) and given to
the measuring element as binary coded signal to the input DIRCND.
The zone reach for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault is set individually in
polar coordinates.
The impedance is set by the parameters ZPG and ZPP and the corresponding angles by the
parameters ZAngPG and ZAngPP.
Compensation for ground-return path for faults involving ground is done by setting the
parameter KN and KNAng where KN is the magnitude of the ground-return path and
KNAng is the angle of the ground-return path.
KN =
Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1
IECEQUATION14023 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
(Equation 35)
203
Section 7
Impedance protection
KNAng = ang
Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1
)
(Equation 36)
EQUATION1807-ANSI V1 EN
where
Z0
Z1
204
Section 7
Impedance protection
activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the high speed part of the algorithm for high
SIR values
activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals
activating the input BLKPG blocks the phase-to-ground fault loop outputs
activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs
The activation of input signal BLKZ can be made by external fuse failure function or from
the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In both cases the
output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the input BLKZ in the
Mho distance function block (ZMHPDIS, 21)
The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been detected by
ZSMGAPC to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall be connected to the
BLKZMTD output signal of ZSMGAPC function.
At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built-in
resonance circuit in the CVT, which reduce the secondary voltage for a while. The input
BLKHSIR is connected to the output signal HSIR on ZSMGAPC for increasing of the
filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when permissive underreach scheme is
selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.
7.1.6.4
Theory of operation
The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of an operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor by 90
degrees or more, the function operates and gives a trip output.
Phase-to-phase fault
Mho
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in Figure 66. The condition for deriving the
angle is according to equation 37.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
(Equation 37)
205
Section 7
Impedance protection
where
V AB
EQUATION1790-ANSI
V1 EN
I AB
EQUATION1791-ANSI
V1 EN
ZPP
Vpol
The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage (VAB for
phase A to B fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of the Mho circle for
close in faults.
Operation occurs if 90270
IABX
I AB ZPP
V pol
V AB
IABR
en07000109_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000109 V1 EN
Figure 66:
206
Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-to-B fault
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the setting
parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has the settable
angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180.
The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle between the two
compensated voltages Vcomp1 and Vcomp2 is greater than or equal to 90 (figure 67).
The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for A-to-B fault can be defined according to equation 38.
V -(-IAB ZRevPP)
b = arg
V -IAB ZPP
(Equation 38)
EQUATION1792-ANSI V1 EN
where
EQUATION1801 V1 EN
ZRevPP
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in reverse direction
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
207
Section 7
Impedance protection
IABjX
I AB ZPP
- I AB
Z Re vPP
en07000110_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000110 V1 EN
Figure 67:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase A-to-B
fault.
ArgDir
is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR (21D).
ArgNegRes
is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR (21D).
The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the mho
directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See Directional
impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR ,21D) for information about the
mho directional element.
208
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
IABjX
ZPP
VAB
ArgNegRes
IAB
ArgDir
en07000111_ansi
ANSI07000111 V1 EN
Figure 68:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
209
Section 7
Impedance protection
X
ZPP
ArgNegRes
IAB
ArgDir
VAB
ZRevPP
en06000469_ansi.ep
ANSI06000469 V1 EN
Figure 69:
Phase-to-ground fault
Mho
The measuring of ground faults uses ground-return compensation applied in a
conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence from
the ground-return path.
For a ground fault in phase A, the compensation voltage Vcomp can be derived, as shown
in Figure 70.
210
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Vcomp = V
pol
- I A Z loop
(Equation 39)
EQUATION1793-ANSI V1 EN
where
Vpol
Zloop
Z1+ZN = Z 1 1 + KN
where
Z1
KN
The angle between the Vcomp and the polarize voltage Vpol for a A-to-ground fault is
(Equation 40)
EQUATION1592 V1 EN
where
VA
IA
IN
KN
Z0-Z1
3 Z1
the setting parameter for the zero sequence
compensation consisting of the magnitude KN and the
angle KNAng.
Vpol
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
211
Section 7
Impedance protection
IAX
IAZN
V comp
I A Z loop
IAZPE
Vpol
f
IA (Ref)
IAR
en06000472_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000472 V1 EN
Figure 70:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-toground fault
212
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
IABjX
V comp1 = VA - IA ZPE
IA ZPE
VA
- IA Z RevPe
en 06000465_ansi. vsd
ANSI06000465 V1 EN
Figure 71:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase A-toground fault
ArgDir
is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR (21D).
ArgNegRes
is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR (21D).
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
213
Section 7
Impedance protection
IA jX
VA
ArgNegRes
IAR
IA
ArgDir
en 06000466_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000466 V1 EN
Figure 72:
Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for A-toground fault
214
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
X
ZPE
ArgNegRes
IA
ArgDir
VA
ZRevPE
en06000470_ansi.ep
ANSI06000470 V1 EN
Figure 73:
7.1.6.5
Simplified characteristic for offset mho in reverse direction for A-toground fault
Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above.
Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 74.
The ZMHPDIS (21) function block is used in the IED for each zone.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
215
Section 7
Impedance protection
The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from Phase
selection with load encroachment function FMPSPDIS (21) within the IED, which are
converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for
each condition separately. Input signal PHSEL is connected from FMPSPDIS (21)
function output signal PHSCND.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the relevant signals
depending on the setting of the parameter DirMode. Input signal DIRCND must be
configured to the STDIRCND output signal on ZDMRDIR (21D) function.
OffsetMhoDir=
Non-directional
AND
AND
DirMode=Offset
PHSEL
T
F
AND
AND
LoadEnchMode=
On/Off
LDCND
T
F
True
AND
Release
DIRCND
OffsetMhoDir=
Forward/Reverse
DirMode=
Forward/Reverse
AND
BLKZ
BLOCK
OR
ANSI11000216-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000216 V1 EN
Figure 74:
216
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Release
PU_AG
PU_BG
PU_CG
PHG_FLT
OR
AND
PU_A
OR
AND
AND
PU_B
OR
PU_AB
PU_BC
AND
AND
PU_C
OR
PU_CA
AND
OR
OR
PICKUP
PHPH_FLT
ANSI11000217-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000217 V1 EN
Figure 75:
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 76.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
217
Section 7
Impedance protection
Timer tPP=On
0-tPP
0
AND
PHPH_FLT
OR
Timer tPG=On
AND
PHG_FLT
0-tPG
0
PU_A
AND
PU_B
AND
PU_C
AND
TRIP
0
15 ms
AND
BLKTRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
ANSI11000218-2-en.vsd
ANSI11000218 V2 EN
Figure 76:
Zone timer logic for the distance protection is symbolically presented in figure 77.
STPE
BLOCK
&
&
a
a=b
b
Internal
start
Internal
start
a
b
TRPE
tON
t
STTIMER
&
a<b
&
tON
t
&&
TRPP
STPP
ZnTimerSel
FALSE
1
internalCommonStart
1 timers seperated
2 timers linked
3 internal start
phSelStart
externalCommonStart
5 external start
IEC12000463-3-en.vsd
IEC12000463 V2 EN
Figure 77:
218
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.1.7
Technical data
Table 84:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1030)% of IBase
(0.0053000.000) W/phase
(1090) degrees
(0.0053000.000) /phase
(0.003.00)
(-180180) degrees
Dynamic overreach
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 60 ms whichever is
greater
Trip time
22 ms typically
IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio
105% typically
Min. = 30 ms
Max. = 45 ms
7.2
7.2.1
Identification
Function description
Directional impedance element for mho
characteristic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21D
ZDMRDIR
S00346 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
219
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.2.2
Functionality
The phase-to-ground impedance elements can be supervised by a phase unselective
directional function based on symmetrical components (option).
7.2.3
Function block
I3P*
V3P*
ZDMRDIR (21D)
DIR_CURR
DIR_VOLT
DIR_POL
PUFW
PUREV
STDIRCND
ANSI06000422-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000422 V2 EN
Figure 78:
7.2.4
Signals
Table 85:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 86:
Name
220
Description
CURR
GROUP SIGNAL
VOLT
GROUP SIGNAL
POL
GROUP SIGNAL
PUFW
BOOLEAN
PUREV
BOOLEAN
STDIRCND
INTEGER
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 87:
Name
Type
Current signals
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage signals
I3PPOL
GROUP
SIGNAL
DIRCND
INTEGER
Name
Table 89:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 88:
7.2.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
FWD_G
BOOLEAN
REV_G
BOOLEAN
DIREFCND
INTEGER
Settings
ZDMRDIR (21D) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DirEvalType
Impedance
Comparator
Imp/Comp
Comparator
AngNegRes
90 - 175
Deg
115
AngDir
5 - 45
Deg
15
IMinPUPG
5 - 30
%IB
IMinPUPP
5 - 30
%IB
10
Table 90:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
221
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 91:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PolMode
-3U0
-V2
IPol
Dual
-3U0Comp
-V2comp
-3U0
AngleRCA
-90 - 90
Deg
75
IPickup
5 - 200
%IB
VPolPU
4 - 100
%VB
IPolPU
5 - 100
%IB
10
Table 92:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AngleOp
90 - 180
Deg
160
Kmag
0.50 - 3000.00
Ohm
0.01
40.00
Step
Default
Table 93:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.2.6
Unit
-
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 94:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
A_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in phase A
B_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in phase B
C_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in phase C
Aph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase A
Aph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase A
Bph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase B
222
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Bph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase B
Cph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase C
Cph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase C
7.2.7
Operation principle
7.2.7.1
0.85 V 1A + 0.15 V 1 AM
IA
< AngNeg Re s
(Equation 42)
EQUATION1618 V1 EN
< AngNeg Re s
(Equation 43)
EQUATION1620 V1 EN
Where:
AngDir
Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15
(= -15 degrees)
AngNegRes
Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 79 for mho characteristics.
V1A
V1AM
IA
V1AB
V1ABM
IAB
The default settings for AngDir and AngNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 79) and they should not be changed unless system studies show
the necessity.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
223
Section 7
Impedance protection
If one sets DirEvalType to Comparator (which is recommended when using the mho
characteristic) then the directional lines are computed by means of a comparator-type
calculation, meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of infinite
radius). The default setting value Impedance otherwise means that the directional lines are
implemented based on an impedance calculation equivalent to the one used for the
quadrilateral impedance characteristics.
When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
(ZDMRDIR) is used together with Fullscheme distance protection, mho
characteristic (ZMHPDIS) the following settings for parameter
DirEvalType is vital:
X
Zset reach point
AngNegRes
-AngDir
-Zs
en06000416_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000416 V1 EN
Figure 79:
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180
degrees.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows: STDIRCND =
AN*1 + BN*2 + CN*4 + AB*8 + BC*16 + CA*32
Example: If only ANpickup, the value is 1, if pickup in AN and CN are detected, the value
is 1+4=5.
224
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the
condition seals in.
If the current decreases below the minimum operate value, no directional indications
will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR ,21D) function
has the following output signals:
The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation and is
derived from a binary coded signal as follows:
bit 11
(2048)
bit 10
(1024)
bit 9
(512)
bit 8
(256)
bit 7
(128)
bit 6
(64)
REV_CA1=1
REV_BC=1
REV_AB=1
REV_C=1
REV_B=1
REV_A=1
bit 5
(32)
bit 4
(16)
bit 3
(8)
bit 2
(4)
bit 1
(2)
bit 0
(1)
FWD_CA=1
FWD_BC=1
FWD_AB=1
FWD_C=1
FWD_B=1
FWD_A=1
7.3
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
225
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.3.1
Identification
Function description
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral
characteristic, separate settings (zone
1)
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ZMRPDIS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
S00346 V1 EN
ZMRAPDIS
21
S00346 V1 EN
Function description
Directional impedance quadrilateral
7.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
ZDRDIR
IEC 60617
identification
Z<->
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21D
Functionality
The line distance protection is up to five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-ground fault for each of the
independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach gives
flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer connected to overhead lines and
cables of different types and lengths.
Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available.
ZMRPDIS (21) together with Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable
angle FRPSPDIS (21) has functionality for load encroachment, which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode.
226
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.3.3
Function block
ZMRPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
PHSEL
DIRCND
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
RI
BFI_A
BFI_B
PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI08000248-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000248 V1 EN
Figure 80:
ZMRAPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
PHSEL
DIRCND
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
BFI
PU_A
BFI_B
PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI08000290_1_en.vsd
ANSI08000290 V1 EN
Figure 81:
ZDRDI R (21D)
I3P*
V3P*
STDI RCND
ANSI10000007-1-en.vsdx
ANSI10000007 V1 EN
7.3.4
Signals
Table 95:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
227
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
PHSEL
INTEGER
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 96:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TR_A
BOOLEAN
TR_B
BOOLEAN
TR_C
BOOLEAN
RI
BOOLEAN
BFI_A
BOOLEAN
BFI_B
BOOLEAN
PU_C
BOOLEAN
PHPUND
BOOLEAN
Table 97:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
PHSEL
INTEGER
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 98:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TR_A
BOOLEAN
TR_B
BOOLEAN
228
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
BFI
BOOLEAN
PU_A
BOOLEAN
BFI_B
BOOLEAN
PU_C
BOOLEAN
PHPUND
BOOLEAN
Table 99:
Name
Type
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
STDIRCND
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Name
Table 101:
Default
I3P
Table 100:
7.3.5
Description
TR_C
Description
INTEGER
Settings
ZMRPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
OperationDir
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
X1PP
0.10 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
R1PP
0.01 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X1PG
0.10 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
R1PG
0.01 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
RFPP
0.10 - 3000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
X0PG
0.10 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
100.00
RFPG
0.10 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
229
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Step
Default
R0PG
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
OperationPP
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OpModetPP
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OperationPG
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OpModetPG
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
tPG
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinPUPP
10 - 1000
%IB
20
IMinPUPG
10 - 1000
%IB
20
IMinOpIR
5 - 1000
%IB
Table 102:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Table 103:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
OperationDir
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
X1PP
0.10 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
R1PP
0.01 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X1PG
0.10 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
R1PG
0.01 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
RFPP
0.10 - 3000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
X0PG
0.10 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
100.00
RFPG
0.10 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
230
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Step
Default
R0PG
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
OperationPP
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OpModetPP
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OperationPG
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OpModetPG
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
tPG
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinPUPP
10 - 1000
%IB
20
IMinPUPG
10 - 1000
%IB
20
Table 104:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Table 105:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IMinPUPP
5 - 30
%IB
10
IMinPUPG
5 - 30
%IB
AngNegRes
90 - 175
Deg
115
AngDir
5 - 45
Deg
15
Table 106:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
231
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.3.6
Operation principle
7.3.6.1
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 1
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 2
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 3
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 4
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 5
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 6
ANSI05000458-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000458 V2 EN
Figure 82:
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a pickup of an overreaching element to select correct voltages
and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.
7.3.6.2
Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended for
phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, three-phase
faults.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 83 and figure 84. The phase-to-ground
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic
presents the per phase reach.
232
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
X (Ohm/loop)
RFPG
R1+Rn
RFPG
Xn =
X1+Xn
Rn =
jn
RFPG
jn
X0-X1
3
R0-R1
3
R (Ohm/loop)
RFPG
X1+Xn
RFPG
R1+Rn
RFPG
ANSI05000661-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000661 V3 EN
Figure 83:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
233
Section 7
Impedance protection
RFPP
(Ohm/phase)
R1PP
RFPP
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
3
3
PE
--1X
11FWPE
XX
00
PE
-X
X
0
PG
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
=
XNFW
XNFW==
3 33
X1PP
R (Ohm/phase)
RFPP
RFPP
X1PP
RFPP
2
R1PP
RFPP
2
en07000062.vsd
IEC07000062 V2 EN
Figure 84:
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 85.
Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive reach for
phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.
234
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
VA
Ip
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-ground
fault in phase A
Phase-to-ground
element
RFPG
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
VA
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase A-B
IN
(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IA
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-phase
element A-B
RFPP
IB
(Arc resistance)
VB
R1 + j X1
VA
Three-phase
fault
IA
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
Phase-to-phase
element A-C
IC
VC
ANSI05000181_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000181 V2 EN
Figure 85:
The R1 and jX1 in figure 85 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The settings RFPG and RFPP are the eventual fault
resistances in the faulty place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 85, there is of course fault current
flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration merely reflects
the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction through
the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 86.
The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for forward and reverse
direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
235
Section 7
Impedance protection
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
IEC05000182-2-en.vsdx
IEC05000182 V2 EN
Figure 86:
7.3.6.3
7.3.6.4
Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
236
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Zapp =
IA - IB
(Equation 44)
EQUATION1545 V1 EN
Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)
The ground return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-ground
faults (example for a phase A to ground fault) according to equation 45.
V_A
Z app =
I _ A + IN KN
EQUATION1546 V1 EN
(Equation 45)
Where:
V_A, I_A and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN
is defined as:
KN =
Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN
Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN
Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN
Where
R0
X0
R1
X1
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
237
Section 7
Impedance protection
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same reach
along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and
reactance X.
The formula given in equation 45 is only valid for radial feeder application without load.
When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-ground fault, conventional distance
protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. The IED
has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter. The
check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory
locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (V), current
(I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from the input memory and
fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the
loop impedance according to equation 46,
V =R i +
Di
w0 Dt
(Equation 46)
EQUATION1547 V1 EN
X
w0
D Re (I )
Dt
(Equation 47)
EQUATION1548 V1 EN
Im (V ) = R Im (I ) +
EQUATION1549 V1 EN
X
w0
D Im (I )
Dt
(Equation 48)
with
238
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
w0 = 2 p f 0
(Equation 49)
EQUATION356 V1 EN
where:
Re
Im
f0
The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value of
the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the
Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Rm =
EQUATION1550 V1 EN
X m = w0 D t
EQUATION1551 V1 EN
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set zone
reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results.
This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage
transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive
sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional
sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.
7.3.6.5
< ArgNeg Re s
EQUATION1552 V2 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
(Equation 52)
239
Section 7
Impedance protection
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 53)
EQUATION1553 V2 EN
where:
AngDir
is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15
(= -15 degrees) and
AngNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 87.
V1A
V1AM
IA
V1AB
V1ABM
IAB
The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (as shown in figure 87). It should not be changed unless system studies have
shown the necessity.
ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the output
STDIRCND.
STDIR=
240
FWD_A*1+FWD_B*2+FWD_C*4+FWD_AB*8+
+FWD_BC*16+FWD_CA*32+REV_A*64+REV_B*128+REV_C*256+
+REV_AB*512+REV_BC*1024+REV_CA*2048
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
AngNegRes
AngDir
en05000722_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000722 V1 EN
Figure 87:
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180
degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds 5% of
the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical
faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive
sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100 ms the following occurs:
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between
10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until
the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
241
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.3.6.6
Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above.
Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 88.
The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from Phase
selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function FRPSPDIS (21)
within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into
corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input signal PHSEL is
connected to FRPSPDIS (21) function output STCNDZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals
depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be configured to the
STDIRCND output on directional function ZDRDIR (21D) function.
242
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
PUZMPP
OR
PHSEL
NDIR_AB
AB
AND
BC
AND
CA
AND
NDIR_CA
AG
AND
NDIR_A
BG
AND
NDIR_B
CG
AND
NDIR_BC
NDIR_C
STNDPE
OR
OR
LOVBZ
BLOCK
AND
OR
BLOCFUNC
PHPUND
BLK
ANSI99000557-1-en.vsd
ANSI99000557 V2 EN
Figure 88:
Composition of the phase pickup signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 75.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
243
Section 7
Impedance protection
NDIR_A
OR
NDIR_B
NIDR_C
NDIR_AB
OR
AND
0
15ms
AND
0
15ms
AND
0
15ms
AND
0
15ms
NDIR_BC
NDIR_CA
OR
OR
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PICKUP
BLK
ANSI09000889-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000889 V1 EN
Figure 89:
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in
directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 90.
244
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
NDIR_A
DIR_A
AND
AND
NDIR_C
DIR_C
AND
NDIR_AB
DIR_AB
AND
NDIR_BC
DIR_BC
AND
NDIR_CA
DIR_CA
PU_ZMPG
OR
NDIR_B
DIR_B
OR
OR
OR
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PU_ZMPP
OR
BLK
OR
AND
PICKUP
0
15 ms
ANSI09000888-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000888 V2 EN
Figure 90:
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 76.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
245
Section 7
Impedance protection
Timer tPP=enable
PUZMPP
tPP
AND
AND
0-tPP
0
BLOCFUNC
OR
OR
tPG
Timer tPG=enable
PUZMPG
0-tPG
0
AND
AND
AND
BLKTR
BLK
OR
TRIP
0
15 ms
PU_A
AND
TR_A
PU_B
AND
TR_B
PU_C
AND
TR_C
ANSI09000887-3-en.vsdx
ANSI09000887 V3 EN
Figure 91:
7.4
7.4.1
Identification
Function description
Phase selection, quadrilateral
characteristic with settable angle
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
FRPSPDIS
Z<phs
SYMBOL-DD V1 EN
246
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.4.2
Functionality
The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that single pole
tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in today's power systems.
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS (21) is
designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on
the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make fault
resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FRPSPDIS (21) has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive
setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with the
load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important information
about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously
measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set
values.
7.4.3
Function block
FRPSPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
DIRCND
TRIP
BFI
FWD_A
FWD_B
FWD_C
FWD_G
REV_A
REV_B
REV_C
REV_G
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
NDIR_G
FWD_1PH
FWD_2PH
FWD_3PH
PHG_FLT
PHPH_FLT
PHSELZ
DLECND
ANSI08000430-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000430 V2 EN
Figure 92:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
247
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.4.4
Signals
Table 107:
Name
Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 108:
Name
248
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
BFI
BOOLEAN
FWD_A
BOOLEAN
FWD_B
BOOLEAN
FWD_C
BOOLEAN
FWD_G
BOOLEAN
REV_A
BOOLEAN
REV_B
BOOLEAN
REV_C
BOOLEAN
REV_G
BOOLEAN
NDIR_A
BOOLEAN
NDIR_B
BOOLEAN
NDIR_C
BOOLEAN
NDIR_G
BOOLEAN
FWD_1PH
BOOLEAN
FWD_2PH
BOOLEAN
FWD_3PH
BOOLEAN
PHG_FLT
BOOLEAN
PHPH_FLT
BOOLEAN
PHSELZ
INTEGER
DLECND
INTEGER
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.4.5
Table 109:
Name
Settings
FRPSPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3I0BLK_PP
10 - 100
%IPh
40
3I0Enable_PG
10 - 100
%IPh
20
RLdFwd
1.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
80.00
RldRev
1.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
80.00
LdAngle
5 - 70
Deg
30
X1
0.50 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1PP
0.10 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
R1PG
0.10 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
1.50
X0
0.50 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0PG
0.50 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
RFltFwdPP
0.50 - 3000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFltRevPP
0.50 - 3000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFltFwdPG
1.00 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
RFltRevPG
1.00 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
IMinPUPP
5 - 500
%IB
10
IMinPUPG
5 - 500
%IB
Table 110:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TimerPP
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
TimerPE
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPG
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
249
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 111:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.4.6
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Operation principle
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS, 21) includes
six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-ground faults, and three
intended for phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults.
The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the combination
of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of faults.
The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FRPSPDIS (21) uses information from
the directional function ZDRDIR to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or reverse
direction.
The pickup condition PHSELZ is essentially based on the following criteria:
Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without ground
connection
Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
60
60
R
60
R
60
Non-directional (ND)
Forward (FWD)
Reverse (REV)
en05000668_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000668 V1 EN
Figure 93:
The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment".
The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming from
the directional function ZDRDIR (21D). It shall be connected to the STDIR output on
ZDRDIR (21D). This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on the distance
measuring zones, that is, the ZMRPDIS (21) block.
The code built up for the directionality is as follows:
STDIR=
FWD_A*1+FWD_B*4+FWD_C*16+FWD_AB*64+
+FWD_BC*256+FWD_CA*1024+REV_A*2+REV_B*8+REV_C*32+
+REV_AB*128+REV_BC*512+REV_CA*2048
If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have pickup in forward
direction in phase A. If the binary code is 3 then we have pickup in forward direction in
phase A and B etc.
The or PHSEL output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary coded information,
in this case information about the condition for opening correct fault loop in the distance
measuring element. It shall be connected to the PHSEL input on the ZMRPDIS distance
measuring zones (21) block.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
251
Section 7
Impedance protection
PHSEL = AG*1+BG*2+CG*4+AB*8+BC*16+CA*32
7.4.6.1
Phase-to-ground fault
Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS, 21).
ZPHSn =
VA( B , C )
IA( B , C )
(Equation 54)
EQUATION1554 V1 EN
where:
n
R 0 PE - R1PE
3
EQUATION-2125 V1 EN
XN =
X 0 - X1
3
EQUATION1257 V1 EN
252
(Equation 55)
(Equation 56)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
X (ohm/loop)
R1PE+RN
RFRvPE
RFFwPE
X1+XN
RFFwPE
R (Ohm/loop)
RFRvPE
X1+XN
RFFwPE
RFRvPE
R1PE+RN
IEC09000633-1-en.vsd
IEC09000633 V1 EN
Figure 94:
Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to equation 57
and equation 58.
3 I0 0.5 IMinOpPE
(Equation 57)
EQUATION2108 V1 EN
3 I0
3I 0 Enable _ PG
100
Iph max
(Equation 58)
EQUATION1812-ANSI V1 EN
where:
IMinOpPE
3I0Enable_PG is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-toground fault loops (in %).
Iphmax
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
253
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.4.6.2
Phase-to-phase fault
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS (21) is according to
equation 59.
ZPHS =
Vm - Vn
-2 In
(Equation 59)
EQUATION1813-ANSI V1 EN
Vm is the leading phase voltage, Vn the lagging phase voltage and In the phase current in
the lagging phase n.
The operation characteristic is shown in figure 95.
X (ohm/phase)
0.5FRvPP
R1PP 0.5RFFwPP
X1
0.5RFFwPP
R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFRvPP
0.5RFRvPP
R1PP
X1
0.5RFFwPP
IEC09000634-1-en.vsd
IEC09000634 V1 EN
Figure 95:
254
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
In the same way as the condition for phase-to-ground fault, there are current conditions
that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are according
to equation 60 or equation 61.
3I 0 < 3I 0Enable _ PG
(Equation 60)
EQUATION1814-ANSI V1 EN
3I 0 < 3I 0BLK _ PP
(Equation 61)
EQUATION1815-ANSI V1 EN
where:
3I0Enable_PG is the minimum operation current for forward ground measuring loops,
7.4.6.3
3I0BLK_PP
Iphmax
Three-phase faults
The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase fault,
that is equation 59, equation 60 and equation 61 are used to release the operation of the
function.
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all directions.
At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counter-clockwise. The
characteristic is shown in figure 96.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
255
Section 7
Impedance protection
X (ohm/phase)
4 X1PP
3
0.5RFFwPPK3
X1K3
30 deg
RFwPP
2
3
R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFRvPPK3
K3 = 2 / sqrt(3)
30 deg
IEC09000635-1-en.vsd
IEC09000635 V2 EN
Figure 96:
7.4.6.4
The characteristic of FRPSPDIS (21) for three-phase fault (set angle 70)
Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based on the
corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always active, but
can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 98. As illustrated, the resistive
blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector
is the same in all four quadrants.
256
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
RLdFwd
LdAngle
LdAngle
LdAngle
LdAngle
RLdRev
en05000196_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000196 V1 EN
Figure 97:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
257
Section 7
Impedance protection
PHSELZ
DLECND
ANSI10000099-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000099 V1 EN
Figure 98:
When FRPSPDIS (21) is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 99. The figure shows a distance
measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area of the zone
together with the load encroachment is highlighted in black.
258
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
X
"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone
Distance measuring zone
Load encroachment
characteristic
R
Directional line
en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN
Figure 99:
Figure 99 is valid for phase-to-ground. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the
operate area is transformed according to figure 100. Notice in particular what happens
with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone. Due to the 30degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 100 degrees instead of the
original 70 degrees (if the angle setting is 70 degrees). The blinder that is nominally
located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach
around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load
encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
259
Section 7
Impedance protection
X (W /
phase)
Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone
R (W /
phase)
IEC09000049-1-en.vsd
IEC09000049 V1 EN
Figure 100:
The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 101. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement as the
quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic clockwise by
30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same time the characteristic
will "shrink" by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and RLdRv reach, which is valid at load or
three-phase fault.
260
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
IEC08000437.vsd
IEC08000437 V1 EN
Figure 101:
There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the quadrilateral
characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected by a fault between
two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage in quadrant one. The
relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four should not be a problem even for
applications on series compensated lines.
7.4.6.5
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
261
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.4.6.6
3 I 0 0.5 IMinPUPG
3I 0
3 I 0 Enable _ PG
100
IRELPG
Iphmax
0
15ms
AND
Bool to
integer
BLOCK
3I 0 < IMinPUPG
AND
3I 0 <
3I 0 BLK _ PP
100
STPG
10ms
0
IRELPG
0
20ms
AND
0
15ms
AND
DLECND
STPP
IRELPP
Iph max
ANSI09000149-3-en.vsd
ANSI09000149 V3 EN
Figure 102:
A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A PHSEL output
signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and current
criteria, refer to figure 102. This signal can be configured to STCND functional input
signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the phaseto-phase and phase-to-ground zone measuring elements and their phase related pickup
and tripping signals.
Figure 103 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective
signals NDIR_A (B or C). Internal signals ZMn and ZMmn (m and n change between A,
B and C according to the phase) represent the fulfilled operating criteria for each separate
loop measuring element, that is within the characteristic.
262
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
INDIR_A
INDIR_B
INDIR_C
IRELPG
LDEblockA
ZMA
LDEblockB
ZMB
LDEblockC
ZMC
LDEblockAB
ZMAB
LDEblockBC
ZMBC
LDEblockCA
ZMCA
AND
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
PHSEL_G
PHSEL_A
PHSEL_B
PHSEL_C
INDIR_AB
INDIR_BC
INDIR_CA
IRELPP
OR
0
15 ms
PHSEL_PP
ANSI00000545-4-en.vsd
ANSI00000545 V4 EN
Figure 103:
Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is presented
schematically in figure 104 and figure 105. The directional criteria appears as a condition
for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity for simultaneous
and evolving faults on lines within the complex network configurations. Internal signals
DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding directional signals for measuring
loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW (figure 105) represents the forward
direction as well as the designation RV (figure 104) represents the reverse direction. All
directional signals are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor.
Figure 104 presents additionally a composition of a PHSELZ output signal, which is
created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be configured to
PHSEL functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the
operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground zone measuring elements and their
phase related pickup and tripping signals.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
263
Section 7
Impedance protection
INDIR_A
AND
DRV_A
INDIR_AB
AND
DRV_AB
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
REV_A
INDIR_CA
AND
DRV_CA
INDIR_B
AND
DRV_B
REV_G
INDIR_AB
AND
INDIR_BC
INDIR_A
INDIR_B
INDIR_C
INDIR_AB
INDIR_BC
INDIR_CA
AND
DRV_BC
INDIR_C
AND
DRV_C
REV_B
Bool to
integer
PHSELZ
INDIR_BC
AND
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
REV_C
INDIR_CA
AND
REV_PP
ANSI00000546-3-en.vsd
ANSI00000546 V3 EN
Figure 104:
264
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
AND
INDIR_A
DFW_A
AND
AND
OR
INDIR_AB
DFW_AB
AND
OR
INDIR_CA
DFW_CA
OR
AND
FWD_IPH
0
15 ms
FWD_A
0
15 ms
FWD_G
0
15 ms
FWD_B
0
15 ms
FWD_2PH
0
15 ms
FWD_C
0
15 ms
FWD_3PH
AND
INDIR_AB
AND
OR
INDIR_BC
DFW_BC
0
15 ms
AND
AND
INDIR_B
DFW_B
15 ms
0
AND
AND
OR
15 ms
0
INDIR_C
DFW_C
AND
AND
INDIR_BC
AND
OR
INDIR_CA
AND
AND
OR
FWD_PP
0
15 ms
ANSI05000201-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000201 V3 EN
Figure 105:
Figure106 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where internal
signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal signals STNDPE,
STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
265
Section 7
Impedance protection
TimerPP=Disabled
tPP
t
AND
OR
TimerPE=Disabled
tPE
t
AND
AND
OR
TRIP
AND
STNDPP
STFWPP
OR
STRVPP
OR
STNDPE
STFWPE
RI
OR
STRVPE
ANSI08000441 1-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000441-1 V1 EN
Figure 106:
266
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.4.7
Technical data
Table 112:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-500)% of IBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
(0.503000.00) /phase
(0.101000.00) /phase
(0.509000.00) /phase
(0.503000.00) /phase
(1.009000.00) /loop
(0.503000.00) /loop
(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees
Reset ratio
105% typically
7.5
7.5.1
Identification
Function description
High speed distance protection zone
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
ZMFPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
7.5.2
Functionality
The ZMFPDIS function is a six zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for
phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-ground faults for each of the
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
267
Section 7
Impedance protection
independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with single-phase
autoreclosing.
In each measurement zone, ZMFPDIS function is designed with the flexibility to operate
in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic mode for separate phase-to-earth or phase-tophase loops.
The zones can operate independently of each other. Zones 3 to 5 in directional (forward
or reverse) or non-directional mode. Zone1 and zone2 are designed to measure in forward
direction only, while one zone (ZRV) is designed to measure in the reverse direction. This
makes them suitable, together with a communication scheme, for protection of power
lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal
lines, and so on.
A built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the distance
zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-ground faults on heavily loaded power
lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.
The ZMFPDIS function block itself incorporates a phase-selection element and a
directional element, contrary to previous designs in the 600-series, where these elements
were represented with separate function-blocks.
The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change criteria
(i.e. delta quantities), with significantly increased dependability. Naturally, there is also a
phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its operation only on voltage
and current phasors.
The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast and
correct directional decision during various power system operating conditions, including
close-in three-phase faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-sequence infeed.
268
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.5.3
Function block
ZMFPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKZ1
BLKZ2
BLKZ3
BLKZ4
BLKZ5
BLKZRV
BLKTRZ1
BLKTRZ2
BLKTRZ3
BLKTRZ4
BLKTRZ5
BLKTRZRV
TRIP
TRZ1
TR_A_Z1
TR_B_Z1
TR_C_Z1
TRZ2
TR_A_Z2
TR_B_Z2
TR_C_Z2
TRZ3
TRZ4
TRZ5
TRZRV
BFI_3P
PU_Z1
PU_ND_Z1
PU_Z2
PU_A_Z2
PU_B_Z2
PU_C_Z2
PU_ND_Z2
PU_Z3
PU_ND_Z3
PU_Z4
PU_ND_Z4
PU_Z5
STND_Z5
PU_ZRV
PU_A_RV
PU_B_RV
PU_C_RV
STNDRV
PHPUN D
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
FWD_A
FWD_B
FWD_C
FWD_G
REV_A
REV_B
REV_C
REV_G
FWD_1PH
FWD_2PH
FWD_3PH
PHG_FLT
PHPH_FLT
ANSI11000433-3-en.vsdx
ANSI11000433 V3 EN
Figure 107:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
269
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.5.4
Signals
Table 113:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
LOVBZ
BOOLEAN
BLKZ1
BOOLEAN
BLKZ2
BOOLEAN
BLKZ3
BOOLEAN
BLKZ4
BOOLEAN
BLKZ5
BOOLEAN
BLKZRV
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ1
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ2
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ3
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ4
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ5
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZRV
BOOLEAN
Table 114:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRZ1
BOOLEAN
TR_A_Z1
BOOLEAN
TR_B_Z1
BOOLEAN
TR_C_Z1
BOOLEAN
TRZ2
BOOLEAN
TR_A_Z2
BOOLEAN
TR_B_Z2
BOOLEAN
TR_C_Z2
BOOLEAN
TRZ3
BOOLEAN
TRZ4
BOOLEAN
270
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Type
Description
TRZ5
BOOLEAN
TRZRV
BOOLEAN
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
PU_Z1
BOOLEAN
PU_ND_Z1
BOOLEAN
PU_Z2
BOOLEAN
PU_A_Z2
BOOLEAN
PU_B_Z2
BOOLEAN
PU_C_Z2
BOOLEAN
PU_ND_Z2
BOOLEAN
PU_Z3
BOOLEAN
PU_ND_Z3
BOOLEAN
PU_Z4
BOOLEAN
PU_ND_Z4
BOOLEAN
PU_Z5
BOOLEAN
STND_Z5
BOOLEAN
PU_ZRV
BOOLEAN
PU_A_RV
BOOLEAN
PU_B_RV
BOOLEAN
PU_C_RV
BOOLEAN
STNDRV
BOOLEAN
PHPUND
BOOLEAN
NDIR_A
BOOLEAN
NDIR_B
BOOLEAN
NDIR_C
BOOLEAN
FWD_A
BOOLEAN
FWD_B
BOOLEAN
FWD_C
BOOLEAN
FWD_G
BOOLEAN
REV_A
BOOLEAN
REV_B
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
271
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
7.5.5
Table 115:
Name
Type
Description
REV_C
BOOLEAN
REV_G
BOOLEAN
FWD_1PH
BOOLEAN
FWD_2PH
BOOLEAN
FWD_3PH
BOOLEAN
PHG_FLT
BOOLEAN
PHPH_FLT
BOOLEAN
Settings
ZMFPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
RLdFwd
0.01 - 5000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
60.00
RLdRvFactor
1 - 1000
%RLdF
w
100
XLd
0.01 - 10000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
400.00
LdAngle
5 - 70
Deg
30
CVTType
Any
Passive type
None (Magnetic)
Passive type
OpModePPZ1
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
OpModePGZ1
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
X1PPZ1
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
R1PPZ1
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X1PGZ1
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
R1PZG1
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0Z1
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
100.00
R0Z1
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
272
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Step
Default
RFPPZ1
Values (Range)
0.01 - 9000.00
Unit
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Description
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1
RFPGZ1
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
tPPZ1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tPGZ1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPPZ1
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ1
5 - 6000
%IB
10
OpModePPZ2
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
OpModePGZ2
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
X1Z2
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1Z2
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0Z2
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0Z2
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
RFPPZ2
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFPGZ2
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
tPPZ2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
tPGZ2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
IMinOpPPZ2
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ2
5 - 6000
%IB
10
OpModePPZ3
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
OpModePGZ3
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
DirModeZ3
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
X1Z3
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1Z3
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0Z3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0Z3
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
RFPPZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
273
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Step
Default
RFPGZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Unit
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Description
Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, zone 3
tPPZ3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
tPGZ3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
IMinOpPPZ3
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ3
5 - 6000
%IB
10
OpModePPZ4
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
OpModePGZ4
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
DirModeZ4
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
X1Z4
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1Z4
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0Z4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0Z4
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
RFPPZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFPEZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
tPPZ4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
tPGZ4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
IMinOpPPZ4
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ4
5 - 6000
%IB
10
OpModePPZ5
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
OpModePGZ5
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
DirModeZ5
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
X1Z5
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1Z5
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0Z5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Step
Default
R0Z5
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
RFPPZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFPEZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
tPPZ5
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.600
tPGZ5
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.600
IMinOpPPZ5
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ5
5 - 6000
%IB
10
OpModePPZRV
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
OpModePGZRV
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
tPPZRV
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tPEZRV
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPPZRV
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZRV
5 - 6000
%IB
10
X1ZRV
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1ZRV
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0ZRV
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0ZRV
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
RFPPZRV
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFPGZRV
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Step
Default
Table 116:
Name
Unit
Description
Unit
Description
ZoneLinkPU
Phase Selection
1st starting zone
Phase Selection
3I0Enable_PG
5 - 400
%MaxIP
h
400
TimerModeZ1
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
275
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TimerLinksZ1
TimerModeZ2
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
TimerLinksZ2
TimerModeZ3
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
TimerLinksZ3
TimerLinksZ4
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
TimerLinksZ4
TimerModeZ5
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
TimerLinksZ5
TimerModeZRV
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
TimerLinksZRV
276
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 117:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
ZDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
ZMax
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
1500.0
ZRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
ZAngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Table 118:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ZZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
100
ZHiHiLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
1350.0
ZHiLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
1200.0
ZLowLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
300.0
ZLowLowLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
150.0
ZMin
0.000 - 5000.000
Ohm
0.001
0.005
ZLimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
ArgLdMinEd2
5 - 70
Deg
ArgLdMaxEd2
5 - 70
Deg
70
RLdFwMinEd2
0.01 - 5000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
0.01
RLdFwMaxEd2
0.01 - 5000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5000.00
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
277
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.5.6
Monitored data
Table 119:
Name
278
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
A_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in phase A
B_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in phase B
C_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in phase C
ABDir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in loop AB
BCDIR
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in looop BC
CADir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in loop CA
Aph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase A
Aph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase A
Bph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase B
Bph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase B
Cph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase C
Cph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase C
ZAIMAG
REAL
Ohm
ZA Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZAANGIM
REAL
deg
ZA Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZBIMAG
REAL
Ohm
ZB Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZBANGIM
REAL
deg
ZB Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZCIMAG
REAL
Ohm
ZC Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZCANGIM
REAL
deg
ZC Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.5.7
Operation principle
Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text without
its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of BLKZ3) when the description is equally valid for
all zones.
7.5.7.1
Filtering
Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the ZMFPDIS
function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a half cycle filter.
The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed based
on the estimated power system frequency.
A half cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while odd
harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even harmonics.
Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach however; instead there will
be a slightly variable underreach, on average in the same order as the magnitude ratio
between the harmonic and fundamental component.
7.5.7.2
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 1
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 2
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 3
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 4
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 5
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 6
ANSI05000458-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000458 V2 EN
Figure 108:
Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection function
with six measuring elements.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
279
Section 7
Impedance protection
Transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the transient overreach of a
distance protection. At the same time these transients can be very diverse in nature from
one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can be distinguished by the algorithm itself
in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a setting (CVTtype) is introduced in order to inform
the algorithm about the type of CVT applied and thus providing the advantage of knowing
how performance should be optimized, even during the first turbulent milliseconds of the
fault period.
There are two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive and the active
type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device that is employed. The
active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a negative impact on operate
times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher source impedance ratios (SIRs),
SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.
The IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little or no use in relation to this. It is not
primarily the damping of transients that is important; it is the frequency content of the
transients that is decisive, i.e. how difficult it is to filter out the specific frequency. So,
even if two CVTs, one passive and the other active type, comply with the same transient
class, the active type requires more extensive filtering in order to avoid transient
overreach.
To avoid overreach and at the same time achieve fast operate times, a supplementary
circular characteristic is implemented. A circular characteristic exists for every measuring
loop and quadrilateral/mho characteristic. There are no specific reach settings for this
circular zone. It uses the normal quadrilateral/mho zone settings to determine a reach that
will be appropriate. This implies that the circular characteristic will always have
somewhat shorter reach than the quadrilateral/mho zone.
7.5.7.3
Phase-selection element
The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change criteria
(i.e. delta quantities) with significantly increased dependability. Naturally, there is also a
phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its operation only on voltage
and current phasors.
This continuous criteria will, in the vast majority of cases, operate in parallel and carry on
the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some particularly
difficult faults on heavily loaded lines, the continuous criteria might not be sufficient, for
example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within the load area defined by the
load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the indication will be restricted to a pulse
lasting for one or two power system cycles.
The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish faults
with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is not restricted
by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change phase. This significantly
280
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
improves performance for remote phase-to-ground faults on heavily loaded lines. One
exception, however, are three-phase faults to which the load encroachment characteristic
always has to be applied in order to distinguish fault from load.
Phase-to-phase-ground faults (also called double ground faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements. This is a substantial difference compared to
the previous phase selection function (FDPSPDIS). Measurement in two phase-to-ground
loops at the same time is associated with so-called simultaneous faults: two ground faults
at the same time, one each on the two circuits of a double line, or when the zero sequence
current is relatively high due to a source with low Z0/Z1 ratio. In fact, in these situations
zone measurement will be released both for the related phase-to-ground loops and the
phase-to-phase loop simultaneously. On the other hand, simultaneous faults closer to the
remote bus will gradually take on the properties of a phase-to-phase-ground fault and the
function will eventually use phase-to-phase zone measurements also here.
In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely of zero sequence nature
(all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed in the phase-to-ground
loops only for a phase-to-phase-ground fault.
However, should it be desirable to use phase-to-ground (and only phase-to-ground) zone
measurement for phase-to-phase-ground faults, there is a setting 3I0Enable_PG that can
be lowered from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-to-ground
measurement should be activated.
7.5.7.4
Directional element
Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is provided
by comparing a positive sequence based polarizing voltage with phase currents. For extra
security, especially in making a very fast decision, this method is complemented with an
equivalent comparison where, instead of the phase current, the change in phase current is
used. Moreover, a basic negative sequence directional evaluation is taken into account as
a reliable reference during high load condition. Finally, zero sequence directional
evaluation is used whenever there is more or less exclusive zero sequence in-feed.
Fundamentally, the directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per measuring
loop, are defined by the following equations.
-15<arg
PolA
< 120
(Equation 62)
ANSIEQUATION15059 V1 EN
-15<arg
PolAB
< 120
AB
ANSIEQUATION15060 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
(Equation 63)
281
Section 7
Impedance protection
Where:
VPolA
IA
VPolAB
IAB
The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees.
Since the polarizing voltage is also used for the Mho distance characteristics, the
magnitude of the voltage is just as interesting as the phase. If there are symmetrical
conditions and the measured per phase positive sequence voltage magnitude is above 75%
of the base voltage before the fault, the pre-fault magnitude will be memorized and used
as long as there is a fault. The phase angle however will only be memorized (locked) for
75 ms at a time, not to lose synchronism with the real system voltage.
Should the positive sequence voltage drop below 2% of the base voltage, it will be
considered invalid. In this situation, directional signals and pickups from Mho elements
will be sealed-in and kept static as long as there is a fault.
For ZMFCPDIS, when option SeriesComp is chosen for OperationSC, the voltages of
faulty phases will be discarded in order not to affect the polarizing voltage with voltage
reversal.
7.5.7.5
Fuse failure
The ZMFPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse failure
supervision (FUFSPVC) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the binary input
VTSZ is used for this purpose.
A built-in supervision feature within high-speed distance protection itself, based on phase
current change, will ensure that the FUFSPVC blocking signal is received in time.
Namely, an intentional time delay will be introduced if no current magnitude change
greater than 5% of IBase has been detected for any of the three phase currents.
7.5.7.6
Power swings
There is need for external blocking of the ZMFPDIS function during power swings, either
from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external device.
282
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.5.7.7
Measuring principles
Quadrilateral characteristic
ZMFPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones separately.
Set OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx to Quadrilateral, to choose particular measuring loop
in a zone to work as quadrilateral distance protection.
All ZMFPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics
presented in figure 110 and figure 109. The phase-to-ground characteristic is given in
ohms-per-loop domain while the phase-to-phase characteristic is given in ohms-perphase domain.
RFPP
(Ohm/phase)
R1PP
RFPP
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
11FWPE
XX
-X-1X
X00PE
0PE
PG
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW
XNFW===
3
3 3
X1PP
j
R (Ohm/phase)
RFPP
RFPP
X1PP
RFPP
2
R1PP
RFPP
2
IEC11000416-1-en.vsd
IEC11000416 V1 EN
Figure 109:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
283
Section 7
Impedance protection
X (Ohm/loop)
(Ohm/loop)
ANSI11000415-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000415 V1 EN
Figure 110:
The faulty loop in relation to the fault type can be presented as in figure 111. The main
intention with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach should be
interpreted and set. Note in particular that the setting RFPP always represents the total
fault resistance of the loop, regardless the fact that the fault resistance (arc) may be divided
into parts like for three-phase or phase-to-phase faults. The R1 + jX1 represent the positive
sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location.
284
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
IA
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-ground
element
VA
Phase-to-ground
fault in phase A
RFPG
(Arc + tower
resistance)
N
IG
(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IA
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-phase
element A-B
VA
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
A-B
RFPP
IB
(Arc resistance)
VB
R1 + j X1
IA
Three-phase
fault or Phase-tophase-ground fault
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
VA
Phase-to-phase
element A-C
IC
VC
ANSI11000419-3-en.vsd
ANSI11000419 V3 EN
Figure 111:
Mho characteristic
ZMFPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones separately.
Set OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx setting to Mho or Offset, to choose a particular
measuring loop in a zone to work as mho (or Offset Mho) distance protection.
Zones 3 to 5 can be selected to be either forward or reverse with positive sequence
polarized mho characteristic; alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics. The
operating characteristic is in accordance to figure 65 where zone 5 is selected offset mho.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
285
Section 7
Impedance protection
X
Z4
Z3
ZS=0
Z2
Z1
Z5
R
R
ZS=Z1
ZRV
ZS=2Z1
IEC15000056-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000056 V1 EN
Figure 112:
The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead of
crossing the origin, as for the mho to the left of figure 65, which is only valid where the
source impedance (Zs) is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates of the
negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle shown to the right of figure
65. Z1 denotes the complex positive sequence impedance.
The magnitude of the polarizing voltage is determined completely by the positive
sequence voltage magnitude from before the fault. This will give a somewhat less
dynamic expansion of the mho circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is
high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too
much with high loading and mild power swing conditions.
286
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
lines is given from the directional element. Basic Mho characteristics with different mode
settings are indicated in figure 113.
OpModePP/PEZx = Mho
Zone 1, Zone 2 and
DirModeZ3-5 = Forward
OpModePP/PEZx = Mho
Zone RV and
DirModeZ3-5 = Reverse
OpModePP/PEZx = Offset
Zone 1, Zone 2 and
DirModeZ3-5 = Forward
OpModePP/PEZx = Mho
Only Zone 3-5
DirModeZ3-5 = Non-directional
OpModePP/PEZx = Offset
Zone RV and
DirModeZ3-5 = Reverse
OpModePP/PEZx = Offset
Only Zone 3-5
DirModeZ3-5 = Non-directional
IEC15000055-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000055 V1 EN
Figure 113:
Mho characteristics
For each zone, the impedance is set in cartesian coordinates (resistance and reactance)
which is the same as for quadrilateral characteristic.
The ZMFPDIS function has only one set of reach setting so the reverse will be the same
as for the forward reach, meaning that the non-directional offset mho characteristic will
always be centered around the origin. In detail, for Zone 1, the resistive and reactance
reaches for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault are set individually using the
settings R1PPZ1, X1PPZ1, R1PEZ1, X1PEZ1, X0Z1 and R0Z1. In Zone 2-5 and Zone RV,
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
287
Section 7
Impedance protection
the same zone reach settings are used for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase (R1Zx,
X1Zx, X0Zx and R0Zx, x=2-5 or RV).
Theory of operation
The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of an operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor by 90
degrees or more, the function operates and gives a trip output.
Phase-to-phase fault
Mho
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in figure 66. The condition for deriving the
angle is according to equation 64.
( )
(Equation 64)
ANSIEQUATION15027 V1 EN
where
V AB
EQUATION1790ANSI V1 EN
I AB
EQUATION1791ANSI V1 EN
Z 1set
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in zone direction
For Zone 1,
IECEQUATION15011 V1 EN
where
R1PPZ1
is the positive sequence resistive reach for phase-to-phase fault for zone 1
X1PPZ1
is the positive sequence reactance reach for phase-to-phase fault for zone 1
288
(Equation 66)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
where
R1Zx
is the positive sequence resistive reach for zone x (x=2-5 and RV)
X1Zx
is the positive sequence reactance reach for zone x (x=2-5 and RV)
Vpol
I AB jX
I L1L 2 Z1set
VAB
V pol
I AB R
ANSI15000060-1-en.vsdx
ANSI15000060 V1 EN
Figure 114:
Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-to-B fault
Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are given by the
two vectors Z 1set and Z 1RVset where Z 1set and Z 1RVset are settable through the
resistance and reactance settings in forward and reverse directions.
The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle between the two
compensated voltages is greater than or equal to 90 (figure 115). The angle will be 90
for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for A to B fault can be defined according to equation below.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
289
Section 7
Impedance protection
V I Z1
AB
AB
set
= arg
VAB I AB Z 1RVset
(Equation 67)
ANSIEQUATION15008 V1 EN
where
Z 1RVset
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault opposite to zone direction and is
defined as
For Zone 1,
290
(Equation 68)
(Equation 69)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
I AB jX
Vcomp1 VAB I AB Z 1set
I AB Z 1set
VAB
Vcomp 2 VAB ( I AB Z 1RVset )
I AB Z 1RVset
I AB R
ANSI15000058-1-en.vsdx
ANSI15000058 V1 EN
Figure 115:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
291
Section 7
Impedance protection
KN =
Z 0set Z 1set
3 Z 1set
IECEQUATION15017 V1 EN
Z 0set = R 0Zx + j X 0 Zx
IECEQUATION15018 V1 EN
For Zone 1,
(Equation 70)
where
is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in /phase
Z 0set
Z 1set
R1PEZ1
X1PEZ1
R0Zx
is the zero sequence resistive reach of the line in /phase for zone x
(x=2-5, or RV)
X0Zx
is the zero sequence reactance reach of the line in /phase for zone
x (x=2-5, or RV)
For an earth fault in phase A, the angle between the compensation voltage and the
polarizing voltage Vpol is,
292
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
ANSIEQUATION15021 V1 EN
where
VA
IA
3I0
Z 1set
Vpol
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
293
Section 7
Impedance protection
IAjX
Vcomp VA ( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1set
3I 0 K N Z1set
VA
I A Z1set
V pol
IAR
ANSI15000059-1-en.vsdx
ANSI15000059 V1 EN
Figure 116:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-toground fault
(Equation 72)
ANSIEQUATION15022 V1 EN
where
Z 1RVset
294
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
For Zone 1,
IECEQUATION15025 V1 EN
IECEQUATION15026 V1 EN
IA jX
Vcomp1 VA ( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1set
( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1set
VA
Vcomp 2 VA ( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1RVset )
( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1RVset
IA R
ANSI15000057-1-en.vsdx
ANSI15000057 V1 EN
Figure 117:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase A-toground fault
7.5.7.8
Load encroachment
In some cases the measured load impedance might enter the set zone characteristic
without any fault on the protected line. This phenomenon is called load encroachment and
it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred
onto the protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated on the left in
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
295
Section 7
Impedance protection
figure118. The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of course not
desirable and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider
this with the resistive reach settings, that is, to have a security margin between the distance
zone characteristic and the minimum load impedance. Such a solution has the drawback
that it will reduce the sensitivity of the distance protection, that is, the ability to detect
resistive faults.
The IED has a built in feature which shapes the characteristic according to the
characteristic shown in figure118. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the
possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-ground faults at remote
line end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle LdAngle, the resistive blinder
for the zone measurement can be set according to figure118 affording higher fault
resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load encroachment.
Separate resistive blinder settings are available in forward and reverse direction.
The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines, where
there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary
sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy
loaded, medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get sufficient fault
resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not a major problem. See section "".
X
Zm
Zm
ZL
Load impedance area in
forward direction
R
LdAngle
LdAngle
R
LdAngle
LdAngle
RldRev
RLdFwd
ANSI05000495_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000495 V2 EN
Figure 118:
[1]
[1] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw
296
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.5.7.9
TRUE (1)
FWD(n & mn)
REV(n & mn)
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
ANSI12000137-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000137 V1 EN
Figure 119:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
297
Section 7
Impedance protection
PGZx
OR
ZMAZx
PHSA
DIRAZx
ZMBZx
PHSB
DIRBZx
ZMCZx
PHSC
DIRCZx
AND
AND
AND
AND
AZx
OR
AND
AND
ZMABZx
PHSAB
DIRABZx
ZMLBCZx
PHSBC
DIRBCZx
ZMCAZx
PHSCA
DIRCAZx
BZx
OR
AND
AND
OR
AND
CZx
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
PPZx
NDZx
ANSI12000140-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000140 V1 EN
Figure 120:
298
Intermediate logic
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-G
AND
PPZx
AND
PGZx
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKZx
BLKTRZx
OR
AND
AND
TZx
OR
OR
AND
tPPZx
0
AND
OR
TimerLinksZx
OR
ZoneLinkStart
PUPHS
tPPZx
0
OR
Phase Selection
1st pickup zone
LNKZ1
LNKZ2
LNKZRV
OR
LNKZ3
LNKZ4
LNKZ5
LoopLink (tPP-tPG)
LoopLink & ZoneLink
no links
FALSE (0)
AND
LNKZx
TimerLinksZx =
LoopLink & ZoneLink
ANSI12000139-2-en.vsdx
ANSI12000139 V2 EN
Figure 121:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
299
Section 7
Impedance protection
TZx
0
15 ms
BLKTRZx
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKZx
TRIPZx
AND
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AZx
BZx
CZx
PPZx
PGZx
OR
NDZx
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
TR_A_Zx
TR_B_Zx
TR_B_Zx
PU_A_Zx
PU_B_Zx
PU_C_Zx
PU_Zx
PU_ND_Zx
ANSI12000138-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000138 V1 EN
Figure 122:
300
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
OR
PHSA
PHSB
PHG_FLT
PHSC
PHSAB
PHSBC
PHSCA
OR
BLOCK
LOVBZ
PHPH_FLT
OR
OR
PU_ND
PU_PHS
ANSI12000133-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000133 V1 EN
Figure 123:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
301
Section 7
Impedance protection
PHSA
FWA
PHSB
FWB
PHSC
FWC
AND
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
FWD_A
AND
PHSAB
FWAB
PHSBC
FWBC
PHSCA
FWCA
AND
AND
FWD_B
FWD_C
AND
OR
IN present
BLOCK
LOVBZ
AND
=1
FWD_G
FWD_1PH
OR
=2
=3
FWD_2PH
FWD_3PH
ANSI12000134-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000134 V1 EN
Figure 124:
302
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
PHSA
RVA
PHSB
RVB
PHSC
RVC
AND
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
REV_A
AND
PHSAB
RVAB
PHSBC
RVBC
PHSCA
RVCA
AND
AND
REV_B
REV_C
AND
OR
IN present
BLOCK
LOVBZ
AND
REV_G
OR
ANSI12000141-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000141 V1 EN
Figure 125:
7.5.7.10
Measurement
Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further
process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks.
The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and
built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
303
Section 7
Impedance protection
Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or Highhigh limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim)
or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
Y
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1
Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
IEC05000657-2-en.vsdx
IEC05000657 V2 EN
Figure 126:
Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: Highhigh limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be
connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement
supervision as binary signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 126.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the
operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.
304
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of magnitude or
integral dead-band reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y4
Y1
Y5
t (*)
Value 5
Value 4
t (*)
Value 3
t (*)
Value 2
Value 1
t (*)
IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx
IEC05000500 V2 EN
Figure 127:
Periodic reporting
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
305
Section 7
Impedance protection
Value Reported
Y
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y1
Value Reported
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
t
IEC99000529-2-en.vsdx
IEC99000529 V2 EN
Figure 128:
After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set around
it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by
the Y set limits.
Integral dead-band reporting
The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit
(XDbRepInt), figure 129, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band
supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
306
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 129 serves as a basic value for further measurement.
A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is
multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral
values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is
reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values
Y3, Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods.
A1 >=
pre-set value
Y
A >=
pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value
Y3
Y2
Value Reported
(1st)
A1
Value
Reported
A2
Value
Reported
Y4
A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
A4
A3
Value
Reported
Y1
A5
A6
A7
Y5
Value
Reported
t
IEC99000530-2-en.vsdx
IEC99000530 V2 EN
Figure 129:
Measurement ZMMXU
The magnitude and angle of the impedance for each phase are available on the outputs
(ZLxMAG and ZLxANGL (x=1,2,3)). Each analogue output has a corresponding
supervision level output (ZLxRANG, ZLxANGR). The supervision output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section Measurement supervision.
Impedance measurement is calculated based on VA / IA , VB / IB , VC / IC , where VX and
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
307
Section 7
Impedance protection
lower than 3% of IBase, the magnitude of impedance is force to 9999999 and the angle is
forced to 0 degree.
Inside the function, to ensure the readability of the output for the users, ZLxMAG and
ZLxANGL (x=1,2,3) will not change more often than a certain time period, for example,
every 100 ms.
7.5.8
Technical data
Table 120:
Function
7.6
308
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
3 selectable
directions, 3 fixed
directions
(5-6000)% of IBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at 85 degrees
measured with CVTs
and 0.5 < SIR < 30
(0.000-60.000) s
Operate time
16 ms typically
IEC 60255-121
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Reset ratio
105% typically
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.6.1
Identification
Function description
High speed distance protection zone
(zone 1-6)
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
ZMFCPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
7.6.2
Functionality
High speed distance protection (ZMFCPDIS, 21) provides sub-cycle, down towards halfcycle, operate time for basic faults within 60% of the line length and up to around SIR 5.
At the same time, it is specifically designed for extra care during difficult conditions in
high voltage transmission networks, like faults on long heavily loaded lines and faults
generating heavily distorted signals. These faults are handled with utmost security and
dependability, although sometimes with reduced operating speed.
High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS is fundamentally the same function as
ZMFPDIS but provides more flexibility in zone settings to suit more complex
applications, such as series compensated lines. In operation for series compensated
networks, the parameters of the directional function are altered to handle voltage reversal.
The ZMFCPDIS function is a six-zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for
phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-ground faults for each of the
independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with single-phase
autoreclosing.
In each measurement zone, ZMFCPDIS function is designed with the flexibility to operate
in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic mode for separate phase-to-earth or phase-tophase loops.
The zones can operate independently of each other. Zones 3 to 5 in directional (forward
or reverse) or non-directional mode. Zone1 and zone2 are designed to measure in forward
direction only, while one zone (ZRV) is designed to measure in the reverse direction. This
makes them suitable, together with a communication scheme, for protection of power
lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal
lines, and so on.
A new built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the
distance zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-ground faults on heavily loaded
power lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
309
Section 7
Impedance protection
310
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.6.3
Function block
ZMFCPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKZ1
BLKZ2
BLKZ3
BLKZ4
BLKZ5
BLKZRV
BLKTRZ1
BLKTRZ2
BLKTRZ3
BLKTRZ4
BLKTRZ5
BLKTRZRV
TRIP
TRZ1
TR_A_Z1
TR_B_Z1
TR_C_Z1
TRZ2
TR_A_Z2
TR_B_Z2
TR_C_Z2
TRZ3
TRZ4
TRZ5
TRZRV
BFI_3P
PU_Z1
PU_ND_Z1
PU_Z2
PU_A_Z2
PU_B_Z2
PU_C_Z2
PU_ND_Z2
PU_Z3
PU_ND_Z3
PU_Z4
PU_ND_Z4
PU_Z5
STND_Z5
PU_ZRV
PU_A_RV
PU_B_RV
PU_C_RV
STNDRV
PHPUN D
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
FWD_A
FWD_B
FWD_C
FWD_G
REV_A
REV_B
REV_C
REV_G
FWD_1PH
FWD_2PH
FWD_3PH
PHG_FLT
PHPH_FLT
ANSI11000422-2-en.vsdx
ANSI11000422 V2 EN
Figure 130:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
311
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.6.4
Signals
Table 121:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
LOVBZ
BOOLEAN
BLKZ1
BOOLEAN
BLKZ2
BOOLEAN
BLKZ3
BOOLEAN
BLKZ4
BOOLEAN
BLKZ5
BOOLEAN
BLKZRV
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ1
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ2
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ3
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ4
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ5
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZRV
BOOLEAN
Table 122:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRZ1
BOOLEAN
TR_A_Z1
BOOLEAN
TR_B_Z1
BOOLEAN
TR_C_Z1
BOOLEAN
TRZ2
BOOLEAN
TR_A_Z2
BOOLEAN
TR_B_Z2
BOOLEAN
TR_C_Z2
BOOLEAN
TRZ3
BOOLEAN
TRZ4
BOOLEAN
312
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Type
Description
TRZ5
BOOLEAN
TRZRV
BOOLEAN
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
PU_Z1
BOOLEAN
PU_ND_Z1
BOOLEAN
PU_Z2
BOOLEAN
PU_A_Z2
BOOLEAN
PU_B_Z2
BOOLEAN
PU_C_Z2
BOOLEAN
PU_ND_Z2
BOOLEAN
PU_Z3
BOOLEAN
PU_ND_Z3
BOOLEAN
PU_Z4
BOOLEAN
PU_ND_Z4
BOOLEAN
PU_Z5
BOOLEAN
STND_Z5
BOOLEAN
PU_ZRV
BOOLEAN
PU_A_RV
BOOLEAN
PU_B_RV
BOOLEAN
PU_C_RV
BOOLEAN
STNDRV
BOOLEAN
PHPUND
BOOLEAN
NDIR_A
BOOLEAN
NDIR_B
BOOLEAN
NDIR_C
BOOLEAN
FWD_A
BOOLEAN
FWD_B
BOOLEAN
FWD_C
BOOLEAN
FWD_G
BOOLEAN
REV_A
BOOLEAN
REV_B
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
313
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
7.6.5
Table 123:
Name
Type
Description
REV_C
BOOLEAN
REV_G
BOOLEAN
FWD_1PH
BOOLEAN
FWD_2PH
BOOLEAN
FWD_3PH
BOOLEAN
PHG_FLT
BOOLEAN
PHPH_FLT
BOOLEAN
Settings
ZMFCPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OperationSC
NoSeriesComp
SeriesComp
NoSeriesComp
RLdFwd
0.01 - 5000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
60.00
RLdRvFactor
1 - 1000
%RLdF
w
100
XLd
0.01 - 10000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
400.00
LdAngle
5 - 70
Deg
30
CVTType
Any
Passive type
None (Magnetic)
Passive type
OpModePPZ1
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
OpModePGZ1
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
X1FwPPZ1
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
R1FwPPZ1
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X1RvPPZ1
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
X1FwPGZ1
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
314
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Step
Default
R1FwPGZ1
Values (Range)
0.00 - 1000.00
Unit
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
Description
Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-G, zone 1,
forward dir.
X0FwPGZ1
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
100.00
R0FwPGZ1
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
X1RvPgZ1
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
RFPPZ1
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFPGZ1
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
tPPZ1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tPGZ1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPPZ1
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ1
5 - 6000
%IB
10
OpModePPZ2
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
OpModePGZ2
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
X1FwPPZ2
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1FwPPZ2
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X1RvPPZ2
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
X1FwPGZ2
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1FwPGZ2
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0FwPGZ2
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0FwPGZ2
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
X1RvPGZ2
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
RFPPZ2
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFPGZ2
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
tPPZ2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
tPGZ2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
315
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IMinOpPPZ2
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ2
5 - 6000
%IB
10
OpModePPZ3
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
OpModePGZ3
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
DirModeZ3
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
X1FwPPZ3
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1FwPPZ3
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
RFFwPPZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
X1RvPPZ3
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
RFRvPPZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
X1FwPGZ3
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1FwPGZ3
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0FwPGZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0FwPGZ3
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
RFFwPGZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
X1RvPGZ3
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
RFRvPGZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
tPPZ3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
tPGZ3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
IMinOpPPZ3
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ3
5 - 6000
%IB
10
316
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OpModePPZ4
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
OpModePGZ4
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
DirModeZ4
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
X1FwPPZ4
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1FwPPZ4
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
RFFwPPZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
X1RvPPZ4
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
RFRvPPZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
X1FwPGZ4
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1FwPGZ4
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0FwPGZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0FwPGZ4
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
RFFwPGZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
X1RvPGZ4
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
RFRvPGZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
tPPZ4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
tPGZ4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
IMinOpPPZ4
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ4
5 - 6000
%IB
10
OpModePPZ5
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
317
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OpModePGZ5
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
DirModeZ5
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
X1FwPPZ5
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1FwPPZ5
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
RFFwPPZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
X1RvPPZ5
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
RFRvPPZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
X1FwPGZ5
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1FwPGZ5
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0FwPGZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0FwPGZ5
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
RFFwPGZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
X1RvPGZ5
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
RFRvPGZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
tPPZ5
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.600
tPGZ5
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.600
IMinOpPPZ5
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ5
5 - 6000
%IB
10
OpModePPZRV
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
OpModePGZRV
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
318
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Step
Default
X1FwPPZRV
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1FwPPZRV
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X1RvPPZRV
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
X1FwPGZRV
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1FwPGZRV
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0FwPGZRV
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0FwPGZRV
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
X1RvPGZRV
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
tPPZRV
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tPEZRV
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
IMinOpPPZRV
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZRV
5 - 6000
%IB
10
RFPPZRV
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFPGZRV
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Step
Default
Table 124:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Unit
Description
ZoneLinkPU
Phase Selection
1st starting zone
Phase Selection
3I0Enable_PG
5 - 400
%MaxIP
h
400
TimerModeZ1
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
TimerLinksZ1
TimerModeZ2
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
319
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TimerLinksZ2
TimerModeZ3
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
TimerLinksZ3
TimerLinksZ4
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
TimerLinksZ4
TimerModeZ5
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
TimerLinksZ5
TimerModeZRV
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
TimerLinksZRV
320
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 125:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
ZDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
ZMax
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
1500.0
ZRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
ZAngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Table 126:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ZZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
100
ZHiHiLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
1350.0
ZHiLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
1200.0
ZLowLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
300.0
ZLowLowLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
150.0
ZMin
0.000 - 5000.000
Ohm
0.001
0.005
ZLimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
ArgLdMinEd2
5 - 70
Deg
ArgLdMaxEd2
5 - 70
Deg
70
RLdFwMinEd2
0.01 - 5000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
0.01
RLdFwMaxEd2
0.01 - 5000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5000.00
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
321
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.6.6
Monitored data
Table 127:
Name
322
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
A_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in phase A
B_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in phase B
C_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in phase C
ABDir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in loop AB
BCDIR
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in looop BC
CADir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in loop CA
Aph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase A
Aph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase A
Bph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase B
Bph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase B
Cph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase C
Cph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase C
ZAIMAG
REAL
Ohm
ZA Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZAANGIM
REAL
deg
ZA Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZBIMAG
REAL
Ohm
ZB Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZBANGIM
REAL
deg
ZB Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZCIMAG
REAL
Ohm
ZC Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZCANGIM
REAL
deg
ZC Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.6.7
Operation principle
Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text without
its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of BLKZ3) when the description is equally valid for
all zones.
7.6.7.1
Filtering
Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the ZMFCPDIS
function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a half-cycle filter.
The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed based
on the estimated power system frequency.
A half-cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while odd
harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even harmonics.
Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach; instead there will be a
slightly variable underreach, on average in the same order as the magnitude ratio between
the harmonic and the fundamental component.
7.6.7.2
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 1
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 2
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 3
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 4
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 5
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 6
ANSI05000458-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000458 V2 EN
Figure 131:
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a pickup of an overreaching element to select correct voltages
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
323
Section 7
Impedance protection
and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection function with six measuring elements.
Transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the transient overreach of a
distance protection. At the same time these transients can be very diverse in nature from
one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can be distinguished by the algorithm itself
in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a setting is introduced in order to inform the
algorithm about the type of CVT applied and thus providing the advantage of knowing
how performance should be optimized, even during the first turbulent milliseconds of the
fault period.
There are two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive and the active
type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device that is employed. The
active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a negative impact on operate
times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher source impedance ratios (SIRs),
SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.
The IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little or no use in relation to this. It is not
primarily the damping of transients that is important; it is the frequency content of the
transients that is decisive, i.e. how difficult it is to filter out the specific frequency. So,
even if two CVTs, one passive and the other active type, comply with the same transient
class, the active type requires more extensive filtering in order to avoid transient
overreach.
To avoid overreach and at the same time achieve fast operate times, a supplementary
circular characteristic that includes some alternative processing (retained from REL 531)
is implemented. One such circular characteristic exists for every measuring loop and
quadrilateral/mho characteristic. There are no specific reach settings for this circular zone.
It uses the normal quadrilateral/mho zone settings to determine a reach that will be
appropriate. This implies that the circular characteristic will always have somewhat
shorter reach than the quadrilateral/mho zone.
7.6.7.3
Phase-selection element
The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change criteria.
The current change criteria itself can however only be relied on for a short period
following the fault inception (during what we will call the current change phase).
Subsequent switching in the network may render the change in current invalid. So,
naturally, the phase-selection element also operates on continuous criteria.
The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish faults
with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is not restricted
by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change phase. This significantly
improves performance for remote phase-to-ground faults on heavily loaded lines. One
324
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
exception, however, is three-phase faults, for which the load encroachment characteristic
always has to be applied, in order to distinguish fault from load.
The continuous criteria will in the vast majority of cases operate in parallel and carry on
the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some particularly
difficult faults on heavily loaded lines the continuous criteria might not be sufficient, for
example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within the load area defined by the
load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the indication will be restricted to a pulse
lasting for one or two power system cycles.
Phase-to-phase-ground faults (also called double ground faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements. This is a substantial difference compared to
the previous phase selection function in the 500- and 600-series (that is, FDPSPDIS).
Measurement in two phase-to-ground loops at the same time is associated with so-called
simultaneous faults: two ground faults at the same time, one each on the two circuits of a
double line, or when the zero sequence current is relatively high due to a source with low
Z0/Z1 ratio.In fact, in these situations zone measurement will be released both for the
related phase-to-ground loops and the phase-to-phase loop simultaneously. On the other
hand, simultaneous faults closer to the remote bus will gradually take on the properties of
a phase-to-phase-ground fault and the function will eventually use phase-to-phase zone
measurements also here.
In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely lack of zero sequence
nature (all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed in the phase-toground loops only for a phase-to-phase-ground fault.
However, should it be desirable to use phase-to-ground (and only phase-to-ground) zone
measurement for phase-to-phase-ground faults, the setting INReleasePE can be lowered
from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-to-ground measurement
should be activated.
7.6.7.4
Directional element
Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is provided
by comparing a positive sequence based polarizing voltage with phase currents. For extra
security, especially in making a very fast decision, this method is complemented with an
equivalent comparison where, instead of the phase current, the change in phase current is
used. Moreover, a basic negative sequence directional evaluation is taken into account as
a reliable reference during high load condition. Finally, zero sequence directional
evaluation is used whenever there is more or less exclusive zero sequence in-feed.
Fundamentally, the directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per measuring
loop, are defined by the following equations.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
325
Section 7
Impedance protection
-15<arg
PolA
< 120
(Equation 75)
ANSIEQUATION15059 V1 EN
-15<arg
PolAB
< 120
AB
(Equation 76)
ANSIEQUATION15060 V1 EN
Where:
VPolA
IA
VPolAB
IAB
The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees.
Since the polarizing voltage is also used for the Mho distance characteristics, the
magnitude of the voltage is just as interesting as the phase. If there are symmetrical
conditions and the measured per phase positive sequence voltage magnitude is above 75%
of the base voltage before the fault, the pre-fault magnitude will be memorized and used
as long as there is a fault. The phase angle however will only be memorized (locked) for
75 ms at a time, not to lose synchronism with the real system voltage.
Should the positive sequence voltage drop below 2% of the base voltage, it will be
considered invalid. In this situation, directional signals and pickups from Mho elements
will be sealed-in and kept static as long as there is a fault.
For ZMFCPDIS, when option SeriesComp is chosen for OperationSC, the voltages of
faulty phases will be discarded in order not to affect the polarizing voltage with voltage
reversal.
7.6.7.5
Fuse failure
The ZMFCPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse failure
supervision (FUFSPVC) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the binary input
VTSZ is used for this purpose.
However, to guarantee that also very fast operation is blocked in a fuse failure situation,
there is a built-in supervision based on change in current that will delay operation before
the FUFSPVC blocking signal is received. The delay will be introduced if no (vector)
magnitude change greater than 5% of IBase has been detected in any of the phase currents.
326
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.6.7.6
Power swings
There is need for external blocking of the ZMFCPDIS function during power swings,
either from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external device.
7.6.7.7
Measurement principles
Quadrilateral characteristic
ZMFCPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones
separately. Set OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx to Quadrilateral, to choose particular
measuring loop in a zone to work as quadrilateral distance protection.
All ZMFCPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics
presented in figure 132 and figure 133. The phase-to-ground characteristic is illustrated
with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents the per-phase
reach.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
327
Section 7
Impedance protection
X (Ohm/loop)
R1PG+RNFw
RFRvPG
RFFwPG
X 0 PG X 1FwPG
3
PG
1RVPGX 1RvPG
XX00PE
X 1XRVPE
XNRV
XNRv
= XNFw
XNRV
==
3
3
X 1FwPG
XNFw =
XX0 PE
X1X
FWPE
0 PG
1FWPG
XNFW
XNFW==
3 3
X1FwPG+XNFw
RNFw =
R0 PG R1PG
3
R (Ohm/loop)
RFRvPG
RFFwPG
X1RvPG+XNRv
N
RFRvPG
RFFwPG
R1PG+RNRv
ANSI11000417-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000417 V1 EN
Figure 132:
328
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
RFRvPP
(Ohm/phase)
R1PP
RFFwPP
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
XX00PE
PE
11FWPE
X
X-1X
0
PG
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW
XNFW===
3
3 3
X1FwPP
j
jN
RFRvPP
RFFwPP
j
R (Ohm/phase)
X1RvPP
jN
RFRvPP
RFFwPP
IEC11000418-1-en.vsd
IEC11000418 V1 EN
Figure 133:
Note that for ZMFCPDIS, the reverse zone ZRV, as well as any of zones
3-5, that are set to DirMode=Reverse will get their operating impedances
inverted (rotated 180 degrees) internally in order to make use of the main
settings, which are the settings designated Fw. Therefore, a reverse zone
will have its Fw-settings (RFFwPPZRV, X1FwPGZ3, and so on) applied
in the third quadrant, that is, towards the busbar instead of the line.
The fault loop reach in relation to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 111.
The main intension with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach
should be interpreted. Note in particular that the setting RFPP always represents the total
fault resistance of the loop, even while the fault resistance (arc) may be divided into parts
like for three-phase or phase-to-phase-to-ground faults. The R1 and jX1 represent the
positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location.
Figure 134:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
329
Section 7
Impedance protection
IA
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-ground
element
VA
Phase-to-ground
fault in phase A
RFPG
(Arc + tower
resistance)
N
IG
(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IA
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-phase
element A-B
VA
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
A-B
RFPP
IB
(Arc resistance)
VB
R1 + j X1
IA
Three-phase
fault or Phase-tophase-ground fault
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
VA
Phase-to-phase
element A-C
IC
VC
ANSI11000419-3-en.vsd
Mho characteristic
ZMFCPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones
separately. Set OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx setting to Mho or Offset, to choose a
particular measuring loop in a zone to work as mho (or Offset Mho) distance protection.
Zones 3 to 5 can be selected to be either forward or reverse with positive sequence
polarized mho characteristic; alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics. The
operating characteristic is in accordance to figure 65 where zone 5 is selected offset mho.
330
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
X
Z4
Z3
ZS=0
Z2
Z1
Z5
R
R
ZS=Z1
ZRV
ZS=2Z1
IEC15000056-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000056 V1 EN
Figure 135:
The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead of
crossing the origin, as for the mho to the left of figure 65, which is only valid where the
source impedance (Zs) is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates of the
negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle shown to the right of figure
65. Z1 denotes the complex positive sequence impedance.
The magnitude of the polarized voltage is determined completely by the positive sequence
voltage magnitude from before the fault. This will give a somewhat less dynamic
expansion of the mho circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is high, the
dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much
with high loading and mild power swing conditions.
Basic operation characteristics
In ZMFPDIS, each zone measurement loop characteristic can be set to mho characteristic
or offset mho characteristic by setting zxOpModePE or zxOpModePP (where x is 1-5
depending on selected zone).
ZMFPDIS fixes zone 1 and 2 in Forward mode and zone RV in Reverse mode. Zone 3-5
can be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter DirModeZx
(where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone).
If DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone) is selected as Non-directional,
the directional element will not have any effect on the measurement loop and operation of
the function. When DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone) is selected as
Forward or Reverse, directional lines are introduced. Information about the directional
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
331
Section 7
Impedance protection
lines is given from the directional element. Basic Mho characteristics with different mode
settings are indicated in figure 136.
OpModePP/PEZx = Mho
Zone 1, Zone 2 and
DirModeZ3-5 = Forward
OpModePP/PEZx = Mho
Zone RV and
DirModeZ3-5 = Reverse
OpModePP/PEZx = Offset
Zone 1, Zone 2 and
DirModeZ3-5 = Forward
OpModePP/PEZx = Mho
Only Zone 3-5
DirModeZ3-5 = Non-directional
X
OpModePP/PEZx = Offset
Zone RV and
DirModeZ3-5 = Reverse
OpModePP/PEZx = Offset
Only Zone 3-5
DirModeZ3-5 = Non-directional
IEC15000065.vsdx
IEC15000065 V1 EN
Figure 136:
Mho characteristics
For each zone, the impedance is set in cartesian coordinates (resistance and reactance)
which is the same as for quadrilateral characteristic.
ZMFCPDIS function uses separate sets of reach settings in forward and reverse directions
for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault. These settings are R1FwPPZx,
X1FwPPZx, X1RvPPZx, R1FwPEZx, X1FwPEZx, X1RvPEZx, R0FWPEZx, X0FwPPZx
(x=1-5 or RV). Thus, the center of the Non-directional offset mho circle can be arbitrary
located in the circle (figure 136).
332
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Note that the reverse ZoneRV, as well as any of zones 3-5, that are set to
DirModeZx=Reverse will get their operating impedances inverted (rotated 180 degrees)
internally in order to make use of the main settings, which are the settings designated Fw.
Therefore, a reverse zone will have its Fw-settings (R1FwPPZRV, X1FwPEZ3, and so on)
applied in the third quadrant, that is, towards the busbar instead of the line.
In Non-directional mode, for both Mho and Quad, the reach settings are equal to Forward
mode in this respect. The Fw settings apply in the first quadrant and the Rv settings
apply in the third quadrant.
Theory of operation
The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of an operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor by 90
degrees or more, the function operates and gives a trip output.
Phase-to-phase fault
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in figure 66. The condition for deriving the
angle is according to equation 64.
( )
(Equation 77)
where
V AB
EQUATION1790ANSI V1 EN
I AB
EQUATION1791ANSI V1 EN
Z 1set
Vpol
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in zone direction
is the polarizing voltage
IECEQUATION15010 V1 EN
where
R1FwPP
Zx
is the positive sequence resistive reach for phase-to-phase fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5
and RV)
X1FwPP
Zx
is the positive sequence reactance reach for phase-to-phase fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5
and RV)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
333
Section 7
Impedance protection
The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage (VAB for
phase A to B fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of the mho circle for
close in faults.
Operation occurs if 90270.
I AB jX
I L1L 2 Z1set
VAB
V pol
I AB R
ANSI15000060-1-en.vsdx
ANSI15000060 V1 EN
Figure 137:
Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-to-B fault
Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are given by the
two vectors Z 1set and Z 1RVset where Z 1set and Z 1RVset are settable through the
resistance and reactance settings in forward and reverse directions.
The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle between the two
compensated voltages is greater than or equal to 90 (figure 115). The angle will be 90
for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for A to B fault can be defined according to equation 67.
334
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
V I Z1
AB
AB
set
= arg
VAB I AB Z 1RVset
(Equation 80)
ANSIEQUATION15008 V1 EN
where
Z 1RVset
IECEQUATION15013 V1 EN
where
X1RvPPZx
R1RvPPZx
R1FwPPZx
R1RvPPZx = X 1RvPPZx
X 1FwPPZx
IECEQUATION15014 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
(Equation 82)
335
Section 7
Impedance protection
I AB jX
Vcomp1 VAB I AB Z 1set
I AB Z 1set
VAB
Vcomp 2 VAB ( I AB Z 1RVset )
I AB Z 1RVset
I AB R
ANSI15000058-1-en.vsdx
ANSI15000058 V1 EN
Figure 138:
KN =
Z 0set Z 1set
3 Z 1set
IECEQUATION15017 V1 EN
336
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
IECEQUATION15029 V1 EN
where
is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in /phase
Z 0set
Z 1set
R0FwPEZx
is the zero sequence resistive reach of the line in /phase for phaseto-ground fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5, or RV)
X0FwPEZx
is the zero sequence reactance reach of the line in /phase for phaseto-ground fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5, or RV)
R1FwPEZx
X1FwPEZx
For an earth fault in phase A, the angle between the compensation voltage and the
polarizing voltage Vpol is,
ANSIEQUATION15021 V1 EN
where
VA
IA
3I0
Z 1set
Vpol
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
337
Section 7
Impedance protection
IAjX
Vcomp VA ( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1set
3I 0 K N Z1set
VA
I A Z1set
V pol
IAR
ANSI15000059-1-en.vsdx
ANSI15000059 V1 EN
Figure 139:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-toground fault
(Equation 85)
ANSIEQUATION15022 V1 EN
where
Z 1RVset
338
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
IECEQUATION15023 V1 EN
where
X1RvPEZx
R1RvPEZx
R1FwPEZx
R1RvPEZx = X 1RvPEZx
X 1FwPEZx
(Equation 87)
IECEQUATION15024 V1 EN
IA jX
Vcomp1 VA ( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1set
( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1set
VA
Vcomp 2 VA ( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1RVset )
( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1RVset
IA R
ANSI15000057-1-en.vsdx
ANSI15000057 V1 EN
Figure 140:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase A-toground fault
339
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.6.7.8
Load encroachment
In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on
the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when
an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line.
The effect of load encroachment is illustrated in the left part of figure 141. The entrance
of the load impedance inside the characteristic is not allowed and the previous way of
handling this was to consider it with the settings, that is, with a security margin between
the distance zone and the minimum load impedance. This has the drawback that it will
reduce the sensitivity of the protection, that is, the ability to detect resistive faults.
The IED has a built-in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right part
of figure 141. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect high
fault resistances, especially for phase-to-ground faults at remote line end.For example, for
a given setting of the load angle LdAngle the resistive blinder for the zone measurement
can be expanded according to the right part of the figure 141, given higher fault resistance
coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load encroachment. This is valid in
both directions.
The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines, where
there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary
sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy
loaded medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get sufficient fault
resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not a major problem. Nevertheless, always set
RLdFwd, RldRev and LdAngleaccording to the expected maximum load since these
settings are used internally in the function as reference points to improve the performance
of the phase selection.
X
Zm
Zm
ZL
Load impedance area in
forward direction
R
LdAngle
LdAngle
R
LdAngle
LdAngle
RldRev
RLdFwd
ANSI05000495_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000495 V2 EN
Figure 141:
340
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.6.7.9
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
OR
PHSA
PHSB
PHG_FLT
PHSC
PHSAB
PHSBC
PHSCA
OR
BLOCK
LOVBZ
PHPH_FLT
OR
OR
PU_ND
PU_PHS
ANSI12000133-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000133 V1 EN
Figure 142:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
341
Section 7
Impedance protection
PHSA
FWA
PHSB
FWB
PHSC
FWC
AND
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
FWD_A
AND
PHSAB
FWAB
PHSBC
FWBC
PHSCA
FWCA
AND
AND
FWD_B
FWD_C
AND
OR
IN present
BLOCK
LOVBZ
AND
=1
FWD_G
FWD_1PH
OR
=2
=3
FWD_2PH
FWD_3PH
ANSI12000134-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000134 V1 EN
Figure 143:
TRUE (1)
FWD(n & mn)
REV(n & mn)
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
ANSI12000137-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000137 V1 EN
Figure 144:
342
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
TZx
0
15 ms
BLKTRZx
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKZx
TRIPZx
AND
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AZx
BZx
CZx
PPZx
PGZx
OR
NDZx
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
TR_A_Zx
TR_B_Zx
TR_B_Zx
PU_A_Zx
PU_B_Zx
PU_C_Zx
PU_Zx
PU_ND_Zx
ANSI12000138-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000138 V1 EN
Figure 145:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
343
Section 7
Impedance protection
TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-G
AND
PPZx
AND
PGZx
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKZx
BLKTRZx
OR
AND
tPPZx
0
AND
TZx
OR
OR
AND
tPPZx
0
AND
OR
TimerLinksZx
OR
ZoneLinkStart
PUPHS
OR
Phase Selection
1st pickup zone
LNKZ1
LNKZ2
LNKZRV
OR
LNKZ3
LNKZ4
LNKZ5
LoopLink (tPP-tPG)
LoopLink & ZoneLink
no links
FALSE (0)
AND
LNKZx
TimerLinksZx =
LoopLink & ZoneLink
ANSI12000139-2-en.vsdx
ANSI12000139 V2 EN
Figure 146:
344
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
PHSA
RVA
PHSB
RVB
PHSC
RVC
AND
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
REV_A
AND
PHSAB
RVAB
PHSBC
RVBC
PHSCA
RVCA
AND
AND
REV_B
REV_C
AND
OR
IN present
BLOCK
LOVBZ
AND
REV_G
OR
ANSI12000141-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000141 V1 EN
Figure 147:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
345
Section 7
Impedance protection
PGZx
OR
ZMAZx
PHSA
DIRAZx
ZMBZx
PHSB
DIRBZx
ZMCZx
PHSC
DIRCZx
AND
AND
AND
AND
AZx
OR
AND
AND
ZMABZx
PHSAB
DIRABZx
ZMLBCZx
PHSBC
DIRBCZx
ZMCAZx
PHSCA
DIRCAZx
BZx
OR
AND
AND
OR
AND
CZx
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
PPZx
NDZx
ANSI12000140-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000140 V1 EN
Figure 148:
7.6.7.10
Intermediate logic
Measurement
Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further
process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks.
The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and
built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
346
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or Highhigh limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim)
or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
Y
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1
Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
IEC05000657-2-en.vsdx
IEC05000657 V2 EN
Figure 149:
Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: Highhigh limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be
connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement
supervision as binary signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 126.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
347
Section 7
Impedance protection
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the
operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.
Actual value of the measured quantity
The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of the
value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic
reporting modes are available:
Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of magnitude or
integral dead-band reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.
348
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y4
Y1
Y5
t (*)
Value 5
Value 4
t (*)
Value 3
t (*)
Value 2
Value 1
t (*)
IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx
IEC05000500 V2 EN
Figure 150:
Periodic reporting
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
349
Section 7
Impedance protection
Value Reported
Y
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y1
Value Reported
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
t
IEC99000529-2-en.vsdx
IEC99000529 V2 EN
Figure 151:
After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set around
it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by
the Y set limits.
Integral dead-band reporting
The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit
(XDbRepInt), figure 129, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band
supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 129 serves as a basic value for further measurement.
A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is
multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral
values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is
reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values
Y3, Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods.
350
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
A1 >=
pre-set value
Y
A >=
pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value
Y3
Y2
Value Reported
(1st)
A1
Value
Reported
A2
Value
Reported
Y4
A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
A4
A3
Value
Reported
Y1
A5
A6
A7
Y5
Value
Reported
t
IEC99000530-2-en.vsdx
IEC99000530 V2 EN
Figure 152:
Measurement ZMMXU
The magnitude and angle of the impedance for each phase are available on the outputs
(ZLxMAG and ZLxANGL (x=1,2,3)). Each analogue output has a corresponding
supervision level output (ZLxRANG, ZLxANGR). The supervision output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section Measurement supervision.
Impedance measurement is calculated based on VA / IA , VB / IB , VC / IC , where VX and
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
351
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.6.8
Technical data
Table 128:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
3 selectable
directions, 3 fixed
directions
(5 - 6000)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir
(100.00 - 9000.00) /p
(15.00 - 3000.00) /p
(1.00 - 9000.00) /l
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at 85 deg
measured with CVT's
and 0.5 < SIR <30
(0.000 - 60.000) s
Operate time
16 ms typically
Min = 20 ms
Max = 35 ms
Reset ratio
105% typically
7.7
7.7.1
Identification
7.7.2
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
PSPPPAM
IEC 60617
identification
Ucos
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
78
Functionality
The phenomenon pole slip, also named out of step conditions, occurs when there is phase
opposition between different parts of a power system. This is often shown in a simplified
352
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
way as two equivalent generators connected to each other via an equivalent transmission
line and the phase difference between the equivalent generators is 180.
Angle = 90
Angle = -90
Figure 153:
The centre of the pole slip can occur in the generator itself or somewhere in the power
system. When a pole slip occurs within the generator it is essential to trip the generator. If
the centre of pole slip occurs outside any generator the power system should be split into
two different parts that could have the ability to get stable operating conditions.
Pole slip protection (PSPPPAM ,78) function in the IED can be used both for generator
protection application as well as, line protection applications.
The situation with pole slip of a generator can be caused by different reasons.
A short circuit may occur in the external power grid, close to the generator. If the fault
clearing time is too long, the generator will accelerate so much, that the synchronism
cannot be maintained.
Undamped oscillations occur in the power system, where generator groups at different
locations, oscillate against each other. If the connection between the generators is too
weak the magnitude of the oscillations will increase until the angular stability is lost.
The operation of a generator having pole slip will give risk of damages to the generator,
shaft and turbine.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
353
Section 7
Impedance protection
At each pole slip there will be significant torque impact on the generator-turbine
shaft.
In asynchronous operation there will be induction of currents in parts of the generator
normally not carrying current, thus resulting in increased heating. The consequence
can be damages on insulation and stator/rotor iron.
The Pole slip protection (PSPPPAM ,78) function shall detect pole slip conditions and trip
the generator as fast as possible if the locus of the measured impedance is inside the
generator-transformer block. If the centre of pole slip is outside in the power grid, the first
action should be to split the network into two parts, after line protection action. If this fails
there should be operation of the generator PSPPPAM (78) in zone 2, to prevent further
damages to the generator, shaft and turbine.
7.7.3
Function block
PSPPPAM (78)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRIP1
BLOCK
TRIP2
BLKGEN
PICKUP
BLKMOTOR
ZONE1
EXTZONE1
ZONE2
GEN
MOTOR
SFREQ
SLIPZOHM
SLIPZPER
VCOS
VCOSPER
ANSI10000045-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000045 V1 EN
Figure 154:
7.7.4
Signals
Table 129:
Name
354
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKGEN
BOOLEAN
BLKMOTOR
BOOLEAN
EXTZONE1
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 130:
Name
7.7.5
Table 131:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIP1
BOOLEAN
TRIP2
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
ZONE1
BOOLEAN
ZONE2
BOOLEAN
GEN
BOOLEAN
MOTOR
BOOLEAN
SFREQ
REAL
Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM
REAL
SLIPZPER
REAL
VCOS
REAL
UCosPhi voltage
VCOSPER
REAL
Settings
PSPPPAM (78) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OperationZ1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OperationZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ImpedanceZA
0.00 - 1000.00
0.01
10.00
ImpedanceZB
0.00 - 1000.00
0.01
10.00
ImpedanceZC
0.00 - 1000.00
0.01
10.00
AnglePhi
72.00 - 90.00
Deg
0.01
85.00
pick up Angle
0.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
110.0
TripAngle
0.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
90.0
N1Limit
1 - 20
N2Limit
1 - 20
Table 132:
Name
ResetTime
Unit
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
5.000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Description
Time without slip to reset all signals
355
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 133:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MeasureMode
PosSeq
AB
BC
CA
PosSeq
InvertCTcurr
No
Yes
No
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
7.7.6
Monitored data
Table 134:
Name
7.7.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
SFREQ
REAL
Hz
Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM
REAL
Ohm
SLIPZPER
REAL
VCOS
REAL
kV
UCosPhi voltage
VCOSPER
REAL
Operation principle
If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the impedance and
voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signaled. If the generator is slower
than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to right and motoring is signaled
(the power system drives the generator as if it were a motor).
The movements in the impedance plane can be seen in Figure 155. The transient behavior
is described by the transient EMF's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the transient system
impedance ZS.
356
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Zone 1
EB
Zone 2
Xd
XT
XS
IED
EA
jX
A
XS
Pole slip
impedance
movement
XT
Apparent generator
impedance
Xd
B
IEC06000437_2_en.vsd
IEC06000437 V2 EN
Figure 155:
where:
X'd
XT
ZS
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
357
Section 7
Impedance protection
the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general
setting).
the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 VBase
the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an angular
velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and
the corresponding direction is not blocked.
en07000004.vsd
IEC07000004 V1 EN
Figure 156:
An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds the
angle set for 'WarnAngle'.
Slipping is detected when:
When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in zone 1
and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone 1 when signal
EXTZONE1 is high (external device detects the direction of the centre of slipping).
358
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
After the first slip, the signals ZONE1 or ZONE2 and depending on the direction of slip
- either GEN or MOTOR are issued.
Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line is
crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.
Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of rotor
movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is crossed in the
opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite direction within ZA-ZB
resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.
The TRIP1 tripping command and signal are generated after N1 slips in zone 1, providing
the rotor angle is less than TripAngle. The TRIP2 signal is generated after N2 slips in zone
2, providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle.
All signals are reset if:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
359
Section 7
Impedance protection
AND
PICKUP
AND
0.2 Slip.Freq. 8 Hz
startAngle
ZONE1
AND
Z cross line ZC - ZB
ZONE2
AND
Z cross line ZA - ZC
Counter
a
b
N1Limit
ab
TRIP1
AND
tripAngle
OR
TRIP
Counter
a
ab
b
N2Limit
TRIP2
AND
ANSI07000005.vsd
ANSI07000005 V2 EN
Figure 157:
7.7.8
Technical data
Table 135:
Function
360
Range or value
Accuracy
Impedance reach
2.0% of Vn/In
(1 - 20)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.8
7.8.1
Identification
Function description
Out-of-step protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
OOSPPAM
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
78
<
7.8.2
Functionality
The out-of-step protection OOSPPAM (78) function in the IED can be used for both
generator protection and as well for line protection applications.
The main purpose of the OOSPPAM (78) function is to detect, evaluate, and take the
required action during pole slipping occurrences in the power system.
The OOSPPAM (78) function detects pole slip conditions and trips the generator as fast
as possible, after the first pole-slip if the center of oscillation is found to be in zone 1,
which normally includes the generator and its step-up power transformer. If the center of
oscillation is found to be further out in the power system, in zone 2, more than one poleslip is usually allowed before the generator-transformer unit is disconnected. A parameter
setting is available to take into account the circuit breaker opening time. If there are several
out-of-step relays in the power system, then the one which finds the center of oscillation
in its zone 1 should operate first.
Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available in OOSPPAM function to allow the
direct connection of two groups of three-phase currents; that may be needed for very
powerful generators, with stator windings split into two groups per phase, when each
group is equipped with current transformers. The protection function performs a simple
summation of the currents of the two channels I3P1 and I3P2.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
361
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.8.3
Function block
OOSPPAM (78)
I3P1*
TRIP
I3P2*
TRIPZ1
V3P*
TRIPZ2
BLOCK
PICKUP
BLKGEN
GENMODE
BLKMOT
MOTMODE
EXTZ1
R
X
SLIPFREQ
ROTORANG
VCOSPHI
ANSI14000055-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000188 V2 EN
Figure 158:
7.8.4
Signals
Table 136:
Name
Default
Description
I3P1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3P2
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKGEN
BOOLEAN
BLKMOT
BOOLEAN
EXTZ1
BOOLEAN
Table 137:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIPZ1
BOOLEAN
Zone 1 trip
TRIPZ2
BOOLEAN
Zone 2 trip
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
GENMODE
BOOLEAN
MOTMODE
BOOLEAN
REAL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
7.8.5
Table 138:
Name
Type
Description
REAL
SLIPFREQ
REAL
Slip frequency in Hz
ROTORANG
REAL
VCOSPHI
REAL
Settings
OOSPPAM (78) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
OperationZ1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ReachZ1
1.00 - 100.00
% ZFw
0.01
50.00
OperationZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Z2 Enable/Disable
tBreaker
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
0.040
Table 139:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NoOfSlipsZ1
1 - 20
NoOfSlipsZ2
1 - 60
tReset
1.000 - 60.000
0.001
6.000
Table 140:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
ForwardR
0.00 - 1000.00
%ZB
0.01
1.00
ForwardX
0.00 - 1000.00
%ZB
0.01
10.00
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
363
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Step
Default
ReverseR
0.00 - 1000.00
%ZB
0.01
1.00
ReverseX
0.00 - 1000.00
%ZB
0.01
10.00
InvertCTCurr
No
Yes
No
Table 141:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Default
pick up Angle
90.0 - 130.0
Deg
0.1
110.0
TripAngle
15.0 - 90.0
Deg
0.1
60.0
7.8.6
Values (Range)
Description
Monitored data
Table 142:
Name
7.8.7
Unit
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CURRENT
REAL
VOLTAGE
REAL
kV
REAL
REAL
SLIPFREQ
REAL
Hz
Slip frequency in Hz
ROTORANG
REAL
deg
VCOSPHI
REAL
kV
Operation principle
General
Under balanced and stable conditions, a generator operates with a constant rotor angle
(power angle), delivering active electrical power to the power system, which is
364
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
approximately equal to the input mechanical power on the generator axis.The currents and
voltages are constant and stable. An out-of-step condition is characterized by periodic
changes in the rotor angle, that leads to a wild flow of the synchronizing power; so there
are also periodic changes of rotational speed, currents and voltages. When displayed in the
complex impedance plane, these changes are characterized by a cyclic change in the
complex load impedance Z(R, X) as measured at the terminals of the generator, or at the
location of the instrument transformers of a power line connecting two power subsystems.
This is shown in Figure 159.
trajectory
1.5
of Z(R, X)
The 2nd
pole slip
occurred
The 1st
pole slip
occurred
Pre-disturbance
RE
normal load
- - -------- - - Z(R, X)
- - 3 ------ ------ - - Zone 2
--- 2 1 --0
---^ --^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ -^- ^ ^ ^ --^
-Zone 1
------ relay
-R in Ohms
-limit of reach -----lens determined
- - ---- -----0- - pre-disturbance Z(R, X)
- by the setting - - - - -------- - - - - 1 Z(R, X) under 3-phase fault
Pickup Angle = 120 SE
2 Z(R, X) when fault cleared
0.5
-0.5
-1
to the 3rd
pole-slip
X in Ohms
-1.5
-1
-0.5
0
0.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
1.5
ANSI10000109-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000109 V1 EN
Figure 159:
Under typical, normal load conditions, when the protected generator supplies the active
and the reactive power to the power system, the complex impedance Z(R, X) is in the 1st
quadrant, point 0 in Figure 159. One can see that under a three-phase fault conditions, the
centre of oscillation is at the point of fault, point 1, which is logical, as all three voltages
are zero or near zero at that point. Under the fault conditions the generator accelerated and
when the fault was finally cleared, the complex impedance Z(R, X) jumped to the point 2.
By that time, the generator has already lost its step, Z(R, X) continues its way from the
right-hand side to the left-hand side, and the 1st pole-slip cannot be avoided. If the
generator is not immediately disconnected, it will continue pole-slipping see Figure
159, where two pole-slips (two pole-slip cycles) are shown. Under out-of-step conditions,
the centre of oscillation is where the locus of the complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses the
(impedance) line connecting the points SE (Sending End), and RE (Receiving End). The
point on the SE RE line where the trajectory of Z(R, X) crosses the impedance line can
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
365
Section 7
Impedance protection
change with time and is mainly a function of the internal induced voltages at both ends of
the equivalent two-machine system, that is, at points SE and RE.
Measurement of the magnitude, direction and rate-of-change of load impedance relative
to a generators terminals provides a convenient and generally reliable means of detecting
whether machines are out-of-step and pole-slipping is taking place. Measurement of the
rotor (power) angle is important as well.
Rotor (power) angle can be thought of as the angle between the two lines, connecting
point 0 in Figure 159, that is, Z(R, X) under normal load, with the points SE and RE,
respectively. These two lines are not shown in Figure 159. Normal values of the power
angle, that is, under stable, steady-state, load conditions, are from 30 to 60 electrical
degrees. It can be observed in Figure 160 that the angle reaches 180 degrees when the
complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses the impedance line SE RE. It then changes the sign,
and continues from -180 degrees to 0 degrees, and so on. Figure 160 shows the rotor
(power) angle and the magnitude of Z(R, X) against time for the case from Figure 159.
4
3
|Z| in Ohms
angle in rad
normal
load
rotor (power)
angle
|Z|
0
0
fault 500 ms
fa ult
occ urrs
-1
-2
3
2
-3
1
-4
200
400
Z(R,X) cros s e d
the im pe da nce line , Z-line ,
conne cting points S E - RE
600
800
1000
Time in millis econds
1200
1400
IEC10000110-2-en.vsd
IEC10000110 V2 EN
Figure 160:
In order to be able to fully understand the principles of OOSPPAM (78), a stable case, that
is, a case where the disturbance does not make a generator to go out-of-step, must be
shown.
366
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
SE
0.8
RE
G
relay
0.4
0.2
0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
-0.8
-1
Z(R,X) 20 ms
after line out
fault
- - - - - RE
- ----- ----- 4 - ---zone 2 - ------ 2
---1
------ fault
-3
X-line ^ -^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ ^
^
^
^ ^ ^ ^ ^-- ^ ^ ^ -^
----- Z-line
--------limit of
-- relay
lens -reach
-110 -----zone 1- ------------ ------- ---- - -- - - -- - SE
0.6
-1
X [Ohm]
-0.5
pre-fault
Z(R,X)
5
0
0 pre-fault Z(R, X)
3 Z(R, X) under fault
5 Z 20 ms after line out
6 pow er line reclosed
0
0.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
1.5
ANSI10000111-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000111 V1 EN
Figure 161:
A stable case where the disturbance does not make the generator to go
out-of-step
It shall be observed that for a stable case, as shown in Figure 161, where the disturbance
does not cause the generator to lose step, the complex impedance Z(R, X) exits the lens
characteristic on the same side (point 4) it entered it (point 2), and never re-enters the lens.
In a stable case, where the protected generator remains in synchronism, the complex
impedance returns to quadrant 1, and, after the oscillations fade, it returns to the initial
normal load position (point 0), or near.
7.8.7.1
Lens characteristic
A precondition in order to be able to construct a suitable lens characteristic is that the
power system in which OOSPPAM (78) is installed, is modeled as a two-machine
equivalent system, or as a single machine infinite bus equivalent power system. Then the
impedances from the position of OOSPPAM (78) in the direction of the normal load flow
(that is from the measurement point to the remote system) can be taken as forward. The
lens characteristic, as shown in Figure159 and Figure161, is obtained so that two equal in
size but differently offset Mho characteristics are set to overlap. The resultant lens
characteristic is the loci of complex impedance Z(R, X) for which the rotor (power) angle
is constant, for example 110 degrees or 120 degrees; if the rotor (power) angle approaches
this value, then there is a high risk to have an out of step condition. The limit-of- reach
circle is constructed automatically by the algorithm; it is about 10% wider than the the
circle that has the line SE-RE as diameter (that is the out-of-step characteristic which
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
367
Section 7
Impedance protection
corresponds to the rotor (power) angle of 90 degrees). Figure 162 illustrates construction
of the lens characteristic for a power system.
X
Position of the OOS
- RE
- - relay is the origin of
--- the R - X plane
-- -------- Ze
-- Zone 2
--X-line
--determined
-- Zline
--by the ^ ^- ^
--^ ^ ^- ^
-^ ^ ^ ^
setting
^ ^ ^ --- ^
--^ ^ ^ReachZ1 --Ztr
R
---- Zone 1 -relay
-120 -- Z(R,X) ---- Z-line --Zgen
----limit-of-reach -- Lens is -the locus
--circle depends on-of constant
rotor (power)
----the position of the -- - angle,
e.g.
120.
- points SE and RE
- - -- - - - - - - Lens' width determined
SE
by the setting Pickup Angle
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
-0.8
-0.6
-0.4
-0.2
0
0.2
0.4
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
0.6
0.8
ANSI10000112-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000112 V1 EN
Figure 162:
ReverseZ(ReverseR, ReverseX)
Zgen(Rgen, Xgen)
ForwardZ(ForwardR, ForwardX)
Ztr(Rtr, Xtr)
Zline(Rline, Xline)
Transformer
13.8 / 220 kV
Generator
13.8 kV
13.8 kV
Zeq(Req, Xeq)
Infinite power
system
Power line
220 kV
System
equivalent
SE
REG
RE
Out-Of-Step
protection
OOSPPAM
ReverseR = Rg
ReverseX = Xd
ANSI10000113 V1 EN
Figure 163:
368
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
To be able to automatically construct the lens characteristic for a system shown in Figure
163, the actual power system must be modeled as a two-machine equivalent system, or as
a single machine infinite bus equivalent system, the following information is necessary:
Zgen(Rgen, Xgen), Ztr(Rtr, Xtr), Zline(Rline, Xline), Zeq(Req, Xeq), and the setting
PickupAngle, for example 120 degrees. All impedances must be referred to the voltage
level where the out-of-step protection relay is placed; in the case shown in Figure 163 the
relay is connected to the terminals of the generator and, therefore, the previous quantities
shall be referred to the generator nominal voltage and nominal current. The impedances
from the position of the out-of-step protection in the direction of the normal load flow can
be taken as forward.
The out-of-step relay, as in Figure 163 looks into the system and the impedances in that
direction are forward impedances:
Resistances are much smaller than reactances, but in general can not be neglected. The
ratio (ForwardX + ReverseX) / (ForwardR + ReverseR) determines the inclination of the
Z-line, connecting the point SE (Sending End) and RE (Receiving End), and is typically
approximately 85 degrees. While the length of the Z-line depends on the values of
ForwardX, ReverseX, ForwardR, and ReverseR, the width of the lens is a function of the
setting PickupAngle.The lens is broader for smaller values of the PickupAngle, and
becomes a circle for PickupAngle = 90 degrees.
When the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the lens, pole slipping is imminent, and a
pickup signal is issued. The angle recommended to form the lens is 110 or 120 degrees,
because it is this rotor (power) angle where problems with dynamic stability usually begin.
Rotor (power) angle 120 degrees is sometimes called the angle of no return because if
this angle is reached under generator power swings, the generator is most likely to lose
step.
7.8.7.2
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
369
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.8.7.3
PickupAngle []
1000
1.000
traverseTimeMin [ ms ]
180 []
(Equation 88)
ANSIEQUATION2319 V1 EN
(default 110)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
The minimum value of fsMax is 6.994 Hz. When PickupAngle = 110 degrees, fsMax =
7.777 Hz. This implies, that the default PickupAngle = 110 degrees covers 90% of cases
as, the typical final slip frequency is between 2 - 5Hz. In practice, however, before the slip
frequency, for example 7.777 Hz, is reached, at least three pole-slips have occurred. In
other words, if we consider a linear increase of frequency from 50 Hz to 57.777 Hz, at least
three pole-slips will occur (in fact: (57.777 - 50) / 2 = 3.889). The exact instantaneous slipfrequency expressed in Hz (corresponding to number of pole slips per second) is difficult
to calculate. The easiest and most exact method is to measure time between two successive
pole slips. This means that, the instantaneous slip-frequency is measured only after the
second pole-slip, if the protected machine is not already disconnected after the first poleslip. The measured value of slipsPerSecond (SLIPFREQ) is equal to the average slipfrequency of the machine between the last two successive pole-slips.
7.8.7.4
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
371
Section 7
Impedance protection
0.6
trip
region
0.4
0.2
3
here rotor
angle
is -90
no trip
region
inside
circle
-0.2
-0.4
outside the
circle is the trip
region for
TripAngle <= 90
-0.6
-0.4
X[Ohm]
no trip
region
1
2
no trip
region
rotor angle
= 180
relay
here
rotor angle
is +90
R[Ohm]
Z - line connects
points SE & RE
this circle
is loci of
the rotor
angle = 90
0.6
0.8
IEC10000114-1-en.vsd
IEC10000114 V1 EN
Figure 164:
372
The imaginary offset Mho circle represents loci of the impedance Z(R, X)
for which the rotor angle is 90 degrees
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
35
30
25
2nd
20
15
fault
occurs
10
5
trip command
issued here
normal load current
min. current
tBreaker = 60 ms
rotor angle
0
-5
after 1st
pole slip
angle towards 0
0
200
400
600
800
Time in milliseconds
1000
1200
IEC10000115-1-en.vsd
IEC10000115 V1 EN
Figure 165:
7.8.7.5
Design
At every execution of the function the following is calculated: active power P, reactive
power Q, rotor angle ROTORANG, quantity UCOSPHI, the positive-sequence current
CURRENT and voltage VOLTAGE. All other quantities, that can as well be read as outputs,
are only calculated if the Z(R, X) enters the limit of reach zone, which is a circle in the
complex (R X) plane. When the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the limit-of-reach
region, the algorithm:
determines in which direction the impedance Z moves, that is, the direction the lens
is traversed
measures the time taken to traverse the lens from one side to the other one
If the traverse time is more than the limit 40 or 50 ms, a pole-slip is declared. If the
complex impedance Z(R, X) exits the lens on the same side it entered, then it is a stable
case and the protected machine is still in synchronism. If a pole-slip has been detected,
then it is determined in which zone the centre of oscillation is located. If the number of
actual pole-slips exceeds the maximum number of allowed pole-slips in either of the
zones, a trip command is issued taking care of the circuit breaker safety.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
373
Section 7
Impedance protection
UPSRE
UPSIM
UPSMAG
IPSRE
IPSIM
R
X
Calculation of
R and X parts
of the complex
positivesequence
impedance
Z(R, X)
R
X
Z(R,X)
Z(R,X)
within limit of
reach?
NO
Return
YES
UCOSPHI
Z(R,X)
within lens
characteristic?
NO
ROTORANG
Function alert
SLIPFREQ
YES
LEFT
Motor losing
step ?
Calculation of
positive- sequence
active power P,
reactive power Q,
rotor angle
ROTORANG
and
UCOSPHI
Z(R,X)
entered lens
from?
GENMODE
Z(R,X)
exited lens
on the left- hand
side?
Generator losing
step ?
YES
RIGHT
Was
traverse time
more than
50 ms?
P
MOTMODE
NO
NO
UCOSPHI
ZONE 2
>= 1
Number
of pole- slips
exceeded in
a zone?
ROTORANG
TRIP
NO
TRIPZ1
Open
circuit
breaker
safely
ZONE 1
TRIPZ2
IEC10000116-3-en.vsd
IEC10000116 V3 EN
Figure 166:
7.8.8
Technical data
Table 143:
Function
7.9
374
Range or value
Accuracy
Impedance reach
5.0 degrees
5.0 degrees
(1 - 20)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.9.1
Identification
Function description
Loss of excitation
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
40
LEXPDIS
<
SYMBOL-MM V1 EN
7.9.2
Functionality
There are limits for the under-excited operation of a synchronous machine. A reduction of
the excitation current weakens the coupling between the rotor and the stator. The machine
may lose the synchronism and start to operate like an induction machine. Then, the
reactive power consumption will increase. Even if the machine does not loose
synchronism it may not be acceptable to operate in this state for a long time. Reduction of
excitation increases the generation of heat in the end region of the synchronous machine.
The local heating may damage the insulation of the stator winding and the iron core.
To prevent damages to the generator it should be tripped when excitation is lost.
7.9.3
Function block
LEXPDIS (40)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRZ1
BLKTRZ2
TRIP
TRZ1
TRZ2
PICKUP
PU_Z1
PU_Z2
XOHM
XPERCENT
ROHM
RPERCENT
ANSI0700031-1-en.vsd
ANSI0700031 V1 EN
Figure 167:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
375
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.9.4
Signals
Table 144:
Name
Type
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTRZ1
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ2
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 146:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 145:
7.9.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRZ1
BOOLEAN
TRZ2
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_Z1
BOOLEAN
PU_Z2
BOOLEAN
XOHM
REAL
XPERCENT
REAL
ROHM
REAL
RPERCENT
REAL
Settings
LEXPDIS (40) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
OperationZ1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
XoffsetZ1
-1000.00 - 1000.00
0.01
-10.00
Z1diameter
0.01 - 3000.00
0.01
100.00
tZ1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.01
376
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OperationZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
XoffsetZ2
-1000.00 - 1000.00
0.01
-10.00
Z2diameter
0.01 - 3000.00
0.01
200.00
tZ2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
Step
Default
Table 147:
Name
Unit
Description
DirSuperv
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
XoffsetDirLine
-1000.00 - 3000.00
0.01
0.00
DirAngle
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
-13.0
Step
Default
Table 148:
Name
Unit
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
MeasureMode
PosSeq
AB
BC
CA
PosSeq
Table 149:
Name
InvertCTcurr
7.9.6
Unit
Step
Default
No
Description
Invert CT current
Monitored data
Table 150:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
XOHM
REAL
Ohm
XPERCENT
REAL
ROHM
REAL
Ohm
RPERCENT
REAL
Resistance in percent of
Zbase
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
377
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.9.7
Operation principle
The Loss of excitation (LEXPDIS ,40) protection in the IED measures the apparent
impedance seen out from the generator.The measurement loop of apparent impedance can
be chosen as the positive sequence loop or any one of the three phase-to-phase loops
depending on the available current and voltage signals. It is recommended to use positive
sequence quantities for function operation.
Measured mode
Zposseq
Vposseq
I posseq
EQUATION2051-ANSI V1 EN
ZAB
VA - VB
IA - IB
EQUATION2052-ANSI V1 EN
ZBC
(Equation 90)
VB - VC
IB - IC
EQUATION2053-ANSI V1 EN
ZCA
(Equation 89)
(Equation 91)
VC - VA
IC - IA
EQUATION2054-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 92)
There are three characteristics in LEXPDIS (40) protection as shown in figure 168.
Naimly:
378
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
UnderexitationProtection
protection
Underexcitation
Restrainarea
area
Restrain
R
R
Directional
blinder
Figure 168:
When the apparent impedance reaches the zone Z1 this zone will operate, normally with
a short delay. The zone is related to the dynamic stability of the generator.
When the apparent impedance reaches the zone Z2 this zone will operate, normally with
a longer delay. The zone is related to the static stability of the generator.
LEXPDIS (40) protection also has a directional blinder (supervision). See figure 168.
In LEXPDIS (40) function the zone measurement is done as shown in figure 169.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
379
Section 7
Impedance protection
Offset
R
XoffsetZ1
Z1diameter
Z (apparent impedance)
Z1 = Z - (XoffsetZ1 +
Z1diameter/2)
Z1 or Z2
en06000456-2.vsd
IEC06000456 V2 EN
Figure 169:
The impedance Z1 is constructed from the measured apparent impedance Z and the
impedance corresponding to the centre point of the impedance characteristic (Z1 or Z2).
If the magnitude of this impedance is less than the radius (diameter/2) of the characteristic,
this part of the protection will operate.
If the directional restrain is set Disabled the impedance zone operation will start the
appropriate timer and LEXPDIS (40) will trip after the set delay (tZ1 or tZ2).
If the directional restrain is set Enabled the directional release function must also operate
to enable operation. A new impedance is constructed from the measured apparent
impedance Z and the XoffsetDirLine point on the y-axis. If the phase angle of this
impedance is less than the set DirAngle LEXPDIS (40) function will be released, see
figure 170.
380
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Underexcitation Protection
Restrain area
XoffsetDirLine
DirAngle
Z (apparent impedance)
en06000457.vsd
IEC06000457 V1 EN
Figure 170:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
381
Section 7
Impedance protection
Positive
sequence
current
phasor
Positive
sequence
voltage
phasor
Apparent
impedance
calculation
Z in
Z1 char.
AND
Z in
Z2 char.
AND
pickupZ1
tZ1
0
TripZ1
pickupZ2
tZ2
0
TripZ2
Dir.
Restrain
OR
Dir.Restrain Enabled
en060004582_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000458 V2 EN
Figure 171:
7.9.8
Technical data
Table 151:
Function
382
Range or value
Accuracy
(1000.001000.00)% of ZBase
5.0% of Vn/In
(0.03000.00)% of ZBase
5.0% of Vn/In
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.2% or 60 ms whichever is
greater
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.2% or 60 ms whichever is
greater
Min. = 35 ms
Max. = 50 ms
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.10
7.10.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
7.10.2
ROTIPHIZ
IEC 60617
identification
Rre<
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
64R
Functionality
The sensitive rotor earth fault protection (ROTIPHIZ, 64R) is used to detect ground faults
in the rotor windings of generators. ROTIPHIZ (64R) is applicable for all types of
synchronous generators.
To implement the above concept, a separate injection box is required. The injection box
generates a square wave voltage signal at a certain preset frequency which is fed into the
rotor winding.
The magnitude of the injected voltage signal and the resulting injected current is measured
through a resistive shunt located within the injection box. These two measured values are
fed to the IED. Based on these two measured quantities, the protection IED determines the
rotor winding resistance to ground. The resistance value is then compared with the preset
fault resistance alarm and trip levels.
The protection function can detect ground faults in the entire rotor winding and associated
connections.
Requires injection unit REX060 and a coupling capacitor unit REX061 for correct
operation.
7.10.3
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
383
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 152:
Input signal
7.10.4
USV
The measured injection voltage. This signal is taken from a pre-processor block, the AI output.
The analog voltage input AI1 is linked to the phase A in the pre-processor block in the Signal
Matrix tool.
USI
The measured injection current. This signal is taken from a pre-processor block, the AI output.
In the pre-configured version, the analog voltage input AI2 is linked to the phase B in the preprocessor block in the Signal Matrix tool.
BLOCK
ZREFSEL
The selection of any of the predefined reference impedances. There is a possibility to change
from one set reference impedance to another. Two different reference impedances are
available.
TRIP
TRIPDC
TRIPAC
BFI
PU_DC
PU_DC
ALARM
Signal activated after a set time delay, if the calculated fault resistance gets lower than the
set alarm level
ERROR
ERRSTAT
RAVE
XAVE
FREQV
RFAULT
ZREF
384
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Output signal
Description
ZREFRE
ZREFIM
VRMSSTAT
This signal is set true, if the measured RMS voltage is larger than the set limit VLimRMS
Definition of errors
Bit 6
Undercurrent
Overcurrent
Overvoltage
Priority 3
Bit 2
Frequency
difference
Bit 1
Priority 1
No current
Bit 0
No voltage
Prio1 = B0, B1
Prio2 = B3, B4, B5, B6
Prio3 = B2, B7
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
385
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.10.5
Function block
ROTIPHIZ (64R)
USV*
TRIP
USI*
TRIPDC
BLOCK
TRIPAC
ZREFSEL
BFI
PU_DC
PU_DC
ALARM
ERROR
ERRSTAT
RAVE
XAVE
FREQV
RFAULT
ZREF
ZREFRE
ZREFIM
VRMSSTAT
ANSI10000297-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000297 V1 EN
Figure 172:
7.10.6
Signals
Table 155:
Name
386
Default
Description
USV
GROUP
SIGNAL
USI
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
ZREFSEL
INTEGER
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 156:
Name
7.10.7
Table 157:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIPDC
BOOLEAN
TRIPAC
BOOLEAN
BFI
BOOLEAN
PU_DC
BOOLEAN
PU_AC
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm
ERROR
BOOLEAN
Error
ERRSTAT
INTEGER
Error indication
RAVE
REAL
XAVE
REAL
FREQV
REAL
RFAULT
REAL
ZREF
INTEGER
ZREFRE
REAL
ZREFIM
REAL
VRMSSTAT
BOOLEAN
Settings
ROTIPHIZ (64R) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Enable/Disable
RTrip
100 - 100000
Ohm
1000
RAlarm
100 - 1000000
Ohm
10000
tAlarm
0.00 - 600.00
1.00
30.00
FactACLim
0.01 - 2.00
0.01
0.25
tTripAC
0.000 - 60.000
1.000
10.000
VLimRMS
1 - 1000
100
Table 158:
Name
FreqInjected
Unit
Hz
Step
0.001
Default
113.000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Description
Injected frequency
387
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 159:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
k1Real
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
10000.000
k1Imag
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
k2Real
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
0.000
k2Imag
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
0.000
RefR1
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000000.000
RefX1
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
RefR2
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000000.000
RefX2
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
Table 160:
Name
FilterLength
7.10.8
Step
Default
1s
Description
Length of filter buffer
Monitored data
Table 161:
Name
388
Unit
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
RAVE
REAL
Ohm
XAVE
REAL
Ohm
FREQV
REAL
Hz
Measured frequency of
injected voltage into rotor
RFAULT
REAL
Ohm
ZREF
INTEGER
Selected reference
impedance number
ZREFRE
REAL
Ohm
ZREFIM
REAL
Ohm
VRMSSTAT
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.10.9
Operation principle
The protection principle is based on injection of voltage to the exciter point of the field
circuit.
8
Step
-up
Transformer
U>
Vinj
Rshunt
GEN
ROTOR EF
5
6
REX061
I
RN
REG670
Generator Protection Panel
ANSI11000014_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000014 V1 EN
Figure 173:
Capacitor coupling unit which is used to provide insulation barrier between rotor circuit and injection
equipment
Cable used to inject the square-wave signal into the rotor circuit
Connection for measurement of injected current. This signal is amplified in REX060 before it is passed
on to IED for evaluation.
Connection for measurement of injected voltage. This signal is amplified in REX060 before it is passed
on to IED for evaluation.
Two VT inputs into IED which are used to measure injected current and voltage
Protection for excessive over-voltages posed by generator. REX060 can withstand without damage
maximum voltage of 120V and when used together with REX062 up to 240V.
The injection signals are generated in a separate unit, REX060. The signals have square
wave form and are injected to the generator via the coupling capacitor unit REX061 to the
excitation circuit.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
389
Section 7
Impedance protection
In the REX060 unit the injection voltage and current signals are amplified to a level
adapted to the analogue voltage inputs of IED. In IED the measured signals evaluated to
detect rotor ground faults.
7.10.9.1
Top view
Back view
Power
connector
Front view
Keylock
LED
X11
X61
X81
18
Front-plate
X82
Rotor
Stator
Power
Backplane
HMI with logic
18
X62
PSM
Injection Stator
Injection Rotor
Injection LED
Injection switch
IEC11000015-1-en.vsd
IEC11000015 V1 EN
Figure 174:
The REX060 unit is a common unit that can be configured for either rotor or stator ground
fault protection, or for both. The REX060 have separate modules for rotor and stator
protection. The REX060 generate square wave signals, where one is used for injection to
the stator neutral point and the other to the field winding circuit (rotor circuit), if
configured for both stator and rotor protection. The injected voltage and currents are
measured by the unit and amplified, resulting in voltage signals both for the injected
voltage and current, and adapted to the analogue inputs of IED. The injection unit REX060
shall be located close to the IED, preferably in the same cubicle.
For the Sensitive rotor earth fault protection, there are some settings necessary for
REX060:
REX060 will also continuously check the measured signal for detection of saturation
which could cause error in the evaluation in IED. If saturation level is reached a binary
signal, connected to IED, is activated. Also other errors in the injection circuit will initiate
a binary signal to IED for blocking of the function.
390
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Rotor injection output is protected against high voltages by a relay blocking the injection
circuit. This blocking remains blocked by stored status in non-volatile memory.
The output is also protected by a fuse. If this fuse is blown, it is caused by external voltage
source, since the injection unit cannot provide enough energy to blow this fuse.
Refer to the Hardware section in this manual for a detailed description of REX060.
7.10.9.2
DC
Rf
Crot
Vinj
AC
REX061
Rf
Iinj
+
Vinj
Rotor Reference
Impedance
ANSI11000065_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000065 V1 EN
Figure 175:
The impedance ZMeasured is equal to the capacitive reactance between the rotor winding
and ground (1/Crot) and the ground fault resistance (Rf). The series resistance in the
injection circuit is eliminated. Rf is very large in the non-faulted case and the measured
impedance, called the rotor reference impedance and can be calculated as :
Z ref = - j
1
wCrot
EQUATION2510 V1 EN
alternative
1
= jwCrot
Z ref
EQUATION2511 V1 EN
Where
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
391
Section 7
Impedance protection
w = 2p finj
EQUATION2512 V1 EN
The injected frequency finj of the square wave, is a set value, deviating from the
fundamental frequency (50 or 60 Hz). The injected frequency can be set within the range
75 250 Hz with the recommended value 113 Hz in 50 Hz systems and 137 Hz in 60 Hz
systems.
Rseries is a resistance in the REX061 unit used to protect against overvoltage to the
injection unit. Such overvoltages can occur if the unit is fed from static excitation system.
The injection unit REX060 is connected to the generator and to IED as shown in figure
173.
7.10.9.3
V Inj
I Inj
EQUATION2500-ANSI V1 EN
ZMeasured
Zbare
Z series
Iinj
+
Rf
Z shunt
Vinj
-
ANSI11000003_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000003 V1 EN
Figure 176:
392
Section 7
Impedance protection
Z Measured = k1 Z bare + k 2
EQUATION2501 V1 EN
The factors k1 and k2 [] are derived during the calibration measurements under
commissioning. As support for the calibration, the Injection Commissioning tool must be
used. This tool is an integrated part of the PCM600 tool.
In connection to this calibration, the reference impedance is also derived. In case of a rotor
ground fault with fault impedance Zf, the measured admittance is:
1
1
1
=
+
Z Z ref Z f
=
1
1
1
= Zf
Z Z ref
EQUATION2405 V1 EN
EQUATION2421 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
393
Section 7
Impedance protection
RAlarm and RTrip are the two resistance levels given in the settings. The values of RAlarm
and RTrip are given in .
An alarm signal ALARM is given after a set delay tAlarm if Rf < RAlarm
A initiate signal BFI is given if Rf < RTrip
See figure 179
7.10.9.4
Vinj
Rshunt
2
6
Rf
Z Measured
Compare &
Evaluate
Z bare
S
K2
I Inj
v_i_ref
V Inj
v_v_ref
K1
ZRef1
ZRef2
REX060
REG670
ANSI10000327_1_en.vsd
ANSI10000327 V1 EN
Figure 177:
394
Simplified logic diagram for sensitive rotor earth fault protection, injection
based ROTIPHIZ (64R)
The sensitive rotor earth fault protection function receives amplified injected voltage and current
via the REX060 unit as two voltages signals. (Voltage inputs in the IED)
The phasor of injected voltage VInj and phasor of injected current IInj is calculated by using special
filter from raw samples. Observe that phasors are calculated for the injected frequency.
4, 5
The fault resistance (Rf) is calculated from the complex measured impedance and a selected
complex reference.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Rf
OR
Alarm
Adaptive
TripDelay
Trip
IEC10000326-3.vsd
IEC10000326 V2 EN
Figure 178:
If the fault resistance Rf is smaller than RAlarm and longer than alarm delay (using delayon), output ALARM is set. If the fault resistance Rf is smaller than RTrip, using internal trip
time characteristic, output signal TRIP is set after the calculated time. For trip time delay,
see fig 179
When 1s filter length is used and the fault resistance is equal to the set value RTrip, the trip
time is about 10 s. If the fault resistance is estimated to be 0 , the trip delay is 2 s. For
values in between, the delay follows the linear interpolation describing the fault resistance
time characteristic.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
395
Section 7
Impedance protection
Trip time
10 FilterLength
2 FilterLength
Fault resistance
RTrip
RAlarm
IEC11000002-1-en.vsd
IEC11000002 V1 EN
Figure 179:
A third high level step for the detection of excitation system ground faults on the AC side
of the excitation rectifier is available. This step uses the network frequency (50 or 60 Hz)
for the evaluation. If a ground fault occurs at the AC side of the excitation system rectifier,
there is a fundamental frequency component at the measured voltage and current injection
points.
The third high level step is not applicable if mixed signals are used, that is when the
REX060 is used for both rotor and stator ground fault protection and only two, instead of
four, analog inputs on the IED are used.
7.10.10
Technical data
Table 162:
Function
Range or value
Injection frequency
Accuracy
Can be reached at
steady state operating
condition of the machine
500 k
Typically
20 - 50 k
(75.000 - 250.000) Hz
0.1 Hz
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(100 - 100000)
5% of 1 k at Rf 1 k
5% of set value at 1 k < Rf 20 k
10% of set value at Rf > 20 k
(100 - 1000000)
5% of 1 k at Rf 1 k
5% of 10 k at 1 k < Rf 20 k
10% of set value at 20 k < Rf 200 k
1.00 s typically
3.00 s typically
(0.00 - 600.00) s
7.11
7.11.1
Identification
Function description
100% stator earth fault protection,
injection based
7.11.2
IEC 61850
identification
STTIPHIZ
IEC 60617
identification
Rse<
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
64S
Functionality
The 100% stator earth-fault protection STTIPHIZ (64S) is used to detect ground faults in
the stator windings of generators and motors. STTIPHIZ (64S) is applicable for generators
connected to the power system through a unit transformer in a block connection. An
independent signal with a certain frequency different from the generator rated frequency
is injected into the stator circuit. The responce of this injected signal is used to detect stator
ground faults.
To implement the above concept, a separate injection box is required. The injection box
generates a square wave voltage signal which for example can be fed into the secondary
winding of the generator neutral point voltage transformer or grounding transformer. This
signal propagates through this transformer into the stator circuit.
The magnitude of the injected voltage signal is measured on the secondary side of the
neutral point voltage transformer or grounding transformer. In addition, the resulting
injected current is measured through a resistive shunt located within the injection box.
These two measured values are fed to the IED. Based on these two measured quantities,
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
397
Section 7
Impedance protection
the IED determines the stator winding resistance to ground. The resistance value is then
compared with the preset fault resistance alarm and trip levels.
The protection function can not only detect the ground fault at the generator star point, but
also along the stator windings and at the generator terminals, including the connected
components such as voltage transformers, circuit breakers, excitation transformer and so
on. The measuring principle used is not influenced by the generator operating mode and
is fully functional even with the generator at standstill. It is still required to have a standard
95% stator earth-fault protection, based on the neutral point fundamental frequency
displacement voltage, operating in parallel with the 100% stator earth-fault protection
function.
Requires injection unit REX060 and optional shunt resistor unit REX062 for correct
operation.
7.11.3
7.11.4
USV
The measured injection voltage. This signal is taken from a pre-processor block, the AI output.
The analog voltage input AI1 is linked to the phase A in the pre-processor block in the Signal
Matrix tool.
USI
The measured injection current. This signal is taken from a pre-processor block, the AI output.
In the pre-configured version, the analog voltage input AI2 is linked to the phase B in the preprocessor block in the Signal Matrix tool.
BLOCK
ZREFSEL
The selection of any of the pre-defined reference impedances. The reference impedance can
differ, for example, with the generator breaker open or closed. Therefore, there is a possibility
to change from one set reference impedance to another. Five different reference impedances
are available.
398
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 164:
Output signal
TRIP
BFI
Signal activated, if the calculated fault resistance gets lower than the set level
ALARM
Signal activated after a set time delay, if the calculated fault resistance gets lower than the
set alarm level
OPCIRC
ERROR
ERRSTAT
RAVE
Measured stator resistance to earth in at an injected frequency (real part of the complex
impedance)
XAVE
Measured stator reactance to earth in at the injected frequency (imaginary part of the
complex impedance)
FREQV
RFAULT
ZREF
ZREFRE
ZREFIM
VRMSSTAT
This signal is set true, if the measured RMS voltage is larger than the set limit ULimRMS
IRMSSTAT
This signal is set true, if the measured RMS current is larger than the set limit ILimRMS
Definition of errors
Bit 6
Undercurrent
Overcurrent
Overvoltage
Priority 3
Bit 2
Frequency
difference
Bit 1
Priority 1
No current
Bit 0
No voltage
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
399
Section 7
Impedance protection
Prio1 = B0, B1
Prio2 = B3, B4, B5, B6
Prio3 = B2, B7
7.11.5
Function block
STTIPHIZ (64S)
USV*
TRIP
USI*
BFI
BLOCK
ALARM
ZREFSEL
OPCIRC
ERROR
ERRSTAT
RAVE
XAVE
FREQV
RFAULT
ZREF
ZREFRE
ZREFIM
VRMSSTAT
ANSI10000298-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000298 V1 EN
Figure 180:
400
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.11.6
Signals
Table 166:
Name
Type
USI
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
ZREFSEL
INTEGER
Name
Table 168:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 167:
7.11.7
Default
USV
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
BFI
BOOLEAN
Initiate
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm
OPCIRC
BOOLEAN
ERROR
BOOLEAN
Error
ERRSTAT
INTEGER
Error indication
RAVE
REAL
XAVE
REAL
FREQV
REAL
RFAULT
REAL
ZREF
INTEGER
ZREFRE
REAL
ZREFIM
REAL
VRMSSTAT
BOOLEAN
Settings
STTIPHIZ (64S) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Enable/Disable
RTrip
100 - 10000
Ohm
1000
RAlarm
100 - 100000
Ohm
5000
tAlarm
0.00 - 600.00
1.00
30.00
OpenCircLim
100 - 10000000
Ohm
10000000
VLimRMS
1 - 1000
100
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
401
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 169:
Name
FreqInjected
Table 170:
Name
Unit
Hz
Step
0.001
Default
87.000
Description
Injected frequency
Unit
Step
Default
Description
k1Real
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
10000.000
k1Imag
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
k2Real
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
0.000
k2Imag
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
0.000
RefR1
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000.000
RefX1
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
RefR2
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000.000
RefX2
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
RefR3
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000.000
RefX3
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
RefR4
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000.000
RefX4
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
RefR5
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000.000
RefX5
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
Table 171:
Name
FilterLength
402
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
1s
Description
Length of filter buffer
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.11.8
Monitored data
Table 172:
Name
7.11.9
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
RAVE
REAL
Ohm
XAVE
REAL
Ohm
FREQV
REAL
Hz
Measured frequency of
injected voltage into stator
RFAULT
REAL
Ohm
ZREF
INTEGER
Selected reference
impedance number
ZREFRE
REAL
Ohm
ZREFIM
REAL
Ohm
VRMSSTAT
BOOLEAN
Operation principle
The protection function is based on signal injection into a stator winding. These square
wave signals are generated in a separate injection unit REX060.
The injection signals are connected to the stator winding via:
secondary winding of a voltage transformer (VT) located at the stator neutral point
open delta winding of a three-phase VT set located at generator terminals
secondary winding of a distribution transformer (DT) located at the stator neutral
point; note that REX062 is typically required for such arrangement
open delta winding of a three-phase grounding transformer (GT) located at generator
terminals; note that REX062 is typically required for such arrangement
In the REX060 unit the injection voltage and current signals are amplified to a level
adapted to the analogue voltage inputs of IED. In IED the measured signals are processed
and evaluation will give detection of stator faults.
7.11.9.1
Configuration principle
Figure 181 shows a typical installation for stator injection.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
403
Section 7
Impedance protection
10
Step-up
Transformer
U>
Vinj
1
Rshunt
GEN
Generator
100% SEF
I
RN
REX060/SIM module
8
3
95 % SEF
REG670
ANSI11000067-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000067 V1 EN
Figure 181:
404
Neutral point VT which is used as injection point and also to provide galvanic separation between
primary circuit and injection equipment
Cable used to inject the square-wave signal into the stator circuit
Connection for measurement of injected current. This signal is amplified in REX060 before it is given to
REG670 for evaluation.
Cable for measurement of injected voltage at the injection point. This signal is amplified in REX060
before it is given to REG670 for evaluation.
Two VT inputs into REG670 which are used to measure injected current and voltage
10
Protection for excessive over-voltages posed by generator. REX060 can withstand without damage
maximum voltage of 120V and when used together with REX062 up to 240V.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Top view
Back view
Power
connector
Front view
Keylock
LED
X11
X61
X81
18
Front-plate
X82
Rotor
Stator
Power
Backplane
HMI with logic
18
X62
PSM
Injection Stator
Injection Rotor
Injection LED
Injection switch
IEC11000015-1-en.vsd
IEC11000015 V1 EN
Figure 182:
The REX060 unit is a common unit with it's own built-in Power Supply Module (PSM) of
the same type as used in the IED that can be equipped for either rotor or stator ground fault
protection, or for both. The REX060 has specific injection modules for rotor and stator
protection. The REX060 generates square wave signals, where one is used for injection to
the stator neutral point and the other to the field winding circuit (rotor circuit), if
configured for both stator and rotor protection. The injected voltages and currents are
measured by the unit and amplified, giving voltage signals both for the injected voltage
and current, and adapted to the analogue inputs of IED. The injection unit REX060 shall
be located close to the IED.
For the stator ground fault protection, there are some settings necessary for REX060:
REX060 will also continuously check the measured signal for detection of saturation
which could cause error in the evaluation in IED. If saturation level is reached, a binary
output contact is activated, which is connected to IED. Also other errors in injection will
activate another output contact to IED for blocking the function.
Stator injection output is protected against voltages exceeding maximum operating range
(10% of rated VT/DT) by a relay blocking the injection circuit. This blocking remains
blocked by stored status in non-volatile memory. Note REX060 is designed to cope with
such voltages of up to 120V. When optional REX062 resistor unit is used, REX060 can
cope with voltages of up to 240V at injection point.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
405
Section 7
Impedance protection
The output is also protected by a fuse. If this fuse is blown, it is caused by external voltage
source, since the injection unit cannot provide enough energy to blow this fuse.
Refer to the Hardware section in this manual for a detailed description of REX060.
7.11.9.2
Normally the generator system has some kind of high resistance grounding, giving ground
fault current within the range 5 20 A, thus preventing serious damages in case of stator
ground faults. Direct grounding will give too high ground fault current level. Isolated
generator system will give risk of transient overvoltages.
Below some alternatives for generator system grounding are shown;
406
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
C
IEC110000066-1-en.vsd
IEC11000066 V1 EN
Figure 183:
EF_Max
G _ Ph - Ph
3 RN
EQUATION2515 V1 EN
where:
RN
UG_Ph-Ph
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
407
Section 7
Impedance protection
Typically a VT is connected in parallel with this resistor in order to measure voltage in the
stator neutral point.
The VT must have a rating of at least 100VA and a rated secondary
winding voltage of up to 120V. It must adhere to IEC 61869-3:2011
section 5.5.301 Rated Output Values and the standard values specified
according to burden range II.
The maximum voltage on the secondary side of the VT for an ground fault at generator
terminals can be calculated as:
U EF_Max =
U G _ Ph - Ph
3
U2
U1
EQUATION2516 V1 EN
where:
U2/U1
UG_Ph-Ph
U1
REq =
RN
U2
EQUATION2517 V1 EN
where:
408
U1/U2
RN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
The distribution transformer typically has rating of several kVA (e.g. 33kVA) and rated
secondary winding voltage of up to 240V. Note that maximum voltage on the secondary
side of the distribution transformer for an ground fault at generator terminals can be
calculated as follows:
U EF_Max =
U G _ Ph - Ph
3
U2
U1
EQUATION2516 V1 EN
where:
U2/U1
UG_Ph-Ph
Note that in case of an ground fault in the stator, the secondary current through the RN
resistor will be often in order of couple of hundred amperes. This maximum secondary
current can be calculated as follows:
I EF _ Sec =
U EF _ Max
RN
EQUATION2518 V1 EN
U1
REq =
RN
3 U 2
EQUATION2519 V1 EN
where:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
409
Section 7
Impedance protection
U1/U2
is the turn (i.e. rated voltage) ratio of one phase of the power transformer, e.g.
8 kV
3
500V
3
EQUATION2521 V1 EN
RN
The three-phase power transformer typically has rating of several tens of kVA (e.g.
129kVA) and rated secondary winding voltage of up to 550V. Note that maximum voltage
across secondary resistor RN for an ground fault at generator terminals can be calculated
as follows:
U EF_Max =
3 U G _ Ph - Ph
U2
U1
EQUATION2520 V1 EN
where:
U2/U1
is the turn (i.e. rated voltage) ratio of one phase of the power transformer, e.g.
500V
3
8 kV
3
EQUATION2522 V1 EN
UG_Ph-Ph
Note that in case of an ground fault in the stator, the secondary current through the RN
resistor will be often in order of couple of hundred amperes. This maximum secondary
current can be calculated as follows:
I EF _ Sec =
U EF _ Max
RN
EQUATION2518 V1 EN
For all the alternatives the 100% stator earth fault protection can be applied.
410
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.11.9.3
Z Bare
Z Measured
Z series
Cstat
R fault
Iinj
a
VN
Rf
Cstat
RN
ZmT
+
Vinj
-
b
Iinj
+
RN
Stator Reference
Impedance ZRef
Vinj
-
b
ANSI11000008_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000008 V1 EN
Figure 184:
There are some alternatives for connection of the neutral point resistor as shown in figure
185 (low voltage neutral point resistor connected via a DT).
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
411
Section 7
Impedance protection
Cstat
Iinj
a
+
RN
Vinj
b
ANSI11000009_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000009 V1 EN
Figure 185:
412
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
I inj
RN
C stat
Vinj
b
ANSI11000010_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000010 V1 EN
Figure 186:
It is also possible to make the injection via VT open delta connection, as shown in figure
187.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
413
Section 7
Impedance protection
V1 / V2
Y
I inj
+
Rd
Vinj
-
stat
V
R d >> 1 RN
V2
RN
ANSI11000011_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000011 V1 EN
Figure 187:
It must be observed that the resistor Rd is normally applied for ferro-resonance damping.
The resistance Rd is will have very little contribution to the ground fault current as it has
high resistance. This injection principle can be used for applications with various
generator system grounding methods. It is therefore recommended to make the injection
via the open delta VT on the terminal side in most applications.
Accuracy for STTIPHIZ (64S) is installation dependent and it mainly depends on the
characteristic of grounding or voltage transformer used to inject signal into the stator.
Note that large variation of the ambient temperature and variation of stator capacitance
414
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
and conductance to ground between standstill and fully loaded machine will also limit the
possible setting level for the alarm stage. As a consequence 10 k sensitivity can be
typically reached without problem. Depending on particular installation alarm sensitivity
of up to 50 k may be reached at steady state operating condition of the machine.
Note that it is possible to connect two REG670 in parallel to the REX060 injection unit in
order to obtain redundant measurement in two separate IEDs. However, at commissioning
both REG670 IEDs must be connected during calibration procedure.
7.11.9.4
Z bare =
U Inj
I Inj
EQUATION2500 V1 EN
ZMeasured
ZBare
Z series
Iinj
+
Rf
Z shunt
Uinj
-
IEC11000003-2-en.vsd
IEC11000003 V1 EN
Figure 188:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
415
Section 7
Impedance protection
Z Measured = k1 Z bare + k 2
EQUATION2501 V1 EN
open- circuit
Open Circuit
Hysteresis
{Z
Measured
} re
openCircuitLimit
IEC11000073-1-en.vsd
IEC11000073 V1 EN
Figure 189:
Blocking: The output OPCIRC is blocked during an error occurring and during
initialization of function.
Detailed Set: If the total measured real part of the impedance is greater than the setting
OpenCircLim the output OPCIRC is TRUE, see figure 176.
416
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.11.9.5
1
Z ref
1
RN
+ jw C stat +
1
Z mT
EQUATION2502 V1 EN
Where
w = 2p finj
EQUATION2503 V1 EN
The injected frequency finj of the square wave, is a set value, deviating from the
fundamental frequency (50 or 60 Hz). The injected frequency can be set within the range
50 250 Hz with recommend value 87 Hz in 50 Hz systems and 103 Hz in 60 Hz systems.
The reference impedance can vary depending on the operational state. The reason for this
can be the following:
The influence from the impedance ZmT will be different when the generator is standstill and when it is in operation
The capacitance to ground will vary if the generator breaker is open or closed
The capacitance will vary if the generator is energized or not depending on stator end
winding corona protection
Non-linearity of used injection transformer, different properties at low and high total
voltage and temperature changes
Impedance to ground is affected by auxiliary loads connected between generator and
unit transformer. If these loads vary, the estimated ground fault resistance will be
affected.
The difference from the first reference impedance is identified by monitoring impedance
(RAVE + jXRAVE) during different operation modes. This impedance is available as a
service value from the stator function both on built-in HMI and in ICT tool. If the
difference is significant more than one reference impedance is required. In the ICT up to
five different sets of reference impedances can be derived during commissioning for
different states of operation and downloaded to the protection function as different values
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
417
Section 7
Impedance protection
1
Z
1
Z ref
1
Zf
EQUATION2513 V1 EN
1
Zf
1
Z
1
Z ref
EQUATION2514 V1 EN
EQUATION2421 V1 EN
RAlarm given in . If
R f < RAlarm
EQUATION2524 V1 EN
418
Section 7
Impedance protection
R f < RTrip
EQUATION2523 V1 EN
10 FilterLength
2 FilterLength
Fault resistance
RTrip
RAlarm
IEC11000002-1-en.vsd
IEC11000002 V1 EN
Figure 190:
During run-up and shut down of the generator, i.e. when the rotational speed of the
generator changes, there will occur harmonic voltages with varying frequency at the
injection equipment connection point (for example see voltage generator Vn in Figure
184). If such frequencies interfere with the injected frequency this might create an error in
the fault resistance estimation. Such situations are identified in the function and the
function is automatically stabilized to prevent unwanted operation of the protection.
In connection with this calibration the reference impedance is also derived.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
419
Section 7
Impedance protection
The following automatic choice for the actual reference impedance can for example be
made:
Generator voltage < set value and generator circuit breaker open: Reference
impedance 1
Generator voltage > set value and generator circuit breaker open: Reference
impedance 2
Generator voltage > set value and generator circuit breaker closed: Reference
impedance 3
The monitoring, enabled in ICT, will give indication if several reference impedance
values are needed.
From the measured impedance the stator ground fault resistance can be estimated since the
reference impedance is known. An alarm level () is set at a higher value and the ALARM
signal is activated after a set alarm delay time. A trip level () is also set at a lower value.
When the trip level is reached a TRIP signal is activated as shown in figure 190.
420
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.11.9.6
Uinj
Rshunt
2
6
Rf
Z Measured
Compare &
Evaluate
I Inj
u_i_sef
U Inj
u_u_sef
Z Bare
X
K2
K1
ZRef1
ZRef2
REX060
ZRef3
ZRef4
SELECT REFERENCE
ZRef5
95% Trip
tON=0.5s
t
a
a>b
b
UN
UN> = 5%
un
REG670
IEC10000325-2-en.vsd
IEC10000325 V1 EN
Figure 191:
Simplified logic diagram for 100% stator earth fault protection STTIPHIZ
The 100% stator earth fault protection function receives amplified injected voltage and current via
the REX060 unit as two voltage signals. (Voltage inputs in the REG670).
The phasor of injected voltage UInj and phasor of injected current IInj is calculated by using special
filter from raw samples. Observe that phasors are calculated for the injected frequency.
4, 5
The fault resistance (RFault) is calculated from the complex measured impedance and a selected
complex reference.
Fourier filter to derive the phasor of zero sequence voltage at fundamental frequency
The 95% stator earth fault zero sequence over voltage function must operate in parallel with
STTIPHIZ.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
421
Section 7
Impedance protection
Rf
OR
Alarm
Adaptive
TripDelay
Trip
IEC10000326-3.vsd
IEC10000326 V2 EN
Figure 192:
If the fault resistance Rf is smaller than RAlarm and last longer than set alarm delay, output
ALARM is set. If the fault resistance Rf is smaller than RTrip, output signal TRIP is set after
the calculated time. For trip time delay, see fig 190
7.11.10
Technical data
Table 173:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Can be reached at
steady state operating
condition of the machine
50 k
Typically
10 k
Injection frequency
(50.000 - 250.000) Hz
0.1 Hz
Injection voltage
240 V
(100 - 10000)
5% of 1 k at Rf 1 k
10% of set value at Rf > 1 k
(100 - 100000)
5% of 1 k at Rf 1 k
10% of 10 k at 1 k < Rf 10 k
50% of set value at Rf > 10 k
422
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
1.00 s typically
3.00 s typically
(0.00 - 600.00) s
7.12
7.12.1
Identification
Function description
Under impedance function for
generators and transformers
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ZGVPDIS
ANSI/
IEEEidentification
21G
S00346 V1 EN
7.12.2
Functionality
The under impedance protection is a three zone full scheme impedance protection using
offset mho characteristics for detecting faults in the generator, generator-transformer and
transmission system. The three zones have fully independent measuring loops and
settings. The functionality also comprises an under voltage seal-in feature to ensure
issuing of a trip even if the current transformer goes into saturation and, in addition, the
positive-sequence-based load encroachment feature for the second and the third
impedance zone. Built-in compensation for the step-up transformer vector group
connection is available.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
423
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.12.3
Function block
ZGVPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKUV
TRIP
TRZ1
TRZ2
TRZ3
27 Trip
PICKUP
PU_Z1
PU_Z2
PU_Z3
27 PU
ANSI14000063-1-en.vsd
ANSI14000063 V1 EN
Figure 193:
7.12.4
Signals
Table 174:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
BLKUV
BOOLEAN
Table 175:
Name
424
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General Trip
TRZ1
BOOLEAN
TRZ2
BOOLEAN
TRZ3
BOOLEAN
27 Trip
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Pickup
PU_Z1
BOOLEAN
Pick up Zone 1
PU_Z2
BOOLEAN
Pick up Zone 2
PU_Z3
BOOLEAN
Pick up zone 3
27 PU
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.12.5
Table 176:
Name
Settings
ZGVPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
On
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
ImpedanceAng
5 - 90
Deg
80
IMinOp
5 - 80
%IB
10
OpModeZ1
Disabled
PP Loops
PP Loops
Z1Fwd
3.0 - 100.0
% Zb
0.1
8.0
Z1Rev
3.0 - 100.0
% Zb
0.1
8.0
tZ1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OpModeZ2
Disabled
PP Loops
EnhancedReach
EnhancedReach
Z2Fwd
3.0 - 200.0
% Zb
0.1
15.0
Z2Rev
3.0 - 200.0
% Zb
0.1
8.0
tZ2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
OpModeZ3
Disabled
PP Loops
EnhancedReach
EnhancedReach
Z3Fwd
3.0 - 200.0
% Zb
0.1
75.0
Z3Rev
3.0 - 200.0
% Zb
0.1
8.0
tZ3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.500
OpMode27pickup
Disabled
Z2pick up
Z3pick up
Disabled
27_COMP
5 - 90
%VB
70
timeDelay27
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
425
Section 7
Impedance protection
Table 177:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
RLd
5 - 120
% Zb
50
LdAngle
5 - 85
Deg
38
LoadEnchModZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
LoadEnchModZ3
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Table 178:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.12.6
Unit
1 - 12
Step
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 179:
Name
7.12.7
Default
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VA
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase A
VB
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase B
VC
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase C
IA
REAL
Current in phase A
IB
REAL
Current in phase B
IC
REAL
Current in phase C
Operation principle
The reach values for all the zones are set in percentage of impedance base value. The
impedance base value is calculated using the generator current and voltage ratings.
The base value of impedance can be calculated according to equation 93.
ZBase =
VBase
3 IBase
(Equation 93)
ANSIEQUATION1400024 V1 EN
Where,
ZBase
426
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
VBase
IBase
IEC11000294-2-en.vsd
IEC11000294 V2 EN
Figure 194:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
427
Section 7
Impedance protection
V3P
I3P
BLKZ
BLOCK
PU_Z1
ZONE 1
TRZ1
OpModetZ1
Z1Fw
Z1Rev
tZ1
PICKUP
OR
PU_Z2
ZONE 2
OpModetZ2
Z2Fw
Z2Rev
tZ2
LoadEnchModZ2
TRZ2
TRIP
OR
OR
ZONE 3
PU_Z3
OpModetZ3
Z3Fw
Z3Rev
tZ3
LoadEnchModZ3
TRZ3
LoadEnch
RLd
LdAngle
UVSealIn
27 Trip
OpMode27pickup
27_COMP
timeDelay27
27 PU
BLOCKUV
ANSI11000295_2_en.vsd
ANSI11000295 V2 EN
Figure 195:
7.12.7.1
428
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
V3P
I3P
Comparator
ZAB <
EnableZone1
Z1Fw
Z1Rev
pickupZone1
Timer Logic
Comparator
ZBC
<
EnableZone1
Z1Fw
Z1Rev
OR
tripZone1
tOpDelayZ1
opModetZ1
Comparator
ZCA <
EnableZone1
Z1Fw
Z1Rev
ANSI11000297_1.en.vsd
ANSI11000297 V1 EN
Figure 196:
Comparator to detect, if the operating impedance has entered inside zone 1 offset mho
characteristic.
All three phase-to-phase loops are implemented separately.
Forward and reverse reach values are provided in percentage of impedance base value
at generator.
Trip time delay is provided.
Comparator characteristics
The comparator consists of offset mho characteristics. Three individual comparators are
provided in the three phase-to-phase loops. The offset mho characteristic is as shown in
figure 197.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
429
Section 7
Impedance protection
I AB jX
I A B Z1FW
Vcomp1= VAB - I AB Z1FW
Vcomp 2 = VA B + IABZ1REV
I A B jX
- I AB Z 1REV
ANSI11000296_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000296 V1 EN
Figure 197:
Z 1Fwd ImpedanceAng
(Equation 94)
IECEQUATION14000025 V2 EN
IECEQUATION14000026 V2 EN
Phase-to-phase loop
1
A-B
B-C
C-A
Voltage phasor
Current phasor
VAB
IAB
VBC
IBC
VCA
ICA
Trip time
The operate time delay for zone 1 can be provided using the setting tZ1.
430
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.12.7.2
V3P
Zero
sequence
Voltage
Compensation
I3P
BLOCK
BLKZ
Max Curr
Loop logic
Measuring Loop
phase-to-ground
(ZA<,ZB<,ZC<)
T
F
EnableZone2
Z2Fwd
Z2Rev
LineAngle
PU_Z2
OR
AND
Measuring Loop
phase-to-phase
(ZAB<,ZBC<,ZCA<)
EnableZone2
Z2Fwd
Z2Rev
LineAngle
AND
LoadEnchMod2
Timer
T
TRZ2
tZ2
OpModeZ2
Load
Encroachment
RLd
LdAngle
ANSI11000298_2_en.vsd
ANSI11000298 V2 EN
Figure 198:
Zone 2 can be used to cover up to the HV side of the transformer and the HV bus bar. It
also covers to some degree, the stator winding. The time to trip is provided in order to
coordinate with the zone 1 element on the shortest outgoing line from the bus.
Zone 2 coverage provides backup for the phase-to-phase and three-phase faults in
generator. It also protects LV winding of generator transformer and phase-to-ground,
phase-to-phase and three-phase faults in the HV side of transformer and bus. A separate
maximum current feature is provided in phase-to-ground loop selection which gives
correct reach measurement for phase-to-phase fault on HV side. Zero sequence
compensation for the phase voltages is given in phase-to-ground measuring loops in order
to prevent operation for the stator ground faults.
Zone 2 can be selected for different measuring loops using the setting OpModeZ2. The
OpModeZ2 can be selected as Disabled or PP Loops or EnhancedReach. If the OpModeZ2
is selected as EnhancedReach, the loop used for measurements is the phase-to-earth
measuring loop (AG, BG and CG) which is with maximum phase current of all the three
phase currents.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
431
Section 7
Impedance protection
Figure 199 shows the logic to detect the phase to ground loop with maximum phase
current.
a
i1Mag
pickupPh1
NOT
i2Mag
a
b
pickupPh2
AND
AND
OR
pickup
B
a==b
pickupPh3
OR
i3Mag
AND
a==b
NOT
AND
AND
C
a==b
MAX
ANSI11000307_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000307 V1 EN
Figure 199:
The phase-to-ground voltage is compensated with zero sequence voltage in order to avoid
the function operating for ground faults in zone 1, that is, complete generator stator
winding and LV winding of the power transformer.
The reach settings for zone 2 can be provided using the Z2Fwd, Z2Rev and ImpedanceAng
settings. The Z2Fwd is forward reach setting and Z2Rev is reverse reach setting. The offset
mho characteristic for phase-to-ground loop is shown in Figure 200. The offset mho
characteristics for phase-to-phase loop is shown in Figure 201.
432
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
I A jX
I A Z 2 FW
Vcomp1 = V AG - V 0 - I A Z 2 FW
Vcomp 2 = V AG - V 0 + I A Z 2 REV
I A jX
- I A Z 2 REV
ANSI11000299_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000299 V1 EN
Figure 200:
IAB Z 2 FW
IAB jX
- IAB Z 2 REV
ANSI11000300_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000300 V1 EN
Figure 201:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
433
Section 7
Impedance protection
Z 2 Fwd ImpedanceAng
Z 2 Rev
Z 2 Rev ImpedanceAng
(Equation 96)
GUID-007D6357-B7CF-4C21-B772-2245F06C83A2 V2 EN
Measuring Loop
A-B
B-C
C-A
Voltage Phasor
Current Phasor
VAB
IAB
VBC
IBC
VCA
ICA
Enhanced Reach:
Sl.No
Measuring Loop
IA
IB
IC
Voltage Phasor
Current Phasor
VAG - V 0
IA
VBG - V 0
IB
VCG - V 0
IC
Trip time
The operate time delay for zone 2 can be provided using the setting tZ2.
Zone 2 is provided load encroachment detection feature based on positive sequence
components measurements.. This feature avoids the function from operating due to load
encroachment. The load encroachment feature for zone 2 can be set using
LoadEnchModZ2 to Enabled or Disabled.
7.12.7.3
434
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 7
Impedance protection
The Zone3 functionality is same as zone2, hence the explanation of zone 2 applies for zone
3, except the zone 3 has separate reach (Z3Fw, Z3Rev), operate timer (tZ3) and load
encroachment enable (LoadEnchModZ3) settings.
7.12.7.4
Load encroachment
The load encroachment characteristics can be set for zone2 and zone3. Load
encroachment can be enabled for zone 2 by setting LoadEnchModZ2 to Enabled.
Similarly the load encroachment for zone 3 can be enabled by setting LoadEnchModZ3 to
Enabled.
The load encroachment characteristic is based on positive sequence quantities and can be
set using the settings RLd and LdAngle.
RLd is the positive sequence resistive reach value in percentage. LdAngle is angle in
degrees from the origin to the resistive axis as shown in Figure 202.
ANSI11000304-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000304 V1 EN
Figure 202:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
435
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.12.7.5
BLOCK
BLKUV
OR
AND
Zone 2 picukp
AND
EnableUV =
0 = UV OFF
1 =Z2 pickup
2 =Z3 pickup
int
b0
uP1P2
OR
b1
Zone 3 pickup
27_COMP
27 PU
Drop-Off
timer
0
10 ms
OR
timeDelay27
0
27 Trip
tPulse = 1sec
q1
AND
a<b
Comparator
with
hysterisis relative as 5%
uP2P3
27_COMP
a<b
OR
Comparator
with
hysterisis relative as 5%
uP3P1
27_COMP
a
a<b
b
Comparator
with
hysterisis relative as 5%
ANSI11000306_2_en.vsd
ANSI11000306 V3 EN
Figure 203:
436
Section 7
Impedance protection
7.12.8
Technical data
Table 180:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
Forward reach
(3.0 - 200.0)% of Zn
where Zn=VBase/3IBase
Reverse reach
(3.0 - 200.0)% of Zn
where Zn=VBase/3IBase
Impedance angle
(5 - 90) degrees
Reset ratio
105% typically
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 35 ms
(0.000 60.000) s
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
greater
437
438
Section 8
Current protection
Section 8
Current protection
8.1
8.1.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50
PHPIOC
3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN
8.1.2
Functionality
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and
short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.
8.1.3
Function block
PHPIOC (50)
I3P*
BLOCK
MULTPU
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
ANSI04000391-2-en.vsd
ANSI04000391 V2 EN
Figure 204:
8.1.4
Signals
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
439
Section 8
Current protection
Table 181:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
MULTPU
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 183:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 182:
8.1.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TR_A
BOOLEAN
TR_B
BOOLEAN
TR_C
BOOLEAN
Settings
PHPIOC (50) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
OpModeSel
2 out of 3
1 out of 3
1 out of 3
Pickup
5 - 2500
%IB
200
Table 184:
Name
MultPU
Table 185:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
440
Unit
-
Step
0.1
Default
1.0
Description
Multiplier for operate current level
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Table 186:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PU_MinEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
PU_MaxEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
2500
8.1.6
Monitored data
Table 187:
Name
8.1.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IA
REAL
Current in phase A
IB
REAL
Current in phase B
IC
REAL
Current in phase C
Operation principle
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental frequency
components, as well as sampled values of each phase current. These phase current values
are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function
PHPIOC (50). In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current
value of the function Pickup. If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a
signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay,
activate the output signal TR_x(x=A, B or C) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is
common for all three phases.
There is an operation mode (OpModeSel) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter
is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out of 3
at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current (MultPU)
via a binary input (MULTPU). In some applications the operation value needs to be
changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
PHPIOC (50) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
441
Section 8
Current protection
8.1.8
Technical data
Table 188:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip current
(5-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 25 ms
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 5ms
Max. = 15ms
Min. = 25ms
Max. = 40 ms
2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at t = 100 ms
8.2
8.2.1
Identification
Function description
Four step phase overcurrent protection
3-phase output
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51_67
OC4PTOC
TOC-REVA V2 EN
8.2.2
Functionality
The four step three-phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC (51/67) has
independent inverse time delay settings for steps 1 to 4.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional user
defined time characteristic.
442
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The
function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
A second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block each
step individually.
8.2.3
Function block
OC4PTOC (51_67)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRST1
BLOCK
TRST2
BLKTR
TRST3
BLK1
TRST4
BLK2
TR_A
BLK3
TR_B
BLK4
TR_C
MULTPU1
TRST1_A
MULTPU2
TRST1_B
MULTPU3
TRST1_C
MULTPU4
TRST2_A
TRST2_B
TRST2_C
TRST3_A
TRST3_B
TRST3_C
TRST4_A
TRST4_B
TRST4_C
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
PU_ST2_C
PU_ST3_A
PU_ST3_B
PU_ST3_C
PU_ST4_A
PU_ST4_B
PU_ST4_C
2NDHARM
DIR_A
DIR_B
DIR_C
ANSI06000187-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000187 V2 EN
Figure 205:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
443
Section 8
Current protection
8.2.4
Signals
Table 189:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of Step1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of Step2
BLK3
BOOLEAN
Block of Step3
BLK4
BOOLEAN
Block of Step4
MULTPU1
BOOLEAN
MULTPU2
BOOLEAN
MULTPU3
BOOLEAN
MULTPU4
BOOLEAN
Table 190:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
TRST3
BOOLEAN
TRST4
BOOLEAN
TR_A
BOOLEAN
TR_B
BOOLEAN
TR_C
BOOLEAN
TRST1_A
BOOLEAN
TRST1_B
BOOLEAN
TRST1_C
BOOLEAN
TRST2_A
BOOLEAN
TRST2_B
BOOLEAN
TRST2_C
BOOLEAN
TRST3_A
BOOLEAN
TRST3_B
BOOLEAN
444
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Type
Description
TRST3_C
BOOLEAN
TRST4_A
BOOLEAN
TRST4_B
BOOLEAN
TRST4_C
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
PU_ST3
BOOLEAN
PU_ST4
BOOLEAN
PU_A
BOOLEAN
PU_B
BOOLEAN
PU_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST3_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST3_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST3_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST4_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST4_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST4_C
BOOLEAN
PU2NDHARM
BOOLEAN
DIR_A
INTEGER
DIR_B
INTEGER
DIR_C
INTEGER
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
445
Section 8
Current protection
8.2.5
Table 191:
Name
Settings
OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
AngleRCA
40 - 65
Deg
55
AngleROA
40 - 89
Deg
80
NumPhSel
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
DirModeSel1
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist1
Pickup1
5 - 2500
%IB
1000
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
TD1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin1
1 - 10000
%IB
100
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
MultPU1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
DirModeSel2
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
446
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist2
Pickup2
5 - 2500
%IB
500
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
TD2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin2
1 - 10000
%IB
50
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
MultPU2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
DirModeSel3
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist3
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
447
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Pickup3
5 - 2500
%IB
250
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
TD3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin3
1 - 10000
%IB
33
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
MultPU3
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
DirModeSel4
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist4
Pickup4
5 - 2500
%IB
175
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
TD4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin4
1 - 10000
%IB
17
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
MultPU4
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
448
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Table 192:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PUMinOpPhSel
1 - 100
%IB
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
%IB
20
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmBlock1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmBlock2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
449
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmBlock3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
HarmBlock4
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
450
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Table 193:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MeasType
DFT
RMS
DFT
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
Table 194:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PU1_MinEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
PU1_MaxEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
2500
PU2_MinEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
PU2_MaxEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
2500
PU3_MinEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
PU3_MaxEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
2500
PU4_MinEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
PU4_MaxEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
2500
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
451
Section 8
Current protection
8.2.6
Monitored data
Table 195:
Name
8.2.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
DIR_A
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIR_B
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIR_C
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
IA
REAL
Current in phase A
IB
REAL
Current in phase B
IC
REAL
Current in phase C
Operation principle
The Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC (51_67) is divided into four
different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and 4,
an operation mode is set by DirModeSelx: Disable/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.
The protection design can be divided into four parts:
452
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
faultState
Direction
Element
I3P
dirPhAFlt
dirPhBFlt
dirPhCFlt
faultState
PICKUP
V3P
TRIP
Harmonic
Restraint
Element
harmRestrBlock
enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
ANSI05000740-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000740 V2 EN
Figure 206:
A common setting for all steps, NumPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents
to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out
of 3.
The sampled analog phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function block.
Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step phase
overcurrent protection 1 and 3-phase output function OC4PTOC (51/67), it is possible to
select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select
either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).
If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and
higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option is
selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the
fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current DC
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
453
Section 8
Current protection
component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values are fed
to OC4PTOC (51/67).
In a comparator, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value
of the function (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3, Pickup4) for each phase current. If a phase
current is larger than the set operation current, outputs PICKUP, PU_STx, PU_A, PU_B
and PU_C are activated without delay. Output signals PU_A, PU_B and PU_C are
common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the activation. The
PICKUP signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be noted that the
selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation of directional
part of OC4PTOC (51/67) .
Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local HMI
for OC4PTOC (51/67) function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service
operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation
to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the preprocessing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain current level.
The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current angle
in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional
function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement at close in
faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the
apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The following combinations are
used.
Phase-phase short circuit:
Vref _ AB = VA - VB
I dir _ AB = I A - I B
(Equation 97)
GUID-4F361BC7-6D91-47B5-8119-A27009C0AD6A V1 EN
Vref _ BC = VB - VC
I dir _ BC = I B - I C
(Equation 98)
ANSIEQUATION1450 V1 EN
Vref _ CA = VC - VA
ANSIEQUATION1451 V1 EN
I dir _ CA = IC - I A
(Equation 99)
454
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Vref _ A = VA
I dir _ A = I A
(Equation 100)
ANSIEQUATION1452 V1 EN
Vref _ B = VB
I dir _ B = I B
(Equation 101)
ANSIEQUATION1453 V1 EN
Vref _ C = VC
I dir _ C = I C
ANSIEQUATION1454 V1 EN
(Equation 102)
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between
10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until
the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an
angle window ROADir.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
455
Section 8
Current protection
Reverse
Uref
RCA
ROA
ROA
Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
IEC05000745 V1 EN
456
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Reverse
Vref
RCA
ROA
ROA
Forward
Idir
en05000745_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000745 V1 EN
Figure 207:
The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle sector
from AngleRCA for directional borders.
A minimum current for directional phase pickup current signal can be set.
PUMinOpPhSel is the pickup level for directional evaluation of IA, IB and IC. The
directional signals release the overcurrent measurement in respective phases if their
current amplitudes are higher than the pickup level (PUMinOpPhSel) and the direction of
the current is according to the set direction of the step.
If no blockings are given, the pickup signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available.It is
also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic.
The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse
characteristics".
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
457
Section 8
Current protection
All four steps in OC4PTOC (51/67) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
binary input BLKx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.
|IOP|
Pickupx
Characteristx=DefTime
a
AND
OR
a>b
0-tx
0
PUx
STx
AND
0-txMin
0
AND
Inve rse
Characteristx=Inve rse
DirModeSelx=Disa bled
OR
STAGE x_DIR_Int
DirModeSelx=Non-dire ctional
DirModeSelx=Forward
DirModeSelx=Reverse
FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
AND
OR
AND
ANSI12000008-3-en.vsd
ANSI12000008-3-en.vsd
ANSI12000008 V3 EN
Figure 208:
458
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
I3P
DFWDLx
DFWDLxx
V3P
Directional
Element
AngleRCA
DREVLx
DREVLxx
FORWARD_int
Directional
Release
Block
AngleROA
REVERSE_int
STLx
PUminOpPhSel
Greater
Comparator
ANSI15000266-1-en.vsdx
ANSI15000266 V1 EN
Figure 209:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
459
Section 8
Current protection
BLOCK
a
0.07*IBase
a>b
b
a
a>b
IOP
Extract second
harmonic current
component
Extract
fundamental
current component
AND
a
a>b
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
2ndHarmStab
IEC13000014-2-en.vsd
IEC13000014 V2 EN
Figure 210:
8.2.8
Technical data
Table 196:
Function
Setting range
Accuracy
(5-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
(1-10000)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
(40.065.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
(40.089.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
(5100)% of fundamental
2.0% of In
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2 % or 35 ms whichever is
greater
16 curve types
Min. = 15 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
-
Max. = 30 ms
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Function
Setting range
Accuracy
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically
8.3
8.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50N
EFPIOC
IN>>
IEF V1 EN
8.3.2
Functionality
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N) has a low transient
overreach and short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous ground-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line at
minimum source impedance. EFPIOC (50N) is configured to measure the residual current
from the three-phase current inputs and can be configured to measure the current from a
separate current input.
8.3.3
Function block
EFPIOC (50N)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKAR
MULTPU
TRIP
ANSI06000269-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000269 V2 EN
Figure 211:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
461
Section 8
Current protection
8.3.4
Signals
Table 197:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKAR
BOOLEAN
MULTPU
BOOLEAN
Name
Type
TRIP
Table 199:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 198:
8.3.5
Default
I3P
Description
BOOLEAN
Trip signal
Settings
EFPIOC (50N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Pickup
5 - 2500
%IB
200
Table 200:
Name
MultPU
Table 201:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.3.6
Step
0.1
Default
1.0
Description
Multiplier for operate current level
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 202:
Name
IN
462
Unit
Values (Range)
-
Unit
A
Description
Residual current
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.3.7
Operation principle
The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as well as
from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to
the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC,50N). In a comparator the
RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function (Pickup). If the
residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set
to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRIP.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via a
binary input (enable multiplier MULTPU). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
EFPIOC (50N) function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals
from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated
during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.
8.3.8
Technical data
Table 203:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip current
(5-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of In at I > In
Reset ratio
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 25 ms
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 15 ms
Min. = 25 ms
Max. = 35 ms
2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at t = 100 ms
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
463
Section 8
Current protection
8.4
8.4.1
Identification
Function description
Four step residual overcurrent
protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
EF4PTOC
4(IN>)
4
4
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51N_67N
alt
TEF-REVA V2 EN
8.4.2
Functionality
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC (51N/67N) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step.
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined characteristic.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of
the steps.
IDir, VPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or negative
sequence.
Second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be used as main protection for phase-to-ground faults.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the
case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage
transformer circuit failure.
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic
in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-end infeed
functionality are available as well.
Residual current can be calculated by summing the three phase currents or taking the input
from neutral CT
464
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.4.3
Function block
EF4PTOC (51N_67N)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRST1
I3PPOL*
TRST2
I3PDIR*
TRST3
BLOCK
TRST4
BLKTR
TRSOTF
BLK1
PICK UP
BLK2
PUST1
BLK3
PUST2
BLK4
PUST3
MULTPU1
PUST4
MULTPU2
PUSOTF
MULTPU3
PUFW
MULTPU4
PUREV
52A
2NDHARMD
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
ANSI06000424-4-en.vsd
ANSI06000424 V4 EN
Figure 212:
8.4.4
Signals
Table 204:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PPOL
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PDIR
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
General block
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
BLK1
BOOLEAN
BLK2
BOOLEAN
BLK3
BOOLEAN
BLK4
BOOLEAN
MULTPU1
BOOLEAN
MULTPU2
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
465
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Type
MULTPU4
BOOLEAN
52a
BOOLEAN
Breaker position
CLOSECMD
BOOLEAN
OPENCMD
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 206:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 205:
8.4.5
Default
MULTPU3
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
TRST3
BOOLEAN
TRST4
BOOLEAN
TRSOTF
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PUST1
BOOLEAN
PUST2
BOOLEAN
PUST3
BOOLEAN
PUST4
BOOLEAN
PUSOTF
BOOLEAN
PUFW
BOOLEAN
PUREV
BOOLEAN
2NDHARMD
BOOLEAN
Settings
EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
EnDir
Disable
Enable
Enable
AngleRCA
-180 - 180
Deg
65
polMethod
Voltage
Current
Dual
Voltage
Type of polarization
466
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VPolMin
1 - 100
%VB
IPolMin
2 - 100
%IB
RNPol
0.50 - 1000.00
Ohm
0.01
5.00
XNPol
0.50 - 3000.00
Ohm
0.01
40.00
INDirPU
1 - 100
%IB
10
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
BlkParTransf
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Use_PUValue
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
ST4
SOTF
Disabled
SOTF
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime
Disabled
SOTFSel
Open
Closed
CloseCommand
Open
StepForSOTF
Step 2
Step 3
Step 2
HarmBlkSOTF
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tSOTF
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
t4U
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
ActUndrTimeSel
CB position
CB command
CB position
tUnderTime
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
DirModeSel1
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
467
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist1
Pickup1
1 - 2500
%IB
100
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
TD1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin1
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
100.00
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
MultPU1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
HarmBlock1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DirModeSel2
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
468
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist2
Pickup2
1 - 2500
%IB
50
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
TD2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin2
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
50
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
MultPU2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
HarmBlock2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DirModeSel3
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
469
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist3
Pickup3
1 - 2500
%IB
33
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
TD3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin3
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
33
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
MultPU3
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
HarmBlock3
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DirModeSel4
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
470
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist4
Pickup4
1 - 2500
%IB
17
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
TD4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin4
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
17
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
MultPU4
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
HarmBlock4
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Table 207:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
471
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
472
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Table 208:
Name
Step
Default
Description
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
SeqTypeIDir
Zero seq
Neg seq
Zero seq
SeqTypeIPol
Zero seq
Neg seq
Zero seq
SeqTypeVPol
Zero seq
Neg seq
Zero seq
Table 209:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PU1_MinEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB
PU1_MaxEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB
2500
PU2_MinEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB
PU2_MaxEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB
2500
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
473
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PU3_MinEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB
PU3_MaxEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB
2500
PU4_MinEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB
PU4_MaxEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB
2500
8.4.6
Monitored data
Table 210:
Name
8.4.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IOp
REAL
VPol
REAL
kV
IPol
REAL
VPOLIANG
REAL
deg
IPOLIANG
REAL
deg
Operation principle
This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the
configuration tool:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I3P, input used for Operating Quantity. Supply the zero-sequence magnitude
measuring functionality.
V3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity. Supply either zero or negative
sequence voltage to the directional functionality
I3PPOL, input used for Current Polarizing Quantity. Provide polarizing current to
the directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the grounding of a
power transformer.
I3PDIR, input used for Directional detection. Supply either zero or negative
sequence current to the directional functionality.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
Configuration Tool within PCM600.
474
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.4.7.1
2.
calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600).
In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into
the pre-processing block by using the following formula (will take I2 from SMAI
AI3P connected to I3PDIR input which was connected to I3P input also):
EQUATION2011-ANSI V1 EN
where:
IA, IB, IC
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor
magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC (51N/67N) protection to compare it with the set
operation current value of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If the
residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in nondirectional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will,
without delay, activate the output signal PUSTx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a common
PICKUP signal.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
475
Section 8
Current protection
8.4.7.2
Internal polarizing
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction to
the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.
Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected the protection will use the residual voltage -3V0 as
polarizing quantity V3P.
This voltage can be:
1.
2.
(Equation 105)
where:
VA, VB, VC
The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived.
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional current, in order
to determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable
voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum
level defined by setting parameter VpolMin.
476
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
It shall be noted that residual voltage (-3V0) or negative sequence voltage (-3V2) is used
to determine the location of the ground fault. This insures the required inversion of the
polarizing voltage within the ground-fault function.
Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual current (3I0)
as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
1.
2.
For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input can
be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three phases
(Holm-Green connection).
calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three
inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
I Pol = 3 Io = IA + IB + IC
EQUATION2019-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 107)
where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor is then
multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in order to calculate
equivalent polarizing voltage VIPol in accordance with the following formula:
VIPol = Zo S I Pol = ( RNPol + j XNPOL ) I Pol
EQUATION2013-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 108)
which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).
In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger
than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
477
Section 8
Current protection
Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
VTotPol = VVPol + VIPol = -3V0 + Z 0 s IPol = -3V0 + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) IPol
(Equation 109)
ANSIEQUATION1878 V1 EN
Vpol and Ipol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence component
depending upon the user selection.
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage VTotPol will be used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the ground fault (Forward/
Reverse).
8.4.7.3
8.4.7.4
8.4.7.5
478
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.4.7.6
8.4.7.7
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 213.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
479
Section 8
Current protection
BLKTR
EMULTX
IMinx
Characteristx=DefTime
a>b
tx
|IOP|
AND
TRSTx
OR
a>b
MultPUx
PUSTx
AND
T
F
Pickupx
AND
Inverse
tMin
BLKx
BLOCK
Characteristx=Inverse
2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int
OR
HarmRestrainx=Disabled
DirModex=Off
OR
STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
DirModex=Reverse
FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
AND
OR
AND
ANSI10000008-4-en.vsd
ANSI10000008 V3 EN
Figure 213:
The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output signals
for respective step, and PUSTx and TRSTx, can be blocked from the binary input BLKx.
The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
8.4.7.8
480
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1.
2.
3.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 214, in order to determine the direction of the ground fault.
Operating area
PUREV
0.6 * INDirPU
Characteristic
for PUREV
40% of
INDirPU
RCA
65
VPol = -3V0
INDirPU
PUFW
I op = 3I0
Operating area
Characteristic
for PUFW
ANSI11000243-1-en.ai
ANSI11000243 V1 EN
Figure 214:
Directional element will be internally enabled to trip as soon as Iop is bigger than 40%
of IDirPU and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
481
Section 8
Current protection
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function output binary signals:
1.
2.
PUFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is bigger than
setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects fault in
forward direction.
PUREV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is bigger
than 60% of setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects
fault in reverse direction.
482
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
|IopDir|
a
a>b
b
0.6
PUREV
AND
REVERSE_Int
X
a
a>b
IDirPU
0.4
FORWARD_Int
PUFW
AND
FWD
polMethod=Voltage
OR
polMethod=Dual
VPolMin
VPol
polMethod=Current
OR
IPol
0.0
RNPol
XNPol
T
0.0 F
IPolMin
I3PDIR
AND
FORWARD_Int
AND
REVERSE_Int
Directional
Characteristic
AngleRCA
VTPol
RVS
T
F
Complex
Number
VIPol
0.0
T
F
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
OR
AND
BLOCK
ANSI07000067-4-en.vsd
ANSI07000067 V4 EN
Figure 215:
8.4.7.9
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
483
Section 8
Current protection
1.
2.
3.
If all the above three conditions are fulfilled then ST2NDHRM function output signal is
set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function block is
applicable.
In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can be set
in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be required to
stabilize EF4PTOC (51N67N) during switching of parallel transformers in the station. In
case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the
transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric
inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial saturation of the
transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of
the inrush currents of the two transformers is in phase opposition. The summation of the
two currents thus gives a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current is
however significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel
transformer energizing, is a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we
have high 2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short period this current is
however small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking resets. If the BlkParTransf function
is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched as long as the residual current
measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level by using setting
UseStartValue.
This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-in
feature is activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
1.
2.
3.
Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking signal
is sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by parameter
setting Use_PUValue (see condition 3 above).
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 216.
484
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
BLOCK
a
0.07*IBase
IOP
a>b
Extract second
harmonic current
component
Extract
fundamental
current component
a>b
2NDHARMD
AND
a>b
2ndHarmStab
q-1
0-70ms
0
OR
AND
OR
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a>b
Use_PUValue
Pickup1>
Pickup2>
Pickup3>
Pickup4>
ANSI13000015-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000015 V1 EN
Figure 216:
8.4.7.10
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers feature
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
485
Section 8
Current protection
parameter SOTFSel can be set for activation of CB position open change, CB position
closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current pickup from step 2 or
3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is
normally set to a short time (default 200 ms).
The Under-Time logic always uses the pickup signal from the step 4. The Under-Time
logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function. The
Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This enables
high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker closing.
This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately after switching
of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from change in circuit
breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulses. This selection is
done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a pickup from step 4 this logic will
give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time
(default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker polediscrepancy protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker switching. The
Under-Time logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.
SOTF
Open
t4U
Closed
SOTFSel
Close command
tSOTF
AND
AND
PUST2
StepForSOTF
PUST3
OperationMode
BLOCK
Disabled
SOTF
UNDERTIME
TRIP
Undertime
tUnderTime
2nd Harmonic
EnHarmRestSOTF
AND
Undertime
OR
Open
OR
Close
t4U
Close command
ActUndrTimeSel
AND
PUST4
ANSI06000643-4-en.vsd
ANSI06000643 V4 EN
Figure 217:
486
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function is shown in figure 218:
signal to
communication
scheme
Directional Check
Element
INPol
3V0
Direction
Element
4
operatingCurrent
ground FaultDirection
3I0
TRIP
angleValid
DirModeSel
enableDir
3I0
Harmonic
Restraint
Element
harmRestrBlock
or
DirModeSel
Mode
Selection
enableDir
TRIP
CB
pos
or cmd
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
Figure 218:
8.4.8
Technical data
Table 211:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
2.0 degrees
(1100)% of lBase
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
487
Section 8
Current protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.000 - 60.000) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
16 curve types
(5100)% of fundamental
2.0% of In
(1100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(2-100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(0.50-1000.00) W/phase
(0.503000.00) W/phase
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically
8.5
8.5.1
Identification
Function description
Four step negative sequence
overcurrent protection
IEC 61850
identification
NS4PTOC
I2
46I2
4
4
alt
IEC10000053 V1 EN
488
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.5.2
Functionality
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC, (4612) ) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user
defined characteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized.
NS4PTOC (4612) can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the
steps.
NS4PTOC (4612) can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase
short circuits, phase-phase-ground short circuits and single phase ground faults.
NS4PTOC (4612) can also be used to provide a system backup for example, in the case of
the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer
circuit failure.
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic
in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. The same logic as for directional zero
sequence current can be used. Current reversal and weak-end infeed functionality are
available.
8.5.3
Function block
NS4PTOC (46I2)
I3P*
I3PDIR*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLK1
BLK2
BLK3
BLK4
MULTPU1
MULTPU2
MULTPU3
MULTPU4
TRIP
TRST1
TRST2
TRST3
TRST4
PICK UP
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PUFW
PUREV
ANSI10000054-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000054 V1 EN
Figure 219:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
489
Section 8
Current protection
8.5.4
Signals
Table 212:
Name
Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PDIR
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
General block
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
BLK1
BOOLEAN
BLK2
BOOLEAN
BLK3
BOOLEAN
BLK4
BOOLEAN
MULTPU1
BOOLEAN
MULTPU2
BOOLEAN
MULTPU3
BOOLEAN
MULTPU4
BOOLEAN
Table 213:
Name
490
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
TRST3
BOOLEAN
TRST4
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
PU_ST3
BOOLEAN
PU_ST4
BOOLEAN
PUFW
BOOLEAN
PUREV
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.5.5
Table 214:
Name
Settings
NS4PTOC (46I2) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
EnDir
Disable
Enable
Enable
AngleRCA
-180 - 180
Deg
65
VPolMin
1 - 100
%VB
I2>Dir
1 - 100
%IB
10
DirModeSel1
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist1
I2-1>
1 - 2500
%IB
100
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
TD1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin1
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
100.00
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
MultPU1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
491
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DirModeSel2
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist2
I2-2>
1 - 2500
%IB
50
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
TD2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin2
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
50
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
MultPU2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
DirModeSel3
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
492
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist3
I2-3>
1 - 2500
%IB
33
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
TD3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin3
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
33
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
MultPU3
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
DirModeSel4
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist4
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
493
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
I2-4>
1 - 2500
%IB
17
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
TD4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin4
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
17
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
MultPU4
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Table 215:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
494
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
495
Section 8
Current protection
Table 216:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.5.6
Unit
1 - 12
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 217:
Name
8.5.7
Step
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IOp
REAL
VPol
REAL
kV
VPOLIANG
REAL
deg
Operation principle
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (4612) function has the
following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool:
1.
2.
3.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
Configuration Tool within PCM600.
8.5.7.1
1
3
IA + a IB + a IC
ANSIEQUATION2266 V1 EN
496
)
(Equation 110)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
where:
IA, IB, IC
is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1120 deg
a2
similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1240 deg
The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC (4612) protection to compare it with
the set operation current value of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4).
If the negative sequence current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used
in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This
signal, without delay, activates the output signal PU_STx (x=1 - 4) for this step and a
common PICKUP signal.
8.5.7.2
1
3
VA + a VB + a VC
2
ANSIEQUATION00024 V1 EN
where:
VA, VB, VC
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine
the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing the magnitude
of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting VpolMin.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
497
Section 8
Current protection
Note that V2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the required
inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.
8.5.7.3
8.5.7.4
8.5.7.5
498
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the
following figure:
ANSI09000684 V1 EN
Figure 220:
Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4
NS4PTOC (4612) can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The pickup
signals from NS4PTOC (4612) for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC (4612) can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
499
Section 8
Current protection
8.5.7.6
Reverse
Area
Vpol=-V2
AngleRCA
Forward
Area
Iop = I2
ANSI10000031-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000031 V1 EN
Figure 221:
500
Directional element is internally enable to trip as soon as Iop is bigger than 40% of
INDirPU and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
PUFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward area, see
fig 214 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting INDirPU)
PUREV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse
area, see fig 214. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting
INDirPU)
These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection communication
schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step is shown in figure 215:
|IopDir|
a
a>b
b
0.6
PUREV
AND
REVERSE_Int
X
a
a>b
IDirPU
0.4
FORWARD_Int
PUFW
AND
FWD
polMethod=Voltage
OR
polMethod=Dual
VPolMin
VPol
polMethod=Current
OR
IPol
0.0
RNPol
XNPol
T
0.0 F
IPolMin
I3PDIR
AND
FORWARD_Int
AND
REVERSE_Int
Directional
Characteristic
AngleRCA
VTPol
RVS
T
F
Complex
Number
VIPol
0.0
T
F
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
OR
AND
BLOCK
ANSI07000067-4-en.vsd
ANSI07000067 V4 EN
Figure 222:
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
501
Section 8
Current protection
8.5.8
Technical data
Table 218:
Function
502
Range or value
Accuracy
(1-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000 - 60.000) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
16 curve types
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
2.0 degrees
(1100)% of IBase
(1100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(2-100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(0.50-1000.00) W/phase
(0.503000.00) W/phase
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically
Transient overreach
<10% at = 100 ms
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.6
8.6.1
Identification
Function description
Sensitive directional residual over
current and power protection
8.6.2
IEC 61850
identification
SDEPSDE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
67N
Functionality
In networks with high impedance grounding, the phase-to-ground fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for ground fault
protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-ground fault current is almost independent
of the fault location in the network.
Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-toground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the
residual voltage (-3V0), compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively, the
function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle .
Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-toground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the residual
power component 3I0 3V0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and
the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.
A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or
inverse time delay.
A backup neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional residual
overvoltage protection.
In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to ground via the capacitances
between the phase conductors and ground, the residual current always has -90 phase shift
compared to the residual voltage (3V0). The characteristic angle is chosen to -90 in such
a network.
In resistance grounded networks or in Petersen coil grounded, with a parallel resistor, the
active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for
the ground fault detection. In such networks, the characteristic angle is chosen to 0.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
503
Section 8
Current protection
As the magnitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the selectivity
of the ground fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.
When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when
should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider the
following:
Phase
currents
IN
Phase
ground
voltages
VN
ANSI13000013-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000013 V1 EN
Figure 223:
Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxA, GRPxB and GRPxC. For 3I0
to be calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.
Directional and power functionality uses IN and VN. If a connection is made to GRPxN
this signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxA, GRPxB and GRPxC the
internally calculated sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3V0) will be used.
504
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.6.3
Function block
SDEPSDE (67N)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRDIRIN
BLOCK
TRNDIN
BLKTR
TRVN
BLKTRDIR
PICKUP
BLKNDN
PUDIRIN
BLKVN
PUNDIN
PUVN
PUFW
PUREV
CND
VNREL
ANSI07000032-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000032 V2 EN
Figure 224:
8.6.4
Signals
Table 219:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
BLKTRDIR
BOOLEAN
BLKNDN
BOOLEAN
BLKVN
BOOLEAN
Table 220:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRDIRIN
BOOLEAN
TRNDIN
BOOLEAN
TRVN
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PUDIRIN
BOOLEAN
PUNDIN
BOOLEAN
PUVN
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
505
Section 8
Current protection
Name
8.6.5
Table 221:
Name
Type
Description
PUFW
BOOLEAN
PUREV
BOOLEAN
CND
INTEGER
VNREL
BOOLEAN
Settings
SDEPSDE (67N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
OpModeSel
3I0Cosfi
3I03V0Cosfi
3I0 and fi
3I0Cosfi
DirMode
Forward
Reverse
Forward
RCADir
-179 - 180
Deg
-90
RCAComp
-10.0 - 10.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
ROADir
0 - 90
Deg
90
INCosPhiPU
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
1.00
SN_PU
0.25 - 200.00
%SB
0.01
10.00
INDirPU
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
5.00
tDef
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
SRef
0.03 - 200.00
%SB
0.01
10.00
TDSN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
0.10
OpINNonDir
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
INNonDirPU
1.00 - 400.00
%IB
0.01
10.00
tINNonDir
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
506
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TimeChar
t_MinTripDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.040
TDIN
0.05 - 2.00
0.01
1.00
OpVN
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
VN_PU
1.00 - 200.00
%VB
0.01
20.00
tVN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
INRelPU
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
1.00
VNRelPU
1.00 - 300.00
%VB
0.01
3.00
Step
Default
Table 222:
Name
Unit
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.040
tPCrv
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
tACrv
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
tBCrv
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
tCCrv
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
ResetTypeCrv
Immediate
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
IEC Reset
tPRCrv
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
tTRCrv
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
tCRCrv
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Description
507
Section 8
Current protection
Table 223:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Table 224:
Name
RotResV
8.6.6
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Global base selection for function groups
Unit
Step
Default
180 deg
Description
Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if
necessary
Monitored data
Table 225:
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
INCOSPHI
REAL
IN
REAL
VN
REAL
kV
SN
REAL
MVA
Measured magnitude of
residual power 3I03V0cos(FiRCA)
ANG FI-RCA
REAL
deg
8.6.7
Operation principle
8.6.7.1
Function inputs
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P and
V3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage are taken from pre-processor
blocks.
The sensitive directional ground fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
rotated by the set characteristic angle RCADir. RCADir is normally set equal to 0 in a high
impedance grounded network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component
is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal to -90 in an isolated
network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0cos gets
larger than the set value.
Vref
RCA = 0, ROA = 90
3I0
= ang(3I0) - ang(3Vref)
-3V0=Vref
3I0 cos
en06000648_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000648 V1 EN
Figure 225:
RCADir set to 0
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
509
Section 8
Current protection
Vref
3I0
3I0 cos
= ang(3I0) ang(Vref)
-3V0
en06000649_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000649 V1 EN
Figure 226:
For trip, the operating quantity 3I0 cos , the residual current 3I0, and the residual voltage
3V0 must be larger than the set levels : INCosPhiPU, INRelPU and VNRelPU. Refer to the
simplified logical diagram in Figure 230.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function picks up, binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated.
If the output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef the binary
output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated. The trip from this sub-function has
definite time delay.
ROADir is Relay Operating Angle. ROADir is identifying a window around the reference
direction in order to detect directionality. Figure 227 shows the restrictions made by the
ROADir.
510
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
RCADir 0
3I0
Trip area
3V0 Vref
3I0 cos
ROADir
ANSI06000650-3-en.vsd
ANSI06000650 V3 EN
Figure 227:
The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined
as 3I0cos ( + 180) the set value.
It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error
with a setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 228:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
511
Section 8
Current protection
RCADir = 0
Trip area
-3V0 =Vref
Instrument
transformer
angle error
RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation
3I0 (prim)
ANSI06000651-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000651 V2 EN
Figure 228:
Explanation of RCAComp
512
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
the inverse time delay (setting TDSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get
activated.
The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is
defined as 3I0 3V0cos ( + 180) the set value.
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time
delay.
The inverse time delay is defined as:
tinv =
EQUATION2032-ANSI V2 EN
Operate area
3I0
Vref=-3V0
ANSI06000652-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000652 V2 EN
Figure 229:
Example of characteristic
For trip, Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than both INRelPU and INDirPU, and residual
voltage 3V0 shall be larger than the VNRelPU. In addition, the angle shall be in the set
area defined by ROADir and RCADir. Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure
230.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
513
Section 8
Current protection
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function picks up, binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated.
If the output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef the binary
output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.
The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined
as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir
This variant has definite time delay.
Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional pickup signals PUFW: fault in the
forward direction, and PUREV: fault in the reverse direction. Even if the directional
function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction, a fault in the reverse direction
will give the pickup signal PUREV. Also if the directional function is set to operate for
faults in the reverse direction, a fault in the forward direction will give the pickup signal
PUFW.
514
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
In addition, there is also a separate non-directional residual over voltage protection, with
its own definite time delay tVN and set level VN_PU.
For trip, the residual voltage 3V0 shall be larger than the set level (VN_PU).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKVN.
When the function picks up, binary output signal PUVN is activated. If the output signal
PUVN is active for the set delay tVNNonDir, the binary output signals TRIP and TRUN
get activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in Figure 230.
PUNDIN
INNonDirPU
UN_PU
0-t
0
TRNDIN
0-t
0
TRVN
PUVN
OpMODE=INcosPhi
Pickup_N
AND
INCosPhiPU
OpMODE=INVNCosPhi
AND
OR
PUDIRIN
AND
INVNCosPhiPU
SN
AND
TRDIRIN
TimeChar = InvTime
AND
TimeChar = DefTime
DirMode = Forw
AND
AND
OR
PUFW
Forw
DirMode = Rev
AND
PUREV
Rev
en06000653_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000653 V1 EN
Figure 230:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
515
Section 8
Current protection
8.6.8
Technical data
Table 226:
Function
516
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
(0.25-200.00)% of SBase
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
1.0% of In at In
1.0% of I at I > In
(1.00-400.00)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
(1.00-200.00)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
(1.00-300.00)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Min. = 40 ms
Min. = 40 ms
Min. = 110 ms
Min. = 20 ms
(0.000 60.000) s
(0.000 60.000) s
(0.000 60.000) s
16 curve types
2.0 degrees
(0 to 90) degrees
2.0 degrees
Max. = 65 ms
Max. = 65 ms
Max. = 160 ms
Max. = 60 ms
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.7
8.7.1
Identification
Function description
Thermal overload protection, two time
constants
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
49
TRPTTR
SYMBOL-A V1 EN
8.7.2
Functionality
If a power transformer reaches very high temperatures the equipment might be damaged.
The insulation within the transformer will experience forced ageing. As a consequence of
this the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground faults will increase.
The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the transformer
(temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the
transformer with two time constants, which is based on current measurement.
Two warning pickup levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be
done before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase
to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer.
The estimated time to trip before operation is presented.
8.7.3
Function block
TRPTTR (49)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
PICKUP
COOLING
ALARM1
MULTPU
ALARM2
RESET
LOCKOUT
WARNING
ANSI06000272-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000272 V2 EN
Figure 231:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
517
Section 8
Current protection
8.7.4
Signals
Table 227:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
COOLING
BOOLEAN
MULTPU
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset of function
Name
Table 229:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 228:
8.7.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip Signal
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal
ALARM1
BOOLEAN
ALARM2
BOOLEAN
LOCKOUT
BOOLEAN
Lockout signal
WARNING
BOOLEAN
Settings
TRPTTR (49) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
IRef
10.0 - 1000.0
%IB
1.0
100.0
IRefMult
0.01 - 10.00
0.01
1.00
IBase1
30.0 - 250.0
%IB
1.0
100.0
IBase2
30.0 - 250.0
%IB
1.0
100.0
Tau1
1.0 - 500.0
Min
1.0
60.0
Tau2
1.0 - 500.0
Min
1.0
60.0
IHighTau1
30.0 - 250.0
%IB1
1.0
100.0
518
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Tau1High
5 - 2000
%tC1
100
ILowTau1
30.0 - 250.0
%IB1
1.0
100.0
Tau1Low
5 - 2000
%tC1
100
IHighTau2
30.0 - 250.0
%IB2
1.0
100.0
Tau2High
5 - 2000
%tC2
100
ILowTau2
30.0 - 250.0
%IB2
1.0
100.0
Tau2Low
5 - 2000
%tC2
100
ITrip
50.0 - 250.0
%IBx
1.0
110.0
Alarm1
50.0 - 99.0
%Itr
1.0
80.0
Alarm2
50.0 - 99.0
%Itr
1.0
90.0
LockoutReset
10.0 - 95.0
%Itr
1.0
60.0
ThetaInit
0.0 - 95.0
1.0
50.0
Warning
1.0 - 500.0
Min
0.1
30.0
tPulse
0.01 - 0.30
0.01
0.10
Step
Default
Table 230:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.7.6
Unit
-
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 231:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
HEATCONT
REAL
I-MEASUR
REAL
TTRIP
INTEGER
519
Section 8
Current protection
Name
8.7.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
TRESLO
INTEGER
TTRIPCAL
INTEGER
0=Not Active
1=Long Time
2=Active
TRESCAL
INTEGER
0=Not Active
1=Long Time
2=Active
Operation principle
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the true
RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the
protection function.
From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat content) is
calculated according to the expression:
Q final
I
=
I ref
(Equation 112)
EQUATION1171 V1 EN
where:
I
Iref
If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level
corresponding to the set operate (trip) current, then the pickup output signal PICKUP will
be activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
520
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Q final > Q n
If
(Equation 113)
EQUATION1172 V1 EN
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final
Dt
- Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
(Equation 114)
EQUATION1173 V1 EN
Q final < Qn
If
(Equation 115)
EQUATION1174 V1 EN
Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Qn -1 ) e
Dt
(Equation 116)
EQUATION1175 V1 EN
where:
Qn
Qn-1
Qfinal
is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current
Dt
is the time step between calculation of the actual and final temperature
is the thermal time constant of the protected circuit given in minutes. There are different time
constants depending on the cooling used. Please refer to manufacturer's manuals for details
The calculated transformer relative temperature can be monitored and it is exported from
the function as a real figure HEATCONT.
When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or Alarm2
the corresponding output signal ALARM1 or ALARM2 is activated. When the
temperature of the object reaches the set trip level which corresponds to continuous
current equal to ITrip the output signal TRIP is activated.
There is also a calculation of the time to trip with the present current. This calculation is
only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation
temperature:
final trip
ttrip ln
final n
ANSIEQUATION1176 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
(Equation 117)
521
Section 8
Current protection
The calculated time to trip can be monitored and it is exported from the function as an
integer output TTRIP.
After a trip there can be a lockout to inhibit reconnecting the tripped circuit. The output
lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the temperature of the object is above the set
lockout release temperature setting ResLo.
The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.
Q
- Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final
Q final - Q n
(Equation 118)
EQUATION1177 V1 EN
In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation 112. The
calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as
a real figure, TRESLO.
When the current is so high that it has given a pickup signal PICKUP, the estimated time
to trip is continuously calculated and given as analog output TTRIP. If this calculated time
get less than the setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output WARNING is activated.
In case of trip a pulse with a set duration tPulse is activated.
522
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Final Temp
> TripTemp
RESET
PICKUP
HEATCONT
Calculation
of heat
content
I3P
ENMULT
Calculation
of final
temperature
ALARM1
ALARM2
COOLING
Management of
setting
parameters: Tau,
IBase
S
R
Tau used
LOCKOUT
Actual Temp
< Recl
Temp
Calculation
of time to
trip
Calculation
of time to
reset of
lockout
TTRIP
WARNING
TRESCAL
ANSI05000833-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000833 V2 EN
Figure 232:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
523
Section 8
Current protection
8.7.8
Technical data
Table 232:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(30250)% of IBase
1.0% of In
Trip time:
Trip current
(50250)% of IBase
1.0% of In
I 2 - I p2
t = t ln
I 2 - I ref 2
EQUATION1356 V2 EN
(Equation 119)
8.8
8.8.1
Identification
Function description
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase
activation and output
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50BF
CCRBRF
3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN
8.8.2
Functionality
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup tripping of the surrounding
breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF (50BF) can be current-based,
contact-based or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.
A current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve high
security against inadvertent operation.
524
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.
CCRBRF (50BF) can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single pole
tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF (50BF) the current criteria
can be set to trip only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase plus the
residual current pickups. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip command.
CCRBRF (50BF) function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip of
its own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect
initiation due to mistakes during testing.
8.8.3
Function block
CCRBRF (50BF)
I3P*
BLOCK
BFI_3P
BFI_A
BFI_B
BFI_C
52A_A
52A_B
52A_C
52FAIL
TRBU
TRBU2
TRRET
TRRET_A
TRRET_B
TRRET_C
CBALARM
ANSI06000188-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000188 V2 EN
Figure 233:
8.8.4
Signals
Table 233:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
BFI_A
BOOLEAN
BFI_B
BOOLEAN
BFI_C
BOOLEAN
52a_A
BOOLEAN
52a_B
BOOLEAN
52a_C
BOOLEAN
52FAIL
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
525
Section 8
Current protection
Table 234:
Name
8.8.5
Table 235:
Name
Type
Description
TRBU
BOOLEAN
TRBU2
BOOLEAN
TRRET
BOOLEAN
TRRET_A
BOOLEAN
TRRET_B
BOOLEAN
TRRET_C
BOOLEAN
CBALARM
BOOLEAN
Settings
CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
FunctionMode
Current
Contact
Current/Contact
Current
BuTripMode
2 out of 4
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
RetripMode
Retrip Off
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
Retrip Off
Pickup_PH
5 - 200
%IB
10
Pickup_N
2 - 200
%IB
10
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
t2MPh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Table 236:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Pickup_BlkCont
5 - 200
%IB
20
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
tCBAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
526
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Table 237:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.8.6
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 238:
Name
8.8.7
Unit
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IA
REAL
IB
REAL
IC
REAL
IN
REAL
Operation principle
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF (50BF) is initiated from the protection trip command,
either from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.
The initiate signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective
initiate signals enable single pole re-trip function. The re-trip attempt is made after a set
time delay t1. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With the
current check, the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is
larger than the operate current level.
The initiate signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
initiate the back-up trip timer. The function detects the successful breaker opening, either
by detection of low current through RMS evaluation and a special adapted current
algorithm or by open contact indication. The special algorithm enables a very fast
detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast resetting of the current measurement.
If the current and/or contact detection has not detected breaker opening before the backup timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated.
Further the following possibilities are available:
The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip
pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse
2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed breaker.
In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3 where
it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it
is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
527
Section 8
Current protection
and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or residual current) shall
be high for breaker failure detection.
The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the setting
of phase current detection.
It is possible to have different back-up time delays for single-phase faults and for
multi-phase faults.
The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this option
activated for small load currents only.
It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the
circuit breaker is incapable to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.
30 ms
BFI_3P
BFI_A
BFP Started A
OR
AND
S
R
BLOCK
SR
150ms
Time out A
AND
OR
Reset A
OR
ANSI09000976-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000976 V2 EN
Figure 234:
Pickup_PH
a
b
FunctionMode
a>b
Current
OR
AND
OR
Time out A
OR
I_A
AND
Current High A
CB Closed A
AND
OR
BFP Started A
a
Pickup_BlkCont
52a_A
Reset A
Contact
a>b
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
Contact Closed A
ANSI09000977-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000977 V1 EN
Figure 235:
528
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
BFP Started A
RetripMode
OR
TRRET
OR
TRRET_A
OR
OR
AND
CB Pos Check
CB Closed A
52FAIL
TRRET_B
tPulse
AND
No CBPos Check
1
TRRET_C
From other
phases
t1
0
AND
ANSI09000978-4-en.vsd
ANSI09000978 V4 EN
Figure 236:
BFP Started A
BFP Started B
AND
BFP Started C
AND
IN
Pickup_N
BUTripMode
1
From other
phases
a>b
Contact Closed A
2 out of 4
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
Current High B
Current High C
OR
OR
Current High A
52FAIL
AND
AND
BFP Started A
t2
OR
0
AND
OR
From other
phases
BFP Started B
AND
AND
Backup Trip A
t2MPh
0
OR
tPulse
OR
2 of 3
OR
TRBU
tPulse
BFP Started C
S
AND
SR
t3
OR
TRBU2
ANSI09000979-4-en.vsd
ANSI09000979 V4 EN
Figure 237:
The internal logical signals PU_A, PU_B, PU_C have logical value 1 when the current in
the respective phase has the magnitude larger than the setting parameter Pickup_PH.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
529
Section 8
Current protection
8.8.8
Technical data
Table 239:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
> 95%
(2-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
> 95%
(5-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
10 ms typically
15 ms maximum
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 20 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 20 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
greater
8.9
8.9.1
Identification
Function description
Pole discrepancy protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
52PD
CCPDSC
PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN
530
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.9.2
Functionality
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal stress
on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative
sequence current functions.
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation warrants
the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.
The Pole discrepancy protection function CCPDSC (52PD) operates based on
information from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with
additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.
8.9.3
Function block
CCPDSC (52PD)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
52B_A
52A_A
52B_B
52A_B
52B_C
52A_C
TRIP
PICK UP
ANSI13000305-2-en.vsdx
ANSI13000305 V2 EN
Figure 238:
8.9.4
Signals
Table 240:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKDBYAR
BOOLEAN
CLOSECMD
BOOLEAN
Close command to CB
OPENCMD
BOOLEAN
Open command to CB
EXTPDIND
BOOLEAN
531
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Type
52a_A
BOOLEAN
52b_B
BOOLEAN
52a_B
BOOLEAN
52b_C
BOOLEAN
52a_C
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 242:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 241:
8.9.5
Default
52b_A
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal to CB
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Settings
CCPDSC (52PD) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
ContactSel
Disabled
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.
Disabled
CurrentSel
Disabled
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor
Disabled
CurrUnsymPU
0 - 100
80
CurrRelPU
0 - 100
%IB
10
Table 243:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
532
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.9.6
Monitored data
Table 244:
Name
8.9.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IMin
REAL
IMax
REAL
Operation principle
The detection of pole discrepancy can be made in two different ways. If the contact based
function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary contacts of the
circuit breaker so that a pole discrepancy is indicated, see figure 239.
C.B.
52a
52a
52a
52b
52b
52b
ANSI_en05000287.vsd
ANSI05000287 V1 EN
Figure 239:
This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this signal
will pickup a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.
There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase contact
open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 240.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
533
Section 8
Current protection
C.B.
52a
52b
52b
ANSI05000288 V1 EN
Figure 240:
In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discrepancy the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay.
Pole discrepancy can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement.
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value
of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the largest phase current are derived. If
the smallest phase current is lower than the setting CurrUnsymPU times the largest phase
current the settable trip timer (tTrip) is started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the
set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse 150 ms long. The current based pole discrepancy
function can be set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to
breaker open or close command.
The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discrepancy function can be blocked during sequences with a
single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.
534
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR
PolPosAuxCont
AND
52b_A
52a_A
52b_B
52a_B
52b_C
52a_C
Pole
Disc repancy
detection
150 ms
AND
OR
0- t
0
TRIP
PD signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
t+ 200 ms
OR
AND
Unsymmetry current
detection
en 05000747_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000747 V1 EN
Figure 241:
Simplified block diagram of pole discrepancy function CCPDSC (52PD) contact and current based
The IED is in TEST mode and CCPDSC (52PD) has been blocked from the local HMI
The input signal BLOCK is high
The input signal BLKDBYAR is high
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discrepancy
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions
in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR
gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.
The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discrepancy operation when a single phase
autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal 1PT1 on
SMBRREC (79) function block. If the autoreclosing function is an external device, then
BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this binary input is
connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress from the external
autoreclosing device.
If the pole discrepancy protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate a trip
signal TRIP:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
535
Section 8
Current protection
8.9.7.1
8.9.7.2
any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymPU of the highest current in the three
phases.
the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelPU of IBase.
If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal signal
INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay tTrip
if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command
to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding
unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions.
The pole discrepancy protection is informed that a trip or close command has been given
to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command information)
and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can be connected to
terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field (that is from
auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software connected to the
outputs of other integrated functions (that is close command from a control function or a
general trip from integrated protections).
8.9.8
Technical data
Table 245:
Function
8.10
536
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip current
(0100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 25 ms whichever is
greater
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.10.1
Identification
Function description
Directional underpower protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
GUPPDUP
P<
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
37
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN
8.10.2
Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a
torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does
not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes
a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system.
This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies
no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it
consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the
rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The
task of the low forward power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.
Figure 242 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher
margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted
operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the
underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One
should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator
is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive
value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
537
Section 8
Current protection
Underpower IED
Overpower IED
Trip
Line
Trip
Line
Margin
Margin
Tripping point
without
turbine torque
Tripping point
without
turbine torque
ANSI06000315-1-en.vsd
ANSI06000315 V1 EN
Figure 242:
8.10.3
Function block
GUPPDUP (37)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLOCK1
BLOCK2
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
PICKUP
PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
ANSI07000027-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000027 V2 EN
Figure 243:
8.10.4
Signals
Table 246:
Name
538
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLOCK1
BOOLEAN
Block of stage 1
BLOCK2
BOOLEAN
Block of stage 2
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Table 247:
Name
8.10.5
Table 248:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIP1
BOOLEAN
Trip of stage 1
TRIP2
BOOLEAN
Trip of stage 2
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Common pickup
PICKUP1
BOOLEAN
Pickup of stage 1
PICKUP2
BOOLEAN
Pickup of stage 2
REAL
Active Power in MW
PPERCENT
REAL
REAL
QPERCENT
REAL
Settings
GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
OpMode1
Disabled
UnderPower
UnderPower
Power1
0.0 - 500.0
%SB
0.1
1.0
Angle1
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
TripDelay1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
DropDelay1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.06
OpMode2
Disabled
UnderPower
UnderPower
Power2
0.0 - 500.0
%SB
0.1
1.0
Angle2
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
TripDelay2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
DropDelay2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.06
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
539
Section 8
Current protection
Table 249:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TD
0.000 - 0.999
0.001
0.000
Hysteresis1
0.2 - 5.0
%SB
0.1
0.5
Hysteresis2
0.2 - 5.0
%SB
0.1
0.5
IMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
VMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
VMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
VMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
Table 250:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
Mode
A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
Pos Seq
540
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.10.6
Monitored data
Table 251:
Name
8.10.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
REAL
MW
Active Power in MW
PPERCENT
REAL
REAL
MVAr
QPERCENT
REAL
Operation principle
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in
figure 244. The function has two stages with individual settings.
Chosen current
phasors
Chosen voltage
phasors
P
Complex
power
calculation
Derivation of
S( composant)
in Char angle
S( angle)
S( angle ) <
Power1
t
0
TRIP1
PICKUP1
S( angle ) <
Power2
t
0
TRIP2
PICKUP2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
ANSI06000438-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000438 V2 EN
Figure 244:
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks.
The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in
table 252.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
541
Section 8
Current protection
Table 252:
S = V A I A* + VB I B* + VC I C *
EQUATION2055-ANSI V1 EN
Arone
S = V AB I A* - VBC IC *
EQUATION2056-ANSI V1 EN
PosSeq
(Equation 126)
S = 3 VB I B*
EQUATION2062-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 125)
S = 3 VA I A*
EQUATION2061-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 124)
S = VCA ( I C * - I A* )
EQUATION2060-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 123)
S = VBC ( I B* - IC * )
EQUATION2059-ANSI V1 EN
CA
(Equation 122)
S = VAB ( I A* - I B* )
EQUATION2058-ANSI V1 EN
BC
(Equation 121)
S = 3 VPosSeq I PosSeq*
EQUATION2057-ANSI V1 EN
AB
(Equation 120)
(Equation 127)
S = 3 VC I C *
EQUATION2063-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 128)
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated.
If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the
reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). For
directional underpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For directional overpower
protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is
542
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal
is activated if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a
common signal PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a
common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)). For
generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to
0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller
value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-power1(2)
would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 Power1(2)) is
corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will reset after
a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out and that the
timer of the stage will reset.
8.10.7.1
S = TD SOld + (1 TD ) SCalculated
EQUATION1959-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 129)
Where
S
Sold
is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter TD is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay). When
TD is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for TD=0.92 in
case of slow operating functions.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
543
Section 8
Current protection
8.10.7.2
Magnitude
compensation
+10
IMagComp5
Measured
current
IMagComp30
IMagComp100
30
-10
Degrees
100
% of In
0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant
Angle
compensation
+10
Measured
current
IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
30
100
% of In
-10
ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN
Figure 245:
Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the
amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values or in the
disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base
power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of
base power: QPERCENT.
544
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.10.8
Technical data
Table 253:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Power level
for Step 1 and Step 2
(0.0500.0)% of SBase
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
where
Sr= 1,732*Vn*In
Characteristic angle
for Step 1 and Step 2
(-180.0180.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
(0.01-6000.00) s
0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
greater
8.11
8.11.1
Identification
Function description
Directional overpower protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
GOPPDOP
P>
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
32
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN
8.11.2
Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a
torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does
not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes
a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system.
This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies
no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it
consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the
rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The
task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
545
Section 8
Current protection
Figure 246 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher
margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted
operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the
underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One
should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator
is higher than 1%.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive
value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
Underpower IED
Overpower IED
Trip
Line
Trip
Line
Margin
Margin
Tripping point
without
turbine torque
Tripping point
without
turbine torque
ANSI06000315-1-en.vsd
ANSI06000315 V1 EN
Figure 246:
8.11.3
Function block
GOPPDOP (32)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLOCK1
BLOCK2
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
PICKUP
PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
ANSI07000028-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000028 V2 EN
Figure 247:
546
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.11.4
Signals
Table 254:
Name
Type
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLOCK1
BOOLEAN
Block of stage 1
BLOCK2
BOOLEAN
Block of stage 2
Name
Table 256:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 255:
8.11.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIP1
BOOLEAN
Trip of stage 1
TRIP2
BOOLEAN
Trip of stage 2
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Common pickup
PICKUP1
BOOLEAN
Pickup of stage 1
PICKUP2
BOOLEAN
Pickup of stage 2
REAL
Active power P in MW
PPERCENT
REAL
REAL
QPERCENT
REAL
Settings
GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
OpMode1
Disabled
OverPower
OverPower
Power1
0.0 - 500.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
Angle1
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
TripDelay1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
DropDelay1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.06
547
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OpMode2
Disabled
OverPower
OverPower
Power2
0.0 - 500.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
Angle2
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
TripDelay2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
DropDelay2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.06
Step
Default
Table 257:
Name
Unit
Description
0.000 - 0.999
0.001
0.000
Hysteresis1
0.2 - 5.0
%SB
0.1
0.5
Hysteresis2
0.2 - 5.0
%SB
0.1
0.5
IMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
VMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
VMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
VMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
548
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Table 258:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
Mode
A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
Pos Seq
8.11.6
Monitored data
Table 259:
Name
8.11.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
REAL
MW
Active power P in MW
PPERCENT
REAL
REAL
MVAr
QPERCENT
REAL
Reactive power Q in % of
SBase
Operation principle
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in
figure 248. The function has two stages with individual settings.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
549
Section 8
Current protection
Chosen current
phasors
Chosen voltage
phasors
P
Complex
power
calculation
Derivation of
S(composant)
in Char angle
S(angle)
S(angle) >
Power1
TRIP1
PICKUP1
S(angle) >
Power2
TRIP2
PICKUP2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
ANSI06000567-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000567 V2 EN
Figure 248:
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks.
The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in
table 260.
Table 260:
S = V A I A + V B I B + V C IC
(Equation 130)
EQUATION2038 V1 EN
Arone
S = V AB I A - V BC I C
S = 3 V PosSeq I PosSeq
(Equation 132)
EQUATION2040 V1 EN
A,B
(Equation 131)
EQUATION2039 V1 EN
PosSeq
S = V AB (I A - I B )
(Equation 133)
EQUATION2041 V1 EN
B,C
S = V BC (I B - I C )
EQUATION2042 V1 EN
(Equation 134)
550
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
S = V CA (I C - I A )
(Equation 135)
EQUATION2043 V1 EN
S = 3 V A IA
(Equation 136)
EQUATION2044 V1 EN
S = 3 V B IB
(Equation 137)
EQUATION2045 V1 EN
S = 3 V C IC
EQUATION2046 V1 EN
(Equation 138)
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated.
If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the
reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). A
pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than
the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated
if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal
PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP
will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) drop-power1(2)). For
generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02
p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value.
The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2):
drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-power1(2)
would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 Power1(2)) is
corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset after
a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out ant that the
timer of the stage will reset.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
551
Section 8
Current protection
8.11.7.1
EQUATION1959 V1 EN
Where
S
Sold
is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k
is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.92 in case
of slow operating functions.
8.11.7.2
552
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
% of In
Magnitude
compensation
+10
IMagComp5
Measured
current
IMagComp30
IMagComp100
30
-10
Degrees
100
% of In
0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant
Angle
compensation
+10
Measured
current
IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
30
100
% of In
-10
ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN
Figure 249:
Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the
amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance
report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base
power: QPERCENT.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
553
Section 8
Current protection
8.11.8
Technical data
Table 261:
Function
Range or value
Power level
for Step 1 and Step 2
Accuracy
(0.0500.0)% of SBase
When measuring transformer
inputs are used, the following
accuracy can be obtained for low
pickup settings which are typical
for reverse power protection
application:
Characteristic angle
for Step 1 and Step 2
(-180.0180.0) degrees
Min. =10 ms
Min. = 35 ms
(0.01-6000.00) s
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
Pickup value=0.5% of Sn
Pickup accuracy of 0.20% of Sn*)
Pickup value=0.2% of Sn
Pickup accuracy of 0.15% of Sn*)
whereSn= 1,732*Vn*In
2.0 degrees
Max. = 25 ms
Max. = 55 ms
0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
greater
*) To achieve this accuracy for reverse power protection it is also recommended to apply settings k=0.990 and
Mode=PosSeq. These settings will help to minimize the overall measurement error ensuring the best
accuracy for this application.
8.12
8.12.1
Identification
Function description
Negative sequence time overcurrent
protection for machines
8.12.2
IEC 61850
identification
NS2PTOC
IEC 60617
identification
2I2>
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
46I2
Functionality
Negative-sequence time overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC (46I2) is
intended primarily for the protection of generators against possible overheating of the
rotor caused by negative sequence current in the stator current.
554
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
The negative sequence currents in a generator may, among others, be caused by:
Unbalanced loads
Line to line faults
Line to ground faults
Broken conductors
Malfunction of one or more poles of a circuit breaker or a disconnector
NS2PTOC (46I2) can also be used as a backup protection, that is, to protect the generator
in case line protections or circuit breakers fail to clear unbalanced system faults.
To provide an effective protection for the generator for external unbalanced conditions,
NS2PTOC (46I2) is able to directly measure the negative sequence current. NS2PTOC
(46I2) also has a time delay characteristic which matches the heating characteristic of the
2
generator I 2 t = K as defined in standard IEEE C50.13.
where:
I2
NS2PTOC (46I2) has a wide range of K settings and the sensitivity and capability of
detecting and tripping for negative sequence currents down to the continuous capability of
a generator.
In order to match the heating characteristics of the generator a reset time parameter can be
set.
A separate definite time delayed output is available as an alarm feature to warn the
operator of a potentially dangerous situation.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
555
Section 8
Current protection
8.12.3
Function block
NS2PTOC (46I2)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKST1
BLKST2
BLKTR
TRIP
TR1
TR2
START
ST1
ST2
ALARM
NSCURR
ANSI08000359.vsdx
ANSI08000359 V3 EN
Figure 250:
8.12.4
Signals
Table 262:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Table 263:
Name
556
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm signal
NSCURR
REAL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.12.5
Table 264:
Name
Settings
NS2PTOC (46I2) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
tAlarm
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
3.00
OpStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
I2-1>
3 - 500
%IB
10
CurveType1
Definite
Inverse
Definite
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
tResetDef1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
K1
1.0 - 99.0
0.1
10.0
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
t1Max
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1000.00
ResetMultip1
0.01 - 20.00
0.01
1.00
OpStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
I2-2>
3 - 500
%IB
10
CurveType2
Definite
Inverse
Definite
t2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
tResetDef2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
K2
1.0 - 99.0
0.1
10.0
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
t2Max
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1000.00
ResetMultip2
0.01 - 20.00
0.01
1.00
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
557
Section 8
Current protection
Table 265:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.12.6
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 266:
Name
NSCURR
8.12.7
Unit
Values (Range)
-
Unit
A
Description
Negative sequence current in
primary amps
Operation principle
The negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC, 46I2)
function directly measures the amplitude of the negative phase sequence component of the
measured current. NS2PTOC (46I2) sets the PICKUP, PU_ST1 or PU_ST2 outputs active
and starts to count trip time only when the measured negative sequence current value rises
above the set value of parameters I2-1> or I2-2> respectively.
To avoid oscillation in the output signals, a certain hysteresis has been included. For both
steps, the reset ratio is 0.97.
Step 1 of NS2PTOC (46I2) can operate in the Definite Time (DT) or Inverse Time (IDMT)
mode depending on the selected value for the CurveType1 parameter. If CurveType1=
Definite, NS2PTOC (46I2) operates with a Definite Time Delay characteristic and if
CurveType1 = Inverse, NS2PTOC (46I2) operates with an Inverse Time Delay
characteristic. Step 2 is operating in an analogous way as Step 1.
Definite time delay is not dependent on the magnitude of measured negative sequence
current. Once the measured negative sequence current exceeds the set level, the settable
definite timer t1 or t2 respectively, starts to count and the corresponding trip signal gets
activated after the pre-set definite time delay has elapsed. Reset time in definite time mode
is determined by the setting parameters tResetDef1 or tResetDef2 respectively. If
NS2PTOC (46I2) has already picked up but not tripped and measured negative sequence
current goes below the pickup value, the pickup outputs remains active for the time
defined by the resetting parameters.
A BLOCK input signal resets NS2PTOC (46I2) momentarily.
When the parameter CurveType1 is set to Inverse, an inverse curve is selected according
to selected value for parameter K1. The minimum trip time setting of parameter t1Min and
reset time parameter ResetMultip1 also influence step operation. However, to match the
558
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
heating characteristics of the generator, the reset time is depending on the setting of
parameter K1, which must be set according to the generators negative sequence current
capacity.
K = I 2 2t
EQUATION2112 V1 EN
Where:
I2
is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated generator current
Operate
time
t1Max
(Default= 1000 s)
t1Min
(Default= 5 s)
K1
Current I2-1>
IEC09000691-2-en.vsd
IEC09000691 V2 EN
Figure 251:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
559
Section 8
Current protection
ResetMultip
ResetTime [ s ] =
2
K1
I
NS
1
I Pickup
(Equation 140)
ANSIEQUATION2111 V1 EN
Where
8.12.7.1
INS
IPickup
ResetMultip
is multiplier of the generator capability constant K equal to setting K1 and thus defines reset
time of inverse time characteristic
Pickup sensitivity
The trip pickup levels Current I2-1> and I2-2> of NS2PTOC (46I2) are freely settable
over a range of 3 to 500 % of rated generator current IBase. The wide range of pickup
setting is required in order to be able to protect generators of different types and sizes.
After pickup, a certain hysteresis is used before resetting pickup levels. For both steps the
reset ratio is 0.97.
8.12.7.2
Alarm function
The alarm function is operated by PICKUP signal and used to warn the operator for an
abnormal situation, for example, when generator continuous negative sequence current
capability is exceeded, thereby allowing corrective action to be taken before removing the
generator from service. A settable time delay tAlarm is provided for the alarm function to
avoid false alarms during short-time unbalanced conditions.
560
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.12.7.3
Logic diagram
0-t1
0
CurveType1=Definite
a
b
TRST1
OR
a>b
I2-1>
PU_ST1
AND
Inverse
Operation=Enabled
0-txMin
0
AND
BLK1
BLOCK
CurveType1=Inverse
ANSI08000466-4-en.vsd
ANSI08000466 V4 EN
Figure 252:
Step 2 for Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC, 46I2)
is similar to step 1.
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PICKUP
OR
ALARM
0-tAlarm
0
TRST1
TRST2
TRIP
OR
ANSI09000690-3-en.vsd
ANSI09000690 V3 EN
Figure 253:
8.12.8
Simplified logic diagram for the PICKUP, ALARM and TRIP signals for
NS2PTOC (46I2)
Technical data
Table 267:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(3-500)% of IBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
>95%
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
561
Section 8
Current protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Time characteristics
Definite or Inverse
K=1.0-99.0
2.0% or 40 ms whichever is
greater
5.0% or 40 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
I2 t = K
Reset time, inverse characteristic,
step 1 - 2
I 22t = K
8.13
8.13.1
Identification
Function description
Accidental energizing protection for
synchronous generator
8.13.1.1
IEC 61850
identification
AEGPVOC
IEC 60617
identification
U<I>
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50AE
Functionality
Inadvertent or accidental energizing of off-line generators has occurred often enough due
to operating errors, breaker head flashovers, control circuit malfunctions, or a
combination of these causes. Inadvertently energized generator operates as induction
motor drawing a large current from the system. The voltage supervised overcurrent
protection is used to detect the inadvertently energized generator.
Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator (AEGPVOC, 50AE) takes
the maximum phase current input and maximum phase to phase voltage inputs from the
562
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
terminal side. AEGPVOC (50AE) is enabled when the terminal voltage drops below the
specified voltage level for the preset time.
8.13.1.2
Function block
AEGPVOC (50AE)
I3P*
TRIP
U3P*
START
BLOCK
ARMED
BLKTR
ANSI13000302-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000302 V1 EN
Figure 254:
8.13.1.3
Signals
Table 268:
Name
Type
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
Name
Table 270:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 269:
8.13.1.4
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
RI
BOOLEAN
ENABLED
BOOLEAN
Settings
AEGPVOC (50AE) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
IPickup
5 - 900
%IB
120
tOC
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
563
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
27_pick_up
2 - 150
%VB
50
tArm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
59_Drop_out
2 - 200
%VB
80
tDisarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
Table 271:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.13.1.5
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 272:
Name
8.13.1.6
Unit
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IMAX
REAL
VMAX
REAL
kV
Operation principle
Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator AEGPVOC (50AE) function
is connected to three phase current input either from the generator terminal side or from
generator neutral point side and three phase voltage from the generator terminals. The
maximum of the three phase-to-phase voltages and maximum of the three phase currents
are measured.
When the maximum phase-to-phase voltage is less than the 27_pick_up for the period
tArm, it is ensured that the generator is off-line. The Enabled signal will initiate the
overcurrent function. If the calculated maximum current of the three phases is larger than
IPickup for the period tOC then the TRIP signal becomes activated. Also PICKUP signal
becomes activated when overcurrent is detected.
When the maximum phase-to-phase voltage is larger than 59_Drop_out for a period
longer than tDisarm, it is ensured generator is on line. During this state, undervoltage
operation is disarmed, blocking the overcurrent operation and thus the function becomes
inoperative.
564
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
BLOCK input can be used to block AEGPVOC (50AE). In addition, the BLKTR input
that blocks the TRIP signal is also present. The input BLKTR can be used if AEGPVOC
(50AE) is to be used only for monitoring purposes.
Imax_DFT
a
a>b
b
IPickup
AND
Operation = Enabled
BLOCK
TRIP
0-tOC
0
RI
Enabled
Uph-ph_max_DFT
a
a<b
b
27_pick_up
0-tArm
0
AND
ON - Delay
a
a>b
b
59_Drop_out
0-tDisarm
0
OUT
NOUT
OR
ON - Delay
ANSI09000784-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000784 V2 EN
Figure 255:
8.13.1.7
Technical data
Table 273:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-900)% of IBase
1.0% of In at IIn
1.0% of I at I>In
Transient overreach,
overcurrent function
<10% at = 100 ms
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically
(2-150)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset
15 ms typically
565
Section 8
Current protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(2-200)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
8.14
8.14.1
Identification
Function description
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent
protection
8.14.2
IEC 61850
identification
VRPVOC
IEC 60617
identification
I>/U<
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51V
Functionality
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VRPVOC, 51V) function can be used as
generator backup protection against short-circuits.
The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level that can be used either with
definite time or inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can be voltage controlled/
restrained.
One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is also available within the
function in order to provide functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage
seal-in.
566
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.14.3
Function block
VRPVOC (51V)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKOC
BLKUV
TRIP
TROC
27 Trip
PICKUP
PU_OC
27 PU
ANSI14000056-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000184 V2 EN
Figure 256:
8.14.4
Signals
Table 274:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
BLKOC
BOOLEAN
BLKUV
BOOLEAN
Table 275:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TROC
BOOLEAN
27 Trip
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_OC
BOOLEAN
27 PU
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
567
Section 8
Current protection
8.14.5
Table 276:
Name
Settings
VRPVOC (51V) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Pickup_Curr
2.0 - 5000.0
%IB
1.0
120.0
Characterist
tDef_OC
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
1.00
t_MinTripDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
0.05
Operation_UV
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PickUp_Volt
2.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
tDef_UV
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
EnBlkLowV
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
BlkLowVolt
0.0 - 5.0
%VB
0.1
3.0
Table 277:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VDepMode
Step
Slope
Slope
VDepFact
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
25.0
VHighLimit
30.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
100.0
568
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Table 278:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.14.6
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 279:
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IMAX
REAL
VUMIN
REAL
kV
8.14.7
Operation principle
8.14.7.1
Measured quantities
The voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC (51V) function is always
connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool
(ACT), but it will always measure the maximum of the three-phase currents and the
minimum of the three phase-to-phase voltages. If frequency tracking mode for
preprocessing blocks is used, then the function operates properly in wide frequency range
(e.g. 10-90 Hz).
8.14.7.2
Base quantities
GlobalBaseSel defines the particular Global Base Values Group where the base quantities
of the function are set. In that Global Base Values Group:
IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes.
VBase shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary
kV.
8.14.7.3
Overcurrent protection
The overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
with the set pickup level. The overcurrent step picks up if the magnitude of the measured
current quantity is higher than the set level.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
569
Section 8
Current protection
PickupCurr
VDepFact * PickupCurr
0,25
VHighLimit
VBase
ANSI10000123-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000123 V2 EN
Figure 257:
570
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
PickupCurr
VDepFact * PickupCurr
VHighLimit
VBase
ANSI10000124-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000124 V2 EN
Figure 258:
8.14.7.4
Logic diagram
DEF time
selected
MaxPhCurr
0-tDef_OC
0
OR
TROC
PU_OC
a>b
PickupCurr
Voltage
control or
restraint
feature
Inverse
Inverse
time
selected
MinPh-Ph Voltage
ANSI10000214-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000214 V2 EN
Figure 259:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
571
Section 8
Current protection
DEF time
selected
MinPh-PhVoltage
0-tDef_UV
0
TRUV
b>a
PickupVolt
PU_UV
AND
Operation_UV=Disabled
BLKUV
ANSI10000213-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000213 V2 EN
Figure 260:
8.14.7.5
Undervoltage protection
The undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step picks up if the magnitude of the measured
voltage quantity is lower than the set level.
The pickup signal starts a definite time delay. If the value of the pickup signal is one for
longer than the set time delay, the undervoltage step sets its trip signal to one.
This undervoltage functionality together with additional ACT logic can be used to provide
functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.
8.14.8
Technical data
Table 280:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Pickup overcurrent
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
> 95%
Min. = 15 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Max. = 30 ms
-
Max. = 30 ms
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
Inverse time
characteristics,
see tables 977 and 978
13 curve types
(0.00 - 60.00) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
1.0% of Vr
Pickup undervoltage
0.5% of Vr
< 105%
Min. = 15 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
-
Max. = 30 ms
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
0.25% of Vn
Overcurrent:
Critical impulse time
Impulse margin time
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically
Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time
Impulse margin time
8.15
8.15.1
Identification
Function description
Generator stator overload protection
IEC 61850
identification
GSPTTR
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
49S
573
Section 8
Current protection
8.15.2
Functionality
The generator overload function, GSPTTR (49S) is used to protect the stator winding
against excessive temperature as a result of overcurrents. The functions operating
characteristic is designed in accordance with the American standard IEEE-C50.13.
If internal generator components exceed its design temperature limit, damage can be the
result. Damage to generator insulation can range from minor loss of life to complete
failure, depending on the severity and duration of the temperature excursion. Excess
temperature can also cause mechanical damage due to thermal expansion. Since
temperature increases with current, it is logical to apply overcurrent elements with inverse
time characteristics.
For its operation the function either measures the true RMS current of the stator winding
or waited sum of the positive and negative sequence components in the stator winding.
The function is designed to work on 50/60 Hz systems.
8.15.3
Function block
GSPTTR (49S)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
PICKUP
SETLKOUT
LOCKOUT
RSTLKOUT
79M BLOCK
ANSI14000051-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000027 V2 EN
Figure 261:
8.15.4
Signals
Table 281:
Name
574
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
SETLKOUT
BOOLEAN
RSTLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Table 282:
Name
8.15.5
Table 283:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
LOCKOUT
BOOLEAN
79M BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Settings
GSPTTR (49S) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
IPickup
105.0 - 900.0
0.1
110.0
ReclsLevTheta
1.0 - 100.0
0.1
70.0
TD1
1.00 - 200.00
0.01
37.50
AutoLockout
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPulse
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
t_MinTripDelay
1.0 - 120.0
0.1
10.0
t_MaxTripDelay
100.0 - 2000.0
0.1
300.0
tCutOff
10.0 - 2000.0
0.1
120.0
tReset
10.0 - 2000.0
0.1
120.0
Step
Default
Table 284:
Name
Unit
Description
PosSeqFactor
0.0 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
NegSeqFactor
0.0 - 10.0
0.1
6.0
Table 285:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MeasurCurrent
RMS
PosSeqNegSeq
RMS
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
575
Section 8
Current protection
8.15.6
Monitored data
Table 286:
Name
8.15.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IMEAS
REAL
THETA
REAL
Operation principle
The stator overload protection can be illustrated in three separate sub-blocks, see
Figure262.
block
Overload
characteristic
Current
measurement
Trip logic
IEC12000013-1-en.vsd
IEC12000013 V1 EN
Figure 262:
Current measurement
Three phase currents are measured either on the high voltage (HV) side of the generator
or on the neutral side of the stator winding, see Figure
576
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Step-up
transformer
HV- side
IA I B I C
Excitation
transformer
Two
alternative
measurement
points
for the stator
overload
function
Field breaker
Neutral side
ANSI12000012-2-en.vsd
ANSI12000012 V2 EN
Figure 263:
When MeasurCurrent = RMS (default); the maximum true RMS current value from
the three-phase input currents is used as the measured quantity for the stator overload
protection.
When MeasurCurrent = PosSeqNegSeq; the weighted sum of positive and negative
sequence stator currents in primary amperes is used as the measured quantity for the
stator overload protection. This current value is calculated from the connected threephase input currents, see Figure.
The weighted sum of positive and negative sequence stator currents is calculated as per the
following equation.
(Equation 141)
Where:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
577
Section 8
Current protection
PosSeqFactor is a setting factor to multiply the positive sequence current and its default value is 1.0
NegSeqFactor is a setting factor to multiply the negative sequence current and its default value is 6.0
Overload characteristics
Stator winding temperature increases with the current. Thus, it is logical to apply over
current elements with inverse time-current characteristics for overload protection. The
function operating characteristic is designed in accordance with the American standard
IEEE-C50.13. This standard specifies the following operating points:
Table 287:
Current (% of IBase)
116
120
130
60
154
30
226
10
In order to obtain such operating characteristic the stator overload function utilizes the
following formula in order to calculate the operate time:
ttr =
TD1
2
1
IBase
GUID-7CF0FE5A-F5CE-44EC-A2D7-F1E05849171C V1 EN
(Equation 142)
Where:
ttr is trip time in seconds
TD1 is a multiplier (it shall have default value of 41.4 in order to get the operating points as prescribed by the
standard, see Table287)
I is measured current by the function
IBase is base current (stator winding rated current)
578
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
In addition to this equation based operating characteristic, the stator overload function has
some additional cut-off features. The actual overall operating characteristic of the stator
overload function is shown in Figure264
t (s)
t_MaxTripDelay
tCutOff
t tr
TD1
I
IBase
t_MinTripDelay
I (A)
IBase IPickup
ANSI12000009-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000009 V1 EN
Figure 264:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
579
Section 8
Current protection
the parameter ReclsLevTheta represents the Theta value below which is safe again to reconnect the tripped generator to the network.
The output signal PICKUP will reset if the measured current falls below reset level or if
BLOCK signal is set to one. However the Theta value is stored in the IED memory and it
starts to decay slowly following a linear reset characteristic defined by the parameter
tReset. The parameter tReset actually defines the rest time for Theta from value 100 to
zero. Note that if an overload condition happens again, the last Theta value is used as a
starting point for the calculation. Thus the stator winding will be properly protected
against varying current levels.
580
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Imeasured
IBase * IPickup
Pickup hysteresis
t
THETA
100
ReclsLevTheta
TRIP
PICKUP
t
tReset
ANSI12000014-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000014 V1 EN
Figure 265:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
581
Section 8
Current protection
Tripping logic
This tripping logic provides some additional features regarding blocking and tripping
options available within the function. The list below describes functionality of every
binary input and output from the function which influence the trip logic.
Available binary inputs:
BLOCK prevents operation of overload feature, at the same time all binary outputs are
forced to zero.
SETLKOUT forces lockout operation (output LOCKOUT) by external signal
RESET resets lockout and forces Theta value to zero
Available binary outputs:
TRIP, operation of the overload feature
PICKUP, current bigger than IPickup level
LOCKOUT, sealed-in TRIP output signal from the function. Note that lockout feature is
only enabled by setting AutoLockout = Enabled
79M BLOCK, output signal active as long as Theta > ReclsLevTheta, which can be used
to block closing of the generator CB
Simplified logic diagram for lockout functionality is shown in Figure266.
AutoLockout
TRIP
AND
OR
AND
AND
LOCKOUT
SETLKOUT
RESET
NOT
BLOCK
IEC12000010-1-en.vsd
IEC12000010 V1 EN
Figure 266:
582
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
8.15.8
Technical data
Table 288:
Function
Range or value
(105.0900.0)% of IBase
Reset ratio
>95%
Min. = 50 ms
Accuracy
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Max. = 170 ms
Thermal time characteristic
According to
IEEE Std C50.132005
(1.0120.0) s
(100.02000.0) s
8.16
8.16.1
Identification
Function description
Generator rotor overload protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
49R
GRPTTR
<
SYMBOL-MM V1 EN
8.16.2
Functionality
The generator overload function, GRPTTR (49R) is used to protect the rotor winding
against excessive temperature as a result of overcurrents. The functions operating
characteristic is designed in accordance with the American standard IEEE-C50.13.
If internal generator components exceed its design temperature limit, damage can be the
result. Damage to generator insulation can range from minor loss of life to complete
failure, depending on the severity and duration of the temperature excursion. Excess
temperature can also cause mechanical damage due to thermal expansion. Rotor
components such as bars and end rings are vulnerable to this damage. Since temperature
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
583
Section 8
Current protection
increases with current, it is logical to apply overcurrent elements with inverse time
characteristics.
For its operation the function either measures the true RMS current of the excitation
transformer or calculates the DC current in the rotor winding. The rotor winding DC
current can be calculated from the AC currents measured on either high voltage side (HV)
or low voltage side (LV) side of the excitation transformer. For the HV side measurement
ratings of the excitation transformer shall be given. The use of the DC current is default
(i.e. recommended) measurement for generators with static excitation system. When the
DC current is used, the function can provide a DC current ripple alarm, due to possible
problem with the static excitation equipment. The rotor DC current can be also sent to the
plant supervisory system via communication channel or displayed on the IED built-in
HMI.
The function can also detect undercurrent condition in the rotor winding which indicates
either under-excitation or loss of excitation condition of the generator.
The function is designed to work on 50/60 Hz systems.
8.16.3
Function block
GRPTTR (49R)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
37 TRIP
BLOCK37
PICKUP
SETLKOUT
37 PICKUP
RSTLKOUT
LOCKOUT
79M BLOCK
ALRIPPLE
IMEAS
ANSI14000050-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000028 V2 EN
Figure 267:
8.16.4
Signals
Table 289:
Name
584
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLOCK37
BOOLEAN
SETLKOUT
BOOLEAN
RSTLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Table 290:
Name
8.16.5
Table 291:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
37 TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
37 PICKUP
BOOLEAN
LOCKOUT
BOOLEAN
79M BLOCK
BOOLEAN
ALRIPPLE
BOOLEAN
IMEAS
REAL
Settings
GRPTTR (49R) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
IPickup
105.0 - 900.0
0.1
110.0
ReclsLevTheta
1.0 - 100.0
0.1
70.0
TD1
1.00 - 200.00
0.01
33.75
AutoLockout
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPulse
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
t_MinTripDelay
1.0 - 120.0
0.1
10.0
t_MaxTripDelay
100.0 - 2000.0
0.1
300.0
tCutOff
10.0 - 2000.0
0.1
120.0
tReset
10.0 - 2000.0
0.1
120.0
OpAlarmRipple
On
Disabled
Disabled
AlmRippleLev
10.0 - 100.0
0.1
25.0
tAlarmRipple
0.1 - 600.0
0.1
5.0
37 Enable
Disabled
On
Disabled
37 PICKUP
5.0 - 500.0
0.1
10.0
37 trip delay
0.0 - 600.0
0.1
1.0
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
585
Section 8
Current protection
Table 292:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MeasurCurrent
RMS
DC
DC
CT_Location
LV_winding
HV_winding
LV_winding
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
VrLV
10.0 - 3000.0
0.1
400.0
VrHV
0.10 - 100.00
kV
0.01
11.00
PhAngleShift
-180 - 180
Deg
30
30
8.16.6
Monitored data
Table 293:
Name
8.16.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IMEAS
REAL
IDC
REAL
THETA
REAL
RIPPLVAL
REAL
DC ripple as percent of
measured DC current
Operation principle
The rotor overload protection GRPTTR (49R) can be illustrated in five separate subblocks, see Figure262.
586
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
block
Overload
characteristic
Current
measurement
Trip logic
block
Undercurrent
protection for rotor
winding
block
Alarm Ripple
Detection
IEC12000016-1-en.vsd
IEC12000016 V1 EN
Figure 268:
Each of these five sub-blocks will be described in the following sections of this document.
Current measurement
Three phase currents are measured either on the high voltage side (HV) or on the low
voltage side (LV) of the excitation transformer, see Figure269.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
587
Section 8
Current protection
Step- up
transformer
VA
Va
Two alternative
measurement points
for the rotor overload
function
Sec- side(LV)
I a Ib I c
Field breaker
ANSI12000019-2-en.vsd
ANSI12000019 V2 EN
Figure 269:
When MeasurCurrent = RMS; The maximum true RMS current value from the threephase input currents is used as the measured quantity for the rotor overload
protection.
MeasurCurrent = DC (default); The calculated rotor winding DC current in primary
amperes is used as the measured quantity for the rotor overload protection. The DC
current is calculated from the connected three-phase input currents, see Figure269.
This DC current calculation is valid for any type of three phase rectifier bridge (i.e.
either diode or thyristor based).
In order to properly calculate the rotor winding DC current the physical location of the
used CT is defined by the parameter CT_Location
588
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
iDC =
ia + ib + ic
2
GUID-8C279C3B-3CDE-47FA-ADD3-1E5CFD4F7536 V2 EN
(Equation 143)
where ia, ib and ic are instantaneous sampled values of the three-phase currents from LV
side of the excitation transformer. Note that this calculation is done twenty times per
power system cycle. After that the average DC current value IDC is calculated over one
power system cycle by using the following formula:
20
I DC =
DC
20
GUID-5D825381-66DE-404D-B3E9-471B13A394A5 V1 EN
(Equation 144)
The average DC current value IDC is used further within the rotor overload function for the
operating characteristic calculations and for the service value.
Once the measured currents are transferred from the HV side to the LV side of the
excitation transformer the same calculations are performed as in case when CT is located
on the LV side.
The measured current used by the function is available as a service value.
Overload characteristics
Rotor winding temperature increases with the current. Thus, it is logical to apply over
current elements with inverse time-current characteristics for overload protection. The
function operating characteristic is designed in accordance with the American standard
IEEE-C50.13. This standard specifies the following operating points:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
589
Section 8
Current protection
Table 294:
Current (% of IBase)
113
120
125
60
146
30
209
10
In order to obtain such operating characteristic the rotor overload function utilizes the
following formula in order to calculate the operate time:
ttr =
TD1
2
1
IBase
GUID-7CF0FE5A-F5CE-44EC-A2D7-F1E05849171C V1 EN
(Equation 145)
Where:
ttr is triptime in seconds
TD1 is a multiplier (it shall have default value of 33.8 in order to get the operating points as prescribed by the
standard, see Table287)
I is measured current by the function
IBase is base current (rotor winding rated current when DC current is used as measured current)
In addition to this equation based operating characteristic, the rotor overload function has
some additional cut-off features. The actual overall operating characteristic of the rotor
overload function is shown in Figure270.
590
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
t (s)
t_MaxTripDelay
tCutOff
t tr
TD1
I
IBase
t_MinTripDelay
I (A)
IBase IPickup
ANSI12000011-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000011 V1 EN
Figure 270:
591
Section 8
Current protection
starts to decay slowly following a linear reset characteristic defined by the parameter
tReset. The parameter tReset actually defines the rest time for Theta from value 100% to
zero. Note that if an overload condition happens again, the last theta value is used as a
starting point for the calculation. Thus the rotor winding will be properly protected against
varying current levels.
592
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
Imeasured
IBase * IPickup
Pickup hysteresis
t
THETA
100
ReclsLevTheta
TRIP
PICKUP
t
tReset
ANSI12000015-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000015 V1 EN
Figure 271:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
593
Section 8
Current protection
37 Enable
MeasurCurrent
<
37 PICKUP
37 trip delay
AND
37 TRIP
IBase
BLOCK37
NOT
BLOCK
NOT
ANSI12000021-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000021 V1 EN
Figure 272:
Tripping logic
This tripping logic provides some additional features regarding blocking and tripping
options available within the function. The list below describes functionality of every
binary input and output from the function which influence the trip logic.
Available binary inputs:
BLOCK prevents operation of overload and undercurrent features, at the same time all
binary outputs are forced to zero.
BLOCK37 prevents operation of undercurrent feature only
SETLKOUT forces lockout operation (output LOCKOUT) by external signal
RESET resets lockout and forces Theta value to zero
594
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
AutoLockout
TRIP
AND
OR
AND
AND
LOCKOUT
SETLKOUT
RESET
NOT
BLOCK
IEC12000020-1-en.vsd
IEC12000020 V1 EN
Figure 273:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
595
Section 8
Current protection
8.16.8
Technical data
Table 295:
Function
596
Range or value
Accuracy
(105.0900.0)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
>95%
Min = 50 ms
According to
IEEE Std C50.132005
(1.0120.0) s
(100.02000.0) s
(5.0500.0)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Min = 15 ms
(0.0600.0) s
Max = 170 ms
Max = 30 ms
0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
greater
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.1
9.1.1
Identification
Function description
Two step undervoltage protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
27
UV2PTUV
3U<
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V2 EN
9.1.2
Functionality
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. Two
step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV, 27) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed backup to primary protection.
UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
UV2PTUV (27) has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
597
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.1.3
Function block
UV2PTUV (27)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLK1
BLKTR2
BLK2
TRIP
TRST1
TRST1_A
TRST1_B
TRST1_C
TRST2
TRST2_A
TRST2_B
TRST2_C
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
PU_ST2_C
ANSI06000276-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000276 V2 EN
Figure 274:
9.1.4
Signals
Table 296:
Name
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR1
BOOLEAN
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLKTR2
BOOLEAN
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Table 297:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST1_A
BOOLEAN
TRST1_B
BOOLEAN
TRST1_C
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
TRST2_A
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
Name
9.1.5
Table 298:
Name
Type
Description
TRST2_B
BOOLEAN
TRST2_C
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_C
BOOLEAN
Settings
UV2PTUV (27) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
OperationStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Pickup1
1.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
70.0
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TD1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
IntBlkSel1
Disabled
Block of trip
Block all
Disabled
IntBlkStVal1
1 - 50
%VB
20
tBlkUV1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
599
Section 9
Voltage protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
HystAbs1
0.0 - 50.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
OperationStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Pickup2
1.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TD2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
IntBlkSel2
Disabled
Block of trip
Block all
Disabled
IntBlkStVal2
1 - 50
%VB
20
tBlkUV2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HystAbs2
0.0 - 50.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
Table 299:
Name
Unit
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
0.025
Description
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
tIReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CrvSat1
0 - 100
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
tIReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat2
0 - 100
Table 300:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ConnType
PhN DFT
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
PhN DFT
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
9.1.6
Monitored data
Table 301:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VA
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase A
VB
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase B
VC
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase C
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
601
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.1.7
Operation principle
Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV ,27) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If
one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding PICKUP
signal is generated. UV2PTUV (27) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP based on 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If the voltage remains
below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the
corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection of the
related high voltage equipment, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available,
that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level the function is blocked and no
PICKUP or TRIP signal is generated.The time delay characteristic is individually chosen
for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.
UV2PTUV (27) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-tophase fundamental value, phase-to-ground true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS
value. The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The voltage
related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-to-phase
voltage. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage under:
Vpickup < (%) VBase(kV )
3
(Equation 146)
EQUATION1606 V1 EN
EQUATION1991-ANSI V1 EN
9.1.7.1
Measurement principle
Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV (27) measures phase-to-ground or
phase-to-phase voltages and compare against set values, Pickup1 and Pickup2. The
parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the PICKUP
outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be lower than
the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding PICKUP signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
602
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.1.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
undervoltage (TUV). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
customer programmable inverse curve
TD
Vpickup < -V
Vpickup <
(Equation 148)
ANSIEQUATION1431 V1 EN
where:
Vpickup
<
Measured voltage
TD 480
Vpickup < -V
- 0.5
32
Vpickup <
2.0
+ 0.055
EQUATION1608 V1 EN
(Equation 149)
TD A
+D
t=
P
Vpickup < -V
-C
B
Vpickup
EQUATION1609 V1 EN
(Equation 150)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to
compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup< down to Vpickup<
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
603
Section 9
Voltage protection
(1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup< (1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
-C > 0
100
(Equation 151)
EQUATION1435 V1 EN
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of the
different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 25.3 "Inverse characteristics".
Figure 275:
Voltage
VA
VB
VC
IDMT Voltage
Time
ANSI12000186-1-en.vsd
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user
set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT)
and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode
(TUV). If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the
delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2
for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the
corresponding pickup output is reset. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the pickup condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the
signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the
TUV reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the
drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is
linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 276 and figure 277.
604
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
tIReset1
PICKUP
HystAbs1
Measured
Voltage
TRIP
PICKUP1
Time
t
PICKUP
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer
Instantaneous
Linearly
decreased
Time
ANSI05000010-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000010 V3 EN
Figure 276:
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
605
Section 9
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
PICKUP
PICKUP
tIReset1
HystAbs1
Measured Voltage
TRIP
PICKUP 1
Time
t
PICKUP
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer
Time
Instantaneous
Linearly
decreased
ANSI05000011-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000011 V2 EN
Figure 277:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different reset
types
606
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
When definite time delay is selected the function will trip as shown in figure 278. Detailed
information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 279 and
figure 280 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the
definite time delayed stage is ensured.
PU_ST1
V
Pickup1
a
a<b
R tReset1
TRST1
t1
0
AND
ANSI09000785-3-en.vsd
ANSI09000785 V3 EN
Figure 278:
Pickup1
PU_ST1
TRST1
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000039-3-en.vsd
ANSI10000039 V3 EN
Figure 279:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
607
Section 9
Voltage protection
Pickup1
PU_ST1
TRST1
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000040-3-en.vsd
ANSI10000040 V3 EN
Figure 280:
9.1.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27) partially or
completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:
BLKTR1:
BLK1:
BLKTR2:
BLK2:
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip
output of step 1, or both the trip and the PICKUP outputs of step 1, are blocked. The
characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can
also be set to Disabled resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and
functionality are valid also for step 2.
In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very
low. The event will PICKUP both the under voltage function and the blocking function,
as seen in figure 281. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time
delay of under voltage function.
608
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
Disconnection
Normal voltage
Pickup1
Pickup2
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000466 V1 EN
Figure 281:
9.1.7.4
Blocking function
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters
of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the set value,
and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special
logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the
PICKUP condition. The design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27) is
schematically shown in Figure 282.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
609
Section 9
Voltage protection
VA
VB
VC
Comparator
VA < V1<
Comparator
VB < V1<
Comparator
VC < V1<
PU_ST1_A
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
Phase 1
PU_ST1_B
Phase 2
Phase 3
IntBlkStVal1
PICKUP
MinVoltSelector
Time integrator
tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
Pickup
t1
t1Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST1
OR
TRST1_A
Step 1
TRST1_B
TRIP
TRST1_C
TRST1
OR
Comparator
VA < V2<
Comparator
VB < V2<
Comparator
VC < V2<
PU_ST2_A
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
IntBlkStVal2
PICKUP
Phase 1
PU_ST2_B
Phase 2
Pickup
t2
Phase 3 t2Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PU_ST2_C
PU_ST2
OR
TRST2_A
Step 2
MinVoltSelector
Time integrator
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
TRST2_B
TRIP
TRST2_C
TRST2
OR
PICKUP
OR
OR
TRIP
ANSI05000012-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000012 V3 EN
Figure 282:
610
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.1.8
Technical data
Table 302:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1.0100.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Absolute hysteresis
(0.050.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(1.050.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Inverse time
characteristics for step 1
and step 2, see table 989
(0.00-6000.00) s
less than 40 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
less than 40 ms
(0.00060.000) s
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 35 ms
15 ms typically
9.2
9.2.1
Identification
Function description
Two step overvoltage protection
IEC 61850
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59
OV2PTOV
3U>
SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
611
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.2.2
Functionality OV2PTOV
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden
power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.
OV2PTOV (59) has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.
OV2PTOV (59) has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.
9.2.3
Function block
OV2PTOV (59)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLK1
BLKTR2
BLK2
TRIP
TRST1
TRST1_A
TRST1_B
TRST1_C
TRST2
TRST2_A
TRST2_B
TRST2_C
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
PU_ST2_C
ANSI06000277-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000277 V2 EN
Figure 283:
9.2.4
Signals
Table 303:
Name
612
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR1
BOOLEAN
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLKTR2
BOOLEAN
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
Table 304:
Name
9.2.5
Table 305:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST1_A
BOOLEAN
TRST1_B
BOOLEAN
TRST1_C
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
TRST2_A
BOOLEAN
TRST2_B
BOOLEAN
TRST2_C
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_C
BOOLEAN
Settings
OV2PTOV (59) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
OperationStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Pickup1
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
613
Section 9
Voltage protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TD1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
HystAbs1
0.0 - 50.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
OperationStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Pickup2
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TD2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
HystAbs2
0.0 - 50.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
Table 306:
Name
Step
Default
Description
Unit
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
0.025
Description
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
tIReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat1
0 - 100
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
tIReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat2
0 - 100
Table 307:
Name
Step
Default
Description
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ConnType
PhN DFT
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS
PhN DFT
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
9.2.6
Monitored data
Table 308:
Name
9.2.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VA
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase A
VB
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase B
VC
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase C
Operation principle
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV (59) has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or threephase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding PICKUP signal is issued.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
615
Section 9
Voltage protection
EQUATION1610 V2 EN
EQUATION1992 V1 EN
9.2.7.1
Measurement principle
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
Pickup1 for Step 1 and Pickup2 for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2
influence the requirements to activate the PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or
3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the
corresponding PICKUP signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis is included.
616
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.2.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (TOV). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve
t=
(Equation 154)
EQUATION1625 V2 EN
where:
Vpickup
>
Measured voltage
TD 480
+ 0.035
V Vpickup >
0.5
32
Vpickup >
(Equation 155)
ANSIEQUATION2287 V3 EN
TD 480
+ 0.035
V Vpickup >
32
0.5
Vpickup >
(Equation 156)
ANSIEQUATION2288 V2 EN
TD A
V - Vpickup
-C
B
Vpickup
+D
EQUATION1616 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
(Equation 157)
617
Section 9
Voltage protection
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to
compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup up to Vpickup (1.0 +
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
-C > 0
100
(Equation 158)
EQUATION1435 V1 EN
The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay
integration, see figure 284. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are
shown in section "Inverse characteristics".
Voltage
IDMT Voltage
VA
VB
VC
Time
ANSI05000016-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000016 V2 EN
Figure 284:
Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode
(TOV). If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the
delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2
for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding
PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be
noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must be fulfilled again
and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The
hysteresis value for each step is settable HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2
respectively) to allow a high and accurate reset of the function. For OV2PTOV (59) the
618
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
TOV reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the
drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer: either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is
linearly decreased during the reset time.
tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage
PICKUP
TRIP
PU_Overvolt1
HystAbs1
Measured
Voltage
Time
PICKUP
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer
Linearly
decreased
Instantaneous
Time
ANSI05000019-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000019 V3 EN
Figure 285:
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
619
Section 9
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
PICKUP
PICKUP
tIReset1
HystAbs1
TRIP
Pickup1
Measured Voltage
Time
t
PICKUP
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer
Time
Instantaneous
Linearly decreased
ANSI05000020-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000020 V2 EN
Figure 286:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different reset
types
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
PU_ST1
tReset1
a
a>b
Vpickup>
t1
t
TRST1
AND
b
OFF
Delay
ON
Delay
ANSI10000100-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000100 V2 EN
Figure 287:
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000037-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000037 V2 EN
Figure 288:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
621
Section 9
Voltage protection
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000038-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000038 V2 EN
Figure 289:
9.2.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV, (59) partially or
completely, by binary input signals where:
9.2.7.4
BLOCK:
BLKTR1:
BLK1:
BLKTR2:
BLK2:
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-ground
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS filters
of input voltage signals are used. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set
value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A
special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the
PICKUP condition. The design of Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) is
schematically described in figure 290.
622
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
VA
VB
VC
Comparator
VA >
Pickup 1
Comparator
VB >
Pickup 1
Comparator
VC >
Pickup 1
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
PU_ST1_A
Phase A
PU_ST1_B
Phase B
Phase C
Phase C
PICKUP
Pickup
t1
t1Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PU_ ST1_C
PU_ST1
OR
TRST1-A
Step1
MaxVoltSelect
Time integrator
tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
TRST1_B
TRIP
TRST1_C
TRST1
OR
Comparator
VA >
Pickup 2
Comparator
VB >
Pickup 2
Comparator
VC >
Pickup 2
Voltage Phase
Selector
Phase A
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
Phase B
Phase C
PICKUP
MaxVoltSelect
Time integrator
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
TRIP
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
Pickup
t2
t2Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PU_ST2_C
PU_ST2
OR
TRST2-A
Step 2
TRST2-B
TRST2-C
TRST2
OR
OR PICKUP
OR
TRIP
ANSI05000013-2-en.vsd
_
.
ANSI05000013 V2 EN
Figure 290:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
623
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.2.8
Technical data
Table 309:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1.0-200.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Absolute hysteresis
(0.050.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Inverse time
characteristics for
steps 1 and 2, see
table 988
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000-60.000) s
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 25 ms
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset
15 ms typically
9.3
9.3.1
Identification
Function description
Two step residual overvoltage
protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59N
ROV2PTOV
3U0
TRV V1 EN
624
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.3.2
Functionality
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during ground faults.
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) function calculates the
residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a
single voltage input transformer fed from a broken delta or neutral point voltage
transformer.
ROV2PTOV (59N) has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent ground faults.
9.3.3
Function block
ROV2PTOV (59N)
V3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
TRST1
BLKTR1
TRST2
BLK1
PICKUP
BLKTR2
PU_ST1
BLK2
PU_ST2
ANSI06000278-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000278 V2 EN
Figure 291:
9.3.4
Signals
Table 310:
Name
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR1
BOOLEAN
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLKTR2
BOOLEAN
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Table 311:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
625
Section 9
Voltage protection
Name
9.3.5
Table 312:
Name
Type
Description
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
Settings
ROV2PTOV (59N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
OperationStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Pickup1
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
30.0
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TD1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
HystAbs1
0.0 - 50.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
OperationStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Pickup2
1.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
45.0
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TD2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
HystAbs2
0.0 - 50.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
626
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
Table 313:
Name
Unit
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
tIReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat1
0 - 100
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
tIReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0
DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
CrvSat2
0 - 100
Table 314:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Step
Default
Description
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
627
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.3.6
Monitored data
Table 315:
Name
Type
VLevel
9.3.7
Values (Range)
REAL
Unit
kV
Description
Magnitude of measured
voltage
Operation principle
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) is used to detect high singlephase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3V0. The residual voltage can be
measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer or from
a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are connected in an open
delta. Another possibility is to measure the three-phase voltages and internally in the IED
calculate the corresponding residual voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage
to ROV2PTOV (59N). ROV2PTOV (59N) has two steps with separate time delays. If the
single-phase (residual) voltage remains above the set value for a time period
corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either,
definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV,
phase-phase.
9.3.7.1
Measurement principle
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, Pickup1
and Pickup2.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
9.3.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (TOV). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
t=
TD
V - Vpickup >
Vpickup >
(Equation 159)
ANSIEQUATION2422 V1 EN
where:
Vn>
Measured voltage
TD 480
V - Vpickup >
- 0.5
32
Vpickup >
2.0
- 0.035
(Equation 160)
ANSIEQUATION2423 V1 EN
TD 480
V - Vpickup >
- 0.5
32
Vpickup >
3.0
+ 0.035
(Equation 161)
ANSIEQUATION2421 V1 EN
TD A
V - Vpickup
-C
B
Vpickup
+D
EQUATION1616 V1 EN
(Equation 162)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to
compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup up to Vpickup (1.0 +
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
-C > 0
100
EQUATION1440 V1 EN
(Equation 163)
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
629
Section 9
Voltage protection
TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time
mode (TOV).
If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay
time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the
definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding PICKUP
output is reset, after the defined reset time has elapsed.
Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must
be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis
area. Also notice that for the overvoltage function TOV reset time is constant and does not
depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three
ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen
during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See
figure 285 and figure 286.
630
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage
PICKUP
TRIP
PU_Overvolt1
HystAbs1
Measured
Voltage
Time
PICKUP
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer
Linearly
decreased
Time
Instantaneous
ANSI05000019-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000019 V3 EN
Figure 292:
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
631
Section 9
Voltage protection
tIReset1
Voltage
PICKUP
PICKUP
tIReset1
HystAbs1
TRIP
Pickup1
Measured Voltage
Time
t
PICKUP
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer
Time
Instantaneous
Linearly decreased
ANSI05000020-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000020 V2 EN
Figure 293:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
632
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
PU_ST1
tReset1
a
a>b
Vpickup>
t1
t
TRST1
AND
b
OFF
Delay
ON
Delay
ANSI10000100-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000100 V2 EN
Figure 294:
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000037-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000037 V2 EN
Figure 295:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
633
Section 9
Voltage protection
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000038-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000038 V2 EN
Figure 296:
9.3.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)
partially or completely, by binary input signals where:
9.3.7.4
BLOCK:
BLKTR1:
BLK1:
BLKTR2:
BLK2:
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive
Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal for the rated frequency. The single input
voltage is compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N)
is schematically described in figure 297.
634
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
VN
Comparator
VN >
Pickup 1
Phase 1
PICKUP
Time integrator
tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
Comparator
VN >
Pickup2
TRIP
TRST1
Pickup
t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Output
Logic
Step 1
PU_ST2
Phase 1
PICKUP
Time integrator
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
PU_ ST1
TRIP
TRST2
Pickup
t2
tReset2
&
Trip
Output
Logic
Step 2
OR
PICKUP
OR
TRIP
ANSI05000748-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000748 V2 EN
Figure 297:
9.3.8
Technical data
Table 316:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1.0-200.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
0.5% of Vn at V > Vn
Absolute hysteresis
(0.050.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
0.5% of Vn at V > Vn
Inverse time
characteristics for low
and high step, see
table 990
(0.006000.00) s
0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
greater
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
635
Section 9
Voltage protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.00060.000) s
0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
greater
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 25 ms
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset
15 ms typically
9.4
9.4.1
Identification
Function description
Overexcitation protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
24
OEXPVPH
U/f >
SYMBOL-Q V1 EN
9.4.2
Functionality
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a magnetic
flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components
that are not designed to carry flux. This will cause eddy currents to flow. These eddy
currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent parts
in a relatively short time. The function has settable inverse operating curves and
independent alarm stages.
636
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.4.3
Function block
OEXPVPH (24)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
RESET
TRIP
PICKUP
ALARM
ANSI05000329-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000329 V2 EN
Figure 298:
9.4.4
Signals
Table 317:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Current connection
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset operation
Name
Table 319:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 318:
9.4.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Settings
OEXPVPH (24) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Pickup1
100.0 - 180.0
%VB/f
0.1
110.0
Pickup2
100.0 - 200.0
%VB/f
0.1
140.0
XLeakage
0.000 - 200.000
Ohm
0.001
0.000
t_TripPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
637
Section 9
Voltage protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
t_MinTripDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
7.000
t_MaxTripDelay
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
1800.00
t_CoolingK
0.10 - 9000.00
0.01
1200.00
CurveType
IEEE
Tailor made
IEEE
TDForIEEECurve
1 - 60
AlarmPickup
50.0 - 120.0
0.1
100.0
tAlarm
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
5.00
Default
Table 320:
Name
Step
Default
Description
Unit
Step
t1_UserCurve
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
7200.00
t2_UserCurve
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
3600.00
t3_UserCurve
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
1800.00
t4_UserCurve
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
900.00
t5_UserCurve
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
450.00
t6_UserCurve
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
225.00
Step
Default
Table 321:
Name
Description
Unit
Description
MeasuredV
PosSeq
AB
BC
CA
AB
MeasuredI
AB
BC
CA
PosSeq
AB
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
638
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.4.6
Monitored data
Table 322:
Name
9.4.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
TMTOTRIP
REAL
VPERHZ
REAL
V/Hz
THERMSTA
REAL
Operation principle
The importance of Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH, 24) function is growing as the
power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate near their
designated limits most of the time.
Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types. This
is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the improvement in the
uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. If an emergency that causes
overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged unless corrective action is taken.
Transformer manufacturers recommend an overexcitation protection as a part of the
transformer protection system.
Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with
below-normal frequency. Such conditions may occur when a transformer unit is loaded,
but are more likely to arise when the transformer is unloaded, or when loss of load occurs.
Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to experience
overexcitation conditions. It follows from the fundamental transformer equation, see
equation 164, that the peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to induced voltage
E, and inversely proportional to frequency f and turns n.
E = 4.44 f n B max A
(Equation 164)
EQUATION898 V2 EN
E f
( Vr ) ( fn )
ANSIEQUATION2296 V1 EN
(Equation 165)
Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If the
core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9 Tesla), the
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
639
Section 9
Voltage protection
flux will no longer be contained within the core, but will extend into other (non-laminated)
parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current circulations.
Overexcitation will result in:
Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative volt per hertz (V/
Hz) ratio. Protection initiates a reduction of excitation, and if this fails, or if this is not
possible, the TRIP signal will disconnect the transformer from the source after a delay
ranging from seconds to minutes, typically 5-10 seconds.
Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected generator
unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected to a wide
range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine. In such cases,
OEXPVPH (24) may trip the field breaker during a start-up of a machine, by means of the
overexcitation ALARM signal. If this is not possible, the power transformer can be
disconnected from the source, after a delay, by the TRIP signal.
The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers operate continuously at not more
than 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the ratio of the
actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not exceed 1.1 times the
ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained basis, see
equation 166.
E
f
1.1
Vn
fn
(Equation 166)
EQUATION1630 V1 EN
Pickup1
fn
(Equation 167)
ANSIEQUATION2297 V2 EN
where:
Pickup1 is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.
640
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
Pickup1 is a setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 180%. If the user does not
know exactly what to set, then the default value for Pickup1 = 110 % given by the IEC
60076-1 standard shall be used.
In OEXPVPH (24), the relative excitation M is expressed according to equation 168.
M ( p.u.) =
E f
Vn fn
ANSIEQUATION2299 V1 EN
(Equation 168)
It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for any
E and f, where the ratio E/f is equal to Vn/fn. A power transformer is not overexcited as
long as the relative excitation is M Pickup1, Pickup1 expressed in % of Vn/fn.
The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage V which is in general
not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For no load
condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power transformer the
internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage V which is measured
and fed to OEXPVPH (24), depending on the direction of the power flow through the
power transformer, the power transformer side where OEXPVPH (24) is applied, and the
power transformer leakage reactance of the winding. It is important to specify in the
application configuration on which side of the power transformer OEXPVPH (24) is
placed.
As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load, 0.8
power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer core,
will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated frequency,
provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided between the primary
and the secondary winding: XLeakage = XLeakage1 = XLeakage2 = Xsc / 2 = 0.075 pu.
OEXPVPH (24) calculates the internal induced voltage E if XLeakage (meaning the
leakage reactance of the winding where OEXPVPH (24) is connected) is known to the
user. The assumption taken for two-winding power transformers that XLeakage = Xsc / 2
is unfortunately most often not true. For a two-winding power transformer the leakage
reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the core with
respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the situation is still
more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance, then it should
applied. If a user has no idea about it, XLeakage can be set to Xc/2. OEXPVPH (24)
protection will then take the given measured voltage V, as the induced voltage E.
It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such as
loss-of-load, etc. A high phase-to-ground voltage does not mean overexcitation. For
example, in an ungrounded power system, a single phase-to-ground fault means high
voltages of the healthy two phases-to-ground, but no overexcitation on any winding.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
641
Section 9
Voltage protection
The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially unchanged. The important voltage is
the voltage between the two ends of each winding.
9.4.7.1
Measured voltage
If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where overexcitation protection
is applied, then Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24) shall be set to measure this
voltage, MeasuredV. The particular voltage which is used determines the two currents that
must be used. This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI.
It is extremely important that MeasuredV and MeasuredI are set to same
value.
If, for example, voltage Vab is fed to OEXPVPH(24), then currents Ia, and Ib must be
applied. From these two input currents, current Iab = Ia - Ib is calculated internally by the
OEXPVPH (24) algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher than 70% of the
rated value, otherwise the protection algorithm exits without calculating the excitation.
ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows
0.000.
If three phase-to-ground voltages are available from the side where overexcitation is
connected, then OEXPVPH (24) shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage and
current. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current are
used by OEXPVPH (24). A check is made if the positive sequence voltage is higher than
70% of rated phase-to-ground voltage, when below this value, OEXPVPH (24) exits
immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed
value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.
9.4.7.2
OEXPVPH (24) can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from
the power flow.
The side with a possible load tap changer must not be used.
642
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on analysis
of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They can match the
transformer core capability well.
The square law is according to equation 169.
top =
0.18 TD
PUV Hz - 1
0.18 TD
overexcitation
(Equation 169)
ANSIEQUATION2298 V2 EN
where:
M
Pickup1 is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and
TD
Vmeasured
fmeasured
=
Vmeasured
frated
frated
(Equation 170)
ANSIEQUATION2404 V1 EN
An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral expression,
which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to equation 171.
top
( M ( t ) - Pickup1)
dt 0.18 TD
0
ANSIEQUATION2300 V1 EN
(Equation 171)
A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (that is, j = n) where it becomes
true that:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
643
Section 9
Voltage protection
Dt
( M( j) - PUV / Hz )
0.18 TD
j=k
(Equation 172)
EQUATION1636 V1 EN
where:
is the time interval between two successive executions of OEXPVPH (24) and
Dt
M(j) - Pickup1 is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given as
Vn/fn.
As long as M > Pickup1 (that is, overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be
larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be
tripped at j = n.
Inverse delays as per figure 300, can be modified (limited) by two special definite delay
settings, namely t_MaxTripDelay and t_MinTripDelay, see figure 299.
delay in s
t_MaxTrip
Delay
under excitation
overexcitation
t_MinTripDelay
0
Mmax Pickup1
M=Pickup1
Pickup1
Mmax
Emax
Overexcitation M-Pickup1
Excitation M
E (only if f = fn = const)
ANSI99001067-2en.vsd
ANSI99001067 V2 EN
Figure 299:
A definite maximum time, t_MaxTripDelay, can be used to limit the operate time at low
degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than t_MaxTripDelay will not be
allowed. In case the inverse delay is longer than t_MaxTripDelay, OEXPVPH (24) trips
after t_MaxTripDelay seconds.
A definite minimum time, t_MinTripDelay, can be used to limit the operate time at high
degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than t_MinTripDelay,
OEXPVPH (24) function trips after t_MinTripDelay seconds. The inverse delay law is not
644
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
valid for values exceeding Mmax. The delay will be tMin, irrespective of the
overexcitation level, when values exceed Mmax (that is, M>Pickup1).
IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES
Time (s)
1000
100
TD = 60
TD = 20
TD = 10
TD = 9
TD = 8
TD = 7
TD = 6
TD = 5
10
TD = 4
TD = 3
TD = 2
TD = 1
1
10
20
OVEREXCITATION IN %
30
40
(M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373_ansi.vsd
ANSI01000373 V1 EN
Figure 300:
The critical value of excitation M is determined indirectly via OEXPVPH (24) setting
Pickup2. Pickup2 can be thought of as a no-load voltage at rated frequency, where the
inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, t_MinTripDelay. If, for example,
Pickup2 = 140 %, then M is according to equation 173.
M=
( Pickup2 f )
Vn/fn
= 1.40
ANSIEQUATION2286 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
(Equation 173)
645
Section 9
Voltage protection
The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this case
the interval between M = Pickup1, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into five equal
subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5 and t6) as shown in figure 301. These
times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.
delay in s
t_MaxTripDelay
t_MinTripDelay
underexcitation
Emaxcont
M max
99001068_ansi.vsd
ANSI99001068 V1 EN
Figure 301:
Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear
interpolation.
Should it happen that t_MaxTripDelay be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the
actual delay would be t_MaxTripDelay. Above Mmax, the delay can only be
t_MinTripDelay.
9.4.7.3
Cooling
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24) is basically a thermal protection; therefore a
cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied. Parameter
Setting tool is an OEXPVPH (24) setting, with a default time constant t_CoolingK of 20
minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous normal
values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is assumed to be reached not
before approximately 5 times t_CoolingK minutes. If an overexcitation condition would
return before that, the time to trip will be shorter than it would be otherwise.
9.4.7.4
646
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is t_MaxTripDelay, then the estimation
of the remaining time to trip is done against t_MaxTripDelay.
The relative excitation M, shown on the local HMI and in PCM600 has a monitored data
value VPERHZ and is calculated from the expression:
M ( p.u.) =
E f
Vn fn
ANSIEQUATION2299 V1 EN
(Equation 174)
If VPERHZ value is less than setting Pickup1 (in %), the power transformer is
underexcited. If VPERHZ is equal to Pickup1 (in %), the excitation is exactly equal to the
power transformer continuous capability. If VPERHZ is higher than Pickup1, the
protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if VPERHZ = 1.100, while
Pickup1 = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum continuous
excitation limit.
The monitored data value THERMSTA shows the thermal status of the protected power
transformer iron core. THERMSTA gives the thermal status in % of the trip value which
corresponds to 100%. THERMSTA should reach 100% at the same time, as TMTOTRIP
reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then for some reason not switched
off, THERMSTA shall go over 100%.
If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by t_MaxTripDelay, and/or
t_MinTripDelay, then the Thermal status will generally not reach 100% at the same time,
when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very
long delay is limited by t_MaxTripDelay, then the OEXPVPH (24) TRIP output signal
will be set to 1 before the Thermal status reaches 100%.
9.4.7.5
Overexcitation alarm
A separate step, AlarmPickup, is provided for alarming purpose. It is normally set 2%
lower than (Pickup1) and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the operator an
early warning.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
647
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.4.7.6
Logic diagram
BLOCK
AlarmPickup
0-tMax
0
I3P
&
ALARM
&
TRIP
tAlarm
M>Pickup1
V3P
t>tAlarm
Pickup1
Calculation
of internal
induced
voltage Ei
Ei
M=
(Ei / f)
(Vn / fn)
TD
IEEE law
&
0-tMax
M
0
Tailor-made law
t_MaxTripDelay
M>Pickup2
Xleakage
OR
0-tMin
t>tMin
0
Pickup2
t_MinTripDelay
Figure 302:
Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are
calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and frequency
are separately checked against their respective limit values.
9.4.8
Technical data
Table 323:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(100180)% of (VBase/fn)
0.5% of V
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
(100200)% of (VBase/fn)
0.5% of V
Curve type
IEEE : t =
(0.18 TD)
( M - 1) 2
EQUATION1645 V1 EN
(Equation 175)
where M = (E/f)/(Vn/fn)
Table continues on next page
648
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.00060.000) s
(0.009000.00) s
(0.009000.00)
9.5
9.5.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
9.5.2
VDCPTOV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
60
Functionality
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from two
three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one trip step.
9.5.3
Function block
VDCPTOV (60)
V3P1*
V3P2*
BLOCK
TRIP
PICKUP
ALARM
V1LOW
V2LOW
VDIFF_A
VDIFF_B
VDIFF_C
ANSI06000528-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000528 V2 EN
Figure 303:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
649
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.5.4
Signals
Table 324:
Name
Type
Bus voltage
V3P2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Capacitor voltage
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Name
Table 326:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 325:
9.5.5
Default
V3P1
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
V1LOW
BOOLEAN
Loss of V1 voltage
V2LOW
BOOLEAN
Loss of V2 voltage
VDIFF_A
REAL
VDIFF_B
REAL
VDIFF_C
REAL
Settings
VDCPTOV (60) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
BlkDiffAtVLow
No
Yes
Yes
VDTrip
2.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
5.0
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
VDAlarm
2.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
2.0
tAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
V1Low
1.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
70.0
V2Low
1.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
70.0
tBlock
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
650
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
Table 327:
Name
Values (Range)
RF_A
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
RF_B
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
RF_C
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Table 328:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
9.5.6
Step
Default
Description
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 329:
Name
9.5.7
Unit
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VDIFF_A
REAL
kV
VDIFF_B
REAL
kV
VDIFF_C
REAL
kV
Operation principle
The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on comparison of
the magnitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase. Possible differences between
the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage transformers can be compensated for with
a ratio correction factors RF_X. The voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the
alarm level VDAlarm or trip level VDTrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip
(TRIP output) is given after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three
phase voltage supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings V1Low and V2Low.
The outputs for loss of voltage V1LOW resp V2LOW will be activated. The V1 voltage
is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the V2 voltage is supervised for loss
of all three phases.
Loss of all V1 or all V2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This blocking
can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.
VDCPTOV (60) function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary
BLOCK input. It can, for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision function
FUFSPVC.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
651
Section 9
Voltage protection
AND
VDTrip_B
AND
VDTrip_C
O
R
0
0-tReset
0-tTrip
0
AND
AND
AND
VDAlarm_A
TRIP
PICKUP
AND
VDAlarm_B
AND
VDAlarm_C
O
R
0-tAlarm
0
AND
ALARM
AND
V1LOW
AND
V1Low_A
V1Low_B
AND
0-tAlarm
0
V1Low_C
AND
OR
BlkDiffAtULow
V2Low_A
V2Low_B
AND
0-t1
0
AND
V2LOW
V2Low_C
BLOCK
en06000382_2_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000382 V3 EN
Figure 304:
652
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.5.8
Technical data
Table 330:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(2.0100.0) % of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(1.0100.0) % of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(0.00060.000)s
0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
greater
(0.00060.000)s
0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
greater
(0.00060.000)s
0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
greater
9.6
9.6.1
Identification
Function description
100% Stator ground fault protection, 3rd
harmonic based
9.6.2
IEC 61850
identification
STEFPHIZ
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59THD
Functionality
Stator ground fault is a fault type having relatively high fault rate. The generator systems
normally have high impedance grounding, that is, grounding via a neutral point resistor.
This resistor is normally dimensioned to give an ground fault current in the range 3 15
A at a solid ground-fault directly at the generator high voltage terminal. The relatively
small ground fault currents give much less thermal and mechanical stress on the generator,
compared to the short circuit case, which is between conductors of two phases. Anyhow,
the ground faults in the generator have to be detected and the generator has to be tripped,
even if longer fault time compared to internal short circuits, can be allowed.
In normal non-faulted operation of the generating unit the neutral point voltage is close to
zero, and there is no zero sequence current flow in the generator. When a phase-to-ground
fault occurs the neutral point voltage will increase and there will be a current flow through
the neutral point resistor.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
653
Section 9
Voltage protection
To detect a ground fault on the windings of a generating unit one may use a neutral point
overvoltage protection, a neutral point overcurrent protection, a zero sequence
overvoltage protection or a residual differential protection. These protections are simple
and have served well during many years. However, at best these simple schemes protect
only 95% of the stator winding. They leave 5% close to the neutral end unprotected. Under
unfavorable conditions the blind zone may extend up to 20% from the neutral.
The 95% stator ground fault protection measures the fundamental frequency voltage
component in the generator star point and it operates when the fundamental frequency
voltage exceeds the preset value. By applying this principle approximately 95% of the
stator winding can be protected. In order to protect the last 5% of the stator winding close
to the neutral end the 3rd harmonic voltage measurement can be performed. In 100%
Stator E/F 3rd harmonic protection either the 3rd harmonic voltage differential principle,
the neutral point 3rd harmonic undervoltage principle or the terminal side 3rd harmonic
overvoltage principle can be applied. However, differential principle is strongly
recommended. Combination of these two measuring principles provides coverage for
entire stator winding against ground faults.
stator winding
N
x E3
(1- x) E3
RN
uN
Samples of the
neutral voltage
from which the
fundamental and
3rd harmonic
voltages are
filtered out
CB 1
Transformer
Rf
CB 2
1- x
1 or 100 %
Neutral point fundamental frequency
over-voltage protection 5% - 100%
uT
Samples of the
terminal voltage
from which the
3rd harmonic
voltage is filtered
out
3rd
harmonic
Differential
differential
0% 30%
0% - 30%
ANSI10000202-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000202 V1 EN
Figure 305:
654
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.6.3
Function block
STEFPHIZ (59THD)
NEUTVOLT
TRIP
TERMVOLT
TRIP3H
52A
TRIP_VN
BLOCK
PICKUP
BLOCK3RD
PU_3H
BLOCKVN
PU_VN
VT3
VN3
E3
ANGLE
DV3
BV3
V_N
ANSI11000211-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000211 V1 EN
Figure 306:
9.6.4
Signals
Table 331:
Name
Default
Description
U3PNEUT
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3PTERM
GROUP
SIGNAL
52a
BOOLEAN
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
BLOCK3RD
BOOLEAN
BLOCKVN
BOOLEAN
Table 332:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIP3H
BOOLEAN
TRIP_VN
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_3H
BOOLEAN
PU_VN
BOOLEAN
655
Section 9
Voltage protection
Name
9.6.5
Table 333:
Name
Type
Description
VT3
REAL
VN3
REAL
E3
REAL
ANGLE
REAL
DV3
REAL
BV3
REAL
V_N
REAL
Settings
STEFPHIZ (59THD) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Beta
0.50 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
CBexists
No
Yes
No
FactorCBopen
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
1.00
VN3rdHPU
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
VT3BlkLevel
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
VNFundPU
1.0 - 50.0
0.1
5.0
t3rdH
0.020 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
tVNFund
0.020 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
Table 334:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TVoltType
NoVoltage
ResidualVoltage
AllThreePhases
PhaseA
PhaseB
PhaseC
ResidualVoltage
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
656
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.6.6
Monitored data
Table 335:
Name
9.6.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VT3
REAL
kV
VN3
REAL
kV
E3
REAL
kV
ANGLE
REAL
deg
DV3
REAL
kV
BV3
REAL
kV
V_N
REAL
kV
Operation principle
The protection is a combination of the 95% fundamental frequency ground fault
protection and the 3 rd harmonic based stator earth fault protection, (STEFPHIZ, 59THD).
The 3rd harmonic based 100% stator ground fault protection is using the 3rd harmonic
voltage generated by the generator itself. To assure reliable function of the protection it is
necessary that the 3rd harmonic voltage generation is at least 0.8 V RMS on VT secondary
side.
The 3rd harmonic voltage generated by the generator has the same phase angle in the three
phases. It has the characteristic of a zero sequence component. If the generator is
connected to the power system via a block transformer that cannot transform zero
sequence voltages between the voltage levels, the 3rd harmonic voltage, that is V3N and
V3T in fig 307, in the generator system is not influenced by the external power system. At
normal operation the generator third harmonic voltage characteristic can be described as
in figure 307.
Note that angle between V3N and V3T is typically close to 180.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
657
Section 9
Voltage protection
V3
- DV3 +
+
V3T,A
-
V3N
+
V3T,B
-
+
V3T,C
-
V3T
V3N
en06000448_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000448 V1 EN
Figure 307:
The generator is modeled as parts of a winding where a 3rd harmonic voltage is induced
along the winding, represented by the end voltages V3N (voltage drop across resistor) and
V3T in the figure. Via the winding capacitances to ground and the neutral point resistor
there will be a small 3rd harmonic current, giving the voltages V3N and V3T. The 3rd
harmonic voltage in the generator neutral point (V3N) will be close to zero in case of a
stator ground-fault close to the neutral. This fact alone can be used as an indication of
stator ground-fault. To enable better sensitivity and stability also measurement of the
generator's 3rd harmonic voltage V3T is also used. In addition to the decrease of V3N the
generator voltage V3T will increase under the stator ground-fault close to the generator
neutral point. Therefore the 3rd harmonic voltage V3T , (which is a zero sequence voltage)
is used by the protection. In the 3rd harmonic voltage differential protection algorithm
equation 176 is used:
658
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
(Equation 176)
V3N, and V3T are third harmonic phasors with real and imaginary parts. The factor Beta
must be set not to risk operation under non-faulted conditions.
The voltage V3N is measured via a voltage transformer between the generator neutral point
and ground. The voltage V3T can be measured in different ways. The setting TVoltType
defines how the protection function is fed from voltage transformers at the high voltage
side of the generator. If V3T is lower than the set level VT3BlkLevel, STEFPHIZ (59THD)
function is blocked. The choices of TVoltType are:
NoVoltage: There is no voltage measured from the generator terminal side. This can be the
case when there are only phase-to-phase voltage transformers available at the generator
terminal side. In this case the protection will operate as a simple neutral point 3rd harmonic
undervoltage protection, which must be blocked externally during generator start-up and
shut-down.
ResidualVoltage: The function is fed from a broken delta connection of the phase to
ground connected voltage transformers at the generator terminal side,
V3T=(1/3)*V_Broken_Delta.
AllThreePhases: The function is fed from the three phase to ground connected voltage
transformers at the generator terminal side. The 3rd harmonic voltage V3T is calculated in
the IED, V3T=(1/3)*(V3A+V3B+V3C).
PhaseA, PhaseB, or PhaseC: The function is fed from one phase voltage transformer only.
The 3rd harmonic zero sequence voltage is assumed to be equal to any of the phase
voltages, as the third harmonic voltage is of zero sequence type, V3T=V3Lx.
A simplified block diagram describing the stator ground fault protection function shown
in figure 308.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
659
Section 9
Voltage protection
Samples:
Generator
terminal
voltage
3rd
harmonic
Fourier
filtering
giving VT3
Samples:
Generator
neutral point
voltage
3rd
harmonic
Fourier
filtering
giving VN3
Complex VT3
Stator
Ground
Fault
detection
3rd
harmonic
based
TRIP
TRIP3H
Pickup
TRIPVN
Pickup
and trip
logic
PU3H
PU_VN
Complex VN3
Stator
Ground
Fault
detection
95 %
Pickup
CB Status
Block
en06000449_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000449 V2 EN
Figure 308:
660
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
Beta
V3N
V3N+V3T
ba
PU3H
AND
t
0
VT3BlkLevel
V3T
ab
TRIP3H
PICKUP
OR
TRIP
OR
a
VNFundPU
V_N
PU_VN
ba
TRIPVN
t
0
ANSI07000001-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000001 V2 EN
Figure 309:
Simplified Pickup and Trip logical diagram of the 100% Stator earth fault
protection, 3rd harmonic based STEFPHIZ (59THD) protection
There are two different cases of generator block configuration; with or without generator
circuit breaker. If there is no generator breaker the capacitive coupling to ground is the
same under all operating conditions. When there is a generator breaker, the capacitive
coupling to ground differs between the operating conditions when the generator is running
with the generator breaker open (before synchronization) and with the circuit breaker
closed. This can be shown as in figure 310.
-
UV3
- DV3 +
+
V3T,A
-
V3N
+
V3T,B
-
+
V3T,C
-
Ctr/3
Ctr/3
Ctr/3
en07000002-2_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000002 V2 EN
Figure 310:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
661
Section 9
Voltage protection
With the circuit breaker open, the total capacitance will be smaller compared to normal
operating conditions. This means that the neutral point 3rd harmonic voltage will be
reduced compared to the normal operating condition. Therefore, there is a possibility to
reduce the sensitivity of the protection when the generator circuit breaker is open.
With the setting CBexists change of the sensitivity is enabled. If the binary input signal 52a
is activated the set sensitivity is valid. If the generator circuit breaker is opened the binary
input 52a is deactivated and the sensitivity is changed. This is done by changing the factor
Beta which is multiplied with a set constant FactorCBopen.
In addition to the binary outputs also some analog outputs are available from the
protection function in order to enable easier commissioning:
E3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage induced in the stator given in primary volts
VN3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage measured in the neutral point of the
generator
VT3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage measured in the terminal point of the
generator
ANGLE: the angle between the phasors VN3 and VT3 given in radians
DV3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic differential voltage
BV3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic bias voltage
V_N: the fundamental frequency voltage measured in the neutral point of the generator
9.6.8
Technical data
Table 336:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1.050.0)% of VBase
0.25% of Vn
(0.510.0)% of VBase
0.25% of Vn
(0.110.0)% of VBase
0.25% of Vn
662
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.02060.000) s
0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
greater
(0.02060.000) s
0.2% or 40 ms whichever is
greater
Filter characteristic:
Fundamental
Third harmonic
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
663
664
Section 10
Frequency protection
Section 10
Frequency protection
10.1
10.1.1
Identification
Function description
Underfrequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
SAPTUF
f<
SYMBOL-P V1 EN
10.1.2
Functionality
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network.
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) measures frequency with high accuracy, and is
used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and so on.
Separate definite time delays are provided for trip and restore.
SAPTUF (81) is provided with undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phasephase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to
connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/
Setting guidelines
10.1.3
Function block
SAPTUF (81)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKREST
TRIP
PICKUP
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN
FREQ
ANSI06000279-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000279 V2 EN
Figure 311:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
665
Section 10
Frequency protection
10.1.4
Signals
Table 337:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
BLKREST
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 339:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 338:
10.1.5
Default
V3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
RESTORE
BOOLEAN
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
FREQ
REAL
Measured frequency
Settings
SAPTUF (81L) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
PUFrequency
35.00 - 75.00
Hz
0.01
48.80
tDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
Hz
0.01
50.10
TimerMode
Definite timer
Volt based timer
Definite timer
VNom
50.0 - 150.0
%VB
1.0
100.0
VMin
50.0 - 150.0
%VB
1.0
90.0
Exponent
0.0 - 5.0
0.1
1.0
t_MaxTripDelay
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
t_MinTripDelay
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
666
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 10
Frequency protection
Table 340:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
10.1.6
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 341:
Name
10.1.7
Unit
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VLevel
REAL
kV
FREQ
REAL
Hz
Measured frequency
Operation principle
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is used to detect low power system frequency.
SAPTUF (81) can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time
delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the time delay will be
longer if the voltage is higher, and the delay will be shorter if the voltage is lower. If the
frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time
delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain
frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the
function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than
the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no
PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued.
10.1.7.1
Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously, and
compared with the set value, PUFrequency. The frequency function is dependent on the
voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting
MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is described in the Basic
IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter,
SAPTUF (81) gets blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings
are made in percent of the setting VBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in
kV.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
667
Section 10
Frequency protection
10.1.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) can be either a settable
definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay
depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low
voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting tDelay sets
the time delay.
For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings VNom,
VMin, Exponent, t_MaxTripDelay and t_MinTripDelay set the time delay according to
figure 312 and equation 177. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of
time delay to apply.
Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay tDelay. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured
frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user
defined reset time, tReset, the PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has
elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back
to the hysteresis area.
On the RESTORE output of SAPTUF (81) a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay
corresponding to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the level
corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.
10.1.7.3
668
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 10
Frequency protection
V - VMin
t=
VNom - VMin
Exponent
(Equation 177)
EQUATION1559 V1 EN
where:
t
Exponent
is a setting,
VMin, VNom
= 90%
= 100%
t_MaxTrip
Delay
= 1.0 s
t_MinTripD
elay
= 0.0 s
Exponent
= 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4
TimeDlyOperate [s]
0
Exponenent
1
2
3
0.5
90
95
100
V [% of VBase]
en05000075_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000075 V1 EN
Figure 312:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
669
Section 10
Frequency protection
10.1.7.4
Blocking
It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) partially or completely, by
binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:
BLKTRIP:
BLKREST:
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked.
10.1.7.5
Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time integrator can trip either
due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage dependent delay time. When the
frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued
after the time delay tRestore. The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is
schematically described in figure 313.
670
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 10
Frequency protection
Block
OR
BLKDMAGN
BLOCK
Comparator
V < IntBlockLevel
Voltage
Frequency
Time integrator
Comparator
f < PuFrequency
TimerOperation Mode
Selector
PICKUP
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
100 ms
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq
RESTORE
TimeDlyRestore
en05000726_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000726 V1 EN
Figure 313:
10.2
10.2.1
Identification
Function description
Overfrequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
SAPTOF
f>
SYMBOL-O V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
671
Section 10
Frequency protection
10.2.2
Functionality
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF (81) is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.
Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network.
Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause over frequency.
SAPTOF (81) measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for generation
shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency stage initiating load
restoring. A definite time delay is provided for trip.
SAPTOF (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phasephase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to
connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/
Setting guidelines
10.2.3
Function block
SAPTOF (81)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
TRIP
PICKUP
BLKDMAGN
FREQ
ANSI06000280-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000280 V2 EN
Figure 314:
10.2.4
Signals
Table 342:
Name
672
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 10
Frequency protection
Table 343:
Name
10.2.5
Table 344:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
FREQ
REAL
Measured frequency
Settings
SAPTOF (81H) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
PUFrequency
35.00 - 90.00
Hz
0.01
51.20
tDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Table 345:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
10.2.6
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 346:
Name
10.2.7
Unit
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VLevel
REAL
kV
FREQ
REAL
Hz
Measured frequency
Operation principle
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is used to detect high power system frequency.
SAPTOF (81) has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP
signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement at
low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the
preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the
preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
673
Section 10
Frequency protection
10.2.7.1
Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured continuously,
and compared with the set value, PUFrequency. Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)
is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the
setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is discussed in the
Basic IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter
VBase, SAPTOF (81) is blocked and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage
settings are made in percent of the VBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in
kV. To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
10.2.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is a settable definite time
delay, specified by the setting tDelay.
TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay, tReset. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured
frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user
defined reset time, tReset, the PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has
elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must
be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis
area.
The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus minimum
trip time of the pickup function (80 - 90 ms).
10.2.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) partially or completely, by
binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:
BLKTRIP:
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked.
674
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 10
Frequency protection
10.2.7.4
Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. The time
integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design of overfrequency protection
SAPTOF (81) is schematically described in figure 315.
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLOCK
Comparator
V < IntBlockLevel
Voltage
Time integrator
Definite Time Delay
Frequency
Comparator
f > PuFrequency
BLKDMAGN
OR
PICKUP
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
en05000735_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000735 V1 EN
Figure 315:
10.2.8
Technical data
Table 347:
Function
Trip value, pickup function at
symmetrical three-phase voltage
Trip time, pickup at fset -0.02 Hz to
fset +0.02 Hz
Range or value
Accuracy
(35.00-90.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
fn = 50Hz
Min. = 80 ms
Max. = 95 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Min. = 65 ms
Max. = 80 ms
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
675
Section 10
Frequency protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
(0.000-60.000)s
0.2% 100 ms
whichever is greater
(0.000-60.000)s
10.3
10.3.1
Identification
Function description
Rate-of-change frequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
SAPFRC
df/dt >
<
SYMBOL-N V1 EN
10.3.2
Functionality
The rate-of-change frequency protection function SAPFRC (81) gives an early indication
of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC (81) measures frequency with high
accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and remedial action
schemes. SAPFRC (81) can discriminate between a positive or negative change of
frequency. A definite time delay is provided for trip.
SAPFRC (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on
positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phaseneutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs,
refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting guidelines.
676
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 10
Frequency protection
10.3.3
Function block
SAPFRC (81)
V3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
PICKUP
BLKTRIP
RESTORE
BLKREST
BLKDMAGN
ANSI06000281-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000281 V2 EN
Figure 316:
10.3.4
Signals
Table 348:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
BLKREST
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 350:
Name
Description
V3P
Table 349:
10.3.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
RESTORE
BOOLEAN
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
Settings
SAPFRC (81R) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
PUFreqGrad
-10.00 - 10.00
Hz/s
0.01
0.50
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
Hz
0.01
49.90
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
677
Section 10
Frequency protection
10.3.6
Monitored data
Table 351:
Name
Type
STARTDUR
10.3.7
REAL
Values (Range)
-
Unit
%
Description
Start duration in percents of
the total operation time
Operation principle
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes at an early stage. SAPFRC (81) has a settable definite time delay. If the
rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-change, for
a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-ofchange of frequency remains above the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time
period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip
due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude a voltage controlled
blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing function. If the voltage is
lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function the function is blocked
and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency
decrease, a restore signal is issued.
10.3.7.1
Measurement principle
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured
continuously, and compared with the set value, PUFreqGrad. Rate-of-change frequency
protection SAPFRC (81) is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage
magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing function,
which is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter, SAPFRC (81) is blocked,
and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting PUFreqGrad, controls if
SAPFRC (81) reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If SAPFRC (81)
is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting PUFreqGrad has been given a negative
value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE
output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A
positive setting of PUFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC (81) to PICKUP and TRIP for frequency
increases.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
10.3.7.2
Time delay
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) has a settable definite time delay,
tTrip. .
678
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 10
Frequency protection
Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues for
at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user
defined reset time, tReset, the PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has
elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back
into the hysteresis area.
The RESTORE output of SAPFRC (81) is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of
tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the
restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality is
only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if a new
negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by the settings
RestoreFreq and tRestore.
10.3.7.3
Blocking
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) can be partially or totally blocked, by
binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:
BLKTRIP:
BLKREST:
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function, both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked.
10.3.7.4
Design
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) measuring element continuously
measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting
PUFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system
switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time. When the
frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued
after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued. The sign of the
setting PUFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or
lowering frequency conditions. The design of SAPFRC (81) is schematically described in
figure 317.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
679
Section 10
Frequency protection
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKRESET
Voltage
Rate-of-Change
of Frequency
OR
BLOCK
BLKDMAGN
Comparator
V < IntBlockLevel
Comparator
If
[PickupFreqGrad<0
PICKUP
AND
df/dt < PickupFreqGrad]
OR
[PickupFreqGrad>0
AND
df/dt > PickupFreqGrad]
Then
PICKUP
Time integrator
Definite Time Delay
TimeDlyOperate
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
100 ms
Frequency
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq
TimeDlyRestore
RESTORE
en05000835_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000835 V1 EN
Figure 317:
10.3.8
Technical data
Table 352:
Function
680
Range or value
Accuracy
(-10.00-10.00) Hz/s
10.0 mHz/s
(45.00-65.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.200-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 10
Frequency protection
10.4
10.4.1
Identification
Function description
Frequency time accumulation protection
10.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
FTAQFVR
IEC 60617
identification
f<>
ANSI/
IEEEidentification
81A
Functionality
Frequency time accumulation protection FTAQFVR (81A) is based on measured system
frequency and time counters. FTAQFVR (81A) for generator protection provides the
BFI_3P output for a particular settable frequency limit, when the system frequency falls
in that settable frequency band limit and positive sequence voltage within settable voltage
band limit. The BFI_3P signal triggers the individual event timer, which is the continuous
time spent within the given frequency band, and the accumulation timer, which is the
cumulative time spent within the given frequency band. Once the timers reach their limit,
an alarm or trip signal is activated to protect the turbine against the abnormal frequency
operation. This function is blocked during generator start-up or shut down conditions by
monitoring the circuit breaker position and current threshold value. The function is also
blocked when the system positive sequence voltage magnitude deviates from the given
voltage band limit which can be enabled by EnaVoltCheck setting.
It is possible to create functionality with more than one frequency band limit by using
multiple instances of the function. This can be achieved by a proper configuration based
on the turbine manufacturer specification.
10.4.3
Function block
FTAQFVR (81A)
I3P*
ERROR
V3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
TRIPACC
CBCLOSE
TRIPCONT
CBOPEN
BFI_3P
LOADINIT
ACCALARM
HOLDACC
STRORHLD
RESETACC
FREQOK
VOLTOK
ANSI14000049-1-en.vsd
ANSI14000023 V1 EN
Figure 318:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
681
Section 10
Frequency protection
10.4.4
Signals
Table 353:
Name
Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
CBCLOSE
BOOLEAN
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
LOADINIT
BOOLEAN
HOLDACC
BOOLEAN
RESETACC
BOOLEAN
Table 354:
Name
682
Description
ERROR
BOOLEAN
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIPACC
BOOLEAN
TRIPCONT
BOOLEAN
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
ACCALARM
BOOLEAN
STRORHLD
BOOLEAN
FREQOK
BOOLEAN
VOLTOK
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 10
Frequency protection
10.4.5
Table 355:
Settings
FTAQFVR (81A) Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tContinuous
0.0 - 6000.0
0.1
20.0
tAccLimit
10.0 - 90000.0
0.1
600.0
FreqHighLimit
35.00 - 90.00
Hz
0.01
47.50
FreqLowLimit
30.00 - 85.00
Hz
0.01
47.00
CBCheck
Disable
Enable
Enable
PickupCurrentLevel
5.0 - 100.0
%IB
0.1
10.0
EnaVoltCheck
Disable
Enable
Enable
VHighLimit
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
1.0
200.0
VLowLimit
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
1.0
0.0
Table 356:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
initTimeAcc
0.000 - 90000.000
0.001
0.0
10.4.6
Monitored data
Table 357:
Name
10.4.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
FREQ
REAL
Hz
ACCTIME
REAL
LASTEVTD
REAL
Operation principle
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
683
Section 10
Frequency protection
Frequency time accumulation protection function FTAQFVR (81A) is used to protect the
turbine against an abnormal frequency operation. During the startup and shutdown of the
turbine-generator set, FTAQFVR (81A) is blocked to avoid unnecessary accumulation of
time or tripping of generator. FTAQFVR (81A) is also blocked when the system positivesequence voltage magnitude deviates from the given voltage band limit, which can be
enabled with the EnaVoltCheck setting. The overall logic of FTAQFVR (81A) is
explained in Figure319.
The frequency of the measured input voltage is monitored continuously and compared to
the set frequency band limits FreqHighLimit and FreqLowLimit. When the measured
system frequency is above the FreqLowLimit setting and below the FreqHighLimit
setting, the FREQOK and PICKUP signals are activated. The BFI_3P signal is controlled
by the measured current and voltage input magnitude and the status of the circuit breaker
position.
FTAQFVR (81A) function will block BFI_3P signal activation and Accumulation of
time under two following conditions even if the system frequency falls within set band
limits.
When the generator is not synchronized as indicated by the CBOPEN signal input:
Generator currents are considered to detect whether the generator is supplying its unit
auxiliary supply transformers or not. FTAQFVR (81A) function will be blocked
when the measured current magnitude drops below the setting PickupCurrentLevel
and CBOPEN input is high. FTAQFVR (81A) remains blocked until the generator
returns to the operation condition. It can be verified by using the CBCLOSE signal.
Generator's start and stop detection logics for the BFI_3P output can be ignored by
disabling the CBCheck setting.
When the positive-sequence voltage of the measured input voltage is outside the band
limit.
The BFI_3P output will be blocked if the EnaVoltCheck setting is enabled and the
system positive sequence voltage is not within the voltage band limits.
Voltage band limit check will be ignored for the BFI_3P output if the EnaVoltCheck
setting is disabled. The voltage band limits are set with the settings VHighLimit and
VLowLimit.
The output VOLTOK is activated only if the system positive-sequence voltage falls
within the voltage band limits and the EnaVoltCheck setting is enabled.
To avoid oscillations of the BFI_3P output signal, a hysteresis has been added with
current input comparison and voltage input comparison. It is also possible to block
FTAQFVR (81A) completely by activating the binary input BLOCK and its function is to
reset all the binary outputs of FTAQFVR (81A) and freeze the accumulation time.
Time counters
FTAQFVR (81A) uses two time counters.
684
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 10
Frequency protection
1.
2.
Individual event time: The individual event time counter registers the time passing if
the system frequency falls within the frequency band limits each time. It resets when
the frequency comes out of the frequency band limits and also when the BLOCK
binary input is activated and start from zero when a new start is activated.
Accumulation time: The accumulation time counter registers the time passing
whenever the BFI_3P output is activated. It holds the registered time value even
when the BFI_3P signal is deactivated and continues from the registered value when
the BFI_3P signal is reactivated.
The registration of accumulation time is frozen at its present value when the input
HOLDACC or BLOCK is activated. The accumulation time can be set to the initTimeAcc
parameter value by activating the LOADINT input with the LHMI and it can be reset to
zero by activating the RESETACC input. The RESETACC input can be activated by a
binary input. The accumulated time ACCTIME is provided as a service output.
The last completed individual event time is updated in the LASTEVTD output. This output
holds the last completed individual event time until the next event to complete.
Trip logic
The individual event and accumulation timer values are compared to the tCont and
tAcclLimit settings respectively. If these counter values exceed their limit values,
TRIPCONT and ACCALARM outputs will be activated. The TRIPACC output is activated
if both the ACCALARM and BFI_3P signals are activated. A common TRIP signal is
generated when either TRIPCONT or TRIPACC is activated.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
685
Section 10
Frequency protection
Comparator
If
FreqHighLimit <=
FreqLowLimit
Then
ERROR
ERROR
FREQ
FREQ
V3P
Comparator
If
f <= FreqHighLimit
AND
f > FreqLowLimit
Then
PICKUP
FREQOK
FREQOK
VOLTOK
VOLTOK
BFI_3P
Comparator
V01 <= VHighLimit
AND
V01 >= VLowLimit
I3P
Comparator
I < PickupCurrentLevel
CBOPEN
CBCLOSE
LOADINIT
PICKUP
Signal Routing
Based on
Generator
Start or Stop
Detection Logic
and
Voltage Band Limit
Check Logic
PICKUP
Accumulation time
counter
TRIPACC
Continuous time
counter
TRIPCONT
AND
Pickup & Trip
Output Logic
TRIP
ACCALARM
STRORHLD
RESETACC
ACCTIME
HOLDTIME
LASTEVTD
BLOCK
ANSI12000609-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000609 V1 EN
Figure 319:
Logical diagram
To achieve a proper operation, the set frequency high limit should be more than the set
frequency low limit. To avoid malfunction, a check is performed that FreqHighLimit is
greater than FreqLowLimit. If not, the ERROR signal is activated.
FTAQFVR (81A) can be instantiated with one or more frequency ranges according to the
turbine manufacturer's specification. When the frequency falls in to the common zone
when two frequency ranges overlap it is necessary to block one instance and keep only one
instance of FTAQFVR (81A) active. The STRORHLD output is activated when either the
BFI_3P output is active or when the HOLDACC input signal is on. The STRORHLD output
is connected to the input HOLDACC of the other instance of FTAQFVR (81A).
686
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 10
Frequency protection
Table 358:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(35.00 90.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
(30.00 85.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
(0.0 6000.0) s
(10.0 90000.0) s
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
687
688
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
11.1
11.1.1
Identification
Function description
General current and voltage protection
11.1.2
IEC 61850
identification
CVGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
2(I>/U<)
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The protection module is recommended as a general backup protection with many
possible application areas due to its flexible measuring and setting facilities.
The built-in overcurrent protection feature has two settable current pickups. Both of them
can be used either with definite time or inverse time characteristic. The overcurrent
protection steps can be made directional with selectable voltage polarizing quantity.
Additionally they can be voltage and/or current controlled/restrained. 2nd harmonic
restraining facility is available as well. At too low polarizing voltage the overcurrent
feature can be either blocked, made non directional or ordered to use voltage memory in
accordance with a parameter setting.
Additionally two overvoltage and two undervoltage steps, either with definite time or
inverse time characteristic, are available within each function.
The general function suits applications with underimpedance and voltage controlled
overcurrent solutions. The general function can also be utilized for generator transformer
protection applications where positive, negative or zero sequence components of current
and voltage quantities are typically required.
Additionally, generator applications such as loss of field, inadvertent energizing, stator or
rotor overload, circuit breaker head flash-over and open phase detection are just a few of
possible protection arrangements with these functions.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
689
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
11.1.2.1
11.1.3
Function block
CVGAPC
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKOC1
BLKOC1TR
ENMLTOC1
BLKOC2
BLKOC2TR
ENMLTOC2
BLKUC1
BLKUC1TR
BLKUC2
BLKUC2TR
BLKOV1
BLKOV1TR
BLKOV2
BLKOV2TR
BLKUV1
BLKUV1TR
BLKUV2
BLKUV2TR
TRIP
TROC1
TROC2
TRUC1
TRUC2
TROV1
TROV2
TRUV1
TRUV2
PICKUP
PU_OC1
PU_OC2
PU_UC1
PU_UC2
PU_OV1
PU_OV2
PU_UV1
PU_UV2
BLK2ND
DIROC1
DIROC2
VDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
VIANGLE
ANSI05000372-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000372 V2 EN
Figure 320:
690
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
11.1.4
Signals
Table 359:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKOC1
BOOLEAN
BLKOC1TR
BOOLEAN
ENMLTOC1
BOOLEAN
BLKOC2
BOOLEAN
BLKOC2TR
BOOLEAN
ENMLTOC2
BOOLEAN
BLKUC1
BOOLEAN
BLKUC1TR
BOOLEAN
BLKUC2
BOOLEAN
BLKUC2TR
BOOLEAN
BLKOV1
BOOLEAN
BLKOV1TR
BOOLEAN
BLKOV2
BOOLEAN
BLKOV2TR
BOOLEAN
BLKUV1
BOOLEAN
BLKUV1TR
BOOLEAN
BLKUV2
BOOLEAN
BLKUV2TR
BOOLEAN
Table 360:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TROC1
BOOLEAN
TROC2
BOOLEAN
TRUC1
BOOLEAN
TRUC2
BOOLEAN
TROV1
BOOLEAN
TROV2
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
691
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Name
692
Type
Description
TRUV1
BOOLEAN
TRUV2
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_OC1
BOOLEAN
PU_OC2
BOOLEAN
PU_UC1
BOOLEAN
PU_UC2
BOOLEAN
PU_OV1
BOOLEAN
PU_OV2
BOOLEAN
PU_UV1
BOOLEAN
PU_UV2
BOOLEAN
BLK2ND
BOOLEAN
DIROC1
INTEGER
DIROC2
INTEGER
VDIRLOW
BOOLEAN
CURRENT
REAL
ICOSFI
REAL
VOLTAGE
REAL
VIANGLE
REAL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
11.1.5
Table 361:
Name
Settings
CVGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
CurrentInput
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
Phase AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
MaxPh
VoltageInput
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
Phase AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
MaxPh
OperHarmRestr
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
l_2nd/l_fund
10.0 - 50.0
1.0
20.0
BlkLevel2nd
10 - 5000
%IB
5000
EnRestrainCurr
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
RestrCurrInput
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
Max
PosSeq
RestrCurrCoeff
0.00 - 5.00
0.01
0.00
RCADir
-180 - 180
Deg
-75
ROADir
1 - 90
Deg
75
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
693
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
LowVolt_VM
0.0 - 5.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
Operation_OC1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PickupCurr_OC1
2.0 - 5000.0
%IB
1.0
120.0
CurveType_OC1
tDef_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
TD_OC1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30
IMin1
1 - 10000
%IB
100
tMin_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
VCntrlMode_OC1
Voltage control
Disabled
Disabled
VDepMode_OC1
Step
Slope
Step
VDepFact_OC1
0.02 - 5.00
0.01
1.00
VLowLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
VHighLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
100.0
HarmRestr_OC1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DirMode_OC1
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
DirPrinc_OC1
I&V
IcosPhi&V
I&V
ActLowVolt1_VM
Non-directional
Block
Memory
Non-directional
694
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation_OC2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PickupCurr_OC2
2.0 - 5000.0
%IB
1.0
120.0
CurveType_OC2
tDef_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
TD_OC2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30
IMin2
1 - 10000
%IB
50
tMin_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
VCntrlMode_OC2
Voltage control
Disabled
Disabled
VDepMode_OC2
Step
Slope
Step
VDepFact_OC2
0.02 - 5.00
0.01
1.00
VLowLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
VHighLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
100.0
HarmRestr_OC2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DirMode_OC2
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
DirPrinc_OC2
I&V
IcosPhi&V
I&V
ActLowVolt2_VM
Non-directional
Block
Memory
Non-directional
Operation_UC1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
695
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EnBlkLowI_UC1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
BlkLowCurr_UC1
0 - 150
%IB
20
PickupCurr_UC1
2.0 - 150.0
%IB
1.0
70.0
tDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
tResetDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
HarmRestr_UC1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation_UC2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
EnBlkLowI_UC2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
BlkLowCurr_UC2
0 - 150
%IB
20
PickupCurr_UC2
2.0 - 150.0
%IB
1.0
70.0
tDef_UC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
HarmRestr_UC2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation_OV1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PickupVolt_OV1
2.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
CurveType_OV1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
tDef_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
tMin_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
TD_OV1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30
Operation_OV2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PickupVolt_OV2
2.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
CurveType_OV2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
tDef_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
tMin_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
TD_OV2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30
Operation_UV1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PickupVolt_UV1
2.0 - 150.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
CurveType_UV1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
tDef_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
tMin_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
TD_UV1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30
EnBlkLowV_UV1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
BlkLowVolt_UV1
0.0 - 5.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
Operation_UV2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PickupVolt_UV2
2.0 - 150.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
CurveType_UV2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
tDef_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
tMin_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
TD_UV2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30
EnBlkLowV_UV2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
BlkLowVolt_UV2
0.0 - 5.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Description
697
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Table 362:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MultPU_OC1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
ResCrvType_OC1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
P_OC1
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020
A_OC1
0.000 - 999.000
0.001
0.140
B_OC1
0.000 - 99.000
0.001
0.000
C_OC1
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
PR_OC1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
TR_OC1
0.005 - 600.000
0.001
13.500
CR_OC1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
MultPU_OC2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
ResCrvType_OC2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
P_OC2
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020
A_OC2
0.000 - 999.000
0.001
0.140
B_OC2
0.000 - 99.000
0.001
0.000
C_OC2
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
PR_OC2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
TR_OC2
0.005 - 600.000
0.001
13.500
CR_OC2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
tResetDef_UC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ResCrvType_OV1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
tResetIDMT_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_OV1
0.005 - 999.000
0.001
0.140
B_OV1
0.500 - 99.000
0.001
1.000
C_OV1
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
D_OV1
0.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
P_OV1
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020
ResCrvType_OV2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
tResetDef_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
tResetIDMT_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_OV2
0.005 - 999.000
0.001
0.140
B_OV2
0.500 - 99.000
0.001
1.000
C_OV2
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
D_OV2
0.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
P_OV2
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020
ResCrvType_UV1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
tResetDef_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
tResetIDMT_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_UV1
0.005 - 999.000
0.001
0.140
B_UV1
0.500 - 99.000
0.001
1.000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
699
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
C_UV1
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
D_UV1
0.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
P_UV1
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020
ResCrvType_UV2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
tResetDef_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
tResetIDMT_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
A_UV2
0.005 - 999.000
0.001
0.140
B_UV2
0.500 - 99.000
0.001
1.000
C_UV2
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
D_UV2
0.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
P_UV2
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020
Table 363:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
11.1.6
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 364:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
DIROC1
INTEGER
1=Forward
0=Nondirectional
2=Reverse
DIROC2
INTEGER
1=Forward
0=Nondirectional
2=Reverse
CURRENT
REAL
700
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
ICOSFI
REAL
VOLTAGE
REAL
kV
VIANGLE
REAL
deg
11.1.7
Operation principle
11.1.7.1
CurrentInput
Comment
PhaseA
PhaseB
PhaseC
PosSeq
NegSeq
3ZeroSeq
MaxPh
CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude
MinPh
CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude
UnbalancePh
10
PhaseA-PhaseB
CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase A current phasor and phase B current
phasor (IA-IB)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
701
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
CurrentInput
Comment
11
PhaseB-PhaseC
CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase B current phasor and phase C current
phasor (IB-IC)
12
PhaseC-PhaseA
CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase C current phasor and phase A current
phasor ( IC-IA)
13
MaxPh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14
MinPh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15
UnbalancePh-Ph
The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 366:
Table 366:
VoltageInput
Comment
PhaseA
PhaseB
PhaseC
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3ZeroSeq
MaxPh
CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude
MinPh
CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude
UnbalancePh
10
PhaseA-PhaseB
CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase A voltage phasor and phase B voltage
phasor (VA-VB)
702
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
VoltageInput
Comment
11
PhaseB-PhaseC
CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase B voltage phasor and phase C voltage
phasor (VB-VC)
12
PhaseC-PhaseA
CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase C voltage phasor and phase A voltage
phasor ( VC-VA)
13
MaxPh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14
MinPh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15
UnbalancePh-Ph
It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 366 is always applicable
regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be
connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB & VC or three phaseto-phase voltages VAB, VBC & VCA). This information about actual VT connection is
entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take automatic
care about it.
The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 367 for built-in current
restraint feature:
Table 367:
11.1.7.2
Comment
PosSeq
NegSeq
3ZeroSeq
MaxPh
CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
703
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured
Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 365.
rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3
(1.732*Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as
shown in table 365.
11.1.7.3
rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 366.
rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 366.
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step pickup if the second-to-first harmonic
ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.
Directional feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent on the relevant phase
angle between measured current phasor (see table 365) and measured voltage phasor (see
table 366). In protection terminology it means that the General currrent and voltage
704
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
protection (CVGAPC) function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature.
In that case overcurrent protection step will only trip if the current flow is in accordance
with the set direction (Forward, which means towards the protected object, or Reverse,
which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost importance to
understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 366) and measured current phasor
(see table 365) will be used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility
of the end user to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper
directional decision. CVGAPC function will NOT do this automatically. It will simply use
the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional
criteria.
Table 368 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for
these two quantities from traditional directional relays.
Table 368:
Set value for the
parameter
CurrentInput
VoltageInput
Comment
PosSeq
PosSeq
NegSeq
-NegSeq
3ZeroSeq
-3ZeroSeq
Phase1
Phase2-Phase3
Phase2
Phase3-Phase1
Phase3
Phase1-Phase2
Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional feature
is enabled.
Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & V and IcosPhi&V. The
first principle, referred to as "I & V" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:
the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the relay
trip angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 321).
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
705
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
V=-3V0
RCADir
Ipickup
ROADir
I=3Io
Operate region
mta line
en05000252_anis.vsd
IEC05000252-ANIS V1 EN
Figure 321:
where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50
The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&V" in the parameter setting tool, checks
that:
706
that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the
Icos() straight line and the relay trip angle, ROADir parameter setting; see
figure 321).
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
V=-3V0
RCADir
Ipickup
ROADir
I=3Io
Operate region
mta line
en05000253_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000253 V1 EN
Figure 322:
where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50
Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature shall
behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre-set value.
User can select one of the following three options:
It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms. After
that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time
and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set
voltage memory limit.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
707
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
PickupCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * PickupCurr_OC1
VLowLimit_OC1
VHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000324 V1 EN
Figure 323:
PickupCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 *
PickupCurr_OC1
VHighLimit_OC1
ANSI05000323 V1 EN
Figure 324:
This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will as well
affect the pickup current value for calculation of trip times for IDMT curves (overcurrent
with IDMT curve will trip faster during low voltage conditions).
708
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
IMeasured
e
Op
te
ra
ea
ar
IsetHigh
eff
Co
r
t
es
I>R
tr
es
*Ir
ain
IsetLow
atan(RestrCoeff)
Restraint
en05000255.vsd
IEC05000255 V1 EN
Figure 325:
This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to pickup if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for calculation of
trip times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve trip time will not be
influenced by the restrain current magnitude.
When set, the pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user
setting.
11.1.7.4
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
709
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the setting.
11.1.7.5
11.1.7.6
11.1.7.7
710
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC
3IP
3VP
TROC1
TROV1
TRUV1
BLKOC1
ANSI10000028-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000028 V1 EN
Figure 326:
The setting of the general current and voltage function (typical values) is done as shown
in table 369.
Table 369:
Pickup in % of generator
rating
UndervoltagePickup
Maximum generator
Phase to Phase voltage
< 70%
10.0 s
Overvoltage Pickup
Maximum generator
Phase to Phase voltage
> 85%
1.0 s
OvercurrentPickup
Maximum generator
Phase current
> 50%
0.05 s
In normal operation the overvoltage trip signal is activated and the undervotage trip signal
is deactivated. This means that the overcurrent function is blocked.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
711
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
When the generator is taken out of service the generator voltage gets low. The overvoltage
trip signal will be deactivated and the undervoltage trip signal will be activated after the
set delay. At this moment the block signal to the overcurrent function will be deactivated.
It the generator is energized at stand still conditions, that is, when the voltage is zero, the
overcurrent function will operate after the short set delay if the generator current is larger
than the set value.
When the generator is started the overvoltage trip signal will be activated the set time
delay after the moment when the voltage has reached the set value. At this moment the
blocking of the overcurrent function is activated.
The delay of the undervoltage function will prevent false operation at short circuits in the
external power grid.
11.1.7.8
Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following figures.
IED
Phasors &
samples
Selected current
Selected voltage
Phasors &
samples
Phasor calculation of
individual currents
CVGAPC function
Phasor calculation of
individual voltages
52
A/D conversion
scaling with CT ratio
ADM
ANSI05000169_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000169 V2 EN
Figure 327:
712
Treatment of measured currents and voltages within IED for CVGAPC function
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Figure 327 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for multipurpose
protection function
The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function.
They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and kilovolts.
1.
2.
3.
Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase current
and one three-phase voltage input.
Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-phase
voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase
voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 365) for internally
measured current.
Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 366) for internally
measured voltage.
Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 367) for internally
measured restraint current.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
713
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
CURRENT
UC1
2
Selected current
TRUC1
nd
Harmonic
restraint
PU_UC2
UC2
nd
2 Harmonic
restraint
TRUC2
PU_OC1
OC1
2nd Harmonic
restraint
TROC1
OR
Current restraint
BLK2ND
DIROC1
Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint
PU_OC2
TROC2
OC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint
Directionality
OR
VDIRLOW
DIROC2
Voltage control /
restraint
PU_OV1
OV1
TROV1
PU_OV2
OV2
Selected voltage
TROV2
PU_UV1
UV1
TRUV1
PU_UV2
UV2
TRUV2
VOLTAGE
714
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
en05000170_ansi.vsd
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
ANSI05000170 V1 EN
Figure 328:
The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each
protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its PICKUP
and TRIP output signals.
More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following
four figures
Common PICKUP and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps
(internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.
2.
3.
Enable
second
harmonic
Second
harmonic check
DEF time
selected
a
b
AND
TROC1
OR
a>b
OC1=On
BLKOC1
BLKTROC1
0-DEF
0
Selected current
PickupCurr_OC1
NOT
PU_OC1
AND
Inverse
Voltage
control or
restraint
feature
Selected voltage
Directionality
check
DIR_OK
Inverse
time
selected
Current
Restraint
Feature
Imeasured > k Irestraint
en05000831_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000831 V1 EN
Figure 329:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the same
internal logic)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
715
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Selected current
b>a
AND
PickupCurr_UC1
TRUC1
AND
0-DEF
0
Operation_UC1=On
PU_UC1
en05000750_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000750 V1 EN
Figure 330:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has the same
internal logic)
DEF time
selected
0
Selected voltage
a
b
PickupVolt_OV1
BLKTROV1
0-DEF
AND
TROV1
OR
a>b
PU_OV1
AND
Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
BLKOV1
Inverse time
selected
en05000751_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000751 V1 EN
Figure 331:
716
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same internal
logic)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
DEF time
selected
0
Selected voltage
BLKTRUV1
0-DEF
AND
TRUV1
OR
b>a
PU_UV1
AND
PickupVolt_UV1
Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
selected
BLKUV1
en05000752_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000752 V1 EN
Figure 332:
11.1.8
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same internal
logic)
Technical data
Table 370:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(2 - 5000)% of IBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
(2 - 150)% of IBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
Overcurrent (nondirectional):
Table continues on next page
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
717
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
16 curve types
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
0.5% of Vn
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Undercurrent:
Overcurrent:
Inverse time
characteristics, see table
977, 978 and table 979
Overcurrent:
Overvoltage:
Undervoltage:
Overvoltage:
Table continues on next page
718
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 11
Multipurpose protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
4 curve types
Inverse time
characteristics, see table
989
3 curve types
1.0% of Vn at V Vn
1.0% of V at V > Vn
Directional function
2.0 degrees
(1 to 90) degrees
2.0 degrees
> 95%
< 105%
> 95%
< 105%
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically
10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
15 ms typically
15 ms typically
15 ms typically
Inverse time
characteristics, see table
988
Undervoltage:
Overcurrent:
Undercurrent:
Overvoltage:
Undervoltage:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
719
720
Section 12
System protection and control
Section 12
12.1
12.1.1
Identification
12.1.2
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Multipurpose filter
SMAIHPAC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The multi-purpose filter function block, SMAIHPAC, is arranged as a three-phase filter.
It has very much the same user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as the standard preprocessing function block SMAI. However the main difference is that it can be used to
extract any frequency component from the input signal. Thus it can, for example, be used
to build sub-synchronous resonance protection for synchronous generator.
12.1.3
Function block
SMAIHPAC
BLOCK
G3P*
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
IEC13000180-1-en.vsd
IEC13000180 V1 EN
12.1.4
Signals
Table 371:
Name
Default
Description
G3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
721
Section 12
System protection and control
Table 372:
Name
12.1.5
Table 373:
Name
Type
Description
AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
Analog input 1
AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
Analog input 2
AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
Analog input 3
AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
Analog input 4
Settings
SMAIHPAC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ConnectionType
Ph - Ph
Ph - N
Ph - N
SetFrequency
2.0 - 500.0
Hz
0.1
50.0
FreqBandWidth
0.0 - 60.0
Hz
0.1
0.0
FilterLength
0.1 s
0.2 s
0.5 s
1.0 s
2.0 s
4.0 s
1.0 s
OverLap
0 - 95
20
12.1.6
Operation principle
For all four analogue input signals into this filter (i.e. three phases and the residual
quantity) the input samples from the TRM module which are coming at rate of 20 samples
per fundamental system cycle are first stored. When enough samples are available in the
internal memory, the phasor values at set frequency defined by the setting parameter
SetFrequency are calculated. The following values are internally available for each of the
calculated phasors:
Magnitude
Phase angle
Exact frequency of the extracted signal
Note that the special filtering algorithm is used to extract these phasors. This algorithm is
different from the standard one-cycle Digital Fourier Filter typically used by the
722
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 12
System protection and control
numerical IEDs. This filter provides extremely good accuracy of measurement and
excellent noise rejection, but at the same time it has much slower response time. It is
capable to extract phasor (i.e. magnitude, phase angle and actual frequency) of any signal
(e.g. 37,2Hz) present in the waveforms of the connected CTs and/or VTs. The magnitude
and the phase angle of this phasor are calculated with very high precision. For example the
magnitude and phase angle of the phasor can be estimated even if it has magnitude of one
per mille (i.e. 1 ) in comparison to the dominating signal (e.g. the fundamental
frequency component). Several instances of this function block are provided. These
instances are fully synchronized between each-other in respect of phase angle calculation.
Thus if two multi-purpose filters are used for some application, one for current and the
second one for the voltage signals, the power values (i.e. P & Q) at the set frequency can
be calculated from them by the over-/under-power function or CVMMXN measurement
function block.
In addition to these phasors the following quantities are internally calculated as well:
In order to properly calculate phase-to-phase phasors from the individual phase phasors or
vice versa, the setting parameters ConnectionType is provided. It defines what quantities
(i.e. individual phases or phase-to-phase quantities) are physically connected to the IED
analogue inputs by wiring. Then the IED knows which one of them are the measured
quantities and the other one is then internally calculated. This setting is only important for
the VT inputs, because the CTs are typically wye connected all the time.
Thus when this filter is used in conjunction with multi-purpose protection function or
overcurrent function or over-voltage function or over-power function many different
protection applications can be arranged. For example the following protection,
monitoring or measurement features can be realized:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
723
Section 12
System protection and control
The filter output can also be connected to the measurement function blocks such as
CVMMXN (Measurements), CMMXU (Phase current measurement), VMMXU (Phasephase voltage measurement), etc.
The filter has as well additional capability to report the exact frequency of the extracted
signal. Thus the user can check the actual frequency of some phenomenon in the power
system (e.g. frequency of the sub-synchronous currents) and compare it with expected
value obtained previously by either calculation or simulation. For the whole three-phase
filter group the frequency of the signal connected to the first input (i.e. phase A) is
reported. This value can be then used either by over-/under-frequency protections or
reported to the built-in HMI or any other external client via the measurement blocks such
is the CVMMXN.
How many samples in the memory are used for the phasor calculation depends on the
setting parameter FilterLength. Table 374 gives overview of the used number of samples
for phasor calculation by the filter. Note that the used number of samples is always a power
of number two.
Table 374:
Corresponding length of
the input waveform in
miliseconds for 50Hz
power system
Corresponding length of
the input waveform in
miliseconds for 60Hz
power system
0.1 s
128 = 27
128 ms
107 ms
0.2 s
256 = 28
256 ms
213 ms
0.5 s
512 = 29
512 ms
427 ms
1.0 s
1024 =
210
1024 ms
853 ms
2.0 s
2048 = 211
2048 ms
1707 ms
4.0 s
4096 = 212
4096 ms
3413 ms
Note that the selected value for the parameter FilterLength automatically defines certain
filter properties as described below:
First in order to secure proper filter operation the selected length of the filter shall always
be longer than three complete periods of the signal which shall be extracted. Actually the
best results are obtained if at least five complete periods are available within the filtering
window. Thus, this filter feature will limit which filter lengths can be used to extract low
frequency signals. For example if 16,7 Hz signal shall be extracted the minimum filter
length in milliseconds shall be:
724
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 12
System protection and control
1000
16.7
= 180ms
(Equation 178)
EQUATION000028 V1 EN
Thus based on the data from Table 374 the minimum acceptable value for this parameter
would be FilterLength = 0.2 s but more accurate results will be obtained by using
FilterLength = 0.5 s
Second feature which is determined by the selected value for parameter FilterLength is the
capability of the filter to separate the desired signal from the other disturbing signals
which may have similar frequency value. Note that the filter output will be the phasor with
the highest magnitude within certain pass frequency band around the SetFrequency.
Table 375 defines the natural size of this pass frequency band for the filter, depending on
the selected value for parameter FilterLength.
Table 375:
0.1 s
22.5 Hz
27.0 Hz
0.2 s
11.5 Hz
14.0 Hz
0.5 s
6.0 Hz
7.2 Hz
1.0 s
3.0 Hz
3.6 Hz
2.0 s
1.5 Hz
1.8 Hz
4.0 s
0.8 Hz
1.0 Hz
Thus the longer length of the filter the better capability it has to reject the disturbing
signals close to the required frequency component and any other noise present in the input
signal waveform. For example if 46 Hz signal wants to be extracted in 50Hz power
system, then from Table 375 it can be concluded that FilterLength=1,0 s shall be
selected as a minimum value. However if frequency deviation of the fundamental
frequency signal in the power system are taken into account it may be advisable to select
FilterLength=2,0 s for such application.
Note that in case when no clear magnitude peak exist in the set pass frequency band the
filter will return zero values for the phasor magnitude and angle while the signal frequency
will have value minus one. Finally the set value for parameter FilterLength also defines
the response time of the filter after a step change of the measured signal. The filter will
correctly estimate the new signal magnitude once 75% of the filter length has been filed
with the new signal value (i.e. after the change).
If for any reason this natural frequency band shall be extended (e.g. to get accurate but
wider filter) it is possible to increase the pass band by entering the value different from
zero for parameter FreqBandWidth. In such case the total filter pass band can be defined
as:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
725
Section 12
System protection and control
12.1.7
when OverLap=0% the new phasor value is calculated only once per FilterLength
when OverLap=50% the new phasor value is calculated two times per FilterLength
when OverLap=75% the new phasor value is calculated four times per FilterLength
when OverLap=90% the new phasor value is calculated ten times per FilterLength
726
SetFrequency= 31.0 Hz
FilterLength= 1.0 s
OverLap = 75%
FreqBandWidth= 0.0 Hz
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 12
System protection and control
IEC13000178-2-en.vsd
IEC13000178 V3 EN
Figure 333:
The data shown in the Figure comes from the comtrade file captured by the IED. The
following traces are presented in this Figure.
a) Waveforms of the stator three-phase currents given in primary kA.
b) RMS value of the sub-synchronous resonance current extracted by the filter in primary
amperes.
c) Frequency of the extracted sub-synchronous resonance current provided by the filter in
Hz.
Note the very narrow scale on the y-axle for b) and c). Such small scale as well indicates
with which precision and consistency the filter calculates the phasor magnitude and
frequency of the extracted stator sub-synchronous current component.
The following can be observed in the Figure:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
727
Section 12
System protection and control
With above given settings the sub-synchronous current magnitude and frequency are
calculated approximately four times per second (that is, correct value is four times per
1024 ms).
728
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
Section 13
13.1
13.1.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
13.1.2
CCSSPVC
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87
Functionality
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many
protection functions such as differential, ground-fault current and negative-sequence
current functions.
Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC, 87) compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input
taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block
protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.
13.1.3
Function block
CCSSPVC (87)
I3P*
IREF*
BLOCK
FAIL
ALARM
ANSI13000304-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000304 V1 EN
Figure 334:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
729
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
13.1.4
Signals
Table 376:
Name
Type
IREF
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Name
Table 378:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 377:
13.1.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
FAIL
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Settings
CCSSPVC (87) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
IMinOp
10 - 200
%IB
20
Table 379:
Name
Pickup_Block
Table 380:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
730
Unit
%IB
Step
1
Default
150
Description
Block of the function at high phase current, in %
of IBase
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
13.1.6
Operation principle
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC (87) compares the absolute value of the vectorial
sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual current
|Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 335.
The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:
The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the
numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|.
The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set
trip value IMinOp.
No phase current has exceeded Pickup_Block during the last 10 ms.
CCSSPVC (87) is enabled by setting Operation = Enabled.
The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will be
issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-gate
resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current
supervision element(s) trip, for example, during a fault.
I>Pickup_Block
BLOCK
IA
IB
IC
I ref
IA
IB
IC
I ref
+
+
+
I>IMinOp
+
-
x
0,8
1,5 x Ir
OR
10 ms
OR
AND
FAIL
20 ms 100 ms
150 ms
OPERATION
1s
ALARM
BLOCK
en05000463_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000463 V1 EN
Figure 335:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
731
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
| I phase | - | I ref |
Slope = 1
Operation
area
Slope = 0.8
I MinOp
| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
IEC99000068 V1 EN
Figure 336:
Trip characteristics
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I phase
| + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.
13.1.7
Technical data
Table 381:
Function
13.2
732
Range or value
Trip current
(10-200)% of IBase
>90%
Block current
(20-500)% of IBase
Accuracy
10.0% of In at I In
10.0% of I at I > In
5.0% of In at I In
5.0% of I at I > In
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
13.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
13.2.2
FUFSPVC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function FUFSPVC is to block voltage measuring
functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED
in order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise might occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection methods,
negative sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional delta voltage and
delta current detection.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or
high-impedance grounded networks. It is based on the negative-sequence quantities.
The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance
grounded networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.
The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in order to
take into account the particular grounding of the network.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse
failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice
is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations.
13.2.3
Function block
FUFSPVC
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
52A
MCBOP
89B
BLKTRIP
BLKZ
BLKV
3PH
DLD1PH
DLD3PH
PU_DI
PU_DI_A
PU_DI_B
PU_DI_C
PU_DV
PU_DV_A
PU_DV_B
PU_DV_C
ANSI14000065-1-en.vsd
ANSI14000065 V1 EN
Figure 337:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
733
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
13.2.4
Signals
Table 382:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Current connection
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
52a
BOOLEAN
MCBOP
BOOLEAN
89b
BOOLEAN
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
Table 383:
Name
734
Description
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
BLKV
BOOLEAN
General pickup
3PH
BOOLEAN
Three-phase pickup
DLD1PH
BOOLEAN
DLD3PH
BOOLEAN
PU_DI
BOOLEAN
PU_DI_A
BOOLEAN
PU_DI_B
BOOLEAN
PU_DI_C
BOOLEAN
PU_DV
BOOLEAN
PU_DV_A
BOOLEAN
PU_DV_B
BOOLEAN
PU_DV_C
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
13.2.5
Table 384:
Name
Settings
FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
OpModeSel
Disabled
V2I2
V0I0
V0I0 OR V2I2
V0I0 AND V2I2
OptimZsNs
V0I0
3V0PU
1 - 100
%VB
30
3I0PU
1 - 100
%IB
10
3V2PU
1 - 100
%VB
30
3I2PU
1 - 100
%IB
10
OpDVDI
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DVPU
1 - 100
%VB
60
DIPU
1 - 100
%IB
15
VPPU
1 - 100
%VB
70
IPPU
1 - 100
%IB
10
SealIn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
VSealInPU
1 - 100
%VB
70
IDLDPU
1 - 100
%IB
VDLDPU
1 - 100
%VB
60
Table 385:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
735
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
13.2.6
Monitored data
Table 386:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
3I0
REAL
3I2
REAL
Magnitude of negative
sequence current
3V0
REAL
kV
3V2
REAL
kV
Magnitude of negative
sequence voltage
13.2.7
Operation principle
13.2.7.1
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3V0PU and 3I0PU,
3V2PU and 3I2PU.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zerosequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V0PU and the measured zero-sequence
current is below the set value 3I0PU.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V2PU and the measured negative sequence
current is below the set value 3I2PU.
A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence current
will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the two line ends.
736
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
Sequence Detection
3I0PU
IA
CurrZeroSeq
Zero
sequence
filter
IB
3I0
a
b
a>b
Negative
sequence
filter
IC
3I2
AND
a
b
3I2PU
CurrNegSeq
100 ms
0
a>b
100 ms
0
AND
3V0PU
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
FuseFailDetNegSeq
VoltZeroSeq
VA
Zero
sequence
filter
VB
Negative
sequence
filter
VC
a
b
3V0
a>b
VoltNegSeq
a
b
3V2
a>b
3V2PU
ANSI10000036-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000036 V2 EN
Figure 338:
The calculated values 3V0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3V2 are available as service values on local HMI
and monitoring tool in PCM600.
The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions.
Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.
The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the
protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
737
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
operation of the fuse failure is blocked; a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block for 100
ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of
the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might
operate.
The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The dead line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the
N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit.
The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKV and BLKZ in order to block all the
voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpModeSel
selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal
to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous
closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal 89b is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The 89b signal sets the output signal BLKV in
order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The
impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since
there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection. If
89b=0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the 89b=1 it signifies
that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKV is generated.
The output BLKV can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance
protection.
The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection function.
13.2.7.2
The internal FuseFailDetDVDI signal is activated if the following conditions are fulfilled:
738
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above VPPU for more than 1.5
cycles (i.e. 30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
The magnitude of DV in three phases are higher than the corresponding setting
DVPU
The magnitudes of DI in three phases are below the setting DI<
In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be
fulfilled in order to activate the internal FuseFailDetDVDI signal:
The magnitude of the phase currents in three phases are higher than the setting IPPU
The circuit breaker is closed (52A = True)
The first criterion means that detection of failure in three phases together with high current
for the three phases will set the output. The measured phase current is used to reduce the
risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop
in the system (not caused by fuse failure) may be followed by current change lower than
the setting DIPU, and therefore a false fuse failure might occur.
The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled at the same time as
circuit breaker is closed. If this is an important disadvantage, connect the 52A input to
FALSE , then only the first criterion can enable the delta function.If the DVDI detection
of three phases set the internal signal FuseFailDetDVDI at the level high, then the signal
FuseFailDetDVDI will remain high as long as the voltage of three phases are lower then
the setting VPPU.
In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaV and DeltaI are also
generated by the delta current and delta voltage DVDI detection algorithm. The internal
signals DelatV and DeltaI are activated when a sudden change of voltage, or respectively
current, is detected. The detection of the sudden change is based on a sample analysis
algorithm. In particular DelatV is activated if at least three consecutive voltage samples
are higher then the setting DVPU. In a similar way DelatI is activated if at least three
consecutive current samples are higher then the setting DIPU.When DeltaV or DeltaI are
active, the output signals PU_DV_A, PU_DV_B, PU_DV_C and respectively PU_DI_A,
PU_DI_B, PU_DI_C, based on a sudden change of voltage or current detection, are
activated with a 20 ms time off delay. The common pickup output signals PU_DV or
PU_DI are activated with a 60 ms time off delay, if any sudden change of voltage or
current is detected.
The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current
detection) is deactivated by setting the parameter OpDVDI to Disabled.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
739
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
DVDI Detection
DVDI detection Phase 1
IA
IB
IC
DIPU
VA
DVPU
a
b
VPPU
a>b
1.5 cycle
t
20 ms
t
DeltaIB
IA
IB
IC
VB
IA
IB
IC
VC
VA
50P
a
b
a<b
a>b
AND
AND
a
b
IB
a
b
a
b
IC
a
b
OR
OR
AND
a<b
a>b
AND
AND
VC
DeltaIC
DeltaVC
52A
VB
DeltaVB
IA
DeltaVA
OR
OR
AND
a<b
a>b
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
AND
FuseFailDetDVDI
ANSI12000166-3-en.vsd
ANSI12000166 V3 EN
Figure 339:
740
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
intBlock
AND
DeltaIA
DeltaIB
DeltaIC
0
20 ms
OR
0
20 ms
0
20 ms
AND
PU_DI_A
AND
PU_DI_B
AND
AND
DeltaVA
DeltaVB
DeltaVC
0
20 ms
OR
0
20 ms
PU_DI
AND
AND
0
20 ms
AND
PU_DI_C
PU_DV
PU_DV_A
PU_DV_B
PU_DV_B
ANSI12000165-2-en.vsd
ANSI12000165 V2 EN
Figure 340:
13.2.7.3
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
741
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
a
b
IB
a
b
IC
a
b
a<b
AllCurrLow
AND
a<b
a<b
IDLDPU
VA
DeadLineDet1Ph
a
b
VB
a
b
VC
a
b
a<b
a<b
AND
OR
DLD1PH
AND
AND
a<b
AND
AND
AND
DLD3PH
VDLDPU
intBlock
ANSI0000035-1-en.vsd
ANSI0000035 V1 EN
Figure 341:
13.2.7.4
Main logic
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 342. The fuse failure
supervision function (FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter
Operation to Enabled or Disabled.
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode
selector, OpModeSel, has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating
modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different operation
modes are:
742
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDVDI to Enabled. When
selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.
As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,
FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDVDI, and the specific functionality is released, the
function will activate the output signal BLKV. The output signal BLKZ will be activated
as well if the internal dead phase detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same
time. The output BLKV can be used for blocking voltage related measuring functions
(under voltage protection, energizing check, and so on). The output BLKZ shall be used
to block the impedance protection functions.
If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter
SealIn is set to Enabled it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltage is below
the set value VSealInPU. This will keep the BLKV and BLKZ signals activated as long as
any phase voltage is below the set value VSealInPU. If all three phase voltages drop below
the set value VSealInPU and the setting parameter SealIn is set to Enabled the output
signal 3PH will also be activated. The signals 3PH, BLKV and BLKZ signals will now be
active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value VSealInPU.
If SealIn is set to Enabled the fuse failure condition is stored in the non-volatile memory
in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power interruption or re-start due to
configuration change) it uses the stored value in its non-volatile memory and reestablishes the conditions that were present before the shut down. All phase voltages must
be greater than VSealInPU before fuse failure is de-activated and resets the signals BLKU,
BLKZ and 3PH.
The output signal BLKV will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the
setting VSealInPU for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has
been above the set value 3V0PU and 3V2PU for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents
are below the setting IDLDPU (criteria for open phase detection) and the circuit breaker
is closed (input 52a is activated).
If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary input to the
N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit.
The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKV and BLKZ in order to block all the
voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpModeSel
or OpDVDI. An additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP
signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non
simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal 89b is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The 89b signal sets the output signal BLKV in
order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The
impedance protection function does not have to be affected since there will be no line
currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
743
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
AND
BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK
intBlock
OR
BLKTRIP
20 ms
t
AND
100 ms
t
FusefailStarted
AND
AND
AND
SealIn = Enabled
3PH
AND
AND
OpDVDI = Enabled
OR
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
5s
t
AND
AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
V2I2
OR
V0I0
OR
V0I0 OR V2I2
OpModeSel
CurrZeroSeq
CurrNegSeq
AND
a>b
OR
AND
200 ms
t
DeadLineDet1Ph
AND
150 ms
t
MCBOP
60 s
t
VoltZeroSeq
VoltNegSeq
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
BLKZ
BLKV
AND
5s
t
AllCurrLow
52a
89b
ANSI10000033-3-en.vsd
ANSI10000033 V3 EN
744
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
Figure 342:
13.2.8
Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main logic
Technical data
Table 387:
FUFSPVCtechnical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1-100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(1100)% of IBase
0.5% of In
(1-100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(1100)% of IBase
0.5% of In
(1-100)% of VBase
10.0% of Vn
(1100)% of IBase
10.0% of In
(1-100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(1100)% of IBase
0.5% of In
(1-100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(1100)% of IBase
0.5% of In
Min. = 10 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
13.3
13.3.1
Identification
Function description
Fuse failure supervision
13.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
VDSPVC
IEC 60617
identification
VTS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
60
Functionality
Different protection functions within the protection IED operates on the basis of measured
voltage at the relay point. Some example of protection functions are:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
745
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits
between voltage instrument transformers and the IED. These unintentional operations can
be prevented by VDSPVC.
VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement circuit,
based on phase wise comparison of voltages of main and pilot fused circuits. VDSPVC
blocking output can be configured to block functions that need to be blocked in case of
faults in the voltage circuit.
13.3.3
Function block
VDSPVC (60)
V3P1*
V3P2*
BLOCK
MAINFUF
PILOTFUF
V1AFAIL
V1BFAIL
V1CFAIL
V2AFAIL
V2BFAIL
V2CFAIL
ANSI14000057-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000142 V2 EN
Figure 343:
13.3.4
Signals
Table 388:
Name
Default
Description
V3P1
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P2
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Table 389:
Name
Description
MAINFUF
BOOLEAN
PILOTFUF
BOOLEAN
V1AFAIL
BOOLEAN
746
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
Name
13.3.5
Table 390:
Name
Type
Description
V1BFAIL
BOOLEAN
V1CFAIL
BOOLEAN
V2AFAIL
BOOLEAN
V2BFAIL
BOOLEAN
V2CFAIL
BOOLEAN
Settings
VDSPVC (60) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
On
Disabled
10.0 - 80.0
%VB
0.1
20.0
10.0 - 80.0
%VB
0.1
30.0
SealIn
Disabled
On
On
VSealIn
0.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
70.0
Step
Default
Table 391:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Table 392:
Name
Unit
-
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ConTypeMain
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
ConTypePilot
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
747
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
13.3.6
Monitored data
Table 393:
Name
13.3.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VADIF_A
REAL
kV
VBDIF_A
REAL
kV
VCDIF_A
REAL
kV
VADIF_B
REAL
kV
VBDIF_B
REAL
kV
VCDIF_C
REAL
kV
Operation principle
VDSPVC requires six voltage inputs, which are the three phase voltages on main and pilot
fuse groups. The initial voltage difference between the two groups is theoretical zero in the
healthy condition. Any subsequent voltage difference will be due to a fuse failure.
If the main fuse voltage becomes smaller than the pilot fuse voltage (vMainA < vPilotA
or vMainB < vPilotB or vMainC < vPilotC) and the voltage difference exceeds the
operation level (Vdif Main block), a blocking signal will be initiated to indicate the main
fuse failure and block the voltage-dependent functions. In addition, the function also
indicates the phase in which the voltage reduction has occurred.
If the pilot fuse voltage becomes smaller than the main fuse voltage (vPilotA < vMainA
or vPilotB < vMainB or vPilotC < vMainC) and the voltage difference exceeds the
operation level (Vdif Pilot alarm), an alarm signal will be initiated to indicate the pilot fuse
failure and also the faulty phase where the voltage reduction occurred.
When SealIn is set to Enabled and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the
blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions are
restored above the VSealIn setting. Fuse failure outputs are deactivated when normal
voltage conditions are restored.
748
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
a
a<b
VSealIn
AND
OR
5s
t
0
SealIn=0
vPilotA
vMainA
V1AFAIL
MAX
OR
a>b
AND
OR
0
MIN
ABS
a>b
Vdif Pilot alarm
MAINFUF
AND
V2AFAIL
BLOCK
OR
vPilotB
PILOTFUF
V1BFAIL
vMainB
V2BFAIL
vPilotC
vMainC
V2CFAIL
V1CFAIL
ANSI12000144-3-en.vsd
ANSI12000144 V3 EN
Figure 344:
13.3.8
Technical data
Table 394:
technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(10.0-80.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Reset ratio
<110%
Min. = 5 ms
Min. = 15 ms
(10.0-80.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Reset ratio
<110%
Min. = 5 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Max. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
749
750
Section 14
Control
Section 14
Control
14.1
14.1.1
Identification
Function description
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and
synchronizing
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
25
SESRSYN
sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN
14.1.2
Functionality
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN (25) function checks that
the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one
side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.
SESRSYN (25) function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and
breaker-and-a-half or ring busbar arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can
have different settings.
For systems, which are running asynchronous, a synchronizing function is provided. The
main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of circuit
breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. The synchronizing
function evaluates voltage difference, phase angle difference, slip frequency and
frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled closing of the circuit breaker. Breaker
closing time is a parameter setting.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
751
Section 14
Control
However this function can not be used to automatically synchronize the generator to the
network.
14.1.3
Function block
SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1*
SYNOK
V3PB2*
AUTOSYOK
V3PL1*
AUTOENOK
V3PL2*
MANSYOK
BLOCK
MANENOK
BLKSYNCH
TSTSYNOK
BLKSC
TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG
TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP
TSTENOK
BUS1_CL
VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP
B1SEL
BUS2_CL
B2SEL
LINE1_OP
L1SEL
LINE1_CL
L2SEL
LINE2_OP
SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL
SYNFAIL
VB1OK
VOKSYN
VB1FF
VDIFFSYN
VB2OK
FRDIFSYN
VB2FF
FRDIFFOK
VL1OK
FRDERIVA
VL1FF
VOKSC
VL2OK
VDIFFSC
VL2FF
FRDIFFA
STARTSYN
PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH
FRDIFFM
TSTSC
PHDIFFM
TSTENERG
INADVCLS
AENMODE
VDIFFME
MENMODE
FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
VBUS
VLINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
ANSI14000060-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000046 V2 EN
Figure 345:
14.1.4
Signals
Table 395:
Name
Default
Description
V3PB1
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3PB2
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3PL1
GROUP
SIGNAL
752
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
V3PL2
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
General block
BLKSYNCH
BOOLEAN
Block synchronizing
BLKSC
BOOLEAN
BLKENERG
BOOLEAN
BUS1_OP
BOOLEAN
BUS1_CL
BOOLEAN
BUS2_OP
BOOLEAN
BUS2_CL
BOOLEAN
LINE1_OP
BOOLEAN
LINE1_CL
BOOLEAN
LINE2_OP
BOOLEAN
LINE2_CL
BOOLEAN
VB1OK
BOOLEAN
VB1FF
BOOLEAN
VB2OK
BOOLEAN
VB2FF
BOOLEAN
VL1OK
BOOLEAN
VL1FF
BOOLEAN
VL2OK
BOOLEAN
VL2FF
BOOLEAN
STARTSYN
BOOLEAN
Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH
BOOLEAN
TSTSC
BOOLEAN
TSTENERG
BOOLEAN
AENMODE
INTEGER
MENMODE
INTEGER
Table 396:
Name
Description
SYNOK
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK
BOOLEAN
Auto synchronism-check OK
AUTOENOK
BOOLEAN
MANSYOK
BOOLEAN
Manual synchronism-check OK
MANENOK
BOOLEAN
753
Section 14
Control
Name
754
Type
Description
TSTSYNOK
BOOLEAN
TSTAUTSY
BOOLEAN
TSTMANSY
BOOLEAN
TSTENOK
BOOLEAN
VSELFAIL
BOOLEAN
B1SEL
BOOLEAN
Bus1 selected
B2SEL
BOOLEAN
Bus2 selected
L1SEL
BOOLEAN
Line1 selected
L2SEL
BOOLEAN
Line2 selected
SYNPROGR
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing failed
VOKSYN
BOOLEAN
VDIFFSYN
BOOLEAN
FRDIFSYN
BOOLEAN
FRDIFFOK
BOOLEAN
FRDERIVA
BOOLEAN
VOKSC
BOOLEAN
VDIFFSC
BOOLEAN
FRDIFFA
BOOLEAN
PHDIFFA
BOOLEAN
FRDIFFM
BOOLEAN
PHDIFFM
BOOLEAN
INADVCLS
BOOLEAN
VDIFFME
REAL
FRDIFFME
REAL
PHDIFFME
REAL
VBUS
REAL
Bus voltage
VLINE
REAL
Line voltage
MODEAEN
INTEGER
MODEMEN
INTEGER
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.1.5
Table 397:
Name
Settings
SESRSYN (25) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
OperationSynch
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
VHighBusSynch
50.0 - 120.0
%UBB
1.0
80.0
VHighLineSynch
50.0 - 120.0
%UBL
1.0
80.0
VDiffSynch
0.02 - 0.50
pu
0.01
0.10
FreqDiffMin
0.003 - 0.250
Hz
0.001
0.010
FreqDiffMax
0.050 - 0.500
Hz
0.001
0.200
FreqRateChange
0.000 - 0.500
Hz/s
0.001
0.300
tBreaker
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.080
tClosePulse
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tMaxSynch
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
600.00
tMinSynch
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
OperationSC
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
VHighBusSC
50.0 - 120.0
%UBB
1.0
80.0
VHighLineSC
50.0 - 120.0
%UBL
1.0
80.0
VDiffSC
0.02 - 0.50
pu
0.01
0.15
FreqDiffA
0.003 - 1.000
Hz
0.001
0.010
FreqDiffM
0.003 - 1.000
Hz
0.001
0.010
PhaseDiffA
5.0 - 90.0
Deg
1.0
25.0
PhaseDiffM
5.0 - 90.0
Deg
1.0
25.0
tSCA
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
tSCM
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
755
Section 14
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AutoEnerg
Disabled
DLLB
DBLL
Both
DLLB
ManEnerg
Disabled
DLLB
DBLL
Both
Both
ManEnergDBDL
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
VLiveBusEnerg
50.0 - 120.0
%UBB
1.0
80.0
VLiveLineEnerg
50.0 - 120.0
%UBL
1.0
80.0
VDeadBusEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
%UBB
1.0
40.0
VDeadLineEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
%UBL
1.0
40.0
VMaxEnerg
50.0 - 180.0
%VB
1.0
115.0
tAutoEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
tManEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Table 398:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SelPhaseBus1
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phases AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
Positive sequence
Phase A
GblBaseSelBus
1 - 12
GblBaseSelLine
1 - 12
SelPhaseBus2
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phases AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
Positive sequence
Phase A
756
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SelPhaseLine1
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phases AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
Positive sequence
Phase A
SelPhaseLine2
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phases AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
Positive sequence
Phase A
CBConfig
No voltage sel.
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB
No voltage sel.
Select CB configuration
Table 399:
Name
PhaseShift
14.1.6
Unit
Step
Deg
Default
0
Description
Additional phase angle for selected line voltage
Monitored data
Table 400:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VDIFFME
REAL
Calculated difference of
voltage in p.u of set voltage
base value
FRDIFFME
REAL
Hz
Calculated difference of
frequency
PHDIFFME
REAL
deg
VBUS
REAL
kV
Bus voltage
VLINE
REAL
kV
Line voltage
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
757
Section 14
Control
14.1.7
Operation principle
14.1.7.1
Basic functionality
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.
The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to
both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual measured
quantities match the set conditions.
The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and also
determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker,
from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all measured conditions
are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed to give closure
at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the closing circuit.
For double bus single circuit breaker and breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangements,
the SESRSYN (25) function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage
selection. For double bus single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct
voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For breaker-and-a-half
circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of
the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.
The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the setting
parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For
application related information, please refer to the application manual.
14.1.7.2
Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN function
components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and Voltage
selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.
Synchronism check
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchronism check function for
evaluation. By setting the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings SelPhaseBus1,
SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation is made automatically
for the voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle difference caused if different
setting values are selected for both sides of the breaker. If needed an additional phase angle
adjustment can be done for selected line voltage with the PhaseShift setting.
758
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
When the function is set to OperationSC = Enabled, the measuring will start.
The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
VHighBusSC and VHighLineSC.
If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with the set
values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference: FreqDiffA,
FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and VDiffSC. If additional phase angle adjustment
is done with the PhaseShift setting, the adjustment factor is deducted from the line voltage
before the comparison of the phase angle values.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must
not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between
the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the set value
FreqDiff.
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and
used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN
(25) function and selective block of the Synchronism check function respectively. Input
TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to
a separate test output.
The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be
delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.
A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions.
VOKSC shows that the voltages are high, VDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA,
PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle
difference conditions are out of limits.
Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicates that the circuit breaker
has been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated, if the voltage
conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference between bus and line
is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to smaller than 5 degrees.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
759
Section 14
Control
AND
AND
TSTAUTSY
TSTSC
BLKSC
BLOCK
AND
OR
AND
tSCA
AND
VDiffSC
AND
VHighBusSC
AUTOSYOK
0-60 ms
0
50 ms
0
VOKSC
AND
VHighLineSC
VDIFFSC
FreqDiffA
PhaseDiffA
FRDIFFA
PHDIFFA
VDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue
PhDiff > 60
AND
0
32 ms
100 ms
INADVCLS
AND
PhDiff < 5
ANSI07000114-4-en.vsd
ANSI07000114 V4 EN
Figure 346:
Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch = Enabled the measuring will be performed.
The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values for
VHighBusSynch and VHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the voltages are both
live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the set value for
VDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both sides are higher than
the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable, the measured
values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency FreqDiffMax and
760
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency FreqRateChange and phase angle, which has to
be smaller than the internally preset value of 15 degrees.
Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency
will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be
sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle release
internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK output will be
activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function resets. The function will also reset if
the synchronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This
prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in operation for a long time, waiting
for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively. TSTSYNCH
will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate
output.
SYN1
OPERATION SYNCH=ON
TEST MODE=ON
STARTSYN
AND
BLKSYNCH
OR
AND
S
R
VDiffSynch
VHighBusSynch
AND
50 ms
t
SYNOK
AND
VHighLineSynch
SYNPROGR
OR
FreqDiffMax
AND
FreqDiffMin
OR
FreqRateChange
AND
TSTSYNOK
tClose
Pulse
fBus&fLine 5Hz
Phase Diff < 15 deg
tMax
Synch
AND
SYNFAIL
PhaseDiff=closing angle
FreqDiff
tBreaker
Close pulse
in advance
ANSI06000636-3-en.vsd
ANSI06000636 V3 EN
Figure 347:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
761
Section 14
Control
Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the
Synchronism check function.
The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live
or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values VLiveBusEnerg and
VDeadBusEnerg for bus energizing and VLiveLineEnerg and VDeadLineEnerg for line
energizing.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must
not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic
functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and
MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled.
The output signal can be delayed independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK
conditions. The Energizing direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE
respective MENMODE, which for example, can be connected to a Binary to Integer
function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall be 1=Off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both.
Not connected input will mean that the setting is done from Parameter Setting tool. The
active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are
0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN (25) function respective block of the Energizing check function. TSTENERG
will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate
test output.
762
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
manEnergOpenBays
MANENOK
OR
TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK
selectedFuseOK
VLiveBusEnerg
DLLB
AND
VDeadLineEnerg
OR
AND
OR
0 60 s
tManEnerg
0
AND
BOTH
ManEnerg
DBLL
VDeadBusEnerg
AND
VLiveLineEnerg
AND
ManEnergDBDL
AND
TSTENOK
VMaxEnerg
fBus and fLine 5 Hz
ANSI14000031-1-en.vsd
ANSI14000031 V1 EN
Figure 348:
Manual energizing
TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK
selectedFuseOK
VLiveBusEnerg
DLLB
AND
OR
VDeadLineEnerg
AND
OR
0 60 s
tAutoEnerg
0
AND
AUTOENOK
BOTH
AutoEnerg
VDeadBusEnerg
DBLL
AND
VLiveLineEnerg
VMaxEnerg
AND
TSTENOK
ANSI14000030-1-en.vsd
ANSI14000030 V1 EN
Figure 349:
Automatic energizing
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
763
Section 14
Control
BLKENERG
BLOCK
OR
AND
manEnergOpenBays
ManEnerg
1 bus CB
CBConfig
AND
B1QOPEN
LN1QOPEN
AND
OR
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
AND
LN2QOPEN
1 bus alt. CB
AND
B2QCLD
AND
OR
OR
AND
Tie CB
AND
AND
OR
AND
IEC14000032-1-en.vsd
IEC14000032 V1 EN
Figure 350:
Open bays
764
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformers for
the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN (25) function and determines
the voltages fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check functions.
This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and MCB
supervision.
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.
If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be V-Line1 and V-Bus1. This setting is also
used in the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for
the used inputs must also be connected.
The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are used for the
Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs.
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to
supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an inverter
for one of the positions.
If breaker or disconnector positions not are available for deciding if energizing is allowed,
it is considered to be allowed to manually energize. This is only allowed for manual
energizing in breaker-and-a-half and Tie breaker arrangements. Manual energization of a
completely open diameter in 1 1/2 CB switchgear is allowed by internal logic.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
765
Section 14
Control
BUS1_OP
BUS1_CL
BUS2_OP
BUS2_CL
B1SEL
AND
AND
B2SEL
NOT
AND
invalidSelection
busVoltage
bus1Voltage
bus2Voltage
VB1OK
VB1FF
OR
VB2OK
VB2FF
OR
VL1OK
VL1FF
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
VSELFAIL
BLOCK
en05000779_2_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000779 V2 EN
Figure 351:
Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage, which indicates
B1SEL.
The fuse supervision is connected to VL1OK-VL1FF, VL2OK-VL2FF and with
alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available from each fuse
(MCB).
The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and the
other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output combinations
are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a VT
failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal VSELFAIL is set. This output
signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip. This output as well as
the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function block diagram for
the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in figure 352 and for the tie circuit
breaker in figure 353.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
767
Section 14
Control
LINE1_OP
LINE1_CL
L1SEL
AND
BUS1_OP
BUS1_CL
L2SEL
AND
AND
LINE2_CL
AND
invalidSelection
AND
AND
BUS2_OP
BUS2_CL
B2SEL
OR
LINE2_OP
AND
lineVoltage
line1Voltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
VB1OK
VB1FF
VB2OK
VB2FF
OR
OR
OR
VL1OK
VL1FF
OR
VL2OK
VL2FF
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
VSELFAIL
AND
BLOCK
en05000780_2_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000780 V2 EN
Figure 352:
768
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a breaker-and-ahalf arrangement
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
LINE1_OP
LINE1_CL
L1SEL
AND
B1SEL
NOT
BUS1_OP
BUS1_CL
AND
AND
AND
line1Voltage
busVoltage
bus1Voltage
LINE2_OP
LINE2_CL
L2SEL
AND
B2SEL
NOT
BUS2_OP
BUS2_CL
AND
AND
AND
OR
invalidSelection
lineVoltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
VB1OK
VB1FF
OR
VB2OK
VB2FF
OR
AND
OR
VL1OK
VL1FF
OR
VL2OK
VL2FF
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
VSELFAIL
AND
BLOCK
en05000781_2_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000781 V2 EN
Figure 353:
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in breaker-and-ahalf arrangement.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
769
Section 14
Control
14.1.8
Technical data
Table 401:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
> 95%
(0.003-1.000) Hz
2.5 mHz
(5.0-90.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
(0.02-0.5) p.u
0.5% of Vn
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
(0.003-0.250) Hz
2.5 mHz
(0.050-0.500) Hz
2.5 mHz
(0.000-0.500) Hz/s
10.0 mHz/s
(0.050-60.000) s
0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000-6000.00) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
greater
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
> 95%
0.5% of Vn
< 105%
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
770
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.000-60.000) s
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 70 ms
Max. = 90 ms
14.2
Interlocking (3)
14.2.1
Functionality
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching
devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material
damage and/or accidental human injury.
Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements, each
handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each IED is not
dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs
communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.
The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the system
at any given time.
14.2.2
Operation principle
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED. The
function is distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication
between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.
The reservation function (see section "Functionality") is used to ensure that HV
apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises
between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication system,
reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking condition of the
intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is performed.
After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on the
status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
771
Section 14
Control
operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices
that may affect it.
The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay. The
interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the
switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or breaker-and-a-half bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard
interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking
signals can include the following kind of information:
The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown
in figure 354.
Interlocking
modules in
other bays
Interlocking
module
Apparatus control
modules
SCILO
SCSWI
SXSWI
Apparatus control
modules
SCILO
SCSWI
SXCBR
152
Apparatus control
modules
SCILO
SCSWI
SXSWI
en04000526_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000526 V1 EN
Figure 354:
Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:
772
Ungrounded busbars
Busbars connected together
Other bays connected to a busbar
Received data from other bays is valid
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Bay n
Bus coupler
...
..
WA1 ungrounded
WA1 ungrounded
WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1
WA2
189
289
189
289
289
189
189G
289G
152
152
152
989
989
en05000494_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000494 V1 EN
Figure 355:
When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input board error
are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for execution of the
function will not be given.
On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the interlocking
function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.
For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
773
Section 14
Control
The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific requirements, by
adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM600. The
inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions.
The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the
transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in TR
are intended for transfer to other bays.
14.2.3
14.2.3.1
Identification
Function description
Logical node for interlocking
14.2.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
SCILO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The Logical node for interlocking SCILO(3) function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO (3) function itself does not provide
774
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.2.3.3
Function block
SCILO (3)
POSOPEN
EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE
EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
ANSI05000359-1-en.vsd
ANSI05000359 V1 EN
Figure 356:
14.2.3.4
Signals
Table 402:
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
OPEN_EN
BOOLEAN
CLOSE_EN
BOOLEAN
Table 403:
Name
14.2.3.5
Default
POSOPEN
Type
Description
EN_OPEN
BOOLEAN
EN_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Logic diagram
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the
interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end
position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is
false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in
the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking function.
The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/
SXSWI) and the enable signals come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are
connected to the logical node Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching
device is needed.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
775
Section 14
Control
SCILO
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
XOR
NOT
EN_OPEN
AND
OR
AND
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
AND
EN_CLOSE
OR
AND
en04000525_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000525 V1 EN
Figure 357:
14.2.4
14.2.4.1
Identification
Function description
Interlocking for busbar grounding
switch
14.2.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
BB_ES
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for busbar grounding switch (BB_ES, 3) function is used for one busbar
grounding switch on any busbar parts according to figure 358.
89G
en04000504.vsd
ANSI04000504 V1 EN
Figure 358:
776
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.2.4.3
Function block
BB_ES (3)
89G_OP
89GREL
89G_CL
89GITL
BB_DC_OP
BBGSOPTR
VP_BB_DC
BBGSCLTR
EXDU_BB
ANSI05000347-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000347 V2 EN
Figure 359:
14.2.4.4
Logic diagram
BB_ES
VP_BB_DC
BB_DC_OP
EXDU_BB
AND
NOT
89G_OP
89G_CL
89GREL
89GITL
BBGSOPTR
BBGSCLTR
en04000546_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000546 V1 EN
14.2.4.5
Signals
Table 404:
Name
Default
Description
89G_OP
BOOLEAN
89G_CL
BOOLEAN
BB_DC_OP
BOOLEAN
VP_BB_DC
BOOLEAN
EXDU_BB
BOOLEAN
Table 405:
Name
Description
89GREL
BOOLEAN
89GITL
BOOLEAN
BBGSOPTR
BOOLEAN
BBGSCLTR
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
777
Section 14
Control
14.2.5
14.2.5.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
14.2.5.2
A1A2_BS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS ,3) function is used for one bussection circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 360. The function can
be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.
WA1 (A1)
189G
WA2 (A2)
189
289
289G
152
489G
389G
A1A2_BS
en04000516_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000516 V1 EN
Figure 360:
778
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.2.5.3
Function block
A1A2_BS (3)
152_OP
152OPREL
152_CL
152OPITL
189_OP
152CLREL
189_CL
152CLITL
289_OP
189REL
289_CL
189ITL
389G_OP
289REL
389G_CL
289ITL
489G_OP
389GREL
489G_CL
389GITL
S189G_OP
489GREL
S189G_CL
489GITL
S289G_OP
S1S2OPTR
S289G_CL
S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP
189OPTR
VP_BBTR
189CLTR
EXDU_12
289OPTR
EXDU_89G
289CLTR
152O_EX1
VPS1S2TR
152O_EX2
VP189TR
152O_EX3
VP289TR
189_EX1
189_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
ANSI05000348-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000348 V2 EN
Figure 361:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
779
Section 14
Control
14.2.5.4
Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
289_OP
289_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
S1189G_OP
S1189G_CL
S2289G_OP
S2289G_CL
VP189
189_OP
152O_EX1
VP289
289_OP
152O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12
152O_EX3
VP189
VP289
VP152
VP389G
VP489G
VPS1189G
152_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
S1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP389G
VPS1189G
389G_CL
S1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2
A1A2_BS
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VP489G
XOR
VPS1189G
XOR
VPS2289G
AND
OR
NOT
152OPREL
152OPITL
AND
AND
AND
AND
NOT
OR
NOT
152CLREL
152CLITL
189REL
189ITL
AND
en04000542_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000542 V1 EN
780
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
VP152
VP389G
VP489G
VPS2289G
152_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
S2289G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP489G
VPS2289G
489G_CL
S2289G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2
VP189
VP289
189_OP
289_OP
AND
289REL
289ITL
OR
NOT
AND
AND
NOT
NOT
389GREL
389GITL
489GREL
489GITL
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
189_OP
289_OP
152_OP
VP189
VP289
VP152
OR
NOT
S1S2OPTR
S1S2CLTR
VPS1S2TR
AND
en04000543_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000543 V1 EN
14.2.5.5
Signals
Table 406:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
489G_OP
BOOLEAN
489G_CL
BOOLEAN
S189G_OP
BOOLEAN
S189G_CL
BOOLEAN
S289G_OP
BOOLEAN
781
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
S289G_CL
BOOLEAN
BBTR_OP
BOOLEAN
VP_BBTR
BOOLEAN
EXDU_12
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
152O_EX1
BOOLEAN
152O_EX2
BOOLEAN
152O_EX3
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 407:
Name
Description
152OPREL
BOOLEAN
152OPITL
BOOLEAN
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
389GREL
BOOLEAN
389GITL
BOOLEAN
489GREL
BOOLEAN
489GITL
BOOLEAN
S1S2OPTR
BOOLEAN
S1S2CLTR
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
782
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
Description
VPS1S2TR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
14.2.6
14.2.6.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
14.2.6.2
IEC 60617
identification
A1A2_DC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC, 3) function is used for one bussection disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 362. A1A2_DC (3)
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.
WA1 (A1)
WA2 (A2)
52
289G
189G
A1A2_DC
en04000492_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000492 V1 EN
Figure 362:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
783
Section 14
Control
14.2.6.3
Function block
A1A2_DC (3)
089_OP
089OPREL
089_CL
089OPITL
S189G_OP
089CLREL
S189G_CL
089CLITL
S289G_OP
DCOPTR
S289G_CL
DCCLTR
S1DC_OP
VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BB
089C_EX1
089C_EX2
089O_EX1
089O_EX2
089O_EX3
ANSI05000349-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000349 V2 EN
Figure 363:
14.2.6.4
Logic diagram
A1A2_DC
89_OP
89_CL
S1189G_OP
S1189G_CL
S2289G_OP
S2289G_CL
VPS1189G
VPS2289G
VPS1_DC
S1189G_OP
S2289G_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_89G
XOR
VPQB
VPDCTR
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
VPS1189G
XOR
VPS2289G
XOR
AND
OR
NOT
89OPREL
89OPITL
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1
VPS1189
VPS2289G
VPS2_DC
S1189G_OP
S2289G_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_89G
AND
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2
VPS1189G
VPS2289G
S1189G_CL
S2289G_CL
EXDU_89G
QBOP_EX3
AND
en04000544_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000544 V1 EN
784
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
IEC04000545 V1 EN
14.2.6.5
Signals
Table 408:
Name
Default
Description
089_OP
BOOLEAN
089_CL
BOOLEAN
S189G_OP
BOOLEAN
S189G_CL
BOOLEAN
S289G_OP
BOOLEAN
S289G_CL
BOOLEAN
S1DC_OP
BOOLEAN
S2DC_OP
BOOLEAN
VPS1_DC
BOOLEAN
VPS2_DC
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
EXDU_BB
BOOLEAN
089C_EX1
BOOLEAN
089C_EX2
BOOLEAN
089O_EX1
BOOLEAN
089O_EX2
BOOLEAN
089O_EX3
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
785
Section 14
Control
Table 409:
Name
Type
Description
089OPREL
BOOLEAN
089OPITL
BOOLEAN
089CLREL
BOOLEAN
089CLITL
BOOLEAN
DCOPTR
BOOLEAN
DCCLTR
BOOLEAN
VPDCTR
BOOLEAN
14.2.7
14.2.7.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
14.2.7.2
ABC_BC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC, 3) function is used for a bus-coupler bay
connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 364. The function can also
be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar
arrangement without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
189
289
189G
2089
789
152
289G
en04000514_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000514 V1 EN
Figure 364:
786
Section 14
Control
14.2.7.3
Function block
ABC_BC (3)
152_OP
152OPREL
152_CL
152OPITL
189_OP
152CLREL
189_CL
152CLITL
289_OP
189REL
289_CL
189ITL
789_OP
289REL
789_CL
289ITL
2089_OP
789REL
2089_CL
789ITL
189G_OP
2089REL
189G_CL
2089ITL
289G_OP
189GREL
289G_CL
189GITL
1189G_OP
289GREL
1189G_CL
289GITL
2189G_OP
189OPTR
2189G_CL
189CLTR
7189G_OP
22089OTR
7189G_CL
22089CTR
BBTR_OP
789OPTR
BC_12_CL
789CLTR
VP_BBTR
1289OPTR
VP_BC_12
1289CLTR
EXDU_89G
BC12OPTR
EXDU_12
BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC
BC17OPTR
152O_EX1
BC17CLTR
152O_EX2
BC27OPTR
152O_EX3
BC27CLTR
189_EX1
VP189TR
189_EX2
V22089TR
189_EX3
VP789TR
289_EX1
VP1289TR
289_EX2
VPBC12TR
289_EX3
VPBC17TR
2089_EX1
VPBC27TR
2089_EX2
789_EX1
789_EX2
ANSI05000350-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000350 V2 EN
Figure 365:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
787
Section 14
Control
14.2.7.4
Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
2089_OP
2089_CL
789_OP
789_CL
289_OP
289_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
7189G_OP
7189G_CL
VP189
189_OP
152O_EX1
VP2089
2089_OP
152O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12
ABC_BC
VP152
XOR
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP2089
XOR
VP789
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP1189G
XOR
VP2189G
XOR
VP7189G
AND
152OPREL
152OPITL
OR
NOT
AND
AND
152O_EX3
VP189
VP289
VP789
VP2089
AND
NOT
152CLREL
152CLITL
en04000533_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000533 V1 EN
VP152
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP289
VP_BC_12
289_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX3
AND
OR
NOT
189REL
189ITL
AND
AND
en04000534_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000534 V1 EN
788
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
VP152
VP189
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189
VP_BC_12
189_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
289_EX2
VP189G
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX3
AND
OR
NOT
289REL
289ITL
AND
AND
en04000535_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000535 V1 EN
VP152
VP2089
VP189G
VP289G
VP7189G
152_OP
2089_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
789_EX1
VP289G
VP7189G
289G_CL
7189G_CL
EXDU_89G
789_EX2
VP152
VP789
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
789_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
2089_EX1
VP289G
VP2189G
289G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
2089_EX2
AND
789REL
OR
NOT
789ITL
AND
AND
2089REL
OR
NOT
2089ITL
AND
en04000536_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000536 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
789
Section 14
Control
VP189
VP2089
VP789
VP289
189_OP
2089_OP
789_OP
289_OP
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
2089_OP
289_OP
VP2089
VP289
789_OP
789_CL
VP789
189_OP
289_OP
VP189
VP289
152_OP
189_OP
2089_OP
VP152
VP189
VP2089
152_OP
189_OP
789_OP
VP152
VP189
VP789
152_OP
289_OP
789_OP
VP152
VP289
VP789
AND
NOT
NOT
AND
NOT
AND
OR
NOT
AND
OR
NOT
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
22089OTR
22089CTR
V22089TR
789OPTR
789CLTR
VP789TR
1289OPTR
1289CLTR
VP1289TR
BC12OPTR
BC12CLTR
VPBC12TR
AND
OR
NOT
BC17OPTR
BC17CLTR
VPBC17TR
AND
OR
NOT
BC27OPTR
BC27CLTR
VPBC27TR
AND
en04000537_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000537 V1 EN
14.2.7.5
Signals
Table 410:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
789_OP
BOOLEAN
789_CL
BOOLEAN
2089_OP
BOOLEAN
2089_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
790
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN
7189G_OP
BOOLEAN
7189G_CL
BOOLEAN
BBTR_OP
BOOLEAN
BC_12_CL
BOOLEAN
VP_BBTR
BOOLEAN
VP_BC_12
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
EXDU_12
BOOLEAN
EXDU_BC
BOOLEAN
152O_EX1
BOOLEAN
152O_EX2
BOOLEAN
152O_EX3
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX3
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX3
BOOLEAN
2089_EX1
BOOLEAN
2089_EX2
BOOLEAN
789_EX1
BOOLEAN
789_EX2
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
791
Section 14
Control
Table 411:
Name
Description
152OPREL
BOOLEAN
152OPITL
BOOLEAN
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
789REL
BOOLEAN
789ITL
BOOLEAN
2089REL
BOOLEAN
2089ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
22089OTR
BOOLEAN
22089CTR
BOOLEAN
789OPTR
BOOLEAN
789CLTR
BOOLEAN
1289OPTR
BOOLEAN
1289CLTR
BOOLEAN
BC12OPTR
BOOLEAN
BC12CLTR
BOOLEAN
BC17OPTR
BOOLEAN
BC17CLTR
BOOLEAN
BC27OPTR
BOOLEAN
BC27CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
792
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
Description
V22089TR
BOOLEAN
VP789TR
BOOLEAN
VP1289TR
BOOLEAN
VPBC12TR
BOOLEAN
VPBC17TR
BOOLEAN
VPBC27TR
BOOLEAN
14.2.8
14.2.8.1
Identification
Function description
14.2.8.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
BH_CONN
BH_LINE_A
BH_LINE_B
Functionality
The interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter (BH_CONN(3), BH_LINE_A(3),
BH_LINE_B(3)) functions are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half diameter
according to figure 366.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
793
Section 14
Control
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189
289
189G
189G
152
152
289G
289G
689
689
389G
BH_LINE_A
389G
6189
152
BH_LINE_B
6289
989
989
189G
289G
989G
989G
BH_CONN
en04000513_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000513 V1 EN
Figure 366:
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A (3) and
BH_LINE_B (3) are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN (3) is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker-and-a-half switchyard
layout.
794
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.2.8.3
Function blocks
BH_LINE_A (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
689_OP
689REL
689_CL
689ITL
189_OP
189REL
189_CL
189ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389G_OP
389GREL
389G_CL
389GITL
989_OP
989REL
989_CL
989ITL
989G_OP
989GREL
989G_CL
989GITL
C152_OP
189OPTR
C152_CL
189CLTR
C6189_OP
VP189TR
C6189_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_89G
689_EX1
689_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989_EX6
989_EX7
ANSI05000352-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000352 V2 EN
Figure 367:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
795
Section 14
Control
BH_LINE_B (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
689_OP
689REL
689_CL
689ITL
289_OP
289REL
289_CL
289ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389G_OP
389GREL
389G_CL
389GITL
989_OP
989REL
989_CL
989ITL
989G_OP
989GREL
989G_CL
989GITL
C152_OP
289OPTR
C152_CL
289CLTR
C6289_OP
VP289TR
C6289_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_89G
689_EX1
689_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989_EX6
989_EX7
ANSI05000353-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000353 V2 EN
Figure 368:
BH_CONN (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
6189_OP
6189REL
6189_CL
6189ITL
6289_OP
6289REL
6289_CL
6289ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
1389G_OP
1389G_CL
2389G_OP
2389G_CL
6189_EX1
6189_EX2
6289_EX1
6289_EX2
ANSI05000351-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000351 V2 EN
Figure 369:
796
Section 14
Control
14.2.8.4
Logic diagrams
152_OP
152_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
1389G_OP
1389G_CL
2389G_OP
2389G_CL
VP6189
VP6289
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP1389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1389G_OP
6189_EX1
VP189G
VP1389G
189G_CL
1389G_CL
6189_EX2
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP2389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2389G_OP
6289_EX1
VP289G
VP2389G
289G_CL
2389G_CL
6289_EX2
VP6189
VP6289
6189_OP
6289_OP
BH_CONN
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP6189
XOR
VP6289
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP1389G
VP2389G
152CLREL
152CLITL
NOT
XOR
AND
AND
OR
NOT
6189REL
61891ITL
AND
AND
OR
NOT
6289REL
6289ITL
AND
AND
NOT
NOT
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
en04000560_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000560 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
797
Section 14
Control
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
689_OP
689_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
C152_OP
C152_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
C6189_OP
C6189_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP189
VP689
VP989
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
689_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
289G_CL
389G_CL
689_EX2
BH_LINE_A
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP689
XOR
VP989G
XOR
VP989
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VPC152
XOR
VPC189G
XOR
VPC289G
XOR
VPC6189
XOR
VP1189G
XOR
AND
AND
NOT
OR
NOT
VPVOLT
152CLREL
152CLITL
689REL
689ITL
AND
en04000554_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000554 V1 EN
798
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2
VP189
VP689
189_OP
689_OP
VP689
VP989
VPC6189
689_OP
989_OP
C6189_OP
VP152
VP689
VP989G
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VPC152
VPC6189
VPC189G
VPC289G
989_EX1
689_OP
989_EX2
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989_EX3
AND
189REL
189ITL
OR
NOT
AND
AND
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
NOT
NOT
389GREL
389GITL
AND
NOT
AND
OR
NOT
989REL
989ITL
OR
AND
en04000555_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000555 V1 EN
C6189_OP
989_EX4
C152_OP
C189G_OP
C289G_OP
989_EX5
989G_OP
389G_OP
989_EX6
VP989G
VP389G
989G_CL
389G_CL
989_EX7
VP989
VPVOLT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
NOT
989GREL
989GITL
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
en04000556_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000556 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
799
Section 14
Control
152_OP
152_CL
289_OP
289_CL
689_OP
689_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
C152_OP
C152_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
C6289_OP
C6289_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP289
VP689
VP989
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
689_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
289G_CL
389G_CL
689_EX2
BH_LINE_B
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP689
XOR
VP989G
XOR
VP989
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VPC152
XOR
VPC189G
XOR
VPC289G
XOR
VPC6289
XOR
VP2189G
XOR
VPVOLT
152CLREL
152CLITL
AND
AND
NOT
OR
NOT
689REL
689ITL
AND
en04000557_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000557 V1 EN
800
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189G
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2
VP289
VP689
289_OP
689_OP
VP689
VP989
VPC6289
689_OP
989_OP
C6289_OP
VP152
VP689
VP989G
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VPC152
VPC6289
VPC189G
VPC289G
989_EX1
689_OP
989_EX2
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989_EX3
289REL
OR
AND
289ITL
NOT
AND
AND
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
NOT
NOT
389GREL
389GITL
AND
NOT
989REL
AND
OR
NOT
989ITL
OR
AND
en04000558_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000558 V1 EN
C6289_OP
989_EX4
C152_OP
C189G_OP
C289G_OP
989_EX5
989G_OP
389G_OP
989_EX6
VP989G
VP389G
989G_CL
389G_CL
989_EX7
VP989
VPVOLT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
NOT
989GREL
989GITL
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
en04000559_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000559 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
801
Section 14
Control
14.2.8.5
Signals
Table 412:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
689_OP
BOOLEAN
689_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
989_OP
BOOLEAN
989_CL
BOOLEAN
989G_OP
BOOLEAN
989G_CL
BOOLEAN
C152_OP
BOOLEAN
C152_CL
BOOLEAN
C6189_OP
BOOLEAN
C6189_CL
BOOLEAN
C189G_OP
BOOLEAN
C189G_CL
BOOLEAN
C289G_OP
BOOLEAN
C289G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
689_EX1
BOOLEAN
689_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
802
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX1
BOOLEAN
989_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX3
BOOLEAN
989_EX4
BOOLEAN
989_EX5
BOOLEAN
989_EX6
BOOLEAN
989_EX7
BOOLEAN
Table 413:
Name
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
689REL
BOOLEAN
689ITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
389GREL
BOOLEAN
389GITL
BOOLEAN
989REL
BOOLEAN
989ITL
BOOLEAN
989GREL
BOOLEAN
989GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
803
Section 14
Control
Table 414:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
689_OP
BOOLEAN
689_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
989_OP
BOOLEAN
989_CL
BOOLEAN
989G_OP
BOOLEAN
989G_CL
BOOLEAN
C152_OP
BOOLEAN
C152_CL
BOOLEAN
C6289_OP
BOOLEAN
C6289_CL
BOOLEAN
C189G_OP
BOOLEAN
C189G_CL
BOOLEAN
C289G_OP
BOOLEAN
C289G_CL
BOOLEAN
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
689_EX1
BOOLEAN
689_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX1
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
989_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX3
BOOLEAN
989_EX4
BOOLEAN
989_EX5
BOOLEAN
989_EX6
BOOLEAN
989_EX7
BOOLEAN
Table 415:
Name
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
689REL
BOOLEAN
689ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
389GREL
BOOLEAN
389GITL
BOOLEAN
989REL
BOOLEAN
989ITL
BOOLEAN
989GREL
BOOLEAN
989GITL
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
Table 416:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
6189_OP
BOOLEAN
6189_CL
BOOLEAN
805
Section 14
Control
Name
Description
6289_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
1389G_OP
BOOLEAN
1389G_CL
BOOLEAN
2389G_OP
BOOLEAN
2389G_CL
BOOLEAN
6189_EX1
BOOLEAN
6189_EX2
BOOLEAN
6289_EX1
BOOLEAN
6289_EX2
BOOLEAN
Name
806
Default
BOOLEAN
Table 417:
14.2.9
Type
6289_OP
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
6189REL
BOOLEAN
6189ITL
BOOLEAN
6289REL
BOOLEAN
6289ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.2.9.1
Identification
Function description
14.2.9.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
DB_BUS_A
DB_BUS_B
DB_LINE
Functionality
The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A
(3), DB_BUS_B (3) and DB_LINE (3) functions are used for a line connected to a double
busbar arrangement according to figure 370.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189
DB_BUS_A
289
189G
489G
DB_BUS_B
252
152
589G
289G
6189
6289
389G
DB_LINE
989
989G
en04000518_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000518 V1 EN
Figure 370:
Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A (3) handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and the
disconnectors and grounding switches of this section. DB_BUS_B (3) handles the circuit
breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and grounding
switches of this section.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
807
Section 14
Control
14.2.9.3
Logic diagrams
152_OP
152_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
189_OP
189_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VP6189
VP189
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
6189_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
289G_CL
389G_CL
6189_EX2
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2
DB_BUS_A
VP152
XOR
XOR
VP6189
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP389G
XOR
NOT
VP1189G
152CLREL
152CLITL
NOT
6189REL
6189ITL
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
OR
NOT
189REL
189ITL
AND
en04000547_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000547 V1 EN
VP6189
VP189
6189_OP
189_OP
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
AND
NOT
NOT
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
en04000548_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000548 V1 EN
808
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
252_OP
252_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
289_OP
289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VP6289
VP289
VP252
VP489G
VP589G
VP389G
252_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
389G_OP
6289_EX1
VP589G
VP389G
589G_CL
389G_CL
6289_EX2
VP252
VP489G
VP589G
VP2189G
252_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP489G
VP2189G
489G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2
DB_BUS_B
XOR
VP252
XOR
VP6289
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP489G
XOR
VP589G
VP389G
XOR
XOR
AND
AND
NOT
OR
NOT
VP2189G
252CLREL
252CLITL
6289REL
6289ITL
AND
AND
OR
NOT
289REL
289ITL
AND
en04000552_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000552 V1 EN
VP6289
VP289
6289_OP
289_OP
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
AND
NOT
NOT
489GREL
489GITL
589GREL
589GITL
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
en04000553_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000553 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
809
Section 14
Control
152_OP
152_CL
252_OP
252_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP152
VP252
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP489G
VP589G
VP989G
152_OP
252_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX1
DB_LINE
VP152
XOR
XOR
VP252
XOR
VP6189
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP6289
XOR
VP489G
XOR
VP589G
XOR
VP989
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VP989G
VPVOLT
XOR
AND
OR
NOT
989REL
989ITL
AND
en04000549_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000549 V1 EN
810
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP989G
VP6289
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
989G_OP
6289_OP
989_EX2
VP252
VP6189
VP389G
VP489G
VP589G
VP989G
252_OP
6189_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX3
VP389G
VP989G
VP6189
VP6289
389G_OP
989G_OP
6189_OP
6289_OP
989_EX4
VP389G
VP989G
389G_CL
989G_CL
989_EX5
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
en04000550_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000550 V1 EN
VP6189
VP6289
VP989
6189_OP
6289_OP
989_OP
VP989
VPVOLT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
NOT
389GREL
389GITL
NOT
989GREL
989GITL
AND
AND
en04000551_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000551 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
811
Section 14
Control
14.2.9.4
Function block
DB_BUS_A (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
189_OP
6189REL
189_CL
6189ITL
6189_OP
189REL
6189_CL
189ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389G_OP
189OPTR
389G_CL
189CLTR
1189G_OP
VP189TR
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
6189_EX1
6189_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
ANSI05000354-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000354 V2 EN
Figure 371:
DB_LINE (3)
152_OP
152_CL
252_OP
252_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989REL
989ITL
389GREL
389GITL
989GREL
989GITL
ANSI05000356-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000356 V2 EN
Figure 372:
812
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
DB_BUS_B (3)
252_OP
252CLREL
252_CL
252CLITL
289_OP
6289REL
289_CL
6289ITL
6289_OP
289REL
6289_CL
289ITL
489G_OP
489GREL
489G_CL
489GITL
589G_OP
589GREL
589G_CL
589GITL
389G_OP
289OPTR
389G_CL
289CLTR
2189G_OP
VP289TR
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
6289_EX1
6289_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
ANSI05000355-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000355 V2 EN
Figure 373:
14.2.9.5
Signals
Table 418:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
6189_OP
BOOLEAN
6189_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
6189_EX1
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
813
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
6189_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 419:
Name
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
6189REL
BOOLEAN
6189ITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
Table 420:
Name
Default
Description
252_OP
BOOLEAN
252_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
6289_OP
BOOLEAN
6289_CL
BOOLEAN
489G_OP
BOOLEAN
489G_CL
BOOLEAN
589G_OP
BOOLEAN
589G_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
6289_EX1
BOOLEAN
6289_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 421:
Name
Description
252CLREL
BOOLEAN
252CLITL
BOOLEAN
6289REL
BOOLEAN
6289ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
489GREL
BOOLEAN
489GITL
BOOLEAN
589GREL
BOOLEAN
589GITL
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
Table 422:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
252_OP
BOOLEAN
252_CL
BOOLEAN
6189_OP
BOOLEAN
6189_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
815
Section 14
Control
Name
Description
6289_OP
BOOLEAN
6289_CL
BOOLEAN
489G_OP
BOOLEAN
489G_CL
BOOLEAN
589G_OP
BOOLEAN
589G_CL
BOOLEAN
989_OP
BOOLEAN
989_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
989G_OP
BOOLEAN
989G_CL
BOOLEAN
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN
989_EX1
BOOLEAN
989_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX3
BOOLEAN
989_EX4
BOOLEAN
989_EX5
BOOLEAN
Name
816
Default
BOOLEAN
Table 423:
14.2.10
Type
289G_CL
Description
989REL
BOOLEAN
989ITL
BOOLEAN
389GREL
BOOLEAN
389GITL
BOOLEAN
989GREL
BOOLEAN
989GITL
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.2.10.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
14.2.10.2
ABC_LINE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function is used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 374. The function
can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single
busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
189
289
189G
789
152
289G
989
989G
en04000478_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000478 V1 EN
Figure 374:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
817
Section 14
Control
14.2.10.3
Function block
ABC_LINE (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
989_OP
989REL
989_CL
989ITL
189_OP
189REL
189_CL
189ITL
289_OP
289REL
289_CL
289ITL
789_OP
789REL
789_CL
789ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
989G_OP
989GREL
989G_CL
989GITL
1189G_OP
189OPTR
1189G_CL
189CLTR
2189G_OP
289OPTR
2189G_CL
289CLTR
7189G_OP
789OPTR
7189G_CL
789CLTR
BB7_D_OP
1289OPTR
BC_12_CL
1289CLTR
BC_17_OP
VP189TR
BC_17_CL
VP289TR
BC_27_OP
VP789TR
BC_27_CL
VP1289TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
989_EX1
989_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
189_EX3
289_EX1
289_EX2
289_EX3
789_EX1
789_EX2
789_EX3
789_EX4
ANSI05000357-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000357 V2 EN
Figure 375:
818
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.2.10.4
Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
989_OP
989_CL
189_OP
189_CL
289_OP
289_CL
789_OP
789_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
7189G_OP
7189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP989G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX1
VP289G
VP989G
289G_CL
989G_CL
989_EX2
ABC_LINE
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP989
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP789
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP989G
XOR
VP1189G
XOR
VP2189G
XOR
VP7189G
XOR
VPVOLT
AND
AND
OR
NOT
NOT
152CLREL
152CLITL
989REL
989ITL
AND
en04000527_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000527 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
819
Section 14
Control
VP152
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
AND
VP289
AND
189REL
OR
NOT
189ITL
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP_BC_12
289_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
AND
189EX3
en04000528_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000528 V1 EN
820
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
VP152
VP189
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
AND
VP189
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
AND
289REL
OR
NOT
289ITL
289_EX1
289_EX2
VP189G
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
AND
289_EX3
en04000529_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000529 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
821
Section 14
Control
VP989G
VP7189G
AND
VP_BB7_D
789REL
OR
NOT
VP_BC_17
789ITL
VP_BC_27
989G_OP
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
789_EX1
VP152
VP189
VP989G
VP989
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
152_CL
189_CL
989G_OP
989_CL
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
AND
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL
EXDU_BC
789_EX2
en04000530_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000530 V1 EN
822
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
VP152
VP289
VP989G
VP989
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
152_CL
289_CL
989G_OP
989_CL
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
AND
OR
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
789_EX3
VP989G
VP7189G
989G_CL
7189G_CL
EXDU_89G
789_EX4
VP189
VP289
VP989
189_OP
289_OP
989_OP
VP789
VP989
VPVOLT
789_OP
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
AND
AND
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
NOT
NOT
989GREL
989GITL
AND
NOT
en04000531_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000531 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
823
Section 14
Control
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
789_OP
789_CL
VP789
789OPTR
789CLTR
VP789TR
189_OP
289_OP
VP189
VP289
OR
NOT
AND
1289OPTR
1289CLTR
VP1289TR
en04000532_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000532 V1 EN
14.2.10.5
Signals
Table 424:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
989_OP
BOOLEAN
989_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
789_OP
BOOLEAN
789_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
989G_OP
BOOLEAN
989G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN
7189G_OP
BOOLEAN
7189G_CL
BOOLEAN
BB7_D_OP
BOOLEAN
BC_12_CL
BOOLEAN
BC_17_OP
BOOLEAN
BC_17_CL
BOOLEAN
BC_27_OP
BOOLEAN
BC_27_CL
BOOLEAN
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN
VP_BB7_D
BOOLEAN
VP_BC_12
BOOLEAN
VP_BC_17
BOOLEAN
VP_BC_27
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
EXDU_BPB
BOOLEAN
EXDU_BC
BOOLEAN
989_EX1
BOOLEAN
989_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX3
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
825
Section 14
Control
Name
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
789_EX1
BOOLEAN
789_EX2
BOOLEAN
789_EX3
BOOLEAN
789_EX4
BOOLEAN
Table 425:
Name
826
Type
289_EX3
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
989REL
BOOLEAN
989ITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
789REL
BOOLEAN
789ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
989GREL
BOOLEAN
989GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
789OPTR
BOOLEAN
789CLTR
BOOLEAN
1289OPTR
BOOLEAN
1289CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
VP789TR
BOOLEAN
VP1289TR
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.2.11
14.2.11.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
14.2.11.2
AB_TRAFO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO, 3) function is used for a transformer
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 376. The function is
used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise,
the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function can be used. This function can also
be used in single busbar arrangements.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189
289
189G
AB_TRAFO
152
289G
389G
252
489G
389
489
en04000515_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000515 V1 EN
Figure 376:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
827
Section 14
Control
14.2.11.3
Function block
AB_TRAFO (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
189_OP
189REL
189_CL
189ITL
289_OP
289REL
289_CL
289ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389_OP
189OPTR
389_CL
189CLTR
489_OP
289OPTR
489_CL
289CLTR
389G_OP
1289OPTR
389G_CL
1289CLTR
1189G_OP
VP189TR
1189G_CL
VP289TR
2189G_OP
VP1289TR
2189G_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BC
152_EX1
152_EX2
152_EX3
189_EX1
189_EX2
189_EX3
289_EX1
289_EX2
289_EX3
ANSI05000358-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000358 V2 EN
Figure 377:
828
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.2.11.4
Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
289_OP
289_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389_OP
389_CL
489_OP
489_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VP189
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP389
VP489
VP389G
152_EX2
389G_OP
152_EX3
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
152_EX1
AB_TRAFO
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP389
XOR
VP489
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VP1189G
XOR
VP2189G
152CLREL
152CLITL
AND
NOT
OR
AND
en04000538_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000538 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
829
Section 14
Control
VP152
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP289
VP389G
VP_BC_12
289_CL
389G_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP1189G
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX3
AND
189REL
OR
NOT
189ITL
AND
AND
en04000539_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000539 V1 EN
VP152
VP189
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189
VP389G
VP_BC_12
189_CL
389G_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
289_EX2
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP2189G
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX3
AND
OR
NOT
252REL
252ITL
AND
AND
en04000540_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000540 V1 EN
830
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
VP189
VP289
VP389
VP489
189_OP
289_OP
389_OP
489_OP
AND
NOT
NOT
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
189_OP
289_OP
VP189
VP289
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
1289OPTR
1289CLTR
VP1289TR
OR
NOT
AND
en04000541_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000541 V1 EN
14.2.11.5
Signals
Table 426:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
389_OP
BOOLEAN
389_CL
BOOLEAN
489_OP
BOOLEAN
489_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN
BC_12_CL
BOOLEAN
831
Section 14
Control
Name
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
EXDU_BC
BOOLEAN
152_EX1
BOOLEAN
152_EX2
BOOLEAN
152_EX3
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX3
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX3
BOOLEAN
Table 427:
Name
832
Type
VP_BC_12
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
1289OPTR
BOOLEAN
1289CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
VP1289TR
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.2.12
14.2.12.1
Identification
14.2.12.2
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Position evaluation
POS_EVAL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS or
CLOSEPOS.
The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.
14.2.12.3
Function block
POSITION
POS_EVAL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
IEC09000079_1_en.vsd
IEC09000079 V1 EN
Figure 378:
14.2.12.4
Logic diagram
Position including quality
POSITION
POS_EVAL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
Open/close position of
switch device
IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN
Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not
used.
Input position (Value)
Signal quality
Output OPENPOS
Output CLOSEPOS
0 (Breaker intermediate)
Good
1 (Breaker open)
Good
2 (Breaker closed)
Good
3 (Breaker faulty)
Good
Any
Invalid
Any
Oscillatory
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
833
Section 14
Control
14.2.12.5
Signals
Table 428:
Name
Type
POSITION
Table 429:
INTEGER
Default
0
Description
Position status including quality
Name
Type
Description
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
Open position
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
Close position
14.3
14.3.1
Functionality
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit breakers,
disconnectors and grounding switches within a bay. Permission to trip is given after
evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchronism check,
operator place selection and external or internal blockings.
Apparatus control features:
834
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is
not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated with an
additional supervision of the status value of the control object. The command sequence
with enhanced security is always terminated by a CommandTermination service primitive
and an AddCause telling if the command was successful or if something went wrong.
Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so
defined.
14.3.2
Operation principle
A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor bank.
The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus
control functions directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences.
Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation
Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function block that handles the
interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process
information used by higher-level control functions.
Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised by
one function block (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals used for the
control of a breaker respectively a disconnector are almost the same, the same function
block type is used to handle these two types of apparatuses.
The SCSWI function block is connected either to an SXCBR function block (for circuit
breakers) or to an SXSWI function block (for disconnectors and grounding switches). The
physical process in the switchyard is connected to these two function blocks via binary
inputs and outputs.
Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision
within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function
reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard
configuration. These four types are:
The functions Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control (LOCREMCTRL),
to handle the local/remote switch, and the functions Bay reserve (QCRSV) and
Reservation input (RESIN), for the reservation function, also belong to the apparatus
control function. The principles of operation, function blocks, input and output signals and
setting parameters for all these functions are described below.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
835
Section 14
Control
14.3.3
Error handling
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be
set with a value. Table 430 describes the cause values given on local HMI. The translation
to AddCause values specified in IEC 61850-8-1 is shown in Table 431. For IEC 61850-8-1
edition 2 only addcauses defined in the standard are used, for edition 1 also a number of
vendor specific causes are used. The values are available in the command response to
commands from IEC61850-8-1 clients. An output L_CAUSE on the function block for
Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI)
indicates the value of the cause during the latest command.
Table 430:
Cause
number
Name
Description
Supported
None
Not-supported
Blocked-byswitching-hierarchy
Select-failed
Invalid-position
Position-reached
Parameter-changein-execution
Step-limit
Blocked-by-Mode
Blocked-by-process
10
Blocked-byinterlocking
11
Blocked-bysynchrocheck
12
Command-alreadyin-execution
13
Blocked-by-health
14
1-of-n-control
15
Abortion-by-cancel
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Cause
number
Name
Description
Supported
16
Time-limit-over
17
Abortion-by-trip
18
Object-not-selected
19
Object-alreadyselected
20
No-access-authority
21
Ended-withovershoot
22
Abortion-due-todeviation
23
Abortion-bycommunication-loss
24
Blocked-bycommand
26
Inconsistentparameters
27
Locked-by-otherclient
-22
Wrong_CTL_Model
-24
Blocked_for_Open_C
md
-25
Blocked_For_Close_
Cmd
-30
longOperationTime
-31
switchNotStartMovin
g
-32
persistantIntermediat
eState
-33
switchReturnedToInit
Pos
-34
switchInBadState
-35
notExpectedFinalPos
ition
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
837
Section 14
Control
Table 431:
Internal Cause
Number
Name
Ed 1
25
None
Not-supported
Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
Select-failed
Invalid-position
Position-reached
Parameter-change-in-execution
Step-limit
Blocked-by-Mode
Blocked-by-process
10
10
10
Blocked-by-interlocking
11
11
11
Blocked-by-synchrocheck
12
12
12
Command-already-in-execution
13
13
13
Blocked-by-health
14
14
14
1-of-n-control
15
15
Abortion-by-cancel
16
16
16
Time-limit-over
17
17
17
Abortion-by-trip
18
18
18
Object-not-selected
19
19
Object-already-selected
20
20
No-access-authority
21
21
Ended-with-overshoot
22
22
Abortion-due-to-deviation
23
23
Abortion-by-communication-loss
24
24
-23
Blocked-by-command
26
26
Inconsistent-parameters
27
27
12
Locked-by-other-client
-22
-22
Wrong_CTL_Model
-24
24
-24
Blocked_for_Open_Cmd
-25
24
-25
Blocked_For_Close_Cmd
-30
24
-30
longOperationTime
-31
16
-31
switchNotStartMoving
-32
16
-32
persistantIntermediateState
838
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Internal Cause
Number
AddCause in IEC61850-8-1
Name
Ed 2
Ed 1
-33
22
-33
switchReturnedToInitPos
-34
-34
switchInBadState
-35
22
-35
notExpectedFinalPosition
14.3.4
14.3.4.1
Functionality
The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local remote
control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also
provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.
14.3.4.2
Function block
QCBAY
LR_OFF
PSTO
LR_LOC
UPD_BLKD
LR_REM
CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID
LOC
BL_UPD
STA
BL_CMD
REM
IEC10000048-2-en.vsd
IEC10000048 V2 EN
Figure 379:
14.3.4.3
Signals
Table 432:
Name
Default
Description
LR_OFF
BOOLEAN
LR_LOC
BOOLEAN
LR_REM
BOOLEAN
LR_VALID
BOOLEAN
BL_UPD
BOOLEAN
BL_CMD
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
839
Section 14
Control
Table 433:
Name
14.3.4.4
Table 434:
Name
Type
Description
PSTO
INTEGER
UPD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
CMD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
LOC
BOOLEAN
STA
BOOLEAN
REM
BOOLEAN
Settings
QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AllPSTOValid
Priority
No priority
Priority
RemoteIncStation
No
Yes
No
14.3.4.5
Operation principle
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and
blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control
functions and voltage control functions. The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY)
function is mainly described by the LLN0 node in the IEC61850-8-1 edition 2 standard,
applied to one bay. In IEC61850 edition 1 the functionality is not described by the LLN0
node or any other node, therefore the Bay control function is represented as a vendor
specific node in edition 1.
840
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state
(3), which means no possibility to operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the
function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY.
AllPSTOValid RemoteInc
Station
(setting
(setting
parameter)
parameter)
LocSta.CtlVal Possible
(command)
locations that
shall be able to
operate
0 = Off
Not possible
to operate
1 = Local
Priority
Local Panel
1 = Local
No priority
Local or
Remote level
without any
priority
2 = Remote
Priority
No
TRUE
Station level
2 = Remote
Priority
No
FALSE
Remote level
2 = Remote
Priority
Yes
Station or
Remote level
2 = Remote
No priority
Local, Station
or Remote
level without
any priority
3 = Faulty
Not possible
to operate
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
841
Section 14
Control
Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the
possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a
complete bay.
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to
apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function
is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected
and functional and configuration data is visible.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined
in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control
without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool in PCM600.
14.3.5
14.3.5.1
Function block
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
LOCCTRL
REMCTRL
LHMICTRL
OFF
LOCAL
REMOTE
VALID
IEC05000360-2-en.vsd
IEC05000360 V2 EN
Figure 380:
842
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
PSTO1
PSTO2
PSTO3
PSTO4
PSTO5
PSTO6
PSTO7
PSTO8
PSTO9
PSTO10
PSTO11
PSTO12
LOCREMCTRL
HMICTR1
HMICTR2
HMICTR3
HMICTR4
HMICTR5
HMICTR6
HMICTR7
HMICTR8
HMICTR9
HMICTR10
HMICTR11
HMICTR12
IEC05000361-2-en.vsd
IEC05000361 V2 EN
Figure 381:
14.3.5.2
Signals
Table 436:
Name
Default
Description
CTRLOFF
BOOLEAN
Disable control
LOCCTRL
BOOLEAN
Local in control
REMCTRL
BOOLEAN
Remote in control
LHMICTRL
INTEGER
LHMI control
Table 437:
Name
Description
OFF
BOOLEAN
Control is disabled
LOCAL
BOOLEAN
REMOTE
BOOLEAN
VALID
BOOLEAN
Table 438:
Name
Default
Description
PSTO1
INTEGER
PSTO2
INTEGER
PSTO3
INTEGER
PSTO4
INTEGER
PSTO5
INTEGER
PSTO6
INTEGER
PSTO7
INTEGER
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
843
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
PSTO9
INTEGER
PSTO10
INTEGER
PSTO11
INTEGER
PSTO12
INTEGER
Name
Table 440:
Name
ControlMode
14.3.5.4
Description
INTEGER
Table 439:
14.3.5.3
Default
PSTO8
Type
Description
HMICTR1
INTEGER
HMICTR2
INTEGER
HMICTR3
INTEGER
HMICTR4
INTEGER
HMICTR5
INTEGER
HMICTR6
INTEGER
HMICTR7
INTEGER
HMICTR8
INTEGER
HMICTR9
INTEGER
HMICTR10
INTEGER
HMICTR11
INTEGER
HMICTR12
INTEGER
Settings
LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Internal LR-switch
External LR-switch
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Internal LR-switch
Description
Control mode for internal/external LR-switch
Operation principle
The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the local/
remote switch. The connections are seen in Figure 382, where the inputs on function block
LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When the local
HMI is used, the inputs are not used. The switching between external and local HMI
source is done through the parameter ControlMode. The outputs from the LOCREM
844
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on Bay control
(QCBAY).
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL
REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID
QCBAY
LR_ OFF
PSTO
LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LOC
LR_ VALID
STA
BL_ UPD
REM
BL_ CMD
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL
REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID
QCBAY
LR_ OFF
PSTO
LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LOC
LR_ VALID
STA
BL_ UPD
REM
BL_ CMD
LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1
HMICTR1
PSTO2
HMICTR2
PSTO3
HMICTR3
PSTO4
HMICTR4
PSTO5
HMICTR5
PSTO6
HMICTR6
PSTO7
HMICTR7
PSTO8
HMICTR8
PSTO9
HMICTR9
PSTO 10
HMICTR 10
PSTO 11
HMICTR 11
PSTO 12
HMICTR 12
IEC10000052-1-en.vsd
IEC10000052 V2 EN
Figure 382:
Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two bays
and two screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be
different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the local/
remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that
is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control (LOCREMCTRL)
controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay and
screen page.
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined
in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control
without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool in PCM600.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
845
Section 14
Control
14.3.6
14.3.6.1
Functionality
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select
and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate
on one three-phase device or up to three one-phase devices.
14.3.6.2
Function block
SCSWI
BLOCK
PSTO
L_SEL
L_OPEN
L_CLOSE
AU_OPEN
AU_CLOSE
BL_CMD
RES_GRT
RES_EXT
SY_INPRO
SYNC_OK
EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSE
XPOS1
XPOS2
XPOS3
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
SEL_OP
SEL_CL
SELECTED
RES_RQ
START_SY
CANC_SY
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
POLEDISC
CMD_BLK
L_CAUSE
POS_INTR
XOUT
IEC05000337-3-en.vsd
IEC05000337 V3 EN
Figure 383:
14.3.6.3
Signals
Table 441:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
L_SEL
BOOLEAN
L_OPEN
BOOLEAN
L_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
AU_OPEN
BOOLEAN
AU_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
BL_CMD
BOOLEAN
RES_GRT
BOOLEAN
RES_EXT
BOOLEAN
846
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
SY_INPRO
BOOLEAN
SYNC_OK
BOOLEAN
EN_OPEN
BOOLEAN
EN_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
XPOSL1
GROUP
SIGNAL
XPOSL2
GROUP
SIGNAL
XPOSL3
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 442:
Name
Description
EXE_OP
BOOLEAN
EXE_CL
BOOLEAN
SEL_OP
BOOLEAN
SEL_CL
BOOLEAN
SELECTED
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ
BOOLEAN
START_SY
BOOLEAN
CANC_SY
BOOLEAN
POSITION
INTEGER
Position indication
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
POLEDISC
BOOLEAN
CMD_BLK
BOOLEAN
L_CAUSE
INTEGER
POS_INTR
BOOLEAN
XOUT
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
847
Section 14
Control
L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command sequence
connected to binary inputs. In order to have effect, the operator place
selector, PSTO, must be set to local or to remote with no priority. If the
control model used is Select before operate, Also the corresponding
enable input must be set, and no interlocking is active. The L_SEL input
must be set before L_OPEN or L_CLOSE is operated, if the control model
is Select before operate.
14.3.6.4
Table 443:
Name
Settings
SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CtlModel
Dir Norm
SBO Enh
SBO Enh
PosDependent
Always permitted
Not perm at 00/11
Always permitted
tSelect
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
30.00
tResResponse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
tSynchrocheck
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
10.00
tSynchronizing
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
0.00
tExecutionFB
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
30.00
tPoleDiscord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
SuppressMidPos
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
InterlockChk
14.3.6.5
Operation principle
The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are
848
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
fulfilled. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking,
reservation, blockings and synchronism-check.
Control handling
.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with normal
security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The parameter
CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The control model "direct
with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the "SBO with enhanced security"
command model requires a select before execution. The command sequence for a
command with control mode SBO with enhanced security is shown in figure 384, with
control mode direct with normal security is shown in figure 385.
Client
Reservation
logic
SXCBR /
SXSWI
SCSWI
select
selectAck/AddCause = 0
RES_RQ = TRUE
tSelect
tReservation
Response
RES_GRT = TRUE
SELECTED = TRUE
requestedPosition = 10
opRcvd = TRUE
EXE_CL
opOK = TRUE, tOpOk
operateAck/AddCause = 0
operateAck/AddCause = 0
tExecutionFB
RES_RQ = FALSE
RES_GRT = FALSE
SELECTED = FALSE
IEC15000416-1-EN.vsdx
IEC15000416 V1 EN
Figure 384:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
849
Section 14
Control
Reservation
core
client
SwitchCtrl
core
Switch
core
requestedPosition = 10
opRcvd = TRUE
RES_RQ
tReservation
Response
RES_GRT = TRUE
EXE_CL
opOK = TRUE, tOpOk
operateAck/AddCause = 0
operateAck/AddCause = 0
RES_RQ = FALSE
RES_GRT = FALSE
IEC15000417-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000417 V1 EN
Figure 385:
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is
not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in
three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step
ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence
is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence
is terminated. The last error (L_CAUSE) can be read from the function block and used for
example at commissioning.
There is no relation between the command direction and the actual
position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to
execute a close command.
Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter
PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no execution
command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent independent of
the position value.
Evaluation of position
The position output from the switches (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to the switch
controller SCSWI. The XPOS1, XPOS2 and XPOS3 input signals receive the position,
time stamps and quality attributes of the position which is used for further evaluation.
850
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the resulting
three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the one-phase switches,
following principles will be applied:
All switches in open position:
The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the time
stamp of the last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it goes to
intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase.
In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change
position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discrepancy and is
supervised by this function. In case of a pole discrepancy situation, that is, the positions
of the one-phase switches are not equal positions for a time longer than the setting
tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from
the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch (SXSWI). At error the
"cause" value with highest priority is shown.
Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and
via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.
The different blocking possibilities are:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
851
Section 14
Control
852
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
SCSWI
EXE_CL
SXCBR
OR
CLOSE
SYNC_OK
START_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN
CLOSECMD
Synchro
check
Synchronizing
function
ANSI09000209-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000209 V1 EN
Figure 386:
Time diagrams
The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute
command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after
the selection of the object to operate.
select
execute command
tSelect
timer
t1
IEC05000092 V1 EN
Figure 387:
tSelect
The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation
granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
853
Section 14
Control
select
reservation request RES_RQ
reservation granted RES_GRT
tResResponse
timer
t1
IEC05000093-2-en.vsd
IEC05000093 V2 EN
Figure 388:
tResResponse
The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see Figure 389.
execute command
phase A open
close
phase B open
close
phase C open
close
command termination
phase A
command termination
phase B
command termination
phase C
command termination
t1
t1>tExecutionFB, then
long-operation-time in
'cause' is set
Figure 389:
tExecutionFB
The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the
execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the
time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start.
The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchronism-check conditions are
not fulfilled.
854
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum allowed time between the
start signal for synchronizing and the confirmation that synchronizing is in progress.
execute command
SYNC_OK
tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY
SY_INPRO
tSynchronizing
t2
t2>tSynchronizing, then
blocked-by-synchronism
check in 'cause' is set
en05000095_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000095 V1 EN
Figure 390:
14.3.7
14.3.7.1
Functionality
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions and
to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in
the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise the switching
operation and position.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
855
Section 14
Control
14.3.7.2
Function block
SXCBR
BLOCK
LR_SWI
OPEN
CLOSE
BL_OPEN
BL_CLOSE
BL_UPD
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
CBOPCAP
TR_OPEN
TR_CLOSE
RS_CNT
EEH_WARN
EEH_ALM
XIN*
XPOS
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
OP_BLKD
CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
TR_POS
CNT_VAL
L_CAUSE
EEHEALTH
CBOPCAP
IEC05000338-3-en.vsd
IEC05000338 V4 EN
Figure 391:
14.3.7.3
Signals
Table 444:
Name
856
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
LR_SWI
BOOLEAN
OPEN
BOOLEAN
CLOSE
BOOLEAN
BL_OPEN
BOOLEAN
BL_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
BL_UPD
BOOLEAN
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
CBOPCAP
INTEGER
TR_OPEN
BOOLEAN
TR_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
RS_CNT
BOOLEAN
EEH_WARN
BOOLEAN
EEH_ALM
BOOLEAN
XIN
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Table 445:
Name
14.3.7.4
Table 446:
Name
Type
Description
XPOS
GROUP SIGNAL
EXE_OP
BOOLEAN
EXE_CL
BOOLEAN
OP_BLKD
BOOLEAN
CL_BLKD
BOOLEAN
UPD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
TR_POS
INTEGER
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
L_CAUSE
INTEGER
EEHEALTH
INTEGER
CBOPCAP
INTEGER
Settings
SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
tStartMove
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
tIntermediate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
AdaptivePulse
Not adaptive
Adaptive
Not adaptive
tOpenPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tClosePulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
InitialCount
0 - 20000
14.3.7.5
Step
Default
Description
Operation principle
The Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as for example,
switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client
residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands,
evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all
conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
857
Section 14
Control
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE
it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set
to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal
is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) are rejected, even trip commands
from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is
described in Figure 392.
UE
TR
From I/O
Local= Operation at
switch yard level
switchLR
FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN
Figure 392:
Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals
is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch controller,
protection functions and autoreclosure.
The blocking possibilities are:
858
Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values.
Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Substitution
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality of the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because
that the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use the
manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position
indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution
is enabled, the other signals related to the position follow the substituted
position. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory. If the
function is blocked or blocked for update when the substitution is
released, the position value is kept the same as the last substitution value,
but the quality is changed to "questionable, old data", indicating that the
value is old and not reliable.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate.
tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse
is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position.
Figure 393 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
859
Section 14
Control
AdaptivePulse = TRUE
EXE_CL
Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
tStartMove timer
t1
tStartMove
tIntermediate timer
t2
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN
Figure 393:
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be
sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command
can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 394 shows the principle of the execute
output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN
Figure 394:
860
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse time
has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits for the end
of the execution pulse before telling the activating function that the
command is completed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position
and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed position and a close
command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets
when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false
the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS
=1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only
when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown
in Figure 395 .
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
861
Section 14
Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN
Figure 395:
14.3.8
14.3.8.1
Functionality
The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of positions
and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or grounding switches via binary output boards
and to supervise the switching operation and position.
862
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.3.8.2
Function block
SXSWI
BLOCK
LR_SWI
OPEN
CLOSE
BL_OPEN
BL_CLOSE
BL_UPD
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
SWOPCAP
RS_CNT
EEH_WARN
EEH_ALM
XIN
XPOS
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
OP_BLKD
CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
CNT_VAL
L_CAUSE
EEHEALTH
SWOPCAP
IEC05000339-3-en.vsd
IEC05000339 V3 EN
Figure 396:
14.3.8.3
Signals
Table 447:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
LR_SWI
BOOLEAN
OPEN
BOOLEAN
CLOSE
BOOLEAN
BL_OPEN
BOOLEAN
BL_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
BL_UPD
BOOLEAN
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
SWOPCAP
INTEGER
RS_CNT
BOOLEAN
EEH_WARN
BOOLEAN
EEH_ALM
BOOLEAN
XIN
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
863
Section 14
Control
Table 448:
Name
14.3.8.4
Table 449:
Name
Type
Description
XPOS
GROUP SIGNAL
EXE_OP
BOOLEAN
EXE_CL
BOOLEAN
OP_BLKD
BOOLEAN
CL_BLKD
BOOLEAN
UPD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
L_CAUSE
INTEGER
EEHEALTH
INTEGER
SWOPCAP
INTEGER
Settings
SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
tStartMove
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
tIntermediate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
15.000
AdaptivePulse
Not adaptive
Adaptive
Not adaptive
tOpenPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tClosePulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
SwitchType
Load Break
Disconnector
Grounding Switch
HS Groundg.
Switch
Disconnector
InitialCount
0 - 20000
14.3.8.5
Step
Default
Description
Operation principle
The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) are other functions such as for example, switch
controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client residing in
864
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands, evaluates block
conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions
indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs the execution command. In
case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see
Table 430.
SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value
can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or
remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic
Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC), for example.
Also, the health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to
IEC61850-8-1.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote switch
position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means
that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE
it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to
TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even
trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/
remote switch is described in Figure 397.
UE
TR
From I/O
Local= Operation at
switch yard level
switchLR
FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN
Figure 397:
Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals
is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch controller,
protection functions and autorecloser.
The blocking possibilities are:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
865
Section 14
Control
Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values.
Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.
Substitution
The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position and quality of the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because
the real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use the manually
entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position
indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution
is enabled, the other signals related to the position follow the substituted
position. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory. If the
function is blocked or blocked for update when the substitution is
released, the position value is kept the same as the last substitution value,
but the quality is changed to "questionable, old data", indicating that the
value is old and not reliable.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate.
tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse
is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position.
Figure 398 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
866
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
AdaptivePulse = TRUE
EXE_CL
Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
tStartMove timer
t1
tStartMove
tIntermediate timer
t2
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN
Figure 398:
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be
sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command
can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 399 shows the principle of the execute
output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN
Figure 399:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
867
Section 14
Control
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
If the controlled primary device reaches the final position before the
execution pulse time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the
function waits for the end of the execution pulse before telling the
activating function that the command is completed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position
and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close
command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets
when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false
the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS
=1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only
when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown
in Figure 400.
868
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN
Figure 400:
14.3.9
14.3.9.1
Functionality
The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking information
between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or
complete substation.
14.3.9.2
Function block
QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_RQ1
RES_RQ2
RES_RQ3
RES_RQ4
RES_RQ5
RES_RQ6
RES_RQ7
RES_RQ8
BLK_RES
OVERRIDE
RES_DATA
RES_GRT1
RES_GRT2
RES_GRT3
RES_GRT4
RES_GRT5
RES_GRT6
RES_GRT7
RES_GRT8
RES_BAYS
ACK_TO_B
RESERVED
EXCH_OUT
IEC05000340-2-en.vsd
IEC05000340 V2 EN
Figure 401:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
869
Section 14
Control
14.3.9.3
Signals
Table 450:
Name
Type
Default
Description
EXCH_IN
INTEGER
RES_RQ1
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ2
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ3
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ4
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ5
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ6
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ7
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ8
BOOLEAN
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
OVERRIDE
BOOLEAN
RES_DATA
INTEGER
Table 451:
Name
870
Description
RES_GRT1
BOOLEAN
RES_GRT2
BOOLEAN
RES_GRT3
BOOLEAN
RES_GRT4
BOOLEAN
RES_GRT5
BOOLEAN
RES_GRT6
BOOLEAN
RES_GRT7
BOOLEAN
RES_GRT8
BOOLEAN
RES_BAYS
BOOLEAN
ACK_TO_B
BOOLEAN
RESERVED
BOOLEAN
EXCH_OUT
INTEGER
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.3.9.4
Table 452:
Name
Settings
QCRSV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
tCancelRes
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
ParamRequest1
ParamRequest2
ParamRequest3
ParamRequest4
ParamRequest5
ParamRequest6
ParamRequest7
ParamRequest8
14.3.9.5
Step
Default
Description
Operation principle
The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function starts to
operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if
there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the
function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input
signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller (SCWI). The signals for request
from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN.
These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to
RES_DATA in QCRSV.
The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only
(TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no reservation
request RES_BAYS is created.
871
Section 14
Control
If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx
(where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch
controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset and
the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.
872
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_ GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_ GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_ GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_ GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_ GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_ GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_ GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_ GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_ BAYS
BLK_ RES
ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_ DATA EXCH_ OUT
QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_ GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_ GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_ GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_ GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_ GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_ GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_ GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_ GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_ BAYS
BLK_ RES
ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_ DATA EXCH_ OUT
OR
OR
OR
RES_ BAYS
ACK_TO_B
RESERVED
ANSI05000088_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000088 V2 EN
Figure 402:
14.3.10
14.3.10.1
Functionality
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from other
bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60
instances are available).
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
873
Section 14
Control
14.3.10.2
Function block
RESIN1
BAY_ACK
BAY_VAL
BAY_RES
ACK_F_B
ANY_ACK
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC05000341-2-en.vsd
IEC05000341 V2 EN
Figure 403:
RESIN2
EXCH_IN
BAY_ACK
BAY_VAL
BAY_RES
ACK_F_B
ANY_ACK
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC09000807_1_en.vsd
IEC09000807 V1 EN
Figure 404:
14.3.10.3
Signals
Table 453:
Name
Default
Description
BAY_ACK
BOOLEAN
BAY_VAL
BOOLEAN
BAY_RES
BOOLEAN
Table 454:
Name
874
Description
ACK_F_B
BOOLEAN
ANY_ACK
BOOLEAN
VALID_TX
BOOLEAN
RE_RQ_B
BOOLEAN
V_RE_RQ
BOOLEAN
EXCH_OUT
INTEGER
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Table 455:
Name
Type
BAY_ACK
BOOLEAN
BAY_VAL
BOOLEAN
BAY_RES
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 457:
Name
FutureUse
Table 458:
Name
FutureUse
14.3.10.5
Description
INTEGER
Table 456:
14.3.10.4
Default
EXCH_IN
Type
Description
ACK_F_B
BOOLEAN
ANY_ACK
BOOLEAN
VALID_TX
BOOLEAN
RE_RQ_B
BOOLEAN
V_RE_RQ
BOOLEAN
EXCH_OUT
INTEGER
Settings
RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Bay in use
Bay future use
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Bay in use
Description
The bay for this ResIn block is for future use
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Bay in use
Description
The bay for this ResIn block is for future use
Operation principle
The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The
logic diagram in Figure 405 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
875
Section 14
Control
function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals transferred
over the station bus from another bay.
EXCH_IN
INT
BIN
ACK_F_B
AND
FutureUse
OR
BAY_ACK
ANY_ACK
OR
VALID_TX
AND
BAY_VAL
OR
RE_RQ_B
OR
BAY_RES
AND
V _RE_RQ
OR
BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT
INT..Integer
BIN..Binary
en05000089_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000089 V1 EN
Figure 405:
Figure 406 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules in the
current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the reservation
mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions are connected to
the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles the reservation function in the own bay.
876
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
Bay 1
Bay 2
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
Bay n
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
QCRSV
RES_DATA
en05000090.vsd
IEC05000090 V2 EN
Figure 406:
14.4
Voltage control
14.4.1
Identification
Function description
14.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
TCMYLTC
84
TCLYLTC
84
Functionality
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC (84) as well as Tap
changer control and supervision, 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC (84) are is used for control
of power transformers with a on-load tap changer. The functions provide automatic
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
877
Section 14
Control
14.4.3
14.4.3.1
Operation principle
Reading of tap changer position
The tap changer position can be received to the tap changer control and supervision, 6
binary inputs TCMYLTC (84) or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC (84) function block in the
following ways:
1.
2.
3.
Via binary input signals, one per tap position (max. 6 or 32 positions).
Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals, or Gray coded
binary signals.
Via a mA input signal.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals or Gray coded
binary signals
The Tap changer control and supervision, (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC ,84) decodes binary
data from up to six binary inputs to an integer value. The input pattern may be decoded
either as BIN, BCD or GRAY format depending on the setting of the parameter
CodeType.
It is also possible to use even parity check of the input binary signal. Whether the parity
check shall be used or not is set with the setting parameter UseParity.
The input BIERR on (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC , 84) can be used as supervisory input for
indication of any external error ( Binary Input Module) in the system for reading of tap
changer position. Likewise, the input OUTERR can be used as a supervisory of the Binary
Input Module.
The truth table (see table 459) shows the conversion for Binary, Binary Coded Decimal,
and Gray coded signals.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
879
Section 14
Control
Table 459:
IEC06000522 V1 EN
The Gray code conversion above is not complete and therefore the conversion from
decimal numbers to Gray code is given below.
880
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Table 460:
IEC06000523 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
881
Section 14
Control
14.4.4
Function block
TCMYLTC (84)
YLTCIN*
VRAISE
TCINPROG
VLOWER
INERR
HIPOSAL
RESETERR
LOPOSAL
OUTERR
POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT
CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT
TCERRAL
PARITY
POSOUT
BIERR
CONVERR
B1
NEWPOS
B2
HIDIFPOS
B3
INVALPOS
B4
TCPOS
B5
YLTCOUT
B6
MA
ANSI07000038-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000038 V2 EN
Figure 407:
882
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
TCLYLTC (84)
YLTCIN*
VRAISE
TCINPROG
VLOWER
INERR
HIPOSAL
RESETERR
LOPOSAL
OUTERR
POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT
CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT
TCERRAL
PARITY
POSOUT
BIERR
CONVERR
B1
NEWPOS
B2
HIDIFPOS
B3
INVALPOS
B4
TCPOS
B5
YLTCOUT
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
MA
ANSI07000037-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000037 V2 EN
Figure 408:
14.4.5
Signals
Table 461:
Name
Default
Description
YLTCIN
GROUP
SIGNAL
TCINPROG
BOOLEAN
INERR
BOOLEAN
RESETERR
BOOLEAN
OUTERR
BOOLEAN
RS_CLCNT
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
883
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
RS_OPCNT
BOOLEAN
PARITY
BOOLEAN
BIERR
BOOLEAN
B1
BOOLEAN
B2
BOOLEAN
B3
BOOLEAN
B4
BOOLEAN
B5
BOOLEAN
B6
BOOLEAN
MA
REAL
Table 462:
Name
Description
VRAISE
BOOLEAN
VLOWER
BOOLEAN
HIPOSAL
BOOLEAN
LOPOSAL
BOOLEAN
POSERRAL
BOOLEAN
CMDERRAL
BOOLEAN
TCERRAL
BOOLEAN
POSOUT
BOOLEAN
CONVERR
BOOLEAN
NEWPOS
BOOLEAN
HIDIFPOS
BOOLEAN
INVALPOS
BOOLEAN
YLTCOUT
GROUP SIGNAL
Table 463:
Name
Default
Description
YLTCIN
GROUP
SIGNAL
TCINPROG
BOOLEAN
INERR
BOOLEAN
RESETERR
BOOLEAN
884
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
OUTERR
BOOLEAN
RS_CLCNT
BOOLEAN
RS_OPCNT
BOOLEAN
PARITY
BOOLEAN
BIERR
BOOLEAN
B1
BOOLEAN
B2
BOOLEAN
B3
BOOLEAN
B4
BOOLEAN
B5
BOOLEAN
B6
BOOLEAN
B7
BOOLEAN
B8
BOOLEAN
B9
BOOLEAN
B10
BOOLEAN
B11
BOOLEAN
B12
BOOLEAN
B13
BOOLEAN
B14
BOOLEAN
B15
BOOLEAN
B16
BOOLEAN
B17
BOOLEAN
B18
BOOLEAN
B19
BOOLEAN
B20
BOOLEAN
B21
BOOLEAN
B22
BOOLEAN
B23
BOOLEAN
B24
BOOLEAN
B25
BOOLEAN
B26
BOOLEAN
B27
BOOLEAN
B28
BOOLEAN
B29
BOOLEAN
B30
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
885
Section 14
Control
Name
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
B32
BOOLEAN
MA
REAL
Table 464:
Name
Description
VRAISE
BOOLEAN
VLOWER
BOOLEAN
HIPOSAL
BOOLEAN
LOPOSAL
BOOLEAN
POSERRAL
BOOLEAN
CMDERRAL
BOOLEAN
TCERRAL
BOOLEAN
POSOUT
BOOLEAN
CONVERR
BOOLEAN
NEWPOS
BOOLEAN
HIDIFPOS
BOOLEAN
INVALPOS
BOOLEAN
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
TCPOS
INTEGER
YLTCOUT
GROUP SIGNAL
Table 465:
Name
BLOCK
Table 466:
Name
886
Type
B31
Default
0
Description
Block of function
Description
VCTR_REC
GROUP SIGNAL
COMVALID
BOOLEAN
Communication is valid
DATVALID
BOOLEAN
Data valid
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.4.6
Table 467:
Name
Settings
TCMYLTC (84) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
tTCTimeout
1 - 120
tPulseDur
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.5
Table 468:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
LowVoltTap
1 - 63
HighVoltTap
1 - 63
33
mALow
0.000 - 25.000
mA
0.001
4.000
mAHigh
0.000 - 25.000
mA
0.001
20.000
CodeType
BIN
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
BIN
UseParity
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tStable
1 - 60
CLFactor
1.0 - 3.0
0.1
2.0
InitCLCounter
0 - 9999999
250000
EnabTapCmd
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
Table 469:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
tTCTimeout
1 - 120
tPulseDur
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.5
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
887
Section 14
Control
Table 470:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
LowVoltTap
1 - 63
HighVoltTap
1 - 63
33
mALow
0.000 - 25.000
mA
0.001
4.000
mAHigh
0.000 - 25.000
mA
0.001
20.000
CodeType
BIN
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
BIN
UseParity
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tStable
1 - 60
CLFactor
1.0 - 3.0
0.1
2.0
InitCLCounter
0 - 9999999
250000
EnabTapCmd
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
14.4.7
Monitored data
Table 471:
Name
TCPOS
Table 472:
Name
Type
INTEGER
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
Integer value corresponding to
actual tap position
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
CLCNT_VAL
REAL
Remaining number of
operations at rated load
TCPOS
INTEGER
Table 473:
Name
TCPOS
888
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
Integer value corresponding to
actual tap position
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.4.8
Operation principle
TCMYLTC (84) and TCLYLTC (84) also serve the purpose of giving information about
tap position to the transformer differential protection T2WPDIF (87T) and T3WPDIF
(87T).
14.4.9
Technical data
Table 474:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Transformer reactance
(0.1200.0), primary
(1.0100.0) s
(85.0120.0)% of VBase
0.25 % of Vn
(0.29.0)% of VBase
(0.19.0)% of VBase
(80180)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(70120)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(50120)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(31000) s
0.2% or 600 ms
whichever is greater
(11000) s
0.2% or 600 ms
whichever is greater
(3120) s
0.2% or 600 ms
whichever is greater
Line resistance
(0.00150.00), primary
Line reactance
(-150.00150.00), primary
(-20.020.0)% of VBase
(-20.020.0)% of VBase
(306000) s
0.2% or 600 ms
whichever is greater
(0100)% of I1Base
(5250)% of I1Base
1.0% of In at IIn
1.0% of I at I>In
889
Section 14
Control
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(030) operations/hour
(0100) operations/day
(1120) minutes
(330) operations/window
(-9999.999999.99) MW
1.0% of Sn
(-9999.999999.99) MVAr
1.0% of Sn
(16000) s
0.2% or 600 ms
whichever is greater
(163)
(0.00025.000) mA
(160) s
0.2% or 200 ms
whichever is greater
(1120) s
0.2% or 200 ms
whichever is greater
(0.510.0) s
0.2% or 200 ms
whichever is greater
14.5
14.5.1
Identification
Function description
Logic rotating switch for function
selection and LHMI presentation
890
IEC 61850
identification
SLGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.5.2
Functionality
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC (or the
selector switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch functionality
compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches
are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set
values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system
reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The selector switch function eliminates all
these problems.
14.5.3
Function block
SLGAPC
BLOCK
PSTO
UP
DOWN
^P01
^P02
^P03
^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN
IEC14000005-1-en.vsd
IEC14000005 V1 EN
Figure 409:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
891
Section 14
Control
14.5.4
Signals
Table 475:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
UP
BOOLEAN
DOWN
BOOLEAN
Table 476:
Name
Type
Description
P01
BOOLEAN
P02
BOOLEAN
P03
BOOLEAN
P04
BOOLEAN
P05
BOOLEAN
P06
BOOLEAN
P07
BOOLEAN
P08
BOOLEAN
P09
BOOLEAN
P10
BOOLEAN
P11
BOOLEAN
P12
BOOLEAN
P13
BOOLEAN
P14
BOOLEAN
P15
BOOLEAN
P16
BOOLEAN
P17
BOOLEAN
P18
BOOLEAN
P19
BOOLEAN
P20
BOOLEAN
P21
BOOLEAN
P22
BOOLEAN
P23
BOOLEAN
P24
BOOLEAN
P25
BOOLEAN
P26
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
14.5.5
Table 477:
Name
Type
Description
P27
BOOLEAN
P28
BOOLEAN
P29
BOOLEAN
P30
BOOLEAN
P31
BOOLEAN
P32
BOOLEAN
SWPOSN
INTEGER
Settings
SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
NrPos
2 - 32
32
OutType
Pulsed
Steady
Steady
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tDelay
0.000 - 60000.000
0.010
0.000
StopAtExtremes
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
14.5.6
Monitored data
Table 478:
Name
SWPOSN
14.5.7
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
Switch position (integer)
Operation principle
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC)
function has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP
input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
ascending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and one activates the
UP input then the output P04 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN
input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
descending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and one activates the
DOWN input then the output P02 will be activated). Depending on the output settings the
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
893
Section 14
Control
output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, the output will be active
till the time it receives next operation of UP/DOWN inputs. Also, depending on the
settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive
front and the output activation.
Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application
Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired
position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or
remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the function operation, by
activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and further
operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified through the
PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal
function block can be connected. SLGAPC function block has also an integer value
output, that generates the actual position number. The positions and the block names are
fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the
position names instead of a number.
14.5.7.1
Graphical display
There are two possibilities for SLGAPC
if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual position
names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but only
the first three letters of the name will be used.
In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when
building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the
following sequence of commands will ensure:
894
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DAL
Control
Single Line Diagram
Commands
Control
Measurements
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Reset
Authorization
Language
Open
Close
../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
P: Disc
OK
N: Disc Fe
Cancel
../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DFW
ANSI06000421-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000421 V2 EN
Figure 410:
Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.
14.6
14.6.1
Identification
Function description
Selector mini switch
IEC 61850
identification
VSGAPC
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
895
Section 14
Control
14.6.2
Functionality
The Selector mini switch VSGAPC function block is a multipurpose function used for a
variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.
VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu, from a symbol on the single line diagram
(SLD) on the local HMI or from Binary inputs
14.6.3
Function block
VSGAPC
BLOCK
PSTO
IPOS1
IPOS2
BLOCKED
POSITION
POS1
POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
IEC14000066-1-en.vsd
IEC14000066 V1 EN
Figure 411:
14.6.4
Signals
Table 479:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
IPOS1
BOOLEAN
IPOS2
BOOLEAN
Table 480:
Name
896
Description
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
POSITION
INTEGER
POS1
BOOLEAN
POS2
BOOLEAN
CMDPOS12
BOOLEAN
CMDPOS21
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.6.5
Table 481:
Name
Settings
VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
CtlModel
Dir Norm
SBO Enh
Dir Norm
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Pulsed
Operation mode
tSelect
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
14.6.6
Operation principle
Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can be used for double purpose, in the same way
as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:
for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the
IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1 and
POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in the
configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from
the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from
the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated
with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on the
screen. A symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in PCM600.
The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of operators
place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote). An INTONE
connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow operation from local
HMI.
As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation,
where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result.
The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name of
the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
897
Section 14
Control
IPOS1
IPOS2
PosUndefined
P00
Position1
P01
Position2
P10
PosBadState
P11
14.7
14.7.1
Identification
Function description
Generic communication function for
Double Point indication
14.7.2
IEC 61850
identification
DPGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC function block is
used to send double indications to other systems, equipment or functions in the substation
through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is especially used in the
interlocking station-wide logics.
14.7.3
Function block
IEC13000081 V1 EN
Figure 412:
898
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.7.4
Signals
Table 482:
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Open indication
CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Close indication
VALID
BOOLEAN
Valid indication
Table 483:
Name
POSITION
14.7.5
Default
OPEN
Type
INTEGER
Description
Double point indication
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
14.7.6
Operation principle
When receiving the input signals, DPGAPC sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the
systems, equipment or functions that requests and thus subscribes on these signals. To be
able to get the signals into other systems, equipment or functions, one must use other tools,
described in the Engineering manual and define which function block in which systems,
equipment or functions should receive this information.
14.8
14.8.1
Identification
Function description
Single point generic control 8 signals
14.8.2
IEC 61850
identification
SPC8GAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC function block is a collection of 8
single point commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of LED's
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
899
Section 14
Control
or putting IED in "ChangeLock" state from remote. In this way, simple commands can be
sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result
of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and
SPGAPC function blocks. The commands can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse
time.
14.8.3
Function block
SPC8GAPC
BLOCK
PSTO
^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
ANSI07000143-3-en.vsd
ANSI07000143 V1 EN
Figure 413:
14.8.4
Signals
Table 484:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
PSTO
INTEGER
Table 485:
Name
900
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Command output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Command output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Command output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Command output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Command output 5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Command output 6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Command output 7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Command output 8
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.8.5
Table 486:
Name
Settings
SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
PulseMode1
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
PulseMode2
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
PulseMode3
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse3
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
PulseMode4
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse4
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
PulseMode5
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse5
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
PulseMode6
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse6
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
PulseMode7
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse7
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
PulseMode8
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse8
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
14.8.6
Operation principle
The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the eight
outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected. The
settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if the
signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block
the operation of the function in case a command is sent, no output will be activated.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
901
Section 14
Control
PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions.
Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator
places only, REMOTE operator place is used in SPC8GAPC function.
14.9
14.9.1
Identification
Function description
AutomationBits, command function for
DNP3
14.9.2
IEC 61850
identification
AUTOBITS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get into the
configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The AUTOBITS
function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and
MULTICMDRCV (for LON).
902
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.9.3
Function block
AUTOBITS
BLOCK
PSTO
^CMDBIT1
^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32
IEC09000925-1-en.vsd
IEC09000925 V1 EN
Figure 414:
14.9.4
Signals
Table 487:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
Table 488:
Name
Description
CMDBIT1
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT2
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT3
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT4
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT5
BOOLEAN
903
Section 14
Control
Name
14.9.5
Table 489:
Name
Operation
904
Type
Description
CMDBIT6
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT7
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT8
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT9
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT10
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT11
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT12
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT13
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT14
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT15
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT16
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT17
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT18
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT19
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT20
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT21
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT22
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT23
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT24
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT25
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT26
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT27
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT28
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT29
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT30
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT31
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT32
BOOLEAN
Settings
AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Table 490:
Name
Operation
Table 491:
Name
BaudRate
Table 492:
Name
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
9600 Bd
Description
Baud-rate for serial port
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DLinkConfirm
Never
Sometimes
Always
Never
Data-link confirm
tDLinkTimeout
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
DLinkRetries
0 - 255
tRxToTxMinDel
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Rx to Tx minimum delay in s
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048
StopBits
1-2
Stop bits
Parity
No
Even
Odd
Even
Parity
tRTSWarmUp
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.050
tMaxRndDelBkOf
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
905
Section 14
Control
Table 493:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Disabled
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Table 494:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048
Table 495:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Disabled
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Table 496:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048
906
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Table 497:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Disabled
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Table 498:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048
Table 499:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Disabled
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Table 500:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
907
Section 14
Control
Table 501:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
ChToAssociate
RS485
Optical
RS485
Channel to associate to
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
908
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Table 502:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
UREvClassMask
Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Disabled
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
tVRRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
tVROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
tVREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tVREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tVREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
Yes
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
909
Section 14
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
Step
Default
Table 503:
Name
Unit
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.255
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
910
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 504:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
UREvClassMask
Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Disabled
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
tVRRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
tVROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
911
Section 14
Control
Name
Unit
Step
Default
tVREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tVREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tVREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 505:
Name
Values (Range)
Description
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.255
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
912
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 506:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
913
Section 14
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
UREvClassMask
Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Disabled
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
tVRRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
tVROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
tVREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tVREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tVREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
914
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Table 507:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.255
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
915
Section 14
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 508:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
UREvClassMask
Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Disabled
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
tVRRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
tVROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
916
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Unit
Step
Default
tVREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tVREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tVREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 509:
Name
Values (Range)
Description
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.255
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
917
Section 14
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 510:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
918
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
UREvClassMask
Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Disabled
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
tVRRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
tVROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
tVREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100
tVREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100
tVREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
919
Section 14
Control
14.9.6
Operation principle
AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be
mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in
DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To
operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulseOn, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were
appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive
100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.
There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the
same way the setting Operation: Enabled/Disabled does. That means that, upon activation
of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts like an
overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation of
BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again,
momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator place. The
command can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Local then no
change is applied to the outputs.
14.10
14.10.1
Identification
Function description
Single command, 16 signals
14.10.2
IEC 61850
identification
SINGLECMD
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the
local HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to
control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.
920
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
14.10.3
Function block
SINGLECMD
BLOCK
^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
^OUT9
^OUT10
^OUT11
^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16
IEC05000698-2-en.vsd
IEC05000698 V3 EN
Figure 415:
14.10.4
Signals
Table 511:
Name
BLOCK
Table 512:
Name
Default
0
Description
Block single command function
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
OUT2
BOOLEAN
OUT3
BOOLEAN
OUT4
BOOLEAN
OUT5
BOOLEAN
OUT6
BOOLEAN
OUT7
BOOLEAN
OUT8
BOOLEAN
OUT9
BOOLEAN
OUT10
BOOLEAN
OUT11
BOOLEAN
OUT12
BOOLEAN
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
921
Section 14
Control
Name
14.10.5
Table 513:
Name
Operation
14.10.6
Type
Description
OUT14
BOOLEAN
OUT15
BOOLEAN
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Settings
SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Steady
Pulsed
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Operation principle
Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals. The
outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or from the
local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters in
PCM600.
The output signals can be of the types Disabled, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration
setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block.
The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode, SINGLECMD function has
a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK
input is available used to block the updating of the outputs.
The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in functions
or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.
922
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
Section 15
Logic
15.1
15.1.1
Identification
Function description
Tripping logic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
94
SMPPTRC
I->O
SYMBOL-K V1 EN
15.1.2
Functionality
A function block for protection tripping is always provided as basic for each circuit
breaker involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to
ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct cooperation with autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for evolving faults and
breaker lock-out.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
923
Section 15
Logic
15.1.3
Function block
SMPPTRC (94)
BLOCK
TRIP
BLKLKOUT
TR_A
TRINP_3P
TR_B
TRINP_A
TR_C
TRINP_B
TR1P
TRINP_C
TR2P
PS_A
TR3P
PS_B
CLLKOUT
PS_C
1PTRZ
1PTRGF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT
ANSI05000707-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000707 V2 EN
Figure 416:
15.1.4
Signals
Table 514:
Name
924
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKLKOUT
BOOLEAN
TRINP_3P
BOOLEAN
TRINP_A
BOOLEAN
Trip phase A
TRINP_B
BOOLEAN
Trip phase B
TRINP_C
BOOLEAN
Trip phase C
PS_A
BOOLEAN
PS_B
BOOLEAN
PS_C
BOOLEAN
1PTRZ
BOOLEAN
1PTRGF
BOOLEAN
P3PTR
BOOLEAN
SETLKOUT
BOOLEAN
RSTLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
Table 515:
Name
15.1.5
Table 516:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TR_A
BOOLEAN
TR_B
BOOLEAN
TR_C
BOOLEAN
TR1P
BOOLEAN
Tripping single-pole
TR2P
BOOLEAN
Tripping two-pole
TR3P
BOOLEAN
Tripping three-pole
CLLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
SMPPTRC (94) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Program
3 phase
1p/3p
1p/2p/3p
1p/3p
tTripMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
tWaitForPHS
0.020 - 0.500
0.001
0.050
Table 517:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TripLockout
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
AutoLock
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
15.1.6
Operation principle
The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output
SMPPTRC (94) is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure
the breaker opening.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
925
Section 15
Logic
For three-pole tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC (94) has a single input
(TRINP_3P) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the
IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are
routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary
outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.
BLOCK
tTripMin
TRIN
AND
OR
TRIP
Figure 417:
SMPPTRC (94) function for single-pole and two-pole tripping has additional phase
segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs
enable single- pole and two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own
phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase
segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated trip inputs of the
expanded SMPPTRC (94) function. Examples of such protection functions are the
residual overcurrent protections. The expanded SMPPTRC (94) function has two inputs
for these functions, one for impedance tripping (for example, carrier-aided tripping
commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for ground fault tripping (for
example, tripping output from a residual overcurrent protection).
Additional logic, including a timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip command for
these protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals.
The expanded SMPPTRC (94) function has three trip outputs TR_A, TR_B, TR_C
(besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs
binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There
are also separate output signals indicating single-pole, two-pole or three-pole trip. These
signals are important for cooperation with the autorecloser SMBRREC (79) function.
The expanded SMPPTRC (94) function is equipped with logic which secures correct
operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input
is also provided which disables single- pole and two-pole tripping, forcing all tripping to
be three-pole.
In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC (94) function block is used for each
breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and autoreclosing is used.
926
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from
another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three-pole trip, if
desired.
It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing only
the choice is by setting TripLockout.
15.1.6.1
Logic diagram
TRINP_A
TRINP_B
OR
TRINP_C
OR
1PTRZ
1PTRGF
OR
TRINP_3P
AND
INTL_ABCTRIP
Program = 3 phase
ANSI05000517-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000517 V3 EN
Figure 418:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
927
Section 15
Logic
TRINP_3P
TRINP_A
PS_A
TR_A
OR
AND
TRINP_B
TR_B
PS_B
OR
AND
TRINP_C
PS_C
TR_C
OR
AND
OR
OR
OR
- loop
-loop
OR
AND
1PTRGF
AND
AND
AND
tWaitForPHS
OR
1PTRZ
ANSI10000056-3-en.vsd
ANSI10000056 V3 EN
Figure 419:
928
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
ANSI05000519-3-en.vsdx
ANSI05000519 V3 EN
Figure 420:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
929
Section 15
Logic
BLOCK
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
ANSI05000520-4-en.vsdx
ANSI05000520 V4 EN
Figure 421:
930
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
ANSI05000521-3.vsd
ANSI05000521 V3 EN
Figure 422:
15.1.7
Technical data
Table 518:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip action
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
greater
(0.020-0.500) s
0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
greater
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
greater
Table 519:
Function
SMPPTRC
8 ms
100 ms
12
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
931
Section 15
Logic
15.2
15.2.1
Identification
Function description
Trip matrix logic
15.2.2
IEC 61850
identification
TMAGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other logical
output signals to different output contacts on the IED.
The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected to
physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable pulse or
steady output.
932
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.2.3
Function block
TMAGAPC
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
BLK3
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
IEC13000197-1-en.vsd
IEC13000197 V1 EN
Figure 423:
15.2.4
Signals
Table 520:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of output 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of output 2
BLK3
BOOLEAN
Block of output 3
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
933
Section 15
Logic
Name
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary input 16
INPUT17
BOOLEAN
Binary input 17
INPUT18
BOOLEAN
Binary input 18
INPUT19
BOOLEAN
Binary input 19
INPUT20
BOOLEAN
Binary input 20
INPUT21
BOOLEAN
Binary input 21
INPUT22
BOOLEAN
Binary input 22
INPUT23
BOOLEAN
Binary input 23
INPUT24
BOOLEAN
Binary input 24
INPUT25
BOOLEAN
Binary input 25
INPUT26
BOOLEAN
Binary input 26
INPUT27
BOOLEAN
Binary input 27
INPUT28
BOOLEAN
Binary input 28
INPUT29
BOOLEAN
Binary input 29
INPUT30
BOOLEAN
Binary input 30
INPUT31
BOOLEAN
Binary input 31
INPUT32
BOOLEAN
Binary input 32
Table 521:
Name
934
Type
INPUT5
Description
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.2.5
Table 522:
Name
Settings
TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
PulseTime
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
OnDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OffDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
ModeOutput1
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
ModeOutput2
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
ModeOutput3
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
15.2.6
Operation principle
The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output
signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide
grouping of connected input signals to the three output signals from the function block.
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1.
2.
3.
when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value
1 the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 the
third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
935
Section 15
Logic
PulseTime
AND
ModeOutput1
INPUT 1
0-OnDelay
0
OR
INPUT 16
0
0-OffDelay
OR
AND
OUTPUT 1
PulseTime
AND
ModeOutput2
INPUT 17
0-OnDelay
0
OR
INPUT 32
0
0-OffDelay
OR
AND
OUTPUT 2
PulseTime
AND
ModeOutput3
OR
0-OnDelay
0
0
0-OffDelay
OR
AND
OUTPUT 3
ANSI10000055-3-en.vsd
ANSI10000055 V3 EN
Figure 424:
Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly
to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the
pulse time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum
duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.
15.2.7
Technical data
Table 523:
Function
TMAGAPC
936
100 ms
-
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.3
15.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
15.3.2
IEC 60617
identification
ALMCALH
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route several alarm signals to a
common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.
15.3.3
Function block
ALMCALH
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
ALARM
IEC13000181-1-en.vsd
IEC13000181 V1 EN
15.3.4
Signals
Table 524:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
937
Section 15
Logic
Name
Type
Binary input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary input 16
Name
Type
ALARM
Table 526:
Name
Operation
15.3.6
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 525:
15.3.5
Default
INPUT6
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
ALMCALH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Operation principle
The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and one
ALARM output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to
provide grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM signal from the
function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the ALARM
output signal will get logical value 1.
The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady
signal.
938
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
Input 1
Input 16
ALARM
200 ms
0
ANSI13000191-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000191 V1 EN
Figure 425:
15.3.7
Technical data
Table 527:
Function
ALMCALH
3 ms
15.4
15.4.1
Identification
Function description
Logic for group warning
15.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
WRNCALH
100 ms
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The group warning logic function WRNCALH is used to route several warning signals to
a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
939
Section 15
Logic
15.4.3
Function block
WRNCALH
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
WARNING
IEC13000182-1-en.vsd
IEC13000182 V1 EN
15.4.4
Signals
Table 528:
Name
940
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary input 16
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
Table 529:
Name
Type
WARNING
15.4.5
Table 530:
Name
Operation
15.4.6
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
WRNCALH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Operation principle
The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1
WARNING output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order
to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output WARNING signal from the
function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the
WARNING output signal will get logical value 1.
The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady
signal.
INPUT1
1
WARNING
200 ms
0
INPUT16
ANSI13000192-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000192 V1 EN
15.4.7
Technical data
Table 531:
Function
WRNCALH
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
100 ms
5
941
Section 15
Logic
15.5
15.5.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
15.5.2
IEC 60617
identification
INDCALH
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route several indication signals
to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.
15.5.3
Function block
INDCALH
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
IND
IEC13000183-1-en.vsd
IEC13000183 V1 EN
15.5.4
Signals
Table 532:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
Name
Type
Binary input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary input 16
Name
Type
IND
Table 534:
Name
Operation
15.5.6
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 533:
15.5.5
Default
INPUT6
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
INDCALH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Operation principle
The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1
IND output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to
provide grouping of connected input signals to the output IND signal from the function
block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the IND
output signal will get logical value 1.
The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady
signal.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
943
Section 15
Logic
INPUT1
1
IND
200 ms
0
INPUT16
ANSI13000193-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000193 V1 EN
15.5.7
Technical data
Table 535:
Function
INDCALH
15.6
100 ms
-
944
AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.
GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass from
the input to the output.
INVERTER function block that inverts one input signal to the output.
LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.
OR function block. Each block has up to six inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.6.1
PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.
RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state
it had before the power interruption. RESET input has priority.
SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state
it had before the power interruption. The SET input has priority.
TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input
signal. The timer has a settable time delay.
XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.
15.6.1.1
Function block
AND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
OUT
NOUT
IEC14000071-1-en.vsd
IEC14000071 V1 EN
Figure 426:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
945
Section 15
Logic
15.6.1.2
Signals
Table 536:
Name
Type
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input signal 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input signal 4
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Technical data
Table 538:
Logic block
3 ms
AND
15.6.2
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 537:
15.6.1.3
Default
INPUT1
60
60
100 ms
160
15.6.2.1
Function block
GATE
INPUT
OUT
IEC04000410-2-en.vsd
IEC04000410 V2 EN
Figure 427:
15.6.2.2
Signals
Table 539:
Name
INPUT
946
Default
0
Description
Input to gate
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
Table 540:
Name
Type
OUT
15.6.2.3
Table 541:
Name
Operation
15.6.2.4
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
GATE Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Disabled
Enabled
Step
Default
Description
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Technical data
Table 542:
Logic block
3 ms
GATE
10
10
15.6.3
15.6.3.1
Function block
100 ms
20
INV
INPUT
OUT
IEC04000404_2_en.vsd
IEC04000404 V2 EN
Figure 428:
15.6.3.2
Signals
Table 543:
Name
INPUT
Table 544:
Name
OUT
Default
0
Description
Input
Description
Output
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
947
Section 15
Logic
15.6.3.3
Technical data
Table 545:
Logic block
INV
15.6.4
3 ms
90
90
100 ms
240
15.6.4.1
Function block
LLD
INPUT
OUT
IEC15000144.vsd
IEC15000144 V1 EN
Figure 429:
15.6.4.2
Signals
Table 546:
Name
Type
INPUT
Table 547:
BOOLEAN
Type
OUT
Description
Input signal
BOOLEAN
Description
Output signal delayed one execution cycle
Technical data
Table 548:
Logic block
LLD
948
Name
15.6.4.3
Default
100 ms
20
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.6.5
OR function block OR
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.
The OR function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
15.6.5.1
Function block
OR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
OUT
NOUT
IEC04000405_2_en.vsd
IEC04000405 V2 EN
Figure 430:
15.6.5.2
OR function block
Signals
Table 549:
OR Input signals
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Input 6 to OR gate
Table 550:
OR Output signals
Name
15.6.5.3
Default
INPUT1
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Technical data
Table 551:
Logic block
OR
Number of OR instances
3 ms
60
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
100 ms
160
949
Section 15
Logic
15.6.6
15.6.6.1
Function block
PULSETIMER
INPUT
OUT
IEC04000407-3-en.vsd
IEC04000407 V3 EN
Figure 431:
15.6.6.2
Signals
Table 552:
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 553:
Name
t
15.6.6.4
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
0.000 - 90000.000
Unit
Step
Default
0.001
Description
0.010
Technical data
Table 555:
Logic block
PULSETIMER
950
Type
OUT
Table 554:
Description
Name
15.6.6.3
Default
10
10
20
Range or Value
(0.00090000.000) s
Accuracy
0.5% 10 ms
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.6.7
RESET
15.6.7.1
SET
OUT
NOUT
Last
value
Inverted last
value
Function block
RSMEMORY
SET
RESET
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN
Figure 432:
15.6.7.2
Signals
Table 557:
Name
Default
Description
SET
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Table 558:
Name
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
951
Section 15
Logic
15.6.7.3
Table 559:
Name
Memory
15.6.7.4
Settings
RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Disabled
Enabled
Step
Description
Enabled
Technical data
Table 560:
Logic block
3 ms
RSMEMORY
15.6.8
Default
10
10
100 ms
20
15.6.8.1
OUT
NOUT
Last
value
Inverted
last value
Function block
SRMEMORY
SET
OUT
RESET
NOUT
IEC04000408_2_en.vsd
IEC04000408 V2 EN
Figure 433:
952
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.6.8.2
Signals
Table 562:
Name
Type
RESET
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 564:
Name
Memory
15.6.8.4
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Enabled
Technical data
Table 565:
Logic block
SRMEMORY
15.6.9
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 563:
15.6.8.3
Default
SET
100 ms
20
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
953
Section 15
Logic
Input
tdelay
On
Off
tdelay
t
IEC08000289-2-en.vsd
IEC08000289 V2 EN
Figure 434:
15.6.9.1
Function block
TIMERSET
INPUT
ON
OFF
IEC04000411-2-en.vsd
IEC04000411 V2 EN
Figure 435:
15.6.9.2
Signals
Table 566:
Name
INPUT
Table 567:
Name
954
Default
0
Description
Input to timer
Description
ON
BOOLEAN
OFF
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.6.9.3
Table 568:
Name
Settings
TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
0.000 - 90000.000
0.001
0.000
15.6.9.4
Technical data
Table 569:
Logic block
TIMERSET
15.6.10
15
15
30
Range or Value
(0.00090000.000) s
Accuracy
0.5% 10 ms
INPUT1
15.6.10.1
INPUT2
OUT
NOUT
Function block
XOR
INPUT1
INPUT2
OUT
NOUT
IEC04000409-2-en.vsd
IEC04000409 V2 EN
Figure 436:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
955
Section 15
Logic
15.6.10.2
Signals
Table 571:
Name
Type
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Technical data
Table 573:
Logic block
XOR
15.7
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 572:
15.6.10.3
Default
INPUT1
100 ms
20
956
ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates the time stamp and the
quality of input signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.
INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group signal input. The value part
of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output. The time part of single position
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
input is copied to TIME output. The quality bits in the common part and the indication
part of inputs signal are copied to the corresponding quality output.
INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates the time
stamp and the quality of the input signal.
ORQT OR function block that also propagates the time stamp and the quality of the
input signals. Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.
PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for pulse
extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The function also propagates the time
stamp and the quality of the input signal.
RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the
state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates the time stamp
and the quality of the input signal.
SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the
state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates the time stamp
and the quality of the input signal.
TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay. The function also propagates the
time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates the time stamp and the
quality of the input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
957
Section 15
Logic
15.7.1
15.7.1.1
Function block
ANDQT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000297-1-en.vsd
IEC09000297 V1 EN
Figure 437:
15.7.1.2
Signals
Table 574:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input signal 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input signal 4
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Technical data
Table 576:
Logic block
ANDQT
958
Description
INPUT1
Table 575:
15.7.1.3
Default
100 ms
100
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.7.2
15.7.2.1
Function block
INDCOMBSPQT
SP_IN*
TIME*
BLOCKED*
SUBST*
INVALID*
TEST*
SP_OUT
IEC15000146.vsd
IEC15000146 V1 EN
Figure 438:
15.7.2.2
Signals
Table 577:
Name
Default
Description
SP_IN
BOOLEAN
TIME
GROUP
SIGNAL
Timestamp
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
SUBST
BOOLEAN
Substituted
INVALID
BOOLEAN
Invalid value
TEST
BOOLEAN
Testmode
Table 578:
Name
SP_OUT
Description
Single point indication
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
959
Section 15
Logic
15.7.2.3
Technical data
Table 579:
Logic block
INDCOMBSPQT
15.7.3
3 ms
-
10
100 ms
10
15.7.3.1
Function block
INDEXTSPQT
SI_IN*
SI_OUT
TIME
BLOCKED
SUBST
INVALID
TEST
IEC14000067-1-en.vsd
IEC14000067 V1 EN
Figure 439:
15.7.3.2
Signals
Table 580:
Name
SI_IN
960
Default
0
Description
Single indication
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
Table 581:
Name
15.7.3.3
Description
BOOLEAN
Single indication
TIME
GROUP SIGNAL
Timestamp of input
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
SUBST
BOOLEAN
Substituted
INVALID
BOOLEAN
Invalid value
TEST
BOOLEAN
Testmode
Technical data
Table 582:
Logic block
INDEXTSPQT
15.7.4
Type
SI_OUT
100 ms
10
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
961
Section 15
Logic
15.7.4.1
Function block
INVALIDQT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
VALID
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
iec08000169.vsd
IEC08000169 V1 EN
Figure 440:
15.7.4.2
Signals
Table 583:
Name
962
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Indication input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Indication input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Indication input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Indication input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Indication input 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Indication input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Indication input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Indication input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Indication input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Indication input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Indication input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Indication input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Indication input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Indication input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Indication input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Indication input 16
VALID
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
Table 584:
Name
15.7.4.3
Type
BOOLEAN
Indication output 1
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
Indication output 2
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
Indication output 3
OUTPUT4
BOOLEAN
Indication output 4
OUTPUT5
BOOLEAN
Indication output 5
OUTPUT6
BOOLEAN
Indication output 6
OUTPUT7
BOOLEAN
Indication output 7
OUTPUT8
BOOLEAN
Indication output 8
OUTPUT9
BOOLEAN
Indication output 9
OUTPUT10
BOOLEAN
Indication output 10
OUTPUT11
BOOLEAN
Indication output 11
OUTPUT12
BOOLEAN
Indication output 12
OUTPUT13
BOOLEAN
Indication output 13
OUTPUT14
BOOLEAN
Indication output 14
OUTPUT15
BOOLEAN
Indication output 15
OUTPUT16
BOOLEAN
Indication output 16
Technical data
Table 585:
Logic block
3 ms
INVALIDQT
15.7.5
Description
OUTPUT1
100 ms
6
15.7.5.1
Function block
INVERTERQT
INPUT
OUT
IEC09000299-1-en.vsd
IEC09000299 V1 EN
Figure 441:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
963
Section 15
Logic
15.7.5.2
Signals
Table 586:
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 587:
Type
OUT
BOOLEAN
Description
Input signal
Description
Output signal
Technical data
Table 588:
Logic block
3 ms
INVERTERQT
15.7.6
Name
15.7.5.3
Default
100 ms
100
15.7.6.1
Function block
ORQT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000298-1-en.vsd
IEC09000298 V1 EN
Figure 442:
15.7.6.2
964
Signals
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
Table 589:
Name
Type
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input signal 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input signal 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Input signal 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Input signal 6
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Technical data
Table 591:
Logic block
ORQT
15.7.7
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 590:
15.7.6.3
Default
INPUT1
100 ms
100
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
965
Section 15
Logic
15.7.7.1
Function block
PULSETIMERQT
INPUT
OUT
IEC15000145.vsd
IEC15000145 V1 EN
Figure 443:
15.7.7.2
Signals
Table 592:
Name
Type
INPUT
Table 593:
Name
t
15.7.7.4
Description
BOOLEAN
Output signal
Settings
PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
0.000 - 90000.000
Unit
Step
Default
0.001
Description
0.010
Technical data
Table 595:
Logic block
PULSETIMERQT
15.7.8
Input signal
Type
OUT
Table 594:
Description
Name
15.7.7.3
Default
BOOLEAN
10
30
Range or Value
(0.00090000.000) s
Accuracy
0.5% 10 ms
966
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption. For a ResetSet flip-flop, the RESET input has higher priority than the SET input.
RSMEMORYQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals
via IEC61850.
Table 596:
RESET
15.7.8.1
SET
OUT
NOUT
Last
value
Inverted last
value
Function block
RSMEMORYQT
SET
RESET
OUT
NOUT
IEC14000069-1-en.vsd
IEC14000069 V1 EN
Figure 444:
15.7.8.2
Signals
Table 597:
Name
Default
Description
SET
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Table 598:
Name
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
967
Section 15
Logic
15.7.8.3
Table 599:
Name
Memory
15.7.8.4
Settings
RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Disabled
Enabled
Step
Description
Enabled
Technical data
Table 600:
Logic block
3 ms
RSMEMORYQT
15.7.9
Default
10
100 ms
30
OUT
NOUT
Last
value
Inverted
last value
968
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.7.9.1
Function block
SRMEMORYQT
SET
RESET
OUT
NOUT
IEC14000070-1-en.vsd
IEC14000070 V1 EN
Figure 445:
15.7.9.2
Signals
Table 602:
Name
Type
RESET
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 604:
Name
Memory
15.7.9.4
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Enabled
Technical data
Table 605:
Logic block
SRMEMORYQT
15.7.10
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 603:
15.7.9.3
Default
SET
100 ms
30
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
969
Section 15
Logic
The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has two outputs for delay of the input
signal at pick-up and drop-out. The timer has a settable time delay (t). It also has an
Operation setting On/Off that controls the operation of the timer.
When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The
supported quality state bits are propagated from the input to the output at each execution
cycle. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.
TIMERSETQT can propagate the quality, value and the timestamps of the signals via
IEC61850.
15.7.10.1
Function block
TIMERSETQT
INPUT
ON
OFF
IEC14000068-1-en.vsd
IEC14000068 V1 EN
Figure 446:
15.7.10.2
TIMERSETQT function
Signals
Table 606:
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 607:
Table 608:
Name
Description
Input signal
Name
15.7.10.3
Default
Type
Description
ON
BOOLEAN
OFF
BOOLEAN
Settings
TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
0.000 - 90000.000
0.001
0.000
970
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.7.10.4
Technical data
Table 609:
Logic block
TIMERSETQT
15.7.11
10
Range or Value
30
(0.00090000.000) s
Accuracy
0.5% 10 ms
INPUT1
INPUT2
OUT
NOUT
XORQT can propagate the quality, value and time stamps of the signals via IEC61850.
15.7.11.1
Function block
XORQT
INPUT1
INPUT2
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000300-1-en.vsd
IEC09000300 V1 EN
Figure 447:
15.7.11.2
Signals
Table 611:
Name
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
971
Section 15
Logic
Table 612:
Name
15.7.11.3
Type
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Technical data
Table 613:
Logic block
3 ms
XORQT
15.8
Description
OUT
100 ms
30
Logic block
972
3 ms
100 ms
AND
40
40
100
GATE
49
INV
40
40
100
LLD
49
OR
40
40
100
PULSETIMER
49
SLGAPC
10
10
54
SRMEMORY
110
TIMERSET
49
VSGAPC
10
10
110
XOR
49
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.9
15.9.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Fixed signals
15.9.2
IEC 60617
identification
FXDSIGN
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be
used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function
blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating
point, string types of signals are available.
One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.
15.9.3
Function block
FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
IEC05000445-3-en.vsd
IEC05000445 V3 EN
Figure 448:
15.9.4
Signals
Table 615:
Name
Description
OFF
BOOLEAN
ON
BOOLEAN
INTZERO
INTEGER
INTONE
INTEGER
INTALONE
INTEGER
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
973
Section 15
Logic
Name
15.9.5
Type
Description
REALZERO
REAL
STRNULL
STRING
ZEROSMPL
GROUP SIGNAL
GRP_OFF
GROUP SIGNAL
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control
IED Manager (PCM600).
15.9.6
Operation principle
There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
15.10
15.10.1
Identification
Function description
Boolean 16 to integer conversion
IEC 61850
identification
B16I
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
974
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.10.2
Function block
B16I
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
OUT
IEC07000128-2-en.vsd
IEC07000128 V2 EN
Figure 449:
15.10.3
Signals
Table 616:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
975
Section 15
Logic
Table 617:
Name
Type
OUT
15.10.4
Output value
Monitored data
Table 618:
Name
Type
OUT
15.10.5
Description
INTEGER
Values (Range)
INTEGER
Unit
Description
Output value
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
15.10.6
Operation principle
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up to
16 binary inputs INx, where 1x16, to an integer. Each INx represents a value according
to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where
1x16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output
OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an
integer. When all INx (where 1x16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to
that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The B16I function is designed for
receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the output at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1x16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT
on the function block B16I
Name of input
Type
Default
Description
Value when
activated
Value when
deactivated
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
16
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
32
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
64
976
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
Name of input
Type
Default
Description
Value when
activated
Value when
deactivated
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
128
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
256
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
512
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
1024
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
2048
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
4096
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
8192
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
16384
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
32768
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where 1x16)
are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to
an integer by the B16I function block.
15.10.7
Technical data
Table 619:
Function
B16I
3 ms
6
100 ms
8
15.11
15.11.1
Identification
Function description
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with
logic node representation
IEC 61850
identification
BTIGAPC
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
977
Section 15
Logic
15.11.2
Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function BTIGAPC is
used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The block input will
freeze the output at the last value.
BTIGAPC can receive remote values via IEC 61850 depending on the operator position
input (PSTO).
15.11.3
Function block
BTIGAPC
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
OUT
IEC13000303-1-en.vsd
IEC13000303 V1 EN
Figure 450:
15.11.4
Signals
Table 620:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
978
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
Name
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Input 10
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
Table 621:
Name
OUT
15.11.5
Type
IN10
Description
INTEGER
Output value
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
15.11.6
Monitored data
Table 622:
Name
OUT
15.11.7
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
Output value
Operation principle
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
(BTIGAPC) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1x16, to
an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This
follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1x16. The sum of all the values on the
activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the
inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx (where 1x16) are
activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the
output OUT. The BTIGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a
station computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1x16.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
979
Section 15
Logic
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT
on the function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input
Type
Default
Description
Value when
activated
Value when
deactivated
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
16
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
32
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
64
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
128
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
256
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
512
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
1024
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
2048
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
4096
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
8192
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
16384
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
32768
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where 1x16)
are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to
an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.
15.11.8
Technical data
Table 623:
Function
BTIGAPC
980
100 ms
8
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.12
15.12.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
15.12.2
IEC 60617
identification
IB16
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16 is used to transform an integer into a set
of 16 binary (logical) signals.
15.12.3
Function block
IB16
BLOCK
INP
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
ANSI06000501-1-en.vsd
ANSI06000501 V1 EN
Figure 451:
15.12.4
Signals
Table 624:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INP
INTEGER
Integer Input
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
981
Section 15
Logic
Table 625:
Name
15.12.5
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
15.12.6
Operation principle
With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5x16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance
with the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1, OUT2
has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of these OUTx
is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.
This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where
1x16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.
982
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with a value
between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated outputs
OUTx where 1x16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal to the integer
on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are according to the table below. When an
OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.
When all OUTx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that
integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for receiving the
integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at
the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1x16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT
on the function block IB16.
Name of OUTx
Type
Description
Value when
activated
Value when
deactivated
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
16
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
32
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
64
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
128
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
256
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
512
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
1024
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
2048
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
4096
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
8192
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
16384
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
32768
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (where x = 1
to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be converted by
the IB16 function block.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
983
Section 15
Logic
15.12.7
Technical data
Table 626:
Function
3 ms
IB16
100 ms
8
15.13
15.13.1
Identification
Function description
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with
logic node representation
15.13.2
IEC 61850
identification
ITBGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC is used
to transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by the function
to 16 binary coded (logic) output signals.
ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L
(Remote/Local) push button on the front HMI, indicates that the control mode for the
operator is in position R (Remote i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit ), and the corresponding
signal is connected to the input PSTO ITBGAPC function block. The input BLOCK will
freeze the output at the last received value and blocks new integer values to be received
and converted to binary coded outputs.
984
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.13.3
Function block
ITBGAPC
BLOCK
PSTO
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
IEC14000012-1-en.vsd
IEC14000012 V1 EN
Figure 452:
15.13.4
Signals
Table 627:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
Table 628:
Name
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
985
Section 15
Logic
Name
15.13.5
Type
Description
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
Settings
This function does not have any setting parameters.
15.13.6
Operation principle
An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to and
received by the ITBGAPC function on the IEC61850 the OUTx changes from 0 to 1 on
each of the OUT1; OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5x16) remains 0. The
boolean interpretation of this is represented by the assigned values of each of the outputs
OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3= 4; and OUT4 = 8. The sum of these OUTx (1x4)
is equal to the integer 15 received via the IEC61850 network. The remaining OUTx = 0
for (5x16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance
with the Table 629. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
The value of each OUTx for 1x16 (1x16) follows the general formulae: OUTx = 2x-1
The sum of the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1x16 will be equal to the
integer value received over IEC61850 to the ITBGAPC_1 function block.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function
(ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated via
IEC61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combination of activated
outputs OUTx where 1x16. The values represented by the different OUTx are
according to Table 629. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.
The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station
computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the logical outputs at the last value.
Table 629:
Name of OUTx
Type
Description
Value when
activated
Value when
deactivated
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
986
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
Name of OUTx
Type
Description
Value when
activated
Value when
deactivated
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
16
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
32
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
64
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
128
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
256
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
512
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
1024
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
2048
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
4096
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
8192
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
16384
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
32768
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (1x16) are
active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted to boolean by the
ITBGAPC function block.
The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number
that is communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block while the PSTO
is in position Remote. If PSTO is in position Off or Local, then no changes are
applied to the outputs.
15.13.7
Technical data
Table 630:
Function
ITBGAPC
15.14
100 ms
8
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
987
Section 15
Logic
15.14.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Pulse integrator
15.14.2
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
TIGAPC
Functionality
The integrator function TIGAPC integrates input pulses and compares the integrated time
with a settable time delay to operate. Moreover, the time delay to reset the output is
settable in this function.
15.14.3
Function block
TIGAPC
IN
OUT
ANSI14000062-1-en.vsd
ANSI14000062 V1 EN
Figure 453:
15.14.4
Signals
Table 631:
Name
Type
IN
BOOLEAN
Table 632:
Type
OUT
Table 633:
Name
Description
Input to integrator
Name
15.14.5
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
TIGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
tDelay
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
1.000
tReset
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
1.000
988
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.14.6
Operation principle
In the pulse integrator TIGAPC, the time during which the input is high is integrated. This
means there is no output until the sum of the input pulses equals the set time delay to
operate. The output is deactivated when the input signal is FALSE and the time delay to
reset has elapsed.
1
In
t int
t Reset
0
t Delay
Integration
Out
t
IEC13000175-2-en.vsd
IEC13000175 V2 EN
Figure 454:
IN pulse length sufficient for integration to reach the set tDelay, OUT is set
until the tReset time has elapsed, which resets tDelay and OUT
t Reset
In
t int
t Delay
Integration
Out
IEC13000174=2=en.vsd
IEC13000174 V1 EN
Figure 455:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
989
Section 15
Logic
t Reset
In
t int
t Delay
Integration
Out
t Reset
t Reset
t
IEC13000176-2-en.vsd
IEC13000176 V1 EN
Figure 456:
IN pulse too short for integration to reach the set tDelay, and tReset resets
integration before next pulse can be integrated.
t Reset
In
tReset
t int
t Delay
Integration
tReset
Out
t
IEC13000177-2-en.vsd
IEC13000177 V2 EN
Figure 457:
tint
The next IN pulse is received before tReset has elapsed. Sufficient time
during the pulses is accumulated to reach tDelay. When tDelay is reached,
OUT is set until tReset time has elapsed, which resets tDelay and OUT.
integration time
990
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
Table 634:
Function
Time integration
continuous active
Range of value
Accuracy
0.2% or 20 ms whichever is
greater
0-999999.99 s
Time integration
continuous active
0-999999.99 s
0.2% or 50 ms whichever is
greater
Time integration
continuous active
100
0-999999.99 s
Table 635:
Function
TIGAPC
3 ms
-
30
100 ms
-
15.15
15.15.1
Identification
Function Description
Elapsed time integrator
15.15.2
IEC 61850
identification
TEIGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
Functionality
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed
time when a given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 458.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
991
Section 15
Logic
BLOCK
RESET
IN
ACCTIME
Time Integration
with Retain
q-1
999 999 s
a>b
tWarning
a>b
tAlarm
a>b
AND
AND
AND
OVERFLOW
WARNING
ALARM
IEC13000290-2-en.vsd
IEC13000290 V2 EN
Figure 458:
TEIGAPC logics
15.15.3
Function block
TEIGAPC
BLOCK
IN
RESET
WARNING
ALARM
OVERFLOW
ACCTIME
IEC14000014-1-en.vsd
IEC14000014 V1 EN
Figure 459:
992
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.15.4
Signals
Table 636:
Name
Type
IN
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 638:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 637:
15.15.5
Default
BLOCK
Type
Description
WARNING
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
OVERFLOW
BOOLEAN
ACCTIME
REAL
Settings
TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
tWarning
1.00 - 999999.99
0.01
600.00
tAlarm
1.00 - 999999.99
0.01
1200.00
15.15.6
Operation principle
The elapsed time integrator (TEIGAPC) provides
time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has been
high
blocking and reset of the total integrated time
supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to
999999.9 seconds
retaining of the integrated value
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
993
Section 15
Logic
Figure 460 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block Time
Integration covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
Transgression Supervision Plus Retain contains the logics for the last two.
Loop Delay
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
WARNING
Transgression Supervision
Plus Retain
ALARM
BLOCK
RESET
ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN
Loop Delay
IEC12000195-3-en.vsd
IEC12000195 V3 EN
Figure 460:
RESET: Reset of the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
994
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow, tAlarm
and tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is, there is
no check if tAlarm > tWarning.
tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms, depending on
the level of the defined values for the parameters.
The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs freeze if
an overflow occurs.
15.15.6.1
Operation accuracy
The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors
In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more pulses
may lead to reduced accuracy.
15.15.6.2
Memory storage
The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory.
15.15.7
Technical data
Table 639:
Function
Table 640:
Function
TEIGAPC
Range or value
Accuracy
0 ~ 999999.9 s
0.2% or 20 ms
whichever is greater
0 ~ 999999.9 s
0.2% or 100 ms
whichever is greater
100
0 ~ 999999.9 s
0.2% or 250 ms
whichever is greater
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
100 ms
4
995
Section 15
Logic
15.16
15.16.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
15.16.2
IEC 60617
identification
INTCOMP
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Int<=>
Functionality
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of integer values in the system
relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used
for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.
15.16.3
Function block
INTCOMP
INPUT
REF
INEQUAL
INHIGH
INLOW
IEC15000052-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000052 V1 EN
15.16.4
Signals
Table 641:
Name
Type
Default
Description
INPUT
INTEGER
REF
INTEGER
Table 642:
Name
996
Description
INEQUAL
BOOLEAN
INHIGH
BOOLEAN
INLOW
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.16.5
Table 643:
Name
Settings
INTCOMP Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EnaAbs
Signed
Absolute
Signed
RefSource
Set Value
Input REF
Set Value
SetValue
-2000000000 2000000000
100
15.16.6
Operation principle
The comparison can be done in two ways,
The selection of reference value for comparison can be done through setting RefSource. If
RefSource is selected as REF then the reference value for comparison is taken from second
input signal (REF). If RefSource is selected as SetValue then the reference value for
comparison is taken from setting (SetValue).
The comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values and it
depends on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as Absolute then both input and
reference value is converted into absolute values and comparison is done. If EnaAbs is
selected as Signed then the comparison is done without any conversion.
The function has three state outputs high, low and equal to condition. It will check the
following condition and give corresponding outputs.
If the input is above the reference value then INHIGH will set
If the input is below the reference value then INLOW will set
If the input is equal to reference value then INEQUAL will set
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
997
Section 15
Logic
EnaAbs
INPUT
ABS
b
a
INHIGH
a>b
INEQUAL
a=b
RefSource
REF
SetValue
ABS
INLOW
a<b
IEC15000129-2-en.vsdx
IEC15000129 V2 EN
Figure 461:
15.16.7
Technical data
Table 644:
Function
3 ms
INTCOMP
15.17
15.17.1
Identification
Function description
Comparator for real inputs
15.17.2
IEC 61850
identification
REALCOMP
100 ms
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Real<=>
Functionality
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real value signals in the system
relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used
for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.
998
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
15.17.3
Function block
REALCOMP
INPUT
REF
INEQUAL
INHIGH
INLOW
IEC15000053-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000053 V1 EN
15.17.4
Signals
Table 645:
Name
Type
0.000
REF
REAL
0.000
Name
Table 647:
Name
Description
REAL
Table 646:
15.17.5
Default
INPUT
Type
Description
INEQUAL
BOOLEAN
INHIGH
BOOLEAN
INLOW
BOOLEAN
Settings
REALCOMP Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EnaAbs
Signed
Absolute
Signed
RefSource
Set Value
Input REF
Set Value
SetValue
-999.999 - 999.999
0.001
0.001
SetValPrefix
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
unit
EqualBandHigh
0.10 - 10.00
0.01
0.50
EqualBandLow
0.10 - 10.00
0.01
0.50
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
999
Section 15
Logic
15.17.6
Operation principle
The comparison can be done in two ways,
1.
2.
The selection of reference value for comparison can be done through setting RefSource. If
RefSource is selected as REF then the reference value for comparison is taken from second
input signal (REF). If RefSource is selected as SetValue then the reference value for
comparison is taken from setting (SetValue).
Generally the inputs to the function are in SI units, but when the comparison is to be done
with respect to set level, then the user can set a value in any unit out of Milli to Giga range
in setting SetValue. The unit can be separately set with setting RefPrefix. Internally the
function handles the reference value for comparator as SetValue*RefPrefix.
Additionally the comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values
and it depends on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as Absolute then both input and
reference value is converted into absolute values and comparison is done. If EnaAbs is
selected as Signed then the comparison is done without any conversion.
EnaAbs
INPUT
ABS
T
F
High
Comparator
EqualBandHigh
RefSource
REF
SetValue
INHIGH
XOR
T
F
ABS
INEQUAL
T
F
Low
comparator
INLOW
RefPrefix
EqualBandLow
IEC15000130-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000130 V1 EN
Figure 462:
This function has two settings EqualBandHigh and EqualBandLow to provide margins
from reference value for equal to condition. When the INPUT value is within high and low
band, output INEQUAL will get set.
If the INPUT is above the equal high level margin then output INHIGH will set. Similarly
if the INPUT is below the equal low level margin then output INLOW will set. In order to
1000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
avoid oscillations at boundary conditions of equal band low limit and high limit, hysteresis
has been provided
INEQUAL Reset / INHIGH Set
EqualBandHigh
Equal Band
Internal
Hysteresis for
equal band
REF or SetValue
EqualBandLow
IEC15000261 V1 EN
Figure 463:
When EnaAbs is set as absolute comparison and SetValue is set less than
0.2% of the set unit then INLOW output will never pickups. During the
above mentioned condition, due to marginal value for avoiding
oscillations of function outputs, the INLOW output will never set.
15.17.7
Technical data
REALCOMP function can compare the values from milli value level to giga value level
and the maximum expectable accuracy level from the function is 10 .
Table 648:
Accuracy
Operate value,
EqualBandHigh
and EqualBandLow
Reset value,
EqualBandHigh
Reset value,
EqualBandLow
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1001
Section 15
Logic
Table 649:
Function
REALCOMP
1002
100 ms
4
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Section 16
Monitoring
16.1
Measurements
16.1.1
Identification
Function description
Measurements
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
CVMMXN
P, Q, S, I, U, f
SYMBOL-RR V1 EN
CMMXU
I
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN
VMMXU
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
CMSQI
VMSQI
I1, I2, I0
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN
U1, U2, U0
SYMBOL-TT V1 EN
VNMMXU
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1003
Section 16
Monitoring
16.1.2
Functionality
Measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of
active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for
efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the
system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control
IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers (CTs
and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value from the
IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement
chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for
distance or directional overcurrent protection function.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual
hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit, low
limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, that is,
the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of
noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when
change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since
the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based
on periodic reporting.
Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN
The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:
,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical
quantities:
1004
Section 16
Monitoring
16.1.3
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and
the logic configuration made in PCM600.
CVMMXN
I3P*
V3P*
S
S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
V
V_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
ANSI10000016-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000016 V1 EN
Figure 464:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1005
Section 16
Monitoring
CMMXU
I3P*
I_A
IA_RANGE
IA_ANGL
I_B
IB_RANGE
IB_ANGL
I_C
IC_RANGE
IC_ANGL
ANSI05000699-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000699 V2 EN
Figure 465:
VMMXU
V3P*
V_AB
VAB_RANG
VAB_ANGL
V_BC
VBC_RANG
VBC_ANGL
V_CA
VCA_RANG
VCA_ANGL
ANSI05000701-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000701 V2 EN
Figure 466:
CMSQI
I3P*
3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL
IEC05000703-2-en.vsd
IEC05000703 V2 EN
Figure 467:
VMSQI
V3P*
3V0
3V0RANG
3V0ANGL
V1
V1RANG
V1ANGL
V2
V2RANG
V2ANGL
ANSI05000704-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000704 V2 EN
Figure 468:
1006
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
VNMMXU
V3P*
V_A
VA_RANGE
VA_ANGL
V_B
VB_RANGE
VB_ANGL
V_C
VC_RANGE
VC_ANGL
ANSI09000850-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000850 V1 EN
Figure 469:
16.1.4
Signals
Table 650:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 651:
Name
Description
REAL
S_RANGE
INTEGER
P_INST
REAL
Active Power
REAL
P_RANGE
INTEGER
Q_INST
REAL
Reactive Power
REAL
Q_RANGE
INTEGER
PF
REAL
PF_RANGE
INTEGER
ILAG
BOOLEAN
ILEAD
BOOLEAN
REAL
V_RANGE
INTEGER
REAL
I_RANGE
INTEGER
REAL
F_RANGE
INTEGER
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1007
Section 16
Monitoring
Table 652:
Name
I3P
Table 653:
Name
Type
Default
GROUP
SIGNAL
Description
Group signal for current input
Description
IA
REAL
IA_RANGE
INTEGER
IA_ANGL
REAL
IB
REAL
IB_RANGE
INTEGER
IB_ANGL
REAL
IC
REAL
IC_RANGE
INTEGER
IC_ANGL
REAL
Table 654:
Name
V3P
Table 655:
Name
1008
Default
-
Description
Group connection abstract block 2
Description
VAB
REAL
VAB_RANG
INTEGER
VAB_ANGL
REAL
VBC
REAL
VBC_RANG
INTEGER
VBC_ANGL
REAL
VCA
REAL
VCA_RANG
INTEGER
VCA_ANGL
REAL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Table 656:
Name
I3P
Table 657:
Name
Default
-
Description
Group connection abstract block 3
Description
3I0
REAL
3I0RANG
INTEGER
3I0ANGL
REAL
I1
REAL
I1RANG
INTEGER
I1 Magnitude range
I1ANGL
REAL
I2
REAL
I2RANG
INTEGER
I2 Magnitude range
I2ANGL
REAL
Table 658:
Name
V3P
Table 659:
Name
Default
-
Description
Group connection abstract block 4
Description
3V0
REAL
3V0RANG
INTEGER
3V0ANGL
REAL
V1
REAL
V1RANG
INTEGER
V1 Magnitude range
V1ANGL
REAL
V1 Magnitude angle
V2
REAL
V2RANG
INTEGER
V2 Magnitude range
V2ANGL
REAL
V2 Magnitude angle
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1009
Section 16
Monitoring
Table 660:
Name
V3P
Table 661:
Name
16.1.5
Default
-
Description
Group signal for voltage input
Description
VA
REAL
VA_RANGE
INTEGER
VAAmplitude range
VA_ANGL
REAL
VB
REAL
VB_RANGE
INTEGER
VB Amplitude range
VB_ANGL
REAL
VC
REAL
VC_RANGE
INTEGER
VC Amplitude range
VC_ANGL
REAL
Settings
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only available in
the first setting group.
The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:
1010
VBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage supervised
object.
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting.
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the supervised
object.
SBase: Base setting for power values in MVA.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Table 662:
Name
Default
SLowLim
Values (Range)
0.0 - 2000.0
Unit
%SB
0.1
80.0
Description
Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
60.0
SMin
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
50.0
SMax
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
SRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
PMin
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-200.0
PMax
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
PRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
QMin
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-200.0
QMax
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
QRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
PFMin
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-1.000
Minimum value
PFMax
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
Maximum value
PFRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
VMin
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
VMax
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
VRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IMin
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
5.0
IMax
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
IRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
FrMin
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
FrMax
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
70.000
Maximum value
FrRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1011
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Mode
A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
A, B, C
PowMagFact
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
1.000
PowAngComp
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
0.000
Table 663:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
SZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
SHiHiLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
SHiLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
SLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
PDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
PZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
PHiHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
PHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
PLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-120.0
PLowLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-150.0
PLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
QDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
QZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
QHiHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
QHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
QLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-120.0
QLowLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-150.0
QLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PFDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
PFZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
PFHiHiLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
PFHiLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
0.800
PFLowLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-0.800
PFLowLowLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-1.000
PFLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
VDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
VHiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
VHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
VLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
VLowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
IDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
IZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
IHiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
IHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
ILowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
ILowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
ILimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
FrDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
FrZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
FrHiHiLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
65.000
FrHiLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
63.000
FrLowLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
47.000
FrLowLowLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
45.000
FrLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
VGenZeroDb
1 - 100
%VB
IGenZeroDb
1 - 100
%IB
VMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
1013
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
VMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
Table 664:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IA_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disbled/Enabled operation
IA_Max
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
IA_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
IA_AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
IB_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
IB_Max
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
IB_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IB_AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
IC_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
IC_Max
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
IC_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IC_AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
1014
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Table 665:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IA_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
IA_HiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
IA_HiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
IMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IA_LowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
IA_LowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
IMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IA_Min
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IA_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
IB_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
IB_HiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
IB_HiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
IB_LowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
IB_LowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
IB_Min
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
IB_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
IC_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
IC_HiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
IC_HiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
IC_LowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
IC_LowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
IC_Min
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
IC_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1015
Section 16
Monitoring
Table 666:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VAB_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disbled/Enabled operation
VAB_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
VAB_Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
VAB_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
VAB_AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VBC_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VB_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
VBC_Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
VBC_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
VBC_AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VCA_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VC_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
VCA_Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
VCA_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
VCA_AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Table 667:
Name
Default
VAB_HiHiLim
Values (Range)
0.0 - 200.0
Unit
%VB
0.1
150.0
Description
High High limit in % of UBase
VAB_HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
VAB_LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
VAB_LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
1016
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Step
Default
VAB_Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
VAB_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
VBC_HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
VBC_HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
VBC_LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
VBC_LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VBC_Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
VBC_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
VCA_HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
VCA_HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
VCA_LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
VCA_LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VCA_Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
VCA_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Table 668:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3I0DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
3I0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
3I0Min
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
3I0Max
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
3I0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
3I0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
3I0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disbled/Enabled operation
3I0AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
3I0AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1017
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3I0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
I1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
I1Min
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
I1Max
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
I1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
I1AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
I1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I2DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
I2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
I2Min
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
I2Max
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
I2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
I2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
I2AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
I2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Table 669:
Name
Default
3I0HiHiLim
Values (Range)
0.0 - 500.0
Unit
%IB
0.1
150.0
Description
High High limit in % of IBase
3I0HiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
3I0LowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
3I0LowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
3I0AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
1018
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Step
Default
I1HiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
I1HiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
I1LowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
I1LowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
I1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
I1AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
I1AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
I2HiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
I2HiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
I2LowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
I2LowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
I2AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
I2AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
Table 670:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3V0DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
3V0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
3V0Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
3V0Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
3V0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
3V0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
3V0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disbled/Enabled operation
3V0AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
3V0AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
3V0AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
3V0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1019
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
V1DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
V1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
V1Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
V1Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
V1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
V1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
V1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
V2DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
V2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
V2Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
V2Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
V2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
V2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
V2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
V2AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
V2AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
V2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UAmpPreComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpPreComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpPreComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Table 671:
Name
Default
3V0HiHiLim
Values (Range)
0.0 - 200.0
Unit
%VB
0.1
150.0
Description
High High limit in % of UBase
3V0HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
3V0LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
1020
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Step
Default
3V0LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
V1HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
V1HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
V1LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
V1LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
V1AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
V1AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
V1AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
V1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
V2HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
V2HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
V2LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
V2LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
V2AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Table 672:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VA_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disbled/Enabled operation
VA_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
VA_Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
VA_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
VA_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
VA_AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VB_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VB_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
VB_Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1021
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VB_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
VB_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
VB_AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VC_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VC_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
VC_Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
VC_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
VC_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
VC_AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Table 673:
Name
Default
VA_HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
VA_HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
VA_LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
VA_LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
VA_Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
VB_HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
VB_HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
VB_LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
VB_LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VB_Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
VC_HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
VC_HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
VC_LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
VC_LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VC_Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
1022
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
16.1.6
Monitored data
Table 674:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
REAL
MVA
REAL
MW
REAL
MVAr
PF
REAL
REAL
kV
REAL
REAL
Hz
Table 675:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IA
REAL
IA_ANGL
REAL
deg
IB
REAL
IB_ANGL
REAL
deg
IC
REAL
IC_ANGL
REAL
deg
Table 676:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VAB
REAL
kV
VAB_ANGL
REAL
deg
VBC
REAL
kV
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1023
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VBC_ANGL
REAL
deg
VCA
REAL
kV
VCA_ANGL
REAL
deg
Table 677:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
3I0IMAG
REAL
3I0
REAL
3I0ANGIM
REAL
3I0ANGL
REAL
deg
I1IMAG
REAL
I1 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I1
REAL
I1ANGIM
REAL
I1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I1ANGL
REAL
deg
I1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
I2IMAG
REAL
I2 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I2
REAL
I2ANGIM
REAL
I2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I2ANGL
REAL
deg
I2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
Table 678:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
3U0IMAG
REAL
3V0
REAL
kV
3U0ANGIM
REAL
3V0ANGL
REAL
deg
1024
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
U1IMAG
REAL
U1 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V1
REAL
kV
U1ANGIM
REAL
U1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V1ANGL
REAL
deg
V1 Magnitude angle
U2IMAG
REAL
U2 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V2
REAL
kV
U2ANGIM
REAL
U2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V2ANGL
REAL
deg
V2 Magnitude angle
Table 679:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VA
REAL
kV
VA Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
VA_ANGL
REAL
deg
VA Angle, magnitude of
reported value
VB
REAL
kV
VB Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
VB_ANGL
REAL
deg
VB Angle, magnitude of
reported value
VC
REAL
kV
VC Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
VC_ANGL
REAL
deg
16.1.7
Operation principle
16.1.7.1
Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further
process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks.
The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and
built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1025
Section 16
Monitoring
Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or Highhigh limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim)
or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
1026
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Y
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1
Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
IEC05000657-2-en.vsdx
IEC05000657 V2 EN
Figure 470:
Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: Highhigh limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be
connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement
supervision as binary signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 126.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the
operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1027
Section 16
Monitoring
Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of magnitude or
integral dead-band reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y4
Y1
Y5
t (*)
Value 5
Value 4
t (*)
Value 3
t (*)
Value 2
Value 1
t (*)
IEC05000500-2-en.vsdx
IEC05000500 V2 EN
Figure 471:
Periodic reporting
1028
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Value Reported
Y
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y1
Value Reported
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
t
IEC99000529-2-en.vsdx
IEC99000529 V2 EN
Figure 472:
After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set around
it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by
the Y set limits.
1029
Section 16
Monitoring
A1 >=
pre-set value
Y
A >=
pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value
Y3
Y2
Value Reported
(1st)
A1
Value
Reported
A2
Value
Reported
Y1
Y4
Value
Reported
A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
A4
A3
A5
A6
A7
Y5
Value
Reported
t
IEC99000530-2-en.vsdx
IEC99000530 V2 EN
Figure 473:
16.1.7.2
Measurements CVMMXN
Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase
voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and
calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available
VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting,
which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function.
Available options are summarized in the following table:
1030
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Set value for Formula used for complex, threephase power calculation
parameter
Mode
1
A, B, C
S = VA I A* + VB I B* + VC I C*
EQUATION1561 V1 EN
(
I =( I
V = VA + VB + VC
+ IB + IC
)/
)/3
Comment
EQUATION1562 V1 EN
Arone
S = VAB I A - VBC I C
*
(Equation 179)
EQUATION1563 V1 EN
(
I =( I
V = VAB + VBC / 2
A
EQUATION1564 V1 EN
PosSeq
V =
S = 3 VPosSeq I PosSeq
*
(Equation 181)
EQUATION1565 V1 EN
AB
S = VAB I A - I B
*
(Equation 183)
EQUATION1567 V1 EN
I = I PosSeq
BC
S = VBC I B - I C
*
(Equation 185)
EQUATION1569 V1 EN
I = IA + IB / 2
CA
S = VCA I C - I A
EQUATION1571 V1 EN
(Equation 187)
I = I B + IC / 2
S = 3 VA I A
*
I = IC + I A / 2
EQUATION1573 V1 EN
(Equation 189)
V =
(Equation 188)
3 VA
I = IA
EQUATION1574 V1 EN
(Equation 186)
V = VCA
EQUATION1572 V1 EN
(Equation 184)
V = VBC
EQUATION1570 V1 EN
(Equation 182)
V = VAB
EQUATION1568 V1 EN
(Equation 180)
3 VPosSeq
EQUATION1566 V1 EN
+ IC / 2
(Equation 190)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1031
Section 16
Monitoring
Set value for Formula used for complex, threephase power calculation
parameter
Mode
8
S = 3 VB I B
*
EQUATION1575 V1 EN
(Equation 191)
V =
3 VB
I = IB
EQUATION1576 V1 EN
S = 3 VC I C
*
EQUATION1577 V1 EN
(Equation 193)
V =
(Equation 192)
3 VC
I = IC
EQUATION1578 V1 EN
Comment
(Equation 194)
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the measurement
function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes that is, from 3 to 9
it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully
symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are
calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
(Equation 195)
EQUATION1403 V1 EN
Q = Im( S )
(Equation 196)
EQUATION1404 V1 EN
S = S =
P2 + Q2
(Equation 197)
EQUATION1405 V1 EN
PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN
(Equation 198)
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function are
provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors.
Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage
phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the
voltage phasor.
1032
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
Magnitude
compensation
+10
IMagComp5
Measured
current
IMagComp30
IMagComp100
30
% of In
0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant
-10
Degrees
100
Angle
compensation
+10
Measured
current
IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
30
100
% of In
-10
ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN
Figure 474:
Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the
magnitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1033
Section 16
Monitoring
EQUATION1407 V1 EN
where:
X
is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, V, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld
is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k
is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be
determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is
possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by
setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to multiply
the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude (setting
parameter PowMagFact, default value 1.000) and angle (setting parameter
PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are
done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex constant
has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for example,
around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this calibration it is
necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.
1034
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Directionality
If CT grounding parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and
reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown in the
following figure 475.
Busbar
52
IED
Q
Protected
Object
ANSI05000373_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000373 V2 EN
Figure 475:
Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they
flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when
they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the
power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually
opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be
easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such
setting the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the
protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from
the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.
16.1.7.3
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1035
Section 16
Monitoring
of rated current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in
between, see figure 474.
Phase currents (magnitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each magnitude
output has a corresponding supervision level output (Ix_RANGE). The supervision
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
16.1.7.4
16.1.7.5
16.1.8
Technical data
Table 680:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Frequency
(0.95-1.05) x fn
2.0 mHz
Voltage
(10 to 300) V
0.3% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V> 50 V
Current
(0.1-4.0) x In
1036
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Function
Range or value
Active power, P
Reactive power, Q
Apparent power, S
Table 681:
Accuracy
(10 to 300) V
(0.1-4.0) x In
0.5% of Sn at S 0.5 x Sn
0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sn
(100 to 220) V
(0.5-2.0) x In
cos < 0.7
0.2% of P
(10 to 300) V
(0.1-4.0) x In
0.5% of Sn at S 0.5 x Sn
0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sn
(100 to 220) V
(0.5-2.0) x In
cos > 0.7
0.2% of Q
(10 to 300) V
(0.1-4.0) x In
0.5% of Sn at S 0.5 x Sn
0.5% of S at S >0.5 x Sn
(100 to 220) V
(0.5-2.0) x In
0.2% of S
(10 to 300) V
(0.1-4.0) x In
<0.02
(100 to 220) V
(0.5-2.0) x In
<0.01
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.1-4.0) In
0.3% of In at I 0.5 In
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 In
(0.1-4.0) In
Table 682:
Function
Range or value
Voltage
(10 to 300) V
0.5% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Phase angle
(10 to 300) V
0.5 at V 50 V
0.2 at V > 50 V
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Accuracy
1037
Section 16
Monitoring
Table 683:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.14.0) In
0.3% of In at I 0.5 In
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 In
(0.11.0) In
0.3% of In at I 0.5 In
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 In
(0.11.0) In
0.3% of In at I 0.5 In
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 In
Phase angle
(0.14.0) In
Table 684:
VMSQItechnical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(10 to 300) V
0.5% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V
(10 to 300) V
0.5% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V
(10 to 300) V
0.5% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Phase angle
(10 to 300) V
0.5 degrees at V 50 V
0.2 degrees at V > 50 V
Table 685:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Voltage
(5 to 175) V
0.5% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Phase angle
(5 to 175) V
0.5 at V 50 V
0.2 at V > 50 V
16.2
16.2.1
Identification
Function description
Gas medium supervision
1038
IEC 61850
identification
SSIMG
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
63
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
16.2.2
Functionality
Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker condition.
Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as input signals
to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on received information.
16.2.3
Function block
SSIMG (63)
BLOCK
PRESSURE
BLK_ALM
PRES_ALM
PRESSURE
PRES_LO
TEMP
TEMP
PRES_ALM
TEMP_ALM
PRES_LO
TEMP_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO
ANSI09000129-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000129 V1 EN
Figure 476:
16.2.4
Signals
Table 686:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK_ALM
BOOLEAN
PRESSURE
REAL
0.0
TEMP
REAL
0.0
PRES_ALM
BOOLEAN
PRES_LO
BOOLEAN
SET_P_LO
BOOLEAN
SET_T_LO
BOOLEAN
RESET_LO
BOOLEAN
Table 687:
Name
Description
PRESSURE
REAL
PRES_ALM
BOOLEAN
PRES_LO
BOOLEAN
1039
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
16.2.5
Table 688:
Name
Type
Description
TEMP
REAL
TEMP_ALM
BOOLEAN
TEMP_LO
BOOLEAN
Settings
SSIMG (63) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
PressAlmLimit
1.00 - 100.00
0.01
5.00
PressLOLimit
1.00 - 100.00
0.01
3.00
TempAlarmLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
TempLOLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
tPressureAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tPressureLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tTempAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tTempLockOut
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetPressAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetPressLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetTempLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetTempAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
16.2.6
Operation principle
Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63) is used to monitor the gas pressure in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of gas density PRES_ALM, PRES_LO, and gas pressure signal
PRESSURE, are taken into account to initiate the alarms PRES_ALM and PRES_LO.
When PRESSURE is less than PressAlmLimit or binary signal from CB PRES_ALM is
high then the gas pressure alarm, PRES_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if pressure input
PRESSURE is less than PressLOLimit or binary signal from CB PRES_LO is high or
temperature input TEMP is above lockout level TempLOLimit then the gas pressure
lockout, PRES_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in pressure of the gas for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tPressureAlarm or
tPressureLO have been included. If the pressure goes below the settings for more than
these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm PRES_ALM or lockout PRES_LO
1040
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
will be initiated. The SET_P_LO binary input is used for setting the gas pressure lockout.
The PRES_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input
RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the setting for relative and
absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the
BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The signal
is monitored to detect high temperature.
When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature alarm
TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is greater than
TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for
which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tTempAlarm
or tTempLockOut have been included. If the temperature goes above the settings for more
than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm TEMP_ALM or lockout
TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input is used for setting the
temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using
the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the setting
for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the
alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.
16.2.7
Technical data
Table 689:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
1.00-100.00
1.00-100.00
-40.00-200.00
-40.00-200.00
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1041
Section 16
Monitoring
16.3
16.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
16.3.2
IEC 60617
identification
SSIML
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
71
Functionality
Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is used as input
signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on received
information.
16.3.3
Function block
SSIML (71)
BLOCK
LEVEL
BLK_ALM
LVL_ALM
LEVEL
LVL_LO
TEMP
TEMP
LVL_ALM
TEMP_ALM
LEVEL_LO
TEMP_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO
ANSI09000128-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000128 V1 EN
Figure 477:
16.3.4
Signals
Table 690:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK_ALM
BOOLEAN
LEVEL
REAL
0.0
TEMP
REAL
0.0
LVL_ALM
BOOLEAN
LEVEL_LO
BOOLEAN
1042
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Type
SET_T_LO
BOOLEAN
RESET_LO
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 692:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 691:
16.3.5
Default
SET_L_LO
Type
Description
LEVEL
REAL
LVL_ALM
BOOLEAN
LVL_LO
BOOLEAN
TEMP
REAL
TEMP_ALM
BOOLEAN
TEMP_LO
BOOLEAN
Settings
SSIML (71) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
LevelAlmLimit
1.00 - 100.00
0.01
5.00
LevelLOLimit
1.00 - 100.00
0.01
3.00
TempAlarmLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
TempLOLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
tLevelAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tLevelLockOut
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tTempAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tTempLockOut
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetLevelAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetLevelLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetTempLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetTempAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
16.3.6
Operation principle
Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71) is used to monitor the oil level in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of oil level LVL_ALM, LEVEL_LO and oil level signal LEVEL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1043
Section 16
Monitoring
are taken into account to initiate the alarms LVL_ALM and LVL_LO. When LEVEL is
less than LevelAlmLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_ALM is high, then the oil level
indication alarm, LVL_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if oil level input LEVEL is less
than LevelLOLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_LO is high or temperature input TEMP
is above lockout level TempLOLimit, then the oil level indication lockout, LVL_LO will
be initiated.
There may be sudden change in oil level for a very small time, for which the function need
not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tLevelAlarm or tLevelLockOut have
been included. If the oil level goes below the settings for more than these time delays, then
only the corresponding alarm LVL_ALM or lockout LVL_LO will be initiated. The
SET_L_LO binary input is used for setting the gas pressure lockout. The LVL_LO output
retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The
binary input BLK_ALM can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can
block both alarms and the lockout indication.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The signal
is monitored to detect high temperature.
When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature alarm
TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is greater than
TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for
which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tTempAlarm
or tTempLockOuthave been included. If the temperature goes above the settings for more
than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm TEMP_ALM or lockout
TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input is used for setting the
temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using
the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the setting
for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used for blocking
the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.
16.3.7
Technical data
Table 693:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
1.00-100.00
1.00-100.00
-40.00-200.00
-40.00-200.00
(0.000-60.000) s
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Function
Range or value
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
16.4
16.4.1
Identification
Function description
Breaker monitoring
16.4.2
Accuracy
IEC 61850
identification
SSCBR
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The breaker monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different parameters of the
breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations
reaches a predefined value. For a proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it is essential
to monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge indication or breaker wear, travel
time, number of operation cycles and estimate the accumulated energy during arcing
periods.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1045
Section 16
Monitoring
16.4.3
Function block
SSCBR
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKALM
TRIND
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
PRESALM
PRESLO
SPRCHRST
SPRCHRD
RSTCBWR
RSTTRVT
RSTIPOW
RSTSPCHT
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS
TRCMD
TRVTOPAL
TRVTCLAL
OPERALM
OPERLO
CBLIFEAL
MONALM
IPOWALPH
IPOWLOPH
SPCHALM
GPRESALM
GPRESLO
ANSI14000061-1-en.vsd
ANSI14000061 V1 EN
Figure 478:
16.4.4
Signals
Table 694:
Name
1046
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
BLKALM
BOOLEAN
TRIND
BOOLEAN
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
PRESALM
BOOLEAN
PRESLO
BOOLEAN
SPRCHRST
BOOLEAN
SPRCHRD
BOOLEAN
RSTCBWR
BOOLEAN
RSTTRVT
BOOLEAN
RSTIPOW
BOOLEAN
RSTSPCHT
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Table 695:
Name
16.4.5
Table 696:
Name
Type
Description
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
CB is in open position
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
CB is in closed position
INVDPOS
BOOLEAN
CB is in Invalid Position
TRCMD
BOOLEAN
TRVTOPAL
BOOLEAN
TRVTCLAL
BOOLEAN
OPERALM
BOOLEAN
OPERLO
BOOLEAN
CBLIFEAL
BOOLEAN
MONALM
BOOLEAN
IPOWALPH
BOOLEAN
IPOWLOPH
BOOLEAN
SPCHALM
BOOLEAN
GPRESALM
BOOLEAN
GPRESLO
BOOLEAN
Settings
SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
PhSel
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phase A
Phase selection
RatedOperCurr
100.00 - 5000.00
0.01
1000.00
OperNoRated
1 - 99999
10000
RatedFltCurr
500.00 - 99999.99
0.01
5000.00
OperNoFault
1 - 10000
1000
tTrOpenAlm
0.000 - 0.200
0.001
0.040
tTrCloseAlm
0.000 - 0.200
0.001
0.040
OperAlmLevel
0 - 9999
200
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1047
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OperLOLevel
0 - 9999
300
AccSelCal
Aux Contact
Trip Signal
Trip Signal
CurrExponent
0.50 - 3.00
0.01
2.00
AccStopCurr
5.00 - 100.00
%IB
0.01
10.00
AlmAccCurrPwr
0.00 - 20000.00
0.01
2500.00
LOAccCurrPwr
0.00 - 20000.00
0.01
2500.00
SpChAlmTime
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
1.00
InitCBRemLife
1 - 99999
10000
InactiveAlDays
0 - 9999
Day
2000
Table 697:
Name
Unit
OpenTimeCorr
-0.100 - 0.100
0.001
0.010
CloseTimeCorr
-0.100 - 0.100
0.001
0.010
DirCoef
-3.00 - -0.50
0.01
-1.50
CBLifeAlmLevel
1 - 99999
5000
ContTrCorr
-0.010 - 0.010
0.001
0.005
OperTimeDelay
0.000 - 0.200
0.001
0.020
tDGasPresAlm
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
0.10
tDGasPresLO
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
0.10
InitCounterVal
0 - 9999
InitAccCurrPwr
0.00 - 9999.99
0.01
0.00
InitInactDays
0 - 9999
Day
InactiveAlHrs
0 - 23
Hour
1048
Step
Default
Description
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
16.4.6
Monitored data
Table 698:
Name
16.4.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
TTRVOP
REAL
ms
TTRVCL
REAL
ms
NOOPER
INTEGER
CBLIFEPH
INTEGER
CB Remaining life of
respective phase
INADAYS
INTEGER
IPOWPH
REAL
Accumulated I^CurrExponent
integrated over CB open travel
time
SPCHT
REAL
Operation principle
The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions. The
subfunctions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding
parameter values are Enabled and Disabled.
The operation of the subfunctions is described by the module diagram as shown in Figure
479. All the modules in the diagram are explained in subsequent sections.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1049
Section 16
Monitoring
I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE
POSOPEN
BLOCK
TTRVOP
CB Contact Travel
Time
TTRVCL
TRVTOPAL
TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
RSTTRVT
OPENPOS
CB Status
CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS
CBLIFEAL
Remaining Life of CB
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR
TRCMD
I3P-IL
Accumulated
energy
TRIND
IPOWALPH
IPOWLOPH
IPOWPH
RSTIPOW
CB Operation
Cycles
OPERALM
CB Operation
Monitoring
MONALM
NOOPER
INADAYS
SPCHALM
SPRCHRST
SPRCHRD
CB Spring Charge
Monitoring
SPCHT
CB Gas Pressure
Indication
GPRESALM
RSTSPCHT
PRESALM
PRESLO
GPRESLO
IEC12000624-3-en.vsd
1050
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
IEC12000624 V3 EN
Figure 479:
16.4.7.1
TTRVOP
Contact travel
time
calculation
TTRVCL
Alarm limit
check
BLOCK
TRVTOPAL
TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
IEC12000615-2-en.vsd
IEC12000615 V2 EN
Figure 480:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1051
Section 16
Monitoring
Main Contact
1
0
POSCLOSE
1
0
POSOPEN
1
0
t1
tOpen
t2
tTravelOpen = tOpen + t1 + t2
t3
tClose
t4
tTravelClose = tClose + t3 + t4
IEC12000616_1_en.vsd
IEC12000616 V1 EN
Figure 481:
There is a time difference t1 between the pickup of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2
between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is
completely open. Therefore, a correction factor needs to be added to get the actual opening
time. This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr (t1+t2) setting. The closing time is
calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4) setting to the measured
closing time.
The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time (TTRVCL)
are given as service values.
The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the input
RSTCBWR.
1052
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
16.4.7.2
Phase current
check
I3P-ILRMSPH
Contact
position
indicator
POSCLOSE
POSOPEN
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS
IEC12000613-3-en.vsd
IEC12000613 V3 EN
Figure 482:
16.4.7.3
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1053
Section 16
Monitoring
I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining
life estimation
POSCLOSE
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR
Alarm limit
Check
BLOCK
CBLIFEAL
BLKALM
IEC12000620-3-en.vsd
IEC12000620 V3 EN
Figure 483:
Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker
16.4.7.4
Accumulated energy
The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based on
current samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The operation
is described in Figure 484.
The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil circuit
TRIND is high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.
1054
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
I3P-IL
TRCMD
I3P-ILRMSPH
Accumulated
energy
calculation
POSCLOSE
TRIND
IPOWPH
LRSTIPOW
Alarm limit
Check
BLOCK
IPOWALPH
IPOWLOPH
BLKALM
IEC12000619-3-en.vsd
IEC12000619 V3 EN
Figure 484:
Main Contact
close
close
open
POSCLOSE
open
POSCLOSE 1
Energy
Accumulation
starts
Energy
Accumulation
starts
ContTrCorr
(Negative)
ContTrCorr
(Positive)
IEC12000618_1_en.vsd
IEC12000618 V1 EN
Figure 485:
Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip output.
TRIND is used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay between the trip
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1055
Section 16
Monitoring
initiation and the opening of the main contact is introduced by the setting
OperTimeDelay.
The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value can be
reset by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input RSTIPOW.
16.4.7.5
POSOPEN
NOOPER
RSTCBWR
Alarm limit
Check
BLOCK
BLKALM
OPERALM
OPERLO
IEC12000617 V2 EN
Figure 486:
Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change of the
auxiliary contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit breaker
operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the InitCounterVal parameter
and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on the LHMI or activating the input
RSTCBWR.
1056
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
16.4.7.6
INADAYS
Inactive timer
POSOPEN
Alarm limit
Check
BLOCK
MONALM
BLKALM
IEC12000614 V2 EN
Figure 487:
Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained
in the same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring the states of the
POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.
The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial number
of inactive days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1057
Section 16
Monitoring
16.4.7.7
Spring charging
time
measurement
SPRCHRD
RSTSPCHT
SPCHT
Alarm limit
Check
BLOCK
SPCHALM
BLKALM
IEC12000621 V2 EN
Figure 488:
16.4.7.8
1058
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
PRESALM
BLOCK
AND
tDGasPresAlm
0
GPRESALM
BLKALM
PRESLO
AND
tDGasPresLO
0
GPRESLO
ANSI12000622 V1 EN
Figure 489:
When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated after a
time delay set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can be blocked by
activating the BLKALM input.
If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes high,
activating the lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the tDGasPresLO
setting. The GPRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the BLKALM input.
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK
input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from the function
can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.
16.4.8
Technical data
Table 699:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0 200) ms
3 ms
(0 9999)
(0.00 60.00) s
0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
greater
(0.00 60.00) s
0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
greater
(0.00 60.00) s
0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
greater
3 ms
Remaining Life of CB
2 operations
Accumulated Energy
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1059
Section 16
Monitoring
16.5
16.5.1
Identification
Function description
Event function
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
EVENT
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
S00946 V1 EN
16.5.2
Functionality
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, timetagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These
events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event
function (EVENT). The event function block is used for remote communication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.
16.5.3
Function block
EVENT
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16
IEC05000697-2-en.vsd
IEC05000697 V2 EN
Figure 490:
1060
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
16.5.4
Signals
Table 700:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 1
INPUT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 2
INPUT3
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 3
INPUT4
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 4
INPUT5
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 5
INPUT6
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 6
INPUT7
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 7
INPUT8
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 8
INPUT9
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 9
INPUT10
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 10
INPUT11
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 11
INPUT12
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 12
INPUT13
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 13
INPUT14
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 14
INPUT15
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 15
INPUT16
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 16
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1061
Section 16
Monitoring
16.5.5
Table 701:
Settings
EVENT Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SPAChannelMask
Disabled
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
Disabled
LONChannelMask
Disabled
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
Disabled
EventMask1
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask2
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask3
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask4
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask5
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask6
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask7
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask8
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
1062
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EventMask9
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask10
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask11
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask12
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask13
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask14
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask15
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask16
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal2
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal3
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal4
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal5
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal6
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal7
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal8
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal9
0 - 3600
1063
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MinRepIntVal10
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal11
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal12
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal13
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal14
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal15
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal16
0 - 3600
16.5.6
Operation principle
The main purpose of the event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the state or
value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state transition,
for which event generation is enabled.
Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a name
from the Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single
events, but are also intended for double indication events.
EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and
binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing
module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module. The
time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have a
resolution corresponding to the execution cycle-time of the source application. The timetagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution of 1
ms.
The outputs from EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and alarms
by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input is intended
to be used by the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000
events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event
is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treated
commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The EventMask can be set
individually for each input channel. These settings are available:
1064
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
It is possible to define which part of EVENT function generates the events. This can be
performed individually for the SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask respectively.
For each communication type these settings are available:
Disabled
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It is
possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input
channel.
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the
event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is implemented.
If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further
events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be removed when the input calms
down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the maximum burst quota. The maximum
burst quota per input channel is 45 events per second.
16.6
16.6.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Disturbance report
DRPRDRE
Disturbance report
A1RADR - A4RADR
Disturbance report
B1RBDR - B8RBDR
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1065
Section 16
Monitoring
16.6.2
Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.
Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all
selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a, maximum
of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:
Sequential of events
Indications
Event recorder
Trip value recorder
Disturbance recorder
16.6.3
Function block
DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
IEC05000406-3-en.vsd
IEC05000406 V3 EN
Figure 491:
1066
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
A1RADR
^GRP INPUT1
^GRP INPUT2
^GRP INPUT3
^GRP INPUT4
^GRP INPUT5
^GRP INPUT6
^GRP INPUT7
^GRP INPUT8
^GRP INPUT9
^GRP INPUT10
IEC05000430-4-en.vsdx
IEC05000430 V4 EN
Figure 492:
A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40
IEC05000431-3-en.vsd
IEC05000431 V3 EN
Figure 493:
B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16
IEC05000432-3-en.vsd
IEC05000432 V3 EN
Figure 494:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1067
Section 16
Monitoring
16.6.4
Signals
Table 702:
Name
Description
DRPOFF
BOOLEAN
RECSTART
BOOLEAN
RECMADE
BOOLEAN
CLEARED
BOOLEAN
MEMUSED
BOOLEAN
Table 703:
Name
Default
Description
GRPINPUT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT3
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT4
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT5
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT6
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT7
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT8
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT9
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT10
GROUP
SIGNAL
A2RADR and A3RADR functions have the same input signal specifications as A1RADR
but with different numbering:
1068
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Table 704:
Name
Default
Description
INPUT31
REAL
Analog channel 31
INPUT32
REAL
Analog channel 32
INPUT33
REAL
Analog channel 33
INPUT34
REAL
Analog channel 34
INPUT35
REAL
Analog channel 35
INPUT36
REAL
Analog channel 36
INPUT37
REAL
Analog channel 37
INPUT38
REAL
Analog channel 38
INPUT39
REAL
Analog channel 39
INPUT40
REAL
Analog channel 40
Table 705:
Name
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 16
B2RBDR to B8RBDR functions have the same input signal specifications as B1RBDR
but with different numbering:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1069
Section 16
Monitoring
16.6.5
Table 706:
Name
Settings
DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
PreFaultRecT
0.05 - 9.90
0.01
0.10
PostFaultRecT
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
0.5
TimeLimit
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
PostRetrig
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
MaxNoStoreRec
10 - 100
100
ZeroAngleRef
1 - 30
Ch
OpModeTest
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Table 707:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
1070
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Table 708:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NomValue01
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe01
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe01
0 - 5000
200
NomValue02
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe02
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe02
0 - 5000
200
NomValue03
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe03
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe03
0 - 5000
200
NomValue04
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe04
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
1071
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OverTrigLe04
0 - 5000
200
NomValue05
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe05
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe05
0 - 5000
200
NomValue06
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe06
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe06
0 - 5000
200
NomValue07
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe07
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe07
0 - 5000
200
NomValue08
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe08
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe08
0 - 5000
200
NomValue09
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe09
0 - 200
50
1072
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OverTrigOp09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe09
0 - 5000
200
NomValue10
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe10
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe10
0 - 5000
200
A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as A1RADR
but with different numbering:
A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as
A1RADR but with different numbering (examples given in brackets):
Table 709:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigDR01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED01
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED02
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
1073
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SetLED03
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED04
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED05
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED06
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED07
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED08
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED09
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED10
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR11
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
1074
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SetLED11
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR12
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED12
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR13
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED13
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR14
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED14
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR15
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED15
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR16
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED16
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
FunType1
0 - 255
InfNo1
0 - 255
FunType2
0 - 255
InfNo2
0 - 255
FunType3
0 - 255
InfNo3
0 - 255
FunType4
0 - 255
1075
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
InfNo4
0 - 255
FunType5
0 - 255
InfNo5
0 - 255
FunType6
0 - 255
InfNo6
0 - 255
FunType7
0 - 255
InfNo7
0 - 255
FunType8
0 - 255
InfNo8
0 - 255
FunType9
0 - 255
InfNo9
0 - 255
FunType10
0 - 255
InfNo10
0 - 255
FunType11
0 - 255
InfNo11
0 - 255
FunType12
0 - 255
InfNo12
0 - 255
FunType13
0 - 255
InfNo13
0 - 255
FunType14
0 - 255
InfNo14
0 - 255
FunType15
0 - 255
1076
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
InfNo15
0 - 255
FunType16
0 - 255
InfNo16
0 - 255
Table 710:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigLevel01
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa01
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel02
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa02
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel03
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa03
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel04
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa04
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel05
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa05
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel06
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa06
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel07
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa07
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel08
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa08
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel09
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1077
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IndicationMa09
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel10
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa10
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel11
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa11
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel12
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa12
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel13
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa13
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel14
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa14
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel15
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa15
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel16
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa16
Hide
Show
Show
B2RBDR to B8RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as B1RBDR
but with different numbering (examples given in brackets):
B2RBDR to B8RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as
B1RBDR but with different numbering (examples given in brackets):
1078
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
16.6.6
Monitored data
Table 711:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
MemoryUsed
INTEGER
UnTrigStatCh1
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh1
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh2
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh2
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh3
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh3
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh4
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh4
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh5
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh5
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh6
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh6
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh7
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh7
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh8
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1079
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OvTrigStatCh8
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh9
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh9
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh10
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh10
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh11
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh11
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh12
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh12
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh13
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh13
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh14
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh14
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh15
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh15
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh16
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh16
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh17
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh17
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh18
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh18
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh19
BOOLEAN
1080
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OvTrigStatCh19
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh20
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh20
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh21
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh21
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh22
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh22
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh23
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh23
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh24
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh24
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh25
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh25
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh26
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh26
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh27
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh27
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh28
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh28
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh29
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh29
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh30
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1081
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
1082
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OvTrigStatCh30
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh31
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh31
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh32
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh32
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh33
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh33
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh34
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh34
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh35
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh35
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh36
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh36
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh37
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh37
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh38
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh38
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh39
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh39
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh40
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh40
BOOLEAN
FaultNumber
INTEGER
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
16.6.7
Operation principle
Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the
operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the
system.
The functions included in the disturbance report are:
Figure 495 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and
function blocks. Sequential of events (SOE), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND)
uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder
(TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR).
Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR and
BxRBDR.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1083
Section 16
Monitoring
AxRADR
Disturbance Report
DRPRDRE
Analog signals
BxRBDR
Disturbance
recorder
Binary signals
Sequential of
events
Event recorder
Indications
ANSI09000337-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000337 V2 EN
Figure 495:
The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each
with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The sequential of events
function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time,
and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash
memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each
report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Disturbance report
Record no. N
General dist.
information
Indications
Trip
values
Event
recordings
Disturbance
recording
Event list
(SOE)
en05000161_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000161 V1 EN
Figure 496:
1084
Section 16
Monitoring
Number of recordings
100
3.4s
20 analog
96 binary
3.4s
80
40 analog
96 binary
60
6.3s
6.3s
50 Hz
6.3s
40
60 Hz
300
350
400 s
en05000488_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000488 V1 EN
Figure 497:
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might
cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1085
Section 16
Monitoring
Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values
are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the user must use
a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or MMS (over 61850)
client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or remotely via the station bus
(Ethernet ports).
Indications (IND)
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged).
Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report
Recording times
Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable
time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. Disturbance
recorder (DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register disturbance data and
events during tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording =
1086
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT
PostFaultRecT
3
en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN
Figure 498:
PreFaultRecT, 1
Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the trip time of
the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2
Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid
trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated
triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit
Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not
reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording
and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the setting
TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external
analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data communication module
(LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and summation block (3PHSUM).
The last 10 channels may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as
function block output signals (mA input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents
and so on).
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1087
Section 16
Monitoring
A1RADR
SMAI
External analog
signals
Block
^GRP2_A
AI3P
AI1
^GRP2_B
^GRP2_C
AI2
AI3
INPUT2
^GRP2_N
Type
AI4
AIN
INPUT4
A2RADR
INPUT1
A3RADR
INPUT3
INPUT5
INPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
ANSI10000029-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000029 V1 EN
Figure 499:
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration)
available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the SMAI function block.
The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz).
Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific
function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance
recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new updated sample is available.
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In case
of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application
Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases where
only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the information
available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AINoutput). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input signal the corresponding
information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the SMAI function block.
Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = Enabled means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers
1088
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
even if operation is set to Disabled. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as
trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.
If Operation = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph.
However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input
channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.
If Operation = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the
entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.
Binary signals
Up to 128 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The signals
can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected
to be recorded when:
Each of the 128 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation =
Operation>TrigDR =Enabled). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED
on the local HMI (SetLED = Enabled).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, sequential of events and the
disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as
triggers. The indications are also selected from these 128 signals with local HMI
IndicationMask = Show/Hide.
Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the sequential of events,
which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete
disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there
is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of
choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:
Manual trigger
Binary-signal trigger
Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via
station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1089
Section 16
Monitoring
generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to the operator's manual for
procedure.
Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger
from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the
disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the
disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and
UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the
absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above
the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with
a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent
trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is
separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog trigger conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The trip time for this initiation is typically in the
range of one cycle, 16 2/3 ms for a 60 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.
Post Retrigger
Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition
during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However, under
certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for
instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig =
Enabled) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will pickup
and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.
When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Disabled), a new recording will not
pickup until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig
occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new
complete recording will be started.
Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.
1090
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
16.6.8
Technical data
Table 712:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Pre-fault time
(0.059.90) s
Post-fault time
(0.110.0) s
Limit time
(0.510.0) s
1 ms
30 + 10 (external + internally
derived)
96
30
96
150
Sampling rate
1 kHz at 50 Hz
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth
(5-300) Hz
16.7
16.7.1
Identification
Function description
Logical signal status report
16.7.2
IEC 61850
identification
BINSTATREP
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a SPA
master to poll signals from various other functions.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1091
Section 16
Monitoring
16.7.3
Function block
BINSTATREP
BLOCK
OUTPUT1
^INPUT1
OUTPUT2
^INPUT2
OUTPUT3
^INPUT3
OUTPUT4
^INPUT4
OUTPUT5
^INPUT5
OUTPUT6
^INPUT6
OUTPUT7
^INPUT7
OUTPUT8
^INPUT8
OUTPUT9
^INPUT9
OUTPUT10
^INPUT10
OUTPUT11
^INPUT11
OUTPUT12
^INPUT12
OUTPUT13
^INPUT13
OUTPUT14
^INPUT14
OUTPUT15
^INPUT15
OUTPUT16
^INPUT16
IEC09000730-1-en.vsd
IEC09000730 V1 EN
Figure 500:
16.7.4
Signals
Table 713:
Name
1092
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Table 714:
Name
16.7.5
Table 715:
Name
t
16.7.6
Type
Description
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT4
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT5
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT6
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT7
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT8
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT9
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT10
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT11
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT12
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT13
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT14
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT15
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT16
BOOLEAN
Settings
BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
0.0 - 60.0
Unit
Step
Default
0.1
10.0
Description
Time delay of function
Operation principle
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16 outputs.
The output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or via SPA
communication.
When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input signal
remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal resets.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1093
Section 16
Monitoring
INPUTn
OUTPUTn
t
t
IEC09000732-1-en.vsd
IEC09000732 V1 EN
Figure 501:
16.8
16.8.1
Identification
Function description
Measured value expander block
16.8.2
IEC 61850
identification
RANGE_XP
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and
VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI)
and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are provided with
measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four
settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value
expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced to enable translating the integer
output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low limit,
below low limit, normal, above high limit or above high-high limit. The output signals can
be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming purpose.
1094
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
16.8.3
Function block
RANGE*
RANGE_XP
HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW
IEC05000346-2-en.vsd
IEC05000346 V2 EN
Figure 502:
16.8.4
Signals
Table 716:
Name
Type
RANGE
Table 717:
INTEGER
Description
Measured value range
Name
16.8.5
Default
Type
Description
HIGHHIGH
BOOLEAN
HIGH
BOOLEAN
NORMAL
BOOLEAN
LOW
BOOLEAN
LOWLOW
BOOLEAN
Operation principle
The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGAPC). The
function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according to
table 718.
Table 718:
Measured supervised
value is:
Output:
LOWLOW
LOW
between low
and high limit
High
High
NORMAL
HIGH
HIGHHIGH
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
High
High
High
1095
Section 16
Monitoring
16.9
16.9.1
Identification
16.9.1.1
Identification
Function description
Limit counter
16.9.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
L4UFCNT
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The 12 Up limit counter L4UFCNT provides a settable counter with four independent
limits where the number of positive and/or negative sides on the input signal are counted
against the setting values for limits. The output for each limit is activated when the counted
value reaches that limit.
Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.
16.9.3
Operation principle
Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative sides on the
binary input signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks if the
accumulated value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits. The four limit
outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain activated until the
reset of the function. Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is stored in flash memory and
will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.
16.9.3.1
Design
Figure 503 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.
1096
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
BLOCK
INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
Detection
CountType
OVERFLOW
OnMaxValue
LIMIT1 4
Limit
Check
MaxValue
CounterLimit1...4
ERROR
Error
Detection
InitialValue
IEC12000625_1_en.vsd
IEC12000625 V1 EN
Figure 503:
Logic diagram
The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of the
function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three possibilities
after reaching the maximum counted value are:
Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count
The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as
illustrated in figure 504.
Overflow indication
Actual value
Max value
Counted value
Max value
Max value +1
0
Max value +2
1
...
IEC12000626_1_en.vsd
IEC12000626 V1 EN
Figure 504:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1097
Section 16
Monitoring
The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or initial
value setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting the input and
all the outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error condition remains
until the correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value setting(s) are applied.
The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is not
counted and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can be
initialized after reset of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their initial states
until the release of the block input.
16.9.3.2
Reporting
The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.
Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.
Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely, for
example from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a measurement on
the local HMI graphical display.
16.9.4
Function block
L4UFCNT
BLOCK
INPUT
RESET
ERROR
OVERFLOW
LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE
IEC12000029-1-en.vsd
IEC12000029 V1 EN
Figure 505:
16.9.5
Signals
Table 719:
Name
1098
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset of function
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
Table 720:
Name
16.9.6
Table 721:
Name
Type
Description
ERROR
BOOLEAN
OVERFLOW
BOOLEAN
LIMIT1
BOOLEAN
LIMIT2
BOOLEAN
LIMIT3
BOOLEAN
LIMIT4
BOOLEAN
VALUE
INTEGER
Counted value
Settings
L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
On
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
CountType
Positive edge
Negative edge
Both edges
Positive edge
CounterLimit1
1 - 65535
100
CounterLimit2
1 - 65535
200
CounterLimit3
1 - 65535
300
CounterLimit4
1 - 65535
400
MaxValue
1 - 65535
500
OnMaxValue
Stop
Rollover Steady
Rollover Pulsed
Stop
InitialValue
0 - 65535
16.9.7
Monitored data
Table 722:
Name
VALUE
Values (Range)
-
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Unit
-
Description
Counted value
1099
Section 16
Monitoring
16.9.8
Technical data
Table 723:
L4UFCNTtechnical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Counter value
0-65535
16.10
16.10.1
Identification
16.10.2
Function Description
IEC 61850
identification
Running hour-meter
TEILGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
Functionality
The Running hour-meter (TEILGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed
time when a given binary signal has been high, see also figure 506.
BLOCK
RESET
IN
ADDTIME
ACC_HOUR
Time Accumulation
with Retain
ACC_DAY
tAddToTime
q-1
99 999.9 h
a>b
tWarning
a>b
tAlarm
a>b
&
&
&
OVERFLOW
WARNING
ALARM
IEC15000321-1-en.vsd
IEC15000321 V1 EN
Figure 506:
TEILGAPC logics
1100
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
16.10.3
Function block
TEILGAPC
BLOCK
IN
ADDTIME
RESET
ALARM
WARNING
OVERFLOW
ACC_HOUR
ACC_DAY
IEC15000323.vsdx
IEC15000323 V1 EN
Figure 507:
16.10.4
Signals
Table 724:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
IN
BOOLEAN
ADDTIME
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Table 725:
Name
Description
ALARM
BOOLEAN
WARNING
BOOLEAN
OVERFLOW
BOOLEAN
ACC_HOUR
REAL
ACC_DAY
REAL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1101
Section 16
Monitoring
16.10.5
Table 726:
Name
Settings
TEILGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
tAlarm
1.0 - 99999.9
Hour
0.1
90000.0
tWarning
1.0 - 99999.9
Hour
0.1
50000.0
tAddToTime
0.0 - 99999.9
Hour
0.1
0.0
16.10.6
Operation principle
Figure 508 describes the simplified logic of the function.
Loop Delay
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision
Plus Retain
WARNING
ALARM
BLOCK
RESET
ACC_HOUR
Time Accumulation
IN
ACC_DAY
ADDTIME
tAddToTime
Loop Delay
IEC15000322.vsd
IEC15000322 V1 EN
Figure 508:
1102
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
RESET: Reset of the accumulated value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
The ACC_HOUR output represents the accumulated time in hours and the ACC_DAY
output represents the accumulated time in days.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable time limit parameters in hours. They are also
independent of each other, that is, there is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.
tAddToTime is a user settable time parameter in hours.
tAlarm, tWarning and tAddToTime are possible to be defined with a resolution of 0.1 hours
(6 minutes).
The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 99999.9 hours. The outputs will reset and
the accumulated time will reset and pickup from zero if an overflow occurs.
16.10.6.1
Operation accuracy
The accuracy of TEILGAPC depends on essentially two factors
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1103
Section 16
Monitoring
16.10.6.2
Memory storage
The value of the accumulated time is retained in a non-volatile memory,
Consequently in case of a power failure, there is a risk of losing the difference in time
between actual time and last time stored in the non-volatile memory.
16.10.7
Technical data
Table 727:
1104
Range or value
Accuracy
(0 - 99999.9) hours
(0 - 99999.9) hours
0.1%
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
Section 17
Metering
17.1
17.1.1
Identification
Function description
Pulse-counter logic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
PCFCNT
S00947 V1 EN
17.1.2
Functionality
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by
the PCFCNT function. A scaled service value is available over the station bus. The special
Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to
achieve this functionality.
17.1.3
Function block
PCFCNT
BLOCK
READ_VAL
BI_PULSE*
RS_CNT
INVALID
RESTART
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL
IEC14000043-1-en.vsd
IEC09000335 V3 EN
Figure 509:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1105
Section 17
Metering
17.1.4
Signals
Table 728:
Name
Type
Block of function
READ_VAL
BOOLEAN
BI_PULSE
BOOLEAN
RS_CNT
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 730:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 729:
17.1.5
Default
BLOCK
Type
Description
INVALID
BOOLEAN
RESTART
BOOLEAN
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
NEW_VAL
BOOLEAN
SCAL_VAL
REAL
Settings
PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
EventMask
NoEvents
ReportEvents
NoEvents
CountCriteria
Disabled
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
RisingEdge
Scale
1.000 - 90000.000
0.001
1.000
Quantity
Count
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
Count
tReporting
0 - 3600
60
1106
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
17.1.6
Monitored data
Table 731:
Name
17.1.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
SCAL_VAL
REAL
Operation principle
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary
input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are sent
to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.
The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is
synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values
can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active
counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI) or IEC 61850.
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental
counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format,
that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The
counter is reset at initialization of the IED.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value
(pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality
consists of:
The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the
value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database.
PCFCNT updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and
activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connected to an
Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time
corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function.
The pulse-counter logic function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that
is specially adapted to the pulse-counter logic function.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1107
Section 17
Metering
Figure 510 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the inputs
and outputs.
SingleCmdFunc
OUTx
SingleCmdFunc
OUTx
I/Omodule
Pulse
INPUT OUT
Pulse length >1s
Reset counter
PulseCounter
BLOCK
INVALID
RESTART
READ_VAL
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
BI_PULSE
RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL
SMS settings
1.Operation = Off/On
2.tReporting = 0s...60min
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
EVENT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
IEC EVENT
Database
Pulse counter value:
0...2147483647
en05000744_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000744 V1 EN
Figure 510:
The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics, which
are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as
the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to
READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a
pulse with a length >1 second.
The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary
Input Module (BIM).
The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.
Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be
connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART,
BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event
function block.
The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the
pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.
The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED pickup, in the
first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last
integration cycle.
1108
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are
two reasons why the counter is blocked:
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated
since last report.
Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.
The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time and
status information.
17.1.8
Technical data
Table 732:
Function
Setting range
Accuracy
Input frequency
(13600) s
17.2
17.2.1
Identification
Function description
Function for energy calculation and
demand handling
17.2.2
IEC 61850
identification
ETPMMTR
IEC 60617
identification
W_Varh
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Measurements function block (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well as
reactive power values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling
(ETPMMTR) uses measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1109
Section 17
Metering
accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction. Energy
values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are also
calculated by the function. This function includes zero point clamping to remove noise
from the input signal. As output of this function: periodic energy calculations, integration
of energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm signals for limit violation of energy
values and maximum power demand, can be found.
The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power values by
integrating them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active and reactive
energy values will happen in both forward and reverse directions. These energy values are
available as output signals and also as pulse outputs. Integration of energy values can be
controlled by inputs (STARTACC and STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset
to initial values with RSTACC input.
The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set time
interval tEnergy and these values are updated every minute through output channels. The
active and reactive maximum power demand values are calculated for both forward and
reverse direction and these values can be reset with RSTDMD input.
17.2.3
Function block
ETPMMTR
P*
ACCINPRG
Q*
EAFPULSE
STARTACC
EARPULSE
STOPACC
ERFPULSE
RSTACC
ERRPULSE
RSTDMD
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
IEC14000019-1-en.vsd
IEC14000019 V1 EN
Figure 511:
1110
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
17.2.4
Signals
Table 733:
Name
Default
Description
REAL
REAL
STARTACC
BOOLEAN
STOPACC
BOOLEAN
RSTACC
BOOLEAN
RSTDMD
BOOLEAN
Table 734:
Name
Description
ACCINPRG
BOOLEAN
EAFPULSE
BOOLEAN
EARPULSE
BOOLEAN
ERFPULSE
BOOLEAN
ERRPULSE
BOOLEAN
EAFALM
BOOLEAN
EARALM
BOOLEAN
ERFALM
BOOLEAN
ERRALM
BOOLEAN
EAFACC
REAL
EARACC
REAL
ERFACC
REAL
ERRACC
REAL
MAXPAFD
REAL
MAXPARD
REAL
MAXPRFD
REAL
MAXPRRD
REAL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1111
Section 17
Metering
17.2.5
Table 735:
Name
Settings
ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
EnaAcc
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tEnergy
1 Minute
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
1 Minute
tEnergyOnPls
0.100 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
tEnergyOffPls
0.100 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
EAFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
100.000
EARAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
100.000
ERFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
100.000
ERRAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
100.000
Table 736:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EALim
0.001 10000000000.000
MWh
0.001
1000000.000
ERLim
0.001 10000000000.000
MVArh
0.001
1000.000
EnZeroClamp
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
LevZeroClampP
0.001 - 10000.000
MW
0.001
10.000
LevZeroClampQ
0.001 - 10000.000
MVAr
0.001
10.000
DirEnergyAct
Forward
Reverse
Forward
DirEnergyReac
Forward
Reverse
Forward
EAFPrestVal
0.000 100000000.000
MWh
0.001
0.000
1112
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EARPrestVal
0.000 100000000.000
MWh
0.001
0.000
ERFPresetVal
0.000 100000000.000
MVArh
0.001
0.000
ERRPresetVal
0.000 100000000.000
MVArh
0.001
0.000
17.2.6
Monitored data
Table 737:
Name
17.2.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
EAFACC
REAL
MWh
EARACC
REAL
MWh
ERFACC
REAL
MVArh
ERRACC
REAL
MVArh
MAXPAFD
REAL
MW
MAXPARD
REAL
MW
MAXPRFD
REAL
MVAr
MAXPRRD
REAL
MVAr
Operation principle
The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements
function CVMMXN are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure the
integrated energy. Figure 512 shows the overall functionality of the energy calculation
and demand handling function ETPMMTR.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1113
Section 17
Metering
MAXPAFD
RSTDMD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
Zero Clamping
Detection
MAXPRRD
Maximum Power
Demand Calculation
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
Energy Accumulation
Calculation
STARTACC
ERRPULSE
EAFACC
EARACC
STOPACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
RSTACC
IEC13000185-2-en.vsd
IEC13000185 V2 EN
Figure 512:
The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled by the
STARTACC and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the output ACCINPRG
is high. Otherwise, it is low. Figure 513 shows the logic of the ACCINPRG output.
ACCINPRG is active when the STARTACC input is active and the EnaAcc setting is
enabled. When the RSTACC input is in the active state, the output ACCINPRG is low even
if the integration of energy is enabled. ACCINPRG is deactivated by activating the
STOPACC input.
STOPACC
FALSE
STARTACC
&
EnaAcc
&
ACCINPRG
q-1
RSTACC
q-1 = unit delay
IEC13000186-4-en.vsd
IEC13000186 V4 EN
Figure 513:
The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service values and
also as pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can be connected to
a pulse counter. Accumulated energy outputs are available for forward as well as reverse
direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset to initial accumulated energy
values (ExxPrestVal) from the local HMI reset menu or with the input signal RSTACC.
1114
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
Figure 514 shows the logic for integration of energy in active forward direction. Similarly,
the integration of energy in active reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.
RSTACC
EAFPrestVal
ACCINPRG
P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X
60.0
T
T
EAFACC
&
q-1
T
EALim
-1
a
b
0.0
a>b
IEC13000187-4-en.vsd
IEC13000187 V4 EN
Figure 514:
The energy pulses generated by using internally calculated accumulated energy values
and energy per pulse (ExxAccPlsQty) setting. The accumulated energy values are divided
by the energy-per-pulse value to get the number of pulses. The number of pulses can be
reset to zero by activating RSTACC input or by using the local HMI reset menu. The pulse
on and off time duration is set by the settings tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls. Figure
515 shows the logic for pulse output generation for the integrated energy in the active
forward direction. Similarly, the pulse generation for integrated energy in the active
reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1115
Section 17
Metering
tEnergyOffPls
EAFACC
a
EALim
Counter
CU
CV
a>b
q-1
Rst
R
tOff
t
q-1
0
T
a
b
EAFAccPlsQty
a>b
TP
EAFPULSE
0
Counter
CU
CV
RSTACC
Rst
q-1
tEnergyOnPls
q-1 = unit delay
IEC13000188-4-en.vsd
IEC13000188 V4 EN
Figure 515:
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set time
interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and stored in a register
available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXPRFD and
MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction. When the
RSTDMD input is active from the local HMI reset menu, these outputs are reset to zero. The
energy alarm is activated once the periodic energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim.
Figure 516 shows the logic of alarm for active forward energy exceeds limit and
Maximum forward active power demand value. Similarly, the maximum power
calculation and energy alarm outputs in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive
reverse is implemented.
P (ACTIVE FORWARD)
tEnergy
Average Power
Calculation
EAFALM
a>b
EALim
RSTMAXD
0.0
MAX
MAXPAFD
q-1
IEC13000189-4-en.vsd
IEC13000189 V4 EN
Figure 516:
1116
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
17.2.8
Technical data
17.2.8.1
Technical data
Table 738:
Function
Energy metering
Range or value
MWh Export/Import, MVarh
Export/Import
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Accuracy
Input from MMXU. No extra error
at steady load
1117
1118
Section 18
Station communication
Section 18
Station communication
18.1
Communication protocols
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or
many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA)
bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.
Available communication protocols are:
18.2
Description
Off
Error
Warning
Ready
Protocol is ready
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1119
Section 18
Station communication
IEC15000400-1-en.vsd
IEC15000400 V1 EN
Figure 517:
18.3
DNP3 protocol
DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to
communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a detailed
description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.
1120
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.4
18.4.1
Protocol
Ethernet
100BASE-FX (ST
connector)
Serial
Glass fibre (ST connector)
EIA-485
IEC 6185081
DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
= Supported
When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two ports are
connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address
138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IPaddress 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0
18.4.2
Table 740:
Settings
IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
PortSelGOOSE
Front
LANAB
LANCD
LANAB
PortSelMMS
Front
LANAB
LANCD
Any
Any
ProtocolEdition
Ed 1
Ed 2
Ed 1
Protocol Edition
RemoteModControl
Disabled
Maintenance
All levels
Disabled
AllowGOOSESimulation
No
Yes
No
IEC61850BufTimEnable
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1121
Section 18
Station communication
18.4.3
Technical data
Table 741:
Communication protocols
Function
Value
Protocol
IEC 61850-8-1
100BASE-FX
Protocol
IEC 608705103
9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol
DNP3.0
30019200 Bd
Protocol
TCP/IP, Ethernet
100 Mbit/s
18.4.4
18.4.4.1
Functionality
Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC is used to send one
single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.
18.4.4.2
Function block
SPGAPC
BLOCK
^IN
IEC14000021-1-en.vsd
IEC14000021 V1 EN
Figure 518:
1122
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
SP16GAPC
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16
IEC14000020-1-en.vsd
IEC14000020 V1 EN
Figure 519:
18.4.4.3
Signals
Table 742:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN
BOOLEAN
Input status
Table 743:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1 status
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2 status
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3 status
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4 status
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5 status
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6 status
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7 status
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8 status
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9 status
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10 status
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11 status
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12 status
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13 status
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1123
Section 18
Station communication
Name
18.4.4.4
Type
Default
Description
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14 status
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15 status
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16 status
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
18.4.4.5
Monitored data
Table 744:
Name
OUT
Table 745:
Name
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
Output status
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OUT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 1 status
OUT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 2 status
OUT3
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 3 status
OUT4
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 4 status
OUT5
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 5 status
OUT6
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 6 status
OUT7
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 7 status
OUT8
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 8 status
OUT9
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 9 status
OUT10
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 10 status
OUT11
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 11 status
OUT12
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 12 status
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Name
18.4.4.6
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OUT13
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 13 status
OUT14
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 14 status
OUT15
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 15 status
OUT16
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 16 status
OUTOR
GROUP
SIGNAL
Operation principle
Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single Point
indication (SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or
system that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which
function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.
18.4.5
18.4.5.1
Functionality
Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC function is used to send
the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog
value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.
18.4.5.2
Function block
MVGAPC
BLOCK
^IN
^VALUE
RANGE
IEC14000022-1-en.vsd
IEC14000022 V1 EN
Figure 520:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1125
Section 18
Station communication
18.4.5.3
Signals
Table 746:
Name
Type
Block of function
IN
REAL
Name
Table 748:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 747:
18.4.5.4
Default
BLOCK
Type
Description
VALUE
REAL
RANGE
INTEGER
Range
Settings
MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
BasePrefix
micro
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
unit
MV db
1 - 300
Type
10
MV zeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
MV hhLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
900.00
MV hLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
800.00
MV lLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
-800.00
MV llLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
-900.00
MV min
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
-1000.00
MV max
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
1000.00
MV dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
MV limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
1126
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.4.5.5
Monitored data
Table 749:
Name
18.4.5.6
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VALUE
REAL
RANGE
INTEGER
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
0=Normal
Range
Operation principle
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for
Measured Value (MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range,
as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other IEC
61850 clients in the substation.
18.4.6
18.4.6.1
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Parallel Redundancy
Protocol Status
PRPSTATUS
RCHLCCH
Duo driver
configuration
PRP
Functionality
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and IEC
62439-3 Edition 2 parallel redundancy protocol (PRP) are available as options when
ordering IEDs. Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 uses
both port AB and port CD on the OEM module.
18.4.6.2
Function block
PRPSTATUS
PRP-A LINK
PRP-A VALID
PRP-B LINK
PRP-B VALID
IEC09000757.vsd
IEC09000757 V2 EN
Figure 521:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1127
Section 18
Station communication
18.4.6.3
Signals
Table 750:
Name
18.4.6.4
Table 751:
Name
Type
Description
PRP-A LINK
BOOLEAN
PRP-A VALID
BOOLEAN
PRP-B LINK
BOOLEAN
PRP-B VALID
BOOLEAN
Settings
PRP Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
PRPMode
PRP-0
PRP-1
PRP-1
PRP Mode
IPAddress
0 - 18
IP
Address
192.168.7.10
IP-Address
IPMask
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.0
IP-Mask
18.4.6.5
Monitored data
Table 752:
Name
1128
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
AB Beh
INTEGER
2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On
AB Link Beh
CD Beh
INTEGER
1=On
2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
CD Link Beh
PRP Beh
INTEGER
2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On
PRP Beh
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.4.6.6
Principle of operation
The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is transmitted
on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one channel is
compared with data package identity from the other channel, if they are the same, the last
package is discarded. The PRP communication is based on the so called duo driver
concept.
The PRPSTATUS function block supervise the redundant communication on the two
channels. If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the last
10 s, the output PRP-A LINK and/or PRP-B LINK is set to 0 which indicates an error.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1129
Section 18
Station communication
Data
Data
Switch A
Switch B
1 2
1 2
Data
Data
AB
Configuration
PRP
IED
CD
OEM
PRPSTATUS
=IEC09000758=3=en=Original.vsd
IEC09000758 V3 EN
Figure 522:
1130
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.5
18.5.1
Functionality
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators workplace, from
the control center and also from other terminals.
LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3
from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These
networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few bytes),
peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, low maintenance,
multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports the needs of
applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows the reference model
for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the International Standardization
Organization (ISO).
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For
other addresses, refer to section "".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.
18.5.2
Table 753:
Name
Operation
Table 754:
Name
Settings
HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Disabled
Enabled
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation
TimerClass
Slow
Normal
Fast
Slow
Timer class
TimeDomain
Time domain
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1131
Section 18
Station communication
18.5.3
Operation principle
The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With protection
and control devices, fibre optic media is used, which enables the use of the maximum
speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices
connected to the network can communicate with each other. The own subnet and node
number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per one subnet).
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The measured
values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to the higherlevel devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized values, setting
values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also enables the bay level
devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example, interlocking information
among the terminals without the need of a bus master.
The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network variables
and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages, such as
measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals. Explicit
messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events and explicit read
and write messages to access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include
direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi-master
implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the terminals can
communicate with external devices using the same standard of network variables.
LON protocol
Configuration of LON
LON network tool (LNT) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network configuration.
All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks network, is easily
accessible on a single tool program.
Activate LON Communication
Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main Menu/
Configuration/Communication/Station communication/ LON/HORZCOMM:1,
where Operation must be set to ON.
Add LON Device Types LNT
A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the
device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505 using SLDT package
version 1p2 r04.
1132
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
EVENT:1
1024
EVENT:2
1040
EVENT:3
1056
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1133
Section 18
Station communication
Function block
EVENT:4
1072
EVENT:5
1088
EVENT:6
1104
EVENT:7
1120
EVENT:8
1136
EVENT:9
1152
EVENT:10
1168
EVENT:11
1184
EVENT:12
1200
EVENT:13
1216
EVENT:14
1232
EVENT:15
1248
EVENT:16
1264
EVENT:17
1280
EVENT:18
1296
EVENT:19
1312
EVENT:20
1328
Event masks
The event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool (PST)
under: Settings/IED settings/ Monitoring / EventFunction or via parameter setting tool
(PST) as follows:
No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for
integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event
function block.
Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always
reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. Other
Boolean signals, for example a pickup or a trip signal from a protection function is event
masked in the event function block.
Double indications
1134
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the event
reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is done in the
event function block.
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not possible
to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for the first 8
inputs on an event function block.
Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic. The reporting interval is taken from the connected
function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from the event function
block.
Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPAbus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character message
following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit
messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport service.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N) are
sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPAbus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message.
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, That is, the
function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 30, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 24; the SPA
addresses are according to table 756.
Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 670 series
IEDs.Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 650 series IEDs
The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used to
communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.
Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the
information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for
the application by a multiple command receive function block (MULTICMDRCV). With
horizontal communication, the input BOUND on MULTICMDSND must be set to 1.
There are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60 MULTICMDRCV function blocks available.
These function blocks are connected using the LON network tool (LNT). The tool also
defines the service and addressing on LON.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1135
Section 18
Station communication
This is an overview for configuring the network variables for the IEDs.
Configuration of LON network variables
Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the LON
network tool (LNT). The following is an example of how to configure network variables
concerning, for example, interlocking between two IEDs.
LON
BAY E1
BAY E3
MULTICMDSND: 7
MULTICMDSND: 9
BAY E4
MULTICMDSND: 9
en05000718.vsd
IEC05000718 V2 EN
Figure 523:
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From LNT
window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.
1136
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
en05000719.vsd
IEC05000719 V1 EN
Figure 524:
There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the dragand-drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the
Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there; or, they can
perform it by selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/ Download.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1137
Section 18
Station communication
en05000720.vsd
IEC05000720 V1 EN
Figure 525:
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the Main
Processing Module (NUM) and is used for LON, SPA, IEC60870-5-103 and DNP
communication.
There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables, and 2) ST/bayonet
for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a combination of both,
which is identified by a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre
to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling
and connection of fibre cables.
Table 756:
SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
BL_CMD
SCSWI01
1 I 5115
BL_CMD
SCSWI02
1 I 5139
BL_CMD
SCSWI02
1 I 5161
BL_CMD
SCSWI04
1 I 5186
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
BL_CMD
SCSWI05
1 I 5210
BL_CMD
SCSWI06
1 I 5234
BL_CMD
SCSWI07
1 I 5258
BL_CMD
SCSWI08
1 I 5283
BL_CMD
SCSWI09
1 I 5307
BL_CMD
SCSWI10
1 I 5331
BL_CMD
SCSWI11
1 I 5355
BL_CMD
SCSWI12
1 I 5379
BL_CMD
SCSWI13
1 I 5403
BL_CMD
SCSWI14
1 I 5427
BL_CMD
SCSWI15
1 I 5451
BL_CMD
SCSWI16
1 I 5475
BL_CMD
SCSWI17
1 I 5499
BL_CMD
SCSWI18
1 I 5523
BL_CMD
SCSWI19
1 I 5545
BL_CMD
SCSWI20
1 I 5571
BL_CMD
SCSWI21
1 I 5594
BL_CMD
SCSWI22
1 I 5619
BL_CMD
SCSWI23
1 I 5643
BL_CMD
SCSWI24
1 I 5667
BL_CMD
SCSWI25
1 I 5691
BL_CMD
SCSWI26
1 I 5715
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1139
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
BL_CMD
SCSWI27
1 I 5739
BL_CMD
SCSWI28
1 I 5763
BL_CMD
SCSWI29
1 I 5787
BL_CMD
SCSWI30
1 I 5811
BL_CMD
SCSWI31
1 I 5835
BL_CMD
SCSWI32
1 I 5859
CANCEL
SCSWI01
1 I 5107
CANCEL
SCSWI02
1 I 5131
CANCEL
SCSWI03
1 I 5153
CANCEL
SCSWI04
1 I 5178
CANCEL
SCSWI05
1 I 5202
CANCEL
SCSWI06
1 I 5226
CANCEL
SCSWI07
1 I 5250
CANCEL
SCSWI08
1 I 5275
CANCEL
SCSWI09
1 I 5299
CANCEL
SCSWI10
1 I 5323
CANCEL
SCSWI11
1 I 5347
CANCEL
SCSWI12
1 I 5371
CANCEL
SCSWI13
1 I 5395
CANCEL
SCSWI14
1 I 5419
CANCEL
SCSWI15
1 I 5443
CANCEL
SCSWI16
1 I 5467
1140
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
CANCEL
SCSWI17
1 I 5491
CANCEL
SCSWI18
1 I 5515
CANCEL
SCSWI19
1 I 5537
CANCEL
SCSWI20
1 I 5563
CANCEL
SCSWI21
1 I 5586
CANCEL
SCSWI22
1 I 5611
CANCEL
SCSWI23
1 I 5635
CANCEL
SCSWI24
1 I 5659
CANCEL
SCSWI25
1 I 5683
CANCEL
SCSWI26
1 I 5707
CANCEL
SCSWI27
1 I 5731
CANCEL
SCSWI28
1 I 5755
CANCEL
SCSWI29
1 I 5779
CANCEL
SCSWI30
1 I 5803
CANCEL
SCSWI31
1 I 5827
CANCEL
SCSWI32
1 I 5851
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01,
SELOpen+ILO=10,
SELClose+ILO=11,
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SCSWI01
1 I 5105
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI02
1 I 5129
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI03
1 I 5151
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI04
1 I 5176
1141
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI05
1 I 5200
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI06
1 I 5224
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI07
1 I 5248
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI08
1 I 5273
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI09
1 I 5297
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI10
1 I 5321
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI11
1 I 5345
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI12
1 I 5369
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI13
1 I 5393
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI14
1 I 5417
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI15
1 I 5441
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI16
1 I 5465
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI17
1 I 5489
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI18
1 I 5513
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI19
1 I 5535
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI20
1 I 5561
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI21
1 I 5584
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI22
1 I 5609
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI23
1 I 5633
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI24
1 I 5657
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI25
1 I 5681
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI26
1 I 5705
1142
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI27
1 I 5729
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI28
1 I 5753
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI29
1 I 5777
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI30
1 I 5801
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI31
1 I 5825
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI32
1 I 5849
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01,
ExcOpen+ILO=10,
ExcClose+ILO=11,
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
SCSWI01
1 I 5106
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI02
1 I 5130
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI02
1 I 5152
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI04
1 I 5177
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI05
1 I 5201
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI06
1 I 5225
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI07
1 I 5249
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI08
1 I 5274
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI09
1 I 5298
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI10
1 I 5322
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI11
1 I 5346
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI12
1 I 5370
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI13
1 I 5394
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI14
1 I 5418
1143
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI15
1 I 5442
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI16
1 I 5466
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI17
1 I 5490
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI18
1 I 5514
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI19
1 I 5536
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI20
1 I 5562
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI21
1 I 5585
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI22
1 I 5610
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI23
1 I 5634
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI24
1 I 5658
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI25
1 I 5682
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI26
1 I 5706
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI27
1 I 5730
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI28
1 I 5754
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI29
1 I 5778
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI30
1 I 5802
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI31
1 I 5826
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI32
1 I 5850
Sub Value
SXCBR01
2 I 7854
Sub Value
SXCBR02
2 I 7866
Sub Value
SXCBR03
2 I 7884
Sub Value
SXCBR04
2 I 7904
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Value
SXCBR05
2 I 7923
Sub Value
SXCBR06
2 I 7942
Sub Value
SXCBR07
2 I 7961
Sub Value
SXCBR08
2 I 7980
Sub Value
SXCBR09
3I7
Sub Value
SXCBR10
3 I 26
Sub Value
SXCBR11
3 I 45
Sub Value
SXCBR12
3 I 56
Sub Value
SXCBR13
3 I 74
Sub Value
SXCBR14
3 I 94
Sub Value
SXCBR15
3 I 120
Sub Value
SXCBR16
3 I 133
Sub Value
SXCBR17
3 I 158
Sub Value
SXCBR18
3 I 179
Sub Value
SXSWI01
3 I 196
Sub Value
SXSWI02
3 I 216
Sub Value
SXSWI03
3 I 235
Sub Value
SXSWI04
3 I 254
Sub Value
SXSWI05
3 I 272
Sub Value
SXSWI06
3 I 292
Sub Value
SXSWI07
3 I 310
Sub Value
SXSWI08
3 I 330
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1145
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Value
SXSWI09
3 I 348
Sub Value
SXSWI10
3 I 359
Sub Value
SXSWI11
3 I 378
Sub Value
SXSWI12
3 I 397
Sub Value
SXSWI13
3 I 416
Sub Value
SXSWI14
3 I 435
Sub Value
SXSWI15
3 I 454
Sub Value
SXSWI16
3 I 473
Sub Value
SXSWI17
3 I 492
Sub Value
SXSWI18
3 I 511
Sub Value
SXSWI19
3 I 530
Sub Value
SXSWI20
3 I 549
Sub Value
SXSWI21
3 I 568
Sub Value
SXSWI22
3 I 587
Sub Value
SXSWI23
3 I 606
Sub Value
SXSWI24
3 I 625
Sub Value
SXSWI25
3 I 644
Sub Value
SXSWI26
3 I 663
Sub Value
SXSWI27
3 I 682
Sub Value
SXSWI28
3 I 701
Sub Enable
SXCBR01
2 I 7855
1146
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Enable
SXCBR02
2 I 7865
Sub Enable
SXCBR03
2 I 7885
Sub Enable
SXCBR04
2 I 7903
Sub Enable
SXCBR05
2 I 7924
Sub Enable
SXCBR06
2 I 7941
Sub Enable
SXCBR07
2 I 7962
Sub Enable
SXCBR08
2 I 7979
Sub Enable
SXCBR09
3I8
Sub Enable
SXCBR10
3 I 25
Sub Enable
SXCBR11
3 I 46
Sub Enable
SXCBR12
3 I 55
Sub Enable
SXCBR13
3 I 75
Sub Enable
SXCBR14
3 I 93
Sub Enable
SXCBR15
3 I 121
Sub Enable
SXCBR16
3 I 132
Sub Enable
SXCBR17
3 I 159
Sub Enable
SXCBR18
3 I 178
Sub Enable
SXSWI01
3 I 197
Sub Enable
SXSWI02
3 I 215
Sub Enable
SXSWI03
3 I 234
Sub Enable
SXSWI04
3 I 252
Sub Enable
SXSWI05
3 I 271
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1147
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Enable
SXSWI06
3 I 290
Sub Enable
SXSWI07
3 I 309
Sub Enable
SXSWI08
3 I 328
Sub Enable
SXSWI09
3 I 347
Sub Enable
SXSWI10
3 I 360
Sub Enable
SXSWI11
3I 379
Sub Enable
SXSWI12
3 I 398
Sub Enable
SXSWI13
3 I 417
Sub Enable
SXSWI14
3 I 436
Sub Enable
SXSWI15
3 I 455
Sub Enable
SXSWI16
3 I 474
Sub Enable
SXSWI17
3 I 493
Sub Enable
SXSWI18
3 I 512
Sub Enable
SXSWI19
3 I 531
Sub Enable
SXSWI20
3 I 550
Sub Enable
SXSWI21
3 I 569
Sub Enable
SXSWI22
3 I 588
Sub Enable
SXSWI23
3 I 607
Sub Enable
SXSWI24
3 I 626
Sub Enable
SXSWI25
3 I 645
Sub Enable
SXSWI26
3 I 664
Sub Enable
SXSWI27
3 I 683
1148
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Enable
SXSWI28
3 I 702
Update Block
SXCBR01
2 I 7853
Update Block
SXCBR02
2 I 7864
Update Block
SXCBR03
2 I 7883
Update Block
SXCBR04
2 I 7905
Update Block
SXCBR05
2 I 7922
Update Block
SXCBR06
2 I 7943
Update Block
SXCBR07
2 I 7960
Update Block
SXCBR08
2 I 7981
Update Block
SXCBR09
3I6
Update Block
SXCBR10
3 I 27
Update Block
SXCBR11
3 I 44
Update Block
SXCBR12
3 I 57
Update Block
SXCBR13
3 I 73
Update Block
SXCBR14
3 I 92
Update Block
SXCBR15
3 I 122
Update Block
SXCBR16
3 I 131
Update Block
SXCBR17
3 I 160
Update Block
SXCBR18
3 I 177
Update Block
SXSWI01
3 I 198
Update Block
SXSWI02
3 I 214
Update Block
SXSWI03
3 I 236
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1149
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Update Block
SXSWI04
3 I 253
Update Block
SXSWI05
3 I 273
Update Block
SXSWI06
3 I 291
Update Block
SXSWI07
3 I 311
Update Block
SXSWI08
3 I 329
Update Block
SXSWI09
3 I 349
Update Block
SXSWI10
3 I 358
Update Block
SXSWI11
3 I 377
Update Block
SXSWI12
3 I 396
Update Block
SXSWI13
3 I 415
Update Block
SXSWI14
3 I 434
Update Block
SXSWI15
3 I 453
Update Block
SXSWI16
3 I 472
Update Block
SXSWI17
3 I 491
Update Block
SXSWI18
3 I 510
Update Block
SXSWI19
3 I 529
Update Block
SXSWI20
3 I 548
Update Block
SXSWI21
3 I 567
Update Block
SXSWI22
3 I 586
Update Block
SXSWI23
3 I 605
Update Block
SXSWI24
3 I 624
Update Block
SXSWI25
3 I 643
1150
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Name
18.5.4
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Update Block
SXSWI26
3 I 662
Update Block
SXSWI27
3 I 681
Update Block
SXSWI28
3 I 700
Technical data
Table 757:
Function
Value
Protocol
LON
Communication speed
1.25 Mbit/s
18.6
18.6.1
Functionality
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For
other addresses, refer to section "".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general.
18.6.2
Design
Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC requires the
following equipment:
Optical fibres
Opto/electrical converter for the PC
PC
The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM600. (Note! SPA cannot be
used with PCM600 2.6 or later).
When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a
front-connection cable. Note! SPA cannot be used from LHMI front, except for using
"FSTACCS", that is, Field Service Tool Access.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1151
Section 18
Station communication
18.6.3
Table 758:
Name
Settings
SPA Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
BaudRate
300 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
9600 Bd
Table 759:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
18.6.4
Operation principle
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data bits
+ even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For more information on
recommended baud rate for each type of IED, refer to Technical reference manual.
Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.
SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to an
IED with the SPA communication protocol implemented.
1152
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MIM3 to MIM16) are found in table
760.
Table 760:
Function block
SPA address
MIM3-CH1
4-O-6508
MIM3-CH2
4-O-6511
MIM3-CH3
4-O-6512
MIM3-CH4
4-O-6515
MIM3-CH5
4-O-6516
MIM3-CH6
4-O-6519
MIM4-CH1
4-O-6527
MIM4-CH2
4-O-6530
MIM4-CH3
4-O-6531
MIM4-CH4
4-O-6534
MIM4-CH5
4-O-6535
MIM4-CH6
4-O-6538
MIM5-CH1
4-O-6546
MIM5-CH2
4-O-6549
MIM5-CH3
4-O-6550
MIM5-CH4
4-O-6553
MIM5-CH5
4-O-6554
MIM5-CH6
4-O-6557
MIM6-CH1
4-O-6565
MIM6-CH2
4-O-6568
MIM6-CH3
4-O-6569
MIM6-CH4
4-O-6572
MIM6-CH5
4-O-6573
MIM6-CH6
4-O-6576
MIM7-CH1
4-O-6584
MIM7-CH2
4-O-6587
MIM7-CH3
4-O-6588
MIM7-CH4
4-O-6591
MIM7-CH5
4-O-6592
MIM7-CH6
4-O-6595
MIM8-CH1
4-O-6603
MIM8-CH2
4-O-6606
MIM8-CH3
4-O-6607
1153
Section 18
Station communication
Function block
SPA address
MIM8-CH4
4-O-6610
MIM8-CH5
4-O-6611
MIM8-CH6
4-O-6614
MIM9-CH1
4-O-6622
MIM9-CH2
4-O-6625
MIM9-CH3
4-O-6626
MIM9-CH4
4-O-6629
MIM9-CH5
4-O-6630
MIM9-CH6
4-O-6633
MIM10-CH1
4-O-6641
MIM10-CH2
4-O-6644
MIM10-CH3
4-O-6645
MIM10-CH4
4-O-6648
MIM10-CH5
4-O-6649
MIM10-CH6
4-O-6652
MIM11-CH1
4-O-6660
MIM11-CH2
4-O-6663
MIM11-CH3
4-O-6664
MIM11-CH4
4-O-6667
MIM11-CH5
4-O-6668
MIM11-CH6
4-O-6671
MIM12-CH1
4-O-6679
MIM12-CH2
4-O-6682
MIM12-CH3
4-O-6683
MIM12-CH4
4-O-6686
MIM12-CH5
4-O-6687
MIM12-CH6
4-O-6690
MIM13-CH1
4-O-6698
MIM13-CH2
4-O-6701
MIM13-CH3
4-O-6702
MIM13-CH4
4-O-6705
MIM13-CH5
4-O-6706
MIM13-CH6
4-O-6709
MIM14-CH1
4-O-6717
MIM14-CH2
4-O-6720
MIM14-CH3
4-O-6721
1154
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Function block
SPA address
MIM14-CH4
4-O-6724
MIM14-CH5
4-O-6725
MIM14-CH6
4-O-6728
MIM15-CH1
4-O-6736
MIM15-CH2
4-O-6739
MIM15-CH3
4-O-6740
MIM15-CH4
4-O-6743
MIM15-CH5
4-O-6744
MIM15-CH6
4-O-6747
MIM16-CH1
4-O-6755
MIM16-CH2
4-O-6758
MIM16-CH3
4-O-6759
MIM16-CH4
4-O-6762
MIM16-CH5
4-O-6763
MIM16-CH6
4-O-6766
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are found in
table 761.
Table 761:
Function block
PCFCNT:1
6-O-2788
6-O-2787
PCFCNT:2
6-O-2794
6-O-2793
PCFCNT:3
6-O-2800
6-O-2799
PCFCNT:4
6-O-2806
6-O-2805
PCFCNT:5
6-O-2812
6-O-2811
PCFCNT:6
6-O-2818
6-O-2817
PCFCNT:7
6-O-2824
6-O-2823
PCFCNT:8
6-O-2830
6-O-2829
PCFCNT:9
6-O-2836
6-O-2835
PCFCNT:10
6-O-2842
6-O-2841
PCFCNT:11
6-O-2848
6-O-2847
PCFCNT:12
6-O-2854
6-O-2853
PCFCNT:13
6-O-2860
6-O-2859
PCFCNT:14
6-O-2866
6-O-2865
PCFCNT:15
6-O-2872
6-O-2871
PCFCNT:16
6-O-2878
6-O-2877
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1155
Section 18
Station communication
I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function block
are used, that is, the addresses for BI1 BI16. For SPA addresses, refer to section Related
documents in Product Guide.
Single command, 16 signals
The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation
automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has 16 outputs
that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local
control functions, the local HMI can also be used.
Single command, 16 signals function consists of three function blocks; SINGLECMD:1
to SINGLECMD:3 for 16 binary output signals each.
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 3 signals function
block, SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first output. The other
outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the
SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.
The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to
SINGLECMD:3 are found in table 762.
Table 762:
Function block
SINGLECMD1-Cmd1
4-S-4639
5-O-511
SINGLECMD1-Cmd2
4-S-4640
5-O-512
SINGLECMD1-Cmd3
4-S-4641
5-O-513
SINGLECMD1-Cmd4
4-S-4642
5-O-514
SINGLECMD1-Cmd5
4-S-4643
5-O-515
SINGLECMD1-Cmd6
4-S-4644
5-O-516
SINGLECMD1-Cmd7
4-S-4645
5-O-517
SINGLECMD1-Cmd8
4-S-4646
5-O-518
SINGLECMD1-Cmd9
4-S-4647
5-O-519
SINGLECMD1-Cmd10
4-S-4648
5-O-520
SINGLECMD1-Cmd11
4-S-4649
5-O-521
SINGLECMD1-Cmd12
4-S-4650
5-O-522
SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13
4-S-4651
5-O-523
SINGLECMD1-Cmd14
4-S-4652
5-O-524
SINGLECMD1-Cmd15
4-S-4653
5-O-525
SINGLECMD1-Cmd16
4-S-4654
5-O-526
1156
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Function block
SINGLECMD2-Cmd1
4-S-4672
5-O-527
SINGLECMD2-Cmd2
4-S-4673
5-O-528
SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3
4-S-4674
5-O-529
SINGLECMD2-Cmd4
4-S-4675
5-O-530
SINGLECMD2-Cmd5
4-S-4676
5-O-531
SINGLECMD2-Cmd6
4-S-4677
5-O-532
SINGLECMD2-Cmd7
4-S-4678
5-O-533
SINGLECMD2-Cmd8
4-S-4679
5-O-534
SINGLECMD2-Cmd9
4-S-4680
5-O-535
SINGLECMD2-Cmd10
4-S-4681
5-O-536
SINGLECMD2-Cmd11
4-S-4682
5-O-537
SINGLECMD2-Cmd12
4-S-4683
5-O-538
SINGLECMD2-Cmd13
4-S-4684
5-O-539
SINGLECMD2-Cmd14
4-S-4685
5-O-540
SINGLECMD2-Cmd15
4-S-4686
5-O-541
SINGLECMD2-Cmd16
4-S-4687
5-O-542
SINGLECMD3-Cmd1
4-S-4705
5-O-543
SINGLECMD3-Cmd2
4-S-4706
5-O-544
SINGLECMD3-Cmd3
4-S-4707
5-O-545
SINGLECMD3-Cmd4
4-S-4708
5-O-546
SINGLECMD3-Cmd5
4-S-4709
5-O-547
SINGLECMD3-Cmd6
4-S-4710
5-O-548
SINGLECMD3-Cmd7
4-S-4711
5-O-549
SINGLECMD3-Cmd8
4-S-4712
5-O-550
SINGLECMD3-Cmd9
4-S-4713
5-O-551
SINGLECMD3-Cmd10
4-S-4714
5-O-552
SINGLECMD3-Cmd11
4-S-4715
5-O-553
SINGLECMD3-Cmd12
4-S-4716
5-O-554
SINGLECMD3-Cmd13
4-S-4717
5-O-555
SINGLECMD3-Cmd14
4-S-4718
5-O-556
SINGLECMD3-Cmd15
4-S-4719
5-O-557
SINGLECMD3-Cmd16
4-S-4720
5-O-558
Figure 526 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way, connect
the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection IED for control
of a circuit breaker.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1157
Section 18
Station communication
A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command control.
The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in SINGLECMD:1 are shown
in table 762.
#CD01-CMDOUT1
#CD01-CMDOUT2
#CD01-CMDOUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT5
#CD01-CMDOUT6
#CD01-CMDOUT7
#CD01-CMDOUT8
#CD01-CMDOUT9
#CD01-CMDOUT10
#CD01-CMDOUT11
#CD01-CMDOUT12
#CD01-CMDOUT13
#CD01-CMDOUT14
#CD01-CMDOUT15
#CD01-CMDOUT16
SINGLECMD
BLOCK
^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
^OUT9
^OUT10
^OUT11
^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16
PULSETIMER
INPUT
AND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
OUT
OUT
PULSETIMER
OUT
NOUT
INPUT
IEC05000717-3-en.vsd
SYNCH OK
IEC05000717 V3 EN
Figure 526:
The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady or
setable pulse length signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Main
Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command or via
Parameter Setting Tool (PST).
Event function
Event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (for example,
operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an event list.
The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. All
the internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input
channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are produced according
to the set of event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and
SPA channels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which
contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is
read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED, Terminal
Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST)
under: Main Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Monitoring / Event Function or via
parameter Setting Tool (PST) as follows:
1158
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for
integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 763.
Table 763:
Event block
Single indication1)
Set event
Reset
event
Double indication
Intermedi Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined
ate 00
11
EVENT:1
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
Input 16
22O1
22O2
22O3
22O4
22O5
22O6
22O7
22O8
22O9
22O10
22O11
22O12
22O13
22O14
22O15
22O16
22E33
22E35
22E37
22E39
22E41
22E43
22E45
22E47
22E49
22E51
22E53
22E55
22E57
22E59
22E61
22E63
22E32
22E34
22E36
22E38
22E40
22E42
22E44
22E46
22E48
22E50
22E52
22E54
22E56
22E58
22E60
22E62
22E0
22E4
22E8
22E12
22E16
22E20
22E24
22E28
-
22E1
22E5
22E9
22E13
22E17
22E21
22E25
22E29
-
22E2
22E6
22E10
22E14
22E18
22E22
22E26
22E30
-
22E3
22E7
22E11
22E15
22E19
22E23
22E27
22E31
-
EVENT:2
EVENT:3
EVENT:20
230..
240..
410..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
23E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked OFF.
Connection of signals as events
Signals coming from different protection and control functions and must be sent as events
to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Event function
block according to figure 527.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1159
Section 18
Station communication
EVENT
Block
ILRANG
PSTO
VABRANG
VBCRANG
VCARANG
3I0RANG
3V0RANG
FALSE
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16
ANSI07000065-1-en.vsd
ANSI07000065 V1 EN
Figure 527:
18.6.4.1
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the numeric
processing module (NUM) and is used for LON, SPA, IEC60870-5-103, or DNP
communication.
There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables and 2) ST/bayonet
for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a combination of both,
which is identified by a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre
to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling
and connection of fibre cables.
For setting the transfer rate (baud rate) and slave number, please refer to the Application
Manual and Commissioning Manual respectively.
1160
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.6.5
Technical data
Table 764:
Function
Value
Protocol
SPA
Communication speed
Slave number
1 to 899
18.7
18.7.1
Introduction
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED
communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have
software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
18.7.2
18.7.2.1
Functionality
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.
The set of connected input will control which ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
are generated.
9 Will be generated if at least IA is connected. IB, IC, VA, VB, VC, P, Q, F are
optional but there can be no holes.
3.4 Will be generated if IN and VN are present.
3.3 Will be generated if IB, VAB, P and Q present.
3.2 Will be generated if IB, VAB, and P or Q missing.
3.1 Will be generated if IB is present and IA is missing (otherwise I_B in 9).
Description for I103MEAS function block:
9 = IA
3.4 = IN AND VN
3.3 = IB AND VAB AND P AND Q
3.2 = IB AND VAB AND NOT 3.3
3.1 = IB AND NOT (3.2 OR 3.3 OR 9)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1161
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.2.2
Identification
Function description
Function block
name
18.7.2.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103MEAS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
I103MEAS
BLOCK
I_A
I_B
I_C
IN
V_A
V_B
V_C
V_AB
V_N
P
Q
F
ANSI10000287-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000287 V1 EN
Figure 528:
18.7.2.4
Signals
Table 765:
Name
1162
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
IA
REAL
0.0
IB
REAL
0.0
IC
REAL
0.0
IN
REAL
0.0
VA
REAL
0.0
VB
REAL
0.0
VC
REAL
0.0
V_AB
REAL
0.0
V_N
REAL
0.0
REAL
0.0
REAL
0.0
REAL
0.0
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.2.5
Table 766:
Name
Settings
I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
MaxIa
1 - 99999
3000
MaxIb
1 - 99999
3000
MaxIc
1 - 99999
3000
MaxIN
1 - 99999
3000
MaxVa
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
MaxVb
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
MaxVc
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
MaxVab
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
MaxVn
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
MaxP
0.00 - 2000.00
MW
0.05
1200.00
MaxQ
0.00 - 2000.00
MVAr
0.05
1200.00
MaxF
45.0 - 66.0
Hz
1.0
51.0
18.7.3
18.7.3.1
Functionality
I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor
direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the
private range, and the Information number parameter for each block.
18.7.3.2
Identification
Function description
Measurands user defined signals for
IEC 60870-5-103
Function block
name
I103MEASUSR
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
1163
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.3.3
Function block
I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN
Figure 529:
18.7.3.4
Signals
Table 767:
Name
18.7.3.5
Table 768:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
INPUT1
REAL
0.0
INPUT2
REAL
0.0
INPUT3
REAL
0.0
INPUT4
REAL
0.0
INPUT5
REAL
0.0
INPUT6
REAL
0.0
INPUT7
REAL
0.0
INPUT8
REAL
0.0
INPUT9
REAL
0.0
Settings
I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
25
InfNo
1 - 255
MaxMeasur1
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur2
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
1164
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MaxMeasur3
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur4
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur5
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur6
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur7
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur8
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur9
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
18.7.4
18.7.4.1
Functionality
I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number
parameter is defined for each output signal.
18.7.4.2
Identification
Function description
Function status auto-recloser for IEC
60870-5-103
18.7.4.3
Function block
name
I103AR
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD
IEC10000289-2-en.vsd
IEC10000289 V2 EN
Figure 530:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1165
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.4.4
Signals
Table 769:
Name
18.7.4.5
Table 770:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
16_ARACT
BOOLEAN
128_CBON
BOOLEAN
130_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
1 - 255
Step
Default
1
Description
Function type (1-255)
18.7.5
18.7.5.1
Functionality
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for ground fault indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number
parameter is defined for each output signal.
18.7.5.2
Identification
Function description
Function status earth-fault for IEC
60870-5-103
18.7.5.3
Function block
name
I103EF
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV
IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN
Figure 531:
1166
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.5.4
Signals
Table 771:
Name
18.7.5.5
Table 772:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
51_EFFW
BOOLEAN
52_EFREV
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
160
Description
Function type (1-255)
18.7.6
18.7.6.1
Functionality
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a
correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN represents
the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the general trip signal
SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.
The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is
triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC
60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.
18.7.6.2
Identification
Function description
Function status fault protection for IEC
60870-5-103
Function block
name
I103FLTPROT
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
1167
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.6.3
Function block
I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_PU_A
65_PU_B
66_PU_C
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TR_A
70_TR_B
71_TR_C
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTR_A
87_MTR_B
88_MTR_C
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC
ANSI10000291-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000291 V1 EN
Figure 532:
18.7.6.4
Signals
Table 773:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
64_PU_A
BOOLEAN
65_PU_B
BOOLEAN
66_PU_C
BOOLEAN
67_STIN
BOOLEAN
68_TRGEN
BOOLEAN
69_TR_A
BOOLEAN
70_TR_B
BOOLEAN
71_TR_C
BOOLEAN
72_TRBKUP
BOOLEAN
73_SCL
REAL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Name
18.7.6.5
Table 774:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
74_FW
BOOLEAN
75_REV
BOOLEAN
76_TRANS
BOOLEAN
77_RECEV
BOOLEAN
78_ZONE1
BOOLEAN
79_ZONE2
BOOLEAN
80_ZONE3
BOOLEAN
81_ZONE4
BOOLEAN
82_ZONE5
BOOLEAN
84_STGEN
BOOLEAN
85_BFP
BOOLEAN
86_MTR_A
BOOLEAN
87_MTR_B
BOOLEAN
88_MTR_C
BOOLEAN
89_MTRN
BOOLEAN
90_IOC
BOOLEAN
91_IOC
BOOLEAN
92_IEF
BOOLEAN
93_IEF
BOOLEAN
ARINPROG
BOOLEAN
FLTLOC
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
128
Description
Function type (1-255)
18.7.7
18.7.7.1
Functionality
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This block
uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined for each
input signal.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1169
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.7.2
Identification
Function description
Function block
name
18.7.7.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103IED
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
IEC10000292-2-en.vsd
IEC10000292 V2 EN
Figure 533:
18.7.7.4
Signals
Table 775:
Name
18.7.7.5
Table 776:
Name
FunctionType
1170
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
19_LEDRS
BOOLEAN
21_TESTM
BOOLEAN
22_SETCH
BOOLEAN
23_GRP1
BOOLEAN
24_GRP2
BOOLEAN
25_GRP3
BOOLEAN
26_GRP4
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Function type (1-255)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.8
18.7.8.1
Functionality
I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information
number parameter is defined for each output signal.
18.7.8.2
Identification
Function description
Function block
name
18.7.8.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103SUPERV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL
IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN
Figure 534:
18.7.8.4
Signals
Table 777:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
32_MEASI
BOOLEAN
33_MEASU
BOOLEAN
37_IBKUP
BOOLEAN
38_VTFF
BOOLEAN
46_GRWA
BOOLEAN
47_GRAL
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1171
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.8.5
Table 778:
Name
FunctionType
Settings
I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Function type (1-255)
18.7.9
18.7.9.1
Functionality
I103USRDEF is a function block with user defined input signals in monitor direction.
Each instance is associated with a Function Type (FUN) and each input signal with an
Information Number (INF). Additionally, all input signals may be defined to use relative
time and how to respond to a GI request.
The user is responsible for assigning a proper FUN value and proper INF values to all
connected inputs. See Settings for details.
18.7.9.2
Identification
Function description
Status for user defined signals for IEC
60870-5-103
18.7.9.3
Function block
name
I103USRDEF
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
IEC10000294 V2 EN
Figure 535:
1172
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.9.4
Signals
Table 779:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
RT_START
BOOLEAN
RT_START registers the positive transition (0->1) of a pulse and sets the time from
which relative time is derived. Relative time is assigned only to inputs where the
corresponding TypNo parameter is set to Relative. The maximum relative time and unit
conform to the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
18.7.9.5
Table 780:
Name
Settings
I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
InfNo1
1 - 255
InfNo2
1 - 255
InfNo3
1 - 255
InfNo4
1 - 255
InfNo5
1 - 255
InfNo6
1 - 255
InfNo7
1 - 255
InfNo8
1 - 255
TypNo1
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
TypNo2
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
TypNo3
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
1173
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TypNo4
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
TypNo5
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
TypNo6
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
TypNo7
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
TypNo8
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
GiNo1
Excluded
Included
Included
GiNo2
Excluded
Included
Included
GiNo3
Excluded
Included
Included
GiNo4
Excluded
Included
Included
GiNo5
Excluded
Included
Included
GiNo6
Excluded
Included
Included
GiNo7
Excluded
Included
Included
GiNo8
Excluded
Included
Included
The FunctionType parameter associates a particular instance of the function block with
a FUN. Refer to the IEC60870-5-103 standard for details.
The InfNon parameters are used to associate each individual input signal with a
userdefined INF. Refer to the IEC60870-5-103 standard for details.
The TypNon parameters determine if messages use absolute or relative time. This adheres
to the TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP) message types 1 (time-tagged message) and 2
(time-tagged message with relative time) of the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
The GiNon parameters determine whether a message is sent as a part of a GI reply or not.
Refer to the IEC60870-5-103 standard for details.
1174
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.10
18.7.10.1
Functionality
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output
signals. The signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of restart.
18.7.10.2
Identification
Function description
Function block
name
18.7.10.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103CMD
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
I103CMD
BLOCK
16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT
IEC10000282-1-en.vsd
IEC10000282 V1 EN
Figure 536:
18.7.10.4
Signals
Table 781:
Name
Type
BLOCK
Table 782:
Table 783:
Name
FunctionType
Description
Block of commands
Name
18.7.10.5
Default
BOOLEAN
Type
Description
16-AR
BOOLEAN
17-DIFF
BOOLEAN
18-PROT
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Description
Function type (1-255)
1175
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.11
18.7.11.1
Functionality
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions. All
outputs are pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse-time is a hidden parameter.
18.7.11.2
Identification
Function description
Function block
name
18.7.11.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103IEDCMD
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
BLOCK
I103IEDCMD
19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4
IEC10000283-1-en.vsd
IEC10000283 V1 EN
Figure 537:
18.7.11.4
Signals
Table 784:
Name
BLOCK
Table 785:
Name
1176
Default
0
Description
Block of commands
Description
19-LEDRS
BOOLEAN
23-GRP1
BOOLEAN
24-GRP2
BOOLEAN
25-GRP3
BOOLEAN
26-GRP4
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.11.5
Table 786:
Name
FunctionType
Settings
I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
1 - 255
Step
Default
Description
255
18.7.12
18.7.12.1
Functionality
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output signals.
These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private
range, and the Information number parameter for each output signal.
18.7.12.2
Identification
Function description
Function block
name
18.7.12.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103USRCMD
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
BLOCK
I103USRCMD
^OUTPUT1
^OUTPUT2
^OUTPUT3
^OUTPUT4
^OUTPUT5
^OUTPUT6
^OUTPUT7
^OUTPUT8
IEC10000284-1-en.vsd
IEC10000284 V1 EN
Figure 538:
18.7.12.4
Signals
Table 787:
Name
BLOCK
Default
0
Description
Block of commands
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1177
Section 18
Station communication
Table 788:
Name
18.7.12.5
Table 789:
Name
Type
Description
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
Command output 1
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
Command output 2
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
Command output 3
OUTPUT4
BOOLEAN
Command output 4
OUTPUT5
BOOLEAN
Command output 5
OUTPUT6
BOOLEAN
Command output 6
OUTPUT7
BOOLEAN
Command output 7
OUTPUT8
BOOLEAN
Command output 8
Settings
I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
PulseMode
Steady
Pulsed
Pulsed
Pulse mode
PulseLength
0.200 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Pulse length
InfNo_1
1 - 255
InfNo_2
1 - 255
InfNo_3
1 - 255
InfNo_4
1 - 255
InfNo_5
1 - 255
InfNo_6
1 - 255
InfNo_7
1 - 255
InfNo_8
1 - 255
18.7.13
18.7.13.1
Functionality
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103. The
function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to implement
double-point command schemes.
1178
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.13.2
Identification
Function description
Function block
name
18.7.13.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103GENCMD
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
BLOCK
I103GENCMD
^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON
IEC10000285-1-en.vsd
IEC10000285 V1 EN
Figure 539:
18.7.13.4
Signals
Table 790:
Name
BLOCK
Table 791:
Name
Default
0
Description
Block of command
Description
CMD_OFF
BOOLEAN
CMD_ON
BOOLEAN
Command output ON
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1179
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.13.5
Table 792:
Name
Settings
I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
PulseLength
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Pulse length
InfNo
1 - 255
18.7.14
18.7.14.1
Functionality
The I103POSCMD is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and
interprets any state transition into commands then sent over an established IEC103 link.
Additionally, it listens for general interrogation (GI) requests, to which it will reply with
a GI response message with the current state of each connected input.
The Position input is a double-indication signal and is GI enabled. This means that any
state transition, i.e. to ON, OFF, intermediate and faulty, will be reported spontaneously.
However, the intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the "Report
Intermediate Position" to "Off". See the settings for RS485 and optical serial
communication for more information.
The Select input is a single-indication signal and is also GI enabled. State transitions to
ON and OFF are reported spontaneously.
When the Block input is ON, the function will ignore GI requests and cease all monitoring
activity. Consequently, no transitions will be detected.
The I103POSCMD is also equipped with two additional commands; Operate and Cancel.
These are hidden in ACT and respond only to the base INF +2 and +3 respectively. See
table below. The base INF (Information Number) parameter is an IEC 60870-5-103
identifier that associates a function in a 103 Master (such as Scada) with its equivalent in
the IED.
18.7.14.2
Identification
Function description
IED commands with position and select
for IEC 60870-5-103
1180
Function block
name
I103POSCMD
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.14.3
Function block
I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT
IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN
Figure 540:
18.7.14.4
Signals
Table 793:
Name
18.7.14.5
Table 794:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of command
POSITION
INTEGER
SELECT
BOOLEAN
Default
Description
Settings
I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
FunctionType
1 - 255
Function type
InfNo
160 - 236
160
18.7.15
Operation principle
18.7.15.1
General
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial
communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer
rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and a secondary
station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master
must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
Event handling
Report of analog service values (measurements)
Fault location
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1181
Section 18
Station communication
Command handling
Autorecloser ON/OFF
Teleprotection ON/OFF
Protection ON/OFF
LED reset
Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard part 5:
Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative
interface of protection equipment.
INF
Description
19
LED Reset
23
24
25
26
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
16
Auto-recloser on/off
17
Teleprotection on/off
18
Protection on/off
11)
Output signal 01
2*
Output signal 02
3*
Output signal 03
4*
Output signal 04
5*
Output signal 05
6*
Output signal 06
7*
Output signal 07
8*
Output signal 08
Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.
Number of instances: 1
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1183
Section 18
Station communication
INF
Description
19
LED reset
21
TestMode
22
23
24
25
26
GI
TYP
COT
11)
Input signal 01
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
2*
Input signal 02
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
3*
Input signal 03
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
4*
Input signal 04
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
5*
Input signal 05
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
6*
Input signal 06
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
7*
Input signal 07
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
8*
Input signal 08
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
GI
32
Message
Measurand supervision I
COT
1,7,9
33
Measurand supervision V
1,7,9
37
I>>back-up operation
1,7,9
38
VT fuse failure
1,7,9
46
Group warning
1,7,9
47
Group alarm
1,7,9
51
52
Message
Supported
64
Pickup A
Yes
65
Pickup B
Yes
66
Pickup C
Yes
67
Pickup IN
Yes
84
General pickup
Yes
1185
Section 18
Station communication
Info. no.
Message
Supported
69
Trip A
Yes
70
Trip B
Yes
71
Trip C
Yes
68
General trip
Yes
74
Fault forward/line
Yes
75
Fault reverse/busbar
Yes
78
Zone 1
Yes
79
Zone 2
Yes
80
Zone 3
Yes
81
Zone 4
Yes
82
Zone 5
Yes
76
Signal transmitted
Yes
77
Signal received
Yes
73
Yes
Message
Supported
64
Pickup A
Yes
65
Pickup B
Yes
66
Pickup C
Yes
67
Pickup IN
Yes
84
General pickup
Yes
69
Trip A
Yes
70
Trip B
Yes
71
Trip C
Yes
68
General trip
Yes
74
Fault forward/line
Yes
75
Fault reverse/busbar
Yes
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Info. no.
Message
Supported
85
Breaker failure
Yes
86
Yes
87
Yes
88
Yes
89
Yes
90
Yes
91
Yes
92
Yes
93
Yes
16
Autorecloser active
128
CB on by Autorecloser
130
Autorecloser blocked
Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.
Measurands in public range, I103MEAS
Number of instances: 1
The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
The upper limit is the maximum value that can be encoded into the ASDU (Application
Service Data Unit). Any value higher than this value will be tagged as OVERFLOW. The
factors 1.2 and 2.4 are taken from the 103 standard and require that a rated value to use as
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1187
Section 18
Station communication
base exists, and then use 1.2 or 2.4 times <rated> as maxVal. You can use 2.4 times rated as
maxVal, but as there is no way to propagate value to client, the use of a scale factor on
<rated> does not make much difference.
You can configure client:client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 * <rated> or
client-scaled-max ::= 1.0 * <maxVal>
If the client has a hard-coded gain of 1.2 * <rated> then client-scaled-max ::=
1.2 times <maxVal>/1.2
Resolution is <maxVal> / 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the best
accuracy.
Table 803:
INF
148
I_A
144, 145,
146, 148
I_B
148
I_C
147
148
V_A
148
V_B
148
V_C
145, 146
V_A-V_B
147
146, 148
P, active power
146, 148
Q, reactive power
148
f, frequency
1188
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Table 804:
INF
FUN
TYP
COT
*1)
*2)
GI
No, polled
with CL2
*3)
2,7
Description
Meas1
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas2
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas3
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas4
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas5
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas6
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas7
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas8
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas9
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1189
Section 18
Station communication
Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private range
64 to 95.
Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION TYPE
and an INFORMATION NUMBER.
Disturbance upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be reported
to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the
master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the master) will not be
reported to the master again.
When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances
will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can be sent whenever
something has happened to disturbances in this list. For example, when a disturbance is
deleted (by other client, for example, SPA) or when a new disturbance has been recorded
or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.
Deviations from the standard
Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some of
the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in the IED
series.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF (status
of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether:
Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test
mode.
Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than
pick-up
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information is
always set (hard coded) to:
1190
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
TP
TM
OTEV
Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the
standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action. FAN
is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each disturbance.
ASDU26 / ASDU31
When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24, the protection
equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information element named
NOF (number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault number in the power
system,that is, a fault in the power system with several trip and auto-reclosing has the same
NOF (while the FAN must be incremented). NOF is just as FAN, equal to disturbance
number.
No
number of loads
No
Optical interface
glass fibre
Yes
plastic fibre
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s
Yes
19200 bit/s
Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used
Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA
No
connector BFOC/2.5
Yes
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1191
Section 18
Station communication
Yes
Time-tagged message
Yes
Yes
Measurands I
Yes
Yes
Identification
Yes
Time synchronization
Yes
Yes
Measurands II
Yes
10
Generic data
No
11
Generic identification
No
23
Yes
26
Yes
27
Yes
28
Yes
29
Transmission of tags
Yes
30
Yes
31
End of transmission
Yes
Yes
Time synchronization
Yes
General interrogation
Yes
10
Generic data
No
20
General command
Yes
21
Generic command
No
24
Yes
25
Yes
1192
Test mode
No
Yes
Disturbance data
Yes
Private data
Yes
Generic services
No
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.7.15.2
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the
Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have
connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre cables (ST, bayonet) or
a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different types are available depending on
type of fibre.
The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical
fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay special
attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the optical fibres.
The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
18.7.16
Technical data
Table 805:
Function
Value
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed
9600, 19200 Bd
18.8
18.8.1
Functionality
GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via the
IEC 61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending apparatus
position indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n control. GOOSE can
also be used to exchange any boolean, integer, double point and analog measured values
between IEDs.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1193
Section 18
Station communication
18.8.2
Function block
GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK
^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC07000048.vsd
IEC07000048 V3 EN
Figure 541:
1194
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.8.3
Signals
Table 806:
Name
BLOCK
Table 807:
Name
Default
0
Description
Block of output signals
Description
RESREQ
BOOLEAN
Reservation request
RESGRANT
BOOLEAN
Reservation granted
APP1_OP
BOOLEAN
APP1_CL
BOOLEAN
APP1VAL
BOOLEAN
APP2_OP
BOOLEAN
APP2_CL
BOOLEAN
APP2VAL
BOOLEAN
APP3_OP
BOOLEAN
APP3_CL
BOOLEAN
APP3VAL
BOOLEAN
APP4_OP
BOOLEAN
APP4_CL
BOOLEAN
APP4VAL
BOOLEAN
APP5_OP
BOOLEAN
APP5_CL
BOOLEAN
APP5VAL
BOOLEAN
APP6_OP
BOOLEAN
APP6_CL
BOOLEAN
APP6VAL
BOOLEAN
APP7_OP
BOOLEAN
APP7_CL
BOOLEAN
APP7VAL
BOOLEAN
APP8_OP
BOOLEAN
APP8_CL
BOOLEAN
APP8VAL
BOOLEAN
APP9_OP
BOOLEAN
APP9_CL
BOOLEAN
APP9VAL
BOOLEAN
1195
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
APP10_CL
BOOLEAN
APP10VAL
BOOLEAN
APP11_OP
BOOLEAN
APP11_CL
BOOLEAN
APP11VAL
BOOLEAN
APP12_OP
BOOLEAN
APP12_CL
BOOLEAN
APP12VAL
BOOLEAN
APP13_OP
BOOLEAN
APP13_CL
BOOLEAN
APP13VAL
BOOLEAN
APP14_OP
BOOLEAN
APP14_CL
BOOLEAN
APP14VAL
BOOLEAN
APP15_OP
BOOLEAN
APP15_CL
BOOLEAN
APP15VAL
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
Communication Valid
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test Output
18.8.4
Settings
Table 808:
Name
Operation
1196
Description
APP10_OP
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.9
18.9.1
Function block
GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK
^OUT1
DVALID1
^OUT2
DVALID2
^OUT3
DVALID3
^OUT4
DVALID4
^OUT5
DVALID5
^OUT6
DVALID6
^OUT7
DVALID7
^OUT8
DVALID8
^OUT9
DVALID9
^OUT10
DVALID10
^OUT11
DVALID11
^OUT12
DVALID12
^OUT13
DVALID13
^OUT14
DVALID14
^OUT15
DVALID15
^OUT16
DVALID16
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC07000047.vsd
IEC07000047 V3 EN
Figure 542:
18.9.2
Signals
Table 809:
Name
BLOCK
Table 810:
Name
Default
0
Description
Block of output signals
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary output 1
DVALID1
BOOLEAN
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary output 2
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1197
Section 18
Station communication
Name
1198
Type
Description
DVALID2
BOOLEAN
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary output 3
DVALID3
BOOLEAN
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary output 4
DVALID4
BOOLEAN
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary output 5
DVALID5
BOOLEAN
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary output 6
DVALID6
BOOLEAN
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary output 7
DVALID7
BOOLEAN
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary output 8
DVALID8
BOOLEAN
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary output 9
DVALID9
BOOLEAN
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary output 10
DVALID10
BOOLEAN
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary output 11
DVALID11
BOOLEAN
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary output 12
DVALID12
BOOLEAN
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary output 13
DVALID13
BOOLEAN
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary output 14
DVALID14
BOOLEAN
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary output 15
DVALID15
BOOLEAN
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary output 16
DVALID16
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
Communication Valid
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test Output
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.9.3
Table 811:
Name
Operation
Settings
GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Disabled
Enabled
Step
Default
Description
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
18.10
18.10.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
18.10.2
IEC 60617
identification
GOOSEDPRCV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
18.10.3
Function block
GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK
^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN
Figure 543:
18.10.4
Signals
Table 812:
Name
BLOCK
Default
0
Description
Block of function
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1199
Section 18
Station communication
Table 813:
Name
18.10.5
Table 814:
Name
Operation
18.10.6
Type
Description
DPOUT
INTEGER
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
Settings
GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross
to receive the double point values.
1200
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.11
18.11.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
18.11.2
IEC 60617
identification
GOOSEINTRCV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
18.11.3
Function block
BLOCK
GOOSEINTRCV
^INTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN
Figure 544:
18.11.4
Signals
Table 815:
Name
BLOCK
Table 816:
Name
Default
0
Description
Block of function
Description
INTOUT
INTEGER
Integer output
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1201
Section 18
Station communication
18.11.5
Table 817:
Name
Operation
18.11.6
Settings
GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross
to receive the integer values.
18.12
18.12.1
Identification
Function description
GOOSE function block to receive a
measurand value
1202
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSEMVRCV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.12.2
Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
18.12.3
Function block
BLOCK
GOOSEMVRCV
^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN
Figure 545:
18.12.4
Signals
Table 818:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 819:
Table 820:
Name
Operation
18.12.6
Description
Block of function
Name
18.12.5
Default
Type
Description
MVOUT
REAL
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
Settings
GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1203
Section 18
Station communication
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross
to receive the measured value.
18.13
18.13.1
Identification
Function description
GOOSE function block to receive a
single point value
18.13.2
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSESPRCV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
18.13.3
Function block
GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK
^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN
Figure 546:
1204
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.13.4
Signals
Table 821:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 822:
Table 823:
Name
Operation
18.13.6
Description
Block of function
Name
18.13.5
Default
Type
Description
SPOUT
BOOLEAN
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
Settings
GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross
to receive the binary single point values.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1205
Section 18
Station communication
18.14
18.14.1
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
MULTICMDRCV
MULTICMDSND
Functionality
The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive signals
via the interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes 16 binary
inputs. LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving function block,
MULTICMDRCV, which has 16 binary outputs.
18.14.2
Design
18.14.2.1
General
The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of two
modes: Steady or Pulse.
1206
1 = Steady: This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs.
2 = Pulse: When a received signal transitions from 0 (zero) to 1 (one), a pulse with a
duration of exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the corresponding binary
output. This means that no connected function block may have a cycle time that is
higher than the execution cycle time of the particular MULTICMDRCV instance.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.14.3
Function block
MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK
ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID
IEC06000007-2-en.vsd
IEC06000007 V2 EN
Figure 547:
MULTICMDSND
BLOCK
ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
IEC06000008-2-en.vsd
IEC06000008 V2 EN
Figure 548:
18.14.4
Signals
Table 824:
Name
BLOCK
Default
0
Description
Block of function
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1207
Section 18
Station communication
Table 825:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
Table 826:
Name
Description
ERROR
BOOLEAN
MultiReceive error
NEWDATA
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUTPUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUTPUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUTPUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUTPUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUTPUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
OUTPUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
OUTPUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
OUTPUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
OUTPUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
1208
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Output 13
OUTPUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
OUTPUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
OUTPUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
VALID
BOOLEAN
Table 827:
Name
Type
ERROR
18.14.5
Table 828:
Name
Description
OUTPUT13
Description
BOOLEAN
MultiSend error
Settings
MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tMaxCycleTime
0.050 - 200.000
0.001
11.000
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
tPulseTime
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Table 829:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tMaxCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
5.000
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
18.14.6
Operation principle
There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block. The first two are fast (8
ms cycle time) while the others are slow (100 ms cycle time). Each instance has 16 binary
inputs, to which 16 independent signals can be connected. Connected signals are sent
through MULTICMDSND to the receiving equivalent, MULTICMDRCV, located on a
different IED.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1209
Section 18
Station communication
The MULTICMDRCV function block has 16 binary outputs, all controlled through the
command block of one or many MULTICMDSND function blocks. There are 60
instances of the MULTICMDRCV where the first 12 are fast (8 ms), and the others are
slow (100 ms). Additionally, the MULTICMDRCV has a supervision function, which
sets the output connector "VALID" to 0 (zero) if its block does not receive any data within
the time defined by tMaxCycleTime.
LON connections are established using LON network tool (LNT).
18.15
18.15.1
18.15.1.1
Signals
Table 830:
Name
18.15.1.2
Table 831:
Name
Operation
Type
Description
EVENTID
INTEGER
SEQNUMBER
INTEGER
Settings
SECALARM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Enabled
Description
Operation On/Off
18.16
18.16.1
1210
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 18
Station communication
18.16.2
Table 832:
Name
Settings
ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ExtLogSrv1Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv1IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
ExtLogSrv2Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv2Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv2IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
ExtLogSrv3Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv3Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv3IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
ExtLogSrv4Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv4Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv4IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
ExtLogSrv5Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv5Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv5IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
ExtLogSrv6Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv6Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv6IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1211
1212
Section 19
Remote communication
Section 19
Remote communication
19.1
19.1.1
Identification
Function description
19.1.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
BinSignReceive
BinSignTransm
Functionality
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current values
with a maximum of 8 binary signals in the line differential protection IED, or for the
transmission of only binary signals (up to 192) in the other IEDs. The binary signals are
freely configurable and can, thus, be used for any purpose, for example, communication
scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals between IEDs.
Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with a Line Data
Communication Module (LCDM). The LDCMs then act as interfaces to a 64 kbit/s
communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.
The IED can be equipped with up to two short range or medium range LDCMs.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1213
Section 19
Remote communication
19.1.3
Function block
LDCMRecBinStat1
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL
IEC07000043-2-en.vsd
IEC07000043 V2 EN
LDCMRecBinStat2
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC07000044-2-en.vsd
IEC07000044 V2 EN
Figure 549:
LDCMRecBinStat3
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC05000451-2-en.vsd
IEC05000451 V2 EN
Figure 550:
1214
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 19
Remote communication
19.1.4
Signals
Table 833:
Name
Description
COMFAIL
BOOLEAN
YBIT
BOOLEAN
NOCARR
BOOLEAN
NOMESS
BOOLEAN
ADDRERR
BOOLEAN
LNGTHERR
BOOLEAN
CRCERROR
BOOLEAN
REMCOMF
BOOLEAN
LOWLEVEL
BOOLEAN
Table 834:
Name
Description
CH1
STRING
CH2
STRING
CH3
STRING
CH4
STRING
COMFAIL
BOOLEAN
YBIT
BOOLEAN
NOCARR
BOOLEAN
NOMESS
BOOLEAN
ADDRERR
BOOLEAN
LNGTHERR
BOOLEAN
CRCERROR
BOOLEAN
TRDELERR
BOOLEAN
SYNCERR
BOOLEAN
REMCOMF
BOOLEAN
REMGPSER
BOOLEAN
SUBSTITU
BOOLEAN
LOWLEVEL
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1215
Section 19
Remote communication
Table 835:
Name
Type
STRING
CH2
STRING
CH3
STRING
CH4
STRING
COMFAIL
BOOLEAN
YBIT
BOOLEAN
NOCARR
BOOLEAN
NOMESS
BOOLEAN
ADDRERR
BOOLEAN
LNGTHERR
BOOLEAN
CRCERROR
BOOLEAN
TRDELERR
BOOLEAN
SYNCERR
BOOLEAN
REMCOMF
BOOLEAN
REMGPSER
BOOLEAN
SUBSTITU
BOOLEAN
LOWLEVEL
BOOLEAN
19.1.5
Settings
Table 836:
Name
Description
CH1
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ChannelMode
Blocked
Normal
OutOfService
Normal
TerminalNo
0 - 255
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
1216
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 19
Remote communication
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
ms
100
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
ms
100
InvertPolX21
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Table 837:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ChannelMode
Blocked
Normal
OutOfService
Normal
TerminalNo
0 - 255
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
DiffSync
Echo
GPS
Echo
GPSSyncErr
Block
Echo
Block
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
CT-GRP1
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
ms
100
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
ms
100
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
ms
100
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
ms
0.01
0.00
AnalogLatency
2 - 20
remAinLatency
2 - 20
MaxTransmDelay
0 - 40
ms
20
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1217
Section 19
Remote communication
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CompRange
0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
0-25kA
Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel
200 - 2000
us
600
DeadbandtDiff
200 - 1000
us
300
InvertPolX21
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Table 838:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ChannelMode
Blocked
Normal
OutOfService
Normal
TerminalNo
0 - 255
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
DiffSync
Echo
GPS
Echo
GPSSyncErr
Block
Echo
Block
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChannel
CT-GRP1
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
ms
100
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
ms
100
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
ms
100
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
ms
0.01
0.00
AnalogLatency
2 - 20
remAinLatency
2 - 20
1218
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 19
Remote communication
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MaxTransmDelay
0 - 40
ms
20
CompRange
0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
0-25kA
Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel
200 - 2000
us
600
DeadbandtDiff
200 - 1000
us
300
InvertPolX21
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
19.1.6
Monitored data
Table 839:
Name
CommStatus
Table 840:
Name
CommStatus
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
Unit
-
Description
Status of communication link
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Unit
-
Description
Status of communication link
1219
Section 19
Remote communication
Table 841:
Name
CommStatus
19.1.7
Values (Range)
Unit
0=Ok
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
Description
Status of communication link
Operation principle
The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s channels. It
is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same in 50 Hz and 60
Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is C37.94 and one
telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be transmitted, Cyclic
Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated with C37.94).
Start
flag
8 bits
Information
n x 16 bits
CRC
Stop
flag
16 bits
8 bits
en01000134.vsd
IEC01000134 V1 EN
Figure 551:
The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the
HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition. The
optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing is
included in the data field.
The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the
correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the messages
up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then programmed to
accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function detects a faulty
message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation.
When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight
1220
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 19
Remote communication
binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented as
sampled values.
When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity of
the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the capacity
of 192 signals.
19.2
19.2.1
Function block
LDCMTRN
^CT1L1
^CT1L2
^CT1L3
^CT1N
^CT2L1
^CT2L2
^CT2L3
^CT2N
IEC10000017-1-en.vsd
IEC10000017 V1 EN
Figure 552:
19.2.2
Signals
Table 842:
Name
Default
Description
CT1L1
STRING
CT1L2
STRING
CT1L3
STRING
CT1N
STRING
1221
Section 19
Remote communication
Name
1222
Type
Default
Description
CT2L1
STRING
CT2L2
STRING
CT2L3
STRING
CT2N
STRING
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Section 20
20.1
20.1.1
Identification
Function description
Authority check
20.1.2
IEC 61850
identification
ATHCHCK
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing
the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of
the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited with PCM600 IED user management
tool.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1223
Section 20
Basic IED functions
IEC12000202-2-en.vsd
IEC12000202 V2 EN
Figure 553:
20.1.3
Operation principle
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of
the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 843.
Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when
writing particular data to the IED from PCM600.
The meaning of the legends used in the table:
1224
R= Read
W= Write
- = No access rights
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 843:
Access rights
Guest
Super User
SPA Guest
System
Operator
Protection
Engineer
Design
Engineer
User
Administrator
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management
within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED, there
are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.
If the IED is Central Account Management enabled, users can only be
created, deleted or edited in the Central Account Management server. In
that case, only the user rights can be edited using the PCM600 tool. See
Cyber Security Deployment Guidelines manual.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1225
Section 20
Basic IED functions
all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and press the
key again.
If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the Authorization
screen. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a password protected
setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log on has failed, then the
Log on window opens again, until either the user makes it right or presses Cancel.
20.1.3.1
1226
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
One user can have one or several user roles. By default, the users in Table 273 are created
in the IED, and when creating new users in the SDM600 server, the predefined roles from
Table 845 can be used.
At delivery, the IED user has full access as SuperUser when using the
LHMI and as Administrator when using FTP or PCM600 until Central
Account Management is activated.
Table 844:
Default users
User name
User rights
SuperUser
Full rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default until other users are
defined
Guest
Only read rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default when other users
are defined (same as VIEWER)
Administrator
Full rights. Password: Administrator. This user has to be used when reading out
disturbances with third party FTP-client.
Table 845:
User roles
Role explanation
User rights
VIEWER
Viewer
OPERATOR
Operator
ENGINEER
Engineer
Can create and load configurations and change settings for the
IED and also run commands and manage disturbances
INSTALLER
Installer
SECADM
Security
administrator
SECAUD
Security auditor
RBACMNT
RBAC
management
ADMINISTRATOR
Administrator
rights
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1227
Section 20
Basic IED functions
The PCM600 tool caches the login credentials after successful login for 15
minutes. During that time no more login will be necessary.
The successfully activation of Central Account Management will disable built-in users or
remove all local created users from PCM600.
Management of user credentials and roles is handled on the central Account Management
server e.g. SDM600 The IED employs two strategies to ensure availability of the
authentication system even if there is a problem with the network or authentication server:
Note that not all users in the SDM600 server are part of the replica. There might be users
that are not assigned to any replication group. IED only replicates those users which are
part of replication group configured in the IED.
This replication can be disabled using PCM600 by the security administrator, which
means that the IED will forward login requests to the SDM600 for authorization and in
case of problems with the network users will not be able to log in to the IED.
If user replication has been disabled in a CAM-enabled IED and if
communication with SDM600 is lost, access to that IED will be denied
until communication is re-established.
All communication between the central management and the IEDs is protected using
secure communication. Customers using SDM600 are required to generate and distribute
certificates during the engineering process of the substation. These certificates ensure
mutual trust between IED and for example SDM600, FTP, PCM600 and other system.
1228
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 846:
Function
Description
Authority status
ATHSTAT
Authority check
ATHCHCK
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only in the CAM server.
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
maintenance menu logon time out.
Authority
management
AUTHMAN
20.2
20.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Authority management
20.2.2
AUTHMAN
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
AUTHMAN
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the maintenance
menu log on time out.
20.2.3
Table 847:
Settings
AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MaintMenuDisAuth
Disable
Enable
Enable
AuthTimeout
600 - 3600
600
600
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1229
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.3
20.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
20.3.2
FTPACCS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
20.3.3
Table 848:
Name
Settings
FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PortSelection
None
Front
LANAB
LANCD
Any
Any
SSLMode
FTP+FTPS
FTPS
FTPS
TCPPortFTP
1 - 65535
21
1230
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.4
20.4.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Authority status
20.4.2
IEC 60617
identification
ATHSTAT
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.
User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.
20.4.3
Function block
ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
IEC06000503-2-en.vsd
IEC06000503 V2 EN
Figure 554:
20.4.4
Signals
Table 849:
Name
Description
USRBLKED
BOOLEAN
LOGGEDON
BOOLEAN
20.4.5
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or in Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1231
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.4.6
Operation principle
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and
the user authorization:
the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event (EVENT)
function block for LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus.
20.5
20.5.1
Functionality
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system
events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events
are saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 event viewer
tool.
20.5.2
Function block
INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYN CERR
RTCERR
STUPBLK
IEC09000787-2-en.vsdx
IEC09000787 V2 EN
Figure 555:
1232
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.5.3
Signals
Table 850:
Name
20.5.4
Description
FAIL
BOOLEAN
Internal fail
WARNING
BOOLEAN
Internal warning
TSYNCERR
BOOLEAN
RTCERR
BOOLEAN
DISABLE
BOOLEAN
Application Disable
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
20.5.5
Operation principle
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI or from the
Event Viewer in PCM600.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI, the actual information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main menu/
Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General. The
information from the self-supervision function is also available in the Event Viewer in
PCM600.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1233
Section 20
Basic IED functions
IEC15000414-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000414 V1 EN
Figure 556:
The self supervision records internal signal changes in an internal event list. A maximum
of 40 internal events are stored in a first-in, first-out manner.
GUID-B481701F-05B4-4B29-83D4-18F13886FEBE V1 EN
Figure 557:
1234
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.5.5.1
Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals that give information about the internal
status of the IED. For this reason they are also called internal signals. These internal
signals , available on local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General,
can be divided into two groups.
Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see table 851.
Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see table 852.
Table 851:
Name of signal
Description
Displayed on
local HMI as
FAIL
Internal
Fail status
Internal fail
WARNING
Internal
Warning
status
Internal
warning
RTCERROR
Real Time
Clock
status
Real time
clock
TIMESYNCHERROR
Time
Synchroniz
ation
status
Time synch
RTEERROR
Runtime
Execution
Error
status
Runtime
execution
IEC61850ERROR
IEC 61850
Error
status
IEC61850
DNP3
DNP3 error
status
DNP3
LMDERROR
LON/Mip
Device
Error
status
SLM301
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1235
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Name of signal
Description
APPERROR
Runtime
Application
Error
status
Runtime App
Error
SETCHGD
Settings
changed
Settings
changed
SETGRPCHGD
Setting
groups
changed
Settings
changed
Table 852:
Card
Displayed on
local HMI as
Description
Displayed on
local HMI as
PSM
PSM-Error
Power
Supply
Module
Error
status
PSM1
BIM
BIM-Error
Binary In
Module
Error
status
BIMn
BOM
BOM-Error
Binary Out
Module
Error
status
BOMn
IOM
IOM-Error
In/Out
Module
Error
status
IOMn
MIM
MIM-Error
Millampere
Input
Module
Error
status
MIMn
SOM
SOM-Error
Static Out
Module
Error
status
SOMn
NUM
NUM-Error
Numerical/
CPU
Module
Error
status
NUM30
ADM
ADM-Error
A/D
Module
Error
status
ADM31
1236
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Card
20.5.5.2
Name of signal
Description
Displayed on
local HMI as
ADM
ADM-Error
A/D
Module
Error
status
ADM32
OEM
OEM-Error
Optical
Ethernet
Module
Error
status
OEM3nn
LDCM
LDCM-Error
Line
Differential
Communic
ation
Module
Error
status
LDCM3nn
TRM
TRM-Error
Transform
er Module
Error
status
TRM40
TRM
TRM-Error
Transform
er Module
Error
status
TRM41
20.5.6
Technical data
Table 853:
Data
Value
Recording manner
List size
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1237
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.6
Time synchronization
20.6.1
Functionality
The time synchronization function is used to select a common source of absolute time for
the synchronization of the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it
possible to compare events and disturbance data between all IEDs within a station
automation system and in between sub-stations.
Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization
source.
20.6.2
Settings
There are two groups of parameter settings related to time:
System time
Synchronization
The System time group relates to setting the on/off and start/end of the Daylight Saving
Time (DST) for the local time zone in relation to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The
Synchronization group relates to selecting the coarse and fine synchronization sources. As
well as defining the synchronization master and accuracy levels specifically for
IEC61850-9-2.
All the settings and parameters related to time are available via Local HMI under Main
menu/Configuration/Time/System time and via PCM600 under IED Configuration/
Time.
1238
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 854:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CoarseSyncSrc
Disabled
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP
IEC103
Disabled
FineSyncSource
Disabled
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
Disabled
SyncMaster
Disabled
SNTP-Server
Disabled
TimeAdjustRate
Slow
Fast
Fast
HWSyncSrc
Disabled
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS
Disabled
AppSynch
NoSynch
Synch
NoSynch
SyncAccLevel
Class T5 (1us)
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified
Unspecified
Table 855:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ModulePosition
3 - 16
BinaryInput
1 - 16
BinDetection
PositiveEdge
NegativeEdge
PositiveEdge
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1239
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 856:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ServerIP-Add
0 - 255
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Server IP-address
RedServIP-Add
0 - 255
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Table 857:
Name
DST Enable
Table 858:
Name
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Enabled
Description
Enables or disables the use of Daylight Saving
Time
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
March
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
UTCTimeOfDay
-24:00
-23:30
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00
1:00
1240
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 859:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
October
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
UTCTimeOfDay
-24:00
-23:30
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00
1:00
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1241
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 860:
Name
TimeZone
Table 861:
Name
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
1:00
Description
Local time from UTC
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SynchType
BNC
Opto
Opto
Type of synchronization
TimeDomain
LocalTime
UTC
LocalTime
Time domain
Encoding
IRIG-B
1344
1344TZ
IRIG-B
Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344
MinusTZ
PlusTZ
PlusTZ
1242
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.6.3
Operation principle
20.6.3.1
General concepts
Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the
clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the time
gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to
compensate for them.
Off
LON
SPA
Min. pulse
GPS
SNTP
DNP
Communication
TimeRegulator
(Setting,
see
technical
reference
manual)
Events
Protection
and control
functions
SW-time
Connected when GPS-time is
used for differential protection
IRIG-B
PPS
Off
GPS
IRIG-B
TimeRegulator
(fast or slow)
PPS
A/D
converter
Diff.communication
Transducers*
*IEC 61850-9-2
IEC08000287-2-en.vsd
IEC08000287 V2 EN
Figure 558:
All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When, for example, a status signal is
changed in the protection system of a function based on the free running hardware clock,
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1243
Section 20
Basic IED functions
the event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the event recorder. The
hardware clock can thus run independently.
The echo mode of differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus, there is no
need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.
The synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only when
GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential protection. The
two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock synchronization unit with two
modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an automatic fast clock time regulator is used. The
automatic fast mode makes the synchronization time as short as possible during pickup or
at interruptions/disturbances in the GPS timing. The fast and slow settings are also
available on the local HMI.
The hardware and software clocks are not synchronized if a GPS clock is used.
Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A
function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.
1244
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Synchronization from
a higher level
Function
Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level
IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN
Figure 559:
Synchronization principle
20.6.3.2
1245
Section 20
Basic IED functions
If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an offset
compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for
synchronization, which means, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at
the next coming time message.
If the synchronization message has a large offset compared to the other messages, a
spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
If the synchronization message has a large offset and the following message also has
a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization
message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 500 milliseconds. If the offset is
more than the threshold, the clock jumps a whole number of seconds so the remaining
offset is less than 500ms. The remaining offset is then slowly adjusted with 1000 ppm
until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of 1000ppm it takes 500 seconds to
remove an offset of 500 milliseconds.
Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the
time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only
an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.
Rate accuracy
The Rate accuracy is the accuracy of the internal clock while the external time signal is lost
(e.g. GPS lost). In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is
synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding
temperature is constant. It can take up to one hour after a cold start of the IED to reach to
a stable rate due to the normal warming-up procedure of the IED.
20.6.3.3
Synchronization alternatives
Four main alternatives of external synchronization sources are available. The
synchronization message is applied:
1246
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date
and time
as a minute pulse connected to a binary input
via GPS
via IRIG-B or PPS
Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, that is,
year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1247
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Deviations in the period time (a) larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.
a
b
c
en05000251.vsd
IEC05000251 V1 EN
Figure 560:
1248
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute pulse
is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The next
minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.
If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses,
contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting the
system. If contact bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is less than 59950 ms
between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will not be
accepted.
Binary synchronization example
An IED is configured to use only binary input for time synchronization, and a valid binary
input is applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate
time, and the minute pulse is then used to synchronize the IED. Minute pulse means that
each pulse occurs one minute after the previous pulse, so the first pulse is not used at all.
The second pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give
the IED a good time, and will reset the time so that the fourth pulse will occur on a minute
border. After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is
set properly via the HMI or if the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the
minute pulse is removed, for example, for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum
the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse is
automatically rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter.
The third pulse will set the time if the time offset is more than 500 ms or adjust the time
if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe
state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within
one minute.
Synchronization via IRIG-B module
IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time
of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted
and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there are numbers stating if and how
the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.
To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic BNC
connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the
galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic
interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a number in the range of
0-7.
00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B
module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz modulation is
used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1249
Section 20
Basic IED functions
If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information
of the year. If the x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year,
and year information has to be set via PCM600 or local HMI.
The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B clocks,
as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is compatible with
IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-zone.
20.6.4
Technical data
Table 862:
Function
Value
1 ms
1.0 ms typically
1.0 ms typically
20.7
20.7.1
Functionality
Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different power
system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the
local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can be
applied to a variety of power system scenarios.
20.7.2
Function block
ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1
GRP1
ACTGRP2
GRP2
ACTGRP3
GRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP4
ACTGRP5
GRP5
ACTGRP6
GRP6
GRP_CHGD
ANSI05000433-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000433 V2 EN
Figure 561:
1250
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.7.3
Signals
Table 863:
Name
Type
ACTGRP2
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP3
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP4
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP5
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP6
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 865:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 864:
20.7.4
Default
ACTGRP1
Type
Description
GRP1
BOOLEAN
GRP2
BOOLEAN
GRP3
BOOLEAN
GRP4
BOOLEAN
GRP5
BOOLEAN
GRP6
BOOLEAN
GRP_CHGD
BOOLEAN
REMSETEN
BOOLEAN
Settings
SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ActiveSetGrp
SettingGroup1
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
SettingGroup1
MaxNoSetGrp
1-6
20.7.5
Operation principle
Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1251
Section 20
Basic IED functions
inputs changes the active setting group. Eight functional output signals are available for
configuration purposes, so that information on the active setting group is always available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating
the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs
in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive
functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either
permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two
are set to be activated, group two will be the one activated.
Every time a setting is changed, the output signal GRP_CHGD is sending a pulse.
Activating or deactivating test mode is made by changing a parameter, consequently this
will also cause a pulse on the GRP_CHGD output.
The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between.
The output REMSETEN indicates whether setting changes over IEC61850 are enabled or
not. Per default, this is not enabled, which results in REMSETEN being at a logical low
level. If setting changes via IEC61850 are enabled, then REMSETEN will be a logical high.
The setting changes over IEC61850 is enabled with the setting EnableSettings in the
IEC61850-8-1 configuration under Main menu/Configuration/Communication/
Station communication/IEC61850-8-1/IEC61850-8-1. Please refer to documentation
for IEC61850 for further details.
Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups
selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the
Parameter Setting Tool.
1252
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
ACTIVATE GROUP 1
+RL2
IOx-Bly1
IOx-Bly2
IOx-Bly3
IOx-Bly4
ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1
GRP1
ACTGRP2
GRP2
ACTGRP3
GRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP4
IOx-Bly5
ACTGRP5
GRP5
IOx-Bly6
ACTGRP6
GRP6
GRP_CHGD
ANSI05000119-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000119 V2 EN
Figure 562:
The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group
that is active.
20.8
20.8.1
Functionality
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to block
inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.
The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1253
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.8.2
Function block
CHNGLCK
LOCK*
ACTIVE
OVERRIDE
IEC09000946.vsd
IEC09000946 V2 EN
Figure 563:
20.8.3
Signals
Table 866:
Name
LOCK
Table 867:
Name
20.8.4
Default
0
Description
Activate change lock
Description
ACTIVE
BOOLEAN
OVERRIDE
BOOLEAN
Operation principle
The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state that
does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
1254
Monitoring
Reading events
Resetting events
Reading disturbance data
Clear disturbances
Reset LEDs
Reset counters and other runtime component states
Control operations
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input
Function
Activated
Deactivated
20.9
20.9.1
Functionality
When entering IED test mode there is an option to block all functions. Active test mode
is indicated by a flashing yellow Pickup LED on the LHMI. After that, it is possible to
unblock arbitrarily selected functions from the LHMI to perform required tests.
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed (except for functions that have
their block input active), and the IED resumes normal operation. However, if during
TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later restored, the IED will remain in
TESTMODE with the same protection functions blocked or unblocked as before the
power was removed. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values
within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.
Forcing of binary input and output signals is only possible when the IED is in IED test
mode.
20.9.2
Function block
TESTMODE
IED_TEST
TEST
IED_TEST
BLOCK
NOEVENT
INPUT
SETTING
IEC61850
IEC14000072-1-en.vsd
IEC09000219 V2 EN
Figure 564:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1255
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.9.3
Signals
Table 868:
Name
Type
IED_TEST
BOOLEAN
Table 869:
Table 870:
Name
Description
Activate IED test mode
Name
20.9.4
Default
Type
Description
TEST
BOOLEAN
IED_TEST
BOOLEAN
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
NOEVENT
BOOLEAN
INPUT
BOOLEAN
SETTING
BOOLEAN
IEC61850
BOOLEAN
Settings
TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IEDTestMode
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
EventDisable
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
BlockAllFunc
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
CmdTestEd1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
20.9.5
Operation principle
Set the IED in test mode by
1256
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is
activated. The other outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the
"Test mode: Enabled" state input from configuration (OUTPUT signal is activated) or
setting from local HMI (SETTING signal is activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow Pickup LED will flash and all functions can be
blocked depending on the configuration of the testmode component. Any function can be
unblocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling.
The functions will be blocked next time if the testmode component is configured to block
components upon puting the IED into testmode.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no
outputs will be activated.
If the IED is restarted while set to IED testmode by a binary input all
functions will be temporarily unblocked during startup, which might
cause unwanted operations.
The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when a
test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30)
or an FT switch finger can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the
TESTMODE function block.
Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to
prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a
commissioning or maintenance test.
20.10
IED identifiers
20.10.1
Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in
the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1257
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.10.2
Table 871:
Name
Settings
TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
StationName
0 - 18
Station name
Station name
StationNumber
0 - 99999
Station number
ObjectName
0 - 18
Object name
Object name
ObjectNumber
0 - 99999
Object number
UnitName
0 - 18
Unit name
Unit name
UnitNumber
0 - 99999
Unit number
IEDMainFunType
0 - 255
TechnicalKey
0 - 16
AA0B0Q0A0
0 - 16
0 - 16
0 - 16
20.11
Product information
20.11.1
Functionality
The Product identifiers function contains constant data (i.e. not possible to change) that
uniquely identifies the IED:
ProductVer
ProductDef
FirmwareVer
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
IEDProdType
The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Product identifiersand underMain menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/IED identifiers
This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (e.g. during
repair and maintenance).
1258
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.11.2
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
20.11.3
IEDProdType
ProductDef
is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the product
is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new hardware
added to the product
is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware is either
changed or enhanced in the product
IEDMainFunType
ProductVer
FirmwareVer
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1259
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.12
20.12.1
Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the
application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought in for one IED
configuration.
20.12.2
Function block
SMBI
^VIN1
^VIN2
^VIN3
^VIN4
^VIN5
^VIN6
^VIN7
^VIN8
^VIN9
^VIN10
^BI1
^BI2
^BI3
^BI4
^BI5
^BI6
^BI7
^BI8
^BI9
^BI10
IEC05000434-2-en.vsd
IEC05000434 V2 EN
Figure 565:
20.12.3
Signals
Table 872:
Name
1260
Default
Description
BI1
BOOLEAN
BI2
BOOLEAN
BI3
BOOLEAN
BI4
BOOLEAN
BI5
BOOLEAN
BI6
BOOLEAN
BI7
BOOLEAN
BI8
BOOLEAN
BI9
BOOLEAN
BI10
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 873:
Name
20.12.4
Type
Description
BI1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
BI2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
BI3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
BI4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
BI5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
BI6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
BI7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
BI8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
BI9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
BI10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
Operation principle
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 565, receives its inputs
from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and makes them
available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to BI10. The inputs and
outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given a user defined name. These names will
be represented in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical
IO and SMBI function. The input/output user defined name will also appear on the
respective output/input signal.
20.13
20.13.1
Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the
application manual to get information about how binary inputs are sent from one IED
configuration.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1261
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.13.2
Function block
SMBO
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
^BO1
^BO2
^BO3
^BO4
^BO5
^BO6
^BO7
^BO8
^BO9
^BO10
IEC05000439-2-en.vsd
IEC05000439 V2 EN
Figure 566:
20.13.3
Signals
Table 874:
Name
20.13.4
Default
Description
BO1
BOOLEAN
BO2
BOOLEAN
BO3
BOOLEAN
BO4
BOOLEAN
BO5
BOOLEAN
BO6
BOOLEAN
BO7
BOOLEAN
BO8
BOOLEAN
BO9
BOOLEAN
BO10
BOOLEAN
Operation principle
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 566, receives logical
signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via
the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). The inputs in SMBO are BO1 to BO10 and they, as well
as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as
information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO.
20.14
1262
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.14.1
Functionality
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). See the
Application Manual for information about how milliamp (mA) inputs from external
transducers are physically connected to the MIM board inputs used in an IED. Via the
SMMI, the signals are brought into the IED configuration, for example, to the input for
ambient temperature compensation of the thermal overload function when there is a need
for ambient temperature compensation in the thermal function.
20.14.2
Function block
SMMI
^AI1
^AI2
^AI3
^AI4
^AI5
^AI6
^AI1
^AI2
^AI3
^AI4
^AI5
^AI6
IEC05000440.vsd
IEC05000440 V3 EN
Figure 567:
20.14.3
Signals
Table 875:
Name
Default
Description
AI1
REAL
AI2
REAL
AI3
REAL
AI4
REAL
AI5
REAL
AI6
REAL
Table 876:
Name
Description
AI1
REAL
AI2
REAL
AI3
REAL
AI4
REAL
AI5
REAL
AI6
REAL
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1263
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.14.4
Operation principle
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function, see figure 567, receives its inputs from
the real (hardware) mA inputs (the MIM boards) via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and
makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named AI1 to
AI6. The inputs, outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given user-defined names
which will be represented in SMT and ACT.
The outputs on SMMI can also be connected to the IEC61850 generic communication I/
O functions (MVGAPC) for further use of the mA signals elsewhere in a substation
system.
20.15
20.15.1
Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function block,
analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and calculates all
relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase angle, frequency, true
RMS value, harmonics, sequence components and so on. This information is then used by
the respective functions connected to this SMAI block in ACT (for example protection,
measurement or monitoring functions).
20.15.2
Function block
SMAI1
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
REVROT
^GRP1_A
^GRP1_B
^GRP1_C
^GRP1_N
SPFCOUT
G1AI3P
G1AI1
G1AI2
G1AI3
G1AI4
G1N
ANSI14000027-1-en.vsd
ANSI14000027 V1 EN
Figure 568:
Figure 568 is an example of SMAI1:n in each of the three task time groups 1, 2 or 3 where:
1264
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
The task time defines the execution repetition rate, and is 1, 3 or 8 ms respectively for the
three task time groups.
SMAI2
BLOCK
REVROT
^GRP2_A
^GRP2_B
^GRP2_C
^GRP2_N
G2AI3P
G2AI1
G2AI2
G2AI3
G2AI4
G2N
ANSI14000028-1-en.vsd
ANSI14000028 V1 EN
Figure 569:
Figure 569 is an example of SMAI2:n to SMAI12:m in each of the three task time groups
1, 2 or 3 where:
The task time defines the execution repetition rate, and is 3, 8 or 1 ms respectively for the
three task time groups.
20.15.3
Signals
Table 877:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block group 1
DFTSPFC
REAL
20.0
REVROT
BOOLEAN
GRP1_A
STRING
GRP1_B
STRING
GRP1_C
STRING
GRP1_N
STRING
Table 878:
Name
Description
SPFCOUT
REAL
G1AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
G1AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
G1AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
1265
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Name
Description
GROUP SIGNAL
G1AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
G1N
GROUP SIGNAL
Table 879:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block group 2
REVROT
BOOLEAN
GRP2_A
STRING
GRP2_B
STRING
GRP2_C
STRING
GRP2_N
STRING
Table 880:
Name
20.15.4
Type
G1AI3
Description
G2AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
G2AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
G2AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
G2AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
G2AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
G2N
GROUP SIGNAL
Settings
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value
InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal frequency
DFT reference is then the reference.
1266
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 881:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
DFTRefExtOut
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
AnalogInputType
Voltage
Current
Voltage
Table 882:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Negation
Disabled
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Disabled
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1267
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 883:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
AnalogInputType
Voltage
Current
Voltage
Table 884:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Negation
Disabled
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Disabled
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
20.15.5
Operation principle
Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog signals
(three phases and one neutral or residual value), either voltage or current, see figure 568
and figure 569. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog
signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. 244
values in total). The BLOCK input will force all outputs to value zero.
System phase rotation and frequency are defined using the PhaseRotation and Frequency
settings in the primary system values PRIMVAL function. Logic 1 in the REVROT input
to the SMAI function means that the phase rotation is changed relative to the set
PhaseRotation in PRIMVAL.
The output signal AI1 to AI4 are direct output of the, in SMT, connected input to GRPx_A,
GRPxB, GRPxC and GRPx_N, x=1-12. AIN is always calculated residual sum from the
1268
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
first three inputs. A3P is grouped, three-phase information containing all relevant
information about four connected inputs. Note that all other functions, with a few
exceptions, use this output in configuration. Note that the SMAI function will always
calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if the input GRPxN is not connected in SMT.
Applications with a few exceptions shall always be connected to AI3P.
20.15.5.1
Frequency values
The SMAI function includes a functionality based on the level of positive sequence
voltage, MinValFreqMeas, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If the
positive sequence voltage is lower than MinValFreqMeas, the function freezes the
frequency output value for 500 ms and after that the frequency output is set to the nominal
value. A signal is available for the SMAI function to prevent operation due to non-valid
frequency values. MinValFreqMeas is set as % of VBase/3
If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, at least two of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B
and GRPx_C, where 1x12, must be connected in order to calculate the positive
sequence voltage. Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows:
A-B to GRPxA, B-C to GRPxB, C-A to GRPxC. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is PhN, all three inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and GRPx_C must be connected in order to
calculate the positive sequence voltage.
If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph,
the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and
GRPx_C to the same voltage input as shown in figure 570 to make SMAI calculate a
positive sequence voltage.
SMAI1
VAB
TRM_40.CH7(U)
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
REVROT
PHASEA
^GRP1_A
PHASEB
^GRP1_B
PHASEC
^GRP1_C
NEUTRAL
^GRP1_N
SPFCOUT
G1AI3P
G1AI1
G1AI2
G1AI4
SAPTOF
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
TRIP
PICK UP
BLKDMAGN
FREQ
SAPTOF(1)_TRIP
G1N
ANSI10000060-1-en.vsdx
ANSI10000060 V1 EN
Figure 570:
Connection example
1269
Section 20
Basic IED functions
The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used for
Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF, 81), Underfrequency protection
(SAPTUF, 81) and Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81)
due to that all other information except frequency and positive sequence
voltage might be wrongly calculated.
The same phase-phase voltage connection principle shall be used for frequency tracking
master SMAI block in pump-storage power plant applications when swapping of positive
and negative sequence voltages happens during generator/motor mode of operation.
20.16
20.16.1
Functionality
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of threephase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.
20.16.2
Function block
3PHSUM
BLOCK
REVROT
^G1AI3P*
^G2AI3P*
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
IEC05000441-3-en.vsdx
IEC05000441 V3 EN
Figure 571:
1270
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.16.3
Signals
Table 885:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block
BLKGR1
BOOLEAN
BLKGR2
BOOLEAN
REVROT
BOOLEAN
Reverse rotation
G1AI3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
G2AI3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 886:
Name
20.16.4
Description
SPFCOUT
REAL
AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
Settings
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value
InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1271
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 887:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
SummationType
Group1+Group2
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
Group1+Group2
Summation type
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
DFTRefExtOut
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
Table 888:
Name
FreqMeasMinVal
20.16.5
Unit
%
Step
1
Default
10
Description
Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase
Operation principle
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal matrix
for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset all the
outputs of the function to 0.
20.17
20.17.1
Identification
20.17.2
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
GBASVAL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common for
all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values for
current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have twelve different sets.
1272
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of base
values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single point
for updating values when necessary.
Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out of
the twelve sets of GBASVAL functions.
20.17.3
Table 889:
Name
Settings
GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
VBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Description
Global base voltage
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
SBase
1.00 - 200000.00
MVA
0.05
2000.00
20.18
20.18.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
20.18.2
PRIMVAL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The rated system frequency and phase rotation direction are set under Main menu/
Configuration/ Power system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600
parameter setting tree.
20.18.3
Table 890:
Name
Settings
PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Frequency
50.0 - 60.0
Hz
10.0
50.0
PhaseRotation
Normal=ABC
Inverse=ACB
Normal=ABC
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1273
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.19
20.19.1
Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) are
designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The
communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of
the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network
loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of
malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.
20.19.2
Function blocks
DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000749-1-en.vsd
IEC09000749 V1 EN
Figure 572:
DOSLANAB
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC13000308-1-en.vsd
IEC13000308 V1 EN
Figure 573:
DOSLANCD
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC13000309-1-en.vsd
IEC13000309 V1 EN
Figure 574:
20.19.3
Signals
Table 891:
Name
1274
Description
LINKUP
BOOLEAN
WARNING
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 892:
Name
Type
Description
LINKUP
BOOLEAN
WARNING
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Table 893:
Name
20.19.4
Description
LINKUP
BOOLEAN
WARNING
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
20.19.5
Monitored data
Table 894:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
State
INTEGER
0=Off
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota
INTEGER
Table 895:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
DoSStatus
INTEGER
0=Off
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota
INTEGER
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1275
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 896:
Name
20.19.6
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
DoSStatus
INTEGER
0=Off
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota
INTEGER
Operation principle
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) measures
the IED load from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs
control and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following
outputs:
1276
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Section 21
IED hardware
21.1
Overview
21.1.1
ANSI04000458-2-en.psd
ANSI04000458 V2 EN
Figure 575:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1277
Section 21
IED hardware
ANSI05000762-2-en.psd
ANSI05000762 V2 EN
Figure 576:
ANSI04000460 -2-en.psd
ANSI04000460 V2 EN
Figure 577:
1278
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.1.2
Table 897:
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
X312, X313
TRM
X401
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1279
Section 21
IED hardware
Table 898:
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
X312, X313
TRM
X401
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
1280
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Table 899:
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
TRM 1
X401
TRM 2
X411
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1281
Section 21
IED hardware
Table 900:
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or
RS485
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM,RS485 or
GTM
X312, X313
TRM
X401
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
1282
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Table 901:
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or
RS485
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or
GTM
TRM 1
X401
TRM 2
X411
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1283
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2
Hardware modules
21.2.1
Overview
Table 902:
Basic modules
Module
Description
Table 903:
Module
1284
Description
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.2
21.2.2.1
Introduction
The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection
functions and logic.
For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high speed
serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is the compact
PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives interrupts.
21.2.2.2
Functionality
The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, compact-PCI CPU
module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two compact
PCI connectors and an euro connector.
The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots onto
which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.
To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one internal
PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI accesses
through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.
The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash file
system.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of the
real time clock.
No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power dissipation.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1285
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.2.3
Block diagram
Compact
Flash
Logic
PMC
connector
Memory
Ethernet
UBM
connector
PC-MIP
PCI-PCIbridge
Backplane
connector
North
bridge
CPU
en04000473.vsd
IEC04000473 V1 EN
Figure 578:
21.2.3
21.2.3.1
Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation
between the IED and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is available.
1286
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.3.2
Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC input
voltage ranges see table 904. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-regulated
DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery
system.
Connection diagram
IEC08000476 V2 EN
Figure 579:
21.2.3.3
Technical data
Table 904:
Quantity
21.2.4
Rated value
Nominal range
EL = (24 - 60) V
EL = (90 - 250) V
EL 20%
EL 20%
Power consumption
50 W typically
21.2.5
21.2.5.1
Introduction
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the secondary
currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has twelve
inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs. Either protection class or
metering class CT inputs are available.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1287
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.5.2
Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the
module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers.
Basic versions:
The rated values and channel type, measurement or protection, of the current inputs are
selected at order.
Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with current
transformers intended for protection purposes, due to limitations in
overload characteristics.
The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for analog
inputs SMAI".
1288
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
IEC08000479 V2 EN
Figure 580:
21.2.5.3
Technical data
Table 905:
TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer modules
Quantity
Rated value
Current
In = 1 or 5 A
Operative range
(0-100) x In
Permissive overload
4 In cont.
100 In for 1 s *)
Burden
Ac voltage
Vn = 120 V
Operative range
(0340) V
Permissive overload
420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Nominal range
(0.2-40) In
0.5288 V
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1289
Section 21
IED hardware
Quantity
Rated value
Burden
Frequency
fn = 60/50 Hz
*)
Nominal range
5%
Table 906:
TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer modules
Quantity
Rated value
Current
In = 1 or 5 A
Permissive overload
1.1 In cont.
1.8 In for 30 min at In = 1 A
1.6 In for 30 min at In = 5 A
Burden
Ac voltage
Vn = 120 V
Operative range
(0340) V
Permissive overload
420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden
Frequency
fn = 60/50 Hz
Nominal range
(0-1.8) In at In = 1 A
(0-1.6) In at In = 5 A
0.5288 V
5%
21.2.6
21.2.6.1
Introduction
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC slot. The
PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards according to table
907. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board.
Table 907:
PC-MIP cards
LDCM
SLM
LR-LDCM
OEM 1 ch
MR-LDCM
OEM 2 ch
X21-LDCM
IRIG-B
RS485
1290
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.6.2
Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the
transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic voltage
level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate A\D channels
are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is obtained with a 16
bit A\D converter.
Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency
and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and are
reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 1,2
kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1291
Section 21
IED hardware
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
AD1
AD2
1.2v
AD3
AD4
PMC
level shift
PC-MIP
2.5v
PCI to PCI
PC-MIP
en05000474.vsd
IEC05000474 V1 EN
Figure 581:
1292
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.7
21.2.7.1
Introduction
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two versions,
one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs to be used
with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable and can be
used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in
the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables extensive
monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.
21.2.7.2
Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level of
the binary input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBI".
A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a hysteresis
function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it possible to use
the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery supply
ground faults, see figure 582 The figure shows the typical operating characteristics of the
binary inputs of the four voltage levels.
The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand
disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required. Inputs are
debounced by software.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1293
Section 21
IED hardware
[V]
300
176
144
88
72
38
32
19
17
24/30V
48/60V
110/125V
220/250V
xx99000517-2_ansi.vsd
ANSI99000517 V2 EN
Figure 582:
Operation uncertain
No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN
This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM).
The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown
in figure 583 and 584.
1294
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
[mA]
50
55
[ms]
en07000104-3.vsd
IEC07000104 V3 EN
Figure 583:
Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of BIM.
[mA]
50
5.5
[ms]
en07000105-1.vsd
IEC07000105 V2 EN
Figure 584:
Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1295
Section 21
IED hardware
IEC99000503 V3 EN
Figure 585:
21.2.7.3
Connection diagram
Signals
Table 908:
Name
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
BI1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
BI2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
BI3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
1296
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Name
21.2.7.4
Table 909:
Name
Type
Description
BI4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
BI5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
BI6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
BI7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
BI8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
BI9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
BI10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
BI11
BOOLEAN
Binary input 11
BI12
BOOLEAN
Binary input 12
BI13
BOOLEAN
Binary input 13
BI14
BOOLEAN
Binary input 14
BI15
BOOLEAN
Binary input 15
BI16
BOOLEAN
Binary input 16
Settings
BIM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
DebounceTime
0.001 - 0.020
0.001
0.001
OscBlock
1 - 40
Hz
40
OscRelease
1 - 30
Hz
30
21.2.7.5
Monitored data
Table 910:
Name
STATUS
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Unit
-
Description
Binary input module status
1297
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.7.6
Technical data
Table 911:
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
Binary inputs
16
DC voltage, RL
24/30 V
48/60 V
125 V
220/250 V
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V, 50mA
48/60 V, 50mA
125 V, 50mA
220/250 V, 50mA
220/250 V, 110mA
10 pulses/s max
Debounce filter
Settable 120ms
Table 912:
Quantity
1298
Rated value
Nominal range
Binary inputs
16
DC voltage, RL
24/30 V
48/60 V
125 V
220/250 V
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V
48/60 V
125 V
220/250 V
10 pulses/s max
40 pulses/s max
Debounce filter
Settable 1-20 ms
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.8
21.2.8.1
Introduction
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output or
any signaling purpose.
21.2.8.2
Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair of
relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 586. This should be
considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the back of the IED.
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip
and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary
contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is required.
For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMBO".
Output module
3
ANSI_xx00000299.vsd
ANSI00000299 V1 EN
Figure 586:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1299
Section 21
IED hardware
IEC99000505 V3 EN
Figure 587:
21.2.8.3
Connection diagram
Signals
Table 913:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
BO1
BOOLEAN
Binary output 1
BO2
BOOLEAN
Binary output 2
BO3
BOOLEAN
Binary output 3
BO4
BOOLEAN
Binary output 4
BO5
BOOLEAN
Binary output 5
BO6
BOOLEAN
Binary output 6
BO7
BOOLEAN
Binary output 7
BO8
BOOLEAN
Binary output 8
BO9
BOOLEAN
Binary output 9
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Name
Type
Binary output 10
BO11
BOOLEAN
Binary output 11
BO12
BOOLEAN
Binary output 12
BO13
BOOLEAN
Binary output 13
BO14
BOOLEAN
Binary output 14
BO15
BOOLEAN
Binary output 15
BO16
BOOLEAN
Binary output 16
BO17
BOOLEAN
Binary output 17
BO18
BOOLEAN
Binary output 18
BO19
BOOLEAN
Binary output 19
BO20
BOOLEAN
Binary output 20
BO21
BOOLEAN
Binary output 21
BO22
BOOLEAN
Binary output 22
BO23
BOOLEAN
Binary output 23
BO24
BOOLEAN
Binary output 24
Name
Type
STATUS
Table 915:
Name
Operation
21.2.8.5
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 914:
21.2.8.4
Default
BO10
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
BOM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
Step
Default
Enabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Monitored data
Table 916:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
0=Ok
1=Error
BO1VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO1FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
1301
Section 21
IED hardware
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO1
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO2FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO2
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO3FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO3
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO4FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO4
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO5FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO5
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO6FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO6
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO7FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO7
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO8FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO8
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO9FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO9
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO10FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO10
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO11FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO11
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO12FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO12
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO13VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO13FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO13
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO14VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO14FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO14
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
1303
Section 21
IED hardware
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO15VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO15FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO15
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO16VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO16FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO16
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO17VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
B017FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO17
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO18VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO18FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO18
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO19VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO19FORCE
BOOLEAN
1=Forced
0=Normal
BO19
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO20VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO20FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO20
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO21VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO21FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
1304
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Name
21.2.8.6
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO21
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO22VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO22FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO22
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO23VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO23FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO23
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO24VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO24FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO24
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Technical data
Table 917:
BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity
Binary outputs
24
250 V AC, DC
1000 V rms
8A
10 A
12 A
30 A
10 A
250 V/8.0 A
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1305
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.9
21.2.9.1
Introduction
The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output
relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.
21.2.9.2
Design
The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.
The SOM consists mainly of:
An MCU
A CAN-driver
6 static relays outputs
6 electromechanical relay outputs
A DC/DC converter
Connectors interfacing
1306
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
IEC09000974-1-en.vsd
IEC09000974 V1 EN
Figure 588:
1MRK002802-AB-13-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 589:
21.2.9.3
Signals
Table 918:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
BO1
BOOLEAN
Binary output 1
BO2
BOOLEAN
Binary output 2
BO3
BOOLEAN
Binary output 3
BO4
BOOLEAN
Binary output 4
BO5
BOOLEAN
Binary output 5
BO6
BOOLEAN
Binary output 6
BO7
BOOLEAN
BO8
BOOLEAN
BO9
BOOLEAN
BO10
BOOLEAN
BO11
BOOLEAN
BO12
BOOLEAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1307
Section 21
IED hardware
Table 919:
Name
Type
STATUS
21.2.9.4
Table 920:
Name
Operation
21.2.9.5
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
SOM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
Step
Default
Enabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Monitored data
Table 921:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
0=Ok
1=Error
BO1VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO1FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO1
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO2FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO2
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO3FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO3
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO4FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
1308
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO4
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO5FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO5
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO6FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO6
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO7FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO7
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO8FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO8
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO9FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO9
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO10FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO10
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
1309
Section 21
IED hardware
Name
21.2.9.6
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO11FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO11
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO12FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO12
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Technical data
Table 922:
SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs
Function of quantity
Rated voltage
48 - 60 VDC
Number of outputs
~300 k
~810 k
No galvanic separation
No galvanic separation
Continuous
5A
5A
1.0s
10A
10A
0.2s
30A
30A
1.0s
10A
10A
48V / 1A
110V / 0.4A
60V / 0.75A
125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A
Operating time
1310
<1ms
<1ms
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Table 923:
SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Electromechanical
relay outputs
Function of quantity
250V AC/DC
Number of outputs
1000V rms
8A
1.0s
10A
30A
1.0s
10A
48V / 1A
110V / 0.4A
125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A
21.2.10
21.2.10.1
Introduction
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are
needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signaling purpose.
The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where short operating
time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for required binary input
information.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1311
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.10.2
Design
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with unprotected
contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the
disturbance immunity during normal protection trip times. This is achieved with a high
peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure 583. Inputs are
debounced by software.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply
ground faults, see figure 582.
The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.
The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays. One
of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are
connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other group
has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see figure 590.
The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is
connected in parallel to the standard output relay.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections "Signal matrix for
binary inputs SMBI" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".
The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.
1312
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V2 EN
IEC1MRK002802-AA-13 V1 EN
Figure 590:
The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example be
used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause excessive wear of
the contacts.
The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the binary
input/output module.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1313
Section 21
IED hardware
xx04000069.vsd
IEC04000069 V1 EN
Figure 591:
21.2.10.3
Signals
Table 924:
Name
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
BI1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
BI2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
BI3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
BI4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
BI5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
BI6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
BI7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
BI8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
Table 925:
Name
Default
Description
BLKOUT
BOOLEAN
BO1
BOOLEAN
Binary output 1
BO2
BOOLEAN
Binary output 2
BO3
BOOLEAN
Binary output 3
BO4
BOOLEAN
Binary output 4
BO5
BOOLEAN
Binary output 5
BO6
BOOLEAN
Binary output 6
BO7
BOOLEAN
Binary output 7
BO8
BOOLEAN
Binary output 8
BO9
BOOLEAN
Binary output 9
1314
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Name
21.2.10.4
Table 926:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BO10
BOOLEAN
Binary output 10
BO11
BOOLEAN
Binary output 11
BO12
BOOLEAN
Binary output 12
Settings
IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DebounceTime
0.001 - 0.020
0.001
0.001
OscBlock
1 - 40
Hz
40
OscRelease
1 - 30
Hz
30
21.2.10.5
Monitored data
Table 927:
Name
STATUS
Table 928:
Name
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description
Binary input part of IOM
module status
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO1VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO1FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO1
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO2FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO2
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1315
Section 21
IED hardware
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO3FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO3
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO4FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO4
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO5FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO5
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO6FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO6
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO7FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO7
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO8FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO8
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO9FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO9
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Name
21.2.10.6
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO10VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO10FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO10
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO11FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO11
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO12FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO12
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Technical data
Table 929:
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
Binary inputs
DC voltage, RL
24/30 V
48/60 V
125 V
220/250 V
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V, 50 mA
48/60 V, 50 mA
125 V, 50 mA
220/250 V, 50 mA
220/250 V, 110 mA
10 pulses/s max
Debounce filter
Settable 1-20 ms
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1317
Section 21
IED hardware
Table 930:
IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity
Binary outputs
10
250 V AC, DC
250 V DC
1000 V rms
800 V DC
8A
10 A
12 A
8A
10 A
12 A
30 A
10 A
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.2 s
1.0 s
30 A
10 A
220250 V/0.4 A
110125 V/0.4 A
4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A
250 V/8.0 A
250 V/8.0 A
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
10 nF
1318
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Table 931:
IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC
61810-2)
Function or quantity
Binary outputs
IOM: 10
IOM: 2
250 V AC, DC
250 V DC
250 V rms
250 V rms
8A
10 A
12 A
8A
10 A
12 A
30 A
10 A
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.2 s
1.0 s
30 A
10 A
220250 V/0.4 A
110125 V/0.4 A
4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A
250 V/8.0 A
250 V/8.0 A
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
10 nF
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1319
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.11
21.2.11.1
Introduction
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to +20
mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure transducers. The
module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.
21.2.11.2
Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMMI".
The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D converter has
a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately The
filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory on the
module.
The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range.
1320
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
IEC99000504 V2 EN
Figure 592:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1321
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.11.3
Signals
Table 932:
Name
21.2.11.4
Table 933:
Name
Type
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
CH1
REAL
Analog input 1
CH2
REAL
Analog input 2
CH3
REAL
Analog input 3
CH4
REAL
Analog input 4
CH5
REAL
Analog input 5
CH6
REAL
Analog input 6
Settings
MIM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
MaxReportT
0 - 3600
EnDeadBandCh1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DeadBandCh1
0.00 - 20.00
mA
0.01
1.00
IMinCh1
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
4.00
IMaxCh1
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
20.00
ValueMinCh1
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
4.000
ValueMaxCh1
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
20.000
EnDeadBandCh2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DeadBandCh2
0.00 - 20.00
mA
0.01
1.00
IMinCh2
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
4.00
IMaxCh2
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
20.00
ValueMinCh2
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
4.000
ValueMaxCh2
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
20.000
EnDeadBandCh3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DeadBandCh3
0.00 - 20.00
mA
0.01
1.00
1322
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
IMinCh3
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
4.00
IMaxCh3
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
20.00
ValueMinCh3
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
4.000
ValueMaxCh3
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
20.000
EnDeadBandCh4
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DeadBandCh4
0.00 - 20.00
mA
0.01
1.00
IMinCh4
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
4.00
IMaxCh4
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
20.00
ValueMinCh4
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
4.000
ValueMaxCh4
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
20.000
EnDeadBandCh5
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DeadBandCh5
0.00 - 20.00
mA
0.01
1.00
IMinCh5
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
4.00
IMaxCh5
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
20.00
ValueMinCh5
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
4.000
ValueMaxCh5
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
20.000
EnDeadBandCh6
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DeadBandCh6
0.00 - 20.00
mA
0.01
1.00
IMinCh6
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
4.00
IMaxCh6
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
20.00
ValueMinCh6
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
4.000
ValueMaxCh6
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
20.000
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Description
1323
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.11.5
Monitored data
Table 934:
Name
21.2.11.6
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
0=Ok
1=Error
CH1
REAL
Analog input 1
CH2
REAL
Analog input 2
CH3
REAL
Analog input 3
CH4
REAL
Analog input 4
CH5
REAL
Analog input 5
CH6
REAL
Analog input 6
CH1
REAL
CH2
REAL
CH3
REAL
CH4
REAL
CH5
REAL
CH6
REAL
Technical data
Table 935:
Quantity:
Rated value:
Nominal range:
Input resistance
Input range
5, 10, 20mA
0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA
Power consumption
each mA-board
each mA input
2W
0.1 W
21.2.12
21.2.12.1
Introduction
The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC 60870-5-103,
DNP3 and LON communication. The module has two optical communication ports for
plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass. One port is used for serial communication
(SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 port) and one port is dedicated for LON
communication.
1324
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.12.2
Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module. Three variants of the SLM are available with different combinations of optical
fiber connectors, see figure 593. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and the
glass fiber connectors are of ST type.
I
EC0500760=1=en=Or
i
gi
nal
.
psd
IEC05000760 V2 EN
Figure 593:
Receiver, LON
Transmitter, LON
Observe that when the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear side of
the IED, contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and contact 1 in the
lowest position.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1325
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.12.3
Technical data
Table 936:
Quantity
Range or value
Optical connector
Fiber diameter
Table 937:
Quantity
Range or value
Optical connector
Fiber diameter
21.2.13
21.2.13.1
Introduction
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 and IEC
60870-5-103 communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The
RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire
connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a multidrop
communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires however a control
of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX and TX multidrop
communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves. No special control signal
is needed in this case.
21.2.13.2
Design
The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module.
1326
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Pin
Name 2-wire
Name 4-wire
Description
RS485+
TX+
RS485
TX
Receive/transmit
Term
T-Term
N.A.
R-Term
N.A.
RX
Receive low
N.A.
RX+
Receive high
Angle
bracket
Screw
terminal
X3
Screw
terminal
X1
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
RS485
PWB
Backplane
IEC06000517 V1 EN
Figure 594:
RS485 connector
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1327
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.13.3
Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a MOV
Technical data
Table 939:
Quantity
Range or value
Communication speed
240019200 bauds
External connectors
21.2.14
21.2.14.1
Introduction
The optical fast-ethernet module is used for fast and interference-free communication of
synchrophasor data over IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 protocols. It is also used to
connect an IED to the communication buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC
61850-8-1 protocol (port A, B). The module has one or two optical ports with ST
connectors.
21.2.14.2
Functionality
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according to
IEC6185081 have been implemented.
21.2.14.3
Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card on
the ADM. The OEM is a 100BASE-FXmodule and available as a single channel or double
channel unit.
1328
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
IEC05000472=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC05000472 V3 EN
Figure 595:
21.2.14.4
1: Transmitter
2: Receiver
Technical data
Table 940:
Quantity
Rated value
Number of channels
1 or 2
1 or 2 (port A, B for IEC 61850-8-1 / IEEE C37.118)
Standard
Type of fiber
Wave length
1300 nm
Optical connector
Type ST
Communication speed
21.2.15
21.2.15.1
Introduction
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between the
IEDs situated at distances <68 miles or from the IED to optical to electrical converter with
G.703 interface located on a distances <1.9 miles away. The LDCM module sends and
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1329
Section 21
IED hardware
rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/ANSI standard format is
used.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module has
one optical port with ST connectors see figure 596.
21.2.15.2
Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be mounted
on:
the ADM
the NUM
ST
IO-connector
ST
IEC07000087=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC07000087 V2 EN
Figure 596:
1330
The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI
connectors and one I/O ST type connector
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
IEC06000393=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC06000393 V2 EN
Figure 597:
21.2.15.3
The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format
with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector
Technical data
Table 941:
Characteristic
Type of LDCM
Range or value
Short range (SR)
Graded-index
multimode
62.5/125 m
Singlemode 9/125
m
Singlemode 9/125 m
820 nm
865 nm
792 nm
1310 nm
1330 nm
1290 nm
1550 nm
1580 nm
1520 nm
13 dB (typical
distance about 2
mile *)
9 dB (typical
distance about 1
mile *)
22 dB (typical
distance 50 mile *)
Optical connector
Type ST
Type FC/PC
Type FC/PC
Protocol
C37.94
C37.94
implementation **)
Data transmission
Synchronous
Synchronous
Synchronous
Type of fiber
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1331
Section 21
IED hardware
Characteristic
Type of LDCM
Range or value
Short range (SR)
2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
Clock source
Internal or derived
from received
signal
Internal or derived
from received signal
21.2.16
21.2.16.1
Introduction
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module supports
64 kbit/s data communication between IEDs.
Examples of applications:
21.2.16.2
Design
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP Type
II format.
1332
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
en07000196.vsd
IEC07000196 V1 EN
Figure 598:
1
1
15
en07000239.wmf
IEC07000239 V1 EN
Figure 599:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1333
Section 21
IED hardware
I/O
100kW
100nF
Soft ground
en07000242.vsd
IEC07000242 V1 EN
Figure 600:
Grounding
At special problems with ground loops, the soft ground connection for the IIO-ground can
be tested.
Three different kinds of grounding principles can be set (used for fault tracing):
1.
2.
3.
Direct ground - The normal grounding is direct ground, connect terminal 2 directly to
the chassis.
No ground - Leave the connector without any connection.
Soft ground - Connect soft ground pin (3), see figure 599
X.21 connector
Table 942:
Pin number
Signal
Shield (ground)
TXD A
Control A
RXD A
Signal timing A
Ground
TXD B
10
Control B
1334
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.16.3
11
RXD B
13
Signal timing B
5,7,12,14,15
Not used
Functionality
The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is 64 kbit/
s.
A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data (deviation
from X.21 standard cable length).
Synchronization
The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally expecting
synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The transmission is normally
synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a device is a DTE. When the
signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and when the signal is low it will write data
to the transmitter. This behaviour can be inverted in the control register.
Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.
When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set as a
master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE Signal Element
Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.
The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.
21.2.16.4
Technical data
Table 943:
Quantity
Range or value
Connector, X.21
Standard
CCITT X21
Communication speed
64 kbit/s
Insulation
1 kV
100 m
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1335
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.17
21.2.17.1
Introduction
This module includes a GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has one
SMA contact for connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS ST-connector
output.
21.2.17.2
Design
The GTM is a PCMIP-format card and is placed only on one of the ADM slots. The
antenna input connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to eliminate
the risk of electromagnetic interference.
All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the PCI-bus. PPS time data is
sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at sampling
level. An optical transmitter for PPS output is available for time synchronization of
another relay with an optical PPS input. The PPS output connector is of ST-type for
multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km.
21.2.17.3
Monitored data
Table 944:
Name
Type
NoOfSatellites
21.2.17.4
INTEGER
Values (Range)
-
Description
Number of GPS signals from
satellites
Technical data
Table 945:
Function
1336
Unit
Range or value
Accuracy
Receiver
1s relative UTC
<30 minutes
<15 minutes
<5 minutes
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.18
GPS antenna
21.2.18.1
Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna with
applicable cable must be used.
21.2.18.2
Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on an
antenna mast. See figure 601
2
3
xx04000155.vsd
IEC04000155 V2 EN
Figure 601:
where:
1
GPS antenna
TNC connector
Console, (2'6.7"x4'11')
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1337
Section 21
IED hardware
Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male
SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GTM. Choose cable type and
length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.
Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to the
antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna cable with
some metal device, when first connected to the antenna. When the antenna
is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the receiver. The IED must
be switched off when the antenna cable is connected.
21.2.18.3
Technical data
Table 946:
Function
Value
26 db @ 1.6 GHz
50 ohm
Lightning protection
Accuracy
+/-1s
21.2.19
21.2.19.1
Introduction
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of the
IED from a station clock.
The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC 61850-9-2LE
is used.
Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.
21.2.19.2
Design
The IRIG-B module has two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle both a
pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude modulated
signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type ST for optical
pulse-width modulated signal (IRIG-B 00X).
1338
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
ST
A1
Y2
IEC06000304=1=en=Original.ai
IEC06000304 V2 EN
Figure 602:
21.2.19.3
Table 947:
Name
IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for optical IRIG-B 00X
820 nm multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector
for IRIG-B signal input
Settings
IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SynchType
BNC
Opto
Opto
Type of synchronization
TimeDomain
LocalTime
UTC
LocalTime
Time domain
Encoding
IRIG-B
1344
1344TZ
IRIG-B
Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344
MinusTZ
PlusTZ
PlusTZ
21.2.19.4
Technical data
Table 948:
IRIG-B
Quantity
Rated value
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B
BNC
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1339
Section 21
IED hardware
Quantity
Rated value
Pulse-width modulated
5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated
low level
high level
1-3 Vpp
3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
Supported formats
Accuracy
Input impedance
100 k ohm
Optical connector:
1340
Type ST
Type of fibre
Supported formats
IRIG-B 00x
Accuracy
+/- 1s
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.3
Dimensions
21.3.1
A
D
C
IEC08000164-2-en.vsd
IEC08000164 V2 EN
Figure 603:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1341
Section 21
IED hardware
K
F
G
H
J
xx08000166.vsd
IEC08000166 V1 EN
Figure 604:
Case size
(inches)
6U, 1/2 x 19
10.47
8.81
7.92
9.96
8.10
7.50
8.02
18.31
7.39
19.00
6U, 3/4 x 19
10.47
13.23
7.92
9.96
12.52
7.50
12.44
18.31
7.39
19.00
6U, 1/1 x 19
10.47
17.65
7.92
9.96
16.94
7.50
16.86
18.31
7.39
19.00
1342
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.3.2
IEC08000163-2-en.vsd
IEC08000163 V2 EN
Figure 605:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1343
Section 21
IED hardware
K
F
G
H
J
xx08000165.vsd
IEC08000165 V1 EN
Figure 606:
IEC05000503-2-en.vsd
IEC05000503 V2 EN
Figure 607:
1344
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Case size
(inches)
6U, 1/2 x 19
10.47
8.81
9.53
10.07
8.10
7.50
8.02
18.31
9.00
19.00
6U, 3/4 x 19
10.47
13.23
9.53
10.07
12.52
7.50
12.4
18.31
9.00
19.00
6U, 1/1 x 19
10.47
17.65
9.53
10.07
16.86
7.50
16.86
18.31
9.00
19.00
21.3.3
A
B
E
D
IEC08000162-2-en.vsd
IEC08000162 V2 EN
Figure 608:
Flush mounting
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1345
Section 21
IED hardware
Case size
Tolerance
B
+/0.04
6U, 1/2 x 19
8.27
10.01
0.160.39
0.49
6U, 3/4 x 19
12.69
10.01
0.160.39
0.49
6U, 1/1 x 19
17.11
10.01
0.160.39
0.49
E = 7.42 without rear protection cover, 9.03 with rear protection cover
21.3.4
IEC06000182-2-en.vsd
IEC06000182 V2 EN
Figure 609:
1346
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
C
xx05000505.vsd
IEC05000505 V1 EN
Figure 610:
Case size
(inches)
Tolerance
A
0.04
B
0.04
C
0.04
D
0.04
E
0.04
F
0.04
G
0.04
6U, 1/2 x 19
8.42
10.21
9.46
7.50
1.35
0.52
0.25 diam
6U, 3/4 x 19
12.85
10.21
13.89
7.50
1.35
0.52
0.25 diam
6U, 1/1 x 19
17.27
10.21
18.31
7.50
1.35
0.52
0.25 diam
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1347
Section 21
IED hardware
21.3.5
IEC04000471-2-en.vsd
IEC04000471 V2 EN
Figure 611:
Wall mounting
6U, 1/2 x 19
10.50
10.52
10.74
15.36
9.57
6U, 3/4 x 19
15.92
14.94
10.74
15.36
9.57
6U, 1/1 x 19
20.31
19.33
10.74
15.36
9.57
21.3.6
1348
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
[6.97]
[4.02]
[1.48]
[18.31]
[0.33]
[0.79]
[7.68]
[18.98]
Dimension
mm [inches]
xx06000232.eps
IEC06000232 V2 EN
[7.50]
[10.47]
[1.50]
Figure 612:
[0.33]
[18.31]
[0.79]
[7.68]
[18.98]
[inches]
en06000234.eps
IEC06000234 V2 EN
Figure 613:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1349
Section 21
IED hardware
21.3.7
57 [2.24]
89 [3.5]
482.6 [19]
Dimension
mm [inches]
xx06000233.vsd
IEC06000233 V1 EN
Figure 614:
21.4
Mounting alternatives
21.4.1
Flush mounting
21.4.1.1
Overview
The flush mounting kit can be used for case sizes:
1/2 x 19
3/4 x 19
1/1 x 19
1/4 x 19 (RHGS6 6U)
Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54
protection.
Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when IP54
class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting
two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.
1350
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.4.1.2
5
2
6
3
IEC08000161-2-en.vsd
IEC08000161 V2 EN
Figure 615:
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Fastener
Groove
2.9x9.5 mm
Panel
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1351
Section 21
IED hardware
21.4.2
21.4.2.1
Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using a suitably sized
mounting kit consisting of two mounting angles and their fastening screws.
The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19 or 3/4
x 19 either to the left or the right side of the cubicle.
A separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-side mounted IEDs or
IEDs together with RHGS cases should be selected so that the total size
equals 19.
When mounting the mounting angles, use screws that follow the
recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions may
damage the PCBs inside the IED.
1352
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.4.2.2
1b
IEC08000160-2-en.vsd
IEC08000160 V2 EN
Figure 616:
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
1a, 1b
Screw
M4x6
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1353
Section 21
IED hardware
21.4.3
Wall mounting
21.4.3.1
Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19,1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also possible to
mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.
When mounting the side plates, use screws that follow the recommended
dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.
If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for any communication modules
with fiber connection.
1354
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.4.3.2
2
3
5
6
IEC130 00266-1-en.vsd
IEC13000266 V1 EN
Figure 617:
21.4.3.3
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Bushing
Screw
M4x10
Screw
M6x12 or
corresponding
Mounting bar
Screw
M5x8
Side plate
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1355
Section 21
IED hardware
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 3.2 inches is required on the unhinged
side.
View from above
1
3.2"
(80 mm)
ANSI_en06000135.vsd
ANSI06000135 V1 EN
Figure 618:
PosNo
Description
Type
Screw
M4x10
Screw
M5x8
(Ordered separately)
21.4.4
21.4.4.1
Overview
IED case size 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases can be mounted side-by-side up to
a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting kit
together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be
ordered separately.
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, use screws that
follow the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other
dimensions may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
1356
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.4.4.2
IEC04000456-2-en.vsd
IEC04000456 V2 EN
Figure 619:
21.4.4.3
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Mounting plate
2, 3
Screw
16
M4x6
Mounting angle
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1357
Section 21
IED hardware
IEC06000180-2-en.vsd
IEC06000180 V2 EN
Figure 620:
IED (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test switch
module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal base
21.4.5
21.4.5.1
Overview
It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required. If
your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting details
kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered
separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19.
With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is
obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the IEDs
separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see
section "Flush mounting".
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws
that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other
dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
1358
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT switches
on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.
21.4.5.2
3
4
IEC06000181-2-en.vsd
IEC06000181 V2 EN
Figure 621:
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Mounting plate
2, 3
Screw
16
M4x6
Mounting angle
21.5
Technical data
21.5.1
Enclosure
Table 949:
Material
Case
Steel sheet
Front plate
Surface treatment
Finish
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1359
Section 21
IED hardware
Table 950:
Front
IP20
Rear side
Table 951:
Weight
Case size
21.5.2
Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19
6U, 3/4 x 19
33 lb
6U, 1/1 x 19
40 lb
Electrical safety
Table 952:
21.5.3
Equipment class
I (protective earthed)
Overvoltage category
III
Pollution degree
Connection system
Table 953:
Connector type
4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
250 V AC, 20 A
4 mm2 (AWG12)
Table 954:
Connector type
1360
Rated voltage
250 V AC
300 V AC
3 mm2 (AWG14)
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.5.4
Influencing factors
Table 955:
Parameter
Reference value
Nominal range
Influence
Ambient temperature,
operate value
+20C
-10 C to +55C
0.02% / C
Relative humidity
Operative range
10%-90%
0%-95%
10%-90%
Storage temperature
-40 C to +70 C
Table 956:
Dependence on
Reference value
max. 2%
Full wave rectified
0.01% / %
20% of EL
0.01% / %
24-60 V DC 20%
90-250 V DC 20%
Interruption
interval
050 ms
Table 957:
No restart
0 s
Correct behaviour
at power down
Restart time
<300 s
Dependence on
Influence
Frequency dependence,
operate value
fn 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz
fn 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
1.0% / Hz
fn 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz
fn 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
2.0% / Hz
Harmonic frequency
dependence (20% content)
2.0%
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1361
Section 21
IED hardware
Dependence on
21.5.5
Influence
Harmonic frequency
dependence for high
impedance differential
protection (10% content)
5.0%
Harmonic frequency
dependence for high
impedance differential
protection (10% content)
10.0%
Harmonic frequency
dependence for overcurrent
protection
3.0% / Hz
Electromagnetic compatibility
Test
Reference standards
2.5 kV
IEC 60255-26
2.5 kV
2-4 kV
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge
IEC 60255-26
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
4 kV
150-300 V
15 Hz-150 kHz
1000 A/m, 3 s
100 A/m, cont.
1000 A/m
100 A/m
IEC 60255-26
1.4-2.7 GHz
1362
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
Test
Reference standards
20 V/m
80-1000 MHz
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
10 V, 0.15-80 MHz
IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission
30-5000 MHz
IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission
30-5000 MHz
Conducted emission
0.15-30 MHz
IEC 60255-26
Table 959:
Insulation
Test
Reference standard
Dielectric test
Insulation resistance
Table 960:
IEC 60255-27
ANSI C37.90
Environmental tests
Test
Reference standard
IEC 60068-2-1
IEC 60068-2-1
IEC 60068-2-2
IEC 60068-2-2
IEC 60068-2-14
IEC 60068-2-78
IEC 60068-2-30
Table 961:
CE compliance
Test
According to
Immunity
EN 6025526
Emissivity
EN 6025526
EN 6025527
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1363
Section 21
IED hardware
Table 962:
Mechanical tests
Test
1364
Reference standards
Class II
IEC 60255-21-1
Class I
IEC 60255-21-1
Class I
IEC 60255-21-2
Class I
IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test
Class I
IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test
Class II
IEC 60255-21-3
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
Section 22
This chapter describes the hardware equipment used for sensitive rotor earth fault
protection and 100% stator earth fault protection by injection. The descriptions includes
diagrams from different elevations indicating the location of connection terminals and
modules as well as dimensions and drilling plan.
22.1
Overview
22.1.1
22.1.1.1
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1365
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
22.1.1.2
IEC11000053-1-en.vsd
IEC11000053 V1 EN
Figure 622:
1366
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
Table 963:
Key
Pressing the clear button cancels changes that have not been
stored.
Pressing the enter button stores the changed value. If the value
is outside range, the limit value is stored.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1367
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
22.1.1.3
X1
X2
IEC11000019-2-en.vsd
IEC11000019 V1 EN
Figure 623:
84 [3,3]
84 [3,3]
223 [8,78]
5,5 [0,22]
38 [1,5]
199 [7,83]
235 [9,25]
255 [10]
2 [0,079]
IEC11000037-2-en.vsd
IEC11000037 V2 EN
Figure 624:
1368
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
REX061 shall be mounted close to the generator in order to limit the exposure of the field
circuit. Alternatively it can be located in the excitation cubicle.
The surface of REX061 unit may be temporarily very hot due to heat
dissipation, up to about 50 C above the ambient temperature. It must be
installed to get a open air convection and prevent contact with
combustible material to the surface.
22.1.1.4
X1
IEC11000038-1-en.vsd
IEC11000038 V1 EN
Figure 625:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1369
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
217 [8,54]
155 [6,1]
84 [3,3]
84 [3,3]
223 [8,78]
5,5 [0,22]
38 [1,5]
199 [7,83]
235 [9,25]
255 [10]
2 [0,079]
IEC11000039-2-en.vsd
IEC11000039 V2 EN
Figure 626:
REX062 shall be mounted close to the IED. It is recommended that REX060 and REX062
are mounted in the same cubicle as the IED.
The surface of REX061 unit may be temporarily very hot due to heat
dissipation, up to about 65 C above the ambient temperature. It must be
installed to get a open air convection and prevent contact with
combustible material to the surface.
1370
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
22.1.2
22.1.2.1
Power
connector
Top view
Back view
X11
X61
Front view
X81
18
Stator
Power
X62
BackPlane
HMI and Logic
18
X82
Rotor
Power Supply
Stator Injection
Rotor Injection
Front-plate
Injection switch
IEC11000018-1-en.vsd
IEC11000018 V1 EN
Figure 627:
22.2
22.2.1
Introduction
The injection unit REX060 is used to inject voltage and current signals to the generator or
motor stator and rotor circuits. REX060 generates two square wave signals with different
frequencies for injection into the stator and rotor circuits respectively. The response from
the injected voltage and currents are then measured by the REX060 unit and amplified to
a level suitable for the analog voltage inputs of IED.
22.2.2
Design
REX060 consists of a standard enclosure (6U, 1/2 x 19"). In this enclosure, the modules
for stator (SIM) and/or rotor (RIM) earth fault protection are installed. The stator injection
transformer and the power supply are also installed inside the enclosure.
On the front of the enclosure there is a backlit LCD, control buttons and a key switch.
In figure 628 below the content of display is shown for a REX060 with one SIM and one
RIM module. Row 1 contains mains frequency information. Row 2-3 contains stator
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1371
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
information and row 4-5 rotor. Column 1 (empty) gives status, column 2 and 3 are
informative and column 4 contains variables, settable by the keypad.
Column
1
Row
1
2
3
4
5
System
[Hz] :
50
STATOR
[Hz] :
087
[V] :
120
[Hz] :
113
UmaxEF
ROTOR
Gain
4
IEC10000334-1-en.vsd
IEC10000334 V1 EN
Figure 628:
When the injection unit REX060 is energized, the ABB logotype is shown followed by
current REX060 revision status. When the start up sequence is completed, the main menu
(normal display content) is shown. The duration of the start up sequence is a few seconds.
LCD backlight is active during a period of 30 seconds after pressing any button. Backlight
activation by pressing a button will not cause any normal button action.
Column 1 is a status column (empty in the above picture), where the following symbols
are displayed when applicable:
1372
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
Table 964:
Status symbol
IEC10000329 V1 EN
IEC10000330 V1 EN
IEC10000332 V1 EN
Priority
2
Over voltage
blocked status
overrides
displaying of
this status
3
Injection switch
and over
voltage blocked
overrides
displaying of
this status
Analog output saturation. This status is set when the analog signal,
current and or voltage, to REG670 IED is too high and may thereby be
incorrect due to saturation in amplifier stage. Saturation status will be
shown in the status column (column 1) in row 3 or 5 depending on the
saturation occurrence
Not applicable
Overvoltage reset
Stator module (SIM) and rotor module (RIM) injection outputs are protected against
voltages exceeding maximum operating range (10% of rated VT/DT for the stator and
75 % of max voltage during gain dependent time for the rotor) by a relay blocking the
injection circuit. This blocking is controlled by measuring the sense voltage, and remains
blocked by stored status in non-volatile memory. Injection block is released by
performing the following sequence:
1.
2.
3.
1373
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
reduce the current before restarting the unit. The problem must be outside the injection
unit since this unit cannot provide enough energy to blow the fuse.
Saturation
When the voltage or current amplifiers in an injection module saturates due to high voltage
level, it is indicated with a warning symbol in the status column in the REX060 display .
Besides this a binary out for the specific module is set active to indicate to the IED that the
signal may not be reliable due to saturation and could cause incorrect measurements.
Binary in
The injection can be blocked by application in the IED. For this purpose, two binary inputs
to the REX060 exist:
The used terminal is depending on actual binary voltage, pin 1 for 220 V, 2 for 110 V, 3
for 48 V and 4 for return (common).
Binary out
The following binary outputs exist on the REX060:
Power status
1374
X11 terminal 3:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
22.3
22.3.1
Introduction
REX061 isolates the injection circuit from the rotor exciter voltage.
The REX061 coupling capacitor unit grounding point and grounding brush of the rotor
shaft should be properly interconnected.
22.3.2
Design
Measure points are added to the capacitor box that enables the measuring of rotor voltages
without any connection to a hazardous voltage, by the use of protective impedance. This
enables the usage of standard oscilloscope or handheld DVM.
The measure ports cause an additional rotor impedance of 20 M per
terminal to ground. However, the rotor calibration procedure extracts this
impedance.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1375
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
REX061
Coupling Capacitor unit
Measuring point +
Ground (measuring)
Rotor+
Injection
Ground (injection)
RotorMeasuring pointPE
IEC11000040-3-en.vsd
IEC11000040 V1 EN
Figure 629:
22.4
22.4.1
Introduction
REX062 is typically used when injection is done via a grounding transformer.
22.4.2
Design
REX062 for stator protection is used when either injection via a grounding transformer
(i.e. not via a VT) is used or when maximum voltage posed on injection equipment by the
generator is bigger than 120V.
1376
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
REX062
Shunt Resistor unit
Injection A
External A
Fuse
Injection B
External B
I sense A
PE
I sense B
IEC11000041-2-en.vsd
IEC11000041 V1 EN
Figure 630:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1377
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
REX060
Injection unit
REG670
X11:4
X11:5
Exciter
source
Ready; X11:1
Common; X11:2
Fail; X11:3
X1:1 ; Rotor +
Rotor
X82:1 ; InjA
X82:3 ; InjA
Injection; X1:9
X82:4 ; InjB
X82:5 ; InjB
Ground; X1:10
X1:7 ; Rotor-
X82:2 ; InjShB
PE
X81:16; IA sense
X81:14; IA sense
X81:15; IB sense
X81:12; VA sense
X81:13; VB sense
R
Distribution
Transformer
X1:2 ; Injection A
External A; X1:9
X1:4 ; Injection B
External B; X1:10
I sense A; X1:6
I sense B; X1:8
PE
X62:1 ; InjExtA
X62:3 ; InjA
X62:4 ; InjB
X62:5 ; InjB
X62:2 ; InjExtB
(BI)
BO
RL-
UA Out; X81:8
UB Out; X81:9
X61:14 ; IA sense
IA Out; X61:10
IB Out; X61:11
X61:12 ; VA sense
VA Out; X61:8
PE
BI
RL+
IB Out; X81:11
X61:15 ; IB sense
X61:13 ; VB sense
EL
IA Out; X81:10
Blocked; X81:5
Saturation; X81:6
Common; X81:7
REX062
Shunt Resistor unit
Stator
BI
BI
RL+
BO
RL-
VB Out; X61:9
Blocked; X61:5
Saturation; X61:6
Common; X61:7
BI
BI
RL+
PE
ANSI11000017-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000017 V1 EN
Figure 631:
22.5
Technical data
22.5.1
Hardware
Table 965:
Specifications
Values
Case size
Weight
17.64 lbs
1378
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
Specifications
Values
< 60 mVA at 24 V; 87 Hz
Installation category
III
Pollution degree
Table 966:
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
EL = (24 60) V
EL = (90 250) V
EL 20%
EL 20%
Power consumption
30 W
Table 967:
Function
Range or values
Accuracy
800 V DC
1600 V 50/60 Hz
Specifications
Values
Case size
Weight
10.58 lbs
Assembling
250 V
Installation category
III
Pollution degree
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1379
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
Table 968:
Specifications
Values
Case size
Weight
9.92 lbs
Assembling
240 V
240 V
Installation category
III
Pollution degree
Table 969:
Degree of protection
Description
22.5.2
Values
REX060
Front
Panel mounted, front
Rear, sides, top, bottom and connection terminals
IP40
IP54
IP20
IP41
IP20
Test
Reference standards
2.5 kV
IEC 60255-26
2.5 kV
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge
IEC 60255-26
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.3
4 kV
150-300 V
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
Test
Reference standards
1000 A/m, 3 s
100 A/m, cont.
IEC 61000-4-8
IEC 60255-26
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
10 V, 0.15-80 MHz
IEC 60255-26
Dips:
40% /200 ms
70% /500 ms
Interruptions:
0-50 ms: No restart
0 s: Correct behaviour at
power down
IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission
30-1000 MHz
IEC 60255-26
Conducted emission
0.15-30 MHz
IEC 60255-26
Table 971:
Test
Reference standard
Dielectric test
IEC 60255-27
IEC 60255-27
Insulation resistance
>100 M at 500V DC
IEC 60255-27
Table 972:
Test
Dielectric test
IEEE 421.3
IEC 60255-27
IEC 60664-1
Reference standard
>100 M at 500V DC
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
IEC 60255-27
IEC 60255-27
1381
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
Table 973:
Mechanical tests
Test
Reference standards
IEC 60255-21-1
IEC 60255-21-1
IEC 60255-21-2
IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test
REG670 and REX060
REX061 and REX062
IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test
REG670 and REX060
REX061 and REX062
IEC 60255-21-3
Table 974:
Cold test
operation
storage
16 h at -25C
16 h at -40C
16 h at +70C
16 h at +85C
240 h at +40C
humidity 93%
6 cycles at +25 to +55C
humidity 93-95%
cyclic
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1
Class 2
Class 2
Class 2 extended
Reference standard
IEC 60068-2-1
IEC 60068-2-2
IEC 60068-2-78
IEC 60068-2-30
Influencing factors
Table 975:
Test
1382
Class 2
Environmental tests
Test
22.5.3
Requirements
Influence
20% of EL
0.01% /%
15% of EL
0.01% /%
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
Table 976:
Temperature influence
Test
Influence
-25 C to +55C
0.02% /C
Storage temperature
-40 C to +85C
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1383
1384
Section 23
Labels
Section 23
Labels
23.1
Labels on IED
Front view of IED
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
xx06000574.ep
IEC06000574 V1 EN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1385
Section 23
Labels
Manufacturer
Transformer designations
IEC06000577-CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC V1 EN
IEC06000576-POS-NO V1 EN
1386
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 23
Labels
1
2
3
4
en06000573.ep
IEC06000573 V1 EN
Warning label
Caution label
IEC06000575 V1 EN
Warning label
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1387
Section 23
Labels
23.2
IEC11000226 V1 EN
1a
1b
1c
1d
Manufacturer
1a
1b
1c
1d
IEC11000233-1-en.vsd
IEC11000233 V1 EN
1388
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 23
Labels
IEC11000227 V1 EN
Warning label
Caution label
ESD label
Warning label
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1389
Section 23
Labels
IEC11000229 V1 EN
Ordering number
IEC11000228 V1 EN
1390
Warning label
Caution label
ESD label
Warning label
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 23
Labels
IEC11000231 V1 EN
Ordering number
IEC11000230 V1 EN
Warning label
Caution label
ESD label
Warning label
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1391
1392
Section 24
Connection diagrams
Section 24
Connection diagrams
The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as part of
the product delivery.
The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.
Connection diagrams for Customized products
Connection diagram, 670 series 2.1 1MRK002802-AF
Connection diagrams for Injection equipment
Connection diagram, Injection unit REX060 1MRK002501-BA
Connection diagram, Generator protection REG670 with injection unit REX060
1MRK002504-BA
Connection diagram, Injection unit REX060 and coupling capacitor unit REX061
1MRK002504-CA
Connection diagram, Injection unit REX060 and optional shunt resistor unit REX062
1MRK002504-DA
Connection diagram, Coupling capacitor unit REX061 1MRK002551-BA
Connection diagram, Shunt resistor unit REX062 1MRK002556-BA
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1393
1394
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Section 25
25.1
Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at different
points in the network different time delays for the different protections are normally used.
The simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more sophisticated applications
current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple
application with three overcurrent protections operating in series.
IPickup
IPickup
IPickup
xx05000129_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000129 V1 EN
Figure 632:
Time
Stage 2
Stage 2
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Fault point
position
en05000130.vsd
IEC05000130 V1 EN
Figure 633:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1395
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Time
Fault point
position
en05000131.vsd
IEC05000131 V1 EN
Figure 634:
The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time and
still assure the selectivity between protections.
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following
factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:
1396
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A1
B1
51
51
Feeder
Time axis
t=0
t=t1
t=t2
t=t3
en05000132_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000132 V1 EN
Figure 635:
where:
t=0
t=t1
is Protection B1 trips
t=t2
is Breaker at B1 opens
t=t3
is Protection A1 resets
In the case protection B1 shall trip without any intentional delay (instantaneous). When
the fault occurs the protections pickup to detect the fault current. After the time t1 the
protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its delay
timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between the two
protections. There is a possibility that A1 will pickup before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit
breaker. At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the
fault current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults.
The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the
timer of protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, that is the timer is
stopped.
In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when the
current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be
minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed
reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following applications:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1397
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults, picks up
and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the release
function.
25.2
Principle of operation
25.2.1
Mode of operation
The function can trip in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse time mode.
For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are
available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs: p, A,
B, C pr, tr, and cr.
Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.
If current in any phase exceeds the set pickup current value (here internal signal
pickupValue), a timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started. The
component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level
used in timing calculations.
In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached or
until the current drops below the reset value (pickup value minus the hysteresis) and the
reset time has elapsed.
For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are chosen.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 200.
1398
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A
t [s ] =
P
Pickupn
-C
+ B td
(Equation 200)
EQUATION1640 V1 EN
where:
p, A, B, C
Pickupn
td
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set
pickup level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:
( top - B td ) Pickupn
-C
= A td
(Equation 201)
EQUATION1642 V1 EN
where:
top
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to
equation 202, in addition to the constant time delay:
t
Pickupn
0
- C dt A td
EQUATION1643 V1 EN
(Equation 202)
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1399
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
i ( j ) P
- C A td
Pickupn
j =1
Dt
(Equation 203)
EQUATION1644 V1 EN
where:
j=1
is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected,
that is, when
i
Pickupn
>1
EQUATION1646 V1 EN
Dt
is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time
equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j)
For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC and
ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 636.
1400
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Operate
time
tMin
Current
IMin
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
IEC05000133 V2 EN
Figure 636:
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set to
the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve for
measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operating time
value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two additional
inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.
The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA
relay RI. The curve is described by equation 205:
td
t [s ] =
0.339 - 0.235 Pickupn
i
(Equation 205)
EQUATION1647 V1 EN
where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n
td
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1401
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection
RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual
ground-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive ground faults. The
curve is described by equation 206:
td Pickupn
[ ]
t s = 5.8 - 1.35 ln
(Equation 206)
EQUATION1648 V1 EN
where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n,
td
If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse time
curve according to the general equation 207.
A
t [s ] =
P
Pickupn
-C
+ B td
(Equation 207)
EQUATION1640 V1 EN
Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the possibility to
choose between three different reset time-lags.
Instantaneous Reset
IEC Reset
ANSI Reset.
If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops
below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis.
If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current drops
below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis.
If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault
clearance (when the current drops below the pickup current level minus the hysteresis).
The timer will reset according to equation 208.
1402
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
tr
td
t [s] =
i 2
-1
pickupn
(Equation 208)
ANSIEQUATION1197 V1 EN
where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.
The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the choice
of time delay characteristic.
For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are instantaneous
and IEC constant time reset.
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are
available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset time.
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC set constant time reset).
For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current
dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be
given, see equation 209:
tr
td
t [s] =
i pr
- cr
pickupn
(Equation 209)
ANSIEQUATION1198 V1 EN
For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the trip time of
the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time
delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is important to set
the definite time delay for that stage to zero.
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1403
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
25.3
Inverse characteristics
Table 977:
Function
Range or value
Operating characteristic:
t =
A
P
( I - 1)
0.10 td 3.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
Accuracy
ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
2.0% or 40 ms
whichever is greater
+ B td
EQUATION1651 V1 EN
Reset characteristic:
t =
(I
tr
2
td
-1
EQUATION1652 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
1404
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Table 978:
Function
Range or value
Operating characteristic:
t =
A
P
td
( I - 1)
0.10 td 3.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 2.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
greater
EQUATION1653 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=80.0, P=2.0
A=0.05, P=0.04
A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic
Trip characteristic:
t =
A
P
(I - C )
+ B td
EQUATION1654 V1 EN
Reset characteristic:
t =
(I
TR
PR
- CR
td
EQUATION1655 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 979:
Function
Range or value
t =
0.339 -
0.236
0.10 td 3.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 2.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
greater
td
EQUATION1656 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
I
td
EQUATION1657 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1405
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Table 980:
Function
Range or value
Operating characteristic:
t =
A
P
( I - 1)
Accuracy
ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms
whichever is greater
+ B td
EQUATION1651 V1 EN
Reset characteristic:
t =
(I
tr
2
td
-1
EQUATION1652 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
1406
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Table 981:
Function
Range or value
Operating characteristic:
t =
A
P
td
( I - 1)
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
greater
EQUATION1653 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=80.0, P=2.0
A=0.05, P=0.04
A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic
Operate characteristic:
t =
A
P
(I - C )
+ B td
EQUATION1654 V1 EN
Reset characteristic:
t =
(I
TR
PR
- CR
td
EQUATION1655 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1407
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Table 982:
Function
Range or value
t =
0.339 -
0.236
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
greater
td
EQUATION1656 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
td
I
EQUATION1657 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 983:
ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power
protection
Function
Range or value
Operating characteristic:
t =
A
P
( I - 1)
0.10 k 2.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
Accuracy
ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 160 ms
whichever is greater
+ B td
EQUATION1651 V1 EN
Reset characteristic:
t =
(I
tr
2
td
-1
EQUATION1652 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
1408
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Table 984:
IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power
protection
Function
Range or value
Operating characteristic:
t =
A
P
td
( I - 1)
0.10 k 2.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 160 ms whichever is
greater
EQUATION1653 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=80.0, P=2.0
A=0.05, P=0.04
A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic
Trip characteristic:
t =
A
P
(I - C )
+ B td
EQUATION1654 V1 EN
Reset characteristic:
t =
(I
TR
PR
- CR
td
EQUATION1655 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1409
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Table 985:
RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent
and power protection
Function
Range or value
t =
0.339 -
0.236
0.10 k 2.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 160 ms whichever is
greater
td
EQUATION1656 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
td
I
EQUATION1657 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 986:
ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function
Range or value
Operating characteristic:
t =
A
P
( I - 1)
Accuracy
ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms
whichever is greater
+ B td
EQUATION1651 V1 EN
Reset characteristic:
t =
(I
tr
2
td
-1
EQUATION1652 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
1410
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Table 987:
IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function
Operating characteristic:
t =
Range or value
td = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01
A
P
td
( I - 1)
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
greater
EQUATION1653 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=80.0, P=2.0
A=0.05, P=0.04
A=120, P=1.0
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1411
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Table 988:
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Accuracy
5.0% or 45 ms
whichever is greater
td
V - VPickup
VPickup
EQUATION1661 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Type B curve:
t =
td 480
V VPickup
0.5
32
VPickup
+ 0.035
2.0
EQUATION1662 V2 EN
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Type C curve:
t =
td 480
V VPickup
0.5
32
VPickup
3.0
+ 0.035
EQUATION1663 V2 EN
Programmable curve:
t =
td A
V - VPickup
B
VPickup
EQUATION1664 V1 EN
1412
-C
+D
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Table 989:
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Accuracy
5.0% or 45 ms
whichever is greater
td
VPickup - V
VPickup
EQUATION1658 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
Type B curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
td 480
VPickup - V
32
VPickup
- 0.5
2.0
+ 0.055
EQUATION1659 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
Programmable curve:
t =
td A
VPickup - V
B
VPickup
EQUATION1660 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
+D
P
-C
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1413
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
Table 990:
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Accuracy
5.0% or 45 ms
whichever is greater
td
V - VPickup
VPickup
EQUATION1661 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Type B curve:
t =
td 480
V VPickup
0.5
32
VPickup
+ 0.035
2.0
EQUATION1662 V2 EN
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Type C curve:
t =
td 480
V VPickup
0.5
32
VPickup
3.0
+ 0.035
EQUATION1663 V2 EN
Programmable curve:
t =
td A
V - VPickup
B
VPickup
EQUATION1664 V1 EN
1414
-C
+D
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070750 V2 EN
Figure 637:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1415
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070751 V2 EN
Figure 638:
1416
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070752 V2 EN
Figure 639:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1417
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070753 V2 EN
Figure 640:
1418
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070817 V2 EN
Figure 641:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1419
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070818 V2 EN
Figure 642:
1420
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070819 V2 EN
Figure 643:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1421
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070820 V2 EN
Figure 644:
1422
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070821 V2 EN
Figure 645:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1423
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070822 V2 EN
Figure 646:
1424
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070823 V2 EN
Figure 647:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1425
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070824 V2 EN
Figure 648:
1426
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070825 V2 EN
Figure 649:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1427
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070826 V2 EN
Figure 650:
1428
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
A070827 V2 EN
Figure 651:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1429
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN
Figure 652:
1430
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN
Figure 653:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1431
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN
Figure 654:
1432
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN
Figure 655:
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1433
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN
Figure 656:
1434
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 26
Glossary
Section 26
Glossary
26.1
Glossary
AC
Alternating current
ACC
Actual channel
ACT
A/D converter
Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS
ADM
AI
Analog input
ANSI
AR
Autoreclosing
ASCT
ASD
ASDU
AWG
BBP
Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5
BFP
BI
Binary input
BIM
BOM
BOS
BR
BS
British Standards
BSR
BST
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1435
Section 26
Glossary
1436
C37.94
CAN
CB
Circuit breaker
CBM
CCITT
CCM
CCVT
Class C
CMPPS
CMT
CO cycle
Close-open cycle
Codirectional
COM
Command
COMTRADE
Contra-directional
COT
Cause of transmission
CPU
CR
Carrier receive
CRC
CROB
CS
Carrier send
CT
Current transformer
CU
Communication unit
CVT or CCVT
DAR
Delayed autoreclosing
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Section 26
Glossary
DARPA
DBDL
DBLL
DC
Direct current
DFC
DFT
DHCP
DIP-switch
DI
Digital input
DLLB
DNP
DR
Disturbance recorder
DRAM
DRH
DSP
DTT
EHV network
EIA
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF
Electromotive force
EMI
Electromagnetic interference
EnFP
EPA
ESD
Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA
FAN
Fault number
FCB
FOX 20
FOX 512/515
Access multiplexer
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1437
Section 26
Glossary
FOX 6Plus
FTP
FUN
Function type
G.703
GCM
GDE
GI
GIS
Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE
GPS
GSAL
GSE
HDLC protocol
1438
HMI
Human-machine interface
HSAR
HV
High-voltage
HVDC
ICT
IDBS
IEC
IEC 60044-6
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 61850
IEC 6185081
IEEE
Section 26
Glossary
IEEE 802.12
IEEE P1386.1
IEEE 1686
IED
I-GIS
IOM
Instance
IP
IP 20
IP 40
Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level IP40Protected against solid foreign objects of 1mm diameter and
greater.
IP 54
IRF
IRIG-B:
ITU
LAN
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1439
Section 26
Glossary
1440
LIB 520
LCD
LDCM
LDD
LED
Light-emitting diode
LNT
LON
MCB
MCM
MIM
Milli-ampere module
MPM
MVAL
Value of measurement
MVB
NCC
NOF
NUM
Numerical module
OCO cycle
Open-close-open cycle
OCP
Overcurrent protection
OEM
OLTC
OTEV
OV
Overvoltage
Overreach
PCI
PCM
PCM600
PC-MIP
Section 26
Glossary
PMC
POR
Permissive overreach
POTT
Process bus
Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity
to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM
PST
PT ratio
PUTT
RASC
RCA
RISC
RMS value
RS422
RS485
RTC
Real-time clock
RTU
SA
Substation Automation
SBO
Select-before-operate
SC
SCL
SCS
SCADA
SCT
SDU
SLM
SMA connector
SMT
SMS
SNTP
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1441
Section 26
Glossary
Status of fault
SPA
SRY
ST
Starpoint
SVC
TC
Trip coil
TCS
TCP
TCP/IP
TEF
TLS
TM
TNC connector
TP
1442
TRM
TYP
Type identification
UMT
Underreach
Section 26
Glossary
UV
Undervoltage
WEI
VT
Voltage transformer
X.21
3IO
3VO
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
1443
1444
1445
Note:
We reserve the right to make technical changes or modify the
contents of this document without prior notice. ABB AB does
not accept any responsibility whatsoever for potential errors or
possible lack of information in this document.
We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject matter
and illustrations contained herein. Any reproduction,
disclosure to third parties or utilization of its contents in whole
or in part is forbidden without prior written consent of ABB AB.
Contact us